Novembre 2012 LES PRODUITS TEST ET MESURE - PDF - Farnell Element 14 - Revenir à l'accueil

Branding Farnell element14 (France)

 

Farnell Element 14 :

Miniature

Everything You Need To Know About Arduino

Miniature

Tutorial 01 for Arduino: Getting Acquainted with Arduino

Miniature

The Cube® 3D Printer

Miniature

What's easier- DIY Dentistry or our new our website features?

 

Miniature

Ben Heck's Getting Started with the BeagleBone Black Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Home-Brew Solder Reflow Oven 2.0 Trailer

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 3 - Online with Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Discover Simulink Promo -- Exclusive element14 Webinar

Miniature

Ben Heck's TV Proximity Sensor Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's PlayStation 4 Teardown Trailer

See the trailer for the next exciting episode of The Ben Heck show. Check back on Friday to be among the first to see the exclusive full show on element…

Miniature

Get Started with Pi Episode 4 - Your First Raspberry Pi Project

Connect your Raspberry Pi to a breadboard, download some code and create a push-button audio play project.

Miniature

Ben Heck Anti-Pickpocket Wallet Trailer

Miniature

Molex Earphones - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tripp Lite Surge Protector - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Microchip ChipKIT Pi - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Beagle Bone Black - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M E26, LED Lamps - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M Colored Duct Tape - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Tenma Soldering Station - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Duratool Screwdriver Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Cubify 3D Cube - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Bud Boardganizer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Starter Kit - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Fluke 323 True-rms Clamp Meter - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Dymo RHINO 6000 Label Printer - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

3M LED Advanced Lights A-19 - The 14 Holiday Products of Newark element14 Promotion

Miniature

Innovative LPS Resistor Features Very High Power Dissipation

Miniature

Charge Injection Evaluation Board for DG508B Multiplexer Demo

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 2

Miniature

Introducing element14 TV

Miniature

Ben Heck Time to Meet Your Maker Trailer

Miniature

Détecteur de composants

Miniature

Recherche intégrée

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar Trailer Part 1

Miniature

Ben Builds an Accessibility Guitar - Part 2 Trailer

Miniature

PiFace Control and Display Introduction

Miniature

Flashmob Farnell

Miniature

Express Yourself in 3D with Cube 3D Printers from Newark element14

Miniature

Farnell YouTube Channel Move

Miniature

Farnell: Design with the best

Miniature

French Farnell Quest

Miniature

Altera - 3 Ways to Quickly Adapt to Changing Ethernet Protocols

Miniature

Cy-Net3 Network Module

Miniature

MC AT - Professional and Precision Series Thin Film Chip Resistors

Miniature

Solderless LED Connector

Miniature

PSA-T Series Spectrum Analyser: PSA1301T/ PSA2701T

Miniature

3-axis Universal Motion Controller For Stepper Motor Drivers: TMC429

Miniature

Voltage Level Translation

Puce électronique / Microchip :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 2 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 3 of 3

Miniature

Microchip - Introduction to mTouch Capacitive Touch Sensing Part 1 of 3

Sans fil - Wireless :

Miniature

Microchip - 8-bit Wireless Development Kit

Miniature

Wireless Power Solutions - Wurth Electronics, Texas Instruments, CadSoft and element14

Miniature

Analog Devices - Remote Water Quality Monitoring via a Low Power, Wireless Network

Texas instrument :

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Automotive LED Headlights

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Digital Power Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Sensor Solutions

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Wireless Pen Input Demo (Mobile World Congress)

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Automation System Components

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x - Industry's first 10-GHz fixed/floating point DSP

Miniature

Texas Instruments - TMS320C66x KeyStone Multicore Architecture

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Industrial Interfaces

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Concerto™ MCUs - Connectivity without compromise

Miniature

Texas Instruments - Stellaris Robot Chronos

Miniature

Texas Instruments - DRV8412-C2-KIT, Brushed DC and Stepper Motor Control Kit

Ordinateurs :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Connect Raspberry Pi to Car Computer

Miniature

Ben's Portable Raspberry Pi Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ben's Raspberry Pi Portable Computer Trailer 2

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pocket Computer Trailer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Atari Computer

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Using Computer Monitors for External Displays

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Partnership with BBC Computer Literacy Project - Answers from co-founder Eben Upton

Miniature

Installing RaspBMC on your Raspberry Pi with the Farnell element14 Accessory kit

Miniature

Raspberry Pi Served - Joey Hudy

Miniature

Happy Birthday Raspberry Pi

Miniature

Raspberry Pi board B product overview

Logiciels :

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Opensource or Free CAD Software

Miniature

Tektronix FPGAView™ software makes debugging of FPGAs faster than ever!

Miniature

Ask Ben Heck - Best Open-Source Schematic Capture and PCB Layout Software

Miniature

Introduction to Cadsoft EAGLE PCB Design Software in Chinese

Miniature

Altera - Developing Software for Embedded Systems on FPGAs

Tutoriels :

Miniature

Ben Heck The Great Glue Gun Trailer Part 1

Miniature

the knode tutorial - element14

Miniature

Ben's Autodesk 123D Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben's CadSoft EAGLE Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Soldering Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's AVR Dev Board tutorial

Miniature

Ben Heck's Pinball Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

Ben Heck's Interface Tutorial Trailer

Miniature

First Stage with Python and PiFace Digital

Miniature

Cypress - Getting Started with PSoC® 3 - Part 2

Miniature

Energy Harvesting Challenge

Miniature

New Features of CadSoft EAGLE v6

Documents PDF :

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 19-Mar-2014 18:04  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-USB1T11A-PDF..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OSLON-SSL-Ce..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Atmel-ATmega..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-PBSS5160T-60..> 19-Mar-2014 18:03  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICROCHIP-PI..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Ed.081002-DA..> 19-Mar-2014 18:02  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Instructions..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Serie-PicoSc..> 19-Mar-2014 18:01  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ECO-Series-T..> 19-Mar-2014 18:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-F42202-PDF.htm  19-Mar-2014 18:00  2.5M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-propose-plus..> 11-Mar-2014 08:19  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Haute-vitess..> 11-Mar-2014 08:17  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Controle-de-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:16  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-TEA1703T..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-XPS-MC16-XPS..> 11-Mar-2014 08:15  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MC21605-PDF.htm 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-WetTantalum-..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ES2333-PDF.htm  11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SB175-Connec..> 11-Mar-2014 08:14  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Cannon-ZD-PD..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-YAGEO-DATA-S..> 11-Mar-2014 08:13  2.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ATMEL-8-bit-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:55  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PCA9555 ..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MICREL-KSZ88..> 11-Mar-2014 07:54  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Microship-PI..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-EPCOS-Sample..> 11-Mar-2014 07:53  2.2M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-BT136-60..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NTE_SEMICOND..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-L-efficacite..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-LUXEON-Guide..> 11-Mar-2014 07:52  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Realiser-un-..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-SOT-23-Multi..> 11-Mar-2014 07:51  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-ZigBee-ou-le..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Les-derniers..> 11-Mar-2014 07:50  2.3M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Conception-d..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Puissance-ut..> 11-Mar-2014 07:49  2.4M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43160-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-87439-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-43020-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PBSS9110..> 10-Mar-2014 17:21  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-TEKTRONIX-DP..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-uC-OS-III-Br..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.0M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-CIRRUS-LOGIC..> 10-Mar-2014 17:20  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN7R0-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  2.1M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-MOLEX-39-00-..> 10-Mar-2014 17:19  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-manual-bus-p..> 10-Mar-2014 16:29  1.9M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Molex-Crimp-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-The-essentia..> 10-Mar-2014 16:27  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-OMRON-Master..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Proskit-SS-3..> 10-Mar-2014 16:26  1.8M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-BYV79E-serie..> 10-Mar-2014 16:19  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-74VHC126..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PSMN1R7-..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-FICHE-DE-DON..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.6M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-HUNTSMAN-Adv..> 10-Mar-2014 16:17  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-NXP-PMBFJ620..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Pico-Spox-Wi..> 10-Mar-2014 16:16  1.7M  

[TXT]

 Farnell-Tektronix-AC..> 10-Mar-2014 15:52  1.5M

 

OUTILS BONUS, FONCTIONS SOUDAGE HAUTE PUISSANCE VOIR PAGES 30-46 LIVRAISON LE LENDEMAIN PAS DE MINIMUM DE COMMANDE NOUVEAUX PRODUITS COMMANDEZ DÈS MAINTENANT ! Novembre 2012 TM farnell.com FAR-FRTM1112 DE VOTRE SOURCE EXHAUSTIVE LES PRODUITS TEST ET MESURE Un service de première qualité et des prix compétitifs, quel que soit le montant de votre commande Commander avec Farnell element14 ne peut pas être plus simple FR.FARNELL.COM VENTES : 04 74 68 99 99 Du lundi au vendredi, de 9h à 19h FAX : 04 74 68 99 90 VENTES@FARNELL.COM ADRESSE Farnell, 81-83 rue Henri Depagneux, 69400 Limas CRÉDIT CLIENTS Appel : 04 74 68 99 77 (Du lundi au vendredi, de 9h à 19h) Fax : 04 74 68 99 70 PAGE. CONTACTEZ-NOUS SOMMAIRE COMMANDEZ MAINTENANT FR.FARNELL.COM 2-7 Tektronix 9-11 Keithley 12-16 Agilent 17-20 Tenma 21 TTI 22 Lecroy 23 Pico 24-28 Fluke 30-33 34-35 36-37 38-46 SOUDAGE OUTILS RUBANS ALIMENTATIONS TEST ET MESURES Ce multimètre est un multimètre numérique portable très fiable. Il dispose d’un grand écran LCD 3,5" qui indique à l’utilisateur qu’elle fiche Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Commande 1+ SILV100 DMM4k Series, PWS2k Series, PWS, 4000 Series, TDS1K EDU, TPP0500 & TPP1k 207-0366 161.00 SILV200 DMM4k Series, PWS2k Series, PWS, 4000 Series, TDS1K EDU, TPP0500 & TPP1k 207-0367 274.00 SILV400 DMM4k Series, PWS2k Series, PWS, 4000 Series, TDS1K EDU, TPP0500 & TPP1k 207-0368 434.00 SILV600 DMM4k Series, PWS2k Series, PWS, 4000 Series, TDS1K EDU, TPP0500 & TPP1k 207-0369 648.00 SILV900 DMM4k Series, PWS2k Series, PWS, 4000 Series, TDS1K EDU, TPP0500 & TPP1k 207-0370 970.00 est connecté à un câble. L’appareil est livré complet avec cordons de test et mode d’emploi. Programme de maintenance Silver Care 72-9385 Résistance 20Mohm Courant AC 20A Température -40°C à +1000°C Courant DC 20A Affichage 1999 Tension AC 750V Alimentation Pile 9V 1000V Taille LCD 60 x 54mm Capacité 100μF Poids 350g Fréquence 20kHz Dimensions 179 x 88 x 39mm Minimiser les temps d’arrêt avec le programme de maintenance Silver Care de Tektronix. Un simple appel Réf Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande + 72-9385 206-0271 – – téléphonique permet de commencer votre programme de maintenance - sans devis, sans commandes, et sans délais d’approbation. Avec le programme Silver Care votre instrument de mesure est prioritaire dans la file d’attente au dépôt, devant les demande de réparations classiques. Ì Traitement rapide Ì Le programme couvre toutes les pièces, la main d’oeuvre, et les frais de transports Ì Vos appareils sont retournés avec leurs performances d’origine Ì Garantie 90 jours Multimètre Numérique Portable Contenu du Kit : Multimètre, cordon de test, piles, mode d’emploi en Anglais, sonde de Température de contact, embase polyvalente et étui. Ì Comprend les réglages et la calibration pour fournir des spécifications précises Ì Test de diode Ì Buzzer de Continuité Ì Gel de l’affichage Ì Indicateur de pile faible Ì Transistor Ì Nombreuses icones sur écran Ì Mode veille 30.60 farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 3 Tektronix Applications Ì Conception et débuggage numérique Ì Service et installation Video Ì Conception d’alimentation Ì Education et Formation Ì Test de Telecommunications Ì Test de Fabrication Ì Banc de test général Code Commande 1554155 1554156 1554157 1554158 1554159 1554160 Réf. Fab. TDS3012C TDS3054C TDS3032C TDS3034C TDS3052C TDS3054C Bande passante 100MHz 500MHz 300MHz 300 500MHz 500MHz Nbre de voies 2 4 2 4 2 4 Echantillonnage 1.25Géch./s 5Géch/s 2.5Géch./s 2.5Géch./s 5Géch./s 5Géch/s Base de temps 4ns-20s 1ns-20s 2ns-10s 2ns-20s 1ns-20s 1ns-20s Précision base de temps 20ppm 20ppm 20ppm 20ppm 20ppm 20ppm Limite bande passante 20MHz 20MHz 20, 150MHz 20, 150MHz 20, 150MHz 20, 150MHz TDS2001C TDS2002C TDS2004C TDS2012C TDS2014C TDS2022C TDS2024C Bande passante 50 MHz 70 MHz 70 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 200 MHz Nbre de voies 2 2 4 2 4 2 4 Taux d’échantillonnage sur chaque voie 500 Méch/s 1.0 Géch/s 1.0 Géch/s 2.0 Géch/s 2.0 Géch/s 2.0 Géch/s 2.0 Géch/s Longueur d’enregistrement 2.5k points à toute base de temps pour tous les modèles Résolution verticale 8 bits Sensibilité verticale 2 mV à 5 V/div sur tous les modèles avec un réglage calibré précis Limite bande passante 20 MHz pour tous les modèles Couplage d’entrée AC, DC, GND sur tous les modèles Gamme base temps 5 ns à 50 s/div 2.5 ns à 50 s/div Code Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ Oscilloscopes TDS1001B 40 MHz, 2 voies, Mono 122-5083 637.60 TDS1002B 60 MHz, 2 voies, Mono 122-5084 840.00 TDS1012B 100 MHz, 2 voies, Mono 122-5085 968.00 Oscilloscopes numériques Caractéristiques faciles à utiliser: Ì 16 mesures automatiques et analyse FFT pour une analyse simplifiée des formes d’onde Ì Gamme automatique, Autoset et Signal Ì Aide avec contexte sensitif, intégrée Ì Wizard de vérification de sonde Ì Interface utilisateur multilingues Ì Affichage TFT couleur actif 5.7 in. (144 mm) Ì Port hôte USB 2.0 sur la face avant pour une sauvegarde automatique et rapide, une impression, et une possibilité de connexion d’un clavier USB TDS 2000C Séries TDS1000B et 2000B Les oscilloscopes à mémoire numérique associent performance et convivialité. Avec une bande passante allant jusqu’à 200 MHz et un taux d’échantillonnage de 2 Géch/s max., les oscilloscopes TDS1000B et TDS2000B permettent une acquisition précise en temps réel maximum de leur bande passante, la même longueur d’enregistrement quels que soient les réglages de base de temps, des déclenchements évolués pour isoler les signaux intéressants et 11 mesures automatiques en standard sur tous les modèles. Les FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) et les fonctions mathématiques d’addition, de Oscilloscopes DPO - Séries TDS3000C Caractéristiques clés: Ì Taux d’échantillonnage jusqu’à 2 Géch/s sur toutes les voies Ì Longueur d’enregistrement de 2.5k points sur toutes les voies Ì Fonction de déclenchement avancé comprenant largeur d’impulsion et sélection de ligne Ì Déclenchement vidéo soustraction, de multiplication permettent d’analyser, de caractériser et de réparer les circuits. L’interface utilisateur simple disposant de commandes de style analogique classiques facilite l’utilisation de ces instruments, réduit le temps d’apprentissage et augmente l’efficacité. Avec des portes USB hôte et périphérique qui permettent le stockage de données amovibles, une connectivité facile pour les PC et l’impression directe. Ì Port Ethernet intégré Ì Commande à distance par le Web avec e*Scope™ Ì Détection automatique des anomalies du signal avec WaveAlert™ Ì Précision de la base de temps de 20ppm Ì Fonctions FFT et Trigger étendue Ì Fonctions trigger avancées, schémas logiques, état, déclenchement sur front, impulsions et temps de montée Ì Affichage plus clair avec un angle d’affichage plus large Ì Test de limite de forme d’ondes intégré Ì Fonction de sauvegarde automatique et étendue des données Ì Nouvelles sondes avec une charge capacité la plus basse disponible et une tête compacte pour un test rapide de CI haute densité Ì Garantie Tektronix à durée illimitée l=326 H=158 P=229mm Poids = 2kg Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ TDS2001C 50 MHz, 2 voies, 500 Méch/s 184-0961 540.80 TDS2002C 70 MHz, 2 voies, 1 Géch/s 184-0962 656.00 TDS2004C 70 MHz, 4 voies, 1 Géch/s 184-0963 1000.00 TDS2012C 100 MHz, 2 voies, 2 Géch/s 184-0965 789.60 TDS2014C 100 MHz, 4 voies, 2 Géch/s 184-0966 1184.00 TDS2022C 200 MHz, 2 voies, 2 Géch/s 184-0967 1120.00 TDS2024C 200 MHz, 4 voies, 2 Géch/s 184-0968 1384.00 Accessoires 1+ TPP0101 Sonde passive, 100MHz 184-0969 58.00 TPP0201 Sonde passive, 200MHz 184-0970 72.00 TPP0101-PK10 Sonde passive, 100MHz, Paquet de 10 184-0971 527.00 TPP0201-PK10 Sonde passive, 200MHz, Paquet de 10 184-0972 644.00 Ì Bande passante 100, 300 et 500MHz Ì Echantillonnage jusqu’à 5 GS/s Ì 2 ou 4 voies Ì Ecran VGA LCD couleur Ì 25 mesures automatiques Ì Résolution verticale 9 bits Ì Interface utilisateur Multi-langues graphique QuickMenu facilitant l’utilisation Oscilloscope TDS2024 Les oscilloscopes de la série TDS3000C offrent une technologie d’acquisition du signal au phosphore numérique, la détection des anomalies automatique, l’accès à distance par le Web et 7 modules d’applications spécifiques dans un boîtier léger pouvant être utilisé sur batterie. La nouvelle série 3000C est équipée d’un port USB hôte afin que vous puissiez facilement stocker et transférer des informations de mesure sur votre PC. Cette série offre une multitude de fonctionnalités destinées aux utilisateurs qui veulent travailler sur la conception électronique, la production et l’entretien et la détection automatique d’anomalies avec WaveAlert™. WaveAlert™ permet facilement la détection, l’affichage et la capture des événements qui n’entrent pas dans les schémas répétitifs normaux d’activité de formes d’ondes et peut également être programmé pour obtenir un signal sonore, puis arrêtez l’acquisition et geler l’anomalie sur l’écran, enregistrer l’onde anormale sur une clé USB ou imprimer une copie de celui-ci. La dernière version de l’oscilloscope le plus populaire. Il comprend les fonctions améliorées suivantes: L’e*Scope™ permet le contrôle à distance via un navigateur Internet, ainsi que le partage de l’information et de la surveillance. Les fonctionnalités de l’e*Scope™ facilitent les contacts avec les techniciens de service chez leurs clients, répartis à distance par les équipes d’ingénierie. Une connexion Ethernet intégré est également fournie. Accessoires Logiciel TDSPCS1 OpenChoice Logiciel offrant une interface simple et puissante entre l’oscilloscope et le PC, permet à l’utilisateur d’importer et de manipuler les données capturées via l’oscilloscope. Module de communication TDS3GV + logiciel OpenChoice Offre des interfaces GPIB, VGA et RS-232 ainsi que le logiciel OpenChoice. Sonde active P6243 1GHz Sonde active 1GHz (avec cordon de 1.3m) à utiliser avec le TDS3064 pour améliorer ses caractéristiques. Modules Application pour analyse spécialisée Ì Module d’analyse avancé Ì Module de test de limite Ì Module de tes de masque Telecommunications Ì Module Video étendu Ì Module video numérique série Avec capacités de stockage USB farnell.com element14.com 4 TEST ET MESURE Tektronix MSO3012 MSO3014 MSO3032 MSO3034 MSO3054 DPO3012 DPO3014 DPO3032 DPO3034 DPO3052 DPO3054 Voies d’entrée 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 4 2 4 2 4 Bande passante analogique (-3 dB) 100MHz 100MHz 300MHz 300MHz 500MHz 500MHz Temps de montée 5 mV/div (typical) 3.5ns 3.5ns 1.17ns 1.17ns 700ps 700ps Les oscilloscopes à phosphore numérique (DPO) MSO2000 et DPO2000 disposent des performances et des outils essentiels pour afficher les signaux et obtenir des réponses rapidement. Les oscilloscopes de la gamme DPO2000 sont les premiers à fournir 1 M points de longueur d’enregistrement disponible sur toutes les voies, des options d’analyse, de décodage et de déclenchement en série, ainsi qu’un filtre passebas variable qui permet également de voir les Voies numériques du système vertical - tous les modèles MSO3000 Voies d’entrée 16 numériques (D15 à D0) Seuils seuil par jeu de 8 voies Sélections du seuil TTL, CMOS, ECL, PECL, ou défini par l’utilisateur Gamme de seuil définie par l’utilisateur -15 V à +25 V Tension d’entrée max. -20 V à +30 V détails du signal sur la totalité de la bande passante de l’oscilloscope, le tout dans un ensemble compact. Les oscilloscopes de la gamme MSO2000 intègrent 16 voies numériques, ce qui permet d’afficher et de corréler dans le temps des signaux analogiques et numériques sur un seul instrument. Cette intégration étend la fonctionnalité de déclenchement aux 20 voies, ce qui est idéal pour la mise au point des appareils mixtes analogiques et numériques. Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Voies Code Commande 1+ DPO3012 100MHz 2 185-6671 2620.00 DPO3014 100MHz 4 185-6672 3130.00 DPO3032 300MHz 2 185-6673 4940.00 DPO3034 300MHz 4 185-6675 5940.00 DPO3052 500MHz 2 185-6676 6660.00 DPO3054 500MHz 4 185-6677 8130.00 MSO3012 100MHz 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 185-6678 3720.00 MSO3014 100MHz 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 185-6679 4260.00 MSO2012 MSO2014 MSO2014 Système vertical: voies analogiques DPO2012 DPO2014 DPO2024 Voies d’entrée 2 4 4 Bande passante analogique* (-3 dB) 100 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz Temps de montée 3.5 ns 3.5 ns 2.1 ns Limites de la bande passante sur le matériel 20 MHz Couplage d’entrée AC, DC, GND Impédance d’entrée 1 MΩ ±2%, 11.5 pF ±2 pF Plage de sensibilité d’entrée 2 mV/div à 5 V/div Résolution verticale 8 bits Système horizontal: voies analogiques Taux d’échantillonnage max. (toutes voies) 1 Géch/s Largeur de signal de détection de crête min. 7.0 ns 3.5 ns Longueur d’enregistrement max. (toutes voies) 1 M points Plage base de temps 4 ns à 100 s 2 ns à 100 s Plage temps de retard de la base temps -10 div à 5000 s Plage de compensation voie par voie ±100 ns Précision base de temps ±25 ppm *La bande passante est de 20 MHz à 2 mV/div sur tous les modèles Oscilloscopes à signaux mixtes Avec une bande passante de 500MHz et un taux d’échantillonnage de 2.5Géch/s, les oscilloscopes de la série MSO/DPO3000 offrent des performances adaptées à la plupart des applications de tous les jours. Avec 20 voies, ce seul instrument permet d’analyser des signaux analogiques et numériques. Celles-ci combinées à une analyse de bus automatique en série et parallèle, à des contrôles innovants de Wave Longueur d’enregistrement10k points sur tous les modèles Résolution verticale 9 bits sur tous les modèles Sensibilité verticale/div 1mV à 10V sur tous les modèles Précision verticale +/-2% sur tous les modèles Tension d’entrée max. 150 Vrms CAT I sur tous les modèles (300 V CAT II avec sonde standard 10X) Gamme de position ± 5 div sur tous les modèles Couplage d’entrée AC, DC, GND sur tous les modèles Impédance d’entrée 1 MΩ en parallèle avec 13 pF ou 50Ω Affichage LCD couleur DPO2024 Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Oscilloscopes 100MHz, 2 Voies TDS3012C 155-4155 4530.00 100MHz, 4 Voies TDS3014C 155-4156 5540.00 300MHz, 2 Voies TDS3032C 155-4157 6680.00 300MHz, 4 Voies TDS3034C 155-4158 7950.00 500MHz, 2 Voies TDS3052C 155-4159 9630.00 500MHz, 4 Voies TDS3054C 155-4160 11400.00 Accessoires Module Communication+Openchoice TDS3GV 369-3880 682.00 Sonde active 1GHz P6243 207-433 966.00 Inspector et des mesures de puissance automatiques, la série MSO/DPO 3000 rend le débogage plus simple et plus rapide. DPO / MSO Caractéristiques clés: Fonctions faciles d’utilisation: Ì Contrôles Wave Inspector, offre une navigation facile et une recherche automatique des données Ì 29 mesures automatiques, et analyse FFT pour simplifier l’analyse Ì Interface sonde TekVPI compatible avec les sondes actives, différentielles et de courant pour une échelle et des unités automatiques Ì Affichage couleur écran large de 229 mm en WVGA Ì Compact (147 mm) et léger (4 kg) Garantie Fabricant de 3 Ans Caractéristiques et avantages des performances clés Ì Modèles avec bande passante de 100 MHz et 200 MHz Ì 2 ou 4 voies analogiques Ì 16 voies numériques (gamme MSO2000) Ì Fréquences d’échantillonnage allant jusqu’à 1 Géch./s sur toutes les voies Ì Longueur d’enregistrement de 1M points sur toutes les voies Ì Vitesse maximale d’acquisition de signaux : 5 000 signaux/s Ì Gamme de déclenchements évolués Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ P2221 Sonde passive, 1X/10X 200MHz 166-5109 113.00 RMD2000 Kit de montage en rack 166-5111 456.00 ACD2000 Valise de transport souple et capot de protection avant 166-5112 223.00 THDP0100 High Voltage Probe, 100X/1000X, 100MHz 207-2156 2640.00 THDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 50X/500X, 200MHz 207-2157 1540.00 TMDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 25X/250X, 200MHz 207-2158 1540.00 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ DPO2012 Oscilloscope, DPO 2 voies 100MHz 165-0367 1217.00 DPO2014 Oscilloscope, DPO 4 voies 100MHz 165-0368 1805.00 DPO2024 Oscilloscope, DPO 4 voies 200MHz 165-0369 2133.00 MSO2012 Oscilloscope, MSO 2 voies 100MHz 165-0370 1789.00 MSO2014 Oscilloscope, MSO 4 voies 100MHz 165-0371 2377.00 MSO2024 Oscilloscope, MSO 4 voies 200MHz 165-0372 2703.00 Accessoires 1+ DPO2AUTO Module de déclenchement et d’analyse pour automobile 166-5104 559.00 DPO2COMP Module de déclenchement et d’analyse pour informatique 166-5105 559.00 DPO2CONN Module port Ethernet et moniteur externe 166-5106 317.00 DPO2EMBD Module de déclenchement et d’analyse en série intégré 166-5107 559.00 Connectivité Ì Port hôte USB 2.0 sur faces avant et arrière pour une sauvegarde facile et rapide, une impression et pour une connexion d’un clavier USB Ì Port device USB 2.0 en face arrière pour une connexion facile à un PC ou à une imprimante en directe compatible PictBridge® Ì Port ethernet intégré 10/100 pour une connexion réseau et port sortie vidéo pour exporter l’affichage de l’oscilloscope sur un moniteur ou projecteur Déclenchement série et Analyse en option: Ì Déclenchement série automatique, décodage, et options de recherche pour I2C, SPI, CAN, LIN, RS-232/422/485/UART, et I2S/LJ/RJ/TDM Oscilloscopes à phosphore numérique Conception signal mixte et analyse (série MSO): Ì Déclenchement automatique, décodage, et recherche sur bus parallèles Ì Installation multi voies et gel du déclenchement Ì Acquisition haute vitesse MagniVu™, offre une résolution temps affinée 121.2 ps s ur les voies numériques Ì Analyse de puissance Ì Bandes passantes de 500, 300, 100 MHz Ì 2 et 4 voies analogiques Ì 16 voies numériques (série MSO) Ì Taux d’échantillonnage de 2.5 Géch/s sur toutes les voies Ì Longueur d’enregistrement de 5 Megapoints sur toutes les voies Ì Taux de capture de >50,000 wfm/s max. Ì Suite de déclenchements avancés Ì HDTV et analyse vidéo personnalisée Support d’applications en option farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 5 Tektronix Réf. Canaux Échantillonnage Durée d’enregistrement Canaux Fab. Bande passante Analogiques 1 voie 2 voies 4 voies 1 voie 2 voies 4 voies numériques DPO4034B 350MHz 4 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M – MSO4034B 350MHz 4 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M 16 DPO4054B 500MHz 4 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M – MSO4054B 500MHz 4 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M 16 DPO4102B 1GHz 2 5 GS/s 5 GS/s – 20 M 20 M – – MSO4102B 1GHz 2 5 GS/s 5 GS/s – 20 M 20 M – 16 DPO4104B 1GHz 4 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M – Réf. Canaux Échantillonnage Durée d’enregistrement Canaux MSO4104B 1GHz 4 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 20 M 20 M 20 M 16 DPO4102B-L 1GHz 2 5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s – 5 M 5 M – – MSO4102B-L 1GHz 2 5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s – 5 M 5 M – 16 DPO4104B-L 1GHz 4 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 5 M 5 M 5 M – MSO4104B-L 1GHz 4 5 GS/s 5 GS/s 2.5 GS/s 5 M 5 M 5 M 16 Canaux numériques système vertical - tous les modèles MSO4000B Canaux d’entrées 16 numériques (D15 à D0) Seuils Seuils par canal Sélection des seuils TTL, CMOS, ECL, PECL, défini par l’utilisateur Plage de seuils défini par l’utilisateur ±40 V Tension d’entrée Max. ±42 V crête Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Voies Code Commande 1+ MSO3032 300MHz 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 185-6680 6590.00 MSO3034 300MHz 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 185-6681 7970.00 MSO3054 500MHz 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 185-6682 10600.00 Modules d’application DPO3AUDIO Déclenchement série audio et module d’analyse 185-6683 851.00 DPO3AUTO Déclenchement série automobile et module d’analyse 185-6684 851.00 DPO3COMP Déclenchement série informatique et module d’analyse 185-6685 851.00 DPO3EMBD Déclenchement série embarqué et module d’analyse 185-6687 851.00 DPO3PWR Module d’analyse de puissance 185-6688 1060.00 DPO3VID Module de déclenchement vidéo personnalisée et HDTV 185-6689 538.00 DPO3AERO Aerospace Serial Triggering & Analysis Module 210-0026 851.00 DPO3FLEX Flexray Serial Triggering & Analysis Module 210-0027 851.00 THDP0100 High Voltage Probe, 100X/1000X, 100MHz 207-2156 2640.00 THDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 50X/500X, 200MHz 207-2157 1540.00 TMDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 25X/250X, 200MHz 207-2158 1540.00 Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Commande 1+ Durée d’enregistrement 20M points DPO4034B 350MHz 185-6690 8210.00 MSO4034B 350MHz 185-6693 10400.00 DPO4054B 500MHz 185-6691 10700.00 MSO4054B 500MHz 185-6694 13200.00 DPO4102B 1GHz 207-9664 9600.00 MSO4102B 1GHz 207-9661 12300.00 DPO4104B 1GHz 185-6692 13000.00 MSO4104B 1GHz 185-6695 16300.00 Durée d’enregistrement 5M points DPO4102B-L 1GHz 207-9666 7670.00 MSO4102B-L 1GHz 207-9662 9830.00 MSO4104B-L 1GHz 207-9660 12600.00 DPO4104B-L 1GHz 207-9663 10200.00 Modules application DPO4AUDIO Déclenchement série audio et module d’analyse 185-6696 1110.00 DPO4AUTO Déclenchement série automobile et module d’analyse 185-6697 1110.00 DPO4AUTOMAX Déclenchement série automobile étendu et module d’analyse 185-6699 3870.00 DPO4COMP Déclenchement série informatique et module d’analyse 185-6700 1110.00 DPO4EMBD Déclenchement série embarqué et module d’analyse 185-6701 1110.00 DPO4USB Déclenchement série USB et module d’analyse 185-6702 1240.00 DPO4PWR Module d’application d’analyse de puissance 185-6703 1380.00 DPO4VID Module de déclenchement vidéo personnalisée et HDTV 185-6705 682.00 DPO4ENET Déclenchement série ethernet et module d’analyse 185-6706 1240.00 DPO4AERO Déclenchement série aérospace et module d’analyse 185-6707 1240.00 DPO4LMT Module d’application de test de limite et de masque 185-6708 682.00 Accessoires P6516 16 Channel Probe (MSO4000 Series) 207-0531● 944.00 ACD4000B Valise souple 185-6709 232.00 HCTEK54 Valise robuste (nécessite ACD4000B) 185-6710 850.00 RMD5000 Kit de montage rack 185-6711 753.00 THDP0100 High Voltage Probe, 100X/1000X, 100MHz 207-2156 2640.00 THDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 50X/500X, 200MHz 207-2157 1540.00 TMDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 25X/250X, 200MHz 207-2158 1540.00 Oscilloscopes à Domaines Mixtes Oscilloscopes signaux mixtes Offrant jusqu’à 1 GHz de bande passante et un taux d’échantillonnage de 5Gs/ s, la série d’osciloscopes mixtes MSO/DPO4000B offre les performances dont vous avez besoin pour voir les détails du signal en évolution rapide. Avec jusqu’à 20 canaux, vous pouvez analyser des signaux analogiques et numériques avec un seul instrument. Combinez cela avec l’analyse Série MDO4000 de bus série et parallèle automatisée, les contrôles innovants Wave Inspector et les mesures de puissance automatisés. La série MSO/DPO4000B fournit des outils riches en fonctionnalités dont vous avez besoin pour simplifier et accélérer de débogage de vos conceptions les plus complexes. La série MDO4000, le premier et le seul oscilloscope au monde avec un analyseur de spectre intégré. Pour la première fois, vous pouvez capturer de manière corrélé les signaux Analogique, Numérique et RF, pour une vue complète de votre système. Voir en une seule vue les signaux des domaines temporel et fréquentiel. Voir le spectre RF à n’importe quel moment, pour voir l’évolution dans le temps et en fonction de l’état du système. Résoudre les conceptions les plus complexes, rapidement et efficacement, avec un oscilloscope aussi complet que votre conception. Spécifications de performances Ì Bande passante: 1 GHz, 500 MHz, 350 MHz Ì 4 canaux analogiques Ì 16 canaux numériques (Série MSO) Ì Jusqu’à 5Gech/s sur tous les canaux Ì Durée d’enregistrement 5 Megapoints (seulement version L) 20 Megapoints sur les autres modèles Ì Débit de capture de Waveform >50,000 wfm/s Max. Ì sondes de tension passives standards avec moins de 4pF de charge capacitive et 500 MHz ou 1GHz de BP analogique Ì Déclenchement avancés Simplicité d’utilisation Ì Contrôle Wave Inspector permet une navigation facile et une recherche automatique des donnée Waveform Ì 41 mesures automatisées, histogramme Waveform et anlyse FFTpour simplifier l’analyse des signaux Ì Interface de sonde TekVPI supporte les sondes Active, Différentielles, de courant pour calibrage automatique. Ì Afficheur couleur XGA 264mm Ì petit et leger (147mm de profondeur et pods de 5Kg Ì Sonde de tension passive avec 3.9 pF de charge et une bande passante analogique de 500 MHz ou 1 GHz. Ì Aquisition de signaux Analogique, Numérique et RF en un seul instrument Ì Les commandes du "Wave Inspector" permettent une navigation facile des données corrélées dans les domaines temporel et fréquentiel Ì Amplitude, Fréquence et Phase par rapport au temps de la forme d’onde dérivé de l’entrée du signal RF Ì Spectre de temps sélectionnable pour découvrir et analyser comment le spectre RF change dans le temps, même dans une acquisition arrêté Ì Panneau de commande avant dédié pour les tâches courantes Ì Marqueurs automatique de crête, pour identifier les fréquences et amplitudes des crêtes du spectre Ì Marqueurs manuel pour les mesures non-crête du signal Ì Type de mesure incluant : Normal, moyenne, Maximum, and Minimum Ì Type de détection : Crête , Moyenne, et échantillonage Ì Affichage Spectrographe offre une observation facile et clair sur les changements lent de phénomène RF Connectivité Ì 2 ports USB 2.0 (Hôte) sur la face avant et 2 autres à l’arrière permet facilement de sauvegarder des données, imprimer ou brancher un clavier. Ì 2 ports USB 2.0 (Device) à l’arrière pour se connecter sur un PC ou imprimer directement à partir d’une imprimante compatible PictBridge® Ì Port Ethernet 10/100/1000BASE-T pour connexion réseau et port vidéo pour afficher sur un vidéoprojecteur. Déclenchement série et analyse en option Ì Déclenchement automatique série, décodage et recherche pour I2C, SPI, USB, Ethernet, CAN, LIN, FlexRay, RS-232/422/485/UART, MIL-STD-1553, et I2S/LJ/RJ/ TDM Conception et analyse signaux mixtes (Série MSO) Ì Déclenchement automatique série, décodage et recherche sur buses parallèle Ì Réglage des seuils par canal Ì Réglage multicanaux et maintient du déclenchement Ì Acquisition haute vitesse MagniVu™ offre 60.6 ps de résolution de temps sur les canaux numériques Support d’application en option Ì analyse de puissance Ì Test Limite et Masque Ì Analyses vidéo HDTV ou autre Série MSO4000B, DPO4000B farnell.com element14.com 6 TEST ET MESURE Tektronix Modèle MDO4014-3 MDO4034-3 Canaux Analogiques 4 Canaux Numériques 16 Canaux RF 1 Bande passante 100 MHz 350MHz Gamme de fréquence RF 50kHz à 6GHz Temps de montée 3.5ns 1ns Echantillonnage (1 Canal) 2.5 GS/s Echantillonnage (2 Canaux) 2.5 GS/s Echantillonnage (4 Canaux) 2.5 GS/s Longueur d’enregistrement (1 Canal) 20M Longueur d’enregistrement (2 Canaux) 20M Longueur d’enregistrement (4 Canaux) 20M Affichage TFT Couleur 264mm Résolution verticale Analogique 8 bits Résolution verticale Numérique 1 bit Limite bande-passante 20 MHz 20MHz ou 250MHz Couplage d’entrée AC, DC Tension d’alimentation 100 à 240V Dimensions (HxLxP) 229 x 439 x 147mm Poids 5kg Entrées 2 Formats SD, HD, Dual Link, 3G (Option 3G) Caractéristiques Quad Tile Mesures Affichage des temps, analyse des données (Option DATA) contrôle Deux entrées, Gamut, audio Générateur Signaux audio et vidéo basiques Tension d’entrée 10.75V à 20V dc Dimensions 216 x 208 x 36mm Poids 1.8kg THS3014 THS3024 Bande passante 100MHz 200MHz Nbre de voie 4 Echantillonage Max. 2.5GSPS 5GSPS Longueur d’enregistrement 10000 points par voiel (mode Roll 30000) par voie Capture de donnée Enregistrement et lecture de signaux, mesure TrendPlot Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ WFM2200 210-0679 4800.00 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ THS3014 100MHz 4 Channel Oscilloscope 206-1362 3720.00 THS3024 200MHz 4 Channel Oscilloscope 206-1364 4210.00 Accessoires THP0301-Y 10X Passive Probe (Yellow) 206-1365 163.00 THP0301-B 10X Passive Probe (Blue) 206-1366 163.00 THP0301-M 10X Passive Probe (Magenta) 206-1367 163.00 THP0301-G 10X Passive Probe (Green) 206-1368 163.00 THSBAT Li-ion Rechargeable Battery 206-1369 279.00 HCHHS Hard Carry Case 206-1370 232.00 020-3085-00 Replacement Probes (Pk2) 206-4107 129.00 016-2050-00 Probe Carry Case 206-4109 52.00 Fab. Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Bande Passante Code Commande 1+ MDO4014-3 100MHz 221-1315 12570.50 MDO4034-3 350MHz 221-1316 17205.00 Modules d’applications DPO4AERO Déclenchement série aérospace et module d’analyse 185-6707 1240.00 DPO4AUDIO Déclenchement série audio et module d’analyse 185-6696 1110.00 DPO4AUTO Déclenchement série automobile et module d’analyse 185-6697 1110.00 DPO4AUTOMAX Déclenchement série automobile étendu et module d’analyse 185-6699 3870.00 DPO4COMP Déclenchement série informatique et module d’analyse 185-6700 1110.00 DPO4EMBD Déclenchement série embarqué et module d’analyse 185-6701 1110.00 DPO4ENET Déclenchement série ethernet et module d’analyse 185-6706 1240.00 DPO4USB Déclenchement série USB et module d’analyse 185-6702 1240.00 DPO4PWR Module d’application d’analyse de puissance 185-6703 1380.00 DPO4LMT Module d’application de test de limite et de masque 185-6708 682.00 DPO4VID Module de déclenchement vidéo personnalisée et HDTV 185-6705 682.00 Sondes TPP0500 Passive Voltage, 10X, 500MHz 185-6712 561.00 TPP0502 Passive Voltage, 2X, 500MHz 187-7505 544.00 TPP0850 Passive High Voltage, 50X, 2.5kV, 800MHz 187-7506 697.00 TPP1000 Passive Voltage, 10X, 1GHz 185-6713 848.00 TAP1500 Voltage, Single Ended, 1.5GHz 185-6714 2150.00 TCP0030 Current, AC/DC, 30A, 120MHz 185-6718 3100.00 TCP0150 Current, AC/DC, 150A, 20MHz 185-6719 3650.00 TDP0500 Differentail Voltage, ±42, 500MHz 185-6715 3070.00 TDP1000 Differentail, ±42, 1GHz 185-6717 4320.00 THDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 50X/500X, 200MHz 207-2157 1540.00 THDP0100 High Voltage Probe, 100X/1000X, 100MHz 207-2156 2640.00 TMDP0200 High Voltage Probe, 25X/250X, 200MHz 207-2158 1540.00 P5100A Passive High Voltage, 100X, 2.5kV, 500MHz 187-7504 418.00 P5200A Differential High Voltage, 1.3kV, 50MHz 187-7507 836.00 Accessoires TPA-BNC Adaptateur interface TekVPI™ 185-6721 442.00 SIGEXPTE Software 129-5628 592.00 TEK-USB-488 Adapter 129-5623 688.00 ACD4000B Valise souple 185-6709 232.00 HCTEK54 Valise robuste (nécessite ACD4000B) 185-6710 850.00 RMD5000 Kit de montage rack 185-6711 753.00 Réception d’un email d’information contenant le statut de votre commande ainsi que la date prévue de livraison sur tous vos produits en reliquat Contrôleur de forme d’onde portable Livraison optimisée des reliquats de commande Oscilloscopes portables Série THS3000 WFM2200 Le contrôleur de forme d’onde WFM2200 est un outil idéal pour les applications sur le terrain offrant une qualité sans compromis avec la surveillance CRTcomme trace sur un large afficheur 6.5" rétro-éclairé et un système de batterie remplaçable et rechargeable. Il offre un éventail d’outils de suivi de base pour la vidéo (SD, HD, Dual Link et 3G en option), et audio (Embedded, AES) de surveillance qui peut être configuré dans l’affichage Quad Tile et complet pour permettre à l’utilisateur de voir tous l’information du signal nécessaire en un seul coup d’oeil. Inspecteur de donnée ANC, la liste des données et de décodage de sous-titrage sont très précieux pour la résolution des problèmes au sein de l’espace de données auxiliaires. Une vidéo et des générateurs audio permettent de trouver des problèmes de signalisation et un affichage de forme d’onde de référence externe peut aider à assurer la synchronisation vidéo correcte avec l’affichage Timing brevetée par Tektronix. Une gamme d’accessoires augmente la polyvalence du WFM2200 pour les opérations sur le terrain. Ì Modèles 100 MHz et 200 MHz Ì 4 voies complètement isolées et flottantes Ì Entrées 600 VRMS CAT III Ì Longueur d’enregistrement 10 Kpoints par voies Ì Échantillonnage max. jusqu’à 5GS/s Ì Déclenchement intelligent Ì 21 mesures automatiques Ì Fonction FFT sur tous les modèles Ì Autonomie de la batterie 7H en fonctionnement Ì USB 2.0 (Device et Hôte) Ì Léger et portable Ì Logiciel Tektronix OpenChoice™ desktop fourni Ì Garantie 3 ans Ì Facteur de forme portable Ì Système de batterie rechargeable et remplaçable Ì Contrôle 4 Tile Ì Inspecteur de donnée ANC, Liste Data, décodage Ì signal analogique de référence externe avec affichage de forme d’onde Ì Vidéo multi format, et générateur de signal audio Ì contrôle audio AES embarqué 16 voies Ì Applications: Production, vérification de systèmes, outils pour la distribution de signaux Tektronix présente les oscilloscopes portables séries THS3014 et THS3024. Ces produits sont recommandés pour les tests sur le terrain et la conception d’applications. Ils sont idéal pour tous ceux qui souhaitent une solutions portable fonctionnant sur batterie. De plus, les clients travaillant sur les applications de puissance trouveront les caractéristiques nécessaires pour effectuer des mesures flottante ou avec des tensions élevées. Cette famille offre des performances supérieures ainsi qu’un grand nombre de fonctions de mesure et d’analyse Ì Mesures automatiques incluant : Puissance du canal, mesure ACPR, et bande passante occupée Ì Déclenchement sur niveau de puissance RF Ì Analyse de spectre sur déclenchement ou libre Ì Garanti 3 ans Ì Reconnu Vainqueur plus de 10 fois lors de récompense Industrielle farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 7 Tektronix Comprend: multimètre, cordons de test TL710, fusible de remplacement, certificat d’étalonnage, certificat de garantie, guide de sécurité et installation, manuel d’installation des connexions, manuel d’utilisation sur CD-ROM (Anglais, Français, Italien, Allemand, Espagnol, Chinois simplifié, Chinois traditionnel, Coréen, Russe, Japonais), câble adapteur RS-232 vers USB, logiciel LabVIEW SignalExpress™. Cordons d’alimentation (prises européenne et anglaise). Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! H = 88mm, W = 217mm, D = 297mm AFG3011 AFG3021 / AFG3022 AFG3101 / AFG3102 AFG3251 / AFG3252 Bande passante de bruit (-3dB) 10MHz 25MHz 100MHz 240MHz DC (à 50Ω) -10V à +10V -5V à +5V -5V à +5V -2.5V à +2.5V Signaux arbitraires 1mHz à 5MHz 1mHz à 12.5MHz 1mHz à 25MHz 1mHz à 120MHz Modulation AM, FM, PM, FSK, balayage, salve Entrée / Sortie Entrée modulation voie 1 et voie 2, trigger externe / entrée gated Burst, Reference In 10MHz, Ext, entrée Voie 1 en plus Sortie trigger voie 1, sortie de référence 10MHz Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. AFG3011 AFG3021 / AFG3022 AFG3101 / AFG3102 AFG3251 / AFG3252 Voies 1 1 / 2 1 / 2 1 / 2 Sinus 1μHz à 10MHz 1μHz à 25MHz 1μHz à 100MHz 1μHz à 240MHz Carré 1mHz à 5MHz 1mHz à 12.5MHz 1mHz à 25MHz 1mHz à 120MHz Impulsion 1mHz à 5MHz 1mHz à 12.5MHz 1mHz à 25MHz 1mHz à 120MHz Autres signaux 1μHz à 100kHz 1μHz à 250kHz 1μHz à 1MHz 1μHz à 2.4MHz AFG2021 Bande Passante 20MHz Voies 1 Caractéristiques de Forme d’onde Gamme de Fréquence Sinus 1μHz à 20MHz Gamme de Fréquence Carré 1μHz à 10MHz Gamme de Fréquence Impulsion 1mHz à 10MHz Gamme de Fréquence Rampe 1μHz à 200kHz Longueur d’onde arbitraire 1mHz à 10MHz Type de Modulation AM, FM, PM, Pulse, Sweep, Burst Caractéristiques de la voie Connecteur de Sortie BNC Impédance de Sortie 50Ω Général Affichage Ecran TFT LCD Couleur 3.5" Dimensions (HxWxD) 104.2x241.8x419.1mm Poids 2.87kg Prix Unitaire Ref Fab. Code Commande 1+ AFG2021 214-3351● 1440.00 Code Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ 1 voie, 10MHz AFG3011 207-0530● 3750.00 1 voie, 25MHz AFG3021B 142-5300 1740.00 2 voies, 25MHz AFG3022B 142-5301 2660.00 1 voie, 100MHz AFG3101 129-9081 3820.00 2 voies, 100MHz AFG3102 129-9082 5420.00 1voie, 240MHz AFG3251 185-6722 7710.00 2 voies, 240MHz AFG3252 185-6723 10600.00 Le multimètre de table 5.5 digits DMM4020 de Tektronix offre un large choix de fonctionnalités Générateur de Fonctions Arbitraire Générateurs de fonctions arbitraires dans un simple instrument. Le DMM4020 permet également de mesurer la fréquence, et de réaliser des tests de continuité et de diodes. Ceci est idéal pour remplacer en un seul instrument polyvalent, un fréquencemètre, un testeur de continuité et un multimètre numérique et permettre ainsi d’économiser espace et coût. (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) Série AFG3000 AFG2021 Tektronix DMM4020 Ì Signal sinusoidal 20 MHz, Signal Carré et Impulsion 10 MHz, fournissent une solution pour la plupart des applications Ì Taux d’échantillonage de 250 Méch/s et résolution verticale de 14 bits Ì L’interface utilisateur intuitive et identique au AFG3000 permettent une prise en main rapide de l’utilisateur Ì Mémoire de 4×128K intégré et extension de mémoire USB pour les Caractéristiques et avantages: Ì Résolution 5.5 Digits Ì Précision de base VDC jusqu’à 0.015% (1 an) Ì Gamme de tension: 200 mV à 1000 V, jusqu’à une résolution de 10 μV Ì Gamme de courant: 200 μ à 10 A, jusqu’à une résolution de 1 nA Ì Gamme 200 Ω à 100 MΩ, jusqu’à une résolution de 1 mΩ Ì CAT I 1000 V, CAT II 600 V Ì Fonctions disponibles: Ì Mesures Volts, Ohms, et Amps Ì Test de diodes et de continuité Ì Mesures de fréquence Ì Technique de mesure: 4 fils 2×4 Ohms Ì Mesure de courant de fuite DC dédiée Ì 6 boutons pour un accès rapide aux paramétrages de l’instrument Ì Mode de comparaison de limite pour un test Echec/Passage Connexion: Ì 2×4 entrées en face avant Ì RS-232 à l’arrière pour une connexion PC rapide Ì Livré avec câble adaptateur d’interface USB vers RS-232 Ì Livré avec le logiciel LabVIEW SignalExpress[TradeMark] TE Limited de National Instrument Ì Guide de connexion Le générateur de fonction arbitraire AFG3000, avec son grand écran couleur et son interface utilisateur intuitive, est facile à utiliser et à comprendre. Les modèles à 2 voies permettent un choix complètement indépendant des signaux et des fréquences et représentent un grand avantage en terme de polyvalence et coût. Le connecteur USB sur le panneau avantpermet de sauvegarder et transférer facilement les signaux. formes d’ondes défini par l’utilisateur Ì Port USB Standard Hôte et Périphérique, option Interface GPIB et LAN Ì Plusieurs modes de fonctionnement et de modulation Ì Menus et Aide contextuelle en 8 langues Ì Hauteur 2U et largeur demi-rack pour s’adapter à la fois aux applications de table et monté en rack Ì Logiciel ArbExpress pour facilement créer et éditer des formes d’ondes Ì Logiciel SignalExpress permet de combiner les intruments de test Tektronix en une solution de test automatique Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Commande 1+ DMM4020 Multimètre numérique 177-1901 655.00 Accessoires 1+ TL725 Brucelles de test CMS, 2 X 4 fils Ohms 177-1904 86.00 196352001 Cordons de test, Standard TL710 177-1907 32.00 TL705 Cordons de test, Précision, 2X4 fils 177-1908 65.00 l=330 H=156 P=168mm Poids = 4.5kg Multimètres numériques Contenu du Kit: Générateur de Fonction Arbitraire, Mode d’emploil, Cable d’alimentation, Câble USB, CD-ROM (manuel de programmation,manuel d’entretien, Labview and IVI Drivers) , CD-ROM avec Logiciel ArbExpress Certificat de Calibration NIST. Comprend : Manuel d’utilisation rapide, cordon d’alimentation, CD-ROM avec guide de référence, manuel de service et logiciel ArbExpress, certificat de calibration NIST. Applications: Ì Conception et Test en électronique Ì Simulation de Capteur Ì Education et Formation Ì Test Fonctionnel Ì Intégration de Système Le logiciel ArbExpress est inclus pour créer des signaux facilement. Avec ce logiciel PC, les signaux peuvent être importés depuis n’importe quel oscilloscope Tektronix, ou définis par les fonctions standard, l’éditeur d’équation, et les signaux mathématiques. Ì Signaux sinusoïdaux 10MHz, 25 MHz, 100 MHz ou 240 MHz Ì Signaux arbitraires 14 bits, 250 MS/s, 1 Géch/s, ou 2 Géch/s Ì Ecran 5.6" pour une vision globales des réglages et de la forme du signal (sauf AFG3021B avec écran monochrome) Ì Fonctionnement multilingue et intuitif pour gagner du temps lors de la configuration Ì Signal impulsionnel avec déclenchement sur front variable Ì AM, FM, PM, FSK, PWM Ì Balayage et salve Ì Modèle à deux voies pour une économie d’argent et de place Ì Connecteur pour périphériques de stockage USB au niveau du panneau avant pour enregistrer les signaux Ì USB, GPIB et LAN farnell.com element14.com 8 TEST ET MESURE Tektronix Dimensions (HxlxP) = 88x217x297mm Modèle PWS4205 PWS4305 PWS4323 PWS4602 PWS4721 Tension sortie max. 20 V 30 V 32 V 60 V 72 V Courant sortie max. 5 A 5 A 3 A 2.5 A 1.2 A Ond. & Bruit (7 MHz) 1 mV RMS 1 mV RMS 1 mV RMS 1 mV RMS 1 mV RMS 3 mVP-P 4 mVP-P 4 mVP-P 5 mVP-P 3 mVP-P Modes commandes Tension constant, Courant constant Mémoires 50 Connectivité Port USB, compatible USBTMC Modèle PWS2185 PWS2323 PWS2326 PWS2721 Tension max. de sortie 18 V 32 V 32 V 72 V Courant max. de sortie 5 A 3 A 6 A 1.5 A Ond. & bruit (7 MHz) 1 mVRMS / 3 mVP-P Modes commande Tension constant, Courant constant Mémoires 16 Contrôle total des couts, réduction de la gestion administrative, visibilité sur vos dépenses, flexibilité et personnalisation selon les besoins de votre société. farnell.com/ibuy Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ PWS4205 18 Volts, 5 Amps 182-4787 724.00 PWS4305 30 Volts, 5 Amps 182-4789 853.00 PWS4323 32 Volts, 3 Amps 182-4791 724.00 PWS4602 60 Volts, 2.5 Amps 182-4792 853.00 PWS4721 72 Volts, 1.2 Amps 182-4793 724.00 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ PWS2185 18 Volts, 5 Amps 182-4783 326.00 PWS2323 32 Volts, 3 Amps 182-4784 326.00 PWS2326 32 Volts, 6 Amps 182-4785 376.00 PWS2721 72 Volts, 1.5 Amps 182-4786 326.00 DMM4050 Solution gratuite d’achats intelligents en ligne Alimentation DC Comprend: multimètre, cordons de test TL710, fusible de remplacement, certificat d’étalonnage, certificat de garantie, guide de sécurité et installation, manuel d’installation des connexions, manuel d’utilisation sur CD-ROM (Anglais, Français, Italien, Allemand, Espagnol, Chinois simplifié, Chinois traditionnel, Coréen, Russe, Japonais), câble adapteur RS-232 vers USB, logiciel LabVIEW SignalExpress™. Cordons d’alimentation (prises européenne et anglaise). Alimentation DC Série PWS2000 DMM4040 Série PWS4000 Caractéristiques: Caractéristiques: Ì Faible bruit, Régulation linéaire Ì Large gamme de tension et de courant Ì Précision de la tension basique 0.03%, précision du courant basique 0.05% Ì Interface USB pour la programmation à distance Ì Affiche la tension et courant actuels et limite simultanément Ì Détection à distance, lignes de sorties arrières, Trigger/état Ì Garantie 3 ans Les multimètres de table 6.5 digits DMM4050 et DMM4040 de Tektronix intègrent de nombreuses fonctions et analyses dans un seul instrument, toutes avec une précision et des performances exceptionnelles. Avec un double affichage unique pour les DMM4050/4040, 2 paramètres différents peuvent être mesurés sur un même signal à partir d’une seule Ì Faible bruit, Régulation linéaire Ì Large gamme de tension et de courant Ì Résolution 10 mV/10 mA connexion de test. Les problèmes de qualité du signal tels que les transitions intermittentes, les chutes et la stabilité peuvent être révélés grâce à une visualisation des données en plot de tendance en temps réel ou un histogramme avec le mode d’affichage graphique ou grâce aux statistiques de mesure qui suivent les changements de paramètres du signal. Large gamme de tension et de courant, caractéristiques flexibles font de la série PWS4000 un complèment indispensable à votre banc. Excellente précision de la tension et courant, détection à distance pour les niveaux de sorties, réglage via boutons numérique pour un paramètrage direct ou par bouton rotatif pour un réglage en continu sur afficheur VFD. Mémoires de réglage intégrées, liste de fonctions permet une prise en main rapide. Programmation à distance via interface USB et livré avec logiciel NI Signal Express. Réglage de la tension max. peut être protègé par un code verrouillant ainsi le panneau avant pour éviter tout dommage. Ì Affichage VFD Ì 16 mémoires réglables Ì Garantie 3 ans Accessoires fournis Manuel utilisateur Quick Start CD de documentation Mémoire Modèle Description DMM4050/4040 Capacité de 10,000 mesures internes et jusqu’à 2 Gigabyte avec le module mémoire USB (disponible séparément) via le port USB sur face avant Tektronix DMM4040 et DMM4050 La série PWS2000 est conçue pour une haute performance et pour une utilisation intuitive. Avec une large gamme de tension et courant, plus une résolution de 10mV et 10mA, la série PWS2000 convient à une large gamme d’applications, réglage rapide et précis des tensions et courants grâce à son clavier numérique. Affichage VFD avec large digit permettant une excellente lecture, réglage de la tension max. peut être protègé par un code verrouillant ainsi le panneau avant pour éviter tout dommage. Caractéristiques et avantages: Ì Résolution 6.5 digits Ì Précision de base VDC jusqu’à 0.0024% (1 an) Ì Gamme de tension de 100 mV à 1000 V, jusqu’à une résolution de 100 nV Ì Gamme de courant de 100 μA à 10 A, jusqu’à une résolution de 100 pA Ì Gamme Ohm de 10 Ω à 1 GΩ, jusqu’à une résolution de 10 μΩ Ì CAT I 1000 V, CAT II 600 V Fonctions disponibles: Ì Mesures Volts, Ohms et Amps Ì Test de diodes et de continuité Ì Mesures de fréquence et de période Ì Mesure de température et de capacité (DMM4050) Ì Technique de mesure: 4 fils 2×4 Ohms Ì Mode d’enregistrement des données TrendPlot™ Ì Mesure statistiques Ì Mode histogramme Connexion: Ì 2×4 entrées en face avant Ì Port hôte USB sur face avant pour un stockage facile des données et des paramètrages Ì Ports RS-232, LAN et GPIB à l’arrière pour une connexion PC rapide Ì Livré avec câble adaptateur d’interface USB vers RS-232 Ì Livré avec le logiciel LabVIEW SignalExpress™ TE Limited de National Instrument Ì Guide de connexion Accessoires fournis Manuel utilisateur Quick Start CD de documentation Cordon d’alimentation Certificat d’étalonnage documentant la traçabilité: National Metrology Institute(s) Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Commande 1+ DMM4040 Multimètre numérique de précision 35PPM 177-1902 949.00 DMM4050 Multimètre numérique de précision 24PPM 177-1903 1180.00 Accessoires 1+ TL725 Brucelles de test CMS, 2 X 4 fils Ohms 177-1904 86.00 TP750 Sonde de température, 100 Ohm RTD (DMM4050 seulement) 177-1906 437.00 196352001 Cordons de test standard TL710 177-1907 32.00 TL705 Cordons de test de précision 2X4 fils 177-1908 65.00 Multimètres numériques Les multimètres Fluke, le choix des professionnels pour toutes les applications Usage général avec écran amovible Usage industriel avancé Applications industrielles et pour le terrain Mesures essentielles CVC Usage sur terrain Robustesse à l'épreuve de l'usage industriel 287 113 114 117 116 115 27-II 28-II 88V 289 83V 87V 233 175 177 179 Fluke Série 170 : Haute performance à prix abordable Automobile Précision extrême Sécurité intrinsèque 28 II EX farnell.com element14.com 10 TEST ET MESURE Keithley 2001 et 2002 Spécifications Tension AC 100mV, 1V à 750V Tension DC 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, 1000V Courant AC 1A, 3A Courant DC 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A Résistance 100Ω, 1kΩ, 10kΩ, 100kΩ, 1MΩ, 10MΩ, 100MΩ Température -100°C à 100°C / -200°C à 630°C Test de Diode 1V Continuité 1000Ω Spécifications générales Tension d’entrée 120V / 220V / 240V Température d’utilisation 5°C à 40°C Dimensions 112 x 256 x 375mm Poids 4.1kg Contenu du kit 2000/E/2000-SCAN: Multimètre/Scanner, Manuel d’instruction, cordons de sécurité Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 2100/230-240 207-4728 763.00 2000 Spécifications: Tension AC 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V, 750V Tension DC 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V Courant AC 200μA, 2mA, 20mA, 200mA, 2A Courant DC 200μA, 2mA, 20mA, 200mA, 2A Résistance 20Ω, 200Ω, 2kΩ, 20kΩ, 200kΩ, 2MΩ, 20MΩ, 200MΩ, 1GΩ Fréquence 1Hz à 15MHz Température Thermocouple J, K, N, T, E, R, S, B Spécification générales Tension d’entrée 90V à 134V / 180V à 250V Température d’utilisation 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 90 x 214 x 369mm Poids 4.2kg SUPPORT LEGISLATIF MONDIAL GRATUIT : Directives RoHS, REACH, DEEE, Eup, batteries : dernières mises à jour, livres blancs gratuits et questions-réponses en direct sur element14.com/legislation Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ 2001. 71⁄2 Digit Resolution 207-4726 4470.00 2002. 81⁄2 Digit Resolution 207-4727 5990.00 Accessoires 1600A High Voltage Probe 213-1299 190.00 1681 Clip On Test Lead Set 213-1296 38.00 2000-SCAN 10 Channel Scanner Card 213-1239 411.00 2001-SCAN 10 Channel Scanner Card with 2 High Speed Channels 213-1240 808.00 2001-TCSCAN 9 Channel Thermocouple Scanner Card 213-1241 1080.00 4288-1 Single Unit Rack Mount Kit 213-1276 102.00 4288-4 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 213-1278 318.00 5805 Kelvin (4 Wire), Spring Loaded Probes, 0.9m 213-1246 253.00 5808 Kelvin probes, Single Pin 213-1247 122.00 5809 Kelvin Clip Lead Set 213-1248 186.00 8502 Trigger Link to BNC Break-Out Box 213-1254 934.00 KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 KUSB-488B IEEE-488.2 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 207-7471 505.00 Multimètre numérique Support législatif Contenu du kit 2000/E: Multimètre, Manuel d’instruction, cordons de sécurité Le multimètre numérique modèle 2100 USB est un multimètre Spécifications Multimètre numérique Tension AC 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, 750V Tension DC 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, 1000V Courant AC 1A, 3A Courant DC 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A Résistance 100Ω, 1kΩ, 10kΩ, 100kΩ, 1MΩ, 10MΩ, 100MΩ Fréquence 3Hz à 500kHz Température -200°C à 760°C, -200°C à 1372°C, -200°C à 400°C Test de Diode 3V, 10V Continuité 1kΩ Spécifications générales Tension d’entrée 100V / 120V / 220V / 240V Température d’utilisation 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 104 x 238 x 370mm Poids 2.9kg Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ 2000/E Multimeter 207-4725 807.00 2000/E/2000-SCAN Multimeter/Scanner 213-1292 1140.00 Accessoires 1600A High Voltage Probe 213-1299 190.00 1681 Clip On Test Lead Set 213-1296 38.00 2000-SCAN 10 Channel Scanner Card 213-1239 411.00 2001-SCAN 10 Channel Scanner Card with 2 High Speed Channels 213-1240 808.00 2001-TCSCAN 9 Channel Thermocouple Scanner Card 213-1241 1080.00 4288-1 Single Unit Rack Mount Kit 213-1276 102.00 4288-2 Dual Unit Rack Mount Kit 213-1277 141.00 4288-4 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 213-1278 318.00 4288-5 Single and Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 213-1279 382.00 7007-1 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 1m 213-1242 125.00 7007-2 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 2m 213-1243 138.00 7009-5 RS-232 Cable, 1.5m 213-1244 63.00 KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 KUSB-488B IEEE-488.2 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 207-7471 505.00 haute performance. Sa grande précision (38 ppm), la résolution 61⁄2 digit est idéal pour les mesures critiques. Le modèle 2100 dispose de 11 fonctions de mesure et 8 fonctions mathématiques pour utiliser facilement les paramètres les plus couramment Multimètre numérique our les utilisateurs dont les applications exigent une résolution, une précision et une sensibilité combinée à un débit élevé avec maintenant deux alternatives. Ces mulitmètres 71⁄2 digit et 81⁄2 haute performance offrent non seulement des spécifications de Multimètre numérique mesurés. Avec sa haute précision, le modèle 2100 est conçu pour les ingénieurs R&D, les ingénieurs de test, les scientifiques et les étudiants pour faire des mesures de précision de base dans les applications système. Ce multimètre numérique offre une vitesse de mesure exceptionnelle à n’importe performance habituellement associés à des instruments qui coûtent plus cher, mais ils offrent également un large éventail de fonctions qui ne sont généralement pas disponibles sur des multimètres numériques. Le 2002 est basé sur la technologie de mesure supérieure comme le 2001, et les panneaux avant des deux instruments ont la même apparence et réponse. Ì Précision 61⁄2 digit pour les mesures critiques Ì 11 fonctions de mesure pour couvrir la plupart des besoins Ì Interface USB 2.0 conforme TMC pour utiliser avec les programmes de test SCPI Ì Logiciel fourni pour faire des graphiques et partager las données avec Microsoft Word et Excel Ì Construction solide pour une grande durée de vie même en utilisation portables Ì Possibilité de choisir des sortie en face avant ou arrière pour faciliter l’utilisation en labo ou Rack quelle résolution. A 6 ½ Digit, il offre 50 rdgs/s sur bus IEEE-488. À 4 ½ Digit, il peut lire jusqu’à 2000rdgs/s dans sa mémoire tampon de 1024 interne, ce qui en fait un excellent Ì Résolution 71⁄2 (Modèle 2001) ou 81⁄2 digit (Modèle 2002)True Ì Mesure exceptionnelle avec une très grande vitesse Ì Changement de fonction et de gamme rapide Ì Affichage mesure multiple Ì Option scaner 10 voies Ì Compatible IEEE-488.2 et SCPI Ì Mode émulation HP3458A (Modèle 2002) Contenu du kit: Multimètre, manuel d’utilisation sur CD, Spécifications, Driver LabVIEW, I/O Layer Keithley, Câble USB, Câble d’alimentation, cordons de tet sécurisés, KI-Tool et KI-Link Add-in (Version Microsoft Word et Excel pour les deux). Contenu du kit: Multimètre, cordons de test modulaires, manuel d’utilisation, Capot et info de calibration 2100 choix pour les applications où le débit est critique. Pour les applications stationnaires ou en mode autonome, le 2000 dispose d’une conception du panneau avant qui est simple à comprendre et facile à utiliser. Le 2000 dispose de 13 fonctions intégrées de mesure, y compris DCV, ACV, DCI, ACI, 2WW, 4WW, température, fréquence, période, dB, dBm, mesure de continuité, et le test de diodes. Une interface RS-232 se connecte à un ordinateur portable ou un port série de PC pour prendre, stocker, traiter, et afficher automatiquement les mesures. Ì Interface RS-232 et IEEE-488 Ì Set de commande Fluke 8840/42 Applications: Ì Ingénieurs de test: Manuel ou semi-automatique Ì Ingénieurs de développement: Validation de circuits électronique et de produits Ì Techniciens de maintenance ou calibration: Réparations et calibration de matériels électroniques Ì Chercheurs: Tests, expérimentations physiques et électriques Ì Étudiants Ingénieurs: Test et expérience sur circuits électroniques Ì 13 fonctions de mesure Ì 2000 lecture par seconde à 41⁄4 digits Ì Scanner de carte en option pour mesure multipoint farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 11 Keithley Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! Série 2200 2430 2440 Spécifications des gammes Tension 200Mv, 2V, 20V, 100V 200mV, 2V, 10V, 40V Courant 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A, 10A 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 5A Résistance 2Ω, 20Ω, 200Ω, 2kΩ, 20kΩ, 200kΩ, 2MΩ, 20MΩ, 200MΩ Spécifications Générales Tension d’entrée 100V à 240V Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 104 x 238 x 370mm Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. Tension d’entrée 110V / 220V Fréquence 50/60Hz Communications USB / GPIB Température d’utilisation 0 à 40 Dimensions 106 x 242 x 384mm Poids 2200-20-5, 2200-30-5, 2200-32-3, 2200-72-1: 7.3kg 2200-60-2: 7kg Fonction de vérification de Contact La fonction de vérification de contact permet de vérifier simplement et rapidement les bonnes connections avant qu’une séquence de test automatique commence. Ceci élimine les erreurs de mesure et les fausses défaillances des produits associés à la fatigue du contact, la rupture, la contamination, la connexion desserrée ou cassée, les défaillances de relais, etc Réf. Tension Courant de Puissance Fab. de sortie sortie de sortie (W) Code Commande 2200-20-5 20 5 100 207-4730 2200-30-5 30 5 150 207-4731 2200-32-3 32 3 96 207-4732 2200-60-2 60 2.5 150 207-4733 2200-72-1 72 1.2 86 207-4735 Série 2400 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ 2200-20-5 Programmable Power Suppply, 20V, 5A 207-4730 790.00 2200-30-5 Programmable Power Suppply, 30V, 5A 207-4731 931.00 2200-32-3 Programmable Power Suppply, 32V, 3A 207-4732 790.00 2200-60-2 Programmable Power Suppply, 60V, 2.5A 207-4733 931.00 2200-72-1 Programmable Power Suppply, 72V, 1.2A 207-4735 790.00 Accessoires 7007-1 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 1m 213-1242 125.00 7007-2 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 2m 213-1243 138.00 KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 Applications: Ì Composants : Semiconducteurs Discrets, Composants passifs, Composants de Suppression, CI, CI RF, MMIC, Diodes et modules Laser, LED, Photo détecteurs, Circuit de protection: TVS, MOV, Fusible, Airbags, Connecteurs, commutateurs, relais Ì Tests: Fuite, Faible tension/résistance, Coéfficient de Température, Tension de transfert retour et claquage, fuite de courant, test de paramètre DC, source de puissance DC, tenue Diélectrique, caractérisation courant/tension, HIPOT, LIV, IDDQ (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) 2420 2425 / 2425-C Spécifications des gammes Tension 200mV, 2V, 20V, 60V 200Mv, 2V, 20V, 100V Courant 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A Résistance 2Ω, 20Ω, 200Ω, 2kΩ, 20kΩ, 200kΩ, 2MΩ, 20MΩ, 200MΩ Spécifications Générales Tension d’entrée 100V à 240V Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 104 x 238 x 370mm Alimentations DC programmables 2400 2401 2410 / 2410-C Spécification des gammes Tension 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V 200mV, 2V, 20V 200mV, 2V, 20V, 1000V Courant 1μA, 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A 1μA, 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 20mA, 100mA, 1A Résistance 2Ω, 20Ω, 200Ω, 2kΩ, 20kΩ, 200kΩ, 2MΩ, 20MΩ, 200MΩ Spécifications Générales Tension d’entrée 100V à 240V Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 104 x 238 x 370mm Les alimentations programmables séries 2200 permettent de fournir un large éventail de tension de sorties DC pour répondre aux applications de caractérisation des composants, et de test des circuits, des modules et des dispositifs complets si vous êtes dans un laboratoire de recherche, dans la conception et le développement, ou en test de production. La série 2200 se compose de Ref Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ 2400. SourceMeter, 200V, 1A, 20W 207-4736 3850.00 2401 SourceMeter, 20V, 1A, 20W 207-4737 2820.00 2410. SourceMeter, 1100V, 1A, 20W 207-4738 5680.00 2410-C SourceMeter, 1100V, 1A, 20W, Contact Check 213-1300 6860.00 2420. SourceMeter, 60V, 3A, 60W 207-4739 5680.00 2425 SourceMeter, 100V, 3A, 100W 213-1301 6760.00 2425-C SourceMeter, 100V, 3A, 100W, Contact Check 213-1302 8050.00 2430 SourceMeter, 100V, 10A, 1000W 213-1303 9790.00 2440. SourceMeter, 40V, 5A, 50W 207-4740 6460.00 Accessoires KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 KUSB-488B IEEE-488.2 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 207-7471 505.00 4288-1 Single Unit Rack Mount Kit 213-1276 102.00 4288-2 Dual Unit Rack Mount Kit 213-1277 141.00 4288-4 Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 213-1278 318.00 4288-5 Single and Dual Fixed Rack Mount Kit 213-1279 382.00 5804 Kelvin (4 Wire) Universal 10 Piece Test Lead Set 213-1245 227.00 5805 Kelvin (4 Wire), Spring Loaded Probes, 0.9m 213-1246 253.00 5808 Kelvin probes, Single Pin 213-1247 122.00 5809 Kelvin Clip Lead Set 213-1248 186.00 8501-1 Trigger Link, DIN-to-DIN, 1m 213-1252 72.00 8501-2 Trigger Link, DIN-to-DIN, 2m 213-1253 79.00 8502 Trigger Link to BNC Break-Out Box 213-1254 934.00 8503 Trigger Link, DIN-to-Dual BNC, 1m 213-1255 99.00 8505 Male DIN to 2 Female DIN Y Adapter, 0.3m 213-1256 99.00 CA-18-1 Dual Banana Plug, Shielded, Coax, 1.2m 213-1251 31.00 cinq modèles avec des tensions de sortie de 20V à 72V qui peuvent fournir 86W, 96W, 100W, 150W. En outre, ces alimentations peuvent agir en tant que sources de courant constant ainsi que de sources de tension constante. Les alimentations DC de la série 2200 offrent une excellente combinaison de performances, polyvalence et facilité d’utilisation qui vous permettra d’obtenir des données de test de qualité aussi rapidement que possible. Elles effectuent aussi efficacement des tests dans les systèmes de automatisés de la même façon que dans des configurations d’instruments manuels. SourceMeter Ì 5 modèles avec des puissances de 86W à 150W avecdes tensions de sortie de 20V à 72V. Ì Précision de la tension de sortie 0.03% et 0.05% pour le courant Ì Résolution élevée en sortie, 1mV et 0.1mA pour les tests sur des circuits faible puissance Ì Mesure à distance pour garantir que la tension programmée et appliquée à la charge Ì Double afficheur pour voir à la fois la tension programmé et la tension de sortie et ainsi avoir une vision continue de la puissance fournie à la charge Ì Interfaces GPIB et USB pour automatiser le contrôle Les SourceMeter Keithley sont des instruments de source et mesure conçus spécifiquement pour les applications de test qui demande de combiné source et mesure. Tous les modèles fournissent une source de tension/courant précise ainsi que des capacités de mesure. Chaque instrument est à la fois une source très stable en courant continu et un véritable Multimètre 61⁄2 digits. Les caractéristiques de la source d’alimentation comprennent un faible bruit, la précision, et relecture. Les capacités du multimètre comprennent répétabilité élevée et faible bruit. Le résultat est un système compact simple canal, de paramètre de test DC. En fonctionnement, ces instruments peuvent agir comme une source de tension, une source de courant, un voltmètre, un ampèremètre et un ohmmètre. Les fabricants de composants et de modules pour les communications, semi-conducteurs, l’informatique, l’automobile et les industries médicales trouvent intéressant d’utiliser les Sourcemeter pour un large éventail d’applications de test et de production. Ì 5 instruments en 1 Ì 7 modèles: de 20 à 100W DC, 1000W pulsé, 1100V à 1μV, 10A à 10pA Ì Fonctionnement Source et Puits (4 Quadrants) Ì Précision de mesure 0.012% avec une résolution de 6½ digits Ì Commande en 2, 4, et 6 fils de la source de tension et mesure de détection Ì 1700 lectures/seconde sur 41⁄2digits via GPIB Ì Comparateur Réussite/Echec pour un tri rapide Ì Fonction de vérification de contact disponible Ì Port DIO Programmable pour une commande par automatisation/Instruction/sonde (sauf le Modèle 2401) Ì Interfaces Standard SCPI GPIB, RS-232 et déclenchements Keithley Ì Logiciel de courbe Keithley LabTracer 2.0 I-V (en téléchargement) Contenu du Kit: SourceMeter, Cordon de Test, Driver Logiciel LabVIEW (téléchargeable) et Logiciel LabTracer (téléchargeable). farnell.com element14.com 12 TEST ET MESURE Keithley Applications: Ì Composant Discrets et passifs Ì CI simple: Optos, drivers, commutateurs et capteurs Ì Composants intégrés: small scale integrated (SSI) et large scale integrated (LSI) Ì Optoélectronique tel que les LED, les diodes lasers, les LED Hautes luminosités, les afficheurs.... Ì Fiabilité Wafer Ì Cellules Solaires Ì Batteries 3390 Série 2600A Caractéristiques signaux Plage de fréquence Sinus 1μHz à 50MHz Plage de fréquence carré 1μHz à 25MHz Plage de fréquence rampe, triangle 1μHz à 200kHz Plage de fréquence impulsion 500μHz à 10MHz Bande passante bruit 20MHz Arbitraire 1μHz à 10MHz Type de modulation AM, FM, PM, FSK, PWM, Sweep et Burst Général Alimentation 110V à 240V ac Consommation 50VA max. Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 50°C Température de stockage -30 à 70 Interface USB, LAN, LXI-C, GPIB Langage SCPI-1993, IEEE-488.2 Dimensions (l x H x P) 107 x 224 x 380mm Poids 4.08kg 2601A 2611A 2635A 2602A 2612A 2636A Spécification de Gammes Tension 100mV, 1V, 6V, 40V 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V Courant 100nA, 1μA, 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A, 10A 100nA, 1μA, 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 1.5A, 10A 100pA, 1nA, 10nA, 100nA, 1μA, 10μA, 100μA, 1mA, 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 1.5A, 10A Spécifications Générales Tension d’entrée 100V à 250V Température de Fonctionnement 0°C à 50°C Dimensions 104 x 238 x 460mm Poids 4.75kg Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ 3390 Arbitrary Waveform/Function Generator 207-4753 1410.00 Accessoires 7007-1 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 1m 213-1242 125.00 7007-2 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 2m 213-1243 138.00 KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 KUSB-488B IEEE-488.2 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 207-7471 505.00 Ref Prix Unitaire Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ Système 1 canal 2601A SourceMeter, 3A DC, 10A Pulse 207-4741 5170.00 2611A SourceMeter, 200V, 10A Pulse 207-4743 5170.00 2635A SourceMeter, 1fA, 10A Pulse 207-4745 8330.00 Système Double canaux 2602A SourceMeter, 3A DC, 10A Pulse 207-4742 7580.00 2612A SourceMeter, 200V, 10A Pulse 207-4744 7580.00 2636A SourceMeter, 1fA, 10A Pulse 207-4747 12800.00 Accessoires 2600-TLINK Digital I/O to TLINK Adapter, 1m 213-1269 127.00 3706A-S Mainframe 213-1294 2070.00 7007-1 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 1m 213-1242 125.00 7007-2 Shielded IEEE-488 Cable, 2m 213-1243 138.00 7078-TRX-1 Triax 3 Slot Low Noise Cable (0.3m) 207-7464 163.00 7078-TRX-3 Triax 3 Slot Low Noise Cable (0.9m) 207-7465 175.00 7078-TRX-5 Triax 3 Slot Low Noise Cable (1.5m) 207-7466 188.00 7078-TRX-10 Triax 3 Slot Low Noise Cable (3m) 207-7467 202.00 7078-TRX-BNC Triax 3 Slot Male BNC Adapter 207-7468 85.00 7078-TRX-GND Triax 3 Slot Male BNC Adapter (No Guard) 207-7469 72.00 CA-126-1A DB25 (male/female), Digital I/O, Shielded, 1.5m 213-1270 110.00 CA-180-3A RJ45, Crossover, Twisted Pair, 3m 213-1271 11.00 KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488.2 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus 207-7470 434.00 KUSB-488B IEEE-488.2 USB-to-GPIB Interface Adapter 207-7471 505.00 Générateur de fonctions/ signaux arbitraires Systèmes d’instrumentations SourceMeter Le générateur modèle 3390 est un outil facile à utiliser, programmable avec de fonctions avancées. Une meilleure intégrité du signal supérieure, des temps de montée et descente plus rapide et moins de bruit, une mémoire plus grande se combinent pour fournir une haute qualité de signaux de sortie. La résolution élevée des formes Oscilloscopes numériques d’onde sont pris en charge par quatre fois plus de mémoire de forme d’onde que n’importe quel générateur de forme d’onde sur le marché. Avec son générateur de forme d’onde arbitraire (ARB) sa grande vitesse et sa facilité d’utilisation, le modèle 3390 est une solution complète pour générer des signaux pour toutes les applications de forme d’onde jusqu’à 50MHz. Ces systèmes Sourcemeter sont les dernières unité de source Courant/Tension de Keithley, pour utilisation comme outil de banc de test de caractérisation Courant/Tension ou comme bloc pour systèmes de tests Courant/Tension multi-canaux. Pour une utilisation en banc de test, les instruments de Ì Fréquence 50MHz signaux SIN Ì Fréquence de pulsation 25MHz Ì Générateur arbitraire avec 256k points, résolution 14 bits Ì Fonctions inclues: Sin, carré, triangle, bruit, DC, etc. Ì Impulsions précises et signaux carrés avec des tps de monté/Descente de 5ns Ì Base de temps externe intégrée pour synchroniser plusieurs unités Ì Modulation AM, FM, PM, FSK, PWM Ì Possibilité de Fréquence ’Sweep et Burst’ Ì Logiciel de création de signaux KiWAVE Ì Conforme LXI Classe C 1000A/B la série 2600A disposent d’un outil intégré (TSP Software Express) qui permet aux utilisateurs de créer rapidement et facilement effectuer des tests usuels Courant/Tension sans programmation ou installation de logiciels. Pour les applications système, l’architecture Test Script Proccessor (TSP), ainsi que d’autres nouvelles fonctionnalités telles que le parallèle entre exécution de test et timing précis, fournissent le plus haut débit dans l’industrie, et abaissent le coût du test. Pour simplifier le test, la vérification et l’analyse des composants semi-conducteurs, le logiciel ACS Basic Edition est également disponible en option. Contenu du kit: Générateur de signaux avec cordons d’alimentation, câble de bus universel série, câble générateur de Pattern, Câble Ethernet croisé, CD avec manuel d’utilisation Ì Combine une alimentation, une véritable source de Courant, un multimètre numérique 61⁄2 digits, un générateur de fonctions arbitraires, Un générateur de pulsation Courant ou Tension avec mesure, une charge électronique, et un contrôleur de déclenchement Ì Cette famille de produit offre une large gamme dynamique: 1fA à 50A et 1μV à 200V Ì Les 20000 lectures/s fournissent une vitesse de test rapide et la possibilité de capturer le comportement transitoire du composant Ì Chronométrage de précision et de synchronisation des canaux (<500ns) Ì Port USB pour la sauvegarde des données et des rapports de tests Ì La conformité LXI Class C prend en charge les transferts de données haute vitesse et permet d’effectuer rapidement et facilement des tests à distance, la surveillance et le dépannage Ì Logiciel: TSP Express pour des tests Courant/Tension rapide et simple (intégré), ACS Basic Edition pour la caractérisation des semiconducteurs (en option) DSO1002A Contenu du Kit: SourceMeter, Câble Triax faible bruit avec pince crocodile, Connecteurs bornes à vis avec clip anti-traction et capot, Câble TSP-Link/Ethernet (deux par unité), Logiciel TSP Express (intégré), Logiciel Test script builder (fourni sur le CD) et Logiciel ACS Basic edition software (en option). DSO1024A Ì Grand écran couleur LCD 5.7" permettant une meilleure visualisation des formes d’onde Ì Angle de vision large Ì Test de masque facile Ì Zone de visualisation des formes d’ondes 25% plus grande sans la barre du menu Ì Mémoire jusqu’à 20k Ì 23 mesures automatiques Ì Mode séquence pour l’enregistrement, lecture et sauvegarde des formes d’ondes Ì Filtre bande passante sélectionnable Ì Déclenchement avancé Ì Interface multi-langues: français, anglais, allemand, japonais, chinois simplifié, chinois traditionnel, coréen, espagnol, russe, portugais et italien Ì Promotion: Enregistrez l’achat sur www.agilent.com/find/5yrs-warranty et recevez 2 ans de garantie constructeur supplémentaire en plus des 3 ans de garantie standard - Offre disponible jusqu’à épuisement du stock et selon conditions du fabricant farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 13 Agilent Limite bande passante 20 MHz sélectionnable Couplage d’entrée AC, DC, GND Impédance d’entrée 1 MΩ ± 2% Sensibilité verticale 2 mV/div à 5 V/div Taux d’échantillonnage 1 Géch/s par voie, 2 Géch/s entrelaçé Profondeur mémoire (longueur d’enregistrement) 100 kpts Affichage 8.5" WVGA avec 64 niveaux d’intensité Taux d’actualisation formes d’onde (max) 500000 formes d’ondes/s Résolution verticale 8 bits Précision DC ±3% (≥ 10 mV/div); ±4% (< 10 mV/div) Dimensions 380.6 x 204.4 x 141.5 mm Poids 3.85 kg Limite bande passante 20 MHz sélectionnable Couplage d’entrée AC, DC, GND Impédance d’entrée Sélectionnable: 1 MΩ ± 1%; 50 Ω ± 1.5% Gamme de sensibilité entrée 2 mV/div à 5 V/div Taux d’échantillonnage 2 Géch/s par voie, 4 Géch/s entrelaçé Profondeur de mémoire (longueur d’enregistrement) Jusqu’à 4 Mpts Affichage 8.5" WVGA avec 64 niveaux d’intensité Taux d’actualisation des formes (max) 1000000 formes d’ondes/s Résolution verticale 8 bits Précision DC ±2% pleine échelle Dimensions 380.6 x 204.4 x 141.5 mm Poids 3.85 kg Nbre de Réf. voies Bande Code Prix Unitaire Fab. analogiques passante Commande 1+ DSOX2024A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 200MHz 208-4581 2087.00 DSOX2022A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 200MHz 208-4583 1695.00 DSOX2014A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 100MHz 208-4584 1767.00 DSOX2012A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 100MHz 208-4585 1192.00 DSOX2004A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 70MHz 208-4586 1496.00 DSOX2002A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 70MHz 208-4587 981.00 MSOX2024A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 200MHz 208-4575 2646.00 MSOX2022A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 200MHz 208-4576 2254.00 MSOX2014A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 100MHz 208-4577 2326.00 MSOX2012A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 100MHz 208-4578 1751.00 MSOX2004A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 70MHz 208-4579 2055.00 MSOX2002A+DSO2WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 70MHz 208-4580 1540.00 Réf. Nbre de voies Bande Code Prix Fab. analogiques passante Commande Unitaire DSOX3054A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 500MHz 208-4566 8332.00 DSOX3052A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 500MHz 208-4567 6384.00 DSOX3034A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 350MHz 208-4568 6126.00 DSOX3032A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 350MHz 208-4571 5092.00 DSOX3024A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 200MHz 208-4572 3240.00 DSOX3014A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 100MHz 208-4573 2697.00 DSOX3012A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 100MHz 208-4574 2242.00 16 voies numériques intégrées MSOX3054A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 500MHz 208-4559 9250.00 MSOX3052A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 500MHz 208-4560 7301.00 MSOX3034A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 350MHz 208-4561 7044.00 MSOX3032A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 350MHz 208-4562 6010.00 MSOX3024A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 200MHz 208-4563 4157.00 MSOX3014A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 4 analogiques + 16 numériques 100MHz 208-4564 3615.00 MSOX3012A+DSO3WAVEGEN+DSOXDVM 2 analogiques + 16 numériques 100MHz 208-4565 3160.00 Oscilloscopes numériques portables Modèle 2 voies Bande passante Modèle 4 voies Bande passante DSO1052B 50 MHz DSO1002A 60 MHz DSO1004A 60 MHz DSO1072B 70 MHz DSO1012A 100 MHz DSO1014A 100 MHz DSO1102B 100 MHz DSO1152B 150 MHz DSO1022A 200 MHz DSO1024A 200 MHz Oscilloscopes + Wave- Gen et Voltmètre Offerts Oscilloscopes + Wave- Gen et Voltmètre Offerts Série InfiniiVision 2000 X Série U1610A/U1620A Taux d’échantillonnage temps réel 2 Géch/sec par demi voie3, 1 Géch/sec par voie Profondeur mémoire 20 kpts par demi-voie3, 10 kpts par voie Résolution verticale 8 bits Plage verticale 2 mV/div à 10 V/div Tension d’entrée max. CAT I 300 Vrms, 400 Vcr; surtension transitoire 1.6kVpk Plage base temps: DSO102xA: 1 nsec/div à 50 sec/div DSO101xA: 2 nsec/div à 50 sec/div DSO100xA: 5 nsec/div à 50 sec/div Limite bande passante sélectionnable 20 MHz Couplage entrée DC, AC et terre Impédance d’entrée 1 MΩ ±1% en parallèle avec 18 pF ± 3 pF Dimensions 32.46cm x 15.78cm x 12.92cm (lxHxP) Plage de températures Fonctionnement: 0°C à +40°C; Hors-fonctionnement -20°C à +60°C Série InfiniiVision 3000 X Ces oscilloscopes portables amènent les tâches de dépannage et de maintenance à un nouveau niveau en réalisant des formes d’onde visible dans toutes les conditions d’éclairage. Que vous travailliez dans un environnement de faible luminosité ou sous le soleil éblouissant, l’afficheur VGA TFT LCD révolutionnaire assure que vous pouvez analyser des signaux sans effort en choisissant parmi 3 modes de visualisation (intérieur, extérieur et le mode de vision nocturne). Couplé à une profondeur mémoire profonde de 2 Mpts, ils vous permettent de capturer de long signaux non répétitifs avec d’excellentes capacités de zoom sur les graphiques sélectionnés. De plus en complétant votre expérience visuelle, l’écran de 5,7 pouces permet des aperçus du signal à analyser dans plus de précision par rapport à d’autres oscilloscopes conventionnels. Ì Affichage 8.5" haute résolution sur écran large Ì Générateur de fonctions intégré Ì Port USB Ì Commandes de recherche et navigation en face avant, idéales pour une recherche et une visualisation facile de l’activité du signal avec fonctions pause, lecture rapide, remise en arrière et en avant rapide des Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ 2 Channel DSO1052B 50MHz 209-4428 635.00 DSO1002A 60MHz 170-4738 845.00 DSO1072B 70MHz 209-4429 805.00 DSO1012A 100MHz 170-4740 1017.00 DSO1102B 100MHz 209-4430 967.50 DSO1152B 150MHz 209-4431 1466.25 DSO1022A 200MHz 170-4742 1447.00 4 Channel DSO1004A 60MHz 170-4739 1283.00 DSO1014A 100MHz 170-4741 1525.00 DSO1024A 200MHz 170-4743 1783.00 Ì Affichage 8.5" haute résolution sur écran large Ì Générateur de fonctions intégré Ì Port USB Ì Commandes de recherche et navigation en face avant, idéales pour une recherche et une visualisation facile de l’activité du signal avec fonctions pause, lecture rapide, remise en arrière et en avant rapide des formes d’ondes formes d’ondes Ì Panoramique et zoom rapide pendant l’analyse grâce à MegaZoom IV qui offre une réponse instantanée et une résolution optimale Ì Mise à l’échelle automatique, permet l’affichage rapide des signaux actifs analogiques et numériques, l’installation automatique de contrôles verticaux, horizontaux et de déclenchement pour un meilleur affichage tout en optimisant la mémoire Ì Touches dédiées pour un accès rapide aux voies numériques, de série, fonctions math et formes d’onde de référence Ì Panoramique et zoom rapide pendant l’analyse grâce à MegaZoom IV qui offre une réponse instantanée et une résolution optimale Ì Mise à l’échelle automatique, permet l’affichage rapide des signaux actifs analogiques et numériques, l’installation automatique de contrôles verticaux, horizontaux et de déclenchement pour un meilleur affichage tout en optimisant la mémoire Ì Touches dédiées pour un accès rapide aux voies numériques, de série, fonctions math et formes d’onde de référence Ì Ecran 5.7" VGA TFT LCD avec 3 modes de visualisation sélectionnables (vision intérieure, extérieure et nuit) Ì 2 Mpts de profondeur mémoire et taux d’échantillonnage de 2 Géch/s permettant une analyse détaillée des graphiques capturés Ì Bande passante de 100/200 MHz avec des voies isolées Ì Résolution de 10000 points sur l’affichage farnell.com element14.com 14 TEST ET MESURE Agilent Le générateur de fonction/Arbitraire Agilent Technologies 33210A est la dernière addition à la famille 332XX. Les formes d’onde sont générées en utilisant la synthèse numérique directe la technologie DDS qui crée des ondes sinusoïdales stables et précises à faible distorsion ainsi que des ondes carrées avec la montée et descente rapide jusqu’à 10 MHz et des vagues de rampe linéaire jusqu’à 100 kHz. Pour les signaux définis par l’utilisateur, l’option 002 offre la génération de forme d’onde arbitraire de 14-bit, 50 Méch/s sur 8K. U1610A U1620A Fonction Oscilloscope, multimète et enregistreur de données Afficheur 5.7" VGA TFT LCD Couleur Voies 2 Bande passante 100MHz 200MHz Taux d’échantillonnage 1GSa/s, 500MSa/s chaque voie 2GSa/s, 1GSa/s chaque voie Longueur d’enregistrement 120Kpts, 60Kpts chaque voie 2Mpts, 1Mpts chaque voie Couplage DC, AC, réjection HF et réjection LF Temps de montée 3.5ns 1.75ns Impédance d’entrée 1Mohm Déclenchement Edge, Graph, TV, Nth Edge, CAN, LIN Modes de déclenchement Normal, Simple, Auto Résolution affichage 10000 Tension AC/DC, RMS vrai CAT ll 1000V, CAT lll 600V Résistance 100MΩ max. Capacité 10mF max. Interface USB 2.0 Full Speed Batterie 10.8V Li-Ion Autonomie Jusqu’à 3h Formes d’onde standard Sinus 1μHz à 20MHz Carré 1μHz à 20MHz Rampe 1μHz à 200kHz Triangulaire 1μHz à 200kHz Pulsé 500μHz à 5MHz Bruit 9MHz BW typiquel Formes d’onde arbitraires Intégré montée exponentielle, chute exponentielle, rampe négative, sin(x)/x, cardiac. Gamme de fréquences 1μHz à 6MHz Longueur de la forme d’onde 2 à 64k points Résolution d’amplitude 14-bits Taux d’échantillonnage 50Méch/s Caractéristiques générales Gamme Résolution Précision Fréquence 1μHz ±(10ppm + 3pHz) Amplitude 10mVpp à 10Vpp 4 digits ±(1% de réglage + 1mVpp) Offset DC ±5V 4 digits ±(2% de réglage + 0.5% d’amp. + 2mVpp) Offset de phase +360° à -360° 0.001° 20ns Modulation AM, FM, PM, PWM, FSK, balayage, Burst Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Code Commande 1+ U1610A 100MHz 207-0920 2877.00 U1620A 200MHz 207-0919 3253.00 Description Réf. Code Commande Prix Unitaire Fab. 1+ Générateur de fonctions 33220A 133-5878 1562.00 Caractéristiques de l’oscilloscope U1602B U1604B Bande passante 20MHz 40MHz Taux d’échantillonnage max. 200 Méch/s (entrelaçage) Temps de montée 17.5ns 8.8ns Profondeur mémoire 125 kB / voie Système vertical Gamme verticale 5mV/div à 100V/div Résolution verticale 8 bits 8 bits Précision verticale DC 3% 3% Système horizontal Gamme horizontale 50ns/div à 50s/div 10ns/div à 50s/div Résolution horizontale 2ns 400ps Précision horizontale 3% 3% Déclenchement Source de déclenchement Voie 1 et Voie 2 Modes Auto, Normal, Single, Roll Déclenchements Edge, Pattern, largeur d’impulsion, vidéo Mesures automatiques Tension cr-à-cr, max, min, amplitude, top, base, overshoot, preshoot, RMS et moyenne Temps fréquence, période, largeur, rapport cyclique, temps de montée,temps de chute, retard et déphasage Maths CH1+CH2, CH1-CH2, CH2-CH1 FFT (U1604A seulement) Rectangulaire, Hanning, Hamming et Blackman-Harris windows Caractéristiques du multimètre Gammes Précision Tension AC 600mV à 600V ±(0.75% lect. + 0.2% gamme) Tension DC 600mV à 600V ±(0.3% lect. + 0.08% gamme) Résistance 600Ω à 600MΩ ±(0.5% lect. + 0.2% gamme) Capacité 60nF à 300μF ±(2% lect. + 0.2% gamme) Générateur de fonctions arbitraire Utilise les techniques DDS (Synthèse numérique directe) pour créer des signaux de sortie stables et avec faible distorsion pour des résultats précis. Le générateur de fonctions 33220A offre un accès facile à des formes d’onde standard sinusoïdales, carrées, rampes, triangulaires et pulsées et permet de créer des formes d’onde personnalisées en utilisant la fonction de Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Commande 1+ Oscilloscope 20MHz U1602B 178-0320 1210.00 Oscilloscope 20MHz avec USB U1602B-001 178-0321 1345.00 Oscilloscope 40 MHz U1604B 178-0322 1512.00 Oscilloscope 40MHz avec USB U1604B-001 178-0324 1647.00 Oscilloscopes numériques portables formes d’onde arbitraires de 50Méch/s, 14 bits et 64 K-points. La fonction pulsée de front variable, avec PWM, offre une flexibilité inégalée pour la conception, la vérification, et applications de test. Le générateur 33220A est livré avec les interfaces USB, LAN et GPIB en standard et le logiciel Intuilink pour la génération simple de formes d’onde personnalisées sur PC. Ì Isolement canal à canal avec normes de sécurité CAT III 600V Ì Capacité d’enregistrement de données et connexion USB Générateurs de fonctions arbitraires Contenu: Oscilloscope, guide de démarrage, adaptateur secteur, pack batterie, câble USB, cordon de test et sonde 10:1 (2 jeux). 33250A Ì Formes d’onde arbitraires 4-bits, 50 Méch/s, 64 k-points Ì Types de modulation: AM, FM, PM, FSK, et PWM Ì Balayage linéaire et logarithmique et fonctionnement burst Ì Gamme d’amplitude 10 mVpp à 10 Vpp Une solution 3 en 1: oscilloscope 2 voies, multimètre RMS vrai et enregistreur des données en temps réel. Un outil de qualité haute performance pour les techniciens dans les installations, maintenance, entreprises de services et industries automobiles. 33210A Ì Fonction d’enregistrement de données en temps réel Caractéristiques de l’oscilloscope: Ì Bande passante en version 20MHz et 40MHz Ì Mise à l’échelle automatique Ì Dual Waveform Math (DWM) et Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) Ì 22 mesures automatiques et avec curseur Caractéristiques du multimètre: Ì Multimètre numérique TRMS gamme automatique 6000 points Ì Mesure de tension, résistance et capacité Ì Test de diodes et de continuité l=261, H=104, P=303mm. Poids 3.4kg Ì Conforme LXI Classe C Ì Interfaces USB, GPIB et LAN Ì Mode graphique, vérification visuelle des réglages du signal Ì Logiciel IntuiLink Ì Formes d’onde 20 MHz sinus ou carré Ì Impulsion, Rampe, Triangulaire, Bruit, et DC Ì Grand affichage LCD couleur 4.5" 320x240 pixels Ì Contrôle à distance et transfert des données via le logiciel d’application PC Link Ì Connexion interface USB 1.1 Ì Support d’aide multi-langues Ì Profondeur de mémoire de 125k par voie Ì Sauvegarde de 10 formes d’onde et de configurations Ì Disponible en version avec le support pour clé USB pour un stockage de formes supplémentaires Ì Sorties 80 MHz signaux sinus et carré Ì Sinus, carré, rampe, bruit et autres signaux Ì Signaux à impulsion 50 MHz avec temps de montée/descente variables Ì Profondeur de signal arbitraire 12-bits, 200 Méch/s, 64K-points 33220A Série U1600B Accessoires inclus: Manuel d’instructions, manuel d’entretien, guide de référence, logiciel d’édition de formes Intuilink, données de test, câble USB et cordon d’alimentation. Accessories inclus: Sonde (1:1) CAT III 300 V, Sonde (10:1) CAT III 600 V, pince crocodile de mise à la terre, cordon de test, crochet, pince crocodile medium, cordon USB, cordon d’alimentation et adaptateur c.a., pack batterie Ni-MH, guide de démarrage, manuel d’utilisation sur CD et logiciel d’application PC Link. l=138, H=241, P=66mm. Poids 1.5kg farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 15 Agilent *Trueform technology: Génération de signaux révolutionnaire avec des capacités et une fidélité inégalées Contrôle total des couts, réduction de la gestion administrative, visibilité sur vos dépenses, flexibilité et personnalisation selon les besoins de votre société. farnell.com/ibuy 33509B 33510B 33519B 33520B 33511B 33512B 33521B 33522B Bande Passante 20MHz 20MHz 30MHz 30MHz Nombre de voies 1 2 1 2 Caractéristiques Signaux Gamme de Fréquence Sinus 1μHz à 20MHz 1μHz à 30MHz Gamme de Fréquence Carré 1μHz à 20MHz 1μHz à 30MHz Gamme de Fréquence Impulsion 1μHz à 20MHz 1μHz à 30MHz Gamme de Fréquence Triangle/Rampe 1μHz à 200kHz Longueur d’onde Arbitraire 8éch à 1Méch par canal Type de Modulation AM, FM, PM, FSK, BPSK, PWM, Sum, Burst, Sweep Caractéristiques des canaux Connecteur de Sortie BNC Caractéristiques des canaux Impédance de Sortie 50Ω Généralités Affichage Ecran TFT 4.3" Couleur avec rétroéclairage LED Dimensions 212.8x88.3x272.3mm Poids 3.3kg Solution gratuite d’achats intelligents en ligne Gammes Précision Tension AC 100mV à 750V ± (0.04% lect. + 0.02% de gamme) Tension DC 100mV à 1000V ± 0,001% + 0,0004% de la plage Courant AC 1A, 3A ± (0.1% lect. + 0.04% de gamme) Courant DC 10mA, 100mA, 1A, 3A ± (0.1% lect. + 0.04% de gamme) Résistance ± (0.002% lect. + 0.0005% de gamme) Fréquence 3Hz à 300kHz ± 0.006% Prix Unitaire Ref Fab. Bande Passante Nb de canaux Code Commande 1+ Générateur de Signaux 33509B 20MHz 1 214-2999 1232.00 33510B 20MHz 2 214-3000 1886.00 33519B 30MHz 1 214-3003 1382.00 33520B 30MHz 2 214-3004 2110.00 Générateur de Signaux avec Signaux Arbitraires 33511B 20MHz 1 214-3001 1456.00 33512B 20MHz 2 214-3002 2203.00 33521B 30MHz 1 214-3005 1456.00 33522B 30MHz 2 214-3006 2203.00 33250A Caractéristiques de fréquence Sinus 1 [mu]Hz à 80 MHz Carré 1 μHz à 80 MHz Impulsion 500 μHz à 50 MHz Arbitraire 1 μHz à 25 MHz Rampe 1 μHz à 1 MHz Bruit blanc Largeur de bande 50 MHz Résolution 1 μHz; excepté impulsion, 5 digits Précision (1 an) 2 ppm, 18°C à 28°C 3 ppm, 0°C à 55°C Général Alimentation 100-240 V, 50-60 Hz 100-127 V, 50-400 Hz Consommation 140 VA Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 55°C Température de stockage -30°C à 70°C Etat d’origine Configuration 4 utilisateurs Etat d’allumage défaut ou dernier Interface IEEE-488 et RS-232 Langage SCPI-1997, IEEE-488.2 Dimensions (lxHxP) posé sur table 254 x 104 x 374 mm Montage rack 213 x 89 x 348 mm Poids 4.6 kg Conforme EN61010-1, CSA1010.1, UL-311-1 Testé CEM IEC-61326-1 IEC-61000-4-3 critère B IEC-61000-4-6 critère B Vibration et choc MIL-T-28800E, Type III, Classe 5 Niveau sonore 40 dBA Description Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Commande 1+ Multimètre 34401A 133-5866 817.00 33210A Caractéristiques signaux Plage de fréquence Sinus 1 mHz à 10 MHz Plage de fréquence carré 1 mHz à 10 MHz Plage de fréquence rampe, triangle 1 mHz à 100 kHz Plage de fréquence impulsion 1 mHz à 5 MHz Bande passante bruit 7 MHz typique Général Alimentation Cat II 100 - 240 V @ 50/ 60 Hz (-5%, +10%) 100 - 120 V @ 400 Hz (± 10%) Consommation 50 VA max Environnement de fonctionnementIEC 61010 Pollution intérieure Degré 2 Température de fonctionnement 0°C à 55°C Humidité de fonctionnement 5% à 80% RH, sans condensation Altitude de fonctionnement jusqu’à 3000 mètres Température de stockage -30°C à 70°C Etat de stockage Eteint Mémoire 4 utilisateurs configurable Interface LAN LXI-C Ethernet 10/ 100 USB 2.0, GPIB Langage SCPI - 1993, IEEE-488.2 Dimensions (l x H x P) Posé sur table 261.1 mm x 103.8 mm x 303.2 mm Montage rack 212.88 mm x 88.3 mm x 272.3 mm Poids 3.4 kg (7.5 lbs) Conforme UL-1244, CSA 1010, EN61010 Testé CEM MIL-461C, EN55011, EN50082-1 Vibration et choc MIL-T-28800, Type III, Classe 5 Niveau sonore 30 dBa Temps de chauffe 1 heure Multimètre numérique de table Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ 33250A 163-7309 3489.00 33210A 163-7310 930.00 Générateurs de signaux l=254, H=104, P=374mm. Poids 3.6kg Ì Signaux arbitraires point par point vrais avec séquencement Ì Résolution de 16 bit avec gammes allant de 1mV à 10V Ì Capacité de combinaison et d’addition de signaux Ì Signaux sinusoidal avec 5x moins de distorsion d’harmonique Ì Bande passante d’impulsion élevée avec 10x moins de déviation (jitter) Ì Temps de montée et de descente de 8.4ns (plus de deux fois plus rapides que les autres générateurs) Offre les performances nécessaires pour tester un système de manière précise et rapide. Le multimètre 34401A offre une résolution, précision et vitesse rivalisant avec des multimètres beaucoup plus onéreux. Ì Mesure jusqu’à 1000V avec une résolution 61⁄2 digits Ì Précision V DC 0.0015% (24h) Ì Précision V AC 0.06% (1 an) Ì Bande passante de 3Hz à 300kHz Ì 1000 mesures/sec. directes sur le bus GPIB Ì Fonctions de test de diodes et continuité Ì Fonction Nulle, permet d’annuler la résistance au plomb et autres offsets fixes Ì Lectures Min / Max / Moy Ì Mesures directes dB et dBm Ì Gel de l’affichage Ì Mémoire interne de 512 mesures Ì Interfaces GPIB et RS-232 en standard Ì Fonctions voltmètre complet et déclenchement externe comprises, permet la synchronisation à d’autres instruments Ì Sortie TTL indiquant Passage/Echec Ì 3 languages de commande (SCPI, Agilent 3478A et Fluke 8840A /42A) Ì Livré avec logiciel PC Agilent IntuiLink, permet un travail plus facile des données capturées Ì Composants ActiveX peuvent être utilisés par les programmeurs pour le contrôle du multimètre en utilisant les commandes SCPI Ì Promotion: un jeu de test 34133A offert par Agilent pour l’achat de ce multimètre - - il suffit d’enregister son achat sur www.agilent.com/find/dmmoffer - Offre disponible jusqu’à épquisement du stock Série 33500B 34401A Les générateurs de signaux de la série 33500B avec génération de signal basée sur la technologie exclusive Trueform* offrent plus de capacités, de haute fidélité et de flexibilité que les générateurs traditionnels basés sur la synthèse numérique directe (DDS). Utilisez-les pour accélérer vos processus de développement, du début jusqu’à la fin. Accessoires inclus: Kit de test avec sonde, pinces crocodiles et grippe-fils. Manuel de fonctionnement, manuel d’entretien, rapport de test et cordon d’alimentation. La technologie Agilent Trueform offre une nouvelle alternative qui combine le meilleur de la DDS et de l’architecture point à point, vous permettant de bénéficier des deux technologies sans pour autant être entravé par leurs limites. La technologie Trueform fait appel à une technique d’échantillonnage numérique exclusive qui offre des performances inégalées au même prix réduit que celui auquel vous vous étiez habitué avec la DDS. Ì Signaux sinus et carré 10 MHz Ì Signaux à impulsion, rampe, triangle, bruit et DC Ì Générateur de signaux arbitraires 14-bits, 50 Méch/s, 8K points en option Ì Type de modulations AM, FM, et PWM Ì Opération linéaire, burst et logarithmique Ì Amplitude 10 mVpp à 10 Vpp Ì Mode graphique pour une vérification visuel des paramètres du signal Ì Connexion via USB, GPIB et LAN Ì Complètement conforme aux spécifications LXI Classe C farnell.com element14.com 16 TEST ET MESURE Agilent SUPPORT LEGISLATIF MONDIAL GRATUIT : Directives RoHS, REACH, DEEE, Eup, batteries : dernières mises à jour, livres blancs gratuits et questions-réponses en direct sur element14.com/legislation Modèle U1231A U1232A U1233A Tension DC 600mV à 600V 600mV à 600V 600mV à 600V Tension AC 600mV à 600V 600mV à 600V 600mV à 600V Courant DC – 60μA à 10A 60μA à 10A Courant AC – 60μA à 10A 60μA à 10A Résistance 600ohm à 60Mohm 600ohm à 60Mohm 600ohm à 60Mohm Fréquence 99.99Hz à 99.99kHz 99.99Hz à 99.99kHz 99.99Hz à 99.99kHz Capacité 1μF à 10mF 1μF à 10mF 1μF à 10mF Température – – -40°C à +1372°C Gammes Précision Tension AC 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, 300V ±(0.04% lect. + 0.03 de gamme) Tension DC 100mV, 1V, 10V, 100V, 300V ±(0.0015% lect. + 0.0004 de gamme) Courant AC 10mA, 100mA, 1A ±(0.1% lect. + 0.04 de gamme) Courant DC 10mA, 100mA, 1A ±(0.01% lect. + 0.004 de gamme) Résistance 100Ω, 1kΩ, 10kΩ, 100kΩ, 1MΩ, 10MΩ, 100MΩ ±(0.002% lect. + 0.0005 de gamme) Fréquence 3Hz à 300kHz ±0.006% Température -150°C à 1200°C 1.0°C Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ U1231A+U1177A 208-4544 88.13 U1232A+U1177A 208-4546 120.00 U1233A+U1177A 208-4547 147.00 Support législatif Gammes Précision Tension AC 100mV à 750V ± (0.06% lect. + 0.03% gamme) Tension DC 100mV à 1000V ± 0,003% + 0,0005% de la plage Courant AC 100μA à 3A ± (0.1% lect. + 0.04% gamme) Courant DC 100μA à 3A ± (0.1% lect. + 0.04% gamme) Résistance ± (0.01% lect. + 0.001% gamme) Capacité 1nF, 10nF, 100nF, 1μF, 10μF ± (0.4% lect. + 0.1% gamme) Température-80 à 150°C ±0.08°C Fréquence 3Hz à 300kHz ± (0.007% lect. + 0% gamme) Description Réf. Code Commande Prix Unitaire Fab. 1+ Multimètre de table 34410A 144-0376 989.00 Multimètre de table 34411A 144-0377 1574.00 Kit de test 34138A 144-0379 21.26 Multimètres numériques DMM + Adaptateur IR-vers- Bluetooth U1177A Offert Modèle Description Type Vitesse Tension Ampères Bande Offset (voie/s) max. max. passantethermique 34901A Multiplexeur 20 voies armature 2 fils 60 300V 1A 10MHz <3μV 34902A Multiplexeur 16 voies reed 2 fils 250 300V 50mA 10MHz <6μV 34903A Actionneur/ commutateur universel 20 voies SPDT / forme C 120 300V 1A 10MHz <3μV 34904A Matrice 4 x 8 armature 2 fils 120 300V 1A 10MHz <3μV 34905A Double multiplexeur 4 voies RF, 50Ω Bas commun 60 42V 0.7A 2GHz <6μV 34907A Module multifonctions 2 ports E/S numériques 8-bits 42V 400mA Totalisateur 26-bits, 100kHz 42V 100kHz 2 sorties analogiques 16-bits ±12V 10mA dc 34908A Multiplexeur unipolaire 40 voies armature 1 fil 60 300V 1A 10MHz <3μV Que ce soit sombre, bruyant, voire dangereux, le multimètre numérique de poche série U1230 vous permet de rester équipé avec des fonctions qui anticipent les pires scénarios. Le multimètre de poche à forme ergonomique vous permet déclairer la zone de test avec une lampe de poche intégrée tout en sélectionnant les fonctions de mesure en utilisant la molette rotative. Vsense effectue la détection de Multimètres numériques de table Description Réf. Code Commande Prix Unitaire Fab. 1+ Module acquisition de données 34970A 133-5867 1217.00 34972A 178-0338 1406.00 Multiplexeur - 20 voies 34901A 133-5869 366.00 Multiplexeur - 16 voies 34902A 133-5871 445.00 Actionneur/Commutateur - 20 voies 34903A 133-5872 316.00 Matrice 4x8 34904A 133-5873 395.00 Multiplexeur 4 voies RF - 50Ω 34905A 133-5874 577.00 Module multi-fonctions 34907A 133-5876 295.00 Multiplexeur - 40 voies 34908A 133-5877 377.00 l=261, H=104, P=303mm. Poids 3.72kg Module de commande / acquisition de données tension sans contact alors que la détection de continuité est rendue facile avec l’alerte sonore et le rétroéclairage clignotant. Avec la série U1230, vous travaillez mieux quelles que soient les conditions où vous vous trouvez. Ì Lampe de poche LED pour éclairer la zone de test Ì Rétroéclairage clignotant permettant une alerte visuelle supplémentaire lors des tests de continuité dans les environnements bruyants Ì Vsense pour effectuer une détection de tension sans contact Ì Capacité d’enregistrement des données (Enregistre jusqu’à 10 lectures) Ì Connectivité IR vers USB pour transférer des données vers le PC pour enregistrer Ì Stocke la valeur de mesure de courant Ì Faible impédance d’entrée pour éliminer la mesure de tension fantôme Ì Cadran anti-dérapant pour une sélection de la fonction de mesure facile Ì Indication graphique à barres et voie de mesure de fréquence l=254, H=104, P=374mm. Poids 3.6kg Les 2 modèles sont livrés avec: kit de test avec sondes et attachement CMS, rapport de test, cordon d’alimentation, câble d’interface USB, CD-ROM avec documentation et logiciel. système d’acquisition complet ou une unité de commutation économique. Les connexions de bornier à vis sur module éliminent la nécessité de blocs de borniers et la fonction d’entretien d’un relais unique est idéale pour compter chaque fermeture sur chaque commutateur permettant ainsi un entretien prévisible facile de relais. Logiciel Agilent BenchLink Data Logger livré avec le module 34970A. Ce logiciel fournit une interface Microsoft Windows connue pour la configuration de test et un affichage et analyse des données en temps réel. Il permet de faire des mesures rapides, d’exporter des données ou d’utiliser les graphes intégrés pour l’enregistrement des résultats. Ì Fonction d’enregistrement de données, avec mémoire rémanente de 50 000 mesures Caractéristiques supplémentaires pour le multimètre 34411A: Ì 50,000 mesures/sec à 41⁄2 chiffres en continu vers le PC Ì Mémoire 1 Million mesures Ì Déclenchement analogique sur niveau Ì Déclenchement programmable pré/post Ì Promotion: un jeu de test 34133A offert par Agilent pour l’achat de ce multimètre - - il suffit d’enregister son achat sur www.agilent.com/find/dmmoffer - Offre disponible jusqu’à épquisement du stock Ì Châssis à 3 emplacements avec interfaces GPIB et RS232 intégrées Ì Multimètre interne 61⁄2 chiffres (22-bits), balayage jusqu’à 250 voies par seconde Ì Un choix entre 8 modules de commutation et de contrôle Ì Conditionnement de signaux intégré pour mesures de température, tensions AC/DC, courant, résistance, fréquence et période Ì Mémoire rémanente de 50k mesures Ì Limites d’alarme haute/basse sur chaque voie, plus 4 sorties d’alarme TTL 34410A et 34411A 34970A 34410A: Ì Multimètres hautes performances 61⁄2 chiffres Ì 10,000 mesures/sec à 51⁄2 chiffres en continu vers le PC Ì 1,000 mesures/sec à 61⁄2 chiffres en continu vers le PC Ì Précision DC de base 30 PPM pour 1 an Ì Interfaces LAN, USB et GPIB en standard Ì DCV, ACV, DCI, ACI, résistance 2-fils et 4-fils, fréquence, période, continuité, et test de diodes Ì Mesures de capacité et températures Ì Gammes de mesure étendues Série U1230 Accessoires livrés: Manuels de fonctionnement et d’entretien, rapport de test et cordon d’alimentation. Logiciel Agilent Benchmark Data Logger, câble RS-232, thermocouple, vis. Les modules sont vendus séparément. Modules Un châssis 3 emplacements avec multimètre numérique intégré 61⁄2chiffres. Chaque voie peut être configurée indépendament pour mesurer une fonction parmi 11 fonctions différentes sans la nécessité d’accessoires de conditionnements de signaux. Une sélection parmi 8 modules embrochables optionnels permettant de créer un data logger compact, un farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 17 Agilent Ì Taux d’échantillonnage en temps réel de 2Géch/s et taux d’échantillonnage équivalent de 50G éch/s Ì Double fonction de base de temps d’observation des détails de forme d’onde et capacités d’analyse incomparables Ì Défilement de l’affichage en mode de balayage pour la surveillance continue des variations du signal Ì Mode XY unique qui affiche l’onde et le diagramme de Lissajous en même temps Ì Mise à jour logicielle du système par USB Ì Supporte les périphériques de stockage USB plug-and-play. Communication avec l’ordinateur à travers le dispositif USB Ì Stockage des configurations de courbes et des formes d’onde des cartes et reproduction des configurations Ì FFT intégrée Ì Multiples fonctions mathématiques des formes d’onde (y compris les additions, 25Mhz-60Mhz 4 voies Ì 2 voies Ì Affichage LCD couleur HD, résolution 320 x 240 Ì Compatible avec des accessoires de sauvegarde USB plug-and-play et capable de communiquer avec un ordinateur via cet accessoire de sauvegarde USB Ì Configuration automatique des formes d’ondes et du statut Ì Sauvegarde des formes d’ondes, installations et schéma bip, répétition des installations Ì Elargissement de la fenêtre, idéal pour l’analyse détaillée des formes et pour une vue d’ensemble avec précision Ì Mesure automatique de 19 paramètres Ì Mesure automatique de la trace du curseur Ì Enregistrement d’une simple forme et fonction rappel Ì FFT intégré Ì Multiples fonctions mathématiques (somme, soustraction, multiplication et division) Ì Fonctions Front, vidéo, largeur d’impulsion et déclenchement alternatif Ì Affichage du menu en multi-langues Les oscilloscopes DSO Tenma 4 voies à Maximum Résolution Max. Précision Tension DC 1000V 0.1mV ±(0.09%+2) Tension AC 1000V 0.1mV ±(1.0%+5) Courant DC 10A 0.1μA ±(0.1%+3) Courant AC 10A 0.1μA ±(1.5%+3) Résistance 100MΩ 0.1Ω ±(0.8%+3) Capacité 10mF 0.1nF ±(1.2%+4) Fréquence 100kHz 0.01Hz ±(0.03%+3) Température * -40 à 1000°C 0.1°C 1% + 1 °C/ * Thermocouple type K (pour U1241A et U1242A), type J (pour U1242A) Gammes Meilleur précision U1251A U1252A Tension AC 50mV à 1000V ± 0.6% + 20 points ± 0.4% + 25 points Tension DC 50mV à 1000V ± 0,03% + 5 chiffres ± 0,025% + 5 chiffres Courant AC 500μA, 5mA, 50mA, 440mA, 5A, 10A ± 0.8% + 20 points ± 0.7% + 20 points Courant DC 500μA, 5mA, 50mA, 440mA, 5A, 10A ± 0.8% + 20 points ± 0.7% + 20 points Résistance 500ohm à 500Mohm ± 0.08% + 5 points ± 0.05% + 5 points Capacité 10nF - 100mF (9 gammes) ± 1% + 5 points ± 1% + 5 points Température -200 à 1372°C 0.3% + 3°C 0.3% + 3°C Frequence 99.999Hz à 999.99kHz ± 0.02% + 3 points ± 0.02% + 3 points Batterie 9V Alcaline 7.2V Rechargeable mémoire numérique offrent une face avant conviviale avec des indications claires permettant l’accès à toutes les fonctions de base pour une utilisation facile. Les boutons de mise à l’échelle et de position de tous les canaux sont disposés de façon optimale pour une utilisation intuitive. La conception est basée sur les pratiques familières d’instruments traditionnels, les utilisateurs 72-8395 72-8225 72-8230 Bande passante 25 MHz 40 MHz 60 MHz Temps de montée <14ns <8.7ns <5.8ns 72-8240 72-8245 72-8250 Bande passante 100 MHz 150 MHz 200 MHz Réf. Code Commande Prix Temps de montée <3.5ns <2.3ns <1.8ns Unitaire Fab. 1+ U1241B+U1177A 208-4540 179.00 U1242B+U1177A 208-4541 197.00 Ref Code Commande Prix Unitaire Fab. 1+ U1251B+U1177A 208-4538 340.00 U1252B+U1177A 208-4539 365.00 peuvent utiliser les nouvelles unités sans avoir à passer beaucoup de temps dans l’apprentissage et la familiarisation avec le fonctionnement. Pour un ajustement plus rapide pour faciliter les tests, il ya une touche Auto pour afficher instantanément la forme d’onde appropriée et la position de gamme. Multimètre numérique portable + Adaptateur IR-vers- Bluetooth U1177A Offert Taux d’échantillonnage 500Méch/s Taux d’échantillonnage (72-8395) 250Méch/s Type de déclenchement Front, Impulsion, Vidéo et Alternatif Nbre mesures automatiques 28 Dimensions (lxHxP) 320x150x130mm Poids 4kg U1241B et U1242B Multimètre Numérique Portable + Adaptateur IR-vers- Bluetooth U1177A Offert Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Code Commande 1+ 72-8395 25MHz 173-9448 333.52 72-8225 40MHz 173-9443 375.34 72-8230 60MHz 173-9444 438.07 72-8240 100MHz 173-9445 621.03 72-8245 150MHz 173-9446 707.24 72-8250 200MHz 173-9447 997.41 d’harmonique, double température (T1, T2, T1-T2) Ì Manuel ou auto-calibration Ì Beeper de continuité et test de diode Ì Rétroéclairage ajustable Ì Enregistrement Min/Max Oscilloscopes numériques Multimètres de poche complet qui offre un maximum de polyvalence pour répondre aux besoins actuels et futurs. Multimètre Portable double écran 41⁄2 digits avec précision jusqu’à 0,025%, valeur efficace vraie, la température, la capacité et les mesures de fréquence enregistrement des données et connectivité PC. Ì Affiche de 50000pts sur les 2 écrans Ì Mémoire manuel de 100pts Ì Mesure RMS vraie Ì Mesure dBm Ì Test de Diode Ì Mesure de rapport cyclique Ì Mesure de largeur de pulsation Ì Maintien de la valeur crête Ì Connectivité IR vers USB (Cable U1173B vendu séparément) Ì Température de Fonctionnement 20°C à + 55°C Ì Conforme norme IEC61010-1 Cat III 1000V Ì Conception surmoulé robuste avec support inclinable U1252B caractéristiques supplémentaires : Ì Compteur de Fréquence 20 MHz Ì Générateur programmable de signaux carré Ì Chargeur de batterie intégré Ì Supporte les thermocouples de type J Oscilloscopes numériques U1251B and U1252B La série de multimètres U1240B vous permet de vérifier plus avec des gammes de mesure plus large, elle dispose d’une lectures True-RMS sur un écran 10 000 points. Le rétro-éclairage ajustable permet de visualiser, même sous un éclairage réduit, et de prolonger la durée de vie de la batterie. Fourni avec un certificat d’étalonnage et un rapport d’essai. Le U2142B a des fonctionnalités supplémentaires telles qu’un datalogging manuel, rapport d’harmonique, deux températures et capacité de température différentielle. Ì Support de sonde intégré Ì Coque moulée Ì Protection CAT III 1000V OV Ì Certifié CE, CSA, et UL Ì Alimentation 4 piles AAA Ì Dimensions (HxLxp): 194 x 92 x 58mm Accessoires Inclus: Sacoche de transport, Batterie, kit de cordon de test standard U1160A, Guide de démarrage rapide, Mode d’emploi, Logiciel PC, Drivers, adaptateur secteur AC (U1252B seulement). Ì Afficheur 10 000 points Ì Précision de tension DC 0.09% basic et mesure true-RMS Ì Fonctions basiques: DCV, DCI, ACV, ACI, résistance, fréquence, continuité, test de diode Ì Fonctions avancées (U2141A): capacitance, température, compteur de switch Ì Fonctions avancées (U2142A): capacitance, température, compteur de switch rapport Livré avec piles, certificat d’étalonnage, cordons, guide de démarrage rapide et CD de référence produit farnell.com element14.com 18 TEST ET MESURE Tenma soustractions, multiplications et division) Ì Edge, vidéo, impulsion, pente et fonctions déclenchement alterné Ì Mesure automatique de 24 tests de paramètres de forme d’onde et personnalisation Ì Configurations multiples AUTO pour plus de flexibilité Ì Messages visuels d’aide du système 60Mhz - 2 ou 4 canaux 72-10155 72-10160 72-10165 72-10170 Nb de canaux 2 Bande Passante 40MHz 60MHz 100MHz 200MHz Impédance 1MΩ Taux d’échantillonage Max 100MEch/s 150MEch/s 250MEch/s 200MEch/s Couplage AC, DC, GND Résolution Verticale 8 bits Mode de déclenchement Auto, Normal, Single Déclenchement Pente +/- Type de déclenchement Front montant, Front descendant Source de déclenchement CH1, CH2, EXT Taille mémoireTampon 10K à 32KB par Canall Mathématique FFT, addition, soustraction, multiplication, division Système d’exploitation Windows Me, Windows NT, Windows 2000,Windows XP, VISTA Dimensions 190x100x35mm 72-9355 72-9360 72-9365 Bande-passante 60MHz 100MHz 200MHz Temps de montée 5.8ns 3.5ns 1.8ns Taux d’échantillonnage 250Méch/s 500Méch/s 1GSPS Type de déclenchement Niveau, impulsion, video et alterné Mesures d’onde auto 27 Compteur de fréquence Compteur de fréquence 6 digits Ports USB Math Addition, soustraction, multiplication, division, FFT Interface Affichage couleur ou mono sélectionnable Alimentation Batterie ou adaptateur secteur Autonomie de la batterie 3h Courant AC 6mA, 60mA, 600mA, 6A Courant DC 6mA, 60mA, 600mA, 6A Tension AC 600mV, 6V, 60V, 600V, 700V Tension DC 600mV, 6V, 60V, 600V, 1000V Capacité 6nF, 6mF, 60nF, 600nF, 6μF, 60μF, 600μF Résistance 600Ω, 6MΩ, 60MΩ, 6kΩ, 60kΩ, 600kΩ Nbr de points d’affichage 5999 Poids 1.8kg Dimensions 268 x 168x 60mm Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Bande Passante Code Commande 1+ 72-10155 40MHz 214-6562● 292.95 72-10160 60MHz 214-6564● 339.45 72-10165 100MHz 214-6565● 447.95 72-10170 200MHz 214-6566● 509.95 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Code Commande 1+ 72-9355 60MHz 206-1825 806.82 72-9360 100MHz 206-1826 1027.14 72-9365 200MHz 206-1827 1174.02 Oscilloscopes DSO USB 72-10155 72-10160 Verticale Nb de Canaux 4 2 Bande Passante 60MHz Temps de montée 5.8ns Impédance 1MΩ Sensibilité 10mV/div à 5V/div Couplage AC, DC, GND Résolution Verticale 8 bit Largeur de Mémoire 10K à 16M par Canal Horizontal Taux d’échantillonage Temps réel 200Méch/s Précision base de temps 5ns/div à 1000s/div Déclenchement Source CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, EXT Mode Edge, Pulse, Video, Alternative Mesures Mesure de Tension Vpp, Vamp, Vmax, Vmin, Vtop, Vmid, Vbase, Vavg, Vrms, Vcrms, Preshoot, Overshoot Mesure de Temps Frequence, Periode, Temps de Montée, Temps de Descente, Cycle Opération +, -, ×, ÷, FFT, Invert Gamme de Tension 10mV à 5V, 100mV à 50V, 1V à 500V, 10V à 5kV, 100V à 50kV, 200mV à 100V FFT Rectangle, Hanning, Hamming, Blackman Window Math Addition, soustraction, multiplication, division Signaux Arbitraire Fréquence 25MHz DAC 2K à 200MHz ajustable Résolution verticale 12 bit Impédance 50 Général Interface USB 2.0 Tension d’alimentation 8V à 36V Dimensions 255x190x45mm Poids 1kg Prix Unitaire Ref Fab. Nb de Canaux Code Commande 1+ 72-10177 4 214-6567● 618.45 72-10179 2 214-6568● 401.45 Ì Interface USB2.0 sans aucune alimentation externe requise Ì 23 fonctions de mesures Ì Test Réussite/Echec Ì Forme d’onde moyenne, persistance, intensité, inversion, addition, soustraction, multiplication, division, graphe X-Y Ì Sauvegarde de la forme d’onde dans les formats suivants : fichier texte, image jpg/bmp, MS Excel/Word Oscilloscope portable 72-8725 72-8727 Bande passante 100MHz 200MHz Gamme d’échantillonnage Méthode d’échantillonnage Temps réel Equivalent Taux d’échantillonnage 2Géch/s 50Géch/s Entrée Couplage d’entrée DC, AC ou mise à la terre (AC, DC, GND) Impédance d’entrée 1MΩ±2%, et 16±3pF Horizontal Longueur d’enregistrement 1024k Profondeur d’enregistrement 24k(Max) Fonctions multimètre Tension DC Gamme: 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V Précision: ± (1% + 5 digits) Tension AC Gamme: 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V Précision: ± (1.2% +5 digits) Affichage Type d’affichage LCD 5.7" Résolution 320xRGBx240 (TFT) Environment Température Temp. de fonctionnement: 0°C - +40°C Hors fonctionnement: -20°C - +60°C Oscilloscopes DSO USB 2 voies Ì Plusieurs DSO peuvent être connectés sur un seul PC, afin d’étendre le nombre de canaux Ì Labview\VB\VC\Delphi\C++ Ì Est adapté pour ordinateur portable, ligne de maintenance produit, peut être utilisé facilement en entreprise Ì Interface Multi-Langue Ì Générateur de signaux arbitraire Ì Sortie de signaux arbitraire 25MHz ,(sinus jusqu’à 75MHz) 200MEch/s DDS, résolution verticale de 12bits Ì Compteur de Fréquence, analyse de FFT Ì Tension d’entrée sélectionnable de 8 à 36V pour les tests sur alimentation véhicule Ì Interface "plug and play" USB 2.0 Ì Plus de 20 fonctions de mesures automatique, Test Echec/Réussite, est adapté pour les applications d’ingénierie Ì Excellent conception industriel, interface similaire au oscilloscope de table Ì Interface Multilangue Contenu du Kit: Oscilloscope, CD de Logiciel, Sondes, Mode d’emploi et cordon USB Ì Buzzer de continuité Ì Diode Ì Diagramme de tendance Ì Gamme manuelle / Auto Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Bande passante Code Commande 1+ 72-8725 100MHz 183-6063 749.53 72-8727 200MHz 206-1824 1211.76 Ì Bande Passante 60MHz Ì Déclenchement Externe Ì Taux d’échantillonnage Temps réel 200MEch/s Ì Largeur de mémoire de 10k à 16M par canal 40Mhz-200Mhz - 2 canaux Contenu: Oscilloscope portable, 2 sondes, 2 convertisseurs courant / tension , cordon d’alimentation, adaptateur DC, cordon de test et manuel. Contenu du Kit: Oscilloscope, CD de Logiciel, Sondes, Valise de Transport, Cordon USB, Adaptateur secteur et cordon BNC. Trois bonnes raisons de choisir les oscilloscopes et les sondes Tektronix © 2012 Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and pending. TEKTRONIX and the Tektronix logo are registered trademarks. © 2012 Keithley Instruments Inc. All rights reserved. Pour des mesures précises et fiables, rendez-vous sur les sites: www.farnell.com/tektronix Précision La precision des mesures commence à la pointe de la sonde. Il y a donc un avantage à posséder une sonde adaptée à votre oscilloscope et à votre application. Chaque sonde issue de notre portfolio étendu de produits, est conçue afin de fournir des mesures précises et est parfaitement adaptée aux meilleurs oscilloscopes du marché. Avec plus de 100 modèles disponibles, vous trouverez la sonde qui vous convient le mieux. Performances Les oscilloscopes MSO/DPO de Tektronix fournissent plus de 20 voies afin que vous puissiez analyser les signaux analogiques et numériques en n’utilisant qu’un seul instrument. Les modules d’analyse de bus série et parallèle et de mesure de puissance automatisée simplifient et accelerent le débogage de vos conceptions les plus complexes. Choix Gràce à l’ajout recent de la gamme Keithley au portfolio de Tektronix, vous avez désormais accès à l’une des gammes de produits les plus vaste du secteur. Ainsi, les performances et la facilité d’utilisation que vous attendez de nos oscilloscopes sont désormais disponibles pour tous vos besoins – générateurs de signaux, multimètres, alimentations et programmateurs/compteurs, instruments de test électrique, systèmes d’acquisition de données, commutateurs et accessoires. À VENIR : Nouveaux modèles d’oscilloscopes, Bandes passantes plus faibles, Des prix réduits, Garantie 5 ans farnell.com element14.com 20 TEST ET MESURE Tenma Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 72-7730A 210-0035 99.65 72-7732A 210-0036 145.71 72-9380A 210-0037 207.78 210mm x 152mm x 305mm Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. Ce multimètre mesure: tensions et des courants AC/DC, résistance, fréquence, capacité, température, tachymetre et test de continuité et diodes Besoin d’un conseil technique 72-7730A 72-7732A 72-9380A Gamme de mesure Tension AC 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V 4V, 40V, 400V, 1000V Tension DC 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V, 1000V Courant AC 200μA à 10A 400μA, 4000μA, 40A, 400mA, 10A Courant DC 200μA à 10A 400μA, 4000μA, 40A, 400mA, 10A Résistance 200ohm, 2kohm, 20kohm, 200kohm, 2Mohm, 20Mohm 400ohm, 4kohm, 40kohm, 400kohm, 4Mohm, 40Mohm Capacité 20nF, 200nF, 2μF, 20μF, 200μF, 2mF, 20mF 40nF, 400nF, 4μF, 40μF, 400μF, 4mF, 40mF Fréquence 20Hz à 200Hz 40Hz à 400Hz Température -40°C à +1000°C Puissance – – 2500W Général Nbre de point 19999 39999 Taille LCD 73 x 50mm Dimensions 200 x 93 x 40mm Poids 384g 72-9275 72-9280 Courant AC – 400μA, 4000μA, 40mA, 400mA, 4A, 10A Courant DC 200mA, 10A 400μA, 4000μA, 40mA, 400mA, 4A, 10A Tension AC 200V à 750V 4V, 40V, 400V, 1000V Tension DC 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V 4V, 40V, 400V, 1000V Capacité – 10nF, 100nF, 1000nF, 10μF, 100μF Fréquence 2kHz 10Hz à 1MHz Résistance 200ohm, 2kohm, 20kohm, 200kohm, 2Mohm, 20Mohm 400ohm, 4kohm, 40kohm, 400kohm, 4Mohm, 40Mohm Température -40°C à +1000°C -40°C à +537 °C Mode Max / Min ¤ ✓ Mode Veille ¤ ✓ Rétroéclairage ¤ ✓ RS232 (USB) ¤ ✓ Nb de points 1999 3999 Alimentation 9V Taille LCD 60 x 54mm 65 x 43mm Poids 352g 362g Dimensions 179 x 88 x 39mm 180 x 87 x 47mm l=105, H=240, P=310mm. Poids 2.4 kg Dialoguez en temps réel avec l’un de nos conseillers techniques sur farnell.com 72-8690 72-8695 72-8700 Tension sortie Voie 1, Voie 2 0-32V 0-32V 0-32V Voie 3 5V Courant de sortie Voie 1, Voie 2 0-1A 0-3A 0-5A Voie 3 2A Effet surcharge CV ≤ 1 x 10-4 +2mV, CC ≤ 2mA Ondulation et Bruit CV ≤ 1mVrms, CC ≤ 1mArms Régulation CV -20mV (Valeur typ.), CC -50mV (Valeur typ.) Erreur Tracking 5 x 10 -3 +2mV Ref Prix Unitaire Fab. Gamme Code Commande 1+ 72-9275 Manuel 205-9979 27.54 72-9280 Auto 205-9980 60.18 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 72-8690 183-6056 153.69 72-8695 183-6057 163.10 72-8700 183-6058 202.83 Gammes Précision Tension AC 600mV/6V/60V/600V/1000V ±(0.6%+5) Tension DC 600mV/6V/60V/600V/1000V ±(0.3%+2) Courant AC 600μA/6mA/60mA/600mA/10A ±(1.0%+5) Courant DC 600μA/6mA/60mA/600mA/10A ±(0.5%+3) Résistance 600Ω/6kΩ/60kΩ/600kΩ/6MΩ/60MΩ ±(0.5%+2) Capacité 6nF/60nF/600nF/6μF/60μF/600μF/6mF ±(2.0%+5) Température -40°C - 1000°C ±(1.0%+3) Fréquence 6kHz/60kHz/600kHz/6MHz/60MHz ±(0.1%+3) (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) Multimètre numérique Ì RMS Vraie Ì Interface USB Ì Test de diode Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Multimètre de table 72-1016 119-6432 157.59 Alimentations DC Ì Alimentations de laboratoire avec Multimètre Automobile Portable Multimètre de table – RMS vrai Ì Bande passante 100KHz Ì Gamme automatique Contenu du kit: Multimètre, batterie, cordons de test, pinces crocodiles, interface USB, logiciel PC, sacoche de transport, sonde de température, manuel d’utilisation (en anglais) Un multimètre de table numérique pour la mesure de signaux AC en RMS vrai avec un affichage à LED. Livré avec des cordons de test, un cordon d’alimentation, un manuel d’utilisation, une sonde de température, des pinces crocodiles, une borne de test multifonctions, un câble d’interface RS232C et un logiciel de communication. Contenu du kit 72-9275 : Cordon de test, batterie, Mode d’emploi Anglais, étui et sonde de température de contact ondulation et bruit faibles Ì 2 LEDs 3 digits pour indiquer la tension et le courant Ì Modes tension et courant constants Ì Fonctionnement en série ou en parallèle Ì Livré ave cordones de test, manuel (en anglais), cordons avec prises européenne et anglaise Contenu du Kit 72-9280 : Cordon de Test, batterie, Mode d’emploi Anglaisl, Cable d’interface RS232 et logiciel. Ì Affichage de l’autonomie faible de la batterie et mode veille Ì Se connecte à un PC via une interface RS232 (logiciel et cordon fournis) Ì Alimentation secteur ou par 6 piles C (non fournies) Ì Compartiment pour accessoires intégré Ì Manuel utilisateur en anglais Ì Test de Continuité (sonore) Ì Test de Diode Ì Fonction maintien des données Ì Indication batterie faible Ì Affichage LCD 5,999 points Ì Rétro-éclairage, affichage complet Ì Mesure de courant jusqu’à 10A Ì Gamme automatique Ì Mesure RMS vraie avec une bande passante 100kHz Ì Tests de diode, de continuité et de transistor Ì Mode Max/Min et sauvegarde des données 72-1016 farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 21 Tenma Thermomètre infra-rouge compact pour toutes les applications standard. 72-94XX Tension de Sortie 250V / 500V / 1000V Courant 250V / 500V 500V / 1000V 1000V / 2500V Mesure de Tension 1000VDC / 750VAC Alimentation 6 x 1.5V batterie Taille LCD 70.6 x 34mm Courant de Court Circuit <2mA Dimensions 150 x 100 x 71mm Mesure de résistance d’isolement 250V 500V 1000V Poids 500g Gamme de températures -18°C à 280°C Précision d’affichage ±2°C/±2% (Condition 23°C ±2°C) Répétabilité <±0.5°C / ±0.5% Résolution de l’affichage 0.1 D:S (Distance à la taille du Spot) 10 à 1 Temps de réponse 500mS Taille LCD 22 x 22m Dimensions 145 x 80 x 40mm Poids 185g Caractéristiques dynamiques Bande passante DC à 5MHz (petit signal) Temps de montée d’impulsion <70ns Abérrations d’impulsion <±5% (<1% avec réglage bande passante basse) Bruit 6mA rms en pleine bande passante ou 1.5mA rms en bande passante faible (équivalent en tore) Réglages de filtre Pleine bande passante, 500kHz ou 2Hz Mode en piste CI Echelle 1 Amp par Volt ou 2 Amp par Volt (avec réglage du contrôle pour convenir à la gamme de largeur de la piste 0·2mm à 6.5mm) Caractéristiques Générales Tension alimentation 5.2V DC avec adaptateur de ligne AC, 100V à 240V nominal 50/60Hz Tension de sortie max. ±10V, correspondant à ±2·5mT (mesure de champ) ou ±10A (fil) Tension de la piste max. 300Vrms CAT II (circuits connectés directement à la prise secteur basse tension) ou 600Vrms CAT I (circuits non connectés directement à la prise secteur basse tension) Température max. de la piste Temp de fonctionnement max. de la pointe de la sonde: 150°C Certifications Conformes EN61010-1 (Sécurité) et EN61326 (EMC) Ref Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 72-9400 206-4096 60.18 Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Commande 1+ 72-7224 128-3640 52.79 72-7226 128-3641 79.97 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 72-8730 183-6064 48.30 Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Commande 1+ IPROBER 520 190-8148 615.17 Testeur de résistance d’Isolement 72-9480 72-9485 72-9490 Gamme de mesure Tension AC 4V, 40V, 400V, 600V 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V, 600V 15V, 100V, 300V, 600V Tension DC 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V, 600V 400mV, 4V, 40V, 400V, 600V – Courant AC – 40A, 1000A 40A, 100A, 400A, 1000A Courant DC 40A, 600A 40A, 1000A – Capacité 4nF, 40nF, 400nF, 4μF, 40μF, 100μF – – Fréquence 10Hz à 10MHz 4kHz, 40kHz, 400kHz, 4MHz, 40MHz 20Hz à 500Hz Température -40°C à +1000°C – – Résistance 400ohm, 4kohm, 40kohm, 400kohm, 4Mohm, 40Mohm 400ohm, 4kohm, 40kohm, 400kohm, 4Mohm, 40Mohm – Puissance active – – 0.01kW à 600kW Puissance apparente – – 0.01kVA à 600kVA Puissance réactive – – 0.01kVAr à 600kVAr Facteur de puissance – – 0.3 ∼ 1 Angle de phase – – 0° ∼ 360° Énergie active – – 1 ∼ 9999kWh Général Nbre de point 3999 9999 4000 Puissance 9V 9V 6V Dimensions 208 x 76 x 30mm 286 x 105 x 45mm 303 x 112 x 39mm Poids 260g 533g 601g Ì Alarme visuelle et sonore Ì Indication Batterie Faible prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 72-9480 209-9730 49.73 72-9485 209-9732 108.38 72-9490 209-9733 151.73 Thermomètre infra-rouge Sonde de courant pour piste CI l=90 H=260 P=45mm. Poids 530g Aim I-prober 520 Idéale pour les applications d’usage général, cette pince compacte mesure la tension CA/CC, le courant CA/CC, la résistance, la fréquence et le rapport cyclique. Ì Affichage 3999 points, gamme automatique Ì Impédance d’entrée 10MΩ Ì Diamètre de la pince: 25mm Ì Mode relatif Ì Test de diode et test de continuité sonore Ì Gel du max. et gel de l’affichage Ì Mode veille et indicateur de faible batterie Ì Alimentée par 1 pile 9V (livrée) Ì Livrée avec sacoche avec zip, cordons de test et manuel (en anglais) En plus, pour le modèle 72-7226: Ì Mesure AC en RMS vrai Pinces ampèremétriques avec fréquence La sonde Aim I-prober 520 est un testeur de courant unique. La mesure de courant nécessite normalement d’être passé au travers d’une boucle magnétique fermée, en utilisant typiquement une pince. Cette pince convient pour les câbles individuels mais ne peut être utilisée pour la mesure de courant sur des pistes CI. La sonde I-Prober 520 Pinces de mesure Ì Fonctions: résistance, résistance, tension DC et AC Ì Gamme Automatique Ì Gamme automatique Ì sauvegarde des données Ì RMS Vraie ( (72-9485 and 72-9490 seulement) Ì interface USB (72-9490 seulement) Ì Mono ou triphasé (72-9490 seulement) 72-7224 et 72-7226 utilise une mesure de champ H positionnelle. En positionnant la pointe isolée de la sonde sur la piste CI, le courant qui passe dans cette piste peut être observée et mesurée. La sonde I-Prober 520 est livrée avec un clip tore qui permet de la convertir en une sonde de circuit magnétique fermée pour la mesure du courant dans un fil. Ce testeur d’isolement mesure résistance, résistance d’isolement et tension AC/DC. Contenu du kit 72-9485: Multimètre, cordons de test, batterie, manuel et boite de transport Contenu du Kit: Mesureur d’isolement, cordon de test, sonde de test, pince crocodile, sac de transport, strap, 6 x 1.5 V batterie (LR14) et mode d’emploi. Contenu du kit 72-9480: Multimètre, cordons de test, batterie, manuel,sonde de température et sac de transport Ì Mesure de courant au travers d’une sonde isolée Ì Gamme dynamique de 10mA à 20A crête à crête Ì Large bande passantez de DC à 5MHz Ì Faible bruit équivalent à <6mA rms Ì 300V Cat II Ì Peut être connectée à tout oscilloscope Ì Haute précision de la sonde de champ H à usage général Ì Peut se convertir en une sonde de courant en circuit magnétique fermée Contenu du kit 72-9490: Multimètre, cordons de test, batterie, manuel, pinces crocodiles, câble d’interface USB avec logiciel et boite de transport farnell.com element14.com 22 TEST ET MESURE TTI WAVEACE 1001 WAVEACE 1002 WAVEACE 1012 WAVEACE 2002 WAVEACE 2004 Verticale Bande passante 40MHz 60MHz 100MHz 70MHz 70MHz Temps de montée 8.8ns 5.8ns 3.5ns 5ns 5ns Voies Entrée 2 2 2 2 4 Résolution verticale 8 bits Acquisition Échantillonnage 2 GS/s (interleave), 1 GS/s (toutes voies) CPX400D et CPX400DP Ref Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ Sortie Simple QL355.. 207-7420 439.00 QL355P.. 207-7421 622.00 QL564. 207-7424 439.00 QL564P. 207-7426 622.00 Sortie Triple QL355T. 207-7422 853.00 QL355TP. 207-7423 1061.00 QL564T 207-7427 853.00 QL564TP 207-7428 1061.00 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ Générateurs avec interfaces USB et LAN uniquement TG5011 50 MHz 179-1442 1075.00 TG2511 25 MHz 182-5613 996.00 Générateurs avec interfaces USB, LAN et GPIB TG5011G 25 MHz 190-8150 1222.13 TG2511G 25 MHz 190-8151 1096.84 Alimentation de précision numérique QL Générateurs de fonctions/ arbitraire/Impulsion de 25MHz et 50MHz Ì Modèle Simple ou triple sorties Ì Mode de fonctionnement liés de sorties principales (modèles T) Ì Sortie Auxiliaire variable de 1V à 6V à 3A (modèles T) Ì 35V/5A 105W max. ou 56V/4A 112W max. Ì Régalage par entrée numérique directe ou par roue de sélection Ì Résolution de 1mV à la tension de sortie max Ì Multiple gammes pour augmenter la flexibilité de courant Ì Excellent bruit, régulation et dynamiques Ì Multiple réglage en mémoire Ì Protection incluant OVP et OCP Ì Commande à distance sélectionnable pour fournir une parfaite régulation de charge Ì Compact pour montage en rack Ì Duplique la puissance et les bornes de détection à l’arrière (modèles P) Ì Interface GPIB, RS232, LAN et USB (modèle P) Ì Interface Utilisateur avancée avec contrôle numérique et roue de sélection Ì Pour plus d’information, merci de vous référer à la fiche technique sur notre site www.farnell.com Série TG5xx11 Oscilloscopes numériques Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Interfaces Code Commande 1+ CPX400D — 185-3729 1037.00 CPX400DP RS-232, USB, LAN (LXI), GPIB 179-1444 1251.00 Ì Gamme de fréquence 1μHz à 25MHz ou 50MHz; résolution 14 digits ou 1μHz Ì Formes d’onde standard comprennent: sinus, carré, rampe, impulsion, sin(x)/x, exposants et bruit Ì Mode générateur d’impulsion vrai, avec délai variable et montée/descente variable Ì Formes d’ondes arbitraires jusqu’à 128K points à jusqu’à 125Méch/s Ì Possibilité de sauvegarde des formes d’onde sur clés USB Ì Large LCD avec affichage des formes d’ondes et du texte en simultané Ì Modulations interne/externe complètes qui comprennnent AM, FM, PM, PWM et FSK Ì Sortie crête-à-crête 20mV à 20V à partir de 50 Ohms ; plus sorties de fonctions auxiliaires multiples Ì Sauvegarde de nombreuses installations d’instrument dans une mémoire non-volatile Ì Demi-rack 2U avec buffer protégé et poignée multi-positions Ì Livré avec logiciel "Waveform Manager Plus" pour Windows Ì Programmable à partir des interfaces USB et LAN; Conforme LXI classe C Ì Conformes EN61010-1, EN61326 Ì Pour plus d’informations, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com La série QL sont des alimentations linéaires régulées offrant des performances supérieures, y compris une très grande précision et un contrôle total numérique. La puissance de sortie est supérieure à 100 watts par sortie principale et des gammes sélectionnable permettent une augmentation du courant de sortie à des tensions inférieures. Les réglages peuvent être effectués par entrée numérique ou par roues de sélection. La Mémoire non volatile est prévue pour un rappel instantané des paramètres précédents. Les versions P intègre une interface de bus isolé supportant les normes GPIB, RS232, LAN et USB. Alimentations standard ou programmable, double sortie, 840W PowerFlex WaveAce™ Ì Bande passante 40 MHz, 60 MHz, 70 MHz, 100 MHz, 200 MHz et 300 MHz Ì Échantillonnage jusqu’à 2 GS/s Ì Mémoire ’Long Waveform’ jusqu’à 1 Mpts/ Voie (2 Mpts interleave) Ì Trigger avancé: Edge, Pulse Width, Video, Slope (Rise Time) Ì Afficheur 7" couleur sur tous les modèles La CPX400DP est une version programmable de l’alimentation CPX400A. Elle dispose de toute une gamme d’interfaces et de plusieurs fonctions de contrôle local comme le suivi isolé et verrouillé. L’alimentation CPX400D comprend une gamme complète d’interfaces de contrôle numérique et duplique les terminaux à l’arrière. l = 240mm, H = 100mm, L = 355mm, Poids = 2.55kg Rack de montage La série TG5xx11 est la dernière et la plus avancée des générateurs de fonctions numériques de TTi. Il utilise la dernière technologie FPGA qui permet de réaliser une fréquence beaucoup plus élevée que d’autres générateurs dans la même gamme de prix. Il incorpore un affichage graphique complet et offre des fonctions de formes d’ondes standard de haute qualité, des formes d’ondes arbitraires haute vitesse et un générateur d’impulsion complet. Les modulations numériques internes et externes sont disponibles en utilisant tout type de formes d’onde. Ì 32 mesures automatiques Ì Interface utilisateur Multi-langue Aide ’Context Sensitive’ Ì Espace de stockage interne large pour les signaux et la configuration Ì Quatre fonctions math plus FFT Ì USB host et device pour imprimantes, mémoires Flash et contrôle par PC Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Un montage en rack 4U est disponible qui peut accepterun maximum de trois unités simples ou une simple plus une triple. Des obturateurs sont disponibles pour les postes inutilisés. Ì Deux sorties isolées, indépendantes ou en suivi Ì Régulation PowerFlex avec une puissance totale de 840 W Ì Jusqu’à 60V et 20A avec 420W pour chaque sortie Ì Suivi offrant jusqu’à 120V en série ou 40A en parallèle Ì Fonction S-Lock pour le réglage de la tension et du courant Ì Boutons de contrôle permettant d’avoir une gamme fixe ou de fonctionner en mode PowerFlex Ì Boîtier 3U demi-rack, connecteurs en face avant et arrière (CPX400DP uniquement) Ì Interfaces, RS232, USB, LAN (avec LXI) et GPIB (CPX400DP uniquement) Ì Sécurité & EMC conforme EN61010-1, EN61326 Ì Pour plus d’informations, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 23 Lecroy Acquisition Mémoire 1 Mpts/V 12 kpts/V Mémoire maximum 2 Mpts (interleave) Enregistrement Math et Signaux Mesure Amplitude, moyenne, Largeur salve de base,, cyclique RMS, facteur de marche +, - Duty Cycle, Temps de descente, Fréquence, maxi, Moyenne, Min, dépassement, crête à crête, période, phase, preshoot, temps de montée, RMS, Haut, + Largeur, -. Largeur Plus de 8 paramètres avancés pour bord à bord les mesures temporelles Math Additionner, Soustraire, Multiplier, Diviser, FFT (jusqu’à 1 kpts avec rectangulaire, Von Hann, de Hamming ou Blackman) WAVEACE 2012 WAVEACE 2014 WAVEACE 2022 WAVEACE 2024 WAVEACE 2032 WAVEACE 2034 Vertical Bande passante 100MHz 100MHz 200MHz 200MHz 300MHz 300MHz Temps de monté 3.5ns 3.5ns 1.75ns 1.75ns 1.2ns 1.2ns Nbre d’entrée 2 4 2 4 2 4 Résolution verticale 8 bits Acquisition Echantillonnage 2 GS/s (interleave), 1 GS/s (toutes voies) Mémoire 12 kpts/V Mémoire max 24 kpts Enregistreur mesure, mathématiques et Wave Mesure Amplitude, moyenne, Largeur salve de base,, cyclique RMS, facteur de marche +, - Duty Cycle, Temps de descente, Fréquence, maxi, Moyenne, Min, dépassement, crête à crête, période, phase, preshoot, temps de montée, RMS, Haut, + Largeur, -. Largeur Plus de 8 paramètres avancés pour bord à bord les mesures temporelles Additionner, Soustraire, Multiplier, Diviser, FFT (jusqu’à 1 kpts avec rectangulaire, Von Hann, de Hamming ou Blackman fenêtres) MXs-B Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande passante Nbre d’entrée Code Commande 1+ WAVEACE 1001 40MHz 2 210-2114 710.00 WAVEACE 1002 60MHz 2 210-2115 910.00 WAVEACE 1012 100MHz 2 210-2116 1140.00 WAVEACE 2002 70MHz 2 210-2117 1120.00 WAVEACE 2004 70MHz 4 210-2118 1480.00 WAVEACE 2012 100MHz 2 210-2119 1400.00 WAVEACE 2014 100MHz 4 210-2120 1780.00 WAVEACE 2022 200MHz 2 210-2121 1750.00 WAVEACE 2024 200MHz 4 210-2123 2020.00 WAVEACE 2032 300MHz 2 210-2124 2710.00 WAVEACE 2034 300MHz 4 210-2125 2830.00 Accessoires AP031 High Voltage Differential Probes, 15MHz, 700V 582-6810 520.00 PK400-1 Gripper Probe Set, Large 213-6273 210.00 PK400-2 Gripper Probe Set, Medium 213-6274 255.00 PPE1.2KV High Voltage Probe, 600V/1.2kV 213-6276 345.00 PPE2KV High Voltage Probe, 2kV 213-6277 295.00 PPE5KV High Voltage Probe, 5kV 213-6278 715.00 PPE6KV High Voltage Probe, 6kV 213-6279 850.00 PP016 Passive Probes, 300MHz/10MHz, 10MΩ/1MΩ 213-6286 180.00 Fonction Mathématiques Caractéristiques principales: Ì Bande passante 200 MHz, 400 MHz, 600 MHz et 1 GHz Ì Taux d’échantillonnage jusqu’à 5 Géch/sec en temps réel et 50Géch/sec entrelacé Ì 2 ou 4 voies Ì Ecran SVGA couleur 10.4" tactile Ì Interface utilisateur intuitive Windows Ì Mode de visualisation rapide Wavestream™, utilise un affichage 256 pour stimuler la visualisation d’un oscilloscope analogique: idéal pour visualiser des formes d’ondes avec des jitters ou des anomalies en utilisant 700 000 formes d’onde par seconde (jusqu’à 8 000 formes d’onde par seconde affichées) Ì Outil de débogage WaveScan™ Ì Longueur de mémoire de 12.5M points pour une meilleure capture et analyse Ì Meilleure vitesse de traitement, jusqu’à 150% plus rapide en réponse que d’autres oscilloscopes Ì Gain de temps avec une simple touche d’accès à 23 mesures automatiques Ì Sauvegarde des formes d’onde et réglages sur disques durs, clé USB ou sur LAN Ì Maths, FFT et zoom, mathsure et LabNotebook en standard Ì Livré avec logiciel de contrôle à distance Ì Options pour déclenchement série et décodage (SPI, I2C, I2S, LIN, CAN, RS232, UART); option signaux mixtes avec 18 ou 36 voies numériques (250 ou 500MHz); test de masque électrique/télécom; math étendu et fonction de déclenchement SMARTTM (advancé) Ì Garantie 3 ans Ì Interface utilisateur multi-langues Mesure C3 C4 Sinus lent 2 Oscilloscopes WaveSurfer Contenu du kit: Oscilloscope, une sonde passive par voie, interface utilisateur multilangue, câble USB, manuel de démarrage et certificat d’étalonnage et de performance. Fonction Zoom Modèle WJ 332-A WJ 334-A WJ 352-A WJ 354-A Code Commande 169-8112 169-8113 169-8115 169-8116 Nbre de voies 2 4 2 4 Taux d’échantillonnage 1Géch/s / 2Géch/s (entrelacé) Taux d’échantillonnage (RIS) 100Géch/s (Mode échantillonnage entrelacé aléatoire) Longueur d’enregistrement Sélectionnable de 500 à 500kpts par voie Temps de montée 1nS 750pS Résolution verticale 8 bits Base temps 1nS/div - 50S/div 500pS/div - 50S/div Modèle WJ 312-A WJ 314-A WJ 322-A WJ 324-A Code Commande 169-8108 169-8109 169-8110 169-8111 Nbre de voies 2 4 2 4 Taux d’échantillonnage 1Géch/s 1Géch/s / 2Géch/s (entrelacé) Taux d’échantillonnage (RIS) 100Géch/s (Mode échantillonnage entrelacé aléatoire) Longueur d’enregistrement Sélectionnable de 500 à 500kpts par voie Temps de montée 3.5nS 1.75nS Résolution verticale 8 bits Base de temps 5nS/div - 50S/div 2nS/div - 50S/div Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ WAVEJET WJ312-A Oscilloscope, 100MHz, 2 Channel 169-8108 2930.00 WAVEJET WJ314-A Oscilloscope, 100MHz, 4 Channel 169-8109 3600.00 WAVEJET WJ322-A Oscilloscope, 200MHz, 2 Channel 169-8110 3460.00 WAVEJET WJ324-A Oscilloscope, 200MHz, 4 Channel 169-8111 3970.00 WAVEJET WJ332-A Oscilloscope, 350MHz, 2 Channel 169-8112 4180.00 WAVEJET WJ334-A Oscilloscope, 350MHz, 4 Channel 169-8113 4780.00 WAVEJET WJ352-A Oscilloscope, 500MHz, 2 Channel 169-8115 5370.00 WAVEJET WJ354-A Oscilloscope, 500MHz, 4 Channel 169-8116 5960.00 Accessoires AP031 High Voltage Differential Probes, 15MHz, 700V 582-6810 520.00 PP006A Passive Probe, 500MHz, 10MΩ 213-6280 340.00 PP010-1 Passive Probe, 200MHz, 10MΩ 213-6283 145.00 PP016 Passive Probes, 300MHz/10MHz, 10MΩ/1MΩ 213-6286 180.00 PPE1.2KV High Voltage Probe, 600V/1.2kV 213-6276 345.00 PPE2KV High Voltage Probe, 2kV 213-6277 295.00 PPE5KV High Voltage Probe, 5kV 213-6278 715.00 PPE6KV High Voltage Probe, 6kV 213-6279 850.00 300-A Ì Garantie 3 ans Ì Interface en 9 langues Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Caractéristiques principales: Ì Bandes passantes de 100 MHz, 200 MHz, 350 MHz et 500MHz Ì Jusqu’à 2 Géch/s en temps réel et 100Géch/s entrelacé Ì 2 ou 4 voies Ì Ecran couleur TFT 7.5" (VGA, résolution 640 x 480) Ì Intuitif, interface facile à utiliser, avec installation automatique Ì Taux d’actualisation de l’écran jusqu’à 3600 ondes par seconde Ì Fonction "Répéter" qui permet d’afficher un historique des formes d’ondes capturées jusqu’à 1024 ondes Ì Longueur d’enregistrement de 500kpts par voie, idéale pour la capture et l’analyse de signaux longs Ì 26 mesures automatiques dont fonctions mathématiques, FFT et zoom en standard Ì Sauvegarde des formes d’ondes et des installations sur la mémoire interne, carte mémoire USB externe ou par envoi USB, LAN, GPIB Ì Compteur de fréquence intégré à 6 chiffres Ì Comprend en standard une commande USB à distance et une impression directe USB Oscilloscopes WaveJet WaveJet WJ354-A farnell.com element14.com 24 TEST ET MESURE Lecroy Ì Entrées précises avec 8 bits de résolution Ì Bandes passantes de 60, 100 et 200 MHz Ì Protocoles I2C , SPI, RS232, UART et CAN, LIN (4 voies seulement) et FlexRay (4 voies seulement) Ì Décodage série Ì Échantillonnage répétitif de 10 Géch/s Ì Connexion et alimentation USB 2.0 24MXs-B 44MXs-B 42MXs-B 64MXs-B 62MXs-B 104MXs-B 186-4914 186-4912 186-4913 186-4910 186-4911 186-4909 Bande passante 200 MHz 400 MHz 400 MHz 600 MHz 600 MHz 1 GHz Temps de montée 1.75 nS 875 ps 875 ps 500 ps 500 ps 300 ps Nbre de voies 4 4 2 4 2 4 Résolution verticale 8 bits Taux d’échantillonnage 5 Géch/Sec 5 Géch/Sec (10 Géch/Sec entrelacé) Longueur d’enregistrement 12.5 Mpts/Ch (allchannels), 25 Mpts (interleaved) Gamme base temps 200 ps/div-1000 s/div (roll mode from 500 ms/div-1000 s/div) PicoScope 2204 PicoScope 2205 PicoScope 2206 PicoScope 2207 PicoScope 2208 Bande passante 10MHz 25MHz 50MHz 100MHz 200MHz Taux d’échantillonnage 100Méch/s 200Méch/s 500Méch/s 1GSPS 1GSPS Temps de montée 35ns 14ns 7ns 3.5ns 1.75ns Longueur d’enregistrement 8kS 16kS 24kS 32kS 40kS AWG Non Non Oui Oui Oui Prix Unitaire Bandwidth Code Commande 1+ WAVESURFER 24MXS-B 200MHz 186-4914 8600.00 WAVESURFER 44MXS-B 400MHz 186-4912 9540.00 WAVESURFER 42MXS-B 400MHz 186-4913 8890.00 WAVESURFER 64MXS-B 600MHz 186-4910 11850.00 WAVESURFER 62MXS-B 600MHz 186-4911 9940.00 WAVESURFER 104MXS-B 1GHz 186-4909 13960.00 4 voies 3404A 3404B 3405A 3405B 3406A 3406B 2 voies 3204A 3204B 3205A 3205B 3206A 3206B Résolution 8 bits Bande passante 60 MHz 60 MHz 100 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 200 MHz Taux d’échantillonnage temps réel 500MS/s 1 GS/s 500MS/s 1 GS/s 500MS/s 1 GS/s Mémoire Buffer (Modèle A) 4 MS 4 MS 16 MS 16 MS 64 MS 64 MS Mémoire Buffer (Modèle B) 8 MS 8 MS 32 MS 32 MS 128 MS 128 MS Caractéristiques d’éntrée 1 MΩ / 13pF1 MΩ / 14pF1 MΩ / 13pF1 MΩ / 14pF1 MΩ / 13pF1 MΩ / 14pF Gammes de tension ±50 mV à ±20 V Gammes base de temps 2 ns/div à 200 s/div 1 ns/div à 200 s/div 500 ps/div à 200 s/div Précision base de temps ±50 ppm Modes de déclenchement Auto, repeat, single, none, rapid (segmented memory) Mode d’affichage Magnitude, Moyenne, peak hold Taille de Buffer AWG N/A 8 kS N/A 8 kS N/A 16 kS Taus d’échantillonnage AWG N/A 20 MS/s N/A 20 MS/s N/A 20 MS/s Gamme de Fréquence DC à 60 MHz DC à 100 MHz DC à 200 MHz Dimmensions (2 voies) 200x140x40mm Dimmensions (4 voies) 190x170x40mm Connexion PC USB 2.0 hi-speed Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ PicoScope 2204 PICOSCOPE 2204 147-1476 192.39 PicoScope 2205 PICOSCOPE 2205 147-1477 301.29 PicoScope 2206 PICOSCOPE 2206 206-9951● 422.29 PicoScope 2207 PICOSCOPE 2207 206-9952● 543.29 PicoScope 2208 PICOSCOPE 2208 206-9953● 724.79 Accessoires Sondes 60MHz (Paquet de 2) PP787 206-9954 36.30 Sondes 150MHz (Paquet de 2) PP821 206-9955 48.40 Sondes 250MHz (Paquet de 2) PP822 206-9958 60.50 Contenu du kit (4 voies): Oscilloscope série PicoScope, 4 sondes, câble USB simple et Oscilloscope PC double, guide de démarrage rapide et logiciel, CD référence et alimentation AC. PicoScope 2000 PicoScope série 6000 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Bande-Passante Voies Code Commande 1+ Générateurs de fonction PICOSCOPE 3204A 60MHz 2 188-7207● 482.79 PICOSCOPE 3205A 100MHz 2 188-7211● 724.79 PICOSCOPE 3206A 200MHz 2 188-7213● 966.79 PICOSCOPE 3404A 60MHz 4 211-8833● 928.45 PICOSCOPE 3405A 100MHz 4 211-8835● 1393.45 PICOSCOPE 3406A 200MHz 4 211-8837● 1858.45 Générateurs de fonction et AWG PICOSCOPE 3204B 60MHz 2 188-7209● 603.79 PICOSCOPE 3205B 100MHz 2 188-7212● 845.79 PICOSCOPE 3206B 200MHz 2 188-7214● 1087.79 PICOSCOPE 3404B 60MHz 4 211-8834● 1160.95 PICOSCOPE 3405B 100MHz 4 211-8836● 1625.95 PICOSCOPE 3406B 200MHz 4 211-8838● 2090.95 Accessoires Valise de transport 188-7215 36.30 Ì Taux d’échantillonnage en temps réel de 5 Géch/s Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Oscilloscopes USB série PicoScope3000 Le PicoScope 2000 a été conçu pour offrir d’excellentes performances. Ì Bande passante de 5 MHz à 200 MHz Ì Taux d’échantillonnage jusqu’à 1Géch/s en temps réel Ì Longueur d’enregistrement: 8 to 40K Ì Connecté et alimenté via USB 2.0 (480 Mbps) Ì Léger et compact, idéal pour un usage extérieur Ì Livré avec logiciel PicoScope 6 Ì Compatible avec LabVIEW, C/C++, Delphi et VB Ì Fonctionne avec Windows XP et Vista Ì La série d’oscilloscopes USB PicoScope 3000 offre des performances inégalées et est un substitut efficace aux oscilloscopes de table traditionnels. La série PicoScope 3000 offre des oscilloscopes de haute performance alimentés en USB. Ces Ì Bande passante analogique de 350 MHz Ì Résolution verticale de 8 bits Ì 4 voies Ì Jusqu’à 1Géch de mémoire tampon Ì USB 2.0 Ì Générateur de fonctions arbitraires et analyseur de spectre intégré oscilloscopes à 2 canaux ont une résolution de 8 bits et sont précis à 3%. Ceci, combiné à leur grande mémoire, un taux d’échantillonnage élevé et des bandes passantes élevées permet une utilisation dans tous les domaines de test et de mesure, de la fabrication, de la réparation, de la recherche et du développement. Instrument tout en un: Chaque modèle est un appareil complet tout en un avec oscilloscope, analyseur de spectre, générateur de signaux et générateur d’ondes arbitraires (AWG), le rendant ainsi très polyvalent et d’un bon rapport qualité-prix. Le PicoScope 2000 impressionne par son empreinte 100x135mm et s’installe parfaitement dans un ordinateur portable et sac de voyage. Possède 3 connecteurs BNC, 2 voies d’entrée dédiées et un connecteur BNC dédié au générateur de signaux et générateur d’ondes arbitraires. Ì Fonctions avancées: décodage série et test de limite de masque intégrés Ì Compatible Windows XP, Windows Vista et Windows 7 (32 et 64-bits) Contenu du kit (2 voies): Oscilloscope série PicoScope, 2 sondes, câble USB, guide de démarrage rapide et logiciel et CD référence Puissance et vitesse L’oscilloscope PicoScope 2000 prend sa puissance directement du PC, et utilise une connexion USB 2.0 (480 Mbps) permettant ainsi une réactualisation rapide de l’affichage sans compromettre la précision et les détails. Logiciel Tous les oscilloscopes PC PicoScope utilisent le logiciel Windows PicoScope 6 avec des actualisations, extensions et améliorations téléchargeables gratuitement. Ce logiciel est facile à utiliser grâce à une interface Windows et un système de contrôle familier. Les données sont facilement sauvegardées dans une variété de formats tels que CSV, PNG et BMP, et les fichiers binaires MATLAB. Drivers et exemples sont inclus pour LabVIEW, C/C++, Delphi et VB pour intégration dans des applications personnalisées. farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 25 Pico Contenu du kit: valise de transport solide, oscilloscope, 4 sondes 500 MHz x10, un support de sonde, logiciel PicoScope, guide d’installation, câble USB, cordons d’alimentation avec prise anglaise et europénne. Modèle 6402A 6402B 6403A 6403B 6404A 6404B Nbre de voies 4 Résolution verticale 8 Bits Bande Passante 250 MHz 350 MHz 500 MHz Taux d’échantillonnage temps réel 5 GEch/s (1 canal), 2.5 GEch/s (2 canaux), 1.25 GEch/s (3 ou 4 canaux) Taille Mémoire Tampon 128 MS 256 MS 256 MS 512 MS 512 MS 1 GS Impédance d’entrée 1M // 15pF, ou 50Ω 1M // 10pF, 50Ω Gammes de tension ±50mV à ±20V (jusqu’à ±5V quand l’entrée 50Ω est sélectionnée) Gammes base de temps 10 ns/div à 1000 s/div Précision base de temps 5 ppm Modes de déclenchement None, Single, Repeat, Auto, Rapid, ETS Formats des données CAN, LIN, I2C, UART/RS-232, SPI Modes d’affichage Magnitude, average, peak hold Générateurs de fonctions: DC à 20 MHz Générateurs de fonctions (Modèle A): Sinus, carré, triangle, DC Générateurs de fonctions (Modèle B): Comme modèles A plus : rampe, sin (x)/x, Gaussian, half-sine, white noise, PRBS Taille tampon AWG N/A 16 ks N/A 16 ks N/A 16 ks Taux d’échantillonage AWG N/A 200 MS/s N/A 200 MS/s N/A 200 MS/s Fréquence DC à 250 MHz DC à 350 MHz DC à 500 MHz Dimensions 255x170x40mm 280x170x40mm Connexion PC USB 2.0 (compatible USB 1.1) 2 Voies 190-202 190-102 190-062 4 Voies 190-204 190-104 Modes d’enregistrement Balayage simple, datalogger continu, Déclenchement de démarrage (toute voie) Déclenchement d’arrêt (toute voie) Mémoire 2 enregistrements à entrée multiples TrendPlot peuvent être sauvegardés en interne pour rappel ultérieur et pour analyse. Stockage direct sur clé USB par le port USB. Multimètre RSM vrai 999 points, volts, amp, ohms, température Normes de sécurité (EN61010-1) 1000V CAT III / 600V CAT II (instrument et accessoires inclus) Batterie (installée) Li-Ion BP291 Puissance de ligne Adaptateur secteur/chargeur de batterie inclus Interface 2 ports USB fournis. Ports complètement isolés pour un circuit de mesure flottant. Le port USB hôte permet de connecter toute clé USB pour le stockage des données des formes d’onde, les résultats de mesure, réglages de l’instrument et copies d’écran. Un mini USB-B est fourni pour une interconnexion sur PC à distance et pour le transfert de données sur PC 2 Voies 190-202 190-102 190-062 4 Voies 190-204 190-104 Bande passante 200MHz 100MHz 60MHz Affichage LCD LCD 153mm couleur avec rétro-éclairage Comparateur de formes d’onde Référence visuelle Longueur d’enregistrement max. 10 000 échantillons par voie (x4) in mode oscilloscope 30 000 points par entrée en mode continu ScopeRecord™ Tension flottante max. CAT III 1000V, CAT IV 600V (tension max. entre tout contact et niveau de tension de terre) Sensibilité d’entrée 2mV/div à 100V/div Capture de transitoires 8ns Gamme base temps 5ns/div à 4s/div en séquence 1-2-4 Réglage temps/division plus lent en mode continu ScopeRecord™ Modes Connect-and-View™, non asservi (Free Run), Monocoup, bord, temps, vidéo, largeur d’impulsion sélectionnable et externe (voie A seulement), cycle N Fonctions math Une fonction math sur 2 voies d’entrée: addition/soustraction/ multiplication; résultat avec échelons; mode X-Y; spectre de fréquence avec analyse FFT Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Bande passante Code Commande 1+ Standard PICOSCOPE 6402A 250MHz 211-5766● 2493.75 PICOSCOPE 6403A 350MHz 211-5768● 3743.75 PICOSCOPE 6404A 500MHz 211-5770● 4993.75 Avec éditeur AWG inclus PICOSCOPE 6402B 250MHz 211-5767● 3118.75 PICOSCOPE 6403B 350MHz 211-5769● 4368.75 PICOSCOPE 6404B 500MHz 211-5771● 5618.75 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Bande Passante Code Commande 1+ Version 2 voies - UK Version 2 voies - Europe Version 4 voies - UK Version 4 voies - Europe FLUKE-190-204/EU 200MHz 185-8006 4340.00 FLUKE-190-104/EU 100MHz 185-8008 3490.00 Accessoires BP291 Batterie Li-Ion 185-8010 275.00 VPS410-R Sonde de tension 10:1 (Rouge) 185-8011 170.00 VPS410-B Sonde de tension 10:1 (Bleu) 185-8012 170.00 VPS410-G Sonde de tension 10:1 (Gris) 185-8013 170.00 VPS410-V Sonde de tension 10:1 (Vert) 185-8015 170.00 VPS420-R Sonde haute tension 100:1 (Rouge/ Noir) 185-8016 220.00 C290 Valise de transport robuste 185-8017 175.00 SCC290 Kit logiciel et valise de transport 185-8018 350.00 RS400 Sonde de remplacement pour VPS410 185-8019 137.00 AS400 Jeu d’extension pour sonde pour VPS410 185-8020 90.00 SW90W Logiciel ScopeMeter FlukeView 431-4566 320.00 Bande passante 40MHz Taux d’échantillonnage 25 Méch./s Sensibilité d’entrée 5 mV - 500 V/div Gamme base temps 10 ns/div à 1 min/div Entrées et digitiseurs 2 Longueur d’enregistrement max. 512 min/max points par entrée Echelle de temps 40 ns Mesures 26 automatiques TRMS 5000 points, double entrée Connexion et déclenchement Oui Déclenchement vidéo avec compteur de lignes Oui Trendplot double entrée Oui Mémoire visualisation/installation 20 Puissance de ligne Adaptateur / chargeur de pile inclus Piles NiMH 7h autonomie ScopeMeters Série 190 II Ì 4 entrées isolées indépendantes, jusqu’à 1000V Ì Echantillonnage haute vitesse: jusqu’à 2.5 Géch/sec Ì Mémoire étendue : capture de forme d’onde avec 10 000 échantillons par voie permettant de zoomer sur les détails Oscilloscopes Scopemeter série 124 Ì Certifiés CAT III 1 000 V / CAT IV 600 V pour une plus grande sécurité dans les environnements haute tension Ì Autonomie standard de 7h grâce aux nouvelles batteries Li-ion Ì Ports USB isolés pour périphériques mémoire et connectivité PC Ì Remplacement rapide de la batterie grâce à sa trappe d’accès Ì Compact et seulement 2.2 kg Ì Dispositif de sécurité qui permet de bloquer et de verrouiller l’oscilloscope lorsqu’il est laissé sans surveillance Le ScopeMeter 124 compact est une solution robuste pour la résolution de problèmes industriels et pour les applications d’installation. C’est un outil de test complètement intégré avec un oscilloscope, multimètre et enregistreur ’sans papier’ dans un seul instrument facile à utiliser et d’un excellent rapport qualité/prix. Idéal pour trouver des solutions à des problèmes rapidement pour les machines, l’instrumentation, les systèmes de contrôle et puissance. Accessoires inclus: Chargeur de batteries/adaptateur secteur, batterie Li-Ion, sonde de test 10:1 (1 rouge, 1 bleu, 1 verte) comprenant des crochets de suspension, mini-pinces crocodiles, sonde de mise à la terre, embouts de protection des sondes, un logiciel de démonstration FlukeView, câble d’interface USB pour une connexion PC et manuel d’utilisation sur CD. Ì Oscilloscope numérique 40 MHz double entrée Ì 2 multimètres numériques TRMS 5,000 points Ì Un enregistreur TrendPlot double entrée Ì La fonction de déclenchement Connect-and-View permet de visualiser n’importe quel signal Ì Cordons de test blindés pour oscilloscope, pour des mesures de résistance et continuité Ì Livré avec sonde de tension 10:1 pour des mesures haute fréquence Ì Autonomie de la batterie jusqu’à 7h Ì Certifié 600 V CAT III Ì Interface optique RS-232 isolée Ì Livré avec valise robuste compacte Version II des oscilloscopes portables de la série 190C avec 4 ScopeMeter 124 voies isolées indépendantes, un indice de protection IP51 et répondant aux normes CAT III 1000 V / CAT IV 600 V. Ils sont disponibles en version 200MHz ou 100MHz et sont idéals pour les ingénieurs sur site et les techniciens qui nécessitent un oscilloscope 4 voies pour des applications électroniques industrielles dans des environnements difficiles. farnell.com element14.com 26 TEST ET MESURE Fluke Caractéristiques 175 177 179 Mesures TRMS AC AC AC Affichage, 4 actualisations par seconde 6000 6000 6000 Affichage avec rétroéclairage Ì Ì Bargraphe analogique, actualisations 40 fois par seconde 33 segments 33 segments 33 segments Gamme Automatique et Manuelle Ì Ì Ì Gel de l’affichage Ì Ì Ì Maximum Résolution Max. Précision Tension DC 600V 1mV ±(0.5%+2) Tension AC 600V 1mV ±(1.0%+3) Courant DC 10A 1mA ±(1.0%+3) Courant AC 10A 10mA ±(1.5%+3) Résistance 40MΩ 0.1Ω ±(0.9%+1) Capacité 10mF 1nF ±(1.9%+2) Fréquence 50kHz 0.01Hz ±(0.1%+2) Contrôle total des couts, réduction de la gestion administrative, visibilité sur vos dépenses, flexibilité et personnalisation selon les besoins de votre société. farnell.com/ibuy Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Multimètre 117 127-4602 218.00 Kit combiné 117/322 KIT 127-4603 304.00 Accessoires Sacoche de transport C50 424-006 35.00 Sangle de suspension magnétique TPAK 302-9578 33.00 Cordons de test TL223-1 189-5826 61.00 Solution gratuite d’achats intelligents en ligne Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ Version anglaise FLUKE 124 438-3450 1566.00 Version Européenne FLUKE 124 444-8662 1566.00 Multimètres numériques Multimètre numérique avec tension sans contact Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ Accessoires SCC120E Kit 908-149 414.00 Caractéristiques 114 115 AutoVolt: sélection automatique c.a./c.c. Ì LoZ: impédance d’entrée faible en prévention des tensions ’fantôme’ Ì Mesures de tension AC/DC Ì Ì Mesures de courant AC/DC Ì Résistance / Continuité Ì Ì Fréquence et Capacité Ì Test de diodes Ì l=84 H=167 P=46mm. Poids 550g Série 170 Maximum Résolution Max. Précision 114 115 Tension DC 600V 1mV ±(0.5%+2) ±(0.5%+2) Tension AC 600V 1mV ±(1.0%+3) ±(1.0%+3) Courant DC 10A 1mA ±(1.0%+3) Courant AC 10A 10mA ±(1.5%+3) Résistance 40MΩ 0.1Ω ±(0.9%+1) ±(0.9%+1) Capacité 10mF 1nF ±(1.9%+2) Fréquence 50kHz 0.01Hz ±(0.1%+2) Les 3 modèles de la nouvelle série 170 sont la nouvelle référence pour les multimètres à usage général. Les 3 modèles, 175, 177, 179 deviennent le standard en combinant des mesures précises, une facilité d’utilisation, une sécurité et une fiabilité. Tous les modèles offrent des mesures de tension et de courant AC TRMS, une résolution 6000 points, un enregistement min-max-moyenne mais également des gammes de fréquence et capacité. Avec toutes caractéristiques utiles, la série 170 reste facile à utiliser. La valise ergonomique avec étui intégré protège l’équipement dans des environnements difficiles. Il n’est pas nécessaire d’ouvrir la valise pour changer les piles grâce à une ouverture facile du compartiment piles. Conforme à EN61010-1 CAT IV 600V/CAT 111 1000V, la série Fluke 170 est livrée avec le cordon de test TL75, batterie 9V installée, le manuel d’utilisation et l’unique Garantie à Vie de Fluke. Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Multimètre RMS vrai 114 127-4598 157.00 Multimètre RMS vrai 115 127-4599 184.00 Accessoires Etui de transport C50 424-006 35.00 Kit ToolPak (accroche magnétique) TPAK 302-9578 33.00 Cordons de test TL223-1 189-5826 61.00 Idéal pour des applications électriques. Multimètre compact à valeurs efficaces vraies pour applications exigeantes telles que commerciales, dans les hôpitaux et écoles. Il comprend une fonction de détection de tension sans contact VoltAlert™ pour une exécution plus rapide. Multimètres numériques TRMS Ì Indicateur de la faible autonomie de la batterie Ì Test de diodes Ì Sacoche compacte avec étui détachable Comprend les accessoires suivants: Chargeur de batterie/adaptateur de tension de ligne, jeu de sondes de tensione, cordons de test, manuel d’instructions, batterie NiMH rechargeable (installée), pinces crocodiles industriels et sondes de test 2-mm Contenu du kit SCC120 (Optionel): Valise de transport solide, interface RS-232 optique isolée et logiciel FlukeView® pour Windows®. l=84 H=167 P=46mm. Poids 550g Ì CAT III 600 V Ì Autonomie de la pile alcaline 9V (fournie) de 400h en fonctionnement Ì Livré avec manuel d’utilisation et cordons de test TL75 Multimètre électrique 114, idéal pour les essais de fonctionnement. Il comprend toutes les fonctions de base permettant d’éviter les mesures erronées causées par une tension "fantôme". Multimètre sur site 115, solution idéale pour une large variété d’applications de tests électriques et électroniques. Ì Mesures AC en RMS vrai Ì Grand affichage 6000 points avec rétroéclairage à LED blanc Ì Bargraphe analogique Ì VoltAlert™ pour la détection de tension sans contact Ì Mesure de courant 20A (30 seconds de tension temporaire; 10A de tension continue) Ì Mesures de résistance, continuité, fréquence et capacité Ì LoZ: faible impédance d’entrée permettant d’éviter les mesures erronées causées par une tension "fantôme" Ì AutoVolt: sélection automatique de tension ac/dc Ì Gamme Automatique/Manuelle Ì Fonctions MIN/MAX/AVG Ì Touche maintien H=183, l=90, P=43 Ì Indicateur de la faible autonomie de la batterie Ì Sacoche compacte avec étui détachable Ì CAT III 600 V Ì Autonomie de la pile alcaline 9V (fournie) de 400h en fonctionnement Ì Livrés avec manuel d’utilisation et cordons de test TL75 117 Ì Mesures AC en RMS vrai Ì Grand affichage 6000 points avec rétroéclairage à LED blanc Ì Bargraphe analogique Ì Gamme Automatique/Manuelle Ì Fonctions MIN/MAX/AVG Ì Touche maintien Le Kit combiné pour applications électriques (117/322) regroupe le nouveau multimètre Fluke 117 DMM et une pince multimètre Fluke 322 pour un dépannage productif et efficace en une solution intégrale unique. Le kit combiné comprend: Ì Multimètre numérique Fluke 117 à valeurs efficaces vraies avec détection de tension sans contact Ì Pince multimètre compacte Fluke 322 (600V ac/dc, 400A ac, 400Ω Ì Jeu de cordons de mesure Hard Point (pointes dures) Ì Sangle de suspension magnétique ToolPak Ì Sacoche de transport C115 haut de gamme avec bandoulière 114 et 115 farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 27 Fluke Continuité / Diode Ì Ì Capacité: 10,000 uF Ì Ì Fréquence 200kHz Ì Ì Min/Max/Moy, Gel, Gamme Auto et Manuel Ì Ì Crête Min/Max Ì Température: -40 °C à +1090 °C (Affichage °C ou °F) Ì Filtre passe-bas pour un travail sur des drives à vitesse variable Ì Normes de sécurité EN61010-031, CAT III 1000 V CAT IV 600 V Autonomie de la pile 800h Caractéristiques techniques: Fluke 27 II Fluke 28 II Homologations: CSA, C-US, C-Tick, TUV Réponse moyenne RMS vrai Points 6000 6000 / 19,999 Tension: 1000 V AC/DC Ì Ì Courant: 10 A AC/DC Ì Ì Résistance: 50 MΩ Ì Ì Caractéristiques 175 177 179 Mode enregistrement Min-Max-Moy avec alerte min/max Ì Ì Ì Lectures température (sonde thermocouple comprise) Ì Le mode lissage permet de filtrer l’évolution rapide des entrées Ì Ì Ì Test de continuité et de diode sonore Ì Ì Ì Alerte cordon de test si branché incorrectement Ì Ì Ì Alerte de Tension non sécurisée pour tension>30V Ì Ì Ì Indication du statut de la batterie Ì Ì Ì Valise ergonomique avec étui intégré Ì Ì Ì Changement facile de la batterie sans ouvrir le compartiment principal Ì Ì Ì Mode veille sélectionnable Ì Ì Ì Garantie Garantie à Vie Garantie à Vie Garantie à Vie EN 61010-1 sur toutes les entrées CAT III 1000V CAT III 1000V CAT III 1000V CAT IV 600V CAT IV 600V CAT IV 600V Réf. Fab. Code Commande Prix Unitaire FLUKE-179/EDA2/EUR 189-5812 284.00 Gamme 83V 87V Fonctions Maximum Résolution max.Précision Résolution max.Précision Tension CC 1000V 0.1mV ±(0.1%+1) 10μV ±(0.05%+1) Tension CA 1000V 0.1mV ±(0.5%+2) 10μV ±(0.7%+2) Courant CC 10A 0.1μV ±(0.4%+2) 0.01μ ±(0.2%+2) Courant CA 10A 0.1μV ±(1.2%+2) 0.01μ ±(1.0%+2) Résistance 50MΩ 0.1Ω ±(0.4%+1) 0.01Ω ±(0.2%+1) Conductance 60nS 0.01nS ±(1.0%+10) 0.001nS ±(1%+10) Capacité 9999μF 0.01nF ±(1.0%+2) 0.01nF ±(1%+2) Fréquence >200kHz 0.01Hz ±(0.005%+1)0.01Hz ±(0.005%+1) Température -200 à 1090°C 0.1°C 1.0% Sonde de température 80BK-40 à 260°C 2.2°C ou 2% Les meilleures précisions pour chaque fonciton Autonomie de la pile Alkaline, 200h typipque Poids 420g Garantie à Vie Comprend: Manuel d’instruction, piles AA, cordons de test, pinces crocodiles AC72, sonde de température 80BK-A, CD-ROM (manuel d’utilisation en 16 langues, notes techniques et images d’application) Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Commande 1+ FLUKE-83-5/EUR 189-5830 386.00 FLUKE-87-5/EUR 189-5831 472.00 FLUKE-87-5/E2K/EURKit 189-5811 535.00 Etui H80M 800-2223 35.00 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ FLUKE 175EGFID 355-8678 189.00 FLUKE 177 355-8680 224.00 FLUKE 179 355-8691 249.00 Combo Kit électronique - Fluke 179/EDA2/EUR Ì Mesure jusqu’à 1 000 V AC et DC Ì Mesure jusqu’à 10 A (20 A pendant 30 secondes) Ì Gamme de capacité de 10 000 μF Ì Fréquence de 200 kHz Ì Bande passante étendue : 15 Hz à 20 kHz (28 II), 40 Hz à 30 kHz (27 II) Ì Thermomètre intégré permettant d’effectuer des relevés de température en toute simplicité, sans instrument supplémentaire (28 II) Ì Mesures de résistance, de continuité et de diodes Ì Enregistrement des valeurs moyennes et min/max pour capturer automatiquement les variations Ì Crête min-max (28 II) Ì Fonction unique de mesure précise de la fréquence et de la tension sur les variateurs de vitesse et autres équipements "bruités" (28 II) Ì Conforme aux exigences de sécurité EN61010-031 Multimètre robuste 1000 V CAT III avec rétroéclairage et kit de sonde de test Multimètres numériques Réf. Fab. Code Commande Prix Unitaire FLUKE-27II/EUR 189-5818 392.00 FLUKE-28II/EUR 189-5819 424.00 industrielles dans un étui souple et léger pour le multimètre et ses accessoires. Conforme aux exigences de sécurité EN 61010-031. Série 80-V Le kit 179/EDA2/EUR comprend: Ì Le multimètre Fluke 179 RMS vrai Ì L’étui souple Fluke C35 Ì Un jeu de sondes de test TL910 Ì Un jeu de cordon de mesure en silicone TL224 SureGrip™ Ì Un jeu de pinces à crochet AC280 SureGrip™ Ì Une sonde de température intégrée Fluke 80BK Ì Accessoire ToolPak™ pour positionner et maintenir le multimètre sur des surfaces en acier La nouvelle série Fluke 80-V offre des fonctions améliorées de mesure et de dépannage, mais également une résolution et une précision supérieures pour mieux résoudre les problèmes des variateurs de vitesse, des automates de production, des systèmes d’alimentation électriques et de l’équipement électromécanique. Outre les fonctionnalités de la série 80 standard, la série 80-V offre une plus grande capacité de résolution, ainsi qu’un niveau accru de sécurité, de confort et de protection contre les impacts. Multimètres Fluke 27 II et 28 II Ì Conception « classique » avec nouvel étui amovible, cordon de mesure et compartiment pour sondes Ì Nouveau mode veille sélectionnable pour une plus grande autonomie des piles Ì Remplacement facile des piles et des fusibles sans ouvrir complètement le boîtier Ì Conforme aux exigences de sécurité EN61010-031 Caractéristiques supplémentaires du 87V: Ì Filtre sélectionnable pour des mesures de tension et de fréquence précises au niveau des moteur Ì Thermomètre intégré Ì Capture de crête pour l’enregistrement de transitoires à une vitesse de 250μs Le Kit combiné pour applications électriques industrielles Fluke 87V/E comprend: Ì Jeu de cordons de mesure silicone SureGrip™ 0.5m TL224 Ì Jeu de sondes de test Slim Reach SureGrip™ TP238 (pointes isolées avec partie de touche 4 mm) Ì Jeu de pinces crocodile SureGrip™ AC220 Ì Sangle de suspension avec aimant Ì Sonde de température 80BK Ì Mallette C800 Etui H80M Ì Etui jaune pour tous les multimètres numériques de la série 80 (les nouveaux comme les anciens) Ì Aimant de suspension Ì Crochet et sangles à velcro Les nouveaux multimètres numériques Fluke Ì Pince d’accrochage universelle 27 II et 28 II établissent une nouvelle norme en termes de fonctionnement dans des conditions extrêmes en offrant les fonctionnalités et la précision nécessaires au dépannage de la plupart des problèmes électriques. Ces deux multimètres sont certifiés IP 67 (résistance à l’eau et à la poussière) et sont homologués MSHA (demande en cours). Ils offrent une gamme de température de fonctionnement étendue, allant de -15 °C à +55 °C (-40 °C pour 20 minutes maximum) avec 95 % d’humidité et ont été conçus et testés pour supporter une chute de 3 m. Ì Courant et tension TRMS pour des mesures précises sur des signaux non-linéaires Ì Afficheur de grande taille muni d’un bargraphe analogique et d’un rétro-éclairage blanc lumineux à 2 niveaux Ì Sélection automatique et manuelle de gamme pour une flexibilité optimale Ì Mode de mesure relative pour soustraire la résistance des cordons pour les mesures de faibles résistances Ì Enregistrement Min/Max/Moyenne avec alerte Min/Max pour effectuer des captures automatiques de variations Ì Touch Hold pour obtenir des mesures stables Ì Mesure de diodes ,de continuité avec avertisseur sonore et rapport cyclique Ì Protection sonore des entrées farnell.com element14.com 28 TEST ET MESURE Fluke Gamme de mesure Tension AC 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V Tension DC 200mV, 2V, 20V, 200V, 1000V Courant AC 200μA à 10A Courant DC 200μA à 10A Résistance 200ohm, 2kohm, 20kohm, 200kohm, 2Mohm, 20Mohm Capacitance 20nF, 200nF, 2μF, 20μF, 200μF, 2mF, 20mF Fréquence 20Hz à 200Hz Température -40°C à +1000°C Puissance – Général Afficheur 19999 Taille de LCD 73 x 50mm Dimensions 200 x 93 x 40mm Poids 384g Kit de test TLK287: conçu pour les ingénieurs concepteurs en électronique, les techniciens de test et de maintenance. Le kit comprend: pointes de touche montées sur ressorts sertis pour un contact maximum avec les points de test des circuits SMD, Cordons à micro-pince grippe-fil permettant un contrôle fin des SMD, mini-pinces crocodiles, grippe-fils et sondes convenant pour pratiquement tous les besoins électroniques. Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ FLUKE-28 IIEX 211-4748 1089.00 Gamme sans fil 10m Dimensions (H x l x L) cm 5.3 x 9.3 x 19.3 Niveau de sécurité CAT III 1000 V CAT IV 600 V Poids 604 g Kit de test TLK289: conçu pour les applications industrielles. Le kit comprend: Pinces crocodiles SureGrip™, grippe-fils, pinces à crochet et sondes de test industrielles offrant un contact fiable avec les différents points de test, sangle avec aimant pour suspendre le multimètre à une surface métallique, adaptateur avec thermocouple de type K pour mesurer directement la température à l’aide des fonctions de thermométrie du multimètre, sacoche de protection. Multimètre numérique Comprend: Manuel d’instruction, piles AA, cordons de test, pinces crocodiles AC72, sonde de température 80BK-A, CD-ROM (manuel d’utilisation, notes techniques et images d’application) Besoin d’un conseil technique Dialoguez en temps réel avec l’un de nos conseillers techniques sur farnell.com Il existe désormais un multimètre numérique à sécurité intrinsèque que vous pouvez Ì Courant et tension AC TRMS pour la mesure précise des signaux non linéaires Ì Mesure jusqu’à 1 000 V AC et DC Ì Mesure jusqu’à 10 A (20 A pendant 30 secondes) Ì Gamme de capacité de 10 000 μF Ì Fréquence allant jusqu’à 50 kHz Ì Thermomètre intégré permettant d’effectuer des relevés de température en toute simplicité, sans instrument supplémentaire Ì Mesures de résistance, de continuité et de diodes utiliser en zones IIC (gaz) 1 et 2 et en zones IIIC (poussière) 21 et 22. Que vous travailliez dans l’industrie pétrolière, chimique ou pharmaceutique, profitez de tout ce dont vous avez besoin pour vos tests et dépannages avec le multimètre numérique à sécurité intrinsèque (IS) le plus robuste jamais conçu par Fluke. Le Fluke 28 II Ex est également étanche, résistant à la poussière et aux chutes. Vous aurez toutes les cartes en main pour faire face à toutes les situations dans toutes les conditions, sans sacrifier la conformité ni la performance de vos mesures. Réf. Fab. Code Commande Prix Unitaire FLUKE 233 177-2092 275.00 Fonctions Gamme Résolution Précision VDC 50mV à 1000V 1μV ± 0,025% + 5 chiffres VAC 50mV à 1000V 1μV ± (0.4%+40 chiffres) ADC 10A 0.01μA ± (0.15%+2 chiffres) AAC 10A 0.01μA ± (0.7%+5 chiffres) Résistance 500ohm à 500Mohm 0.01Ω ± (0.05%+2 chiffres) Conductivité 50nS 0.01nS ±(1.0%+10 chiffres) Capacité 1nF à 100mF 0.001nF ± (1.0%+5 chiffres) Fréquence 99.999Hz à 999.99kHz 0.01Hz ± (0.005%+1 chiffre) Température -200°C à 1350°C°C 0.1°C (1% + 1°C) Précisions sont les meilleures précisions pour chaque fonction. Livré avec cordons de test siliconés TL71, porte-sondes, 6 piles AA (installées) et manuel Contenu du kit: Multimètre, pince crocodile, cordons de test, sonde de température, Manuel d’utilisation et de démarrage sur CD Ì Mode 4-1/2 digits pour des mesures précises (20 000 points) Ì Courant et tension AC TRMS pour mesurer avec précision des signaux non linéaires Ì Mesure jusqu’à 1 000 V et 10 A AC et DC (remarque : les zones ATEX nécessitent des mesures réduites) Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Multimètre FLUKE-289/EUR 189-5816● 567.00 Multimètre FLUKE-289/FVF/EUR 189-5817● 652.00 Kit combo FlukeView FLUKE-289/FVF/EUR 189-5817● 652.00 Kit de test TLK287 150-3745 147.00 Kit de test TLK289 150-3746 147.00 Etui de protection FLUKE C280 177-2099 58.00 Multimètre à afficheur détachable Fluke 233 Le première multimètre numérique Fluke avec un afficheur détachable est désormais disponible. Le multimètre numérique 233 avec afficheur détachable sans fil est idéal pour la maintenance pour des sites de mesure inhabituels. Le nouveau Fluke 233 peut être utilisé pour les mesures les plus courantes et particulièrement dans des endroits exigus, difficiles d’accès, sur des machines ou panneaux physiquement séparés d’un commutateur de fin de course ou de sectionneur, ou dans des zones interdites au public telles les salles propres ou les environnements dangereux. Ì Filtre passe-bas permettant d’effectuer des mesures précises de la fréquence et de la tension sur les variateurs de vitesse Ì Fréquence jusqu’à 200 kHz et pourcentage de rapport cyclique pour vous aider à diagnostiquer les variateurs de vitesse et les convertisseurs d’alimentation Ì Mesure de résistance, de continuité et de diodes Ì Gamme de capacité de 10 000 μF Ì Mesures des grandes résistances ou des contrôles de fuite à l’aide de la conductance Ì Modes MIN/MAX/MOY et capture de crêtes pour enregistrer automatiquement les transitoires et les variations Ì Mode de mesure relative pour soustraire l’interférence des cordons de mesure des mesures de résistance Ì Sélection de gamme automatique et manuelle pour une flexibilité maximale Ì Alarme Input Alert avec bip sonore et message clignotant « Lead » (Cordon) lorsque les cordons ne sont pas reliés aux entrées adéquates Multimètres enregistreurs numériques Fluke 28 II Ex Fluke 287 et Fluke 289 H=254 l=194 P=76mm. Poids 1kg Ì IP54 Ì Sorties protégées conformément à la norme EN61010-1 CAT III 1000V / CAT IV 600V Ì UL, CSA et TUV Ì Conforme aux exigences de sécurité EN61010-031 Caractéristiques supplémentaires du Fluke 289: Ì Filtre passe-bas pour des mesures précises de la fréquence et de la tension sur les variateurs de vitesse et autres équipements « bruités » Ì Fonction de faible impédance d’entrée pour éviter les mesures erronées causées par une tension « fantôme » Ì Gamme de 50Ω pour mesurer et comparer les différences de résistance des enroulements de moteur, ou effectuer des mesures de faibles résistances ou d’autres résistances de contact Ì Affichage numérique de grande dimension à 50 000 points, à une résolution de ¼ VGA avec rétroéclairage blanc Ì Fonction d’enregistrement avec TrendCapture pour une révision facile des données enregistrées Ì Multiples mesures par affichage Ì Mesures en RMS vrai (AC et AC+DC) Ì Touches contextuelles et boutons déroulants pour une navigation aisée Ì Interface USB optique de communication, permet un téléchargement facile sur PC Ì Mémoire interne pour un enregistrement autonome sur plus de 200 heures Ì Mesure de courant jusquà 20A (30s), 10A en continue Ì Capture de crête pour l’enregistrement jusqu’à 250μs Ì Min/Max/Moy avec horodatage permettant d’enregistrer les fluctuations du signal Kit combo FlukeView 289FVF: comprend le multimètre Fluke 289, les accessoires cidessus et en plus: pinces crocodiles, thermocouple 80BK, logiciel de formes FlukeView, câble de données et valise de transport. Multimètres enregistreurs industriels hautes performances. Enregistrement et affichage graphique des données sur grand écran. farnell.com element14.com TEST ET MESURE 29 Fluke Fluke 434 II Fluke 435 II Fluke 437 II conforme aux normes IEC 61000-4-30 Classe S IEC 61000-4-30 Classe A IEC 61000-4-30 Classe A Volt Amp Hz ✓ ✓ ✓ Dips and swells ✓ ✓ ✓ Harmoniques ✓ ✓ ✓ Puissance et énergie ✓ ✓ ✓ Calculateur de pertes d’énergie ✓ ✓ ✓ Non équilibre ✓ ✓ ✓ Contrôle ✓ ✓ ✓ Inrush ✓ ✓ ✓ Capture de forme d’onde ✓ ✓ Flicker ✓ ✓ Transients ✓ ✓ Signal principal ✓ ✓ Onde de puissance ✓ ✓ Rendement inversseur de puissance ✓ ✓ ✓ 400Hz ✓ Caisse souple C1740 ✓ ✓ Caisse C437-II Hard avec roulettes ✓ Carte SD (32Go Max.) 8Go 8Go 8Go Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ Accessoires BC430 Adaptateur secteur/chargeur 921-0016 118.00 OC4USB Interface USB 921-0032 142.00 WC100 Pinces de couleur pour câbles 921-0059 32.00 TLS430 Jeu de cordons de mesure 921-0067 96.00 Résistance 60000 Ω 0.1 Ω 1% ± 5 digits Fréquence 500 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.5% ± 5 digits TRMS X Continuité X Gel X Rétroéclairage X Min/Max X Afflux X Filtre passe-bas X Afficheur sans fil amovible X Sonde de courant flexible - 18 in iFlex Livrée Sonde de courant flexible - 10 in iFlex Accessoire Capacité du câble 750 MCM ou 2-500 MCM Normes de sécurité CAT III 1000V, CAT IV 600V Fluke 381 Gamme Résolution Précision Courant AC avec mâchoire 1000 A 0.1 A 2% ± 5 digits Courant AC avec iFlex 2500 A 0.1 A 3% ± 5 digits Courant DC 1000 A 0.1 A 2% ± 5 digits Tension AC 1000 V 0.1 V 1.5% ± 5 digits Tension DC 1000 V 0.1 V 1% ± 5 digits Modèle FLUKE-321/E FLUKE-322/E Courant AC Gamme 0 à 400A 0 à 400A Précision 1.8% ± 5 digits(50/60Hz) 1.8% ± 5 digits (50/60Hz) Tension AC Gamme 0V à 600V 0V à 600V Précision 1.2% ± 5 chiffres 1.2% ± 5 chiffres Tension DC Gamme - 0V à 600V Précision - 1% ± 5 chiffres Résistance Gamme 0ohm à 400ohm 0ohm à 400ohm Précision 1% ± 5 chiffres 1% ± 5 chiffres Continuité ≤30Ω ≤30Ω Gel de l’affichage Oui Oui Dimensions 184 x 62 x 35mm Poids 227g Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ FLUKE 381 182-7174 514.00 EnergiMètre triphasé Température de fonctionnement -10°C à +50°C Norme de sécurité EN 61010-031 Piles 2 x AAA carbon zinc Cet outil de dépannage triphasé complet Pince multimètre à affichage distant TRMS AC/ DC Fluke 381 avec iFlex est conçu pour mesurer la quasi-totalité des paramètres d’un système de distribution électrique : tension, courant, fréquence, puissance, consommation électrique (énergie), déséquilibre et scintillement, harmoniques et inter- Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ FLUKE-321/E 189-5821 131.00 FLUKE-322/E 189-5822 144.00 Pinces de courant série Fluke 320 harmoniques. Ils capturent également des événements comme les bosses et les creux de tension, les transitoires, les interruptions et les variations rapides de tension Le nouveau modèle Fluke 381 Ì Mesure de résistance jusqu’à 400Ω Ì Continuité pour un contrôle rapide des courts-circuits Ì Indication automatique de charge insuffisante de la pile Ì Fonction de maintien de l’affichage Ì Garantie fabricant 2 ans accomplit tout ce que vous pourriez attendre d’une pince multimètre, et vous offre encore plus de flexibilité grâce à sa fonction d’affichage amovible. Désormais, un seul et même technicien peut se charger d’une tâche qui nécessitait auparavant l’intervention de deux personnes. Placez la pince multimètre Fluke 381 sur un conducteur, retirez l’écran et traversez la pièce pour activer des commandes ou ôter l’équipement de protection, tout en étudiant les relevés en temps réel. La nouvelle sonde de courant souple iFlex (incluse) élargit la gamme de mesure jusqu’à 2 500 A AC et offre une flexibilité d’affichage accrue, la capacité de mesurer les conducteurs encombrants et un meilleur accès pour le câble. Ì AutoTrend: ne perdez pas votre temps à configurer des graphiques de tendance supplémentaires car chaque mesure est automatiquement enregistrée. Vous analysez les tendances à l’aide des fonctions zoom et curseur, tandis que l’enregistrement se poursuit en arrière-plan. Ì System-Monitor: cette fonction donne instantanément un aperçu de la qualité du système d’alimentation. Cette fonction vérifie également la conformité du système aux limites spécifiées par la norme EN50160 ou par l’utilisateur Ì Quatre voies: vous pouvez mesurer simultanément la tension et le courant des trois phases et du neutre. Ì Affichage automatique des transitoires: vous capturez automatiquement jusqu’à 40 bosses, creux, interruptions ou transitoires. Ì Ces instruments sont conformes à la norme de sécurité 600 V CAT IV, 1 000 V CAT III relative aux mesures à l’origine des installations électriques. Ì Robuste et maniable, ils offre une autonomie de plus de 7 heures avec les batteries NiMH rechargeables (fournies). Ì L’interface à base de menus facilite également son utilisation Ì Doté de possibilités d’analyse étendues, il permet d’utiliser les fonctions zoom et curseur « à chaud », pendant la prise de mesures, ou bien « à froid » sur des données enregistrées. Les mesures enregistrées peuvent également être transférées sur un PC doté du logiciel FlukeView fourni. Ì Le kit comprend tout le matériel nécessaire pour une bonne mise en route : 4 pinces de courant, 5 cordons de mesure de tension (avec pinces), un adaptateur secteur/ chargeur et une mallette de transport. Ì Il est conforme aux normes de mesure IEC 61000-4-30. Ì Garantie 3 ans. Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Ì Economiques, combinent une structure compacte et un puissant jeu de fonctions: nouvelle taille réduite pour s’adapter facilement aux espaces exigus Ì Mesures précises avec précision de base de 1,8% Ì Mesures de courant AC jusqu’à 400A avec une résolution de 0.1A ou 100mA Ì Gamme de courant de 400A avec une résolution de 0.01A ou 10mA (Fluke 322 uniquement) Ì Mesures de tension AC jusqu’à 600V avec une résolution de 0.1V jusqu’à 400V Ì Mesures de tension DC jusqu’à 600V avec une résolution de 0.1V jusqu’à 400V (Fluke 322 uniquement) Caractéristiques Ì Technologie sans fil permettant un affichage jusqu’à 9m de distance du point de mesure - flexibilité additionnelle sans interférence avec précision de mesure Ì Sonde de courant flexible, iFlex, idéale pour étendre la gamme de mesure AC jusqu’à 2500A tout en offrant une meilleure flexibilité d’affichage, possibilité de mesure des conducteurs de taille peu communes et un accès filaire amélioré Ì CAT IV 600V, CAT III 1000 V Ì Filtre passe-bas intégré et traitement de signal à la pointe de la technologie, idéale pour une utilisation dans les environnements électriques bruyants tout en fournissant une lecture stable Ì Technologie de mesure d’afflux brevetée pour filtrer le bruit et capturer le courant de démarrage du moteur tel que la protection de circuit le voit Ì Conception ergonomique, peut être utilisée même avec le port d’équipement de protection individuelle Ì Affichage magnétique détachable, peut être installé là où il est plus facilement vu Ì Arrêt automatique du transmetteur radio lorsque l’affichage est connecté à l’appareil même Ì Large affichage avec rétro-éclairage, lecture facile et affiche automatique de la gamme de mesure correcte - aucune nécessité de changer la position du commutateur lors de la prise d’une mesure Ì Garantie fabricant 3 ans Ì Livré avec valise de transport souple Ì Contenu: Analyseur de qualité de l’alimentation et de l’énergie, jeu de cordons de test, sondes de courant Flexi, batterie, alimentation secteur avec adaptateurs internationaux, câble USB, CD PowerLog et caisse Fluke 430 séries II farnell.com element14.com 30 TEST ET MESURE Fluke Contenu du kit: caméra infrarouge avec lentille infrarouge standard, alimentation AC et chargeur de batterie universel , 2 batteries au lithium-ion, carte mémoire SD, lecteur de carte mémoire multi-format USB, logiciel SmartView, mallete de transport rigide, sac de transport souple, dragonne ajustable, manuel utilisateurs imprimé et carte de garantie. Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ FLK-TI100 9HZ 209-4466 2495.00 FLK-TI110 9HZ 209-4467 3995.00 FLK-TI125 9HZ 209-4468 4995.00 Accessoires Sun Visor 209-4469 78.00 Tripod Mounting 209-4470 99.00 Rechargeable Battery 209-4471 129.00 Prix Unitaire Description Code Commande 1+ Caméra infrarouge Ti29 190-3547 7495.00 Caméra infrarouge Ti27 190-3549 6495.00 Accessoires Lentilles infrarouges Telephoto 190-3551 1743.75 Lentilles infrarouges angle large 190-3552 1743.75 Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ FLUKE TI9 170-0079 1995.00 Caméra infrarouge industrielle Caméra infrarouge industrielle 62 Max 62 Max+ Gamme de température -30°C à 500°C -30°C to 650°C Précision ±1.5°C ou derating de ±1.5% ±1.0°C ou derating de ±1.0% Temps de réponse (95%) <500ms <300ms Résolution optique 10:1 12:1 Résolution d’affichage 0.1°C Puissance Piles AA Durée de vie Batterie 10 heures 8 heures Dimensions 175x85x75mm Poids 255g Température d’utilisation 0°C à 50°C Indice IP IP54 Caméra infrarouge, Ti9 Accessoires inclus: Ì Logiciel SmartView™ Ì Carte mémoire SD 2Go Ì Lecteur de cartes SD (USB) pour le transfert des images vers l’ordinateur Ì Mallette de transport renforcée et sacoche souple Ì Sangle Ì Batterie rechargeable interne Ì Alimentation/chargeur de batterie AC (adaptateur secteur compris) Ì Manuel utilisateur Conçue pour des environnements industriels et commerciaux, la Ti32 est un outil que vous pouvez utiliser en toutes circonstances, du dépannage de défauts réels à la détection de pannes potentielles pendant le fonctionnement normal et la maintenance. Avec sa qualité d’image supérieure, ses objectifs en option, ses batteries rechargeables sur le terrain et son interface utilisateur intuitive, la Ti32 est idéale pour les ingénieurs de terrain très occupés qui sont toujours en déplacement. La plus grande avancée technologique en thermographie est peut-être la manière dont Fluke a simplifié à l’extrême la capture d’images et l’analyse de données, désormais possibles en un clin d’oeil. D’une simple pression du pouce, vous pouvez passer d’une mise au point manuelle SmartFocus à une seule main à une incrustation d’image et même ajouter des commentaires vocaux. Les caméras Fluke Ti27 et Ti29 sont les seule à proposer la fusion d’images des spectres IR grâce à la technologie brevetée IR-Fusion® pour un alignement précis des images dans les spectres IR et visible afin de mieux diagnostiquer les problèmes. Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Type Code Commande 1+ FLUKE-62 MAX Single Laser 211-8264 99.00 FLUKE-62 MAX + Dual Laser 211-8265 119.00 Thermomètres infrarouge La caméra infraouge Ti9 de Fluke délivre une image complète de points chauds qui indiquent souvent une panne imminente des équipements. Ì Fournit des images nettes et limpides pour localiser rapidement les problèmes Ì Capteur 320 x 240, offre des images nettes et limpides qui permettent de localiser rapidement les problèmes Ì Sensibilité thermique de référence (NETD), détection des écarts de température les plus infimes qui pourraient être symptomatiques de problèmes Ì Alignement automatique de thermogrammes et d’images visuelles (correction de parallaxe) grâce à la technologie brevetée IR-Fusion de Fluke Fluke 62 Max Ì Détecte les écarts de température les plus infimes qui pourraient être symptomatiques de problèmes Ì Alignement automatique des images visuelles et infrarouges (correction de parallaxe) grâce à la technologie brevetée IR-Fusion Ì Téléobjectif et objectif grand angle disponibles en option pour une plus grande polyvalence et lors d’applications plus spécifiques. (installation facile sur le terrain) Ì Batteries pouvant être remplacées sur le terrain et offrant une souplesse de déplacement maximal Ì Menu intuitif à trois boutons extrêmement convivial, la navigation se commande d’une simple pression du pouce. Ì Plus besoin de crayon et de papier - dictez simplement vos observations à la caméra. Un commentaire vocal peut être joint à chaque image prise. Les commentaires vocaux sont enregistrés avec les images individuelles pour référence future Ì Précision des mesures supérieure à la moyenne dans la plupart des situations grâce à sa mise au point manuelle à une seule main, sa correction de l’émissivité, sa compensation de la température d’arrière-plan réfléchie et sa correction de la transmission Ì Sangle réglable pour droitier ou gaucher Ì Optimisée pour le travail de terrain en environnement difficile Ì Conçue et testée pour résister à une chute de 2 m Ì Résiste à l’eau et à la poussière - testée conforme IP54 Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Cela permet d’effectuer plus rapidement l’inspection, la réparation et la vérification des équipements électriques et (électro)mécaniques. Ì Résiste à l’eau et à la poussière Ì Chute de 3 mètres testé Ì Affichage en °C ou °F Ì Ergonomique Ì Clip pour boîte à outil ou pour ceinture Ì Technologie Laser précise, fait pour des mesures plus précises et répétées Ì Fluke 62 Max+ a deux lasers rotatifs pour identifier les zones de mesure Ì Large afficheur rétroéclairé Ì Affichage Min. Max., Moy, ou Diff. entre 2 températures Ì Alarmes Haute et basse pour un affichage rapide des dépassement de seuils Ì Lecteur de cartes SD 2Go pour faciliter le transfert des images Ì Solution complète comprenant la caméra et le logiciel, optimisée pour le travail de terrain Ì Garantie 2 ans Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Ì Des téléobjectifs et des objectifs grand angle disponibles en option pour une plus grande polyvalence et des applications plus spécifiques Ì Batteries remplaceables facilement sur le terrain, permet une souplesse de déplacement maximale Ì Simple d’utilisation, menu intuitif à 3 boutons extrêmement convivial - la navigation se commande d’une simple pression du pouce Ì Plus besoin de crayon et de papier - dictez simplement vos observations à la caméra Ì Commentaires vocaux enregistrés avec les images individuelles pour référence future Ì Une précision des mesures supérieure à la moyenne dans la plupart des situations grâce à sa mise au point manuelle à une seule main, sa correction de l’émissivité, sa compensation de la température d’arrière-plan réfléchie et sa correction de la transmission. Ì Sangle adaptable pour droitier ou gaucher Ì Robuste, optimisée pour le travail de terrain en environnement difficile Ì Conçue et testée pour résister à une chute de 2m Ì Résiste à l’eau et à la poussière - testée conforme à la classe IP54 Ì Pour plus d’informations techniques, merci de consulter la fiche technique sur www.farnell.com Contenu du Kit: Caméra infrarouge Ti32, Logiciel SmartView, carte SD 2Go, lecteur de carte SD, valise de transport robuste, valise de transport souple, sangle, batterie rechargeable, alimentation/chargeur AC et manuel d’utilisation. Caractéristiques: Ì Conçue et testée pour résister à une chute de 2 mètres Ì Excellente sensibilité thermique afin de détecter les écarts de températures même infimes (qui pourraient être révélateurs de problèmes) Ì Affichage LCD couleur VGA (640 x 480) 9,1 cm en mode paysage Ì Gammes de mesure de températures pour les applications commerciales et industrielles Ì Logiciel d’analyse et de création de rapports SmartView™ (mises à jour gratuites à vie) Ti27 & Ti29 Série Ti100 www.farnell.com/weller 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 120 WATTS Fer à souder et à dessouder de forte puissance 15% de remise, valable à partir de novembre 2012 jusqu‘à épuisemement du stock 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 WR 2000 ER Référence: 2164916 composée de (supports inclus): WR 3000M ER Référence: 2164918 composée de (supports inclus): REPRISES EFFICACES AVEC LES NOUVEAUX KITS KITS WR POUR LES TRAVAUX DE SOUDAGE ET DE DESSOUDAGE NÉCESSITANT BEAUCOUP DE PUISSANCE WR 2 Bloc d‘alimentation Station de réparation à 2 canaux WP 65 Montée en température 30% plus rapide et durée de vie des pannes allongées de 50% DSX 120 Fer à dessouder très puissant de 120 W avec une montée en température impressionnante WR 3M Bloc d‘alimentation Station de réparation à 3 canaux DSX 120 Fer à dessouder très puissant de 120 W avec une montée en température impressionnante WP 120 Fer à souder de 120 W avec une montée en très rapide et une très grande stabilité de température HAP 200 Fer à air chaud très sécurisant farnell.com element14.com 32 Soudage Tension 230V / 50Hz Contrôle de la température +50°C à +550°C Puissance 200W Précision de température ± 9°C Classe de protection I Stabilité de température ± 2°C Dimensions (L x l x H) 170 x 151 x 130mm Tension d’entrée 230V Tension d’entrée 230V Consommation 80W précision de la température ± 9°C Indice de protection 1 Dimensions (LxllxH) 166 x 101 x 101mm Température: +50°C à +450°C Consommation 255 W Protection ESD Oui Voies 2 Afficheur LCD graphique avec rétroéclairage Interface Oui Tension 230V / 50Hz Contrôle de température +50°C à +550°C Puissance 200W Précision de la température ± 9°C (±17°F) Classe de protection I Stabilité en température ± 2°C (±9°F) Dimensions (LxlxH) 170 x 151 x 130mm Prix Unitaire Description Code Commande 1+ Bloc d’alimentation WX 2 185-1606● 369.00 Station de soudage WR 2020 185-1607● 715.00 Station de soudage WR 2021 185-1608● 880.00 Outils individuels Micro brucelles WXMT 185-1609● 122.00 Micro brucelles WXMT avec support de sécurité 185-1610● 267.00 Support de sécurité WDH 60 185-1611● 62.00 Fer à souder WXP 120 185-1612● 168.00 Fer à souder WXP 120 avec support de sécurité 185-1613● 177.00 Micro fer à souder WXMP 185-1614● 123.00 Micro fer à souder WXMP avec support de sécurité 185-1616● 234.00 Fer à souder WXP 200 185-1617● 199.00 Fer à souder WXP 200 avec support de sécurité 185-1618● 219.00 WDH 31 Safety Rest 189-9054● 18.50 WX Connecting Cable 196-1326● 9.90 WX Adapter for PC 196-1327● 17.90 WX Adapter for WFE/WHP 196-1328● 17.90 Tip Retaining Barrel 196-1423● 11.40 Prix Unitaire Description Code Commande 1+ 3+ WXD 2 Control Unit 209-7805● 535.00 519.00 WXD 2010 Soldering Station 209-7803● 817.00 792.00 WXD 2020 Soldering Station 209-7804● 994.00 964.00 Individuel WXDP 120 Soldering Iron with Safety Rest 209-7806● 282.00 274.00 Prix Unitaire Description Code Commande 1+ Bloc d’alimentation WX 1 189-9050● 329.00 Station de soudage WX 1010 189-9047● 513.00 Station de soudage WX 1011 189-9048● 570.00 Station de soudage WX 1012 189-9049● 529.00 Accessoires individuels Fer à souder WXP 65 189-9051● 179.00 Fer à souder WXP 65 avec support de sécurité 189-9052● 198.00 Fer à souder WXP 120 185-1612● 168.00 Fer à souder WXP 120 avec support de sécurité 185-1613● 177.00 Micro fer à souder WXMP 185-1614● 123.00 Micro fer à souder WXMP avec support de sécurité 185-1616● 234.00 WX Connecting Cable 196-1326● 9.90 WX Adapter for PC 196-1327● 17.90 WX Adapter for WFE/WHP 196-1328● 17.90 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ WSD 81SE 211-5961● 228.00 La nouvelle génération de station de soudage «intelligentes» avec une capacité de travail et des Bloc d’alimentation WX 2 Station à souder WSD 81SE Station de soudage WXD 2 contrôle encore plus élevés. Cela permet de sélectionner et de contrôler en direct des outils supplémentaires sur le plan de travail comme les systèmes d’extraction de fumée WFE et les plaques chauffantes PVT offrant ainsi une zone de travail plus simple et plus efficace. L’unité dispose d’un Ì Station de soudage Ì Fonctionnement pneumatique (alimentation en air comprimé Contenu de la station WR2020: bloc d’alimentation WX 2, 2 fers à souder WXP 120 et 2 supports de sécurité WDH 10 externe nécessaire) Les plaques et les unités d’aspiration des fumées peuvent être contrôlées à partir de l’unité de puissance Ì Menu multilingue navigation et clique & tournez par roue pour plus de facilité d’utilisation Une charge totale de 255W peut être connecté à l’unité de numérique Ì Son rendement permet d’économiser jusqu’ 20% d’énergie Ì Fer à souder ultra rapide WP 65 temps de chauffe 30% plus rapide Ì Afficheur LED Ì Antistatique canal indépendant capable de piloter un outil WX pour souder jusqu’à 200W Contenu de la station WR2021: Bloc d’alimentation WX 2, micro fer à souder WXMP, micro brucelles WXMT, supports de sécurité WDH 50 et WDH 60 Contenu: Station PUD 81, fer à souder WP 65 et support WDH 10 Ì Un canal indépendant pour reconnaître et commander les outils WX Ì Menu et affichage des informations en sept langues ( D, GB, F, I, ES, P, CN) Ì Panneau tactile antistatique Ì Afficheur graphique LC avec rétroéclairage bleu Ì Menu de sélection avec molette et confirmation auditive Ì Interface pour une utilisation avec les robots de soudage Ì Fonction de calibration unique Ì Prise USB en façade pour la mise à jour du Firmware, le réglage des paramètres et le contrôle par clé USB Ì Système de transfert numérique des données pour un ajustement ultra précis Ì Contrôle et commande des autres éléments Weller connectés - Système d’extraction de fumée WFE Ì Antistatique Ì Gamme de température 50 - 500°C (dépend de l’outil) La nouvelle génération des systèmes de soudage intelligents de haute puissance comprend des puissance - deux fers 120 W peuvent être utilisés simultanément et indépendamment Ì Outils pour brancher/débrancher avec détrompeur Ì Données clés stockées sur l’outil que vous utilisez Pas d’étalonnage de l’unité de puissance Ì Tous les outils de la série WX peuvent être connectés à l’unité de puissance, les données stockées sur les pièces à main est numériquement transférées sans interférence extérieure Contenu de la station WR 1010: unité de contrôle WX1, Fer à souder WXP 120, Support WDH 10 fonctions de contrôles supplémentaires. Ces fonctions permettent le contrôle direct et la sélection d’outils supplémentaires tels que l’extracteur de fumée WFE et les platines chauffantes WHP. C’est idéal pour simplifier et rendre plus efficace la zone de travail. Le bloc possède 2 canaux indépendants qui sont Contenu des WXD 2010: Unité de contrôle WXD 2, Fer à déssouder WXDP 120 et support WDH 70 Contenu des WXD 2020: Unité de contrôle WXD 2, Fer à déssouder WXDP 120 fer à souder WXP 120 et support WDH 70 et WDH 10. capables de faire fonctionner 2 outils de soudage WX simultanément ou un outil 1200W. Contenu de la station WR 1011: unité de contrôle WX1, Fer à souder WXMP, Support WDH 50 Ì 2 canaux indépendants avec reconnaissance automatique de tous les outils WX Ì Menu et affichage des informations en plusieurs langues - Français, Anglais, Allemand, Italien, Espagnol, Portugais, Chinois Ì Panneau tactile en verre antistatique Ì Affichage graphique LC avec rétroéclairage bleu Ì Sélection du Menu à partir d’un bouton de contrôle ’Turn & Click’ (Tourne et Clique) avec confirmation acoustique Ì Interface conçue pour une utilisation avec des machines de soudage robotiques Ì Unique fonction de calibration du fer à souder Ì Prise USB en face avant pour mises à jour des logiciels, installations des paramètres et le contrôle à partir d’une clé USB Ì Système numérique de transfert des données pour un réglage ultra précis Ì Contrôle et suivi des autres blocs Weller connectés - extracteur de fumée WFE et les platines chauffantes Ì Antistatique Ì Gamme de températures: 50 - 500°C (selon l’outil) Contenu de la station WR 1012: unité de contrôle WX1, Fer à souder WXP 65, Support WDH 10 Station de soudage WX 1 farnell.com element14.com Soudage 33 Fournis: Station i-CON1,fer à souder I-Tool avec panne 0102CDLF16, support 0A50 et nettoyeur 0008M Donnée technique: Station 0IC113A: puissance continue: 80 W, Alimentation 230V / 50 Hz, tension secondaire 24 V, gamme de température : 150° - 450° Fer à souder i-Tool : Tension 24 V, puissance 150 W Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ I-CON PICO Station de soudage 205-7377● 133.15 Pièces de rechange I-TOOL PICO Fer à souder avec panne 205-7378● 91.22 013100J Elément chauffant pour i-TOOL 205-7379● 50.23 Contenu MFR-UK4 : Pince Tweezer (MFR-H4-TW) et support (MFR-WSPT). Caractéristiques techniques Caractéristiques techniques Puissance: 60W Poids du i-Tool NANO: 30 g (sans câble) Gamme de températures: +150°C à +450°C Contenu du MFR-UK2 : Fer à souder panne (MFR-H2-ST) et support (WS1). Station de soudage ERSA i-CON1 0IC1100A Prix unitaire Description Réf Fab. Code Commande 1+ Desoldering System Kit MFR-1150 207-8469● 418.00 Accessoires de remplacement Universal Workstand with Venturi Box MFR-WSDSX 207-8470● 152.00 Desolder Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK5 207-8482● 266.00 Kit de conversion Solder Cartridge Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK1 207-8484● 117.00 Solder Tip Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK2 207-8485● 117.00 Tweezer Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK4 207-8483● 189.00 Contenu du MFR-UK1 : Fer à souder cartouche(MFR-H1-SC) et support (WS1). Réf. Fab. Code Commande Prix Unitaire I-CON NANO 172-7686● 293.81 I-TOOL NANO 184-5781● 120.84 Système de Dessoudage MFR-1150 Ì Technologie SmartHeat fournit une puissance exceptionnelle pour les applications avec des exigences thermiques importantes Ì La forte puissance de sortie à une température constante fournit d’excellent rendement Ì 4 fers disponibles pour augmenter les solutions de soudage et de réparation sur une seul système Ì Chaque fer a une gamme complète de cartouche et de panne de soudage pour un maximum de flexibilité Ì Manche ergonomique pour la sécurité et le confort de l’utilisateur Ì Tension d’alimentation : 100- 240VAC Ì Fréquence d’alimentation secteur : 50/60Hz Ì Consommation : 65W max. Ì Puissance de Sortie : 60W max Ì Fréquence de Sortie : 450KHz Ì Température ambiante de fonctionnement : 10°C to 40°C Ì Température maximale de fonctionnement Interne: 55°C Station de soudage i-CON NANO Le système de déssoudage MFR-1150 et son support avec Réf. Prix Unitaire Description Fab. Code Commande 1+ Système de soudage/dessoudage avec pompe interne MFR-1350 190-9694● 545.00 Système de dessoudage avec pompe interne MFR-1351 190-9695● 665.00 Aceesoires de remplacement Outil de dessoudage MFR-H5-DS 190-9696● 118.99 Support de dessoudage MFR-WSDSU 190-9697● 48.08 Universal Workstand with Venturi Box MFR-WSDSX 207-8470● 152.00 Accessoires Optionnels Solder Cartridge Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK1 207-8484● 117.00 Solder Tip Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK2 207-8485● 117.00 Tweezer Handpiece and Workstand MFR-UK4 207-8483● 189.00 Récipient jetable (Paquet de 10) MFR-DC10 190-9698● 10.82 Poignée de remplacement pour outil de dessoudage MFR-PG 190-9699● 20.00 Filtre pour port d’aspiration AC-VPF 190-9700● 2.50 Kit de joints pour récipient (Paquet de 2) AC-SK1 190-9701● 7.50 Port d’aspiration AC-VP 190-9702● 6.95 Tube à air ESD AC-VL 190-9703● 21.50 Ì Station de soudage contrôlée par microprocesseur, idéale pour la production, maintenance et laboratoire Ì Fonctions mise en veille et arrêt automatique, permettent une économie d’énergie et une plus longue durée de vie de la station Ì 3 températures programmables et températures réglables Ì Temps de chauffe et rechauffe rapide grâce à la haute performance de l’élément chauffant Ì Pannes disponibles séparément en fonction des applications Station de désoudage MFR-1300 SmartHeat Venturi fournit une alternative pour l’alimentation en air de toute la gamme MFR.Le MFR-1150 est un système complet de dessoudage avec aspiration qui comprend une alimentation, un pistolet à dessouder et un support avec venturi.Le kit de conversion MFR-UK5 permet aussi de Livrée avec: station électronique i-CON1, fer à souder i-Tool avec panne 0102CDLF16, support 0A50 et nettoyeur de pannes 0008M. Caractéristiques: Ì Station électronique 0IC113A: puissance continue 80 W, tension d’alimentation 230V / 50 Hz, tension secondaire 24V, gamme de température de 150°C à 450°C Ì Fer à souder i-Tool: tension 24 V, puissance 150 W transformer les systèmes existants MFR-1100 ou MFR-2200 et les anciens systèmes MFR en système de dessoudage à la pointe de la technologie. Le venturi intégré fournit une pression de 0,85 Bar, ce qui accroît de façon significative les capacités de dessoudage. Le nouveau manche a été conçu pour être utilisé selon deux configurations. Le MFR-H5-DS peut être utilisé comme crayon ou comme pistolet en ajoutant simplement un clip sur l’embout fourni avec le manche. Les capacités de récupération des déchets de soudure ont été augmentées de 40 % par rapport au précédent système MFR et l’innovante chambre de récupération des déchets jetable permet de réduire les temps d’immobilisation et d’effectuer des changements rapides. La série MFR-1300 d’OK International propose un système de dessoudage et de réparation de nouvelle génération.La nouvelle alimentation offre une pompe interne de 0,7 bar dont la force d’aspiration combinée avec la technologie SmartHeat permettra de dessouder facilement tous les composants traversants et ainsi conserver vos produits à l’abri de Contenu du MFR-1150: Bloc d’alimentation, Fer à dessouder, Support, Kit d’accessoires et tuyaux d’air et nettoyeur de panne dommages sur la carte. La nouvelle poignée a été conçu pour être utilisé dans deux configurations. La MFR-H5-DS peut être utilisé comme un crayon ou comme un pistolet simplement en ajoutant un clip (fourni) sur la poignée. La capacité de collecte de la soudure a été augmenté de 40% par rapport aux anciens systèmes MFR et la chambre de collecte innovante et remplaçable permet de réduire les temps d’arrêt grâce à un changement plus rapide. Contenu du MFR-UK5 : Fer à déssouder (MFR-H5-DS) et Support (MFR-WSDSX). Ì Deux sorties commutables Ì Compatible avec la gamme MFR précédente Contenu du MFR-UK4 : Brucelles de dessoudage (MFR-H4-TW) et support (MFR-WSPT). Contenu du MFR-UK2 : Manche pour panne de soudage (MFR-H2-ST) et support (WS1). Contenu du MFR-UK1 : Manche pour Cartouche de soudage (MFR-H1-SC) et support (WS1) Ì Pompe puissante intégrée Ì Poignée ergonomique 2 en 1 (crayon ou pistolet) Ì Capacité de la chambre de collection 40% supérieure Contenu de MFR-1351: Alimentation, Poignée de dessoudage, Poignée de soudage Station de soudage et de dessoudage Contenu de MFR-1350: Alimentation, Poignée de dessoudage, Station de dessoudage farnell.com element14.com 34 Soudage Tension d’alimentation 220V Pompe à air Diaphragme Puissance 560W Tension de sortie 187 x 135 x 245mm Gamme de température +100°C à +480°C Poids 4.5g Volume 23l/min Tension d’alimentation 220V Gamme de température Fer à air chaud:+100°C à +500°C Puissance Fer à air chaud: 800w Fer à souder:+200°C à +480°C Pompe: 40W volume d’air 20-100% du max. Fer à souder: 50W Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! Tension d’alimentation 220V Volume 0.18m³/min Puissance 540W Tension de sortie 170 x 55 x 140mm Gamme de température +100°C à +350°C Poids 1.1kg Tension d’alimentation Tension de sortie Puissance Stabilité en température Gamme de température Afficheur LCD Tension d’alimentation 220V Tension de sortie 28V Puissance 60W Stabilité en température ±1°C (Static) Gamme de température +150°C à +450°C Afficheur Tension d’alimentation 220V Tension de sortie 24V Puisssance 60W Stabilité en température ±1°C (Static) Gamme de température +150°C à +450°C Afficheur LCD Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 21-10135 UK 206-4552● 47.03 45.63 44.26 21-10135 EU 206-2634● 47.03 45.63 44.26 Element chauffant de remplacement CBB022791 211-3927● 11.16 10.52 10.08 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 21-10130 UK+EU 206-2633● 150.30 145.79 141.41 Element chauffant de remplacement CBB019822 211-3925● 6.25 5.87 5.61 Element de dessoudage de remplacement CBB020840 211-3926● 15.69 14.73 13.96 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 21-10125 UK 206-4551● 130.67 126.77 122.95 21-10125 EU 206-2632● 130.67 126.77 122.95 Element chauffant de remplacement CBB020837 211-3924● 11.16 10.52 10.08 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ AT60D-EU 207-5392● 62.48 60.57 58.65 AT60D-UK 207-5393● 62.48 60.57 58.65 Element chauffant de remplacement CBB018722 211-3923● 8.48 7.97 7.59 Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 21-10120 UK 206-4550● 79.42 77.04 74.74 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 21-10115 UK 206-4549● 47.03 45.63 44.26 21-10115 EU 206-2627● 47.03 45.63 44.26 Element chauffant de remplacement CBB018722 211-3923● 8.48 7.97 7.59 Station de réparation CMS Station de soudage Station à air chaud pour le préchauffage et la réparation Station de soudage à air chaud Station de soudage Station de soudage Ì Double afficheur LCD pour un affichage immédiat des Ì Antistatique de sécurité Ì Trois boutons programmables pour température prédéfinis Ì Asservissement du capteur, Contenu: Alimentation, Fer à souder, Support de fer, Éponge, Cordons d’alimentation et manuel d’utilisation Ì Chauffage rapide, jusqu’à 350°C en seulement 10 secondes Ì Capteur de température Ì Antistatique sécurité Ì Préréglages de température: 3 pour température précise et stable, permet de dessouder les composants sensibles à la température, en toute sécurité examinés comme les QFP, PLCC, SOP, BGA etc Ì Système de refroidissement intelligent, retard de souffle après l’opération , mise hors tension automatique lorsque la température de l’air est inférieure à 100°C Ì Élément chauffant puissant permet un temps de chauffage court, offrant de bonnes performances à une température constante ou réglable. (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) des températures fréquemment utilisés Ì Fer amovible avec pointe de crayon de style Ì Comprend un support Ì Affichage numérique à Led température interchangeables entre Fahrenheit et Celsius Ì Idéal pour les ateliers, ou les dépannage sur site paramètres de travail Ì Température rapide Ì Conversion de unités de température °C/°F Ì Air froid, arrêt du chauffage Ì Compatible avec de nombreuses buses Ì Contrôle de la température précis et étalonnage de la température informatisé Ì Fer détachable aec panne stylo Ì Écran LED Ì Idéal pour les ateliers Ì Idéal pourra soudure sans plomb, la colophane-core, à base de plomb, d’argent ou de tout autre type maintient la température de sortie stable Ì Option Cool Flow pour faire un préchauffage et un refroidissement Ì Fonctionne avec les stations de réparation AT pour les BGA Ì Conception intelligente et compacte facile à transporter Ì Contrôle automatique de la température permet de fonctionner en continu pendant de longues heures de travail, sans incidence sur le fonctionnement de l’appareil et la température ne dépassera pas la température standard du panneau Ì Disponible avec cordon d’alimentation EU et UK Ì Mode ’Sleep’, se coupe automatiquement pour économiser de l’énergie Ì Touches pour le réglage de la température et du débit d’air placé à droite sur la poignée Ì Trois groupes de données stockées pour faciliter l’utilisation Ì Compensation de température Ì Alerte en cas de dysfonctionnement (Affiche H-E pour l’élément chauffant et S-E pour le capteur) Ì Fourni avec un cordon eU et UK Ì Disponible soit avec cordon d’alimentation européen ou du Royaume-Uni Ì Pompe à air de haute qualité avec un faible niveau sonore et vibratoire Ì Anti-statique pour ne pas endommager la carte de circuit imprimé en raison de charges statiques et ligne de fuite Ì Disponible avec cordon d’alimentation EU ou UK Ì Antistatique de sécurité Ì Trois boutons programmables pour Ì Affiche de la température réelle et de la consigne Ì Idéal pour la soudure sans plomb, à base de plomb, d’argent ou de tout autre type Ì Disponible soit avec un cordon d’alimentation européen ou UK température prédéfinis Ì Contrôle de la température précis et étalonnage de la température informatisé Ì Élément de chauffage deux-corps Ì Écran LCD Ì Température <°C/> / <°F/> Ì Disponible soit avec un cordon d’alimentation européen ou du Royaume-Uni farnell.com element14.com Soudage 35 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ PC-40 136-0332 46.59 43.82 42.14 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Description Code Commande 1+ DI LI 160 Fiche EU mini 188-8072● 220.84 Code Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ Kit de nettoyage de pannes 0051512799 167-6500 34.00 T0051384199 179-2732 4.20 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 3+ D01810 210-3227● 164.48 159.57 Kit de nettoyage de pannes Tension d’entrée 230V 48dB Pression Max. 2700Pa Dimensions (HxLxP) 320x320x395395 Volume Max 230m³/h Poids 1919 Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ Pompe antistatique D01699 179-2724 17.68 16.99 16.72 Buse de remplacement D01700 179-2725 4.94 4.77 4.68 Support pour circuits imprimés réglable Bain de soudure Di-Li 160 Pompe à dessouder antistatique Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ T0053664699 209-7819● 1739.00 Un ensemble de trois produits (WDC2, barre à polir les pannes, activateur de panne) qui prolongera la durée de vie des pannes utilisées avec la soudure sans plomb (uniquement compatible avec les nouveaux supports WD). Caméra d’inspection avec enregistrement Le bain de soudue Di-Li permet de préparer les composants pour la soudure. Compatible avec la soudure sans plomb. La température est contrôlable Applications: étamage de fils, composants ou câble. DISTELKAMP Ì Support universel pratique Ì Idéal pour équiper et réparer les plaques conductrices Ì Rotation de la plaque à 360° Ì Dimensions: 300 x 120x 120 mm Ì Taille max. de la plaque:: 250 mm Ì Livré sans plaque Permet d’effectuer facilement des inspections visuelles en zones difficiles à atteindre et même dans l’obscurité totale ou en milieu sous-marin. Idéal pour la plomberie, l’électricité, les industries de l’automobile et la construction. Résolution Agrandissements: Rack fourni Code Commande 1.3 M pixels (1280 x 1024) 10x à 50x, 200x AMITA 164-0612 1.3 M pixels (1280 x 1024) 10x à 50x, 200x AM35B 168-5819 1.3 M pixels (1280 x 1024) 10x à 20x, 20x à 92x AM35B 168-5821 1.3 M pixels (1280 x 1024) 10x à 50x, 200x AM35B 168-5822 1.3 M pixels (1280 x 1024) 500x AM35B 168-5823 640* 480pixels (VGA) 10x à 50x, 200x AM35B 186-1619 Ì Résistance électrique de 105 OHM Ì Buse en fibre de carbone conductrice et résistante à la chaleur Système d’extraction de fumée Ì Corps en métal avec un volume de 7.7cm3 Ì Conforme ESD Microscope numérique Kit évacuation de fumée 4V avec 2 embouts Ì Écran LCD-TFT 2.7" Ì Menu OSD Ì Tête de caméra de 17mm Ì Possibilité d’enregistrer sur carte micro SD 128Mo fournie (supporte jusqu’à 32Go) Contenu: Caméra, afficheur LCD, alimentation, Contenu du kit: Unité Zero-Smog 4V, Filtres, 2 extracteurs 60mm, 2 bras, 2 buses entonnoir, 2 stop, 2 x tuyau d’aspiration tube de 1m, 3 accessoires (crochet, miroir, aimant) Note: Nécessite 4 piles AA pour l’unité principale Étudiés et conçus pour un usage professionnel, le Dino-Lite est un microscope très compact et permet aux utilisateurs tout type de prises (photos et vidéos), même en temps réel et possède une fonction de zoom que permet d’agrandir jusqu’à 500 fois. Les caractéristiques de mesures telles que les lignes, les angles, les diamètres, les rayons et l’étalonnage sont disponibles. Tous les produits sont vendus avec le rack professionnel AM35B ou le rack standard AMITA. Le rack professionnel AM35B est également disponible en tant que pièce de rechange. Pour protéger la santé des opérateurs, Weller présente le zéro-Smog 4V, une petite unité d’extraction de fumée. Un système de surveillance visuelle du filtre (rouge / jaune / vert) avec un signal d’alarme sonore pour anticiper l’alerte de l’etat du filtre, garantissant une performance optimale. Le système de contrôle de la pression assure qu’un flux d’air constant est maintenu dans chaque bras d’extraction indépendamment du nombre de bras en fonctionnement. La vitesse du moteur est ajustée automatiquement pour que l’énergie soit économisée, le niveau de bruit est réduit et la durée de vie du filtre est prolongée. Le Zero-smog 4V a des points de connexion pour 4 bras et peut être équipé d’un simple clic. Si un plus grand nombre plus de connexions est nécessaire, elles peuvent être achetés séparément. Le nouveau système Easy-Click est conçu pour de nombreuses configurations différentes. Les paramètres de contrôle peuvent être chargés via un lecteur USB. Rétro-éclairage numérique. Facilité de navigation dans un menu multilangue. Applications: Ì Contrôle de la qualité dans les domaines industriels Ì Service après-vente Ì Téléconférences techniques Ì La recherche et la science Ì Permet d’inspecter facilement des petites surfaces difficiles à atteindre Ì Étanche à 1m Ì Éclairage à LED sur la caméra Ì IP67 Microscope numérique Microscope numérique avec Rack AMITA Rack AM35B Caractéristiques: Ì Prise de vue MicroTouch Ì Vidéo : jusqu’à 30 fps Ì Eclairage intégré à 8 LED blanches Ì Logiciels: DinoCapture avec support pour les fonctions de mesure, d’étalonnage et d’un autre zoom numérique Ì Interface: transmission d’images via USB haute vitesse (PC) farnell.com element14.com 36 Outillage à main Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ D01914 210-3231 106.95 103.77 Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 3+ 6+ 12+ 722-2324 497.52 – – – – – – Ampoule 10W Halogène 344-0977 15.37 14.92 14.72 14.56 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ D01919 210-3236 201.50 195.30 Contrôle total des couts, réduction de la gestion administrative, visibilité sur vos dépenses, flexibilité et personnalisation selon les besoins de votre société. farnell.com/ibuy Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Magnification Code Commande 1+ AM7013MZT-X Jusqu’à x200 209-8873 906.25 AM7013MZT4-X Jusqu’à x400 209-8874 1108.25 Table DI LI 1050 Coffret d’outils 78 pièces Solution gratuite d’achats intelligents en ligne Microscopes numériques Microscope stéreo longue portée Ensemble d’outils 120 pièces Ì Fendue 8 x150,6x100,5x75mm Ì Phllips: PH2 x 100,PH1 x 75mm Ì Poignée de tournevis Ì Embout 1/2" 10-11-12-13-14-15-17-19mm Ì Embout 21mm Ì Cliquet 1/2" Ì Adaptateur 1/4" Dr.Sockets: 5-6-7-8-9-10-11-12- 13mm Ì Clés plates 8-10-11-12-13-14-15-16-17-19mm Série7000 Ì Idéal pour regarder la surface des articles qui ne s’adapteront pas sur un microscope plat conventionnel Ì Eclairage supérieur pivotant avec lampe 12V Ì Oculaires x10 avec réglages et bords caoutchoucs Ì Lentilles x2 donnant un grossissement x20 Ì Hauteur colonne 290mm Ì Bras articulé 290mm DISTELKAMP Cet ensemble d’outils de qualité est fourni dans une boîte à outils en aluminium avec une poignée de transport, idéal pour la plupart des industries. Réf. Fab. Code Commande Prix Unitaire Microscope Zoom numérique DI LI 1001 D 181-4356 798.43 Accessoires Lentille 5X-35X DI LI 2001V 181-4359 52.75 Lentille 20X-105X DI LI 2001-2 181-4360 52.75 Table pour Microscope DI LI 1050 181-4361 158.83 Anneau lumineux Prise EU DI LI 1065 181-4362 63.52 Ì 1/4 "Dr Sockets: 4, 4.5, 5, 5,5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14mm Ì 1/4 "Dr Barre T,joint universel, rallonge, moleté, 50, 100mm Ì 1/4 "Dr: Coupleur, adaptateur Ì 1/2 "Dr: rapide poignée à cliquet communiqué Ì 1/2 "Dr: Sockets: 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 24, 27, 32mm Ì 1/2 "Dr: barres d’extension, 125, 250mm Ì 1/2 "Dr: Cardan Ì 1/2 "Dr: prise de bougie, 16-21mm Ì 1/2 "x 3/8" Dr: Coulissante tête T Ì 1/2 "x 3M ruban à mesurer caoutchouc Ì Marteau Ì Gants Ì Chiffon de tissu Ì Caisse à outil aluminium, (LxPxH) 450 x 330 x 150mm Le microscope numérique Dino- Lite Premier Série 7000 est complet avec un AM35B. Convient pour une grande variété Cet ensemble d’outils de qualité est fourni dans une caisse avec une poignée de transport et des plateaux d’insertion pour ranger les outils en Code Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ Microscope numérique avec rack AMITA 413T-A 164-0612 378.23 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B 413T-X 168-5819 460.23 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B 413TL-X 168-5821 542.23 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B 413ZT-X 168-5822 562.96 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B 413T5-X 168-5823 468.80 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B 2011-X 186-1619 252.61 Microscope numérique avec rack AM35B AD413ZTA-X 209-8867 606.25 Rack professionnel AM35B 164-0613 174.98 Microscope zoom numérique Di-Li 1000 Contenu du kit: Ì Pinces coupantes diagonales 150mm Ì Pinces à bec long 150mm Ì Pince combinés 175mm Ì Pince de pompe à eau 250mm Ì Pince à circlips 4-en-1 Ì Tournevis plat: 5 x 75, 6 x100mm Ì Tournevis cruciforme: PH1 x 75, PH2 x 100mm Ì Testeur, 100 ∼ 250V Ì Couteau Ì Niveau 200mm Torpedo Ì 4 Tournevis de précision Ì Outil de sertissage 200mm Ì 40 pièce isolée bornes Ì Boîte de tournevis Ì 1 x adaptateur Quick Ì Hexa: 1,5, 2, 2,5, 3, 4, 5, 6 mm Ì Fendue: 3, 4, 4,5, 5, 5,5, 6, 7 mm Ì Pozi: PZ0, PZ1, PZ2, PZ3, PZ4 Ì Phillips: PH0, PH1, PH2, PH3, PH4 Ì Torx de sécurité: T10-15-20-25-27-30 Ì Mini Monture de scie avec 2 lames Ì Cliquet 1/4 "à 3 voies tournevis à flex Ì Clés mixtes: 8, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 17, 19, 22mm Ì Clé 250mm réglable Ì Clés hexagonales: 1,5, 2, 2,5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10mm Ì 1/4 "Dr poignée rapide cliquet d’applications et d’environnements, y compris la science, les travaux d’ingénierie, de réparation détaillée, d’assemblage et de contrôle de qualité, dans l’industrie électronique et mécanique. toute sécurité. Outils: Ì Pince 175mm Ì Pince à bec long 150mm Ì Pince coupante 150mm Ì Pince multiprise 250mm Ì Marteau 8oz Ì Pince ajustable 200mm Ì Torx T9-T40 Ì Cutter 18m Ì Hexa 2.5mm-10mm Ì Haute résolution 5m avec Microtouch II Snapshot disponible pour les utilisateurs de Windows. Ì Polarisé Ì 8 LEd blanches contrôle On/Off par logiciel Ì Grossissement x10, x50, x200 (AM7013MZT-X) ou x400 (AM7013MZT4-X) Ì débit jusqu’à 30 images par sec., 15 imag. /Sec. à 1.3mp Ì USB 2.0 compatible Windows 2000/XP, Vista, 7 et Mac X (10.4 ou supérieur) Ì Magnification: Zoom optique 10x-70x, avec accessoire de lentille 5x-105x Ì Objectif: 0.7x-4.5x Ì Support: Base avec étage pour gros microscope 270x240 mm Ì Moniteur: Haute résolution 8" Ì CCD: Haute résolution 1/3", 625 lignes Ì Focus: des deux cotés Ì Support: Stable en métal longueur 300 mm Ì Illumination: Lumière Incidente ajustable 48-LED fixé sur l’objecti f Spécifications Techniques: Connexion USB pour numériser les sources de signal analogique audio vidéo La table croisée est utile pour la dissection, l’inspection de circuits imprimés, et bien d’autres situations d’observation, qui nécessitent un déplacement définis et contrôlé. La lumière fluorescente en anneau fournit un éclairage froid sans ombre pendant 1000 heures (avec des ampoules longue durée de vie). Ce système d’éclairage est conçu pour s’adapter à la plupart des marques de microscopes farnell.com element14.com Outillage à main 37 Réf Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 3+ MB-EDI-151 210-2057 147.56 143.15 Prix Unitaire Dimensions Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 12mm x 16.5m FE510093357 177-6401● 33.88 30.17 29.10 25mm x 16.5m FE510093365 177-6402● 69.85 62.20 60.00 Prix Unitaire Dimensions Réf. Fab Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 50mm x 16.5m FE510093332 177-6398● 131.73 125.14 123.84 Feuille de Cuivre 1182 avec adhésif conducteur sur les deux faces Fab. Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1170 TAPE 15MM 213-5665● 62.00 58.13 53.66 1170 TAPE 19MM 213-5666● 78.26 73.36 67.72 1170 TAPE 25MM 213-5667● 102.44 96.04 88.64 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 6+ 12+ T4454 209-4416 20.38 19.75 19.19 kit de mesure numérique électronique Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1183 TAPE 12MM 12mm 213-5669● 59.35 55.65 51.35 1183 TAPE 19MM 19mm 213-5671● 93.42 87.58 80.83 1183 TAPE 25MM 25mm 213-5672● 122.28 114.64 105.82 Réception d’un email d’information contenant le statut de votre commande ainsi que la date prévue de livraison sur tous vos produits en reliquat 3M™ Ruban de blindage Cuivre, 1183 Commutateur à clé universel 3M™ Ruban Aluminium, 1170 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Taille Code Commande 1+ JOKER SW 10,0 SB 10mm 209-9651 14.95 JOKER SW 13,0 SB 13mm 209-9653 14.95 JOKER SW 17,0 SB 17mm 209-9654 17.09 JOKER SW 19,0 SB 19mm 209-9655 19.26 Kit de 4 pces JOKER SET 4TLG SB 209-9656 58.82 Le ruban 3M™ 1182 est généralement utilisé pour coller deux surfaces ensemble, à la fois électriquement et physiquement. Il peut être utilisé par exemple, pour coller un joint conducteur à une surface conductrice dans le cadre d’une solution de blindage EMI pour un boîtier électronique. MB-EDI-151 Livraison optimisée des reliquats de commande Feuille de Cuivre 1181 avec adhésif conducteur Le ruban 3M™ 1183 est constitué d’un support Le ruban 3M™ 1181 se compose d’une feuille de cuivre souple et d’un unique adhésif acrylique conducteur sensible à la pression. Clés à cliquet Ce kit contient 3 des outils de mesure et de réglage les plus populaires, fournis dans une mallette de rangement équipée sur mesure. Le kit comprend 1 x 150mm / 6 "étrier numérique, 1 x indicateur numérique électronique de 25mm (EDI-25) et 1 x embase magnétique avec réglage fin (MB-2). Le ruban 3M™ 1170 est constitué d’un support lisse en aluminium et d’un adhésif acrylique conducteur de construction unique. 6 en 1 Le ruban 3M™ 1181 est généralement utilisé pour des applications exigeant une excellente conductivité électrique du substrat par application de l’adhésif au support papier. Les utilisations courantes comprennent la terre et le blindage EMI dans les équipements, composants, pièces protégées, etc. La feuille de cuivre est soudable et résiste à l’oxydation et à la décoloration. Châssis en acier inoxydable et des mâchoires de mesure Ajustement par rouleau et vis de blocage moletée Tige profonde Afficheur LCD avec conversion pouces / métrique, réglage d’origine, 4 voies de mesures et bien plus Indicateur électronique dispose d’un diamètre de 57mm visage avec une taille de chiffre de 12.5mm Tige 8mm et patte centrale de serrage avec un type Serie Jocker Ì Fourni avec une doublure amovible pour faciliter lisse en cuivre étamé et d’un adhésif acrylique conducteur de construction unique. Commutateur à clé universel 6 en 1 pour toutes les La gamme de cliquet Joker permet son utilisation dans la plupart des situations imaginables rapidement et Ì Fourni avec une doublure amovible pour faciliter la manipulation et la découpe Ì Disponible en largeur 12, 19 et 25mm, en rouleau de 16.5m Ì Applications: Typiquement utilisé dans les applications qui requiert une excellente conductivité électrique entre le support aluminium et le substrat sur lequel est posé le ruban. Les applications les plus communes sont : Mise à la terre, blindage EMI ..... Le cuivre étamé facilite le soudage et la résistance contre la corrosion et l’oxydation. applications de blocage technique. Pour une utilisation dans les systèmes de verrouillage dans les consoles de puissance, de gaz et d’eau industrielle, les équipements techniques des bâtiments (climatisation par exemple), les robinets d’arrêt, consoles électriques, portes, etc de balle, filet M2.5mm comme un point de contact Précision 0,02 mm avec une temps de réponse inférieur à 0,5 m / 5 Température d’utilisation 0-40°C Base magnétique dispose de bras en croix solide, plongeur et indicateurs à levier Commutateur magnétique avec une force de 800N Longueur hors tout 230mm Le ruban 3M™ 1182 se compose d’une feuille de cuivre qui est recouverte sur les deux côtés d’un unique adhésif acrylique conducteur sensible à la pression. la manipulation et la découpe Ì Disponible en largeur 15, 19 et 25mm, en rouleau de 16.5m Ì Applications: Typiquement utilisé dans les applications qui requiert une excellente conductivité électrique entre le support aluminium et le substrat sur lequel est posé le ruban. Les applications les plus communes sont : Mise à la terre, blindage EMI ..... Ì Grâce à un mécanisme double tournant un total de 4 clés différentes peut être amené en position. Ì Équipés avec une touche carré de 5 mm et un porte-embout magnétique de ¼” Ì Poids: 70 g Ì Dimensions: 97 x 25 mm Contenu: (touches) carré: 5, 6, 7 et 8 mm, triangle: 9 mm et deux bits: 3-5 mm avec une grande précision. La fonction cliquet dispose à la fin du cycle d’un mécanisme de dent très fine, renforçant la flexibilité, même dans les environnements de travail confinés. Ì Haute résistance à l’usure Ì Grande protection contre la corrosion Ì Les écrous et boulons peuvent facilement être maintenus dans la mâchoire et positionnés au bon endroit Ì Angle de rotation très faible Ì Disponible en taille 10, 13, 17, 19mm et en kit de 4 pièces farnell.com element14.com 38 Rubans adhésifs Réf. Prix Unitaire Largeur Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 36+ 12mm 92 TAPE 12MM X 33M 330-9691 39.31 38.08 37.24 19mm 92 TAPE 19MM X 33M 330-9708 47.37 44.09 42.44 25mm 92 TAPE 25MM X 33M 330-9710● 77.16 74.72 73.14 Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ FE510052924 177-6406● 112.53 100.27 96.69 FE510052890 177-6407● 26.94 24.00 22.91 FE510052916 177-6408● 57.16 50.91 49.13 Prix Unitaire Description Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ FE510053195 177-6404● 33.05 29.73 28.66 FE510052866 177-6405● 68.73 61.23 59.04 Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1205 TAPE 9MM 9mm 213-5653● 38.69 36.27 33.48 1205 TAPE 12MM 12mm 213-5654● 50.98 47.79 44.11 1205 TAPE 19MM 19mm 213-5655● 80.97 75.92 70.08 Ruban adhésif en polyimide Kapton, Scotch 92 Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1316 TAPE 12MM 12mm 213-5647● 213.13 204.93 193.75 1316 TAPE 19MM 19mm 213-5648● 288.21 277.12 262.01 1316 TAPE 25MM 25mm 213-5649● 391.81 376.74 356.19 Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 92 TAPE 6MM 6mm 213-5662● 26.41 24.77 22.86 92 TAPE 9MM 9mm 213-5663● 39.51 37.05 34.19 92 TAPE 50MM 50mm 213-5664● 190.68 183.35 173.35 Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. Feuille de Cuivre 1194 avec adhésif conducteur sur les deux faces Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1345 TAPE 9MM 9mm 213-5676● 40.61 38.07 35.14 1345 TAPE 12MM 12mm 213-5677● 54.00 50.64 46.73 1345 TAPE 19MM 19mm 213-5678● 84.97 79.67 73.53 1345 TAPE 25MM 25mm 213-5679● 111.26 104.30 96.29 Feuille de Cuivre ondulée 1245 3M™ Ruban Film Polyimide, 92 Ruban Magnétique 3M™ , 1316 Le ruban 3M™ se compose d’une feuille de cuivre souple et d’un adhésif acrylique agressif sensible à la pression. Les bords du motif en relief de la feuille permettent à la couche de colle d’établir un Ì Ruban polyimide enduit sur une face d’adhésif silicone thermodurcissable, de classe H (180°C) Ì Retardateur de flamme Ì Couleur Ambre Ì Excellente résistance thermique et mécanique Ruban 3M™ Polyimide, 1205 3M™ Ruban, 1345 contact fiable métal-métal entre le support et le substrat d’application. Le ruban 3M™ 1205 est constitué d’un polyimide enduit sur un adhésif acrylique. Il est utilisé dans les applications Haute Température dans lesquelles une bonne résistance au solvent est requise, tel que Epaisseur 0.9mm Le ruban 3M™ 1345 est constitué d’un support cuivre gauffré étamé et d’un adhésif acrylique. Ce support gaufré permet lors de la pression d’obtenir un contact électrique direct Ì Utilisé dans des applications telles que la protection de bobines, condensateurs, faisceaux (haute température), la protection d’épingles et d’induits de moteurs de traction et de masquage pour la soudure à la vague Ì Nécessite un cycle de polymérisation de 3h à 260°C minimum, et 24h de traitement pour une résistance optimale aux solvants Ì Disponible en rouleau de 33m Le ruban 3M ™ Film Polyimide 92 est mince, Le ruban 3M™ Magnetique est constitué d’un polymère flexible sur une face et d’un adhesif. Le ruban est magnétisé par alternance de pôles Nord et Sud sur toute la longueur. Le ruban Le ruban 3M™ 1194 se compose d’une feuille de cuivre et d’un adhésif acrylique agressif non conducteur et sensible à la pression. (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) résistant et destiné aux applications Haute Température, tels que bobines, condensateurs et faisceaux. Reconnu UL 510, non propagateur de flamme l’isolation de bobines, condensateurs et réalisation de faisceaux. entre le support cuivre et le substrat sur lequel est appliqué le ruban. Ì Support en polyimide Kapton Ì Adhésif Acrylique Ì Non Propagateur de Flamme Ì Support résistant aux solvants Ì Adhesif en Silicone Thermodurcissable Ì Disponible en largeur 6, 9 et 50mm, Rouleau de 33m Ì Fourni avec une doublure amovible pour faciliter la manipulation et la découpe Ì Haute résistance à la traction Ì Disponible en largeur 9, 12, 19 et 25mm, Rouleau de 16.5m (sauf 12mm en rouleau de 33m) magnétique peut être usiné, tordu et plié sans aucune perte d’énergie magnétique. Ì Applications: Utilisé dans les applications électriques Haute Température dans lesquelles un isolant mince et résistant est requis pour l’’enroulement de bobine, transformateurs, condensateurs et faisceaux. Aussi utilisé sur circuit imprimé comme masque pour soudure à la vague. Ì Applications: Typiquement utilisé dans les applications qui requiert une excellente conductivité électrique entre le support aluminium et le substrat sur lequel est posé le ruban. Les applications les plus communes sont : Mise à la terre, blindage EMI ..... Le cuivre étamé facilite le soudage et augmente la résistance à l’oxydation et la décoloration. Ì Epaisseur 0.9mm Ì Grande variété d’utilisation et d’application Ì Adhésif sensible à la pression Ì Disponible en largeur 12, 19, et 25mm, Rouleau de 30.5m Le ruban 3M™ 1245 est généralement utilisé pour des applications exigeant une excellente conductivité électrique du substrat par application de l’adhésif au support papier. Les utilisations courantes comprennent la terre et le blindage EMI dans les équipements, les composants, les pièces de blindage, etc. La feuille de cuivre est soudable et résiste à l’oxydation et à la décoloration. Ì Disponible en largeur 9, 12 et 19mm, Rouleau de 33m Ì Applications: Utilisé dans des applications électriques Haute Température, dans lesquelles un isolant fin et résistant aux solvents est requis, telles que l’isolation de bobines, transformateurs, condensateurs et la réalisation de faisceaux. farnell.com element14.com Rubans adhésifs 39 Dimensions(mm): H=9.9, W=25.4, D=25.4 Dimensions: H=31.2, l=101.6, P=50.8mm Dimensions: H=30.5, W=101.6, D=50.8mm VCS50US: H=36, L=110, P=78mm VCS70US: H=40, L=130, P=98.5mm Fab. Ruban Prix Unitaire Réf Fab. Largeur Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 1317 TAPE 12MM 12mm 213-5650● 236.56 227.46 215.06 1317 TAPE 19MM 19mm 213-5651● 310.56 298.61 282.33 1317 TAPE 25MM 25mm 213-5652● 424.24 407.91 385.67 PIN CONNECTIONS Broche Sortie Simple Sortie Double 1 +Vin +Vin 2 -Vin -Vin 3 Remote On/Off Remote On/Off 4 +Vout +Vout 5 Trim Com 6 -Vout -Vout Ruban 3M™ Magnétique, 1317 Tension d’entrée 80-275 VAC (120-370 VDC) Fréquence d’entrée 47-400Hz (Les certificats de sécurité couvrent la gamme 47-63Hz) Régulation de ligne ±0.5% max. Régulation de charge ±1% Puissance d’entrée sans charge <0.5W Isolation Entrée vers Sortie: 2 x MOPP Entrée vers masse: 1 x MOPP Ondulation et charge 1% crête crête, BP 20MHz Rendement Jusqu’a 90% Température d’utilisation -20°C à +70°C ’derating’ lineaire de +50°C à 2.5%/°C à 50% de la charge à +70°C Refroidissement Convection Emissions EN55022, Niveau B en conduction. EN55022, niveaul B en radiation Approuvé IEC60950-1, CSA 22.2 No. 60950-1, UL60950-1, EN60950-1, IEC60601-1, CSA 22.2 No. 60601-1, ANSI/AMMI ES60601-1, EN60601-1, Inclu fichier Risk Management VCS100US: H=42, L=159, P=98.2mm Tension d’entrée 85-264 VAC Fréquence d’entrée 47 - 63 Hz Régulation de ligne ±0.5% max. Régulation de charge ±1% max. Ondulation et bruit 1% max. crête-crête, Bande passante 20 MHz Température d’utilisation -20°C à +70°C, avec ’derating’ de 100% de la charge à 50°C à 50% de la charge à 70°C Sécurité EN60950-1, EN60601-1, UL60950-1, UL60601-1, IEC60950-1, IEC60601-1 Emissions EN55022, Niveau B en conduction et Niveau A en radiation Tension d’entrée 24 V (9-36 VDC), 48 V (18-75 VDC) Régulation de ligne ±0.2% max. Régulation de charge Sortie simple: ±0.5% max, Sortie double ±1% max Ondulation et bruit 100mV crête-crête, Bande passante 20 MHz Tension d’isolation Entrée/Sortie: 1600 VDC, Entrée/Boîtier: 1600 VDC, Sortie/Boîtier: 1600 VDC Température d’utilisation -40°C à +100°C, derating de 100% de la charge à +65°C jusqu’à plus de charge à +100°C Protection contre les courts circuits Trip & restart (hiccup) with auto recovery MTBF >560 KHrs selon MIL-STD-217F at 25°C Réf. Tension Courant de sortie Sortie Fab. de sortie Convection Refroidissement forcé ventilateur Code Commande ECP150PS12 12V 8.33A 12.5A 12V / 0.5A 182-1473 ECP150PS15 15V 6.67A 10.0A 12V / 0.5A 182-1474 ECP150PS24 24V 4.17A 6.25A 12V / 0.5A 182-1475 ECP150PS28 28V 3.5A 5.40A 12V / 0.5A 182-1476 ECP150PS48 48V 2.08A 3.10A 12V / 0.5A 182-1478 Réf. Sortie Fab. Puissance Tension Courant Code commande ECS65US12 65W 12V 5.4A 182-1421 ECS65US15 65W 15V 4.3A 182-1422 ECS65US18 65W 18.5V 3.4A 209-9499 ECS65US24 65W 24V 2.7A 182-1423 ECS65US28 65W 28V 2.3A 182-1424 ECS65US48 65W 48V 1.4A 182-1425 Epaisseur 1.5mm Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Série ECP150 Tous les codes● 107.31 104.09 100.87 96.58 Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Série ECS65 Tous les Codes● 47.04 45.63 44.22 42.34 Accessoires Capot ECM40/60 117-6953● 15.07 14.62 14.16 13.56 Tension d’entrée 85-264 VAC (127-370 VDC) Fréquence d’entrée 47 - 63 Hz Rendement Régulation de ligne ±0.5% Régulation de charge ±0.5% (1% pour les versions 5V & 12V) Puissance d’entrée sans charge <0.5W Ondulation et bruit 1% max. pour toutes les tensions Température d’utilisation -10°C à +70°C, avec ’derating’ linéaire de +50°C à 2.5%/°C à 50% de la charge à +70°C, démarrage à -20°C Emissions EN55022 Classe B conduction & radiation Normes de sécurité IEC60950-1, CSA C22.2 No. 60950-1, UL60950-1, TUV, EN60950-1 Le ruban 3M™ Magnétique est constitué d’un polymère flexible sur une face et d’un adhesif. Le ruban est magnétisé par alternance de pôles Nord et Sud sur toute la longueur. Le ruban magnétique peut être usiné, tordu et plié sans aucune perte d’énergie magnétique. Réf. Puissance Tension Courant de Fab. de sortie (W) de sortie (V) sortie (A) Code Commande VCS50US05 40 5 8 182-1457 VCS50US12 50 12 4.2 182-1458 VCS50US15 50 15 3.3 182-1459 VCS50US24 50 24 2.1 182-1460 VCS50US48 50 48 1.05 182-1461 Alimentation 150W Simple sortie Alimentation 65W simple sortie Réf. Puissance Tension Courant de VCS70US05 50 5 10 182-1462 VCS70US12 70 12 5.83 182-1463 VCS70US15 70 15 4.67 182-1464 VCS70US24 70 24 2.92 182-1466 VCS70US48 70 48 1.46 182-1467 VCS100US05 80 5 14 182-1468 VCS100US12 100 12 8.33 182-1469 VCS100US15 100 15 6.67 182-1470 VCS100US24 100 24 4.17 182-1471 VCS100US48 100 48 2.08 182-1472 Ì Epaisseur 1.5mm Ì Grande variété d’utilisation et d’application Ì Adhésif sensible à la pression Ì Disponible en largeur 12, 19, et 25mm, Rouleau de 30.5m Conception Énergie Verte Design Ultra Compact Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ VCS50US Tous les codes● 36.75 35.65 34.55 33.08 VCS70US Tous les codes● 41.16 39.92 38.69 37.04 VCS100US Tous les codes● 45.57 44.20 42.84 41.01 Alimentation 50 - 100W Simple sortie Convertisseurs DC/DC 15W Sortie Simple ou double Ì Approuvé pour les normes de sécurité médicales et IT Ì 2 x MOPP avec fichier Risk Management Ì Mode ’Green’ avec consommation en veille <0.5 W Ì 65 W - Convection Ì Boîtier aux normes industrielles 2" x 4" Ì Classe I et Classe II Ì Garantie 3 ans Ì 100W en convection, 150W en refroidissement forcé Ì Sortie simple de 12V à 48V Ì Alimentation pour ventilateur intégré Ì Répond aux normes médicales et industrielles Ì Puissance d’entrée sans charge <0.5W Ì Empreinte 2” x 4” Ì Convient aux applications 1U Ì Garantie 3 ans Industrielle Ì Forte densité de puissance Ì Plage d’entrée 4:1 Ì Température d’utilisation -40°C à +100°C Ì Sortie Simple ou double Ì Isolation 1600Vdc Ì Rendement jusqu’à 89% Ì Garante 3 ans Ì Alimentation industrielles montage sur châssis Ì Mode ’Green’, avec ’Standby’ <0.5 W Ì Refroidissement par convection Ì Classe B en conduction et radiation Ì Tension de sortie de 5V à 48V farnell.com element14.com 40 Alimentations Ì La premiere alimentation 100 W sur un empreinte 2.0"x4.0" Ì Connecteur (Molex) Ì Entrée universelle 90-132 / 187-264 Vac, Autorange Ì Sécurité Classe II Ì Protection contre les cours circuits Ì Garantie constructeur 3 ans Réf.* Puissance de Sortie Sortie Sortie Code Commande Fab. sortie 2 3 Montage PCB Montage Châssis Trouvez vos produits en ligne, sur tablette ! Réf. Pour utiliser avec Fab. Pour utiliser avec Code Commande TMP-MK 1 TMP 15xxxC 208-0711 TMP-MK 2 TMP 30xxxC et TMP 60xxxC 208-0712 Contenu: Platine interface, Clip Rail DIN et vis Consultez notre catalogue en ligne innovant avec mise à jour quotidienne des prix. Plus accessible, il rend vos recherches plus faciles. Kit de montage sur Rail Din Caractéristiques: Régulation: Variation d’entrée: ±1% max. Variation de charge: ±1% max. Ondulation et bruit: 100mV crête-crête typ. (Bande Passante 20 MHz) Suppression EMI: EN 55022, classe B Immunité EMC: EN 61000-3-2 Protection Surcharge: > 150% I out max., Fold-back, Redressement automatique Standards/ Normes: IEC / EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1, CSA-C22.2 Nr. 60950-1-03 (in prep.) Température d’utilisation -25°C à +70°C au dessus de 50°C derating Rendement: 90% typ. Type CI Chassis Longueur Largeur Hauteur Longueur Largeur Hauteur TMPM 04xxx 36.5 27 17.1 TMP 07xxx 50.8 25.4 19.3 TMPM 10xxx 52.4 27.2 23.5 TMP 10xxx 64 45 19 TMP 15xxx 74 54 19.3 96 54 23.3 TMP 30xxx 89 63.5 21.5 112 63.8 25.6 d’entrée de sortie Réf. Fab. (Vdc) max. (A) Code Commande TOP 100-105 5-5.2 20 144-1235 TOP 100-112 12-13.0 8.3 144-1236 TOP 100-124 24-26.0 4.2 144-1237 TOP 100-148 48-52.0 2.1 144-1238 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ TOP 100-105 144-1235● 57.50 55.78 54.10 52.47 TOP 100-112 144-1236● 54.30 52.68 51.09 49.55 TOP 100-124 144-1237● 52.50 50.93 49.39 47.91 TOP 100-148 144-1238● 54.30 52.68 51.09 49.55 (Compatible avec iPad et tablettes androïdes) Régulation de ligne: 1 % max. Régulation de charge: 1 % typ. sortie 1 3.0 % typ. sortie 2 et 3 Ondulation et bruit: < 1.8% de Vout [mv pic à pic max.] pour les sorties 3.3 et 5 VDC < 1.3% de Vout [mv pic à pic max.] pour les autres sorties Suppression EMI: EN 55011, classe B, EN 55022, classe B et FCC, niveau B Immunité EMI: EN 61000-6-2 Limitation du courant de sortie: > 120-180% Inorm, retours, recouvrement automatique Homologations: cUL/UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1, rapport CB Température d’utilisation: -25°C à +70°C, au dessus de 50°C, dérive de 3.75 %/K Rendement: 83% typ. Boîtier: plastique (UL94V-0) Réf. Fab. Tension d’entrée Sortie 1 Sortie 2 Code Commande JTK1524S3V3 9V à 36V à Vdc 3.3V, 4A – 173-8204 JTK1524S05 9V à 36V à Vdc 5V, 3A – 173-8205 JTK1524S12 9V à 36V à Vdc 12V, 1.3A – 173-8206 JTK1524S15 9V à 36V à Vdc 15V, 1A – 173-8207 JTK1524D05 9V à 36V à Vdc 5V, 1.5A -5V, -1.5A 173-8208 JTK1524D12 9V à 36V à Vdc 12V, 625mA -12V, -625mA 173-8209 JTK1524D15 9V à 36V à Vdc 15V, 500mA -15V, -500mA 173-8210 JTK1548S3V3 18V à 75V à Vdc 3.3V, 4A – 173-8211 JTK1548S05 18V à 75V à Vdc 5V, 3A – 173-8212 JTK1548S12 18V à 75V à Vdc 12V, 1.3A – 173-8213 JTK1548S15 18V à 75V à Vdc 15V, 1A – 173-8214 JTK1548D05 18V à 75V à Vdc 5V, 1.5A -5V, -1.5A 173-8216 JTK1548D12 18V à 75V à Vdc 12V, 625mA -12V, -625mA 173-8217 JTK1548D15 18V à 75V à Vdc 15V, 500mA -15V, -500mA 173-8218 JTK2024S3V3 9V à 36V à Vdc 3.3V, 4.5A 186-1077 JTK2024S05 9V à 36V à Vdc 5V, 4A 186-1073 JTK2024S12 9V à 36V à Vdc 12V, 1.67A 186-1075 JTK2024S15 9V à 36V à Vdc 15V, 1.33A 186-1076 JTK2024D12 9V à 36V à Vdc 12V, 833mA -12V, -833mA 186-1071 JTK2024D15 9V à 36V à Vdc 15V, 667mA -15V, -667mA 186-1072 JTK2048S3V3 18V à 75V à Vdc 3.3V, 4.5A 186-1083 JTK2048S05 18V à 75V à Vdc 5V, 4A 186-1080 JTK2048S12 18V à 75V à Vdc 12V, 1.67A 186-1081 JTK2048S15 18V à 75V à Vdc 15V, 1.33A 186-1082 JTK2048D12 18V à 75V à Vdc 12V, 833mA -12V, -833mA 186-1078 JTK2048D15 18V à 75V à Vdc 15V, 667mA -15V, -667mA 186-1079 Série TOP 100 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ TMP 30512 167-2157● 56.80 55.10 53.44 TMP 30515 167-2158● 56.80 55.10 53.44 TMP 15105C 167-2159● 37.80 36.66 35.57 TMP 15112C 167-2160● 37.80 36.66 35.57 TMP 15124C 167-2161● 37.80 36.66 35.57 TMP 15148C 167-2163● 37.80 36.66 35.57 TMP 15212C 167-2164● 39.20 38.03 36.89 TMP 15215C 167-2165● 39.20 38.03 36.89 TMP 15512C 167-2166● 43.80 42.49 41.21 TMP 15515C 167-2167● 43.80 42.49 41.21 TMP 30105C 167-2168● 53.40 51.80 50.24 TMP 30112C 167-2169● 53.40 51.80 50.24 TMP 30124C 167-2170● 53.40 51.80 50.24 TMP 30148C 167-2171● 53.40 51.80 50.24 TMP 30212C 167-2172● 56.00 54.32 52.69 TMP 30215C 167-2173● 56.00 54.32 52.69 TMP 30512C 167-2175● 64.50 62.56 60.69 TMP 30515C 167-2177● 64.50 62.56 60.69 TMPM 04105 208-0706● 15.98 15.34 14.73 TMPM 04112 208-0707● 15.98 15.34 14.73 TMPM 04124 208-0708● 19.81 19.02 18.26 TMPM 10105 177-2175● 27.80 26.97 26.16 TMPM 10112 177-2176● 27.80 26.97 26.16 TMPM 10115 177-2177● 27.80 26.97 26.16 TMPM 10124 177-2178● 27.80 26.97 26.16 Accessoires TMP-MK 1 208-0711● 10.08 9.67 9.28 TMP-MK 2 208-0712● 14.11 13.55 13.00 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ TMP 07105 167-2132● 27.40 26.58 25.78 TMP 07112 167-2133● 27.40 26.58 25.78 TMP 07124 167-2134● 27.40 26.58 25.78 TMP 10105 167-2135● 29.00 28.13 27.29 TMP 10112 167-2136● 29.00 28.13 27.29 TMP 10124 167-2138● 29.00 28.13 27.29 TMP 10212 167-2139● 30.40 29.49 28.61 TMP 10215 167-2140● 30.40 29.49 28.61 TMP 15105 167-2141● 30.80 29.88 28.98 TMP 15112 167-2142● 30.80 29.88 28.98 TMP 15124 167-2143● 30.80 29.88 28.98 TMP 15148 167-2144● 30.80 29.88 28.98 TMP 15212 167-2145● 32.20 31.24 30.30 TMP 15215 167-2146● 32.20 31.24 30.30 TMP 15512 167-2147● 36.90 35.79 34.72 TMP 15515 167-2148● 36.90 35.79 34.72 TMP 30105 167-2151● 46.20 44.82 43.47 TMP 30112 167-2152● 46.20 44.82 43.47 TMP 30124 167-2153● 46.20 44.82 43.47 TMP 30212 167-2155● 48.20 46.75 45.36 TMP 30215 167-2156● 48.20 46.75 45.36 Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Simple Tous les codes 45.57 44.20 42.84 41.01 Double Tous les codes 48.51 47.05 45.60 43.66 Alimentation à découpage 100 W, châssis ouvert Modules AC/DC 7 à 30W Ì Boîtier en plastique, bas profil totalement encapsulé Ì 2 versions disponibles: - Pour montage CI avec broches à souder - Pour montage châssis avec bornier à vis Ì Modèles simple, double et triple sortie Ì Entrée universelle 85-264 VAC, 47-440 Hz Ì Protection conte les courts-circuits Ì Sécurité de classe II et les surcharges Ì Garantie 3 ans farnell.com element14.com Alimentations 41 Spécifications techniques: Régulation: de ligne ±5% max. de charge ±1.0% max. Ondulation & Bruit: 100mV cr-cr typ. (bande passante 20MHz) Isolation Entrée/Sortie: 4kV eff. (60 sec., 50 Hz) Température de service: -40°C à +85°C; déclassement de 4% / K au-delà de 75°C Caractéristiques: Régulation: Variation en entrée: ±1.0% max. Variation de charge: ±0.75% max. Ondulation et Bruit: 100mV crête-crête typ. (Bande passante 20 MHz) Isolation E/S 4kV eff. (60 sec., 50 Hz) Température d’utilisation: -40°C à +71°C; au dessus de 70°C derating de 3,5% / K Standards/ Normes: cUL/UL 60950-1, IEC/EN 60950-1, EN 50124-1&2, IEC/EN/UL 60601-1, CSA C22.2 Nr. 601-1 (évalué pour un tension d’utilisation de 300Vac/420Vdc) Tension Sortie Boîtier SIP Boîtier DIP d’entrée Tension Courant Code Commande Code Commande 5V 5V 200mA 207-9688 207-9687 5V 12V 84mA 207-9692 207-9691 5V 15V 66mA 207-9694 207-9693 12V 5V 200mA 207-9696 207-9695 12V 12V 84mA 207-9698 207-9697 12V 15V 66mA 207-9700 207-9699 24V 5V 200mA 207-9702 207-9701 24V 12V 84mA 207-9704 207-9703 24V 15V 66mA 207-9706 207-9705 Réf. Fab. Tension Tension de Courant de Rendement Code d’Entrée Sortie Sortie (max.) (%) Commande VCC VCC mA THP 3-2411 9 - 40 5 600 78 100-7498 THP 3-2412 12 250 83 100-7499 THP 3-2422 ±12 ±125 83 100-7500 THP 3-2423 ±15 ±100 83 100-7501 THP 3-4811 18 - 80 5 600 78 100-7502 THP 3-4812 12 250 83 100-7503 THP 3-7211 36 - 160 5 600 78 100-7507 THP 3-7212 12 250 83 100-7508 THP 3-7222 ±12 ±125 83 100-7509 THP 3-7223 ±15 ±100 83 100-7510 Réf. Fab. Tension d’entrée Tension de sortie Courant de sortie (max.) (%) Code Commande Vdc Vdc mA THB 3-0511 4.5 - 6 5 600 70 144-1203 THB 3-0515 24 125 76 144-1205 THB 3-0523 ±15 ±100 75 144-1208 THB 3-1211 9 - 18 5 600 74 144-1209 THB 3-1212 12 250 80 144-1210 THB 3-1215 24 125 81 144-1211 THB 3-1222 ±12 ±125 80 144-1212 THB 3-1223 ±15 ±100 80 144-1213 THB 3-2411 18 - 36 5 600 78 144-1214 THB 3-2412 12 250 83 144-1215 THB 3-2415 24 125 84 144-1216 THB 3-2423 ±15 ±100 83 144-1219 Broche Simple Double 13 +Usortie -Usortie 1 +Uentrée (Vcc) +Uentrée (Vcc) 15 Pas de broche +Usortie 11 Pas de broche Commun 23 -Uentrée (GND) -Uentrée (GND) 12 -Usortie Pas de broche 24 -Uentrée (GND) -Uentrée (GND) BROCHAGE BROCHAGE Broche Simple Double 13 +Vout -Vout 1 +Vin (Vcc) +Vin (Vcc) 15 NC +Vout 11 NC Commun 23 -Vin (GND) -Vin (GND) 12 -Vout NC 24 -Vin (GND) -Vin (GND) Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ THB 3-0511 144-1203● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-0515 144-1205● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-0523 144-1208● 35.90 34.86 33.95 33.03 THB 3-1211 144-1209● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-1212 144-1210● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-1215 144-1211● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-1222 144-1212● 35.90 34.97 33.97 33.07 THB 3-1223 144-1213● 35.90 34.82 33.77 32.77 THB 3-2411 144-1214● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-2412 144-1215● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-2415 144-1216● 34.10 33.08 32.09 31.13 THB 3-2423 144-1219● 35.90 34.82 33.77 32.77 Code Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ THP 3-2411 100-7498● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-2412 100-7499● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-2422 100-7500● 51.70 50.15 48.64 47.19 THP 3-2423 100-7501● 51.70 50.15 48.64 47.19 THP 3-4811 100-7502● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-4812 100-7503● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-7211 100-7507● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-7212 100-7508● 48.70 47.24 45.83 44.45 THP 3-7222 100-7509● 51.70 50.15 48.64 47.19 THP 3-7223 100-7510● 51.70 50.15 48.64 47.19 Convertisseurs DC/ DC 1W simple sortie Série THP 3 Ì Protection contre les cours-circuits Ì Isolation 1000Vdc Ì simlpe sorties Ì Brochage standard industriel Ì Boîtier SIP ou DIP Ì Température d’utilisation 40°C à +85°C Ì Garantie 2 ans Convertisseur DC/DC - Série THB 3 3 Watt, haute isolation 3 Watts Gamme d’entrée Nominal ±10% Régulation de ligne 1.2%/1% Δ Vin Régulation de charge 10% 20-100% (Changement de charge) Ondulation et bruit 100 mV pk-pk max, Bande passante 20 MHz Température d’utilisation -40°C à +85°C Température de stockage -40°C à +125°C Tension d’isolation 1000 VDC Ì Très large plage de tension d’entrée, rapport 4:1 Ì Tension d’entrée jusqu’à 160Vc.c. Ì Isolation Entrée/Sortie 4000Vc.a. Ì Isolation renforcée pour les tension de service jusqu’à 300Vc.a./420Vc.c. Ì Idéale pour les applications ferroviaires et médicales Ì Distance d’isolement E/S et ligne de fuite de 2,0mm min. Ì Tension d’entrée 2:1 Ì Tension d’isolement 4000 VAC Ì Isolation renforcée pour les tensions 300Vac/420Vdc Ì Conformes aux normes industrielles et médicales Ì Filtre d’entrée conforme EN 55022, classe A et FCC, Level A sans composant externes Ì Garantie constructeur 3 ans Ì Boîtier plastique Ì Filtre d’entrée conforme à EN 55022, Classe A et FCC, Niveau A sans composant externe Ì Protection permanente contre les court-circuits Ì Normes de sécurité: cUL/UL 60950, IEC/EN 60950, EN 50124-1&2, IEC/EN/UL 60601-1, CSA C22.2 (pour les tensions de service 300Vc.a./420Vc.c.) Ì Garantie 3 ans farnell.com element14.com 42 Alimentations Réf. Code Prix Unitaire Fab. Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 100+ Boîtier SIP MCE05S05S 207-9688● 5.43 5.27 5.10 4.88 4.62 MCE05S12S 207-9692● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE05S15S 207-9694● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S05S 207-9696● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S12S 207-9698● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S15S 207-9700● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S05S 207-9702● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S12S 207-9704● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S15S 207-9706● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 Boîtier DIP MCE05S05D 207-9687● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE05S12D 207-9691● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE05S15D 207-9693● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S05D 207-9695● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S12D 207-9697● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE12S15D 207-9699● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S05D 207-9701● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S12D 207-9703● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 MCE24S15D 207-9705● 4.47 4.34 4.19 4.02 3.81 Connecteurde sortie: type Barrel Longeur 11mm, Dia. Ext. 5.5mm, Dia. Int. 2.5mm avec centre (+) masse (-) Connecteurde sortie: type Barrel Longeur 11mm, Dia. Ext. 5.5mm, Dia. Int. 2.5mm avec centre (+) masse (-) Tension de Gamme de Courant de Puissance de Réf. Fab. Sortie Tension de sortie Sortie Sortie Rendement Code Commande ZWS-50BAF-5 5V 4.5V à 5.5V 10A 50W 84% 199-5952 ZWS-50BAF-12 12V 10.8V à 13.2V 4.3A 51.6W 85% 199-5953 ZWS-50BAF-24 24V 21.6V à 26.4V 2.1A 50.4W 87% 199-5954 ZWS-75BAF-12 12V 10.8V à 13.2V 6.3A 75W 85% 199-5955 ZWS-75BAF-24 24V 21.6V à 26.4V 3.2A 76.8W 87% 199-5956 ZWS-75BAF-48 48V 43.2V à 52.8V 1.6A 76.8W 88% 199-5957 ZWS-100BAF-12 12V 10.8V à 13.2V 8.5A 102W 88% 199-5958 ZWS-100BAF-15 15V 13.5V à 16.5V 6.7A 100.5W 88% 199-5961 ZWS-100BAF-24 24V 21.6V à 26.4V 4.3A 103.2W 89% 199-5962 ZWS-150BAF-12 12V 10.8V à 13.2V 12.5A 150W 88% 199-5963 ZWS-150BAF-24 24V 21.6V à 26.4V 6.3A 151.2W 90% 199-5964 ZWS-150BAF-48 48V 39.5V à 52.8V 3.2A 153.6W 91% 199-5965 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ ZWS-50BAF-5 199-5952● 83.75 78.52 72.49 62.84 ZWS-50BAF-12 199-5953● 83.75 78.52 72.49 62.84 ZWS-50BAF-24 199-5954● 83.75 78.52 72.49 62.84 ZWS-75BAF-12 199-5955● 62.80 58.62 54.95 51.72 ZWS-75BAF-24 199-5956● 94.53 88.61 81.81 70.92 ZWS-75BAF-48 199-5957● 62.80 58.62 54.95 51.72 Tension 90 - 264VAC Fréquence 47 - 63 Hz Rendement 87% typ Ondulation et bruit 1% crête-crête max, Bande Passante 20 MHz Puissance de l’entrée sans charge <0.5W Température d’utilisation 0°C à +40°C, sans ’derating’ Sécurité EN60950-1: UL/cUL60950-1, Marquage CE Emissions EN55022 Niveau B conduction & radiation Tension d’entrée 90 - 264VAC Fréquence d’entrée 47 - 63 Hz Rendement 87% typ Ondulation et bruit 200mV crête-crête max, Bande passante 20 MHz Régulation de ligne ±0.5% max. Régulation de charge ±5% max. Puissance de l’entrée sans charge <0.5W Température d’utilisation 0°C à +40°C, sans ’derating’ Sécurité EN60950-1:2001, UL/cUL60950-1, CE Mark Emissions EN55022 niveau B en conduction & radiation Tension d’entrée 90 - 264VAC Fréquence 47 - 63 Hz Rendement 76% typ Ondulation et bruit 1% crête-crête max, Bande passante 20 MHz Puissance d’entrée sans charge <0.3W Température d’utilisation 0°C à +40°C, sans ’derating’ Sécurité EN60950-1:2001, Marquage CE Emissions EN55022 Niveau B conduction & radiation Alimentation simple sortie 50-150W Réf. Puissance Tension Courant Fab. de sortie (W) de sortie (V) de sortie (A) Code Commande MCEXT5V25W 16.5 5 3.3 182-7430 MCEXT7V25W 24 7.5 3.33 182-7432 MCEXT9V25W 22 9 2.44 182-7433 MCEXT12V25W 25 12 2.08 182-7434 MCEXT24V25W 25 24 1.04 182-7435 Réf. Puissance Tension Courant Fab. de sortie (W) de sortie (V) de sortie (A) Code Commande MCEXT12V60W 60 12 5 182-7436 MCEXT15V60W 60 15 4 182-7437 MCEXT18V60W 60 18 3.33 182-7438 MCEXT24V60W 60 24 2.5 182-7439 Réf. Puissance Tension Courant Fab. de sortie de sortie de sortie Code Commande Prise UK MCPLG5V10WUK 8W 5V 1.6A 182-7440 MCPLG6V10WUK 8W 6V 1.33A 182-7441 MCPLG7V10WUK 8W 7V 1.14A 182-7442 MCPLG9V10WUK 10W 9V 1.11A 182-7444 MCPLG12V10WUK 10W 12V 830mA 182-7445 MCPLG24V10WUK 10W 24V 410mA 182-7446 Prise EU MCPLG5V10WEU 8W 5V 1.6A 182-7447 MCPLG6V10WEU 8W 6V 1.33A 182-7448 MCPLG7V10WEU 8W 7.5V 1.14A 182-7449 MCPLG9V10WEU 10W 9V 1.11A 182-7450 MCPLG12V10WEU 10W 12V 830mA 182-7451 MCPLG24V10WEU 10W 24V 410mA 182-7452 Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Tous les codes● 39.73 38.55 37.35 35.76 Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Tous les codes● 28.11 27.28 26.43 25.31 Ì Entrée universelle (85 - 265 VAC) Ì Facteur de puissance corrigé Ì Refroidissement par convection Ì Garantie 5 ans Ì Design compact Prix Unitaire Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ Tous les codes● 16.17 15.69 15.20 14.55 ZWS50BAF: L=50, H=26, P=132mm Alimentation 25W Simple sortie Alimentation 60W Simple sortie Alimentation 10W Simple sortie ZWS75BAF: L=50, H=33, P=150mm Ì Puissance de l’entrée sans charge 0.3 W Ì Dimensions compactes Ì Versions UK et EU Ì ’Energy Star’ niveau V, ≥ 15 V Ì Conforme CEC 2008 & EISA 2007 Ì Fort rendement Ì Puissance de l’entrée sans charge <0.5 W Ì Dimensions compactes Ì ’Energy Star’ niveau V Ì Conforme CEC 2008 & EISA 2007 Ì Fort rendement Ì Puissance de l’entrée sans charge <0.5 W Ì Dimensions compactes Dimensions: H=32, l=117.4, P=53mm ZWS100BAF: L=62, H=33, P=155mm Ì Energy Star niveau V Ì Conforme CEC 2008 & EISA 2007 Ì Tension de sortie de 5 à 24Vdc Ì Fort rendement Dimensions: H=31, l=104.4, P=42mm ZWS150BAF: L=75, H=37, P=160mm farnell.com element14.com Alimentations 43 Tension d’entrée 90-264 VAC. 127-300 VDC Efficacité 87% Fréquence d’entrée 47-63 Hz Plage de réglage ±20% minimum Courant d’appel 50A en pic à 230VAC à 25°C Tension d’entrée 90 à 264V AC, 120 à 370V DC Fréquence d’entrée 45 à 63Hz Courant en pointe entrée <40A max à 115V AC, 25°C ambiant Température d’utilisation0°C à 70°C Tension de Courant de Réf. Fab. Sortie Sortie Code Commande NPS62-M 5V 12A 188-6193 NPS63-M 12V 5A 188-6194 NPS65-M 24V 2.5A 188-6195 Tension 85 à 264V AC, 120 à 373V DC Fréquence 45 à 63Hz Courant d’appel 20A à 115V AC, 40A à 230V AC Température d’utilisation -25°C à 70°C Tension d’entrée 85V à 265V ac Régulation de charge 0.8% Rendement 89% typ Température d’utilisation -20°C à 70°C Régulation de ligne 0.4% Tension d’entrée 90 à 264V AC, 120 à 350V DC Fréquence 45 à 63Hz Facteur de puissance 0.97 Typ. Température d’utilisation 0°C à 50°C Tension de Gamme de Courant de Réf. Fab. Sortie Tension de sortie Sortie Efficacité Code Commande GWS-250-12 12V 10.8V à 13.2V 21A 92% 199-6023 GWS-250-24 24V 22V à 28.8V 10.5A 92% 199-6024 GWS-250-36 36V 32V à 40V 7A 93% 199-6025 GWS-250-48 48V 42V à 57.6V 5.3A 93% 199-6026 Réf. Tesnion de Courant de Puissance de Fuite à ORing On/Off Fab. sortie sortie sortie la terre FET ext. Code Commande EFE300-12-ECMDS 12V 25A 300W 858μA ¤ ¤ 199-6055 EFE300-24-ECMDS 24V 12.5A 300W 858μA ¤ ¤ 199-6056 EFE400-12-ECMDS 12V 33.3A 400W 858μA ¤ ¤ 199-6057 EFE400-24-ECMDS 24V 16.7A 400W 858μA ¤ ¤ 199-6059 Médicale EFE300M-12-5-ECMDL-YT 12V 25A 300W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6061 EFE300M-24-5-ECMDL-YT 24V 12.5A 300W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6062 EFE300M-48-5-ECMDL-YT 48V 6.25A 300W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6063 EFE400M-12-5-ECMDL-YT 12V 33.3A 400W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6064 EFE400M-24-5-ECMDL-YT 24V 16.7A 400W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6065 EFE400M-48-5-ECMDL-YT 48V 8.3A 400W 300μA ✓ ✓ 199-6066 Réf. Tension Courant Puissance Fab. de sortie de sortie de sortie Rendement Code Commande CSS-65-5 5V 8A 40W 81% 199-5983 CSS-65-12 12V 5A 60W 86% 199-5979 CSS-65-15 15V 4A 60W 86% 199-5980 CSS-65-24 24V 2.71A 65W 87% 199-5981 CSS-65-48 48V 1.36A 65W 87% 199-5982 Réf. Tension Courant Puissance Fab. de sortie de sortie de sortie Code Commande MWS65-5 4.5V5.5V 11A 55W 209-7822 MWS65-12 10.8V13.2V 5A 60W 209-7823 MWS65-15 13.5V16.5V 4.4A 66W 209-7824 MWS65-24 21.6V26.4V 2.8A 67.2W 209-7826 MWS65-48 43.2V52.8V 1.4A 67.2W 209-7827 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ ZWS-100BAF-12 199-5958● 72.41 67.58 63.36 59.63 ZWS-100BAF-15 199-5961● 72.41 67.58 63.36 59.63 ZWS-100BAF-24 199-5962● 72.41 67.58 63.36 59.63 ZWS-150BAF-12 199-5963● 84.55 78.92 73.98 69.63 ZWS-150BAF-24 199-5964● 84.55 78.92 73.98 69.63 ZWS-150BAF-48 199-5965● 127.27 119.31 110.14 95.48 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 50+ EFE300-12-ECMDS 199-6055● 224.39 208.69 197.47 184.00 168.29 EFE300-24-ECMDS 199-6056● 266.95 248.26 234.92 218.89 200.21 EFE400-12-ECMDS 199-6057● 299.59 278.62 263.64 245.66 224.69 EFE400-24-ECMDS 199-6059● 299.59 278.62 263.64 245.66 224.69 Médicale EFE300M-12-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6061● 225.25 213.80 203.45 194.06 185.50 EFE300M-24-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6062● 299.59 278.62 263.64 245.67 224.69 EFE300M-48-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6063● 225.25 210.23 197.09 185.50 – – EFE400M-12-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6064● 353.90 331.77 306.29 265.51 – – EFE400M-24-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6065● 353.90 331.77 306.29 265.51 – – EFE400M-48-5-ECMDL-YT 199-6066● 266.09 248.35 232.83 219.13 – – Alimentation simple sortie 60W Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ CSS-65-5 199-5983● 65.08 61.01 56.33 48.83 CSS-65-12 199-5979● 65.08 61.01 56.33 48.83 CSS-65-15 199-5980● 65.08 61.01 56.33 48.83 CSS-65-24 199-5981● 65.08 61.01 56.33 48.83 CSS-65-48 199-5982● 40.45 37.75 35.39 33.31 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 25+ 50+ 100+ MWS65-5 209-7822● 49.42 43.06 41.30 38.42 36.33 MWS65-12 209-7823● 75.58 65.86 63.16 58.75 55.57 MWS65-15 209-7824● 49.42 43.06 41.30 38.42 36.33 MWS65-24 209-7826● 49.42 43.06 41.30 38.42 36.33 MWS65-48 209-7827● 75.58 65.86 63.16 58.75 55.57 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ GWS-250-12 199-6023● 167.51 157.02 144.97 125.67 GWS-250-24 199-6024● 145.55 136.43 125.97 118.49 GWS-250-36 199-6025● 162.88 152.69 140.97 122.20 GWS-250-48 199-6026● 167.51 157.02 144.97 125.67 Alimentation simple sortie 300-400W Alimentation simple sortie 65W Dimensions: H=25.6, L=101.6, P=50.8mm Alimentation médicale AC/DC 40-65W Médicale Ì Empreinte standard de l’industrie Ì Large gamme d’entrée AC Ì Deux fusibles d’entrée Alimentation simple sortie 250W Ì Contrôle numérique complet Ì Tension de sortie 5, 12, 15, 24, 48 V Ì Approuvé médical (BF) Ì Deux fusibles d’entrées Ì Moins de 0.3W de puissance hors charge Ì Convection refroidie Ì Rendement jusqu’à 89% Ì Boîtier standard 2 x 4 pouces Ì Applications équipements médicaux, dentaire et d’optométrie, Serveur et Datacom, Test et Mesure, Broadcast, Afficheurs à LED et éclairage et des systèmes de sécurité Ì Rendement élevé Ì Bas profil Ì Convient aux applications 1U Ì Sécurités médicales et ITE Ì Entrée universelle Ì Empreinte 2"x4" Ì Puissance en veille <0,5 Watt Ì Construit pour répondre aux ErP Ì Hauteur 41mm (compatible 1U) Ì Refroidissement par convection Ì Alimentation auxiliaire 5V / 300mA Ì Programmation de sortie à distance Ì Permet une utilisation avec les appareils d’éclairage Ì Garantie 5 ans Ì Commande du sens Ì Protection contre les surtensions et les courtscircuits Ì Tension de sortie Sortie réglable Ì MTBF élevé Ì Moins de 300mW de consommation de puissance sans charge Ì Température d’utilisation de 0°C à +80°C Ì Puissance d’entrée <74W Ì Approuvé UL classe 1 Ì Approuvé classe 2 (avec EMI classe A) Ì Double fusible AC farnell.com element14.com 44 Alimentations Tension d’entrée 90-264 VAC et 120-300 VDC Fréquence d’entrée 47-63 Hz Courant d’appel 50A max. à 25°C Efficacité 88% typique à pleine charge Plage de réglage ± 10% minimum sur les sorties principales Sortie ventilateur 12V à 1A isolée, ± 10% Réf. Tension Tension Courant de Fab. d’entrée de sortie sortie Code Commande Température d’utilisation: -40°C à 105°C APTS003A0X-SRDZ 4.5V à 14V 0.59V5.5V 3A 207-6811 Température d’utilisation: -40°C à 85°C APTS003A0X-SRZ 4.5V à 14V 0.59V5.5V 3A 207-6812 APXK004A0X4-SRZ 8V à 16V 0.59V8V 4A 207-6817 PDT003A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.45V5.5V 3A 207-6904 PDT006A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.45V5.5V 6A 207-6905 PDT012A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.45V5.5V 12A 207-6906 PVX003A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.6V5.5V 3A 207-6907 PVX006A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.6V5.5V 6A 207-6908 PVX012A0X3-SRZ 3V à 14.4V 0.6V5.5V 12A 207-6909 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 50+ Température d’utilisation: -40°C à 105°C APTS003A0X-SRDZ 207-6811● 8.12 7.64 7.26 6.83 6.49 Température d’utilisation: -40°C à 85°C APTS003A0X-SRZ 207-6812● 10.40 9.79 9.29 8.74 8.30 APXK004A0X4-SRZ 207-6817● 17.58 16.69 15.86 15.07 14.31 PDT003A0X3-SRZ 207-6904● 7.86 7.40 7.03 6.61 6.29 Tension de Courant de sortie Réf. Fab. Sortie Convection Débit de 25m3/h Code Commande LPS102-M 5V 16A 24A 188-6182 LPS103-M 12V 8.3A 12.5A 188-6183 LPS104-M 15V 6.7A 10A 188-6184 LPS105-M 24V 4.2A 6.3A 188-6185 LPS108-M 48V 2.1A 3.1A 188-6187 Tension d’entrée 85-264V ac Fréquence d’entrée 47-440Hz Courent en pointe ≤25A crête, démarrage à chaud ou à froid Facteur de puissance Typ. 0.99 Rendement >89% à pleine charge Courant de fuite <0.3mA à 264V ac Transitoire sur ligne de puissance MOV directement après le fusible Température d’utilisation -40°C à +70°C, derating linéaire de 50% de 50°C à 70°C Tension d’entrée 85-264 VAC, 90-375 VDC Fréquence 47-67 Hz, 400 Hz Courant d’appel ADN5-24-1PM-C: < 15 A ADN10-24-1PM-C: < 30 A ADN20-24-1PM-C: < 40 A Efficacité > 90% Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ LPS102-M 188-6182● 114.52 107.64 102.70 LPS103-M 188-6183● 114.52 107.64 101.19 LPS104-M 188-6184● 114.52 107.64 102.70 LPS105-M 188-6185● 114.52 107.64 102.70 LPS108-M 188-6187● 114.52 107.64 102.70 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ NPS62-M 188-6193● 48.91 45.53 42.79 NPS63-M 188-6194● 48.91 45.53 43.44 NPS65-M 188-6195● 48.91 45.53 43.44 Kit Capot 1+ LPX50 188-6208● 11.31 Réf. Tension de Plage de Courant de Fab. Sortie Réglage Sortie Code Commande Entrée IEC LCM600L 12V 9.6V à 14.4V 52A 211-5738 LCM600Q 24V 19.2V à 28.8V 27A 188-6217 LCM600U 36V 28.8V à 43.2V 16.7A 211-5737 LCM600W 48V 38.4V à 57.6V 14A 188-6218 Entrée à borne LCM600L-T 12V 9.6V à 14.4V 52A 211-5740 LCM600Q-T 24V 19.2V à 28.8V 27A 211-5741 LCM600U-T 36V 28.8V à 43.2V 16.7A 211-5739 LCM600W-T 48V 38.4V à 57.6V 14A 211-5742 Sortie Dimensions (mm) Réf. Fab. Puissance Tension Courant H L P Code Commande ADN5-24-1PM-C 120W 24V 5A 123 50 111 188-6250 ADN10-24-1PM-C 240W 24V 10A 123 60 111 188-6251 ADN20-24-1PM-C 480W 24V 20A 123 87 126 188-6252 Convertisseurs DC/ DC non-isolés Alimentation simple sortie 150W Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ ADN5-24-1PM-C 188-6250● 244.67 229.99 219.43 ADN10-24-1PM-C 188-6251● 356.42 335.03 319.66 ADN20-24-1PM-C 188-6252● 550.47 517.44 493.69 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ Entrée IEC LCM600L 211-5738● 282.78 268.65 255.21 LCM600Q 188-6217● 307.85 289.38 276.09 LCM600U 211-5737● 282.78 268.65 255.21 LCM600W 188-6218● 307.85 289.38 272.01 Entrée à bornes LCM600L-T 211-5740● 282.78 268.65 255.21 LCM600Q-T 211-5741● 282.78 268.65 255.21 LCM600U-T 211-5739● 282.78 268.65 255.21 LCM600W-T 211-5742● 282.78 268.65 255.21 Ì Tunable Loop™ pour optimiser la tension dynamique de sortie Ì Fréquence de découpage fixe Ì Protection contre les surintensité Ì Commande On/Off Ì Interface numérique via protocole PMBus™ (série 9PDT uniquement) Ì Conception châssis ouvert Ì Puissance anciennement GE Energy Lineage Applications: Ì Sécurités médicales et ITE Ì Correction active du facteur de puissance Ì Empreinte 2"x4" Alimentation simple sortie 600W Alimentation rail din simple sortie 120-480W Ì Commande du sens Ì Défaut de puissance Ì Sortie principale réglable Ì Protection contre les surtensions Ì Protection contre les surcharges Ì Protection contre les surcharges thermiques Ì Protection contre les surtensions Ì Protection contre les surcharges et les courtscircuits Ì LED de diagnostique Ì 3 LED d’indication d’état: entrée, sortie et alarme Ì Relais DC Ì Capacité d’opération parallèle Ì Connexion à vis Ì Architectures puissance distribuée Ì Applications de tension de bus intermédiaire Ì Équipements de télécommunication 70°C avec déviation Ì Ventilateurs intelligents à vitesse variable Ì Contrôlée par DSP Ì Programmation de marge Ì Option FET Dimensions: H=33, L=101.6, P=50.8mm Ì Petit facteur de forme Ì Haute éfficacité > 90% typique Ì Pleine puissance à 60°C Ì Conception industrielle Ì Boîtier métallique Ì MTBF > 450,000h à 40°C Ì PFC Actif > 0.92 Ì Tension de sortie réglable Ì Applications de Serveur et stockage Ì Équipements réseaux Ì Équipements industriels Dimensions: H=61, L=190.5, P=114.3mm Ì Puissance de sortie 600W Ì 7,41 W / Cu-In Ì 5 V SVEZA en veille Ì Sécurité Industrielle/Médicale Ì Température d’utilisation de -40°C à farnell.com element14.com Alimentations 45 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 50+ 100+ 250+ HLG-240H-12 211-4205● 191.13 159.19 146.88 136.46 127.30 HLG-240H-12A 211-4206● 191.13 159.19 146.88 136.46 127.30 HLG-240H-24 211-4207● 191.13 159.19 146.88 136.46 127.30 HLG-240H-24A 211-4208● 191.13 159.19 146.88 136.46 127.30 Réf. Tension Tension de Courant de Courant Broche GND Fab. d’entrée sortie sortie partagé Supplémentaire Code Commande APTS030A0X3-SRPHZ 6V à 14V 0.8V à 3.63V 30A ✓ ✓ 207-6815 ATH030A0X3-SRHZ 4.5V à 5.5V 0.8V à 3.63V 30A ¤ ✓ 207-6825 ATH030A0X3-SRPHZ 4.5V à 5.5V 0.8V à 3.63V 30A ✓ ✓ 207-6826 ATM030A0X3-SRHZ 2.7V à 4V 0.8V à 2V 30A ¤ ✓ 207-6827 ATS030A0X3-SRHZ 6V à 14V 0.8V à 2.75V 30A ¤ ✓ 207-6829 ATS030A0X3-SRPHZ 6V à 14V 0.8V à 2.75V 30A ✓ ✓ 207-6830 ATS030A0X3-SRZ 6V à 14V 0.8V à 2.75V 30A ¤ ¤ 207-6831 Tension d’entrée 90-305 VAC, 127-431 VDC Régulation de ligne ±0.5% Température d’utilisation -40°C à 70°C Régulation de charge ±2.0% 12V versions, ±0.5% 24V versions SUPPORT LEGISLATIF MONDIAL GRATUIT : Directives RoHS, REACH, DEEE, Eup, batteries : dernières mises à jour, livres blancs gratuits et questions-réponses en direct sur element14.com/legislation Réception d’un email d’information contenant le statut de votre commande ainsi que la date prévue de livraison sur tous vos produits en reliquat Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 50+ 100+ 250+ LPC-20-350 211-4209● 24.42 20.35 18.77 17.44 16.27 LPC-20-700 211-4210● 24.28 20.23 18.66 17.33 16.17 LPC-35-1050 211-4211● 37.84 31.50 29.06 27.00 25.19 LPC-35-1400 211-4212● 31.30 26.06 24.05 22.35 20.84 LPC-35-700 211-4213● 31.30 26.06 24.05 22.35 20.84 LPC-60-1050 211-4214● 38.43 32.01 29.54 27.45 25.59 LPC-60-1400 211-4216● 38.43 32.01 29.54 27.45 25.59 LPC-60-1750 211-4217● 38.43 32.01 29.54 27.45 25.59 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 50+ Température d’utilisation: -40°C à 85°C PDT006A0X3-SRZ 207-6905● 13.85 13.03 12.37 11.64 11.05 PDT012A0X3-SRZ 207-6906● 14.60 13.74 12.93 12.28 11.66 PVX003A0X3-SRZ 207-6907● 7.86 7.40 7.03 6.61 6.29 PVX006A0X3-SRZ 207-6908● 11.66 10.96 10.41 9.80 9.31 PVX012A0X3-SRZ 207-6909● 14.60 13.74 12.93 12.28 11.66 Livraison optimisée des reliquats de commande Support législatif Tension Sortie Réf. Fab. D’entrée Tension Courant Efficacité Code Commande MTU1S0505MC 5V 5V 200mA 83% 186-7135 MTU1S0509MC 5V 9V 111mA 86% 186-7136 MTU1S0512MC 5V 12V 83mA 87% 186-7137 MTU1S0515MC 5V 15V 67mA 87% 186-7138 MTU1S1205MC 12V 5V 200mA 84% 186-7139 MTU1S1209MC 12V 9V 111mA 87% 186-7140 MTU1S1212MC 12V 12V 83mA 88% 186-7141 MTU1S1215MC 12V 15V 67mA 88% 186-7142 Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 50+ APTS030A0X3-SRPHZ 207-6815● 34.77 33.03 31.37 29.80 28.30 ATH030A0X3-SRHZ 207-6825● 36.21 34.39 32.67 31.05 29.50 ATH030A0X3-SRPHZ 207-6826● 36.21 34.39 32.67 31.05 29.50 ATM030A0X3-SRHZ 207-6827● 41.68 39.60 37.62 35.74 33.96 ATS030A0X3-SRHZ 207-6829● 28.65 27.22 25.85 24.57 23.34 ATS030A0X3-SRPHZ 207-6830● 28.65 27.22 25.85 24.57 23.34 ATS030A0X3-SRZ 207-6831● 26.87 25.52 24.24 23.04 21.88 Tension d’entrée 90-264 VAC, 127-370 VDC Régulation de charge ±2.0% Régulation de ligne ±1.0% Température d’utilisation -30°C à 70°C Réf. Sortie Courant Code Fab. Tension de sortie Puissance Rendement Commande HLG-240H-12 12V 16A 192W 90% 211-4205 HLG-240H-12A 12V 16A 192W 90% 211-4206 HLG-240H-24 24V 10A 240W 93% 211-4207 HLG-240H-24A 24V 10A 240W 93% 211-4208 Connexion des broches Broche 1 +Vin 3 -Vin 4 -Vout 5 0V 6 NC Ì Fonction PFC active Réf. Sortie Courant Code Fab. Tension de sortie Puissance Rendement Commande LPC-20-350 9V à 48V 350mA 16.8W 83% 211-4209 LPC-20-700 9V à 30V 700mA 21W 83% 211-4210 LPC-35-1050 9V à 30V 1.05A 31.5W 85% 211-4211 LPC-35-1400 9V à 24V 1.4A 33.6W 85% 211-4212 LPC-35-700 9V à 48V 700mA 33.6W 85% 211-4213 LPC-60-1050 9V à 48V 1.05A 50.4W 87% 211-4214 LPC-60-1400 9V à 42V 1.4A 58.8W 85% 211-4216 LPC-60-1750 9V à 34V 1.75A 59.5W 87% 211-4217 Prix Unitaire Réf. Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 25+ 50+ MTU1S0505MC 186-7135● 7.13 6.49 5.92 5.39 MTU1S0509MC 186-7136● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S0512MC 186-7137● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S0515MC 186-7138● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S1205MC 186-7139● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S1209MC 186-7140● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S1212MC 186-7141● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 MTU1S1215MC 186-7142● 5.89 5.35 5.10 4.94 Convertisseurs DC/DC Non-isolé Ì Protection: court circuit, surintensité, surtension, température Ì IP67 /IP65 (version A) Ì Fonction variateur 3 en 1 Ì Ajustement du point OCP par câble de sortie (toutes versions) ou potentiomètre interne( Version A) Alimentation simple sortie AC/DC Ì Convient pour les éclairages à LED et signalisation Ì Garantie 5 ans Ì Fourni jusqu’à 30A de courant de sortie Ì Rendement élevé Ì Commande On/Off Ì Capteur Ì Protection en courant et tension Ì option -P: Parallèle avec courant actif partagé Ì option -H:Broche de GND supplémentaire pour améliorer le derating thermique Ì Mode courant constant Ì Supporte 300V ac pendant 5 sec. Ì Protection: court circuit, surtension Ì IP67 Ì Classe II Ì Test de charge à 100% Ì Convient pour les éclairages à LED et signalisation Ì Garantie 2 ans Convertisseurs DC/DC simple sortie isolé - 1W Applications: La série MTU1 est une gamme de convertisseurs DC/DC 1W CMS miniature à haute performance. Avec une empreinte réduite de 50% par rapport à la génération précédente de Murata et offrant 1W de puissance disponible sur toute la gamme de température de -40°C à +85°C. Cette conception plus efficace offre des performances de régulations améliorées où une large variation de la tension de sortie n’est pas tolérable. Cette série convient pour toutes les applications où un fort volume de production est envisagé. Ì Architectures puissance distribuée Ì Applications de tension de bus intermédiaire Ì Équipements de télécommunication Ì Applications de Serveur et stockage Ì Équipements réseaux Alimentation simple sortie AC/DC Ì Densité de puissance de 1.71W/cm3 Ì Boîtier UL94V-0 Ì Entrée 5V et 12V Ì Sortie 5V, 9V, 12V et 15V Ì Aimants toriques Ì Empreinte de 0.69cm2 Ì Sortie simple isolée Ì Isolation 1KVdc Ì MSL niveau 1 farnell.com element14.com 46 Alimentations Tension d’ entrée Tension de Intensité à Code Pin 1 V nominale (V) sortie (V) la sortie Réf. Fab. Commande Pin 1 Vin 5 5 ±100 NMJ0505SC 102-1510 Pin 2 GND 5 9 ±55 NMJ0509SC 102-1511 Pin 5 -V 5 12 ±42 NMJ0512SC 102-1512 Pin 6 OV 5 15 ±33 NMJ0515SC 102-1513 Pin 7 +V 12 5 ±100 NMJ1205SC 102-1514 12 9 ±55 NMJ1209SC 102-1516 12 12 ±42 NMJ1212SC 102-1517 12 15 ±33 NMJ1215SC 102-1518 BROCHAGE Broches Sortie simple 1 -Vin 2 +Vin 3 -Vout 4 +Vout Contrôle total des couts, réduction de la gestion administrative, visibilité sur vos dépenses, flexibilité et personnalisation selon les besoins de votre société. farnell.com/ibuy Caractéristiques des broches n Pin 1 GND Pin 8 + V Pin 3 Vin Pin 10 NA Pin 5 NA Pin 12 NA Pin 7 OV Pin 14 NA NA – Non disponible pour connexion électrique Code Prix Unitaire Commande 1+ 10+ 25+ 50+ 100+ Série NMJ Tous Codes● 14.39 13.75 13.32 12.26 11.12 Réf. Tension Tension de Courant Fab. d’entrée Nom. sortie de sortie Code Commande MEE3S0505SC 5V 5V 600mA 208-3738 MEE3S0509SC 5V 9V 333mA 208-3739 MEE3S0512SC 5V 12V 250mA 208-3740 MEE3S0515SC 5V 15V 200mA 208-3741 MEE3S1205SC 12V 5V 600mA 208-3742 MEE3S1209SC 12V 9V 333mA 208-3743 MEE3S1212SC 12V 12V 250mA 208-3744 MEE3S1215SC 12V 15V 200mA 208-3745 Plage tension d’ entrée (nominal 5, 12V) ±10% Régulation de tension avale (10% to 100% à charge max.) Sortie 5V Sorties 12 et 15V 7% typ. 5% typ. Régulation de tension amont (10% à 100% à charge max.) %1.1 Précision tension sortie 5%, -2.5% Ondulation et bruit sur la sortie 125mV pic à pic Température d’utilisation -25°C à 70°C Réf. Prix Unitaire Fab. Code Commande 1+ 10+ 25+ 50+ 100+ MEE3S0505SC 208-3738● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S0509SC 208-3739● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S0512SC 208-3740● 13.80 12.74 12.60 12.29 11.67 MEE3S0515SC 208-3741● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S1205SC 208-3742● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S1209SC 208-3743● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S1212SC 208-3744● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 MEE3S1215SC 208-3745● 11.13 10.28 10.16 9.91 9.41 Séries NMJ – 1W Sortie double Tension d’ entrée Tension de Intensité à Réf. Fab. Code nominale (V) sortie (V) la sortie (mA) Commande 5 5 200 NTE0505MC 102-1599 5 9 111 NTE0509MC 102-1600 5 12 83 NTE0512MC 102-1601 5 15 66 NTE0515MC 102-1602 12 5 200 NTE1205MC 102-1603 12 9 111 NTE1209MC 102-1604 12 12 83 NTE1212MC 102-1605 12 15 66 NTE1215MC 102-1607 Solution gratuite d’achats intelligents en ligne Code Prix Unitaire Commande 1+ 10+ 25+ 50+ 100+ Série NTE Tous Codes● 9.90 9.39 8.99 8.33 7.46 Ì Homologation EN 60950 Ì Sortie double Ì Isolation de 5.2Kv c.c. Ì Rendement <80% Ì Entrée de 5V et 12V Ì Sortie de 5V, 9V, 12V et 15V Ì Partage de la puissance Ve Courant Code (Nominal) Vs de sortie (mA) Réf. Fab. Commande Sortie simple 5 5 1A NMXS0505UC 102-1565 5 12 417mA NMXS0512UC 102-1567 5 15 333mA NMXS0515UC 102-1569 12 5 1A NMXS1205UC 102-1571 12 12 417mA NMXS1212UC 102-1573 12 15 333mA NMXS1215UC 102-1575 Sortie double 5 12 208mA NMXD0512UC 102-1554 5 15 167mA NMXD0515UC 102-1556 12 12 208mA NMXD1212UC 102-1560 12 15 167mA NMXD1215UC 102-1562 Isolation 5.2kV Code Prix Unitaire Commande 1+ 5+ 10+ 25+ 50+ Sortie simpleNMXS0505UC Tous Codes● 29.60 28.30 27.69 25.77 23.87 Sortie doubleNMXD0505UC Tous Codes● 32.73 31.25 30.59 28.49 26.39 Série NTE – 1W – Sortie simple Série NMXU- 5W – Sortie simple/double Convertisseurs DC/DC 3W isolé simple sortie Isolation 1kV Isolation 1kV Ì Sortie de 5V, 9V, 12V et 15V Ì Construction interne CMS Ì Ne requiert pas de radiateur Ì Matériau du boîtier conforme à UL 94V-0 Ì Refusion CECC00802 (280°C) Ì Conforme RoHS Ì Entrée 5V et 12V Ì Sortie 5V, 9V, 12V, & 15V Ì Entièrement encapsulé avec transfo magnétique Ì Pas besoin de composants externe Ì Pas de condensateurs électrolytique ou tantale Ì Entièrement enrobé Ì Brochage standard industriel Ì Broche compatible avec la série NMXSO Ì Isolation de 1kV c.c. Ì Sortie simple ou double Ì Boîtier ultra plat Ì Rendement de 85% Ì Encombrement de 5.88cm2 Ì Certifié UL94-VO Ì Rendement typique 83% Ì Densité de puissance 2.68W/cm3 Ì Large plage de température -40°C à 85°C à pleine puissance Ì Boîtier métallique UL 94V-0 Ì Pas besoin de dissipateur thermique Ì Brochage standard Ì En pleine charge, fonctionne entre -40°C et 85°C Ì Sortie simple isolée Ì Isolation de1kV c.c. Ì Rendement > 78% Ì Entrée de 5V et 12V Ì Construction CMS Ì Ne requiert ni radiateur ni composants externes Ì Conforme RoHS La série MEE3 est une nouvelle gamme de convertisseurs DC/DC haute performance offrant 3W de puissance en sortie disponible dans un boîtier déjà validé en 2W et capable de fonctionner sur la plage de température de -40°C à 85°C . Connexions Sortie simple Sortie double 1 +I/P +I/P 2 GND GND 3 +O/P +O/P 4 OV OV 5 -O/P -O/P Disponible dans un boîtier SIP standard de l’industrie, avec un brochage compatible à partir des modèles 1W NME/NKE et 2W série LNM. Ils sont idéaux pour fournir des alimentations locales sur des panneaux du système de contrôle avec l’avantage supplémentaire d’une isolation galvanique de 1kVdc. CB Scheme UL 60950-1 UL 508 www.tracopower.com Série TMP et TMPM avec une gamme de puissance allant de 4 à 60 Watt • Modèles avec sorties simple double et triple • Standards de Securité UL508 et UL60950-1 et IEC/EN60950-1 • Boitier plastique entièrement encapsulé • Disponible en montage PCB ou bornier à vis pour montage châssis • Montage Rail DIN en option • Tension d’entrée universelle 85 à 264 VAC ou 120 à 370VDC • Tensions de sorties de 3.3 VDC à 48VDC • Protection Sécurité Classe II, double isolation • Protection contre les courts circuits et les surcharges • Homologation sécurité et conformité CEM pour applications dans le commercial, le résidentiel et l’industriel • Garantie 3 ans Alimentation AC/DC compacte Sur element14 vous trouverez une mine d’informations techniques et législatives en provenance des plus grands fabricants mondiaux et des spécialistes de la législation, ainsi que des vidéos et des outils. L’EXPERTISE TECHNOLOGIQUE COMMENCE ICI element14.com/experts Easy one-hand operation Measurement of rpm, speeds and lengths Storage of mean, max. and min. values as well as the last measurement value Measurement distance up to 600 mm (optical measurement) Battery check "Low Batt" Robust design thanks to SoftCase (protective case) rpm measuring instrument testo 470 – For non-contact and mechanical measurement rpm The rpm measuring instrument testo 470, which can be operated with one hand, offers an optimum combination of optical and mechanical rpm measurerment. By simply attaching an adapter for a probe tip or a speed disc, the optical measurement becomes a mechanical one. This allows speeds and lengths to be measured additionally. For optical measurements, simply attach a reflective marker (optional) to the measurement object, point the visible measurement spot at the reflective marker, and measure. The distance to the measurement object is up to 600 mm. The testo 470 stores mean, min. and max. values as well as the last measurement value. The SoftCase included in delivery protects the instrument from impact, ensuring an especially long working life. www.testo.com We measure it. 0.1 m 6“ 12“ m/min 0.10-1999 0.10-1524 0.40-609.6 ft/min 0.40-6550 0.40-5000 0.40-2000 in/min 4.00-78700 4.00-60000 4.00-24000 m/sec 0.10-33.30 0.10-25.40 0.10-10.16 ft/sec 0.10-109 0.10-83.33 0.10-33.33 m 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 ft 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 in 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 0.00-99999 testo 470 Technical data / Accessories testo 470 testo 470, rpm measuring instrument set: instrument in transport case, incl. adapter, probe tip, surface speed disc, reflectors, batteries and calibration protocol Part no. 0563 0470 General technical data Oper. temp. 0 to +50 °C Storage temp. -20 to +70 °C Battery type 2 AA batteries Battery life 40 h Display 5-figure LCD display, 1-line Dimensions 175 x 60 x 28 mm Weight 190 g Warranty 2 years Units rpm, m/min, ft/min, in/min, m, ft, in Accuracy: (±1 digit/0.02 m/1.00 inch depending on resolution) Measuring wheels: 0.1m, 6" (included) Accessories Part no. Accessories for measuring instrument Reflectors, self-adhesive (1 pack = 5 off, each 150 mm long) 0554 0493 0554 4755 0554 4754 0520 0012 0520 0022 Measuring wheel 12" Measuring wheel 6" ISO calibration certificate/rpm optical and mechanical rpm measuring instruments; cal. points 500; 1000; 3000 rpm ISO calibration certificate/rpm optical rpm measuring instruments; calibration points 10; 100; 1000; 10000; 99500 rpm ISO calibration certificate/rpm Calibration points freely selectable from 10 to 99500 rpm DAkkS calibration certificate/rpm Optical rpm probes, 3 points in instrument measurement range (1 to 99,999 rpm) www.testo.com Sensor types Optically with mod. light beam Meas. range +1 to +99999 rpm +0.1 to +19.999 rpm Accuracy ±1 digit ±0.02% of mv ±0.02% of mv Resolution Mechanical Meas. range Accuracy ±1 digit 0.01 rpm (+1 to +99.99 rpm) 0.1 rpm (+100 to +999.9 rpm) 1 rpm (+1000 to +99999 rpm) 0981 9924/msp/A/01.2012 Subject to change without notice. 0520 0114 0520 0422 We measure it. Multi-Function Measuring Instrument for Ventilation and Indoor Air Quality Versatile instrument for air conditioning engineers testo 435 m³/h m/s ΔP CO2 %RH NEW! °C Lux The testo 435 is a multi-function instrument designed for the analysis of air quality. The instrument is suitable for ensuring employees' safety and well-being in workplace environments and the maintainance of optimum conditions in storage and production processes. The testo 435 can be used to measure CO2, relative humidity and air temperature to ensure conditions are at the correct level and to indicate whether air conditioning systems are working at optimum levels. Measurement of key air quality parameters A range of thermal probes, vane probes and Pitot tubes are available for the testo 435 to allow engineers to take measurements of air flow at various points in a building. The probe for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) measures CO2, relative humidity and room air temperature in order to evaluate room air quality. If required, an absolute pressure probe is also available. When assessing the suitability of a workplace, assessments of draughts and light levels may also be needed. An objective evaluation of air velocity present in the room can be made using the comfort level probe and the lux probe reliably measures light conditions. If surface temperature measurements are required the patented testo cross-band probe offers outstanding performance, calculating the temperature of the object in only a few seconds. Temperature and humidity measurement have been integrated in a new thermal probe, for measurements in ducts. Flow speed, volume flow, air humidity and air temperature can thus be measured in one measurement sequence. The vane probe with a diameter of 60 mm is suited to integrated measurements, e.g. at outlets. For duct measurements, a 16 mm vane probe with a broad measurement range from 0.6 to 40 m/s is available. The Pitot tube is ideal for high air velocities and measurements of contaminated air. A 25 mbar differential pressure probe is integrated into 435-3 and 435-4 for this purpose. Also available are a range of probes to measure absolute pressure, comfort level, lux and surface temperature - making the testo 435 a truly multifunctional instrument. Whatever the measuring task, a range of probes are available to take effective measurements: As well as cable connected probes, the testo 435 can also be used with a range of wireless probes. Wireless probes offer users exceptional practicality as hindrance during measurement and potential damage to the probe cable are eliminated. To convert the instrument for use with the wireless probes an optional wireless module is required. Wireless probes are available for the measurement of temperature and (in some models) humidity. Exceptional practicality with wireless probes The testo 435 is designed for ease of use, with easy to follow menus. The 2 advanced models, testo 435-2 and testo 435-4, offer users the ability to allocate measured values to measurement locations. These instruments also offer the ability to switch between 2 User Profiles: User profile for channel measurement: The most important functions of a channel measurement such as time/point mean calculation and area input are directly accessed by the function buttons. Any area input, (circle, rectangle, area) is adjustable on location. 5 predefined dimensions are stored directly in the funtion buttons. Designed for ease of use The testo 435 is a robust and reliable measuring instrument with the protection class IP 54. The testo 435 has been designed to provide an instrument that is both easy to use and of strong construction. For example, the housing material offers built-in protection against knocks and jars and the large illuminated display is set back in the housing to offer protection. To assist everyday use the instrument features a carrying strap and magnets on the back panel for attachment at the measuring location. Robust design for durability User profile for Indoor Air Quality (IAQ): The most important function when monitoring room air quality is long-term measurement. The activation of the measurement programme is directly accessible via the function button. The testo 435 offers users 2 convenient documentation options; print out on-site or analysis and documentation on a PC. The testo printer offers a convenient and easy to use option for on-site documentation. The testo 435 transmits the data to the printer wirelessly via an infrared interface. Date, time and measured data are all documented on the printout. When using the testo 435-1 and testo 435-3 measured data can be printed to the Testo printer at regular intervals (from 1 minute to 24 hours), using the Cycle Printing function. In this way measurement series can be documented on paper without the need to store the data. The testo 435-2 and 435-4 models offers users the option to store both single measurents and measurement series (up to 10,000 measurement values). Data can then be Assurance through reliable documentation analysed and documented on PC in either tables or graphs, using Testo's ComSoft software. Common features of testo 435 series · WIDE SELECTION OF PROBES: · EASY USE WITH USER PROFILES · PRINTING ON THE TESTO REPORT PRINTER - IAQ probe for evaluating the indoor air quality via CO2, air temperature, indoor air humidity and absolute pressure - Thermal probe with integrated temperature and air humidity measurement - Vane and hot wire probes - Radio probes for temperature Features of specific models · INTEGRATED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT (435-3/-4, not retrofittable) - for flow measurement - for monitoring filters · EXTENDED INSTRUMENT FUNCTION (435-2/-4, not retrofittable) - Instrument store for 10,000 readings - PC software for analysing, archiving and documenting measurement data - Humidity probes with radio or wire - Lux probe connection possible - Comfort level probe connection possible ttestto 435--1 testo 435-1 multi-function measuring instrument for A/C, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality, with battery and calibration protocol Part no. 0560 4351 Part no. 0563 4352 Part no. 0560 4353 Part no. 0563 4354 testo 435-2 EXTENDED INSTRUMENT FUNCTION testo 435-2, multi-function measuring instrument for air conditioning, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality with readings memory, PC software, USB data transmission cable, battery and calibration protocol testo 435-3 INTEGRATED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT testo 435-3, multi-function measuring instrument with built-in differential pressure measurement for air conditioning, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality, with battery and calibration protocol testo 435-4 INTEGRATED DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE MEASUREMENT EXTENDED INSTRUMENT FUNCTION testo 435-4, multi-function measuring instrument with built-in differential pressure measurement for A/C, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality with readings memory, PC software, USB data transmisstion cable, battery and calibration protocol Flow probe Illustration Meas. range Accuracy Part no. Vane measurement probe, 16 mm diameter, with telescopic handle max. 890 mm, e.g. for measurements in ducts +0.6 to +40 0635 9535 m/s ±(0.2 m/s +1.5% of mv) Vane measurement probe, 60 mm diameter, with telescopic handle max. 910 mm, e.g. for measurements at duct exit +0.25 to +20 0635 9335 m/s ±(0.1 m/s +1.5% of mv) Hot wire probe for m/s and °C, Ø probe head 7.5 mm, with telescopic handle (max. 820 mm) 0 to +20 m/s ±(0.03 m/s +5% of mv) 0635 1025 Probes 115 mm 50 mm Ø 5 mm Ø 4 mm 115 mm Ø 5 mm Ø 12 mm 350 mm Ø 7 mm 500 mm Ø 7 mm 1000 mm Ø 7 mm Multi-function probes Illustration Meas. range Accuracy 435-1/-2/-3/-4 435-2/-4 435-3/-4 Part no. IAQ probe to assess Indoor Air Quality, CO2, humidity, temperature and absolute pressure measurement 0 to +50 °C 0632 1535 0 to +100 %RH 0 to +10000 ppm CO2 +600 to +1150 hPa ±0.3 °C ±2 %RH (+2 to +98 %RH) ±(50 ppm CO2 ±2% of mv) (0 to +5000 ppm CO2) ±(100 ppm CO2 ±3% of mv) (+5001 to +10000 ppm CO2) ±5 hPa Thermal velocity probe with built-in temperature and humidity measurement, Ø 12 mm, with telescopic handle (max. 745 mm) -20 to +70 °C 0635 1535 0 to +100 %RH 0 to +20 m/s ±0.3 °C ±2 %RH (+2 to +98 %RH) ±(0.03 m/s +4% of mv) Comfort level probes Illustration Meas. range Accuracy Part no. Comfort level probe for degree of turbulence measurement with telescopic handle (max. 820 mm) and stand, meets DIN 1946 Part 2 requirements 0 to +50 °C 0628 0109 0 to +5 m/s ±0.3 °C ±(0.03 m/s +4% of mv) Lux probe, for measuring light intensity Accuracy to DIN 5032, Part 6: 0635 0545 f1 = 6% = V(Lambda) adjustment f2 = 5% = cos-like weighting Ø 12 mm Humidity probes Illustration Meas. range Accuracy Part no. Humidity/temperature probe -20 to +70 °C 0636 9735 0 to +100 %RH ±0.3 °C ±2 %RH (+2 to +98 %RH) Absolute pressure probes Illustration Meas. range Accuracy Part no. Absolute pressure probe 2000 hPa 0 to +2000 0638 1835 hPa ±5 hPa Prandtl's Pitot tubes Illustration Oper. temp. Part no. Pitot tube, 350 mm long, stainless steel, measures velocity in connection with pressure probes 0 to +600 °C 0635 2145 Pitot tube, 500 mm long, stainless steel, measures velocity in connection with pressure probes 0 to +600 °C 0635 2045 Pitot tube, 1000 mm long, stainless steel, measures velocity together with pressure probes 0638 1347 0 to +600 °C 0635 2345 Meas. range Accuracy tAir probes Illustration 99 Part no. Efficient, robust NTC air probe -50 to +150 °C ±0.5% of mv (+100 to +150 °C) 60 s 0613 1712 ±0.2 °C (-25 to +74.9 °C) ±0.4 °C (remaining range) Fast-action surface probe with sprung thermocouple strip, also for uneven surfaces, measurement range short-term to +500°C, T/C Type K -60 to +300 °C Class 2 3 s 0602 0393 Pipe wrap probe for pipe diameter 5 to 65 mm, with exchangeable measuring head. Measurement range short-term to +280°C, T/C Type K -60 to +130 °C Class 2 5 s 0602 4592 Clamp probe for measurements on pipes, pipe diameter 15 to 25 mm (max. 1"), meas. range short-term up to +130°C -50 to +100 °C Class 2 5 s 0602 4692 Meas. range Accuracy tSurface probes Illustration 99 Part no. 114 mm 50 mm Ø 5 mm Ø 3.7 mm Meas. range Accuracy tImmers./penetr. probes Illustration 99 Part no. Waterproof immerstion/penetration probe, T/C Type K -60 to +400 °C Class 2 7 s 0602 1293 Wireless Probes Technical data 435-1/-2/-3/-4 435-2/-4 Meas. range Accuracy t99 Wireless handle for attachable probe heads with T/C probe head for surface temperature measurement -50 to +350 °C 5 s Short-term to +500 °C Radio handle: ±(0.5 °C +0.3% of mv) (-40 to +500 °C) ±(0.7 °C +0.5% of mv) (remaining range) T/C probe head: Class 2 Resolution 0.1 °C (-50 to +199.9 °C) 1.0 °C (remaining range) Wireless handle with surface temperature probe head Wireless handle for plug-in probe heads (including T/C adaptor) 0554 0189 T/C probe head for surface temperature measurement (attachable to wireless handle), T/C Type K 0602 0394 869.85 MHz 869.85 MHz Radio freq. Part no. Meas. range Accuracy Resolution 0 to +100 %RH -20 to +70 °C ±2 %RH (+2 to +98 %RH) ±0.5 °C 0.1 %RH 0.1 °C Wireless handle with humidity probe head Wireless handle for attachable probe heads with humidity probe head Wireless handle for plug-in probe heads (including T/C adaptor) 0554 0189 Humidity probe head (attachable to wireless handle) 0636 9736 Radio freq. Part no. Upgrade module for wireless option Wireless probes: General technical data Wireless module for measuring instrument 869.85 MHz 0554 0188 Radio freq. Part no. Measuring rate 0.5 s or 10 s, Battery type adjustable on handle Battery life Wireless immerion/penetration probe, NTC 2 x 3V button cell (CR 2032) 2 AAA micro batteries 150 h (meas. rate 0.5 s) 2 months (meas. rate 10 s) 215 h (meas. rate 0.5 s) 6 months (meas. rate 10 s) Wireless handle Radio transmission Radio coverage Unidirectional Oper. temp. -20 to +50 °C Storage temp. -40 to +70 °C Up to 20 m (without obstruction) 40 mm Ø 12 mm 120 mm Ø 5 mm Accuracy ±1 digit ±0.2 °C (-25 to +74.9 °C) ±0.4 °C (-40 to -25.1 °C) ±0.4 °C (+75 to +99.9 °C) ±0.5% of mv (remaining range) Measuring range -40 to +150 °C Probe type NTC Resolution 0.1 °C ±0.3 °C (-60 to +60 °C) ±0.5% of mv (remaining range) -200 to +1370 °C Type K (NiCr- Ni) 0.1 °C 0 to +100 %RH Testo capacitive humidity sensor 0 to +10000 ppm CO2 CO2 (IAQ probe) 0 to +2000 mbar Absolute pressure probe 0 to +20 m/s Hot wire 435-2/-4 0 to +100000 Lux Lux 435-1/-2/-3/-4 435-3/-4 ±0.02mbar (0 to +2 mbar) 1% of mv (remaining range) 0 to +25 mbar Differential pressure probe, internal 0.01 mbar 1 Lux 0 to +60 m/s Vane Oper. temp. -20 to +50 °C Storage temp. -30 to +70 °C Battery life 200 h (typical vane measurement) Dimensions 225 x 74 x 46 mm 0.1% RH 0.01 (0635 9335) 0.01 (0635 9535) 0.01 m/s 1 ppm 0.1mbar Ordering data 0981 9513/msp/Si/07.2005 Subject to change without notice. System case Part no. Printer and Accessories Part no. testovent 410, volume flow funnel, Ø 340mm/330 x 330mm, incl. case 0554 0410 testovent 415, volume flow funnel, Ø 210mm/190x190mm, incl. case 0554 0415 Connection hose, silicone, 5m long, Max. load 700 hPa (mbar) 0554 0440 Handle for plug-in humidity probe head for connection to testo 635 and testo 435, probe cable included, measures/calibrates humidity probe head 0430 9735 Control and humidity adjustment set 11.3%RH/75.3%RH incl. adapter for humidity probes, Quick checks or calibration of humidity probe 0554 0660 PTFE sintered filter, Ø 12 mm, for corrosive substances, High humidity range (long-term measurements), high velocities 0554 0756 Stainless steel sintered cap, Ø 12 mm, is screwed onto humidity probe, For measurements at high velocity speeds or in dirt ingressed air 0554 0647 ISO calibration certificate/Temperature. For air/immersion probes, calibration points -18, 0, +60 °C 300520 0042 UKAS calibration certificate/Temperature. For immersion probes, calibration points 0, 50, 100 °C 300520 0214 ISO calibration certificate/Humiidity. Calibration points 11.3 / 45.3 / 75.3 %rh at 25 °C 300520 0078 UKAS calibration certificate/Humiidity. Calibration points 11.3 / 45.3 / 75.3 %rh at 25 °C 300520 0202 ISO calibration pressure. 5 points across range 300520 0018 ISO calibration certificate/air velocity. 5 points across range 300520 0012 ISO calibration/CO2. 0 and 5000 ppm 300520 0070 Other points and probe types available on request. testo 435-1, multi-function meas. instr., for A/C, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality, with battery and calibration protocol 0560 4351 testo 435-2, multi-function measuring instrument for air conditioning, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality with readings memory, PC software and USB data transmission cable, incl. battery and calibration protocol 0563 4352 testo 435-3, multi-function measuring instrument with built-in differential pressure measurement for air conditioning, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality, with battery and calibration protocol 0560 4353 testo 435-4, multi-function meas. instr. with built-in differential pressure measurement for A/C, ventilation and Indoor Air Quality with readings memory, PC software and USB data transmisstion cable, with battery and calibration protocol 0563 4354 Testo printer with wireless IRDA and infrared interface, 1 roll of thermal paper and 4 round cell batteries, For printout of reading on site 0554 0547 Spare thermal paper for printer (6 rolls), Measurement data documentation legible for up to 10 years 0554 0568 Spare thermal paper for printer (6 rolls) 0554 0569 External recharger incl. 4 Ni-MH rechargeable batteries with built-in, international mains adapter - 100-240 V, 300 mA, 50/60 Hz, 12 VA/instrument 0554 0610 Plug-in mains adapter for testo 735, testo 635, testo 435, 5 VDC 500 mA with European adapter 0554 0447 Service case for basic equipment of measuring instrument and probes, dimensions: 400 x 310 x 96 mm 0516 0035 Service case for measuring instrument, probes and accessories, dimensions: 490 x 420 x 110 mm 0516 0135 Part no. Part no. Measuring instrument Accessories for measuring instrument Part no. Accessories Calibration Certificates Part no. Testo Ltd Newman Lane Alton Hampshire GU34 2QJ Tel: 01420 544 433 Fax: 01420 544 434 Email: info@testo.co.uk Internet: www.testo.co.uk For further information, please contact: testo 205, 206, 230 Compact pH Measuring Instruments With innovative probe engineering pH °C The new pH measuring instruments with innovative probe engineering 2 Measurement of the pH value plays an important role in many areas. Anywhere where there are chemical and biochemical reactions, the pH value has an important indicator function. Although the technology to accurately measure pH value has been available for several years, instruments previously available have posed several problems for users: · Short life span of pH probes due to glass breakage and dirt ingress, for example · Sensitivity to dirt of the pH probe resulting in incorrect measurements · Spillage of storage solution · Handling problems when calibrating · Lack of one-hand penetration pH probes for liquid and semi-solid substances · Lack of combined temperature and pH measurement Together with experts from trade and industry, Testo has developed innovative instruments that resolve these problems. Instead of a liquid electrolyte, Testo pH probes have a gel electrolyte as a reference substance for pH measurement which facilitates the use of a hole diaphragm between the measurement electrode and housing in place of the microporous structure usually used in pH probes. The micro-porous structure becomes blocked up more quickly, similar to a finely woven sieve, consequently requiring regular service which in return results in a shorter life. Due to the large volume of gel electrolyte and the hole diaphragm, Testo pH probes are not only leakproof, they are almost completely maintenance-free, robust and unaffected by dirt and dust. The combination of the pH penetration tip and temperature probe in a one-hand instrument for accurate and fast temperature compensation is unique. Consequently, accurate readings are guaranteed in all ambient conditions. With the development of different, breakproof probe geometries, Testo is making available special solutions for liquid as well as for semi-solid substances. The leakproof storage solution is also new. pH probes must be stored in moist conditions when not in use, in order to prevent the glass membrane coating around the measurement electrode and the diaphragm from drying out. Pure water alone should not be used since water would release the conducting components contained in the probe electrolytes. A potassium chloride solution is usually used for this purpose. As with every liquid, it can leak which, particularly in the food branch, can lead to contamination of raw foodstuffs or products. Testo has produced a solution that has eliminated this disadvantage. The potassium chloride solution is available in a gel filled cartridge that does not drip or leak. pH1 probe head for liquids pH2 probe head for semi-solid substances Interchangeable probe The potassium chloride solution bonded in the gel cannot leak Robust food penetration pH/°C meter with automatic temperature compensation Fast and convenient measurement during production pH tip embedded in break-proof plastic Set case with testo 205, pH 4.0 and 7.0 buffers as well as storage cap pH buffer solution in the storage bottle with dosing container The professional pH measuring instrument for the food sector testo 205 is a pH measuring instrument, developed together with experts from the food sector, for measurements in semi-solid materials. Its main application is to be found in meat processing. Its ergonomic design and surface display make the testo 205 ideal for applications in production, incoming goods and for recurring measurements. The combination of the pH penetration tip and the temperature probe for fast and accurate temperature compensation is unique. Automatic recognition of a stable reading makes the whole measurement process much easier. Benefits • Combined penetration tip with temperature probe • Measurement tip can be changed by user • Maintenance-free gel electrode • Backlit display • Audible button feedback • 2 line display • Automatic full scale value recognition • 1, 2, or 3 point calibration possible Complete case for field use All of the required accessories are clearly arranged in the high-quality aluminium case together with the testo 205 measuring instrument. The containers with the buffer solutions can be set up in the case so that calibration can be carried out on site. Set contents • testo 205 • pH buffer 4 and 7 (each 250 ml) • Gel storage cap • Instruction manual • Batteries Instrument testo 205 Parameters pH / °C Sensor pH electrode / NTC Number of meas. channels 2 Measurement range 0 to 14 pH Resolution pH 0.01 pH Resolution Temperature 0.1 °C Accuracy Temperature ± 0.4 °C Temperature compensation Automatic Display LCD, 2 line, 0 to 70 °C Measurement rate 2 measurements per second Application temperature 0 °C to +60 °C Storage temperature -20 °C to +70 °C Battery type 4x lithium button cell LR44 Probes Screw-in pH / °C probe modules Accuracy pH ± 0.02 pH Technical Data Dimensions 197 x 33 x 20 mm Weight 69 g Battery life 80 h (Auto Off 10 Min) Housing ABS with soft coating in handle area, protection class IP 65 3 testo 205 testo 206-pH1 / pH2 / pH3 – Versatile pocket-size pH sticks 4 testo 206 pH1, pH2 and pH3 • The instrument is also suitable for outdoor applications or for tough industrial conditions thanks to the “TopSafe” protection case included. • 2 line display • Automatic full scale value recognition • 1, 2 or 3 point calibration possible testo 206 pH1 and pH2 • Insensitive to dirt on account of hole diaphragm and gel reference electrolyte • Large volume of the gel reference electrode guarantees a long life • No maintenance necessary. No need to fill up electrolyte solution. • So versatile it can be used for nearly all applications, including - for materials containing protein - highly contaminated solutions • Low membrane resistance results in fast and stable readings • Unique design makes breakage practically impossible • Combination: pH penetration tip with temperature measurement probe testo 206 pH3 • Connection of all external probes with BNC plug • Automatic and manual temperature compensation possible pH1 probe head for liquids pH2 probe head for semi-solid materials pH3 probe head with BNC interface Benefits Instrument testo 206-pH1 and pH2 Parameters pH / °C Sensors pH electrode / NTC Number of meas. channels 2 channel Measurement range 0 to 14 pH Resolution pH 0.01 pH Resolution Temperature 0.1 °C Accuracy Temperature ± 0.4 °C Temp. compensation Automatic Display LCD, 2 line, 0 to 70 °C Measurement rate 2 measurements per second Application temperature 0 °C to +60 °C Storage temperature -20 °C to +70 °C Battery type 1x CR2032 Probes Screw-in pH / °C probe modules Accuracy pH ± 0.02 pH Technical Data Dimensions 197 x 33 x 20 mm Weight Technical Data for testo 206-pH3: Refer to the corresponding probe for pH and temperature accuracy. 69 g Battery life 80 h (Auto Off 10 Min) Housing ABS with Top Safe, protection class IP 68 5 testo 206-pH1, compact pH tester for liquids Compact pH measuring instrument for measuring liquids. Built-in temperature probe for efficient temperature compensation. Automatic recognition of a stable reading makes it easier to measure. The "TopSafe" case included makes the instrument ideal for outdoor applications or for use in tough industrial conditions. Benefits • Versatile, accurate pH measuring instrument • Not affected by dust or dirt thanks to the TopSafe protection case • Maintenance-free gel electrode • Built-in temperature probe • 2 line display • Automatic full scale value recognition • 1, 2, or 3 point calibration possible testo 206-pH1 applications • pH measurement in the environmental sector (water, waste water,...) • Condensate neutralisation (heating engineering/condensing boilers) • pH applications in the industrial sector (e.g. pH value of lubricants) • pH measurement in the food sector (e.g. fruit juice production) • Generally: Liquids in all sectors testo 206-pH1 is ideal for measurements in liquids The “TopSafe” case protects in tough industrial conditions testo 206-pH1 – Instruments Set testo 206 instrument+probe module pH1 + TopSafe Leak-proof gel storage cap Belt/wall holder testo 206-pH1 – Starter Set testo 206 instrument+probe module pH1 + TopSafe Leak-proof gel storage cap High-standard aluminium storage case Belt/wall holder 2 x 250ml buffer solution with dosing chamber (pH 4 and pH 7) Part no. 0563 2061 Part no. 0563 2065 testo 206-pH1, compact pH tester for liquids testo 206-pH2, compact pH tester for semi-solid substances 6 testo 206-pH2, compact pH tester for semi-solid substances testo 206-pH2 is a pH measuring instrument for measurements in semi-solid materials, such as jelly, creams, meat, cheese, marmalade and fruit. The combination of a pH penetration tip and temperature probe for efficient temperature compensation is unique. Automatic recognition of a stable reading makes the whole measurement process easier. The "TopSafe" case supplied makes the instrument ideal for outdoor applications and for use in tough industrial conditions. Benefits • Compact pH measuring instrument with penetration tip • Not affected by dirt and dust thanks to TopSafe protection case • Maintenance-free gel electrode • Automatic full scale value recognition • Built-in temperature probe • 2 line display • 1, 2, or 3 point calibration possible testo 206-pH2 applications • Milk and dairy products (e. g. yoghurt,cheese) • pH value of mash during the production of spirits • pH value during food production (e.g. salad dressing) • Applications in the cosmetics sector (cream production) • pH monitoring during meat processing Automatic full scale value recognition and clear 2 line display. testo 206-pH2 is ideal for measurements in viscoplastic substances. testo 206-pH2 – Instruments Set testo 206 instrument +probe module pH2 + TopSafe Leak-proof gel storage cap Belt/wall holder EUR 169.- testo 206-pH2 – Starter Set testo 206 instrument +probe module pH2 + TopSafe Leak-proof gel storage cap High-standard aluminium storage case Belt/wall holder 2 x 250ml buffer solution with dosing chamber (pH 4 and pH 7) Part no. 0563 2062 Part no. 0563 2066 7 testo 206-pH3, pH tester for connecting external probes testo 206-pH3 is equipped with a BNC socket which makes it possible to connect all pH probes to the instrument. The temperature value supplied is automatically analysed if Testo pH probes with a built-in temperature sensor are used. In the case of probes without a temperature sensor, the temperature can be set manually. Automatic recognition of a stable reading makes the measurement easier. Thanks to the “TopSafe” protection case, the instrument is ideal for outdoor applications and for use in tough industrial conditions. Benefits • External pH probes can be connected • Not affected by dirt and dust thanks to the TopSafe protection case • 2 line display • Automatic full-scale value recognition • 1, 2, or 3 point calibration possible testo 206-pH3 applications • All of the probes with BNC plugs available on the market can be connected. • Testo probes with temperature measurement facilitate automatic temperature compensation. • Ideal for pH measurements in the lab • pH monitoring in the environmental sector (water quality, earth samples) • pH monitoring in the industrial sector (e.g. photo processing vats) testo 206-pH3 facilitates the connection of external pH probes Automatic temperature compensation in external probes with temperature sensor testo 206-pH3 – Instruments Set testo 206 instrument+BNC connection socket + TopSafe Belt/wall holder testo 206 pH3 – Affordable Set testo 206 instrument + BNC connection socket + Top Safe pH probe Type 01 High-standard aluminium storage case Belt/wall holder Leak-proof gel storage cap 2 x 250ml buffer solution with dosing chamber (pH 4 and pH 7) testo 206 pH3 – Versatile Set testo 206 instrument + BNC connection socket + TopSafe pH probe Type 14 (not shown) High-standard aluminium storage case Belt/wall holder Leak-proof gel storage cap 2 x 250ml buffer solution with dosing chamber (pH 4 and pH 7) Part no. 0563 2068 Part no. 0563 2067 Part no. 0563 2063 testo 206-pH3, compact pH tester with connection to external BNC probes Subject to change without notice. 0981.1123/hd/AC/Q/06.2004 Instruments Part no. testo 205 Starter Set: pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap, wall holder, pH4 buffer (250 ml), 0563 2052 pH 7 buffer (250 ml) in an aluminium case testo 205 Instruments Set: pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap and wall holder 0563 2051 testo 206-pH1 - Starter Set: pH measuring instrument with versatile probe, gel storage cap, TopSafe, wall holder, pH4 0563 2065 buffer (250 ml), pH 7 buffer (250 ml) in an aluminium case testo 206-pH1 - Instruments Set: pH measuring instrument with versatile probe, gel storage cap,TopSafe and wall holder 0563 2061 testo 206-pH2 - Starter Set: pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap, TopSafe, wall holder, pH4 0563 2066 buffer (250 ml), pH 7 buffer (250 ml) in an aluminium case testo 206-pH2 - Instruments Set: pH measuring instrument with penetration probe, gel storage cap, TopSafe and wall 0563 2062 holder testo 206-pH3 - Instruments Set: pH measuring instrument with BNC connection socket, TopSafe and wall holder 0563 2063 testo 206-pH3 - Affordable Set: pH measuring instrument with BNC socket, pH probe Type 01, gel storage cap, TopSafe, 0563 2067 wall holder, pH4 buffer (250 ml), pH 7 buffer (250 ml) in an aluminium case testo 206-pH3 - Versatile Set: pH measuring instrument with BNC socket, pH probe Type 14, gel storage cap, TopSafe, 0563 2068 wall holder, pH4 buffer (250 ml), pH 7 buffer (250 ml) in an aluminium case Ordering Data Qty. Accessories Part no. Spare pH probe for testo 205 incl. gel storage cap 0650 2051 Spare pH probe pH1 for testo 206 incl. gel storage cap 0650 2061 Spare pH probe pH2 for testo 206 incl. gel storage cap 0650 2062 Spare probe Type 01 for testo 206-pH3, incl. gel storage cap 0650 2063 Spare probe Type 14 for testo 206-pH3, incl. gel storage cap 0650 2064 Storage cap for testo 205 with KCl gel filling 0554 2051 Storage cap for testo 205 with KCl gel filling (pack of 3) 0554 2052 Storage cap for testo 206 with KCl gel filling 0554 2067 Storage cap for testo 206 with KCl gel filling (pack of 3) 0554 2068 pH buffer solution 4.01 in a dosing bottle (250 ml) 0554 2061 pH buffer solution 4.01 in a dosing bottle (pack of 3 each with 250 ml) 0554 2062 pH buffer solution 7.00 in a dosing bottle (250 ml) 0554 2063 pH buffer solution 7.00 in a dosing bottle (pack of 3 each with 250 ml) 0554 2064 pH buffer solution 10.01 in a dosing bottle (250 ml) 0554 2065 pH buffer solution 10.01 in a dosing bottle (pack of 3 each with 250 ml) 0554 2066 Qty. Subject to change without notice. Name Company Telephone/Fax Department Address Email Signature To: Sender testo Ltd Newman Lane, Alton Hampshire, GU34 2QJ Tel: 01420 544 433 Fax: 01420 544 434 Email: info@testo.co.uk Web: www.testo.co.uk testo 230, The Classic in the Compact Class testo 230 is a complete pH measuring instrument combined with a high standard thermometer in a compact, water-proof housing. The redox voltage can be measured via the redox electrode Type 06. The instrument has automatic temperature compensation and can be calibrated in the pH range using standard and DIN buffers. For more detailed information about testo 230, please send for the “pH measuring instrument plus thermometer” (Part no. 0981 3434). Part no. 0560 2304 Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Built-in, Java-based test software runs directly from any web browser to boost productivity. SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) Ordering Information 2601B Single-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (3A DC, 10A Pulse) 2602B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (3A DC, 10A Pulse) 2604B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (3A DC, 10A Pulse, Benchtop Version) 2611B Single-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (200V, 10A Pulse) 2612B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (200V, 10A Pulse) 2614B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (200V, 10A Pulse, Benchtop Version) 2634B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (1fA, 10A Pulse, Benchtop Version) 2635B Single-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (0.1fA, 10A Pulse) 2636B Dual-channel System SourceMeter SMU Instrument (0.1fA, 10A Pulse) Accessories Supplied Operators and Programming Manuals 2600-ALG-2: Low Noise Triax Cable with Alligator Clips, 2m (6.6 ft.) (two supplied with 2634B and 2636B, one with 2635B) 2600-Kit: Screw Terminal Connector Kit (2601B/ 2602B/2604B/2611B/2612B/2614B) 2600B-800A: Series 2400 Emulation Script for Series 2600B (supplied on USB memory stick) 7709-308A: Digital I/O Connector CA-180-3A: TSP-Link/Ethernet Cable (two per unit) TSP Express Software Tool (embedded) Test Script Builder Software (supplied on CD) LabVIEW Driver (supplied on CD) ACS Basic Edition Software (optional) Unmatched Throughput for Automated Test with TSP Technology For test applications that demand the highest levels of automation and throughput, the Model 2600B’s TSP technology delivers industry-best performance. TSP technology goes far beyond traditional test command sequencers… it fully embeds then executes complete test programs from within the SMU instrument itself. This virtually eliminates all the time-consuming bus communications to and from the PC controller, and thus dramatically improves overall test times. • Conditional branching • Advanced calculations and flow control • Variables • Pass/Fail test • Prober/Handler control • Datalogging/ Formatting Test Script DUT TSP technology executes complete test programs from the 2600B’s non-volatile memory. SMU-Per-Pin Parallel Testing with TSP-Link Technology TSP-Link is a channel expansion bus that enables multiple Series 2600B’s to be inter-connected and function as a single, tightly-synchronized, multi-channel system. The 2600B’s TSP-Link Technology works together with its TSP technology to enable high-speed, SMU-per-pin parallel testing. Unlike other high-speed solutions such as large ATE systems, the 2600B achieves parallel test performance without the cost or burden of a mainframe. The TSP-Link based system also enables superior flexibility, allowing for quick and easy system re-configuration as test requirements change. Model 2400 Software Emulation The Series 2600B is compatible with test code developed for Keithley’s Model 2400 SourceMeter SMU instrument. This enables an easier upgrade from Model 2400-based test systems to Series 2600B, and can improve test speeds by as much as 80%. In addition, it provides a migration path from SCPI programming to Keithley’s TSP technology, which when implemented can improve test times even more. For complete support of legacy test systems, the Model 2400’s Source-Memory-List test sequencer is also fully supported in this mode. Third-generation SMU Instrument Design Ensures Faster Test Times Based on the proven architecture of earlier Series 2600 instruments, the Series 2600B’s SMU instrument design enhances test speed in several ways. For example, while earlier designs used a parallel current ranging topology, the Series 2600B uses a patented series ranging topology, which provides faster and smoother range changes and outputs that settle more quickly. SMU1 <500ns SMU2 SMU3 SMU4 All channels in the TSP-Link system are synchronized to under 500ns. Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Test 1 running To Device 1 GPIB, USB, or Ethernet TSP-Link Test 2 running To Device 2 Test 3 running To Device 3 SMU-Per-Pin Parallel Testing using TSP and TSP-Link improves test throughput and lowers the cost of test. SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence The Series 2600B SMU instrument design supports two modes of operation for use with a variety of loads. In normal mode, the SMU instrument provides high bandwidth performance for maximum throughput. In high capacitance (high-C) mode, the SMU instrument uses a slower bandwidth to provide robust performance with higher capacitive loads. Simplify Semiconductor Component Test, Verification, and Analysis The optional ACS Basic Edition software maximizes the productivity of customers who perform packaged part characterization during development, quality verification, or failure analysis. Key features include: • Rich set of easy-to-access test libraries • Script editor for fast customization of existing tests • Data tool for comparing results quickly • Formulator tool that analyzes captured curves and provides a wide range of math functions For more information about the ACS Basic Edition software, please refer to the ACS Basic Edition data sheet. Powerful Software Tools In addition to the embedded Java-based plug & play software and optional ACS Basic Edition software, the free Test Script Builder software tool is provided to help users create, modify, debug, and store TSP test scripts. Table 1 describes key features of Series 2600B software tools. Three New Dual-Channel Bench- Top Models of Series 2600B Offer Industry-Best Value and Performance For applications that do not require leading-edge system-level automation capabilities, Keithley has expanded the Series 2600B to include 3 new value-priced “bench-top” models – the 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B. These models offer similar performance to Models 2602B, 2612B, and 2636B, respectively, however do not include TSPLink, Contact Check, and Digital I/O capabilities. Complete Automated System Solutions Keithley’s S500 Integrated Test Systems are highly configurable, instrument-based systems for semiconductor characterization at the device, wafer, or cassette level. Built on our proven Series 2600B System SourceMeter SMU instruments, our S500 Integrated Test Systems Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments When you need to acquire data on a packaged part quickly, the wizard-based user interface of ACS Basic Edition makes it easy to find and run the test you want, like this common FET curve trace test. Table 1. Series 2600B software tools Feature/ Functionality ACS Basic Edition Java-based Plug & Play Test Script Builder (TSB) Description Semiconductor characterization software for component test, verification, and analysis Quick Start Java-based Plug & Play Tool for fast and easy I-V testing, primarily for bench and lab users Custom script writing tool for TSP instruments Supported hardware Series 2400, Series 2600B, 4200-SCS Series 2600B Series 2600B, Series 3700 Supported buses GPIB, LAN/LXI LAN/LXI GPIB, RS-232, LAN/LXI, USB Functionality Intuitive, wizard-based GUI, Rich set of test libraries, curve trace capability Linear/Log Sweeps, Pulsing, Custom sweeps, Single point source-measures. Note: Uses new 2600B’s new API’s for precision timing and channel synchronization Custom scripts with total flexibility, full featured debugger Data management Formulator tool with wide range of math functions .csv export User defined Installation Optional purchase Not necessary. Embedded in the instrument. Free Download or CD Install on PC. The flexible software architecture of ACS Basic Edition allows configuring systems with a wide range of controllers and test fixtures, as well as the exact number of SourceMeter SMU instruments the application requires. provide innovative measurement features and system flexibility, scalable to your needs. The unique measurement capability, combined with the powerful and flexible Automated Characterization Suite (ACS) software, provides a comprehensive range of applications and features not offered on other comparable systems on the market. SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) Typical Applications I-V functional test and characterization of a wide range of devices, including: • Discrete and passive components –– Two-leaded – Sensors, disk drive heads, metal oxide varistors (MOVs), diodes, zener diodes, sensors, capacitors, thermistors –– Three-leaded – Small signal bipolar junction transistors (BJTs), field-effect transistors (FETs), and more • Simple ICs – Optos, drivers, switches, sensors, converters, regulators • Integrated devices – small scale integrated (SSI) and large scale integrated (LSI) –– Analog ICs –– Radio frequency integrated circuits (RFICs) –– Application specific integrated circuits (ASICs) –– System on a chip (SOC) devices • Optoelectronic devices such as light-emitting diodes (LEDs), laser diodes, high brightness LEDs (HBLEDs), vertical cavity surface-emitting lasers (VCSELs), displays • Wafer level reliability –– NBTI, TDDB, HCI, electromigration • Solar Cells • Batteries • And more... Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions Scalable, integrated source and measure solutions +1.5A +3A +5A –3A –5A +10A –10A –1A +1A –1.5A –20V –6V 0V +6V +20V +40V 0A –40V –35V +35V DC Pulse +1.5A +10A –10A –1A +1A +0.1A –0.1A –1.5A –20V –5V 0V +5V +20V +200V 0A –200V –180V +180V DC Pulse +1.5A +10A –10A –1A +1A +0.1A –0.1A –1.5A –20V –5V 0V +5V +20V +200V 0A –200V –180V +180V DC Pulse Models 2601B, 2602B, and 2604B I-V capability Models 2611B, 2612B, and 2614B I-V capability Models 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B I-V capability In the first and third quadrants, Series 2600B SMU instruments operate as a source, delivering power to a load. In the second and fourth quadrants, they operate as a sink, dissipating power internally. Model 2604B/2614B rear panel (Single channels 2601B, 2611B, 2635B not shown) Model 2636B rear panel SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence SPECIFICATION CONDITIONS This document contains specifications and supplemental information for the Models 2601B, 2602B, and 2604B System SourceMeter® SMU instruments. Specifications are the standards against which the Models 2601B, 2602B, and 2604B are tested. Upon leaving the factory, the 2601B, 2602B, and 2604B meet these specifications. Supplemental and typical values are non-warranted, apply at 23°C, and are provided solely as useful information. Accuracy specifications are applicable for both normal and high capacitance modes. The source and measurement accuracies are specified at the SourceMeter CHANNEL A (2601B, 2602B, and 2604B) or SourceMeter CHANNEL B (2602B and 2604B) terminals under the following conditions: 1. 23°C ± 5°C, <70% relative humidity 2. After 2 hour warm-up 3. Speed normal (1 NPLC) 4. A/D auto-zero enabled 5. Remote sense operation or properly zeroed local operation 6. Calibration period = 1 year SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Source Specifications VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING ACCURACY1 Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) Typical Noise (peak-peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 100 mV 5 μV 0.02% + 250 μV 20 μV 1 V 50 μV 0.02% + 400 μV 50 μV 6 V 50 μV 0.02% + 1.8 mV 100 μV 40 V 500 μV 0.02% + 12 mV 500 μV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 2: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS 3: 40.4W per channel maximum. ±40.4V @ ±1.0A, ±6.06V @ ±3.0A, four quadrant source or sink operation. VOLTAGE REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100μV). NOISE 10Hz–20MHz: <20mV peak-peak (typical), <3mV RMS (typical), 6V range. CURRENT LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 4: Bipolar current limit (compliance) set with single value. Minimum value is 10nA. Accuracy same as current source. OVERSHOOT: <±(0.1% + 10mV) typical. Step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load, maximum current limit/compliance. GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE: <4mV typical. Current <10mA. Current Source Specifications CURRENT PROGRAMMING ACCURACY Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) Typical Noise (peak-peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 100 nA 2 pA 0.06% + 100 pA 5 pA 1 μA 20 pA 0.03% + 800 pA 25 pA 10 μA 200 pA 0.03% + 5 nA 60 pA 100 μA 2 nA 0.03% + 60 nA 3 nA 1 mA 20 nA 0.03% + 300 nA 6 nA 10 mA 200 nA 0.03% + 6 μA 200 nA 100 mA 2 μA 0.03% + 30 μA 600 nA 1 A 5 20 μA 0.05% + 1.8 mA 70 μA 3 A 5 20 μA 0.06% + 4 mA 150 μA 10 A 5, 6 200 μA 0.5 % + 40 mA (typical) TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 7: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS8: 40.4W per channel maximum. ±1.01A @ ±40.0V , ±3.03A @ ±6.0V , four quadrant source or sink operation. CURRENT REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100pA). VOLTAGE LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 9: Bipolar voltage limit (compliance) set with a single value. Minimum value is 10mV. Accuracy is the same as voltage source. OVERSHOOT: <±0.1% typical (step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load; see Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test conditions). ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSIENT RESPONSE TIME: <70μs for the output to recover to within 0.1% for a 10% to 90% step change in load. VOLTAGE SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. 100mV, 1V Ranges: <50μs typical. 6V Range: <100μs typical. 40V Range 10: <150μs typical. CURRENT SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values below for Iout × Rload = 1V unless noted. 3A Range: <80μs typical (current less than 2.5A, Rload >2W). 1A–10mA Ranges: <80μs typical (Rload >6W). 1mA Range: <100μs typical. 100μA Range: <150μs typical. 10μA Range: <500μs typical. 1μA Range: <2.5ms typical. 100nA Range: <25ms typical. DC FLOATING VOLTAGE: Output can be floated up to ±250VDC from chassis ground. REMOTE SENSE OPERATING RANGE 11: Maximum voltage between HI and SENSE HI = 3V . Maximum voltage between LO and SENSE LO = 3V . VOLTAGE OUTPUT HEADROOM: 40V Range: Max. output voltage = 42V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). 6V Range: Max. output voltage = 8V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode. VOLTAGE SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <300mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into an 100kW load, 20MHz BW. CURRENT SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <5% of larger range + 300mV/Rload (typical with source settling set to SETTLE_SMOOTH_100NA). See Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test conditions. NOTES 1. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 2. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 3. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 4. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 0.06% of limit range to the corresponding current limit accuracy specifications. Specifications apply with sink mode operation enabled. 5. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 6. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 7. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 8. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 9. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 10% of compliance range and ±0.02% of limit setting to corresponding voltage source specification. For 100mV range add an additional 60mV of uncertainty. 10. Add 150μs when measuring on the 1A range. 11. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS (continued) PULSE SPECIFICATIONS Region Maximum Current Limit Maximum Pulse Width 12 Maximum Duty Cycle 13 1 1 A @ 40 V DC, no limit 100% 1 3 A @ 6 V DC, no limit 100% 2 1.5 A @ 40 V 100 ms 25% 3 5 A @ 35 V 4 ms 4% 4 10 A @ 20 V 1.8 ms 1% MINIMUM PROGRAMMABLE PULSE WIDTH 14, 15: 100μs. NOTE: Minimum pulse width for settled source at a given I/V output and load can be longer than 100μs. Pulse width programming resolution : 1μs. Pulse width programming accurac y 15: ±5μs. pulse width jitter : 2μs (typical). Quadrant Diagram : +1.5A +3A +5A –3A –5A +10A –10A –1A +1A –1.5A –20V –6V 0V +6V +20V +40V 0A –40V –35V +35V DC Pulse Pulse Pulse 4 4 3 3 3 3 2 2 1 2 2 NOTES 12. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 13. Thermally limited in sink mode (quadrants II and IV) and ambient temperatures above 30°C. See power equations in the reference manual for more information. 14. Typical performance for minimum settled pulse widths: Source Value Load Source Settling (% of range) Min. Pulse Width 6 V 2 W 0.2% 150 μs 20 V 2 W 1% 200 μs 35 V 7 W 0.5% 500 μs 40 V 27 W 0.1% 400 μs 1.5 A 27 W 0.1% 1.5 ms 3 A 2 W 0.2% 150 μs 5 A 7 W 0.5% 500 μs 10 A 2 W 0.5% 200 μs Typical tests were performed using remote operation, 4W sense, and best, fixed measurement range. For more information on pulse scripts, see the Series 2600B Reference Manual. 15. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 2601B, 2602B, 2604B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments METER SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 16, 17 Range Default Display Resolution 18 Input Resistance Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) 100 mV 100 nV >10 GW 0.015% + 150 μV 1 V 1 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 200 μV 6 V 10 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 1 mV 40 V 10 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 8 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 19: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. CURRENT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 17 Range Default Display Resolution 20 Voltage Burden 21 Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) 100 nA 100 fA <1 mV 0.05% + 100 pA 1 μA 1 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 500 pA 10 μA 10 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 1.5 nA 100 μA 100 pA <1 mV 0.02% + 25 nA 1 mA 1 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 200 nA 10 mA 10 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 2.5 μA 100 mA 100 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 20 μA 1 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.03% + 1.5 mA 3 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.05% + 3.5 mA 10 A 22 10 μA <1 mV 0.4% + 25 mA (typical) Current Measure Settling Time (Time for measurement to settle after a Vstep) 23: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values for Vout = 1V unless noted. Current Range: 1mA. Settling Time: <100μs (typical). TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 24: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. Contact Check 25 (not available on Model 2604B) Speed Maximum Measurement Time To Memory For 60Hz (50Hz) Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(%rdg. + ohms) FAST 1 (1.2) ms 5% + 10 W MEDIUM 4 (5) ms 5% + 1 W SLOW 36 (42) ms 5% + 0.3 W ADDITIONAL METER SPECIFICATIONS Maximum LOAD IMPEDANCE: Normal Mode: 10nF (typical). High Capacitance Mode: 50μF (typical). COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 250VDC. COMMON MODE ISOLATION: >1GW, <4500pF. OVERRANGE: 101% of source range, 102% of measure range. MAXIMUM SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE: 1kW for rated accuracy. SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE: >10GW. NOTES 16. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 17. De-rate accuracy specifications for NPLC setting < 1 by increasing error term. Add appropriate % of range term using table below. NPLC Setting 100mV Range 1V–40V Ranges 100nA Range 1μA–100mA Ranges 1A–3A Ranges 0.1 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01 0.08% 0.07% 0.1% 0.05% 0.05% 0.001 0.8 % 0.6 % 1% 0.5 % 1.1 % 18. Applies when in single channel display mode. 19. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable for 23°C ±5°C only. 20. Applies when in single channel display mode. 21. Four-wire remote sense only with current meter mode selected. Voltage measure set to 100mV or 1V range only. 22. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 23. Compliance equal to 100mA. 24. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable for 23°C ±5°C only. 25. Includes measurement of SENSE HI to HI and SENSE LO to LO contact resistances. Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence 2601B, 2602B, 2604B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments GENERAL HIGH CAPACITANCE MODE26, 27, 28 Voltage Source Output Settling Time : Time required to reach 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Current limit = 1A. Voltage Source Range Settling Time with Cload = 4.7μF 100 mV 200 μs (typical) 1 V 200 μs (typical) 6 V 200 μs (typical) 40 V 7 ms (typical) Current Measure Settling Time : Time required to reach 0.1% of final value after voltage source is stabilized on a fixed range. Values below for Vout = 1V unless noted. Current Measure Range Settling Time 3 A – 1 A <120 μs (typical) (Rload > 2W) 100 mA – 10 mA <100 μs (typical) 1 mA < 3 ms (typical) 100 μ A < 3 ms (typical) 10 μ A < 230 ms (typical) 1 μ A < 230 ms (typical) Capacitor Leakage Performance Using HIGH-C scripts 29: Load = 5μF||10MW. Test: 5V step and measure. 200ms (typical) @ 50nA. Mode Change Dela y: 100μA Current Range and Above: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. 1μA and 10μA Current Ranges: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 230ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Voltmeter Input Impedance : 10GW in parallel with 3300pF. Noise , 10Hz–20MHz (6V Range): <30mV peak-peak (typical). Voltage Source Range Change Overshoot : <400mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 100kW load, 20MHz BW. NOTES 26. High Capacitance Mode specifications are for DC measurements only. 27. 100nA range is not available in High Capacitance Mode. 28. High Capacitance Mode utilizes locked ranges. Auto Range is disabled. 29. Part of KI Factory scripts. See reference manual for details. IEEE-488: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands and status model topology. USB Control (rear ): USB 2.0 device, TMC488 protocol. RS-232: Baud rates from 300bps to 115200bps. Ethernet : RJ-45 connector, LXI Class C, 10/100BT, no auto MDIX. EXPANSION INTERFACE: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. (Not available on Model 2604B.) Cable Type: Category 5e or higher LAN crossover cable. Length: 3 meters maximum between each TSP enabled instrument. LXI Compliance : LXI Class C 1.4. LXI Timing : Total Output Trigger Response Time: 245μs min., 280μs typ., (not specified) max. Receive LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. Generate LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE: (Not available on Model 2604B) +5VDC 5.1k 100 Solid State Fuse Read by firmware Written by firmware +5V Pins (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Digital I/O Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) GND Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Connector: 25-pin female D. Input/Output Pins: 14 open drain I/O bits. Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: 5.25V. Absolute Minimum Input Voltage: –0.25V. Maximum Logic Low Input Voltage: 0.7V, +850μA max. Minimum Logic High Input Voltage: 2.1V, +570μA. Maximum Source Current (flowing out of Digital I/O bit): +960μA. Maximum Sink Current @ Maximum Logic Low Voltage (0.7V): –5.0mA. Absolute Maximum Sink Current (flowing into Digital I/O pin): –11mA (not including Model 2604B). 5V Power Supply Pins: Limited to 250mA total for all three pins, solid state fuse protected. Output Enable: Active high input pulled down internally to ground with a 10kΩ resistor; when the output enable input function has been activated, each SourceMeter channel will not turn on unless the output enable pin is driven to >2.1V (nominal current = 2.1V/10kΩ = 210μA). USB File System (Front ): USB 2.0 Host: Mass storage class device. POWER SUPPLY: 100V to 250VAC, 50–60Hz (auto sensing), 240VA max. COOLING: Forced air. Side intake and rear exhaust. One side must be unobstructed when rack mounted. EMC: Conforms to European Union Directive 2004/108/EEC, EN 61326-1. SAFETY: Conforms to European Union Directive 73/23/EEC, EN 61010-1, and UL 61010-1. DIMENSIONS: 89mm high × 213mm wide × 460mm deep (3½ in × 83⁄8 in × 17½ in). Bench Configuration (with handle and feet): 104mm high × 238mm wide × 460mm deep (41⁄8 in × 93⁄8 in × 17½ in). WEIGHT: 2601B: 4.75kg (10.4 lbs). 2602B, 2604B: 5.50kg (12.0 lbs). ENVIRONMENT: For indoor use only. Altitude: Maximum 2000 meters above sea level. Operating: 0°–50°C, 70% R.H. up to 35°C. Derate 3% R.H./°C, 35°–50°C. Storage: –25°C to 65°C. Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSIENT RESPONSE TIME: <70μs for the output to recover to within 0.1% for a 10% to 90% step change in load. VOLTAGE SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to within reach 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Range Settling Time 200 mV <50 μs (typical) 2 V <50 μs (typical) 20 V <110 μs (typical) 200 V <700 μs (typical) CURRENT SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values below for Iout · Rload = 2V unless noted. Current Range Settling Time 1.5 A – 1 A <120 μs (typical) (Rload > 6W) 100 mA – 10 mA <80 μs (typical) 1 mA <100 μs (typical) 100 μ A <150 μs (typical) 10 μ A <500 μs (typical) 1 μ A <2 ms (typical) 100 nA <20 ms (typical) DC FLOATING VOLTAGE: Output can be floated up to ±250VDC from chassis ground. REMOTE SENSE OPERATING RANGE 11: Maximum voltage between HI and SENSE HI = 3V . Maximum voltage between LO and SENSE LO = 3V . VOLTAGE OUTPUT HEADROOM: 200V Range: Max. output voltage = 202.3V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). 20V Range: Max. output voltage = 23.3V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode. VOLTAGE SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <300mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 200kW load, 20MHz BW. CURRENT SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <5% of larger range + 300mV/Rload (typical – With source settling set to SETTLE_SMOOTH_100NA). See Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test conditions. NOTES 1. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 2. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 3. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 4. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 0.06% of limit range to the corresponding current limit accuracy specifications. Specifications apply with sink mode operation enabled. 5. Accuracy specifications do not include connector leakage. Derate accuracy by Vout/2E11 per °C when operating between 18°–28°C. Derate accuracy by Vout/2E11 + (0.15·Vout/2E11) per °C when operating <18°C and >28°C. 6. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 7. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 8. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 9. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 10. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 10% of compliance range and ±0.02% of limit setting to corresponding voltage source specification. For 200mV range add an additional 120mV of uncertainty. 11. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. PULSE SPECIFICATIONS Region Maximum Current Limit Maximum Pulse Width 12 Maximum Duty Cycle 13 1 100 mA @ 200 V DC, no limit 100% 1 1.5 A @ 20 V DC, no limit 100% 2 1 A @ 180 V 8.5 ms 1% 3 14 1 A @ 200 V 2.2 ms 1% 4 10 A @ 5 V 1 ms 2.2% MINIMUM PROGRAMMABLE PULSE WIDTH 15, 16: 100μs. NOTE: Minimum pulse width for settled source at a given I/V output and load can be longer than 100μs. Pulse width programming resolution : 1μs. Pulse width programming accurac y 16: ±5μs. pulse width jitter : 2μs (typical). SPECIFICATION CONDITIONS This document contains specifications and supplemental information for the Models 2611B, 2612B, and 2614B System SourceMeter® SMU instruments. Specifications are the standards against which the Models 2611B, 2612B, and 2614B are tested. Upon leaving the factory the 2611B, 2612B, and 2614B meet these specifications. Supplemental and typical values are non-warranted, apply at 23°C, and are provided solely as useful information. Accuracy specifications are applicable for both normal and high capacitance modes. The source and measurement accuracies are specified at the SourceMeter CHANNEL A (2611B, 2612B, and 2614B) or SourceMeter CHANNEL B (2612B, 2614B) terminals under the following conditions: 1. 23°C ± 5°C, <70% relative humidity. 2. After 2 hour warm-up. 3. Speed normal (1 NPLC). 4. A/D auto-zero enabled. 5. Remote sense operation or properly zeroed local sense operation. 6. Calibration period = 1 year. SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Source Specifications VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING ACCURACY1 Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) Typical Noise (Peak-Peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 200 mV 5 μV 0.02% + 375 μV 20 μV 2 V 50 μV 0.02% + 600 μV 50 μV 20 V 500 μV 0.02% + 5 mV 300 μV 200 V 5 mV 0.02% + 50 mV 2 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 2: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS 3: 30.3W per channel maximum. ±20.2V @ ±1.5A, ±202V @ ±100mA, four quadrant source or sink operation. VOLTAGE REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100μV). NOISE 10Hz–20MHz: <20mV peak-peak (typical), <3mV RMS (typical), 20V range. CURRENT LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 4: Bipolar current limit (compliance) set with single value. Minimum value is 10nA. Accuracy is the same as current source. OVERSHOOT: <±(0.1% + 10mV) (typical). Step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load, maximum current limit/compliance. GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE: <4mV (current <10mA). Current Source Specifications CURRENT PROGRAMMING ACCURACY 5 Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) Typical Noise (Peak-Peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 100 nA 2 pA 0.06% + 100 pA 5 pA 1 μA 20 pA 0.03% + 800 pA 25 pA 10 μA 200 pA 0.03% + 5 nA 60 pA 100 μA 2 nA 0.03% + 60 nA 3 nA 1 mA 20 nA 0.03% + 300 nA 6 nA 10 mA 200 nA 0.03% + 6 μA 200 nA 100 mA 2 μA 0.03% + 30 μA 600 nA 1 A 6 20 μA 0.05% + 1.8 mA 70 μA 1.5 A 6 50 μA 0.06% + 4 mA 150 μA 10 A 6, 7 200 μA 0.5% + 40 mA (typical) TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 8: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS9: 30.3W per channel maximum. ±1.515A @ ±20V , ±101mA @ ±200V , four quadrant source or sink operation. CURRENT REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100pA). VOLTAGE LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 10: Bipolar voltage limit (compliance) set with a single value. Minimum value is 20mV. Accuracy is the same as voltage source. OVERSHOOT: <±0.1% (typical). Step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load; see Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test conditions. 2611B, 2612B, 2614B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence METER SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 17, 18 Range Default Display Resolution 19 Input Resistance Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) 200 mV 100 nV >10 GW 0.015% + 225 μV 2 V 1 μV >10 GW 0.02% + 350 μV 20 V 10 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 5 mV 200 V 100 μV >10 GW 0.015% + 50 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 20: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. CURRENT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 18, 21 Range Default Display Resolution 22 Voltage Burden 23 Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) 100 nA 100 fA <1 mV 0.06% + 100 pA 1 μA 1 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 500 pA 10 μA 10 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 1.5 nA 100 μA 100 pA <1 mV 0.02% + 25 nA 1 mA 1 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 200 nA 10 mA 10 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 2.5 μA 100 mA 100 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 20 μA 1 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.03% + 1.5 mA 1.5 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.05% + 3.5 mA 10 A 24 10 μA <1 mV 0.4% + 25 mA (typical) Current Measure Settling Time (Time for measurement to settle after a Vstep) 25: Time required to reach 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values for Vout = 2V unless noted. Current Range: 1mA. Settling Time: <100μs (typical). TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 26: ±(0.15 × accuracy specfication)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. Contact Check 27 (not available on Model 2614B) Speed Maximum Measurement Time to Memory For 60Hz (50Hz) Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(%rdg. + ohms) FAST 1 (1.2) ms 5% + 10 W MEDIUM 4 (5) ms 5% + 1 W SLOW 36 (42) ms 5% + 0.3 W ADDITIONAL METER SPECIFICATIONS Maximum LOAD IMPEDANCE: Normal Mode: 10nF (typical). High Capacitance Mode: 50μF (typical). COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 250VDC. COMMON MODE ISOLATION: >1GW, <4500pF. OVERRANGE: 101% of source range, 102% of measure range. MAXIMUM SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE: 1kW for rated accuracy. SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE: >10GW. SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS (continued) PULSE SPECIFICATIONS (continued) Quadrant Diagram : +1.5A +10A –10A –1A +1A +0.1A –0.1A –1.5A –20V –5V 0V +5V +20V +200V 0A –200V –180V +180V DC Pulse Pulse Pulse 2 2 2 2 4 4 1 3 3 3 3 NOTES 12. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 13. Thermally limited in sink mode (quadrants II and IV) and ambient temperatures above 30°C. See power equations in the reference manual for more information. 14. Voltage source operation with 1.5 A current limit. 15. Typical performance for minimum settled pulse widths: Source Value Load Source Settling (% of range) Min. Pulse Width 5 V 0.5 W 1% 300 μs 20 V 200 W 0.2% 200 μs 180 V 180 W 0.2% 5 ms 200 V (1.5 A Limit) 200 W 0.2% 1.5 ms 100 mA 200 W 1% 200 μs 1 A 200 W 1% 500 μs 1 A 180 W 0.2% 5 ms 10 A 0.5 W 0.5% 300 μs Typical tests were performed using remote operation, 4W sense, and best, fixed measurement range. For more information on pulse scripts, see the Series 2600B Reference Manual. 16. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 2611B, 2612B, 2614B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) 2611B, 2612B, 2614B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments GENERAL IEEE-488: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands and status model topology. USB Control (rear ): USB 2.0 device, TMC488 protocol. RS-232: Baud rates from 300bps to 115200bps. Ethernet : RJ-45 connector, LXI Class C, 10/100BT, no auto MDIX. EXPANSION INTERFACE: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. (Not available on Model 2614B.) Cable Type: Category 5e or higher LAN crossover cable. Length: 3 meters maximum between each TSP enabled instrument. LXI Compliance : LXI Class C 1.4. LXI Timing : Total Output Trigger Response Time: 245μs min., 280μs typ., (not specified) max. Receive LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. Generate LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE: (Not available on Model 2614B) +5VDC 5.1k 100 Solid State Fuse Read by firmware Written by firmware +5V Pins (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Digital I/O Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) GND Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Connector: 25-pin female D. Input/Output Pins: 14 open drain I/O bits. Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: 5.25V. Absolute Minimum Input Voltage: –0.25V. Maximum Logic Low Input Voltage: 0.7V, +850μA max. Minimum Logic High Input Voltage: 2.1V, +570μA. Maximum Source Current (flowing out of Digital I/O bit): +960μA. Maximum Sink Current @ Maximum Logic Low Voltage (0.7V): –5.0mA. Absolute Maximum Sink Current (flowing into Digital I/O pin): –11mA. 5V Power Supply Pins: Limited to 250mA total for all three pins, solid state fuse protected. Safety Interlock Pin: Active high input. >3.4V @ 24mA (absolute maximum of 6V) must be externally applied to this pin to ensure 200V operation. This signal is pulled down to chassis ground with a 10kW resistor. 200V operation will be blocked when the INTERLOCK signal is <0.4V (absolute minimum –0.4V). See figure below: * 10k Coil Resistance 145 ±10% Read by firmware INTERLOCK Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Chassis Ground To output stage +220V Supply –220V Supply USB File System (Front ): USB 2.0 Host: Mass storage class device. POWER SUPPLY: 100V to 250VAC, 50–60Hz (auto sensing), 240VA max. COOLING: Forced air. Side intake and rear exhaust. One side must be unobstructed when rack mounted. EMC: Conforms to European Union Directive 2004/108/EEC, EN 61326-1. SAFETY: Conforms to European Union Directive 73/23/EEC, EN 61010-1, and UL 61010-1. DIMENSIONS: 89mm high × 213mm wide × 460mm deep (3½ in × 83⁄8 in × 17½ in). Bench Configuration (with handle and feet): 104mm high × 238mm wide × 460mm deep (41⁄8 in × 93⁄8 in × 17½ in). WEIGHT: 2611B: 4.75kg (10.4 lbs). 2612B, 2614B: 5.50kg (12.0 lbs). ENVIRONMENT: For indoor use only. Altitude: Maximum 2000 meters above sea level. Operating: 0°–50°C, 70% R.H. up to 35°C. Derate 3% R.H./°C, 35°–50°C. Storage: –25°C to 65°C. METER SPECIFICATIONS (continued) NOTES 17. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 18. De-rate accuracy specifications for NPLC setting <1 by increasing error term. Add appropriate % of range term using table below. NPLC Setting 200mV Range 2V–200V Ranges 100nA Range 1μA–100mA Ranges 1A–1.5A Ranges 0.1 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01 0.08% 0.07% 0.1% 0.05% 0.05% 0.001 0.8 % 0.6 % 1% 0.5 % 1.1 % 19. Applies when in single channel display mode. 20. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 21. Accuracy specifications do not include connector leakage. De-rate accuracy by Vout/2E11 per °C when operating between 18°–28°C. Derate accuracy by Vout/2E11 + (0.15 * Vout/2E11) per °C when operating <18° and >28°C. 22. Applies when in single channel display mode. 23. Four-wire remote sense only and with current meter mode selected. Voltage measure set to 200mV or 2V range only. 24. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 25. Compliance equal to 100mA. 26. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 27. Includes measurement of SENSE HI to HI and SENSE LO to LO contact resistances. HIGH CAPACITANCE MODE 28, 29, 30 Voltage Source Output Settling Time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Current limit = 1A. Voltage Source Range Settling Time with Cload = 4.7μF 200 mV 600 μs (typical) 2 V 600 μs (typical) 20 V 1.5 ms (typical) 200 V 20 ms (typical) Current Measure Settling Time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after voltage source is stabilized on a fixed range. Values below for Vout = 2V unless noted. Current Measure Range Settling Time 1.5 A – 1 A <120 μs (typical) (Rload >6W) 100 mA – 10 mA <100 μs (typical) 1 mA < 3 ms (typical) 100 μ A < 3 ms (typical) 10 μ A < 230 ms (typical) 1 μ A < 230 ms (typical) Capacitor Leakage Performance Using HIGH-C scripts 31: Load = 5μF||10MW. Test: 5V step and measure. 200ms (typical) @ 50nA. Mode Change Dela y: 100μA Current Range and Above: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. 1μA and 10μA Current Ranges: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 230ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Voltmeter Input Impedance : 30GW in parallel with 3300pF. Noise , 10Hz–20MHz (20V Range): <30mV peak-peak (typical). Voltage Source Range Change Overshoot (for 20V range and below): <400mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 200kW load, 20MHz BW. NOTES 28. High Capacitance Mode specifications are for DC measurements only. 29. 100nA range is not available in High Capacitance Mode. 30. High Capacitance Mode utilizes locked ranges. Auto Range is disabled. 31. Part of KI Factory scripts, See reference manual for details. Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence ADDITIONAL SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS TRANSIENT RESPONSE TIME: <70μs for the output to recover to within 0.1% for a 10% to 90% step change in load. VOLTAGE SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Range Settling Time 200 mV <50 μs (typical) 2 V <50 μs (typical) 20 V <110 μs (typical) 200 V <700 μs (typical) CURRENT SOURCE OUTPUT SETTLING TIME: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values below for Iout · Rload = 2V unless noted. Current Range Settling Time 1.5 A – 1 A <120 μs (typical) (Rload > 6W) 100 mA – 10 mA <80 μs (typical) 1 mA <100 μs (typical) 100 μ A <150 μs (typical) 10 μ A <500 μs (typical) 1 μ A <2 ms (typical) 100 nA <20 ms (typical) 10 nA <40 ms (typical) 1 nA <150 ms (typical) DC FLOATING VOLTAGE: Output can be floated up to ±250VDC. REMOTE SENSE OPERATING RANGE 10: Maximum voltage between HI and SENSE HI = 3V . Maximum voltage between LO and SENSE LO = 3V . VOLTAGE OUTPUT HEADROOM: 200V Range: Max. output voltage = 202.3V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). 20V Range: Max. output voltage = 23.3V – total voltage drop across source leads (maximum 1W per source lead). OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION: Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode. VOLTAGE SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <300mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 200kW load, 20MHz BW. CURRENT SOURCE RANGE CHANGE OVERSHOOT: <5% of larger range + 300mV/Rload (typical – With source settling set to SETTLE_SMOOTH_100NA). See Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test condtions. PULSE SPECIFICATIONS Region Maximum Current Limit Maximum Pulse Width 11 Maximum Duty Cycle 12 1 100 mA @ 200 V DC, no limit 100% 1 1.5 A @ 20 V DC, no limit 100% 2 1 A @ 180 V 8.5 ms 1% 3 13 1 A @ 200 V 2.2 ms 1% 4 10 A @ 5 V 1 ms 2.2% MINIMUM PROGRAMMABLE PULSE WIDTH 14, 15: 100μs. NOTE: Minimum pulse width for settled source at a given I/V output and load can be longer than 100μs. Pulse width programming resolution : 1μs. Pulse width programming accurac y 15: ±5μs. pulse width jitter : 50μs (typical). Quadrant Diagram : +1.5A +10A –10A –1A +1A +0.1A –0.1A –1.5A –20V –5V 0V +5V +20V +200V 0A –200V –180V +180V DC Pulse Pulse Pulse 2 2 2 2 4 4 1 3 3 3 3 SPECIFICATION CONDITIONS This document contains specifications and supplemental information for the Models 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B System SourceMeter® SMU instruments. Specifications are the standards against which the Models 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B are tested. Upon leaving the factory the 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B meet these specifications. Supplemental and typical values are non-warranted, apply at 23°C, and are provided solely as useful information. Accuracy specifications are applicable for both normal and high capacitance modes. The source and measurement accuracies are specified at the SourceMeter CHANNEL A (2634B, 2635B, and 2636B) or SourceMeter CHANNEL B (2634B, 2636B) terminals under the following conditions: 1. 23°C ± 5°C, <70% relative humidity. 2. After 2 hour warm-up 3. Speed normal (1 NPLC) 4. A/D auto-zero enabled 5. Remote sense operation or properly zeroed local sense operation 6. Calibration period = 1 year SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS Voltage Source Specifications VOLTAGE PROGRAMMING ACCURACY1 Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) Typical Noise (peak-peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 200 mV 5 μV 0.02% + 375 μV 20 μV 2 V 50 μV 0.02% + 600 μV 50 μV 20 V 500 μV 0.02% + 5 mV 300 μV 200 V 5 mV 0.02% + 50 mV 2 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 2: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS 3: 30.3W per channel maximum. ±20.2V @ ±1.5A, ±202V @ ±100mA, four quadrant source or sink operation. VOLTAGE REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100μV). NOISE 10Hz–20MHz: <20mV pk-pk (typical), <3mV rms (typical), 20V range. CURRENT LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 4: Bipolar current limit (compliance) set with single value. Minimum value is 100pA. Accuracy is the same as current source. OVERSHOOT: <±(0.1% + 10mV) typical (step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load, maximum current limit/compliance). GUARD OFFSET VOLTAGE: <4mV (current <10mA). Current Source Specifications CURRENT PROGRAMMING ACCURACY Range Programming Resolution Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) Typical Noise (peak-peak) 0.1Hz–10Hz 1 nA 20 fA 0.15% + 2 pA 800 fA 10 nA 200 fA 0.15% + 5 pA 2 pA 100 nA 2 pA 0.06% + 50 pA 5 pA 1 μA 20 pA 0.03% + 700 pA 25 pA 10 μA 200 pA 0.03% + 5 nA 60 pA 100 μA 2 nA 0.03% + 60 nA 3 nA 1 mA 20 nA 0.03% + 300 nA 6 nA 10 mA 200 nA 0.03% + 6 μA 200 nA 100 mA 2 μA 0.03% + 30 μA 600 nA 1 A 5 20 μA 0.05% + 1.8 mA 70 μA 1.5 A 5 50 μA 0.06% + 4 mA 150 μA 10 A 5, 6 200 μA 0.5 % + 40 mA (typical) TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 7: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. MAXiMUM OUTPUT POWER AND SOURCE/SINK LIMITS 8: 30.3W per channel maximum. ±1.515A @ ±20V, ±101mA @ ±200V, four quadrant source or sink operation. CURRENT REGULATION: Line: 0.01% of range. Load: ±(0.01% of range + 100pA). VOLTAGE LIMIT/COMPLIANCE 9: Bipolar voltage limit (compliance) set with a single value. Minimum value is 20mV. Accuracy is the same as voltage source. OVERSHOOT: <±0.1% typical (step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load, maximum current limit/compliance; see Current Source Output Settling Time for additional test conditions). 2634B, 2635B, 2636B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) METER SPECIFICATIONS VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 16, 17 Range Default Display Resolution 18 Input Resistance Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + volts) 200 mV 100 nV >1014 W 0.015% + 225 μV 2 V 1 μV >1014 W 0.02% + 350 μV 20 V 10 μV >1014 W 0.015% + 5 mV 200 V 100 μV >1014 W 0.015% + 50 mV TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 19: ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. CURRENT MEASUREMENT ACCURACY 17 Range Default Display Resolution 20 Voltage Burden 21 Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(% rdg. + amps) *100 pA 22, 23 0.1 fA <1 mV 0.15% + 120 fA 1 nA 22, 24 1 fA <1 mV 0.15% + 240 fA 10 nA 10 fA <1 mV 0.15% + 3 pA 100 nA 100 fA <1 mV 0.06% + 40 pA 1 μA 1 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 400 pA 10 μA 10 pA <1 mV 0.025% + 1.5 nA 100 μA 100 pA <1 mV 0.02% + 25 nA 1 mA 1 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 200 nA 10 mA 10 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 2.5 μA 100 mA 100 nA <1 mV 0.02% + 20 μA 1 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.03% + 1.5 mA 1.5 A 1 μA <1 mV 0.05% + 3.5 mA 10 A 25 10 μA <1 mV 0.4 % + 25 mA * 100 pA range not available on Model 2634B. Current Measure Settling Time (Time for measurement to settle after a Vstep) 26: Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values for Vout = 2V unless noted. Current Range: 1mA. Settling Time: <100μs (typical). TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT (0°–18°C and 28°–50°C) 27: ±(0.15 × accuracy specfication)/°C. Applicable for normal mode only. Not applicable for high capacitance mode. Contact Check 28 (Not available on Model 2634B) Speed Maximum Measurement Time to Memory For 60Hz (50Hz) Accuracy (1 Year) 23°C ±5°C ±(%rdg. + ohms) FAST 1 (1.2) ms 5% + 10 W MEDIUM 4 (5) ms 5% + 1 W SLOW 36 (42) ms 5% + 0.3 W ADDITIONAL METER SPECIFICATIONS Maximum LOAD IMPEDANCE: Normal Mode: 10nF (typical). High Capacitance Mode: 50μF (typical). COMMON MODE VOLTAGE: 250VDC. COMMON MODE ISOLATION: >1GW, <4500pF. OVERRANGE: 101% of source range, 102% of measure range. MAXIMUM SENSE LEAD RESISTANCE: 1kW for rated accuracy. SENSE INPUT IMPEDANCE: >1014W. SOURCE SPECIFICATIONS (continued) NOTES 1. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 2. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 3. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 4. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 0.06% of limit range to the corresponding current limit accuracy specifications. Specifications apply with sink mode operation enabled. 5. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 6. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 7. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 8. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C and/or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Series 2600B Reference Manual for additional power derating information. 9. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 10% of compliance range and ±0.02% of limit setting to corresponding voltage source specification. For 200mV range add an additional 120mV of uncertainty. 10. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 11. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 12. Thermally limited in sink mode (quadrants II and IV) and ambient temperatures above 30°C. See power equations in the Reference Manual for more information. 13. Voltage source operation with 1.5 A current limit. 14. Typical performance for minimum settled pulse widths: Source Value Load Source Settling (% of range) Min. Pulse Width 5 V 0.5 W 1% 300 μs 20 V 200 W 0.2% 200 μs 180 V 180 W 0.2% 5 ms 200 V (1.5 A Limit) 200 W 0.2% 1.5 ms 100 mA 200 W 1% 200 μs 1 A 200 W 1% 500 μs 1 A 180 W 0.2% 5 ms 10 A 0.5 W 0.5% 300 μs Typical tests were performed using remote operation, 4W sense, and best, fixed measurement range. For more information on pulse scripts, see the Series 2600B Reference Manual. 15. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 2634B, 2635B, 2636B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence 2634B, 2635B, 2636B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments METER SPECIFICATIONS (continued) NOTES 16. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 17. De-rate accuracy specifications for NPLC setting <1 by increasing error term. Add appropriate % of range term using table below. NPLC Setting 200mV Range 2V–200V Ranges 100nA Range 1μA–100mA Ranges 1A–1.5A Ranges 0.1 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01 0.08% 0.07% 0.1% 0.05% 0.05% 0.001 0.8 % 0.6 % 1% 0.5 % 1.1 % 18. Applies when in single channel display mode. 19. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 20. Applies when in single channel display mode. 21. Four-wire remote sense only and with current meter mode selected. Voltage measure set to 200mV or 2V range only. 22. 10-NPLC, 11-Point Median Filter, <200V range, measurements made within 1 hour after zeroing. 23°C ± 1°C 23. Under default specification conditions: ±(0.15% + 750fA). 24. Under default specification conditions: ±(0.15% + 1pA). 25. 10A range accessible only in pulse mode. 26. Delay factor set to 1. Compliance equal to 100mA. 27. High Capacitance Mode accuracy is applicable at 23°C ±5°C only. 28. Includes measurement of SENSE HI to HI and SENSE LO to LO contact resistances. HIGH CAPACITANCE MODE29, 30, 31 Voltage Source Output Settling Time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Current limit = 1A. Voltage Source Range Settling Time with Cload = 4.7μF 200 mV 600 μs (typical) 2 V 600 μs (typical) 20 V 1.5 ms (typical) 200 V 20 ms (typical) Current Measure Settling Time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after voltage source is stabilized on a fixed range. Values below for Vout = 2V unless noted. Current Measure Range Settling Time 1.5 A – 1 A <120 μs (typical) (Rload >6W) 100 mA – 10 mA <100 μs (typical) 1 mA < 3 ms (typical) 100 μ A < 3 ms (typical) 10 μ A < 230 ms (typical) 1 μ A < 230 ms (typical) Capacitor Leakage Performance Using HIGH-C scripts 32: Load = 5μF||10MW. Test: 5V step and measure. 200ms (typical) @ 50nA. Mode Change Dela y: 100μA Current Range and Above: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. 1μA and 10μA Current Ranges: Delay into High Capacitance Mode: 230ms. Delay out of High Capacitance Mode: 10ms. Voltmeter Input Impedance : 30GW in parallel with 3300pF. Noise , 10Hz–20MHz (20V Range): <30mV peak-peak (typical). Voltage Source Range Change Overshoot (for 20V range and below): <400mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 200kW load, 20MHz BW. NOTES 29. High Capacitance Mode specifications are for DC measurements only. 30. 100nA range and below are not available in high capacitance mode. 31. High Capacitance Mode utilizes locked ranges. Auto Range is disabled. 32. Part of KI Factory scripts. See reference manual for details. GENERAL IEEE-488: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands and status model topology. USB Control (rear ): USB 2.0 device, TMC488 protocol. RS-232: Baud rates from 300bps to 115200bps. Programmable number of data bits, parity type, and flow control (RTS/CTS hardware or none). Ethernet : RJ-45 connector, LXI Class C, 10/100BT, no auto MDIX. EXPANSION INTERFACE: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. (Not available on Model 2614B.) Cable Type: Category 5e or higher LAN crossover cable. Length: 3 meters maximum between each TSP enabled instrument. LXI Compliance : LXI Class C 1.4. LXI Timing : Total Output Trigger Response Time: 245μs min., 280μs typ., (not specified) max. Receive LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. Generate LAN[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. DIGITAL I/O INTERFACE: (Not available on Model 2614B) +5VDC 5.1k 100 Solid State Fuse Read by firmware Written by firmware +5V Pins (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Digital I/O Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) GND Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Connector: 25-pin female D. Input/Output Pins: 14 open drain I/O bits. Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: 5.25V. Absolute Minimum Input Voltage: –0.25V. Maximum Logic Low Input Voltage: 0.7V, +850μA max. Minimum Logic High Input Voltage: 2.1V, +570μA. Maximum Source Current (flowing out of Digital I/O bit): +960μA. Maximum Sink Current @ Maximum Logic Low Voltage (0.7V): –5.0mA. Absolute Maximum Sink Current (flowing into Digital I/O pin): –11mA. 5V Power Supply Pins: Limited to 250mA total for all three pins, solid state fuse protected. Safety Interlock Pin: Active high input. >3.4V @ 24mA (absolute maximum of 6V) must be externally applied to this pin to ensure 200V operation. This signal is pulled down to chassis ground with a 10kW resistor. 200V operation will be blocked when the INTERLOCK signal is <0.4V (absolute minimum –0.4V). See figure below: * 10k Coil Resistance 145 ±10% Read by firmware INTERLOCK Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Chassis Ground To output stage +220V Supply –220V Supply USB File System (Front ): USB 2.0 Host: Mass storage class device. POWER SUPPLY: 100V to 250VAC, 50–60Hz (auto sensing), 240VA max. COOLING: Forced air. Side intake and rear exhaust. One side must be unobstructed when rack mounted. EMC: Conforms to European Union Directive 2004/108/EEC, EN 61326-1. SAFETY: Conforms to European Union Directive 73/23/EEC, EN 61010-1, and UL 61010-1. DIMENSIONS: 89mm high × 213mm wide × 460mm deep (3½ in × 83⁄8 in × 17½ in). Bench Configuration (with handle and feet): 104mm high × 238mm wide × 460mm deep (41⁄8 in × 93⁄8 in × 17½ in). WEIGHT: 2635B: 4.75kg (10.4 lbs). 2634B, 2636B: 5.50kg (12.0 lbs). ENVIRONMENT: For indoor use only. Altitude: Maximum 2000 meters above sea level. Operating: 0°–50°C, 70% R.H. up to 35°C. Derate 3% R.H./°C, 35°–50°C. Storage: –25°C to 65°C. See pages 23 and 24 for measurement speeds and other specifications . Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) Measurement Speed Specifications 1, 2, 3 Maximum SWEEP OPERATION RATES (operations per second) FOR 60Hz (50Hz): A/D Converter Speed Trigger Origin Measure To Memory Using User Scripts Measure To Gpib Using User Scripts Source Measure To Memory Using User Scripts Source Measure To Gpib Using User Scripts Source Measure To Memory Using Sweep API Source Measure To Gpib Using Sweep API 0.001 NPLC Internal 20000 (20000) 10500 (10500) 7000 (7000) 6200 (6200) 12000 (12000) 5900 (5900) 0.001 NPLC Digital I/O 8100 (8100) 7100 (7100) 5500 (5500) 5100 (5100) 11200 (11200) 5700 (5700) 0.01 NPLC Internal 5000 (4000) 4000 (3500) 3400 (3000) 3200 (2900) 4200 (3700) 3100 (2800) 0.01 NPLC Digital I/O 3650 (3200) 3400 (3000) 3000 (2700) 2900 (2600) 4150 (3650) 3050 (2775) 0.1 NPLC Internal 580 (490) 560 (475) 550 (465) 550 (460) 575 (480) 545 (460) 0.1 NPLC Digital I/O 560 (470) 450 (460) 545 (460) 540 (450) 570 (480) 545 (460) 1.0 NPLC Internal 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 1.0 NPLC Digital I/O 58 (48) 58 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) Series 2600B System SourceMeter® SMU Instruments Applicable to Models 2601B, 2602B, 2604B, 2611B, 2612B, 2614B, 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B. Maximum SINGLE MEASUREMENT RATES (operations per second) FOR 60Hz (50Hz): A/D Converter Speed Trigger Origin Measure To Gpib Source Measure To Gpib Source Measure Pass/Fail To Gpib 0.001 NPLC Internal 1900 (1800) 1400 (1400) 1400 (1400) 0.01 NPLC Internal 1450 (1400) 1200 (1100) 1100 (1100) 0.1 NPLC Internal 450 (390) 425 (370) 425 (375) 1.0 NPLC Internal 58 (48) 57 (48) 57 (48) Maximum Measurement RANGE CHANGE RATE: <150μs for ranges >10μA, typical. When changing to or from a range ≥1A, maximum rate is <450μs, typical. Maximum SOURCE Range CHANGE RATE: <2.5ms for ranges >10μA, typical. When changing to or from a range ≥1A, maximum rate is <5.2ms, typical. Maximum SOURCE FUNCTION CHANGE RATE: <1ms, typical. COMMAND PROCESSING TIME: Maximum time required for the output to begin to change following the receipt of the smux. source.levelv or smux.source.leveli command. <1ms typical. NOTES 1. Tests performed with a 2602B, 2612B, or 2636B on Channel A using the following equipment: PC Hardware (Pentium® 4 2.4GHz, 512MB RAM, National Instruments PCI-GPIB). Driver (NI-486.2 Version 2.2 PCI-GPIB). Software (Microsoft® Windows® 2000, Microsoft Visual Studio 2005, VISA version 4.1). 2. Exclude current measurement ranges less than 1mA. 3. 2635B/2636B with default measurement delays and filters disabled. Series 2600B specifications Series 2600B specifications TRIGGERING AND SYNCHRONIZATION SPECIFICATIONS 1 Triggering : Trigger in to trigger out: 0.5μs, typical. Trigger in to source change:2 10 μs, typical. Trigger Timer accuracy: ±2μs, typical. Source change2 after LXI Trigger: 280μs, typical. Synchroni zation : Single-node synchronized source change:4 <0.5μs, typical. Multi-node synchronized source change:4 <0.5μs, typical. NOTES 1. TSP-Link not available on Models 2604B, 2614B, and 2634B. 2. Fixed source range, with no polarity change. SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence ACCESSORIES AVAILABLE Software ACS-BASIC Component Characterization Software Rack Mount Kits 4299-1 Single Rack Mount Kit with front and rear support 4299-2 Dual Rack Mount Kit with front and rear support 4299-5 1U Vent Panel Cables and Connectors 2600-BAN Banana Test Leads/Adapter Cable. For a single 2601B/2602B/2604B/2611B/261 2B/2614B SMU instrument channel 2600-KIT Extra screw terminal connector, strain relief, and cover for a single SourceMeter channel (one supplied with 2601B/2611B, two with 2602B/2604B/2612B/2614B) 2600-FIX-TRIAX Phoenix-to-Triax Adapter for 2 wire sensing 2600-TRIAX Phoenix-to-Triax Adapter for 4 wire sensing 7078-TRX-* 3-Slot, Low Noise Triax Cable, 0.3m–6.1m. For use with 2600-TRIAX Adapter 7078-TRX-GND 3-Slot male triax to BNC adapter (guard removed) 7709-308A Digital I/O Connector (model specific) 8606 High Performance Modular Probe Kit. For use with 2600B-BAN GPIB Interfaces and Cables 7007-1 Double Shielded GPIB Cable, 1m (3.3 ft.) 7007-2 Double Shielded GPIB Cable, 2m (6.6 ft.) KPCI-488LPA IEEE-488 Interface/Controller for the PCI Bus Digital I/O, Trigger Link , and TSP-Link 2600-TLINK Digital I/O to TLINK Adapter Cable, 1m CA-126-1A Digital I/O and Trigger Cable, 1.5m CA-180-3A CAT5 Crossover Cable for TSP-Link and direct Ethernet connection (two supplied) TEST FIXTURES 8101-PIV DC, Pulse I-V and C-V Component Test Fixture 8101-4TRX 4 Pin Transistor Fixture LR8028 Component Test Fixture – Optimized for device testing at up to 200V/1A Switching Series 3700A DMM/Switch Systems 707B Semiconductor Switching Matrix Mainframe Calibration and Verification 2600-STD-RES Calibration Standard 1GW Resistor for Models 2634B, 2635B, and 2636B SERVICES AVAILABLE FOR ALL SERIES 2600B MODELS Extended Warranties 26xxB-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 2 years 26xxB-3Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 3 years 26xxB-5Y-EW 1 Year Factory Warranty extended to 5 years CALIBRATION CONTRACTS C/26xxB-3Y-STD 3 Calibrations within 3 years C/26xxB-5Y-STD 5 Calibrations within 5 years C/26xxB-3Y-DATA 3 Calibrations within 3 years and includes calibration data before and after adjustment C/26xxB-5Y-DATA 5 Calibrations within 5 years and includes calibration data before and after adjustment C/26xxB-3Y-17025 3 IS0-17025 accredited calibrations within 3 years C/26xxB-5Y-17025 5 IS0-17025 accredited calibrations within 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument • Source or sink: ––2,000W of pulsed power (±40V, ±50A) ––200W of DC power (±10V@±20A, ±20V@±10A, ±40V@±5A) • Easily connect two units (in series or parallel) to create solutions up to ±100A or ±80V • 1pA resolution enables precise measurement of very low leakage currents • 1μs per point (1MHz), 18-bit sampling, accurately characterizes transient behavior • 1% to 100% pulse duty cycle for pulse width modulated (PWM) drive schemes and devicespecific drive stimulus • Combines a precision power supply, current source, DMM, arbitrary waveform generator, V or I pulse generator with measurement, electronic load, and trigger controller—all in one instrument • Includes TSP® Express I-V characterization software, LabVIEW® driver, and Keithley’s Test Script Builder software development environment APPLICATIONS • Power semiconductor, HBL ED, and optical device characterization and testing • Solar cell characterization and testing • Characterization of GaN, SiC, and other compound materials and devices • Semiconductor junction temperature characterization • High speed, high precision digitization • Electromigration studies • High current, high power device testing High power System SourceMeter SMU instrument High power System SourceMeter SMU instrument SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Two A/D converters are used with each measurement mode (one for current and the other for voltage), which run simultaneously for accurate source readback that does not sacrifice test throughput. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 Voltage (V) Current (A) Time (μs) Volts Current 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 The dual digitizing A/D converters sample at up to 1μs/point, enabling full simultaneous characterization of both current and voltage waveforms. High Speed Pulsing The Model 2651A minimizes the unwanted effects of self heating during tests by accurately sourcing and measuring pulses as short as 100μs. Additional control flexibility enables you to program the pulse width from 100μs to DC and the duty cycle from 1% to 100%. A single unit can pulse up to 50A; combine two units to pulse up to 100A. Expansion Capabilities Through TSP-Link Technology technology, multiple Model 2651As and selected Series 2600B SMU instruments can be combined to form a larger integrated system with up to 64 channels. Precision timing and tight channel synchronization are guaranteed with built-in 500ns trigger controllers. True SMU instrument-per-pin testing is assured with the fully isolated, independent channels of the SourceMeter SMU instruments. 26xxB 2651A 2651A Up to 100A TSP-Link LXI or GPIB to PC Controller Keithley’s TSP and TSP-Link Technologies enable true SMU-per-pin testing without the power and/or channel limitations of a mainframe-based system. Also, when two Model 2651As are connected in parallel with TSP-Link Technology, the current range is expanded from 50A to 100A. When two units are connected in series, the voltage range is expanded from 40V to 80V. Built-in intelligence simplifies testing by enabling the units to be addressed as a single instrument, thus creating an industry-best dynamic range (100A to 1pA). This capability enables you to test a much wider range of power semiconductors and other devices. 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 Vgs = 2.01V Vgs = 2.25V Vgs = 2.50V Vgs = 2.75V Vgs = 3.00V Vgs = 3.25V Vgs = 3.51V Vds (V) Id (A) Precision measurements to 50A (100A with two units) enable a more complete and accurate characterization. Standard Capabilities of Series 2600B SMU Instruments Each Model 2651A includes all the features and capabilities provided in most Series 2600B SMU instruments, such as: • Ability to be used as either a bench-top I-V characterization tool or as a building block component of multiple-channel I-V test systems • TSP Express software to quickly and easily perform common I-V tests without programming or installing software • ACS Basic Edition software for semiconductor component characterization (optional). ACS Basic now features a Trace mode for generating a suite of characteristic curves. • Keithley’s Test Script Processor (TSP®) Technology, which enables creation of custom user test scripts to further automate testing, and also supports the creation of programming sequences that allow the instrument to operate asynchronously without direct PC control. • Parallel test execution and precision timing when multiple SMU instruments are connected together in a system • LXI compliance • 14 digital I/O lines for direct interaction with probe stations, component handlers, or other automation tools • USB port for extra data and test program storage via USB memory device Ordering Information 2651A High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Accessories Supplied 2651A-KIT-1A: Low Impedance Cable Assembly (1m) CS-1592-2: High Current Phoenix Connector (male) CS-1626-2: High Current Phoenix Connector (female) CA-557-1: Sense Line Cable Assembly (1m) 7709-308A: Digital I/O Connector CA-180-3A: TSP-Link/Ethernet Cable Documentation CD Software Tools and Drivers CD 0.020 0.018 0.016 0.014 0.012 0.010 0.008 0.006 0.004 0.002 0.000 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.5 Vgs (V) Rds (ohms) Id = 10A Id = 20A Id = 30A Id = 40A Id = 50A 1μV measurement resolution and current sourcing up to 50A (100A with two units) enable low-level Rds measurements to support next-generation devices. Acce ssorie s Av ailable 2600-KIT Screw Terminal Connector Kit ACS-BASIC Component Charaterization Software 4299-6 Rack Mount Kit 8011 Test Socket Kit High power System SourceMeter SMU instrument High power System SourceMeter SMU instrument SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Specification Conditions This document contains specifications and supplemental information for the Model 2651A High Power System SourceMeter SMU instrument. Specifications are the standards against which the Model 2651A is tested. Upon leaving the factory, the Model 2651A meets these specifications. Supplemental and typical values are non-warranted, apply at 23°C, and are provided solely as useful information. Accuracy specifications are applicable for both normal and high-capacitance modes. Source and measurement accuracies are specified at the Model 2651A terminals under these conditions: • 23° ±5°C, <70 percent relative humidity • After two-hour warm-up • Speed normal (1 NPLC) • A/D autozero enabled • Remote sense operation or properly zeroed local operation • Calibration period: One year VOL TAGE ACCURA CY SPECIFICATIONS 1, 2 SOUR CE MEASUR E Range Programming Resolution Accuracy ±(% reading + volts) Noise (Vpp) (typical) 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz Default Display Resolution Integrating ADC Accuracy 3 ±(% reading + volts) High-Speed ADC Accuracy 4 ±(% reading + volts) 100.000 mV 5 μV 0.02% + 500 μ V 100 μV 1 μV 0.02% + 300 μ V 0.05% + 600 μ V 1.00000 V 50 μV 0.02% + 500 μ V 500 μV 10 μV 0.02% + 300 μ V 0.05% + 600 μ V 10.0000 V 500 μV 0.02% + 5 mV 1 mV 100 μV 0.02% + 3 mV 0.05% + 8 mV 20.0000 V 500 μV 0.02% + 5 mV 1 mV 100 μV 0.02% + 5 mV 0.05% + 8 mV 40.0000 V 500 μV 0.02% + 12 mV 2 mV 100 μV 0.02% + 12 mV 0.05% + 15 mV CURR ENT ACCURA CY SPECIFICATIONS 5 SOUR CE MEASUR E Range Programming Resolution Accuracy ±(% reading + amps) Noise (Ipp) (typical) 0.1Hz to 10Hz Default Display Resolution Integrating ADC Accuracy 3 ±(% reading + amps) High-Speed ADC Accuracy 4 ±(% reading + amps) 100.000 nA 2 pA 0.1 % + 500 pA 50 pA 1 pA 0.08% + 500 pA 0.08% + 800 pA 1.00000 μ A 20 pA 0.1 % + 2 nA 250 pA 10 pA 0.08% + 2 nA 0.08% + 4 nA 10.0000 μ A 200 pA 0.1 % + 10 nA 500 pA 100 pA 0.08% + 8 nA 0.08% + 10 nA 100.000 μ A 2 nA 0.03% + 60 nA 5 nA 1 nA 0.02% + 25 nA 0.05% + 60 nA 1.00000 mA 20 nA 0.03% + 300 nA 10 nA 10 nA 0.02% + 200 nA 0.05% + 500 nA 10.0000 mA 200 nA 0.03% + 8 μ A 500 nA 100 nA 0.02% + 2.5 μA 0.05% + 10 μA 100.000 mA 2 μA 0.03% + 30 μ A 1 μA 1 μA 0.02% + 20 μA 0.05% + 50 μA 1.00000 A 200 μA 0.08% + 3.5 mA 300 μA 10 μA 0.05% + 3 mA 0.05% + 5 mA 5.00000 A 200 μA 0.08% + 3.5 mA 300 μA 10 μA 0.05% + 3 mA 0.05% + 5 mA 10.0000 A 500 μA 0.15% + 6 mA 500 μA 100 μA 0.12% + 6 mA 0.12% + 12 mA 20.0000 A 500 μA 0.15% + 8 mA 500 μA 100 μA 0.08% + 8 mA 0.08% + 15 mA 50.0000 A 6 2 mA 0.15% + 80 mA N/A 100 μA 0.05% + 50 mA 7 0.05% + 90 mA 8 NOTES 1. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 2. For temperatures 0° to 18°C and 28° to 50°C, accuracy is degraded by ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. High-capacitance mode accuracy is applicable at 23° ±5°C only. 3. Derate accuracy specification for NPLC setting <1 by increasing error term. Add appropriate typical percent of range term for resistive loads using the table below. NPLC Setting 100mV Range 1V to 40V Ranges 100nA Range 1μA to 100mA Ranges 1A to 20A Ranges 0.1 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01% 0.01 0.08% 0.07% 0.1 % 0.05% 0.1 % 0.001 0.8 % 0.6 % 1 % 0.5 % 1.8 % 4. 18-bit ADC. Average of 1000 samples taken at 1μs intervals. 5. At temperatures 0° to 18°C and 28° to 50°C; 100nA to 10μA accuracy is degraded by ±(0.35 × accuracy specification)/°C. 100μA to 50A accuracy is degraded by ±(0.15 × accuracy specification)/°C. High-capacitance mode accuracy is applicable at 23° ±5°C only. 6. 50A range accessible only in pulse mode. 7. 50A range accuracy measurements are taken at 0.008 NPLC. 8. Average of 100 samples taken at 1μs intervals. Model 2651A specifications Model 2651A specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument DC POWER SPECIFICATIONS Maximum output power : 202W maximum. Source /Sink Limits 1: Voltage: ±10.1V at ±20.0A, ±20.2V at ±10.0A, ±40.4V at ±5.0A 2. Four-quadrant source or sink operation. Current: ±5.05A at ±40V 2, ±10.1A at ±20V, ±20.2A at ±10V Four-quadrant source or sink operation. CAUTION: Carefully consider and configure the appropriate output-off state and source and compliance levels before connecting the Model 2651A to a device that can deliver energy. Failure to consider the output-off state and source and compliance levels may result in damage to the instrument or to the device under test. Pulse SPECIFICATIONS Minimum programmable pulse width 3: 100μs. Note: Minimum pulse width for settled source at a given I/V output and load can be longer than 100μs. Pulse width programming resolution : 1μs. Pulse width programming accurac y 3: ±5μs. Pulse width jitter : 2μs (typical). Pulse Rise Time (typical ): Current Range Rload Rise Time (typical) 50 A 0.05 W 26 μs 50 A 0.2 W 57 μs 50 A 0.4 W 85 μs 20 A 0.5 W 95 μs 50 A 0.8 W 130 μs 20 A 1 W 180 μs 10 A 2 W 330 μs 5 A 8.2 W 400 μs +20A +30A +50A –50A –10A +10A +5A –5A –20A –30A –20V –10V 0V +10V +20V 0A –40V +40V Pulse DC 3 4 7 5 6 2 1 Region Region Maximums Maximum Pulse Width 3 Maximum Duty Cycle 4 1 5 A at 40 V DC, no limit 100% 1 10 A at 20 V DC, no limit 100% 1 20 A at 10 V DC, no limit 100% 2 30 A at 10 V 1 ms 50% 3 20 A at 20 V 1.5 ms 40% 4 10 A at 40 V 1.5 ms 40% 5 50 A at 10 V 1 ms 35% 6 50 A at 20 V 330 μs 10% 7 50 A at 40 V 300 μs 1% NOTES 1. Full power source operation regardless of load to 30°C ambient. Above 30°C or power sink operation, refer to “Operating Boundaries” in the Model 2651A Reference manual for additional power derating information. 2. Quadrants 2 and 4 power envelope is trimmed at 36V and 4.5A. 3. Times measured from the start of pulse to the start off-time; see figure below. Pulse Level Bias Level Start ton Start toff 90% 10% ton toff 10% 4. Thermally limited in sink mode (quadrants 2 and 4) and ambient temperatures above 30°C. See power equations in the Model 2651A Reference Manual for more information. Model 2651A specifications Model 2651A specifications The Model 2651A supports GPIB, LXI, Digital I/O, and Keithley’s TSP-Link Technology for multi-channel synchronization. SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument ADDITIONAL SOUR CE SPECIFICATIONS Noise (10Hz to 20MHz): <100mV peak-peak (typical), <30mV RMS (typical), 10V range with a 20A limit. Overshoot : Voltage: <±(0.1% + 10mV) (typical). Step size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load, maximum current limit/compliance. Current: <±(0.1% + 10mV) (typical). Step Size = 10% to 90% of range, resistive load. See Current Source Output Settling Time specifications for additional test conditions. Range change overshoot : Voltage: <300mV + 0.1% of larger range (for <20V ranges) (typical). <400mV + 0.1% of larger range (for ≥20V ranges) (typical). Overshoot into a 100kW load, 20MHz bandwidth. Current: <5% of larger range + 360mV/Rload (for >10μA ranges) (typical). Iout × Rload = 1V. Voltage source output settling time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. 1 Range Settling Time (typical) 1 V < 70 μs 10 V <160 μs 20 V <190 μs 40 V <175 μs Current source output settling time : Time required to reach within 0.1% of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. Values below for Iout × Rload. Current Range Rload Settling time (typical) 20 A 0.5 W <195 μs 10 A 1.5 W <540 μs 5 A 5 W <560 μs 1 A 1 W < 80 μs 100 mA 10 W < 80 μs 10 mA 100 W <210 μs 1 mA 1 kW <300 μ s 100 μA 10 kW <500 μ s 10 μA 100 kW < 15 ms 1 μA 1 MW < 35 ms 100 nA 10 MW <110 ms Transient response time : 10V and 20V Ranges: <70μs for the output to recover to within 0.1% for a 10% to 90% step change in load. 40V Range: <110μs for the output to recover to within 0.1% for a 10% to 90% step change in load. Guard offset voltage : <4mV, current <10mA. Remote sense operating range 2: Maximum Voltage between HI and SENSE HI: 3V. Maximum Voltage between LO and SENSE LO: 3V. Maximum impedance per source lead : Maximum impedance limited by 3V drop by remote sense operating range. Maximum resistance = 3V/source current value (amperes) (maximum of 1W per source lead). 3V = L di/dt. Voltage output headroom : 5A Range: Maximum output voltage = 48.5V – (Total voltage drop across source leads). 10A Range: Maximum output voltage = 24.5V – (Total voltage drop across source leads). 20A Range: Maximum output voltage = 15.9V – (Total voltage drop across source leads). Overtemperature protection : Internally sensed temperature overload puts unit in standby mode. Limit /compliance : Bipolar limit (compliance) set with single value. Voltage 3: Minimum value is 10mV; accuracy is the same as voltage source. Current 4: Minimum value is 10nA; accuracy is the same as current source. NOTES 1. With measure and compliance set to the maximum current for the specified voltage range. 2. Add 50μV to source accuracy specifications per volt of HI lead drop. 3. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 0.6% of limit range to the corresponding voltage source accuracy specifications. For 100mV range add an additional 60mV of uncertainty. Specifications apply with sink mode enabled. 4. For sink mode operation (quadrants II and IV), add 0.6% of limit range to the corresponding current limit accuracy specifications. Specifications apply with sink mode enabled. Model 2651A specifications Model 2651A specifications Additi onal Measurement speci fic ati ons Cont act Check 1 Speed Maximum Measurement Time to Memory for 60Hz (50Hz) Accuracy (1 Year) 23° ±5°C ±(% reading + ohms) Fast 1.1 ms (1.2 ms) 5% + 15 W Medium 4.1 ms (5 ms) 5% + 5 W Slow 36 ms (42 ms) 5% + 3 W NOTES 1. Includes measurement of SENSE HI to HI and SENSE LO to LO contact resistances. Additi onal mete r speci fic ati ons Maximum load impedance : Normal Mode: 10nF (typical), 3μH (typical). High-Capacitance Mode: 50μF (typical), 3μH (typical). Common mode voltage : 250V DC. Common mode isolation : >1GW, <4500pF. Measure input impedance : >10GW. Sense high input impedance : >10GW. Maximum sense lead resistance : 1kW for rated accuracy. Overrange : 101% of source range, 102% of measure range. HIGH-CAPACITANCE mO DE 1,2 Accurac y specifications 3: Accuracy specifications are applicable in both normal and highcapacitance modes. Voltage Source Output Settling Time : Time required to reach within 0.1 % of final value after source level command is processed on a fixed range. 4 Voltage Source Range Settling Time with Cload = 4.7μF (typical) 1 V 75 μs 10 V 170 μs 20 V 200 μs 40 V 180 μs Mode change dela y: 100μA Current Range and Above: Delay into High-Capacitance Mode: 11ms. Delay out of High-Capacitance Mode: 11ms. 1μA and 10μA Current Ranges: Delay into High-Capacitance Mode: 250ms. Delay out of High-Capacitance Mode: 11ms. Measure input impedance : >10GW in parallel with 25nF. Voltage source range change overshoot : <400mV + 0.1% of larger range (typical). Overshoot into a 100kW load, 20MHz bandwidth. NOTES 1. High-capacitance mode specifications are for DC measurements only and use locked ranges. Autorange is disabled. 2. 100nA range is not available in high-capacitance mode. 3. Add an additional 2nA to the source current accuracy and measure current accuracy offset for the 1μA range. 4. With measure and compliance set to the maximum current for the specified voltage range. SMU INSTRUMENTS www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) A Greater Measure of Confidence 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument Measurement Speed Speci fic ati ons 1, 2 Maxim um SWEEP OPERA TION RA TES (operations per second) FOR 60Hz (50Hz): A/D Converter Speed Trigger Origin Measure To Memory Using User Scripts Measure To Gpi b Using User Scripts Source Measure To Memory Using User Scripts Source Measure To Gpi b Using User Scripts Source Measure To Memory Using Sweep API Source Measure To Gpi b Using Sweep API 0.001 NPLC Internal 20000 (20000) 9800 (9800) 7000 (7000) 6200 (6200) 12000 (12000) 5900 (5900) 0.001 NPLC Digital I/O 8100 (8100) 7100 (7100) 5500 (5500) 5100 (5100) 11200 (11200) 5700 (5700) 0.01 NPLC Internal 4900 (4000) 3900 (3400) 3400 (3000) 3200 (2900) 4200 (3700) 4000 (3500) 0.01 NPLC Digital I/O 3500 (3100) 3400 (3000) 3000 (2700) 2900 (2600) 4150 (3650) 3800 (3400) 0.1 NPLC Internal 580 (480) 560 (470) 550 (465) 550 (460) 560 (470) 545 (460) 0.1 NPLC Digital I/O 550 (460) 550 (460) 540 (450) 540 (450) 560 (470) 545 (460) 1.0 NPLC Internal 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 1.0 NPLC Digital I/O 58 (48) 58 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) 59 (49) HS ADC Internal 38500 (38500) 18000 (18000) 10000 (10000) 9500 (9500) 14300 (14300) 6300 (6300) HS ADC Digital I/O 12500 (12500) 11500 (11500) 7500 (7500) 7000 (7000) 13200 (13200) 6000 (6000) High Speed ADC Burst MEASUR EMENT RA TES 3 Burst Length (readings) Readings per Second Bursts per Second 100 1,000,000 400 500 1,000,000 80 1000 1,000,000 40 2500 1,000,000 16 5000 1,000,000 8 Maxim um SINGLE MEASUR EMENT RA TES (operations per second) FOR 60Hz (50Hz) A/D Converter Speed Trigger Origin Measure To Gpi b Source Measure To Gpi b Source Measure Pass/Fail To Gpi b 0.001 NPLC Internal 1900 (1800) 1400 (1400) 1400 (1400) 0.01 NPLC Internal 1450 (1400) 1200 (1100) 1100 (1100) 0.1 NPLC Internal 450 (390) 425 (370) 425 (375) 1.0 NPLC Internal 58 (48) 57 (48) 57 (48) Maximum Measurement RANGE CHANGE RATE: >4000 per second for >10μA (typical). Maximum SOURCE Range CHANGE RATE: >325 per second for >10μA, typical. When changing to or from a range ≥1A, maximum rate is >250 per second, typical. COMMAND PROCESSING TIME: Maximum time required for the output to begin to change following the receipt of the smua.source.levelv or smua.source.leveli command. <1ms typical. NOTES 1. Tests performed with a Model 2651A on channel A using the following equipment: Computer hardware (Intel® Pentium® 4 2.4GHz, 2GB RAM, National Instruments™ PCI-GPIB). Driver (NI-488.2 Version 2.2 PCI-GPIB). Software (Microsoft® Windows® XP, Microsoft Visual Studio® 2010, VISA™ version 4.1). 2. Exclude current measurement ranges less than 1mA. 3. smua.measure.adc has to be enabled and the smua.measure.count set to the burst length. TRIGGERING AND SYNCHRO NIZATION SPECIFICATIONS Triggering : Trigger In to Trigger Out: 0.5μs (typical). Trigger In to Source Change 1: 10μs (typical). Trigger Timer Accuracy: ±2μs (typical). Source Change 1 After LXI Trigger: 280μs (typical). Synchroni zation : Single-Node Synchronized Source Change 1: <0.5μs (typical). Multi-Node Synchronized Source Change 1: <0.5μs (typical). NOTES 1. Fixed source range with no polarity change. Model 2651A specifications Model 2651A specifications SMU INSTRUMENTS A Greater Measure of Confidence www.keithley.com 1.888.KEITHLEY (U.S. only) 2651A 50A, High Power System SourceMeter® SMU Instrument SU PPLEMENTAL INFOR MATION FRONT PANEL INTERFACE: Two-line vacuum fluorescent display (VFD) with keypad and navigation wheel. Displa y: Show error messages and user defined messages. Display source and limit settings. Show current and voltage measurements (6½-digit to 4½-digit). View measurements stored in dedicated reading buffers. Keypad Operations : Change host interface settings. Save and restore instrument setups. Load and run factory and user defined test scripts that prompt for input and send results to the display. Store measurements into dedicated reading buffers. PROGRAMMING: Embedded Test Script Processor (TSP®) scripting engine is accessible from any host interface. Responds to individual instrument control commands. Responds to high speed test scripts comprised of instrument control commands and Test Script Language (TSL) statements (for example, branching, looping, and math). Able to execute high speed test scripts stored in memory without host intervention. Minimum User Memor y Available : 16MB (approximately 250,000 lines of TSP code). Test Script Builder : Integrated development environment for building, running, and managing TSP scripts. Includes an instrument console for communicating with any TSP enabled instrument in an interactive manner. Requires: VISA (NI-VISA included on CD), Microsoft® .NET Framework (included on CD), Keithley I/O Layer (included on CD), Intel® Pentium III 800MHz or faster personal computer, Microsoft Windows® 2000, XP, Vista®, or 7. TSP Express (embedded): Tool that allows users to quickly and easily perform common I-V tests without programming or installing software. To run TSP Express, you need: Java™ Platform, Standard Edition 6, Microsoft Internet Explorer®, Mozilla® Firefox®, or another Java-compatible web browser. Software Interface : TSP Express (embedded), direct GPIB/VISA, read/write with Microsoft Visual Basic®, Visual C/C++®, Visual C#®, LabVIEW™, CEC TestPoint™ Data Acquisition Software Package, NI LabWindows™/CVI, etc. READING BUFFERS: Nonvolatile memory uses dedicated storage areas reserved for measurement data. Reading buffers are arrays of measurement elements. Each element can hold the following items: Measurement Measurement status Timestamp Source setting (at the time the measurement was taken) Range information Two reading buffers are reserved for each Model 2651A channel. Reading buffers can be filled using the front panel STORE key and retrieved using the RECALL key or host interface. Buffer Size, with timestamp and source setting: >60,000 samples. Buffer Size, without timestamp and source setting: >140,000 samples. SYSTEM EXPANSION: The TSP-Link expansion interface allows TSP-enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. See figure below. To Additional Nodes Node 1 Node 2 To Host Computer Each Model 2651A has two TSP-Link connectors to make it easier to connect instruments together in sequence. Once source-measure instruments are interconnected through the TSP-Link expansion interface, a computer can access all the resources of each source-measure instrument through the host interface of any Model 2651A. A maximum of 32 TSP-Link nodes can be interconnected. Each source-measure instrument consumes one TSP-Link node. TIMER: Free-running 47-bit counter with 1MHz clock input. Resets each time instrument power is turned on. If the instrument is not turned off, the timer is reset to zero every 4 years. Timestamp: TIMER value is automatically saved when each measurement is triggered. Resolution: 1μs. Timestamp Accuracy: ±100ppm. Model 2651A specifications Model 2651A specifications GENERAL Digital I/O Interface : +5VDC 5.1kW 100W 600mA Solid State Fuse Read by firmware Written by firmware +5V Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Digital I/O Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) GND Pin (on DIGITAL I/O connector) Rear Panel Connector: 25-pin female D. Input/Output Pins: 14 open drain I/O bits. Absolute Maximum Input Voltage: 5.25V. Absolute Minimum Input Voltage: –0.25V. Maximum Logic Low Input Voltage: 0.7V, +850μA max. Minimum Logic High Input Voltage: 2.1V, +570μA. Maximum Source Current (flowing out of digital I/O bit): +960μA. Maximum Sink Current At Maximum Logic Low Voltage (0.7): –5.0mA. Absolute Maximum Sink Current (flowing into digital I/O pin): –11mA. 5V Power Supply Pin: Limited to 250mA, solid-state fuse protected. Output Enable Pin: Active high input pulled down internally to ground with a 10kW resistor; when the output enable input function has been activated, the Model 2651A channel will not turn on unless the output enable pin is driven to >2.1V (nominal current = 2.1V/10kW = 210μA). IEEE-488: IEEE-488.1 compliant. Supports IEEE-488.2 common commands and status model topology. RS-232: Baud rates from 300bps to 115200bps. Programmable number of data bits, parity type, and flow control (RTS/CTS hardware or none). When not programmed as the active host interface, the Model 2651A can use the RS-232 interface to control other instrumentation. Ethernet : RJ-45 connector, LXI, 10/100BT, Auto MDIX. LXI compliance : LXI Class C 1.2. Total Output Trigger Response Time: 245μs minimum, 280μs (typical), (not specified) maximum. Receive Lan[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. Generate Lan[0-7] Event Delay: Unknown. Expansion interface : The TSP-Link Technology expansion interface allows TSP-enabled instruments to trigger and communicate with each other. Cable Type: Category 5e or higher LAN crossover cable. 3 meters maximum between each TSP-enabled instrument. USB: USB 2.0 host controller. Power suppl y: 100V to 250V AC, 50Hz to 60Hz (autosensing), 550VA maximum. Cooling : Forced air; side and top intake and rear exhaust. Warrant y: 1 year. EMC: Conforms to European Union EMC Directive. Safet y: UL listed to UL61010-1:2004. Conforms to European Union Low Voltage Directive. Dimensions : 89mm high × 435mm wide × 549mm deep (3.5 in. × 17.1 in. × 21.6 in.). Bench Configuration (with handle and feet): 104mm high × 483mm wide × 620mm deep (4.1 in. × 19 in. × 24.4 in.). Weight : 9.98kg (22 lbs). Environment : For indoor use only. Altitude : Maximum 2000 meters above sea level. Operatin g: 0° to 50°C, 70% relative humidity up to 35°C. Derate 3% relative humidity/°C, 35° to 50°C. Storage : –25° to 65°C. Product family data sheet Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. CLD-DS57 Rev 2B Cree® XLamp® XQ-B LED PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Cree XLamp XQ-B LEDs revolutionize mid-power LEDs by delivering lighting-class reliability and a wider spread of light than typical plastic packages. The XQ-B’s innovative wide light emission enables a smooth look in replacement tubes and panel lights while reducing system cost by using fewer LEDs. Using Cree’s newest generation of silicon carbide-based LED chips, XQ-B is optimized to dramatically lower system cost in non-directional and outdoor area lighting applications. FEATURES • Cree’s smallest lighting class LED: 1.6 X 1.6 X 1.6 mm • Available in white, 80-minimum CRI white and 70-minimum CRI cool white • 300 mA maximum drive current • Low thermal resistance: 17 °C/W • Wide viewing angle: 140° • Reflow solderable - JEDEC J-STD-020C compatible • Unlimited floor life at ≤ 30 °C/85% RH • RoHS- and REACh‑compliant • UL-recognized component (E349212) www.cree.com/Xlamp Cree, Inc. 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, NC 27703 USA Tel: +1.919.313.5300 Table of Contents Characteristics.......................... 2 Flux Characteristics.................... 2 Relative Spectral Power Distribution.............................. 3 Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature............................. 3 Electrical Characteristics............. 4 Relative Flux vs. Current............ 4 Typical Spatial Distribution.......... 5 Thermal Design......................... 5 Reflow Soldering Characteristics.. 6 Notes....................................... 7 Mechanical Dimensions.............. 8 Tape and Reel........................... 9 Packaging............................... 10 Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 2 xlamp xQ-B led Characteristics Characteristics Unit Minimum Typical Maximum Thermal resistance, junction to solder point °C/W 17 Viewing angle (FWHM) degrees 140 Temperature coefficient of voltage mV/°C -2.0 ESD classification (HBM per Mil-Std-883D) Class 1 DC forward current mA 80 300 Reverse voltage V -5 Forward voltage (@ 80 mA, 25 °C) V 3.0 3.4 LED junction temperature °C 150 Flux Characteristics (TJ = 25 °C) The following table provides several base order codes for XLamp XQ-B LEDs. It is important to note that the base order codes listed here are a subset of the total available order codes for the product family. For more order codes, as well as a complete description of the order-code nomenclature, please consult the XLamp XQ-B Binning and Labeling document. Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Minimum Luminous Flux @ 80 mA Calculated Minimum Luminous Flux (lm)* Order Code Min. Max. Group Flux (lm) 150 mA Cool White 5000 K 8300 K K2 30.6 52.5 XQBAWT-00-0000-00000L051 Neutral White 3700 K 5000 K K2 30.6 52.5 XQBAWT-00-0000-00000H0E5 J3 26.8 46 XQBAWT-00-0000-00000HXE5 Warm White 2600 K 3700 K J3 26.8 46 XQBAWT-00-0000-00000HXE7 Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ±7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. • Typical CRI for Neutral White, 3700 K - 5000 K CCT is 75. • Typical CRI for Warm White, 2600 K - 3700 K CCT is 80. • Minimum CRI for 70 CRI Minimum Cool White is 70. • Minimum CRI for 80 CRI Minimum White is 80. * Calculated flux values at 150 mA are for reference only. Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 3 xlamp xQ-B led Relative Spectral Power Distribution Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature (IF = 80 mA) Relative Spectral Power 0 20 40 60 80 100 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 Relative Radiant Power (%) Wavelength (nm) Cool White Neutral White Warm White Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Junction Temperature (ºC) Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 4 xlamp xQ-B led Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 25 °C) Relative Flux vs. Current (TJ = 25 °C) Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 25°C) parallel 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 25°C) parallel 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 5 xlamp xQ-B led Typical Spatial Distribution Thermal Design The maximum forward current is determined by the thermal resistance between the LED junction and ambient. It is crucial for the end product to be designed in a manner that minimizes the thermal resistance from the solder point to ambient in order to optimize lamp life and optical characteristics. Typical Spatial Radiation Pattern 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 -90 -70 -50 -30 -10 10 30 50 70 90 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (º) Thermal Design parallel 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Rj-a = 30°C/W Rj-a = 35°C/W Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 6 xlamp xQ-B led Reflow Soldering Characteristics In testing, Cree has found XLamp XQ-B LEDs to be compatible with JEDEC J-STD-020C, using the parameters listed below. As a general guideline, Cree recommends that users follow the recommended soldering profile provided by the manufacturer of solder paste used. Note that this general guideline may not apply to all PCB designs and configurations of reflow soldering equipment. Profile Feature Lead-Based Solder Lead-Free Solder Average Ramp-Up Rate (Tsmax to Tp) 3 °C/second max. 3 °C/second max. Preheat: Temperature Min (Tsmin) 100 °C 150 °C Preheat: Temperature Max (Tsmax) 150 °C 200 °C Preheat: Time (tsmin to tsmax) 60-120 seconds 60-180 seconds Time Maintained Above: Temperature (TL) 183 °C 217 °C Time Maintained Above: Time (tL) 60-150 seconds 60-150 seconds Peak/Classification Temperature (Tp) 215 °C 260 °C Time Within 5 °C of Actual Peak Temperature (tp) 10-30 seconds 20-40 seconds Ramp-Down Rate 6 °C/second max. 6 °C/second max. Time 25 °C to Peak Temperature 6 minutes max. 8 minutes max. Note: All temperatures refer to topside of the package, measured on the package body surface. TP TL Temperature Time t 25˚C to Peak Preheat ts tS tP 25 Ramp-down Ramp-up Critical Zone TL to TP Tsmax Tsmin Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 7 xlamp xQ-B led Notes Lumen Maintenance Projections Cree now uses standardized IES LM-80-08 and TM-21-11 methods for collecting long-term data and extrapolating LED lumen maintenance. For information on the specific LM-80 data sets available for this LED, refer to the public LM-80 results document at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/LM80_results. Please read the XLamp Long-Term Lumen Maintenance application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/lumen_ maintenance for more details on Cree’s lumen maintenance testing and forecasting. Please read the XLamp Thermal Management application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/thermal_management for details on how thermal design, ambient temperature, and drive current affect the LED junction temperature. Moisture Sensitivity In testing, Cree has found XLamp XQ-B LEDs to have unlimited floor life in conditions ≤30 ºC/85% relative humidity (RH). Moisture testing included a 168-hour soak at 85 ºC/85% RH followed by 3 reflow cycles, with visual and electrical inspections at each stage. Cree recommends keeping XLamp LEDs in their sealed moisture-barrier packaging until immediately prior to use. Cree also recommends returning any unused LEDs to the resealable moisture-barrier bag and closing the bag immediately after use. RoHS Compliance The levels of RoHS restricted materials in this product are below the maximum concentration values (also referred to as the threshold limits) permitted for such substances, or are used in an exempted application, in accordance with EU Directive 2011/65/EC (RoHS2), as implemented January 2, 2013. RoHS Declarations for this product can be obtained from your Cree representative or from the Product Documentation sections of www.cree.com. REACh Compliance REACh substances of high concern (SVHCs) information is available for this product. Since the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) has published notice of their intent to frequently revise the SVHC listing for the foreseeable future, please contact a Cree representative to insure you get the most up-to-date REACh SVHC Declaration. REACh banned substance information (REACh Article 67) is also available upon request. UL Recognized Component Level 1 enclosure consideration. The LED package or a portion thereof has not been investigated as a fire enclosure or a fire and electrical enclosure per ANSI/UL 8750. Vision Advisory Claim WARNING: Do not look at exposed lamp in operation. Eye injury can result. See the LED Eye Safety application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/led_eye_safety. Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 8 xlamp xQ-B led Mechanical Dimensions All dimensions in mm. Measurement tolerances unless indicated otherwise: .xx = .25 mm, .xxx = .125 mm Measurement tolerance: .xx = .13 mm 1.60 0.30 0.50 1.60 0.65 0.50 RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD XQ PCB SOLDER PAD DWG. NO. REV A SIZE TITLE: 5 4 3 2 1 Goleta, CA 93117 340 Storke Rd Fax (805) 968-9811 Phone (805) 968-9460 XQ_PCBSolderPad 50:1 SHEET 1 OF 1 SCALE M.Youmans TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. DIMENSIONS ARE IN UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED X° ± 1° .XX ± .13 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .X ± .25 .XX ± .10 X° ± 2° .X ± 0.3 DRAWN BY APPROVED MATERIAL FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH CHECK DATE DATE DATE NOTICE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 8/7/2013 Santa Barbara Technology Center 0.30 1.32 1.32 0.51 RECOMMENDED STENCIL OPENING XQ STENCIL OPENING DWG. NO. REV A SIZE TITLE: 5 4 3 2 1 Goleta, CA 93117 340 Storke Rd Fax (805) 968-9811 Phone (805) 968-9460 XQ_StencilOpening 50:1 SHEET 1 OF SCALE M.Youmans TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. DIMENSIONS ARE IN UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED X° ± 1° .XX ± .13 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .X ± .25 .XX ± .10 X° ± 2° .X ± 0.3 DRAWN BY APPROVED MATERIAL FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH CHECK DATE DATE DATE NOTICE OF CREE INC. CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 8/7/2013 Santa Barbara Technology Center Recommended PCB solder pad Recommended stencil opening 0.30 5.00 5.00 SOLDER PAD REFERENCE RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT: MCPCB RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT: MCPCB DWG. NO. REV A SIZE TITLE: Goleta, CA 93117 340 Storke Rd Fax (805) 968-9811 Phone (805) 968-9460 XQ_TraceLayout-MCPCB 20:1 SHEET 1 OF 1 SCALE M.Youmans TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. DIMENSIONS ARE IN UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED X° ± 1° .XX ± .13 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .X ± .25 .XX ± .10 X° ± 2° .X ± 0.3 DRAWN BY APPROVED MATERIAL FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH CHECK DATE DATE DATE AND THE INFORMATION PROPRIETARY AND CREE, INC. THIS PLOT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY THE WRITTEN CONSENT THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 8/7/2013 Santa Barbara Technology Center 0.30 10.00 10.00 4.85 SOLDER PAD REFERENCE RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT: FR4 RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT: FR4 DWG. NO. REV A SIZE TITLE: Goleta, CA 93117 340 Storke Rd Fax (805) 968-9811 Phone (805) 968-9460 XQ_TraceLayout-FR4 10:1 SHEET 1 OF 1 SCALE M.Youmans TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. DIMENSIONS ARE IN UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED X° ± 1° .XX ± .13 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .X ± .25 .XX ± .10 X° ± 2° .X ± 0.3 DRAWN BY APPROVED MATERIAL FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH CHECK DATE DATE DATE NOTICE OF CREE INC. CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 8/7/2013 Santa Barbara Technology Center Recommended trace layout: MCPCB Recommended trace layout: FR4 SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.60 1.60 1.41 .600 .600 .300 1.500 1.60± .05 .30 1.60 .65 1.60 .300 1.500 3.300 3.300 45.000 1 /1 2610-00026 A XQx OUTLINE -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 5/23/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT SOLDER PAD REFERENCE NOTCH IS ON CATHODE (-) SIDE SIZE TITLE OF SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.60 1.60 1.41 .600 .600 .300 1.500 1.60± .05 .30 1.60 .65 1.60 .300 1.500 3.300 3.300 45.000 2610-00026 XQx OUTLINE -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 5/23/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT SOLDER PAD REFERENCE NOTCH IS ON CATHODE (-) SIDE SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.60 1.60 1.41 .600 .600 .300 1.500 1.60± .05 .30 1.60 .65 1.60 .300 1.500 3.300 3.300 45.000 2610-00026 XQx OUTLINE -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 5/23/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED TRACE LAYOUT SOLDER PAD REFERENCE NOTCH IS ON CATHODE (-) SIDE Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 9 xlamp xQ-B led Tape and Reel All Cree carrier tapes conform to EIA-481D, Automated Component Handling Systems Standard. All dimensions in mm. Measurement tolerances unless indicated otherwise: .xx = .25 mm, .xxx = .125 mm SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 WRITTEN CONSENT DISCLOSED TO ANY INC. THIS PLOT PROPRIETARY AND INFORMATION X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 A A 3.50 ±.10 .30 ± .10 1.85 1.65 1.750 8.000 NOMINAL 8.30 MAX 1.000 +.10 -.00 1.500 4.000 2.000 REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D 4.000 1 /1 2402-00023 A Carrier Tape, 1.7X1.7 XPQ D. CRONIN 5/31/12 cumulative tolerance ± 0.2mm REFERENCE VENDOR PART NUMBER 021142 CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE Loaded Pockets (2,000 Lamps) Leader 400 mm (min) of empty pockets with at least 100 mm sealed by tape (50 empty pockets min.) Trailer 160 mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (20 pockets min.) END START Cathode Side Anode Side (denoted by + and circle) 2.5 ±.1 1.5 ±.1 8.0 ±.1 4.0 ±.1 1.75 ±.10 12.0 .0 +.3 13mm 7" Cover Tape Pocket Tape User Feed Direction User Feed Direction Copyright © 2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 10 xlamp xQ-B led Packaging The diagrams below show the packaging and labels Cree uses to ship XLamp XQ-B LEDs. XLamp XQ-B LEDs are shipped in tape loaded on a reel. Each box contains only one reel in a moisture barrier bag. Patent Label (on bottom of box) Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Unpackaged Reel Packaged Reel Boxed Reel CREE Bin Code & Barcode Label Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Label with Customer P/N, Qty, Lot #, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Patent Label Label with Customer Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # CLD-DS36 Rev 7A Product family data sheet/ bINNING AND lABELING dOCUMENT Cree® XLamp® MT-G EasyWhite® LEDs WWW.CREE.COM/XLAMP Copyright © 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Product Description The XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED maximizes lumen density, eliminates chromaticity binning, and enables luminaire and bulb manufacturers to deliver consistent color and high efficacy light output in a new, compact, multi-die package. XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs can reduce LED-to-LED color variation to within a 2‑step MacAdam ellipse, 94% smaller than the total area of the corresponding ANSI C78.377 color region. The XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED is the perfect choice for lighting applications where high luminous flux output is required from a single, small point source. Example applications include: LED retrofit bulbs, commercial/retail display spotlights, and other indoor general illumination applications. FEATURES • Cree EasyWhite color temperatures from 2700 K to 5000 K CCT • Wide range of operating power - up to 25 W • 85 °C binning and characterization • Two voltage options: 6 V, 36 V • Low effective thermal resistance: 1.5 °C/W • High lumen density • Wide viewing angle: 120° • 80-minimum CRI at 2700 K and 3000 K CCT • 85- and 90-minimum CRI available in 2700 K and 3000 K CCT • Electrically neutral thermal path • RoHS- and REACh-compliant • UL-recognized component (E349212) Applications • MR, PAR and other directional retrofit bulbs • Commercial/residential directional lighting • General illumination www.cree.com/xlamp Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Cree, Inc. 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, NC 27703 USA Tel: +1.919.313.5300 Table of contents Characteristics........................... 2 Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins....................... 3 Relative Spectral Power Distribution............................... 6 Relative Luminous Flux vs. Junction Temperature.................. 6 Electrical Characteristics.............. 7 Relative Luminous Flux vs Current .8 Typical Spatial Distribution........... 9 Performance Groups – Brightness.9 Performance Groups – Chromaticity.............................10 Cree EasyWhite Color Temperatures Plotted on the 1931 CIE Curve....11 Bin and Order Code Format.........11 Standard Order Codes and Bins .12 Reflow Soldering Characteristics..13 Notes.......................................14 Mechanical Dimensions..............15 Tape and Reel...........................16 Packaging.................................17 xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 2 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Characteristics Characteristics Unit Minimum Typical Maximum Viewing angle (FWHM) degrees 120 ESD withstand voltage (HBM per Mil-Std-883D) V 8000 Effective thermal resistance, junction to solder point °C/W 1.5 LED junction temperature °C 150 DC forward current (6 V) mA 1100 4000 DC forward current (36 V) mA 185 700 Forward voltage (6 V, 1100 mA, 85 °C) V 5.6 6.7 Forward voltage (36 V, 185 mA, 85 °C) V 33.5 40.2 Temperature coefficient of voltage (6 V) mV/°C -4.5 Temperature coefficient of voltage (36 V) mV/°C -27 Reverse voltage (6 V) V -5 Reverse current (6V, 36 V) mA 0.1 xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 3 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 6 VolT MT-G (1100 mA, Tj = 85 °C) The following table provides several base order codes for 6 Volt XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs. For a complete description of the order-code nomenclature, please reference page 11 of this document. Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 1100 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region Standard CRI EasyWhite 5000 K H0 560 642 50H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H050H 50F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H050F J0 600 688 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J050F K0 650 745 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00K050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00K050F 4000 K G0 520 596 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G040H 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G040F H0 560 642 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H040F J0 600 688 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J040F 3500 K F0 480 550 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F035H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F035F G0 520 596 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G035F H0 560 642 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H035F 3000 K F0 480 550 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F030F G0 520 596 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G030F H0 560 642 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H030F 2700 K E0 440 504 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E027F F0 480 550 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F027F G0 520 596 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G027F Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ±7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 27F, 27H, 30F, 30H is 80. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 35F, 35H, 40F, 40H is 77. • Typical CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 35F, 35H, 40F, 40H is 80. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperature 50F, 50H is 75. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 4 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 36 VolT MT-G (185 mA, Tj = 85 °C) The following table provides several base order codes for 36 Volt XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs. For a complete description of the order-code nomenclature, please reference page 11 of this document. Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 185 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region Standard CRI EasyWhite 5000 K H0 560 647 50H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H050H 50F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H050F J0 600 693 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J050F K0 650 751 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00K050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00K050F 4000 K G0 520 601 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G040H 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G040F H0 560 647 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H040F J0 600 693 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J040F 3500 K F0 480 555 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F035H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F035F G0 520 601 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G035F H0 560 647 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H035F 3000 K F0 480 555 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F030F G0 520 601 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G030F H0 560 647 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H030F 2700 K E0 440 508 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E027F F0 480 555 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F027F G0 520 601 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G027F Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 85 cri, 6 VolT MT-G (1100 mA, Tj = 85 °C) Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 1100 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 85 CRI EasyWhite 3000 K D0 400 458 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PD030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PD030F E0 440 504 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PE030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PE030F F0 480 550 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PF030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PF030F 2700 K D0 400 458 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PD027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PD027F E0 440 504 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PE027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0PE027F Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ±7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 27F, 27H, 30F, 30H is 80. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 35F, 35H, 40F, 40H is 77. • Typical CRI for EasyWhite color temperatures 35F, 35H, 40F, 40H is 80. • Minimum CRI for EasyWhite color temperature 50F, 50H is 75. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 5 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 85 cri, 36 VolT MT-G (185 mA, Tj = 85 °C) Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 185 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 85 CRI EasyWhite 3000 K D0 400 462 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PD030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PD030F E0 440 508 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PE030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PE030F F0 480 555 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PF030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PF030F 2700 K D0 400 462 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PD027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PD027F E0 440 508 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PE027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0PE027F Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 90 cri, 6 VolT MT-G (1100 mA, Tj = 85 °C) Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 1100 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 90 CRI EasyWhite 3000 K C0 370 424 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UC030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UC030F D0 400 458 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UD030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UD030F E0 440 504 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UE030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UE030F 2700 K B0 340 390 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UB027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UB027F C0 370 424 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UC027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UC027F D0 400 458 MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UD027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B0UD027F Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes, Bins, 90 cri, 36 VolT MT-G (185 mA, Tj = 85 °C) Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 185 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 90 CRI EasyWhite 3000 K C0 370 428 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UC030H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UC030F D0 400 462 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UD030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UD030F E0 440 508 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UE030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UE030F 2700 K B0 340 393 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UB027H 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UB027F C0 370 428 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UC027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UC027F D0 400 462 MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UD027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N0UD027F Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ±7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 6 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Relative Spectral Power Distribution (6 V, 1100 mA; 36 V, 185 mA; TJ= 85 °C) The following graph represents typical spectral output of the XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED. Relative Luminous Flux vs. Junction Temperature (6 V, 1100 ma; 36 V, 185 mA) The following graph represents typical performance of the XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED. Relative Spectral Power Distribution White The following graph represents typical spectral output of each die of the MT-G 0 20 40 60 80 100 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 Relative Spectral Power (%) Wavelength (nm) Warm White Cool White Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature (If = 1100 mA, or 183.33 if @ 36V) The following graph represents typical performance of each LED die in the XLamp MT-G 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120% 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Relative Luminous Flux Junction Temperature ( º C) xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 7 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) Electrical Characteristics (Tsp = 85ºC) 6V 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 5 5.25 5.5 5.75 6 6.25 Current (mA) Forward Voltage V MT-G 6V 36V 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 Current (mA) Forward Voltage V MT-G 36V xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 8 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Relative Luminous Flux vs Current (TJ = 85 °C) Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tsp = 85ºC) 0% 50% 100% 150% 200% 250% 300% 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current, Pulsed (mA) MT-G 6V @ 36V) 0% 50% 100% 150% 200% 250% 300% 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current, Pulsed (mA) MT-G 36V xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 9 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Typical Spatial Distribution The following graph represents typical performance of the XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED. Performance Groups – Brightness (TJ = 85 °C) XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs are tested for luminosity and placed into one of the following bins. Group Code Min. Luminous Flux @ 1100 mA, 6 V; @185 mA, 36 V Max. Luminous Flux @ 1100 mA, 6 V; @185 mA, 36 V A0 310 340 B0 340 370 C0 370 400 D0 400 440 E0 440 480 F0 480 520 G0 520 560 H0 560 600 J0 600 650 K0 650 700 Spatial Distribution 0 20 40 60 80 100 -90 -60 -30 0 30 60 90 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (º) xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 10 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups – Chromaticity (TJ = 85 °C) XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs are tested for chromaticity and placed into one of the regions defined by the following bounding coordinates. EasyWhite Color Temperatures – 4-Step Code CCT x y 50F 5000K 0.3407 0.3459 0.3415 0.3586 0.3499 0.3654 0.3484 0.3521 40F 4000K 0.3744 0.3685 0.3782 0.3837 0.3912 0.3917 0.3863 0.3758 35F 3500K 0.3981 0.3800 0.4040 0.3966 0.4186 0.4037 0.4116 0.3865 30F 3000K 0.4242 0.3919 0.4322 0.4096 0.4449 0.4141 0.4359 0.3960 27F 2700K 0.4475 0.3994 0.4573 0.4178 0.4695 0.4207 0.4589 0.4021 EasyWhite Color Temperatures – 2-Step Code CCT x y 50H 5000K 0.3429 0.3507 0.3434 0.3571 0.3475 0.3604 0.3469 0.3539 40H 4000K 0.3784 0.3741 0.3804 0.3818 0.3867 0.3857 0.3844 0.3778 35H 3500K 0.4030 0.3857 0.4061 0.3941 0.4132 0.3976 0.4099 0.3890 30H 3000K 0.4291 0.3973 0.4333 0.4062 0.4395 0.4084 0.4351 0.3994 27H 2700K 0.4528 0.4046 0.4578 0.4138 0.4638 0.4152 0.4586 0.4060 xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 11 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Cree EasyWhite Color Temperatures Plotted on the 1931 CIE Curve (TJ = 85 °C) Bin and Order Code Format Bin codes and order codes are configured as follows: Order Code B in Code 2700K 3000K 3500K 4000K 4500K 5000K 5700K 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 CCy CCx ANSI C78.377 Quadrangle EasyWhite 4-step EasyWhite 2-step SSSCCC-BB-HHHH-NNNRNNNNN Series MTG = MT-G Internal code Internal code CRI Specification U = 90 min CRI P = 85 min CRI 0 = standard CRI Kit code Vf class: B0 = 6-V class N0 = 36-V class Reel size 0 = 500 (standard) 1 = 100 (nonstandard) Color EZW = EasyWhite SSSCCC-BB-WWW-FF-NNRAAAA Series MTG = MT-G Internal code Flux bin CRI Specification U = 90 min CRI P = 85 min CRI H = 80 min CRI E = 77 min CRI D = 75 min CRI Internal Code Vf class: B0 = 6-V class N0 = 36-V class Chromaticity bin Color EZW = EasyWhite xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 12 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Standard Order Codes and Bins (XLamp MT-G EasyWhite) XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LED Standard Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux (lm) @ Tj=85 °C, 6 V, 1100 mA @ Tj=85 °C, 36 V, 185 mA Chromaticity Regions 6V Order Code 36V Order Code Group Flux (lm) EasyWhite D0 400 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00D027F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00D027F 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00D027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00D027H E0 440 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E027F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E027F 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E027H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E030F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E030F 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E030H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E035F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E035F 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00E035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00E035H F0 480 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F027F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F027F 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F027H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F030F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F030F 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F030H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F035F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F035F 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F035H 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F040F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F040F 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00F040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00F040H G0 520 27F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G027F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G027F 27H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G027H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G027H 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G030F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G030F 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G030H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G035F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G035F 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G035H 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G040F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G040F 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00G040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00G040H H0 560 30F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H030F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H030F 30H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H030H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H030H 35F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H035F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H035F 35H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H035H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H035H 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H040F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H040F 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H040H 50F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H050F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H050F 50H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00H050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00H050H J0 600 40F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J040F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J040F 40H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J040H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J040H 50F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J050F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J050F 50H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00J050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00J050H K0 650 50F MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00K050F MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00K050F 50H MTGEZW-00-0000-0B00K050H MTGEZW-00-0000-0N00K040H xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 13 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Reflow Soldering Characteristics In testing, Cree has found XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs to be compatible with JEDEC J-STD-020C, using the parameters listed below. As a general guideline, Cree recommends that users follow the recommended soldering profile provided by the manufacturer of solder paste used. Note that this general guideline may not apply to all PCB designs and configurations of reflow soldering equipment. Profile Feature Lead-Based Solder Lead-Free Solder Average Ramp-Up Rate (Tsmax to Tp) 3 °C/second max. 3 °C/second max. Preheat: Temperature Min (Tsmin) 100 °C 150 °C Preheat: Temperature Max (Tsmax) 150 °C 200 °C Preheat: Time (tsmin to tsmax) 60-120 seconds 60-180 seconds Time Maintained Above: Temperature (TL) 183 °C 217 °C Time Maintained Above: Time (tL) 60-150 seconds 60-150 seconds Peak/Classification Temperature (Tp) 215 °C 260 °C Time Within 5 °C of Actual Peak Temperature (tp) 10-30 seconds 20-40 seconds Ramp-Down Rate 6 °C/second max. 6 °C/second max. Time 25 °C to Peak Temperature 6 minutes max. 8 minutes max. Note: All temperatures refer to the topside of the package, measured on the package body surface. xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 14 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Notes Lumen Maintenance Projections Cree now uses standardized IES LM-80-08 and TM-21-11 methods for collecting long-term data and extrapolating LED lumen maintenance. For information on the specific LM-80 data sets available for this LED, refer to the public LM-80 results document at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/LM80_results. Moisture Sensitivity In testing, Cree has found XLamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs to have unlimited floor life in conditions ≤ 30 ºC/85% relative humidity (RH). Moisture testing included a 168-hour soak at 85 ºC/85% RH followed by 3 reflow cycles, with visual and electrical inspections at each stage. Cree recommends keeping XLamp LEDs in their sealed moisture-barrier packaging until immediately prior to use. Cree also recommends returning any unused LEDs to the resealable moisture-barrier bag and closing the bag immediately after use. RoHS Compliance The levels of RoHS restricted materials in this product are below the maximum concentration values (also referred to as the threshold limits) permitted for such substances, or are used in an exempted application, in accordance with EU Directive 2011/65/EC (RoHS2), as implemented January 2, 2013. RoHS Declarations for this product can be obtained from your Cree representative or from the Product Ecology section of www.cree.com. REAC h Compliance REACh substances of high concern (SVHCs) information is available for this product. Since the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) has published notices of their intent to frequently revise the SVHC listing for the foreseeable future, please contact a Cree representative to insure you get the most up-to-date REACh Declaration. Historical REACh banned substance information (substances restricted or banned in the EU prior to 2010) is also available upon request. UL Recognized Component Level 4 enclosure consideration. The LED package or a portion thereof has been investigated as a fire and electrical enclosure per ANSI/UL 8750. Vision Advisory Claim WARNING. Do not look at exposed LED lamps in operation. Eye injury can result. For more information about LEDs and eye safety, please refer to the Cree LED Eye Safety Application Note (www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/led_eye_safety). xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 15 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Mechanical Dimensions All measurements are ±.13 mm unless otherwise indicated. SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 5 4 3 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT THE PROPRIETARY AND THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 9.113 9.113 .650 4.85 ±.25 R4.100 8.90 .950 .500 6.000 8.90 8.900 8.900 6.000 .950 .500 6.198 .889 1.090 1.905 1.072 1.905 8.839 .889 .937 .937 1.722 3.175 3.175 1.090 8.072 9.000 1 /1 2610-00011 C TIGER 9191 OUTLINE D. CRONIN 10/8/10 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D A INITIAL RELEASE DC 10/8/10 B CHANGED SOLDER PAD VIEW DC 1/11/11 C ADDED STENCIL VIEW DC 2/18/11 RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A B C D 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° .XXX .XX .X FOR SHEET METAL .XX .XXX X° UNLESS OTHERWISE DIMENSIONS MILLIMETERS AND TOLERANCE UNLESS SURFACE FINISH: 9.113 9.113 .650 4.85 ±.25 R4.100 8.900 8.900 6.000 .950 .950 .500 .500 6.198 .889 1.090 1.905 1.072 1.905 8.839 .889 .937 .937 1.722 3.175 3.175 1.090 8.072 RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 8.90 8.90 .650 4.85 ±.25 R4.100 8.90 .950 .500 6.000 8.90 8.900 8.900 6.000 .950 .500 6.198 .889 1.090 1.905 1.072 1.905 8.839 .889 .937 .937 1.722 3.175 3.175 1.090 8.072 9.000 1 /1 2610-00011 D TIGER 9191 OUTLINE D. CRONIN 10/8/10 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D A INITIAL RELEASE DC 10/8/10 B CHANGED SOLDER PAD VIEW DC 1/11/11 C ADDED STENCIL VIEW DC 2/18/11 D CHANGED OVERALL DIM TO MATCH CUT LENGTH AND WIDTH DC 3/25/11 RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN SIZE TITLE C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 8.900 8.900 6.000 .950 .500 6.198 .889 1.090 1.905 1.072 1.905 8.839 .889 .937 .937 1.722 3.175 3.175 1.090 8.072 8.90 8.90 4.85 ±.25 R4.100 .650 8.90 8.90 .950 .500 6.000 9.000 2610-36V MT-G D. CRONIN 10/8/10 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION A INITIAL RELEASE RECOMMENDED PC BOARD SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN MT-G 6V MT-G36V ANODE ANODE xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 16 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Tape and Reel All Cree carrier tapes conform to EIA-481D, Automated Component Handling Systems Standard. All dimensions in mm. SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .010 .XX ± .03 .X ± .06 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .01 .XXX ± .005 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTANED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE SURFACE FINISH: 63 330 +.25 -.75 12.4 +1.0 -.5 MEASURED AT EDGE 16.4 +0.2 .0 MEASURED AT HUB 12.4 +.2 .0 MEASURED AT HUB 13.1 ±.2 1.9±.4 21±.4 60° 60° 0.500 1 /1 2400-00009 A REEL, 13" X 12MM, 3 PIECE SNAP - ANTI-STATIC HIPS -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 09/29/09 2400-00009 INDEX QTY ITEM COMMENTS 1 1 2400-00009-CORE 2 2 2400-00009-REEL REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 Trailer 160mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (15 pockets min.) Loaded Pockets (500 Lamps) 12±.1 5.25 16 +.3 -.0 1.75 ±.10 4±.10 Leader 400mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (35 pockets min.) 9.4 3.000 1 /1 2402-00016 B MTG LOADING SPEC -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 1/28/11 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D A Initial Release DC 1/28/11 B Added missing sprocket holes DDS 10/17/11 END START User Feed Direction CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE 1.5± .1 xlamp MT-G EasyWhite LEDs 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 17 Copyright © 2011-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Packaging Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Dessicant (inside bag) Humidity Indicator Card (inside bag) Patent Label Label with Customer Code, Qty, Reel ID, Patent Label Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Unpackaged Reel Packaged Reel Boxed Reel CLD-DS60 Rev 5A Product family data sheet Cree® XLamp® MK-R LEDs WWW.CREE.COM/XLAMP Copyright © 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Product Description Built on Cree’s revolutionary SC³ Technology™ platform, the XLamp MK‑R LED brings new levels of price and performance to directional LED arrays, enabling lighting manufacturers to create the next generation of high-lumen indoor and outdoor LED lighting systems. In single-LED systems, the XLamp MK‑R, with EasyWhite® color binning, provides the LED industry’s tightest unit-to-unit color consistency. For systems using multiple LEDs, the MK-R enables manufacturers to use fewer LEDs while maintaining light output and color consistency, which translates to lower system cost. The XLamp MK‑R is optimized for directional lighting applications and is a welcome addition to applications requiring high lumen output, a compact optical source and a broad palette of color temperature and CRI values. FEATURES • Available in ANSI white bins as well as 4-step and 2-step EasyWhite bins at 2700 K, 3000 K, 3500 K, 4000 K, 4500 K and 5000 K CCT • Two voltage options: 6 V & 12 V • Low thermal resistance: 1.7 °C/W • Maximum junction temperature: 150 °C • Binned at 85 °C • Viewing angle: 120° • Available in cool white, 70-, 80- and 90‑CRI minimums • Unlimited floor life at ≤ 30 ºC/85% RH • Reflow solderable - JEDEC J‑STD‑020C • Electrically neutral thermal path • RoHS‑ and REACh‑compliant • UL-recognized component (E349212) Cree, Inc. 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, NC 27703 USA Tel: +1.919.313.5300 www.cree.com/xlamp Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Table of Contents Characteristics....................................2 Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes and Bins - 6 V............................3 Flux Characteristics, ANSI White Order Codes and Bins - 6 V............................4 Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes and Bins -12 V...........................5 Flux Characteristics, ANSI White Order Codes and Bins - 12 V..........................6 Relative Spectral Power Distribution.......7 Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature...7 Electrical Characteristics.......................8 Relative Flux vs. Current......................9 Relative Chromaticity vs. Current - Warm White......................................10 Relative Chromaticity vs. Temperature - Warm White......................................11 Typical Spatial Distribution..................11 Thermal Design.................................12 Performance Groups - Brightness.........13 Performance Groups - Chromaticity......14 Cree EasyWhite Bins Plotted on the 1931 CIE Color Space........................17 Cree ANSI White Bins Plotted on the 1931 CIE Color Space........................18 Bin and Order Code Formats...............19 Reflow Soldering Characteristics..........20 Notes...............................................21 Mechanical Dimensions......................22 Tape and Reel...................................23 Packaging.........................................24 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 2 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Characteristics Characteristics Unit Minimum Typical Maximum Thermal resistance, junction to solder point °C/W 1.7 Viewing angle - full width half maximum (FWHM) degrees 120 Temperature coefficient of voltage (6 V, 1400 mA, 85 °C) mV/°C -4 Temperature coefficient of voltage (12 V, 700 mA, 85 °C) mV/°C -8 ESD withstand voltage (HBM per Mil-Std-883D) V 8000 DC forward current (6 V, 1400 mA, 85 °C) mA 2500 DC forward current (12 V, 700 mA, 85 °C) mA 1250 Reverse voltage V -5 Forward voltage (6 V, 1400 mA, 85 °C) V 5.85 7 Forward voltage (12 V, 700 mA, 85 °C) V 11.7 14 LED junction temperature °C 150 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 3 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes and Bins - 6 V (If = 1400 mA, TJ = 85 °C) The following tables provide order codes for XLamp MK‑R EasyWhite LEDs. For a complete description of the order code nomenclature, please reference Bin and Order Code Formats (page 19). Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 1400 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 80-CRI EasyWhite 5000 K H2 900 1044 50H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH250H 50F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH250F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG450H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG450F 4500 K H2 900 1044 45H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH245H 45F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH245F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG445H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG445F 4000 K H2 900 1044 40H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH240H 40F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH240F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG440H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG440F 3500 K G4 840 974 35H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG435H 35F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG435F G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG235H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG235F 3000 K G4 840 974 30H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG430H 30F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG430F G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG230H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG230F 2700 K G2 780 905 27H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG227H 27F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG227F F4 730 847 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HF427H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HF427F 90-CRI EasyWhite 3000 K E4 635 737 30H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE430H 30F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE430F E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE230H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE230F 2700 K E2 590 684 27H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE227H 27F MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE227F D4 550 638 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UD427H MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UD427F Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ± 7% on flux and power measurements, ± 0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ± 2 on CRI measurements. • Minimum CRI for 80-CRI White is 80. • Minimum CRI for 90-CRI White is 90. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 4 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, ANSI White Order Codes and Bins - 6 V (If = 1400 mA, TJ = 85 °C) XLamp MK-R Standard ANSI Kit Codes Chromaticity Minimum Luminous Flux (lm) @ 1400 mA** Order Codes Kit CCT Code Flux (lm)@ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* 65 CRI Typical 70 CRI Minimum 80 CRI Minimum 90 CRI Minimum ANSI White (2700 K - 8300 K) 51 6200 K J2 1040 1206 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00J2051 H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H4051 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH4051 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH2051 E1 6500 K J2 1040 1206 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00J20E1 H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H40E1 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH40E1 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E1 E2 5700 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H40E2 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH40E2 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E2 E3 5000 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H40E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH40E3 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H20E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH20E3 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG40E3 E4 4500 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H40E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH40E4 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H20E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH20E4 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG40E4 E5 4000 K H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00H20E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HH20E5 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B00G40E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BG40E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG40E5 E6 3500 K H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BH20E6 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0BG40E6 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG40E6 G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG20E6 E7 3000 K G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG40E7 G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG20E7 F4 730 847 F2 680 789 E4 635 737 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE40E7 E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE20E7 E8 2700 K G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HG20E8 F4 730 847 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0HF40E8 F2 680 789 E4 635 737 E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UE20E8 D4 550 638 MKRAWT-00-0000-0B0UD40E8 ** Cree XLamp MK‑R order codes specify only a minimum flux bin and not a maximum. Cree may ship reels in flux bins higher than the minimum specified by the order code without advance notice. Shipments will always adhere to the chromaticity restrictions specified by the order code. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. • For information on chromaticity bins contained in the kits listed above, please reference the Performance Groups - Chromaticity section starting on page 13. • Minimum CRI for 70-CRI White is 70. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 5 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, Standard Order Codes and Bins -12 V (If = 700 mA, TJ = 85 °C) The following tables provide order codes for XLamp MK‑R EasyWhite LEDs. For a complete description of the order code nomenclature, please reference Bin and Order Code Formats (page 19). Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 700 mA 2-Step Order Code 4-Step Order Code Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* Chromaticity Region Chromaticity Region 80-CRI EasyWhite 5000 K H2 900 1044 50H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH250H 50F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH250F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG450H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG450F 4500 K H2 900 1044 45H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH245H 45F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH245F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG445H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG445F 4000 K H2 900 1044 40H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH240H 40F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH240F G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG440H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG440F 3500 K G4 840 974 35H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG435H 35F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG435F G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG235H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG235F 3000 K G4 840 974 30H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG430H 30F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG430F G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG230H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG230F 2700 K G2 780 905 27H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG227H 27F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG227F F4 730 847 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HF427H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HF427F 90-CRI EasyWhite 3000 K E4 635 737 30H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE430H 30F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE430F E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE230H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE230F 2700 K E2 590 684 27H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE227H 27F MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE227F D4 550 638 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UD427H MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UD427F Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ± 7% on flux and power measurements, ± 0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ± 2 on CRI measurements. • Minimum CRI for 80-CRI White is 80. • Minimum CRI for 90-CRI White is 90. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 6 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Flux Characteristics, ANSI White Order Codes and Bins - 12 V (If = 700 mA, TJ = 85 °C) XLamp MK-R Standard ANSI Kit Codes Chromaticity Minimum Luminous Flux (lm) @ 700 mA** Order Codes Kit CCT Code Flux (lm)@ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* 65 CRI Typical 70 CRI Minimum 80 CRI Minimum 90 CRI Minimum ANSI White (2700 K - 8300 K) 51 6200 K J2 1040 1206 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00J2051 H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H4051 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH4051 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH2051 E1 6500 K J2 1040 1206 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00J20E1 H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H40E1 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH40E1 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E1 E2 5700 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H40E2 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH40E2 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E2 E3 5000 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H40E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH40E3 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H20E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E3 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH20E3 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG40E3 E4 4500 K H4 970 1125 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H40E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH40E4 H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H20E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E4 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH20E4 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG40E4 E5 4000 K H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00H20E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HH20E5 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D00G40E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BG40E5 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG40E5 E6 3500 K H2 900 1044 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BH20E6 G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0BG40E6 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG40E6 G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG20E6 E7 3000 K G4 840 974 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG40E7 G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG20E7 F4 730 847 F2 680 789 E4 635 737 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE40E7 E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE20E7 E8 2700 K G2 780 905 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HG20E8 F4 730 847 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0HF40E8 F2 680 789 E4 635 737 E2 590 684 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UE20E8 D4 550 638 MKRAWT-00-0000-0D0UD40E8 ** Cree XLamp MK‑R order codes specify only a minimum flux bin and not a maximum. Cree may ship reels in flux bins higher than the minimum specified by the order code without advance notice. Shipments will always adhere to the chromaticity restrictions specified by the order code. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. • For information on chromaticity bins contained in the kits listed above, please reference the Performance Groups - Chromaticity section starting on page 13. • Minimum CRI for 70-CRI White is 70. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 7 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Relative Spectral Power Distribution (6 V, 1400 mA; 12 V, 700 mA; TJ= 85 °C) Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature (6 V, IF = 1400 mA; 12 V, IF = 700 mA) Relative Spectral Power 0 20 40 60 80 100 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 Relative Radiant Power (%) Wavelength (nm) Cool White Neutral White Warm White Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Junction Temperature (ºC) xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 8 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 85ºC) 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 5.25 5.50 5.75 6.00 6.25 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) 6 V Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 85ºC) 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 10.5 11.0 11.5 12.0 12.5 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) 12 V xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 9 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Relative Flux vs. Current (TJ = 85 °C) Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 85ºC) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) 6 V Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 85ºC) 0 30 60 90 120 150 180 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) 12 V xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 10 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Relative Chromaticity vs. Current - Warm White (TJ = 85 °C) -0.006 -0.004 -0.002 0.000 0.002 0.004 0.006 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 Current (mA) ΔCCx ΔCCy 6 V Relative Chromaticity Vs. Current - Warm White -0.006 -0.004 -0.002 0.000 0.002 0.004 0.006 0 250 500 750 1000 1250 Current (mA) ΔCCx ΔCCy 12 V xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 11 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Relative Chromaticity vs. Temperature - Warm White (6 V, IF = 1400 mA; 12 V, IF = 700 mA) Typical Spatial Distribution Relative Chromaticity Vs. Temperature - Warm White ΔCCx -0.006 -0.004 -0.002 0.000 0.002 0.004 0.006 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 Tsp (°C) ΔCCx ΔCCy Typical Spatial Radiation Pattern 0 20 40 60 80 100 -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (º) xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 12 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Thermal Design The maximum forward current is determined by the thermal resistance between the LED junction and ambient. It is crucial for the end product to be designed in a manner that minimizes the thermal resistance from the solder point to ambient in order to optimize lamp life and optical characteristics. 0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 2°C/W Rj-a = 4°C/W Rj-a = 6°C/W Rj-a = 8°C/W 6 V Thermal Design 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 2°C/W Rj-a = 4°C/W Rj-a = 6°C/W Rj-a = 8°C/W 12 V xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 13 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups - Brightness (Tj = 85 °C) XLamp MK-R LEDs are tested for luminous flux and placed into one of the following bins. Group Code Min. Luminous Flux Max. Luminous Flux D2 510 550 D4 550 590 E2 590 635 E4 635 680 F2 680 730 F4 730 780 G2 780 840 G4 840 900 H2 900 970 H4 970 1040 J2 1040 1120 J4 1120 1200 K2 1200 1290 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 14 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups - Chromaticity (Tj = 85 °C) XLamp MK‑R LEDs are tested for chromaticity and placed into one of the regions defined by the following bounding coordinates. EasyWhite Color Temperatures – 4-Step Code CCT x y 50F 5000 K 0.3407 0.3459 0.3415 0.3586 0.3499 0.3654 0.3484 0.3521 45F 4500 K 0.3674 0.3772 0.3582 0.3710 0.3562 0.3573 0.3642 0.3625 40F 4000 K 0.3744 0.3685 0.3782 0.3837 0.3912 0.3917 0.3863 0.3758 35F 3500 K 0.3981 0.3800 0.4040 0.3966 0.4186 0.4037 0.4116 0.3865 30F 3000 K 0.4242 0.3919 0.4322 0.4096 0.4449 0.4141 0.4359 0.3960 27F 2700 K 0.4475 0.3994 0.4573 0.4178 0.4695 0.4207 0.4589 0.4021 EasyWhite Color Temperatures – 2-Step Code CCT x y 50H 5000 K 0.3429 0.3507 0.3434 0.3571 0.3475 0.3604 0.3469 0.3539 45H 4500 K 0.3643 0.3720 0.3597 0.3689 0.3587 0.3620 0.3628 0.3647 40H 4000 K 0.3784 0.3741 0.3804 0.3818 0.3867 0.3857 0.3844 0.3778 35H 3500 K 0.4030 0.3857 0.4061 0.3941 0.4132 0.3976 0.4099 0.3890 30H 3000 K 0.4291 0.3973 0.4333 0.4062 0.4395 0.4084 0.4351 0.3994 27H 2700 K 0.4528 0.4046 0.4578 0.4138 0.4638 0.4152 0.4586 0.4060 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 15 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups - Chromaticity (Tj = 85 °C) - cONTINUED ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y Bin Code x y Bin Code x y Bin Code x y 051 6200 K 0A0 0.2920 0.3060 0R0 0.2950 0.2970 1A0 0.3048 0.3207 1R0 0.3068 0.3113 0.2984 0.3133 0.3009 0.3042 0.3130 0.3290 0.3144 0.3186 0.3009 0.3042 0.3037 0.2937 0.3144 0.3186 0.3161 0.3059 0.2950 0.2970 0.2980 0.2880 0.3068 0.3113 0.3093 0.2993 0B0 0.2895 0.3135 0S0 0.2870 0.3210 1B0 0.3028 0.3304 1S0 0.3005 0.3415 0.2962 0.3220 0.2937 0.3312 0.3115 0.3391 0.3099 0.3509 0.2984 0.3133 0.2962 0.3220 0.3130 0.3290 0.3115 0.3391 0.2920 0.3060 0.2895 0.3135 0.3048 0.3207 0.3028 0.3304 0C0 0.2962 0.3220 0T0 0.2937 0.3312 1C0 0.3115 0.3391 1T0 0.3099 0.3509 0.3028 0.3304 0.3005 0.3415 0.3205 0.3481 0.3196 0.3602 0.3048 0.3207 0.3028 0.3304 0.3213 0.3373 0.3205 0.3481 0.2984 0.3133 0.2962 0.3220 0.3130 0.3290 0.3115 0.3391 0D0 0.2984 0.3133 0U0 0.3009 0.3042 1D0 0.3130 0.3290 1U0 0.3144 0.3186 0.3048 0.3207 0.3068 0.3113 0.3213 0.3373 0.3221 0.3261 0.3068 0.3113 0.3093 0.2993 0.3221 0.3261 0.3231 0.3120 0.3009 0.3042 0.3037 0.2937 0.3144 0.3186 0.3161 0.3059 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y Bin Code x y Bin Code x y 051 6200 K 2A0 0.3215 0.3350 2R0 0.3222 0.3243 3A0 .3371 .3490 0.3290 0.3417 0.3290 0.3300 .3451 .3554 0.3290 0.3300 0.3290 0.3180 .3440 .3427 0.3222 0.3243 0.3231 0.3120 .3366 .3369 2B0 0.3207 0.3462 2S0 0.3196 0.3602 3B0 .3376 .3616 0.3290 0.3538 0.3290 0.3690 .3463 .3687 0.3290 0.3417 0.3290 0.3538 .3451 .3554 0.3215 0.3350 0.3207 0.3462 .3371 .3490 2C0 0.3290 0.3538 2T0 0.3290 0.3690 3C0 .3463 .3687 0.3376 0.3616 0.3381 0.3762 .3551 .3760 0.3371 0.3490 0.3376 0.3616 .3533 .3620 0.3290 0.3417 0.3290 0.3538 .3451 .3554 2D0 0.3290 0.3417 2U0 0.3290 0.3300 3D0 .3451 .3554 0.3371 0.3490 0.3366 0.3369 .3533 .3620 0.3366 0.3369 0.3361 0.3245 .3515 .3487 0.3290 0.3300 0.3290 0.3180 .3440 .3427 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 16 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups - Chromaticity (Tj = 85 °C) - cONTINUED ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E3 5000 K 3A0 .3371 .3490 .3451 .3554 .3440 .3427 .3366 .3369 3B0 .3376 .3616 .3463 .3687 .3451 .3554 .3371 .3490 3C0 .3463 .3687 .3551 .3760 .3533 .3620 .3451 .3554 3D0 .3451 .3554 .3533 .3620 .3515 .3487 .3440 .3427 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E2 5700 K 2A0 0.3215 0.3350 0.3290 0.3417 0.3290 0.3300 0.3222 0.3243 2B0 0.3207 0.3462 0.3290 0.3538 0.3290 0.3417 0.3215 0.3350 2C0 0.3290 0.3538 0.3376 0.3616 0.3371 0.3490 0.3290 0.3417 2D0 0.3290 0.3417 0.3371 0.3490 0.3366 0.3369 0.3290 0.3300 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E1 6500 K 1A0 0.3048 0.3207 0.3130 0.3290 0.3144 0.3186 0.3068 0.3113 1B0 0.3028 0.3304 0.3115 0.3391 0.3130 0.3290 0.3048 0.3207 1C0 0.3115 0.3391 0.3205 0.3481 0.3213 0.3373 0.3130 0.3290 1D0 0.3130 0.3290 0.3213 0.3373 0.3221 0.3261 0.3144 0.3186 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E5 4000 K 5A0 .3670 .3578 .3702 .3722 .3825 .3798 .3783 .3646 5B0 .3702 .3722 .3736 .3874 .3869 .3958 .3825 .3798 5C0 .3825 .3798 .3869 .3958 .4006 .4044 .3950 .3875 5D0 .3783 .3646 .3825 .3798 .3950 .3875 .3898 .3716 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E6 3500 K 6A0 .3889 .3690 .3941 .3848 .4080 .3916 .4017 .3751 6B0 .3941 .3848 .3996 .4015 .4146 .4089 .4080 .3916 6C0 .4080 .3916 .4146 .4089 .4299 .4165 .4221 .3984 6D0 .4017 .3751 .4080 .3916 .4221 .3984 .4147 .3814 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E4 4500 K 4A0 .3530 .3597 .3615 .3659 .3590 .3521 .3512 .3465 4B0 .3548 .3736 .3641 .3804 .3615 .3659 .3530 .3597 4C0 .3641 .3804 .3736 .3874 .3702 .3722 .3615 .3659 4D0 .3668 .3957 .3771 .4034 .3736 .3874 .3641 .3804 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 17 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Performance Groups - Chromaticity (Tj = 85 °C) - cONTINUED Cree EasyWhite Bins Plotted on the 1931 CIE Color Space (Tj = 85 °C) ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E7 3000 K 7A0 .4147 .3814 .4221 .3984 .4342 .4028 .4259 .3853 7B0 .4221 .3984 .4299 .4165 .4430 .4212 .4342 .4028 7C0 .4342 .4028 .4430 .4212 .4562 .4260 .4465 .4071 7D0 .4259 .3853 .4342 .4028 .4465 .4071 .4373 .3893 ANSI White Bins Code CCT Bin Code x y 0E8 2700 K 8A0 .4373 .3893 .4465 .4071 .4582 .4099 .4483 .3919 8B0 .4465 .4071 .4562 .4260 .4687 .4289 .4582 .4099 8C0 .4582 .4099 .4687 .4289 .4813 .4319 .4700 .4126 8D0 .4483 .3919 .4582 .4099 .4700 .4126 .4593 .3944 2700K 3000K 3500K 4000K 4500K 5000K 5700K 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 CCy CCx ANSI C78.377 Quadrangle EasyWhite 4-step EasyWhite 2-step xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 18 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Cree ANSI White Bins Plotted on the 1931 CIE Color Space (Tj = 85 °C) 2600K 2900K 2700K 3000K 3200K 3500K 3700K 4000K 4300K 4500K 4750K 5000K 5300K 3A 3B 3C 3D 4A 4B 4C 4D 5A 5B 5C 5D 6A 6B 6C 6D 7A 7B 7C 7D 8A 8B 8C 8D 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.41 0.42 0.43 0.44 0.45 0.46 0.47 0.48 0.49 CCy CCx ANSI C78.377A 5000K 5700K 6500K 8000K 0A 0B 0C 0D 0R 0S 0T 0U 1A 1B 1C 1D 2A 2B 2C 2D 3A 3B 1R 1S 1T 1U 2R 2S 2T 2U 3R 3S 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.31 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 0.37 0.38 0.39 0.40 0.28 0.29 0.30 0.31 0.32 0.33 0.34 0.35 0.36 CCy CCx ANSI C78.377A xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 19 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Bin and Order Code Formats Bin codes and order codes are configured as follows. Order Code B in Code SSSCCC-HH-HHHH-GHKLNNNNN Series = MKR Internal code Forward voltage class B = 6 V D = 12 V CRI specification B = 70-CRI minimum H = 80-CRI minimum U = 90-CRI minimum 0 = No minimum Kit code Internal code Color AWT = White SSSCCC-E-DDD-MM-HK-L-PP Series = MKR Internal code Luminous flux group Internal code CRI specification B = 70-CRI minimum H = 80-CRI minimum U = 90-CRI minimum 0 = No minimum Forward voltage class B = 6 V D = 12 V Chromaticity bin Color AWT = White xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 20 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Reflow Soldering Characteristics In testing, Cree has found XLamp MK-R LEDs to be compatible with JEDEC J-STD-020C, using the parameters listed below. As a general guideline, Cree recommends that users follow the recommended soldering profile provided by the manufacturer of solder paste used. Note that this general guideline may not apply to all PCB designs and configurations of reflow soldering equipment. Profile Feature Lead-Based Solder Lead-Free Solder Average Ramp-Up Rate (Tsmax to Tp) 3 °C/second max. 3 °C/second max. Preheat: Temperature Min (Tsmin) 100 °C 150 °C Preheat: Temperature Max (Tsmax) 150 °C 200 °C Preheat: Time (tsmin to tsmax) 60-120 seconds 60-180 seconds Time Maintained Above: Temperature (TL) 183 °C 217 °C Time Maintained Above: Time (tL) 60-150 seconds 60-150 seconds Peak/Classification Temperature (Tp) 215 °C 260 °C Time Within 5 °C of Actual Peak Temperature (tp) 10-30 seconds 20-40 seconds Ramp-Down Rate 6 °C/second max. 6 °C/second max. Time 25 °C to Peak Temperature 6 minutes max. 8 minutes max. Note: All temperatures refer to the topside of the package, measured on the package body surface. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 21 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Notes Lumen Maintenance Projections Cree now uses standardized IES LM-80-08 and TM-21-11 methods for collecting long-term data and extrapolating LED lumen maintenance. For information on the specific LM‑80 data sets available for this LED, refer to the public LM-80 results document at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/LM80_results. Please read the XLamp Long-Term Lumen Maintenance application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/lumen_ maintenance for more details on Cree’s lumen maintenance testing and forecasting. Please read the XLamp Thermal Management application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/thermal_management for details on how thermal design, ambient temperature, and drive current affect the LED junction temperature. Moisture Sensitivity In testing, Cree has found XLamp MK‑R LEDs to have unlimited floor life in conditions ≤30 ºC/85% relative humidity (RH). Moisture testing included a 168-hour soak at 85 ºC/85% RH followed by 3 reflow cycles, with visual and electrical inspections at each stage. Cree recommends keeping XLamp LEDs in their sealed moisture-barrier packaging until immediately prior to use. Cree also recommends returning any unused LEDs to the resealable moisture-barrier bag and closing the bag immediately after use. RoHS Compliance The levels of RoHS restricted materials in this product are below the maximum concentration values (also referred to as the threshold limits) permitted for such substances, or are used in an exempted application, in accordance with EU Directive 2011/65/EC (RoHS2), as implemented January 2, 2013. RoHS Declarations for this product can be obtained from your Cree representative or from the Product Documentation sections of www.cree.com. REAC h Compliance REACh substances of high concern (SVHCs) information is available for this product. Since the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) has published notice of their intent to frequently revise the SVHC listing for the foreseeable future, please contact a Cree representative to insure you get the most up-to-date REACh SVHC Declaration. REACh banned substance information (REACh Article 67) is also available upon request. UL Recognized Component Level 4 enclosure consideration. The LED package or a portion thereof has been investigated as a fire and electrical enclosure per ANSI/UL 8750. Vision Advisory Claim WARNING: Do not look at exposed lamp in operation. Eye injury can result. See the Eye Safety application note at www. cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/led_eye_safety. xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 22 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Mechanical Dimensions All measurements are ±.13 mm unless otherwise indicated. CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A B C D 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 7.000 7.000 .73 4.08 R3.250 6.76 .70 6.70 .70 3.90 6.55 5.27 .55 3.00 1.23 6.70 6.70 .70 .70 3.90 D. CRONIN REV B RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN SHADED AREA IS OPEN RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD Top View Side View Bottom View Recommended PCB Solder Pad Recommended Stencil Pattern (Shaded Area Is Open) Anode SIZE TITLE SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 Phone Fax 4600 Durham, PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 7.000 7.000 .73 4.08 R3.250 6.76 .70 .70 6.70 .70 3.90 6.55 5.27 .55 3.00 1.23 6.70 .70 .70 3.90 11.000 2610-00031 MKR Marketing Spec D. CRONIN 11/7/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY B VIEWS SHOW LATEST REVISION DC RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN SHADED AREA IS OPEN RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD SIZE TITLE SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 Phone (Fax (919) 4600 Silicon Durham, PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 7.000 7.000 .73 4.08 R3.250 6.76 .70 .70 6.70 .70 3.90 6.55 5.27 .55 3.00 1.23 6.70 .70 .70 3.90 11.000 2610-00031 MKR Marketing Spec D. CRONIN 11/7/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE B VIEWS SHOW LATEST REVISION DC 8/RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN SHADED AREA IS OPEN RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 23 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Tape and Reel All Cree carrier tapes conform to EIA-481D, Automated Component Handling Systems Standard. All dimensions in mm. SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .010 .XX ± .03 .X ± .06 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .01 .XXX ± .005 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTANED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE SURFACE FINISH: 63 330 +.25 -.75 12.4 +1.0 -.5 MEASURED AT EDGE 16.4 +0.2 .0 MEASURED AT HUB 12.4 +.2 .0 MEASURED AT HUB 13.1 ±.2 1.9±.4 21±.4 60° 60° 0.500 1 /1 2400-00009 A REEL, 13" X 12MM, 3 PIECE SNAP - ANTI-STATIC HIPS -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 09/29/09 2400-00009 INDEX QTY ITEM COMMENTS 1 1 2400-00009-CORE 2 2 2400-00009-REEL REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 Trailer 180mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (15 pockets min.) Loaded Pockets (1000 Lamps) 12±.1 4.31 16 +.3 -.0 1.75 4±.10 ±.10 Leader 420mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (35 pockets min.) 7.4 0.36 13" 13mm 3.000 1 /1 2402-00025 A MKR LOADING SPEC -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 12/7/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D A Initial Release DC 12/7/12 END START User Feed Direction CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE User Feed Direction 1.5± .1 xlamp MK-R leds 2010 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree, the Cree logo and XLamp are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 24 Copyright © 2012-2014 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo, XLamp® and EasyWhite® are registered trademarks and SC3 Technology™ is a trademark of Cree, Inc. Packaging Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Dessicant (inside bag) Humidity Indicator Card (inside bag) Patent Label Label with Customer Code, Qty, Reel Patent Label Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Unpackaged Reel Packaged Reel Boxed Reel Precision Instrumentation Amplifier AD524 Rev. F Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106, U.S.A. Tel: 781.329.4700 www.analog.com Fax: 781.461.3113 ©2007 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. FEATURES Low noise: 0.3 μV p-p at 0.1 Hz to 10 Hz Low nonlinearity: 0.003% (G = 1) High CMRR: 120 dB (G = 1000) Low offset voltage: 50 μV Low offset voltage drift: 0.5 μV/°C Gain bandwidth product: 25 MHz Pin programmable gains of 1, 10, 100, 1000 Input protection, power-on/power-off No external components required Internally compensated MIL-STD-883B and chips available 16-lead ceramic DIP and SOIC packages and 20-terminal leadless chip carrier available Available in tape and reel in accordance with EIA-481A standard Standard military drawing also available FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM AD524 20kΩ – INPUT G = 10 + INPUT G = 100 G = 1000 4.44kΩ 404Ω 40Ω PROTECTION 20kΩ 20kΩ 20kΩ 20kΩ 20kΩ SENSE REFERENCE PROTECTION RG1 RG2 1 13 12 11 16 3 2 Vb OUTPUT 00500-001 Figure 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION The AD524 is a precision monolithic instrumentation amplifier designed for data acquisition applications requiring high accu- racy under worst-case operating conditions. An outstanding combination of high linearity, high common-mode rejection, low offset voltage drift, and low noise makes the AD524 suitable for use in many data acquisition systems. The AD524 has an output offset voltage drift of less than 25 μV/°C, input offset voltage drift of less than 0.5 μV/°C, CMR above 90 dB at unity gain (120 dB at G = 1000), and maximum nonlinearity of 0.003% at G = 1. In addition to the outstanding dc specifications, the AD524 also has a 25 kHz bandwidth (G = 1000). To make it suitable for high speed data acquisition systems, the AD524 has an output slew rate of 5 V/μs and settles in 15 μs to 0.01% for gains of 1 to 100. As a complete amplifier, the AD524 does not require any exter- nal components for fixed gains of 1, 10, 100 and 1000. For other gain settings between 1 and 1000, only a single resistor is required. The AD524 input is fully protected for both power-on and power-off fault conditions. The AD524 IC instrumentation amplifier is available in four different versions of accuracy and operating temperature range. The economical A grade, the low drift B grade, and lower drift, higher linearity C grade are specified from −25°C to +85°C. The S grade guarantees performance to specification over the extended temperature range −55°C to +125°C. The AD524 is available in a 16-lead ceramic DIP, 16-lead SBDIP, 16-lead SOIC wide packages, and 20-terminal leadless chip carrier. PRODUCT HIGHLIGHTS 1. The AD524 has guaranteed low offset voltage, offset voltage drift, and low noise for precision high gain applications. 2. The AD524 is functionally complete with pin program- mable gains of 1, 10, 100, and 1000, and single resistor programmable for any gain. 3. Input and output offset nulling terminals are provided for very high precision applications and to minimize offset voltage changes in gain ranging applications. 4. The AD524 is input protected for both power-on and power-off fault conditions. 5. The AD524 offers superior dynamic performance with a gain bandwidth product of 25 MHz, full power response of 75 kHz and a settling time of 15 μs to 0.01% of a 20 V step (G = 100). MPXV7002 Rev 2, 1/2009 Freescale Semiconductor © Freescale Semiconductor, Inc., 2005, 2009. All rights reserved. Pressure + Integrated Silicon Pressure Sensor On-Chip Signal Conditioned, Temperature Compensated and Calibrated The MPXV7002 series piezoresistive transducers are state-of-the-art monolithic silicon pressure sensors designed for a wide range of applications, but particularly those employing a microcontroller or microprocessor with A/D inputs. This transducer combines advanced micromachining techniques, thinfilm metallization, and bipolar processing to provide an accurate, high level analog output signal that is proportional to the applied pressure. Features • 2.5% Typical Error over +10°C to +60°C with Auto Zero • 6.25% Maximum Error over +10°C to +60°C without Auto Zero • Ideally Suited for Microprocessor or Microcontroller-Based Systems • Thermoplastic (PPS) Surface Mount Package • Temperature Compensated over +10° to +60°C • Patented Silicon Shear Stress Strain Gauge • Available in Differential and Gauge Configurations ORDERING INFORMATION Device Name Package Options Case No. # of Ports Pressure Type Device None Single Dual Gauge Differential Absolute Marking Small Outline Package (MPXV7002 Series) MPXV7002GC6U Rails 482A • • MPXV7002G MPXV7002GC6T1 Tape & Reel 482A • • MPXV7002G MPXV7002GP Trays 1369 • • MPXV7002G MPXV7002DP Trays 1351 • • MPXV7002DP MPXV7002 Series -2 to 2 kPa (-0.3 to 0.3 psi) 0.5 to 4.5 V Output SMALL OUTLINE PACKAGE MPXV7002GC6U/C6T1 CASE 482A-01 MPXV7002DP CASE 1351-01 MPXV7002GP CASE 1369-01 Application Examples • Hospital Beds • HVAC • Respiratory Systems • Process Control MPXV7002 Sensors 2 Freescale Semiconductor Pressure Operating Characteristics Table 1. Operating Characteristics (VS = 5.0 Vdc, TA = 25°C unless otherwise noted. Decoupling circuit shown in Figure 3 required to meet specification.) Characteristic Symbol Min Typ Max Unit Pressure Range(1) 1. 1.0 kPa (kiloPascal) equals 0.145 psi. POP –2.0 — 2.0 kPa Supply Voltage(2) 2. Device is ratiometric within this specified excitation range. VS 4.75 5.0 5.25 Vdc Supply Current Io — — 10 mAdc Pressure Offset(3) (10 to 60°C) @ VS = 5.0 Volts 3. Offset (Voff) is defined as the output voltage at the minimum rated pressure. Voff 2.25 2.5 2.75 Vdc Full Scale Output(4) (10 to 60°C) @ VS = 5.0 Volts 4. Full Scale Output (VFSO) is defined as the output voltage at the maximum or full rated pressure. VFSO 4.25 4.5 4.75 Vdc Full Scale Span(5) (10 to 60°C) @ VS = 5.0 Volts 5. Full Scale Span (VFSS) is defined as the algebraic difference between the output voltage at full rated pressure and the output voltage at the minimum rated pressure. VFSS 3.5 4.0 4.5 V Vdc Accuracy(6) (10 to 60°C) 6. Accuracy (error budget) consists of the following: Linearity: Output deviation from a straight line relationship with pressure over the specified pressure range. Temperature Hysteresis: Output deviation at any temperature within the operating temperature range, after the temperature is cycled to and from the minimum or maximum operating temperature points, with zero differential pressure applied. Pressure Hysteresis: Output deviation at any pressure within the specified range, when this pressure is cycled to and from the minimum or maximum rated pressure, at 25°C. TcSpan: Output deviation over the temperature range of 10° to 60°C, relative to 25°C. TcOffset: Output deviation with minimum rated pressure applied, over the temperature range of 10° to 60°C, relative to 25°C. Variation from Nominal: The variation from nominal values, for Offset or Full Scale Span, as a percent of VFSS, at 25°C. — — ±2.5(7) 7. Auto Zero at Factory Installation: Due to the sensitivity of the MPXV7002 Series, external mechanical stresses and mounting position can affect the zero pressure output reading. Auto zero is defined as storing the zero pressure output reading and subtracting this from the device's output during normal operations. Reference AN1636 for specific information. The specified accuracy assumes a maximum temperature change of ± 5°C between auto zero and measurement. ±6.25 %VFSS Sensitivity V/P — 1.0 —- V/kPa Response Time(8) 8. Response Time is defined as the time for the incremental change in the output to go from 10% to 90% of its final value when subjected to a specified step change in pressure. tR — 1.0 —- ms Output Source Current at Full Scale Output IO+ — 0.1 —- mAdc Warm-Up Time(9) 9. Warm-up Time is defined as the time required for the product to meet the specified output voltage after the Pressure has been stabilized. — — 20 —- ms MPXV7002 Sensors Freescale Semiconductor 3 Pressure Maximum Ratings Figure 1 shows a block diagram of the internal circuitry integrated on a pressure sensor chip. Figure 1. Integrated Pressure Sensor Schematic Table 2. Maximum Ratings(1) 1. Exposure beyond the specified limits may cause permanent damage or degradation to the device. Rating Symbol Value Unit Maximum Pressure (P1 > P2) Pmax 75 kPa Storage Temperature Tstg –30 to +100 °C Operating Temperature TA 10 to 60 °C Sensing Element Thin Film Temperature Compensation and Gain Stage #1 Gain Stage #2 and Ground Reference Shift Circuitry VS Vout GND Pins 1, 5, 6, 7, and 8 are NO CONNECTS for Small Outline Package Device 2 4 3 MPXV7002 Sensors 4 Freescale Semiconductor Pressure ON-CHIP TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION, CALIBRATION AND SIGNAL CONDITIONING The performance over temperature is achieved by integrating the shear-stress strain gauge, temperature compensation, calibration and signal conditioning circuitry onto a single monolithic chip. Figure 2 illustrates the Differential or Gauge configuration in the basic chip carrier (Case 482). A gel die coat isolates the die surface and wire bonds from the environment, while allowing the pressure signal to be transmitted to the sensor diaphragm. The MPXV7002 series pressure sensor operating characteristics, and internal reliability and qualification tests are based on use of dry air as the pressure media. Media, other than dry air, may have adverse effects on sensor performance and long-term reliability. Contact the factory for information regarding media compatibility in your application. Figure 3 shows the recommended decoupling circuit for interfacing the integrated sensor to the A/D input of a microprocessor or microcontroller. Proper decoupling of the power supply is recommended. Figure 4 shows the sensor output signal relative to pressure input. Typical, minimum, and maximum output curves are shown for operation over a temperature range of 10° to 60°C using the decoupling circuit shown in Figure 3. The output will saturate outside of the specified pressure range. Figure 2. Cross-Sectional Diagram SOP (not to scale) Figure 3. Recommended Power Supply Decoupling and Output Filtering (For additional output filtering, please refer to Application Note AN1646.) Fluoro Silicone Gel Die Coat Wire Bond Die P1 Stainless Steel Cap Thermoplastic Case Differential Sensing Die Bond Element P2 Lead Frame +5 V 1.0 μF 0.01 μF GND 470 pF Vs Vout IPS OUTPUT MPXV7002 Sensors Freescale Semiconductor 5 Pressure Figure 4. Output versus Pressure Differential PRESSURE (P1)/VACUUM (P2) SIDE IDENTIFICATION TABLE Freescale designates the two sides of the pressure sensor as the Pressure (P1) side and the Vacuum (P2) side. The Pressure (P1) side is the side containing a gel die coat which protects the die from harsh media. The Pressure (P1) side may be identified by using the following table: MINIMUM RECOMMENDED FOOTPRINT FOR SURFACE MOUNTED APPLICATIONS Surface mount board layout is a critical portion of the total design. The footprint for the surface mount packages must be the correct size to ensure proper solder connection interface between the board and the package. With the correct footprint, the packages will self align when subjected to a solder reflow process. It is always recommended to design boards with a solder mask layer to avoid bridging and shorting between solder pads. Figure 5. Small Outline Package Footprint Differential Pressure (kPa) Output Voltage (V) 5.0 4.0 3.0 2.0 1.0 0 0 2 TYPICAL MIN -2 -1 1 Transfer Function: Vout = VS × (0.2 × P(kPa)+0.5) ± 6.25% VFSS VS = 5.0 Vdc TA = 10 to 60°C MAX Part Number Case Type Pressure (P1) Side Identifier MPXV7002GC6U/GC6T1 482A-01 Side with Port Attached MPXV7002GP 1369-01 Side with Port Attached MPXV7002DP 1351-01 Side with Part Marking 0.660 16.76 0.060 TYP 8X 1.52 0.100 TYP 8X 2.54 0.100 TYP 8X 2.54 0.300 7.62 inch mm SCALE 2:1 MPXV7002 Sensors 6 Freescale Semiconductor Pressure PACKAGE DIMENSIONS CASE 482A-01 ISSUE A SMALL OUTLINE PACKAGE PIN 1 IDENTIFIER H SEATING PLANE -TW C M J K V DIM MIN MAX MIN MAX INCHES MILLIMETERS A 0.415 0.425 10.54 10.79 B 0.415 0.425 10.54 10.79 C 0.500 0.520 12.70 13.21 D 0.038 0.042 0.96 1.07 G 0.100 BSC 2.54 BSC H 0.002 0.010 0.05 0.25 J 0.009 0.011 0.23 0.28 K 0.061 0.071 1.55 1.80 M 0° 7° 0° 7° N 0.444 0.448 11.28 11.38 S 0.709 0.725 18.01 18.41 V 0.245 0.255 6.22 6.48 W 0.115 0.125 2.92 3.17 NOTES: 1. DIMENSIONING AND TOLERANCING PER ANSI Y14.5M, 1982. 2. CONTROLLING DIMENSION: INCH. 3. DIMENSION A AND B DO NOT INCLUDE MOLD PROTRUSION. 4. MAXIMUM MOLD PROTRUSION 0.15 (0.006). 5. ALL VERTICAL SURFACES 5° TYPICAL DRAFT. S D 8 PL G 4 5 8 1 0.25 (0.010) M T B S A -A- N -BS MPXV7002 Sensors Freescale Semiconductor 7 Pressure PACKAGE DIMENSIONS CASE 1351-01 ISSUE A SMALL OUTLINE PACKAGE MPXV7002 Sensors 8 Freescale Semiconductor Pressure PACKAGE DIMENSIONS MPXV7002 Sensors Freescale Semiconductor 9 Pressure PACKAGE DIMENSIONS CASE 1369-01 ISSUE B SMALL OUTLINE PACKAGE MPXV7002 Sensors 10 Freescale Semiconductor Pressure PACKAGE DIMENSIONS CASE 1369-01 ISSUE B SMALL OUTLINE PACKAGE MPXV7002 Rev. 2 1/2009 How to Reach Us: Home Page: www.freescale.com Web Support: http://www.freescale.com/support USA/Europe or Locations Not Listed: Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. Technical Information Center, EL516 2100 East Elliot Road Tempe, Arizona 85284 1-800-521-6274 or +1-480-768-2130 www.freescale.com/support Europe, Middle East, and Africa: Freescale Halbleiter Deutschland GmbH Technical Information Center Schatzbogen 7 81829 Muenchen, Germany +44 1296 380 456 (English) +46 8 52200080 (English) +49 89 92103 559 (German) +33 1 69 35 48 48 (French) www.freescale.com/support Japan: Freescale Semiconductor Japan Ltd. Headquarters ARCO Tower 15F 1-8-1, Shimo-Meguro, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-0064 Japan 0120 191014 or +81 3 5437 9125 support.japan@freescale.com Asia/Pacific: Freescale Semiconductor China Ltd. Exchange Building 23F No. 118 Jianguo Road Chaoyang District Beijing 100022 China +86 010 5879 8000 support.asia@freescale.com For Literature Requests Only: Freescale Semiconductor Literature Distribution Center P.O. Box 5405 Denver, Colorado 80217 1-800-441-2447 or +1-303-675-2140 Fax: +1-303-675-2150 LDCForFreescaleSemiconductor@hibbertgroup.com Information in this document is provided solely to enable system and software implementers to use Freescale Semiconductor products. There are no express or implied copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits or integrated circuits based on the information in this document. Freescale Semiconductor reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein. Freescale Semiconductor makes no warranty, representation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose, nor does Freescale Semiconductor assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit, and specifically disclaims any and all liability, including without limitation consequential or incidental damages. “Typical” parameters that may be provided in Freescale Semiconductor data sheets and/or specifications can and do vary in different applications and actual performance may vary over time. All operating parameters, including “Typicals”, must be validated for each customer application by customer’s technical experts. Freescale Semiconductor does not convey any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others. Freescale Semiconductor products are not designed, intended, or authorized for use as components in systems intended for surgical implant into the body, or other applications intended to support or sustain life, or for any other application in which the failure of the Freescale Semiconductor product could create a situation where personal injury or death may occur. Should Buyer purchase or use Freescale Semiconductor products for any such unintended or unauthorized application, Buyer shall indemnify and hold Freescale Semiconductor and its officers, employees, subsidiaries, affiliates, and distributors harmless against all claims, costs, damages, and expenses, and reasonable attorney fees arising out of, directly or indirectly, any claim of personal injury or death associated with such unintended or unauthorized use, even if such claim alleges that Freescale Semiconductor was negligent regarding the design or manufacture of the part. Freescale™ and the Freescale logo are trademarks of Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. All other product or service names are the property of their respective owners. © Freescale Semiconductor, Inc. 2009. All rights reserved. Product family data sheet Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. Cree, Inc. 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, NC 27703 USA Tel: +1.919.313.5300 CLD-DS51 Rev 8A Cree® XLamp® XP-G2 LEDs Product Description The XLamp XP-G2 LED builds on the unprecedented performance of the original XP-G by increasing lumen output up to 20% while providing a single die LED point source for precise optical control. The XP-G2 LED shares the same footprint as the original XP-G, providing a seamless upgrade path and shortening the design cycle. XLamp XP-G2 LEDs are the ideal choice for lighting applications where high light output and maximum efficacy are required, such as LED light bulbs, outdoor lighting, portable lighting, indoor lighting and solar-powered lighting. FEATURES • Available in white, outdoor white and 80-, 85- and 90-CRI white • ANSI-compatible chromaticity bins • Binned at 85 °C • Maximum drive current: 1500 mA • Low thermal resistance: 4 °C/W • Wide viewing angle: 115° • Unlimited floor life at ≤ 30 ºC/85% RH • Reflow solderable - JEDEC J‑STD‑020C • Electrically neutral thermal path • RoHS- and REACh‑ compliant • UL-recognized component (E349212) www.cree.com/Xlamp Table of Contents Characteristics........................... 2 Flux Characteristics..................... 3 Relative Spectral Power Distribution............................... 4 Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature.............................. 4 Electrical Characteristics.............. 5 Relative Flux vs. Current............. 5 Relative Chromaticity vs Current and Temperature........................ 6 Typical Spatial Distribution........... 7 Thermal Design.......................... 7 Reflow Soldering Characteristics... 8 Notes........................................ 9 Mechanical Dimensions..............10 Tape and Reel...........................11 Packaging.................................12 Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 2 XLamp xp-g2 leds Characteristics Characteristics Unit Minimum Typical Maximum Thermal resistance, junction to solder point °C/W 4 Viewing angle (FWHM) degrees 115 Temperature coefficient of voltage mV/°C -1.8 ESD withstand voltage (HBM per Mil-Std-883D) V 8000 DC forward current mA 1500 Reverse voltage V 5 Forward voltage (@ 350 mA, 85 °C) V 2.8 3.15 Forward voltage (@ 700 mA, 85 °C) V 2.9 Forward voltage (@ 1000 mA, 85 °C) V 3.0 Forward voltage (@ 1500 mA, 85 °C) V 3.1 LED junction temperature °C 150 Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 3 XLamp xp-g2 leds Flux Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) The following table provides several base order codes for XLamp XP-G2 LEDs. It is important to note that the base order codes listed here are a subset of the total available order codes for the product family. Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux @ 350 mA Calculated Minimum Luminous Flux (lm)** @ 85 °C Order Code Min. Max. Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* 700 mA 1.0 A 1.5 A Cool White 5000 K 8300 K R3 122 138 223 297 402 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00F51 R4 130 147 237 316 429 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00G51 R5 139 158 254 338 458 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00H51 Outdoor White 3200 K 5300 K R2 114 129 208 277 376 XPGBWT-01-0000-00EC2 R3 122 138 223 297 402 XPGBWT-01-0000-00FC2 R4 130 147 237 316 429 XPGBWT-01-0000-00GC2 Neutral White 3700 K 5300 K Q5 107 121 195 260 353 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00DE4 R2 114 129 208 277 376 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00EE4 R3 122 138 223 297 402 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00FE4 80-CRI White 2600 K 4300 K Q4 100 113 182 243 330 XPGBWT-H1-0000-00CE7 Q5 107 121 195 260 353 XPGBWT-H1-0000-00DE7 R2 114 129 208 277 376 XPGBWT-H1-0000-00EE7 R3 122 138 223 297 402 XPGBWT-H1-0000-00FE7 Warm White 2600 K 3700 K Q4 100 113 182 243 330 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00CE7 Q5 107 121 195 260 353 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00DE7 R2 114 129 208 277 376 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00EE7 R3 122 138 223 297 402 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00FE7 R4 130 147 237 316 429 XPGBWT-L1-0000-00GE7 85-CRI White 2600 K 3200 K P3 73.9 83.8 135 180 244 XPGBWT-P1-0000-008E7 P4 80.6 91.4 147 196 266 XPGBWT-P1-0000-009E7 Q2 87.4 99.1 160 213 288 XPGBWT-P1-0000-00AE7 Q3 93.9 106 172 228 310 XPGBWT-P1-0000-00BE7 90-CRI White 2600 K 3200 K P3 73.9 83.8 135 180 244 XPGBWT-U1-0000-008E7 P4 80.6 91.4 147 196 266 XPGBWT-U1-0000-009E7 Q2 87.4 99.1 160 213 288 XPGBWT-U1-0000-00AE7 Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ±7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. • Typical CRI for Cool White (5000 K - 8300 K CCT) is 70. • Typical CRI for Neutral White (3700 K - 5300 K CCT) is 75. • Typical CRI for Outdoor White (4000 K - 5300 K CCT) is 70. • Typical CRI for Warm White (2600 K - 3700 K CCT) is 80. • Minimum CRI for 80-CRI White is 80. • Minimum CRI for 85-CRI White is 85. • Minimum CRI for 90-CRI White is 90. • Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. ** Calculated flux values at 700 mA, 1 A and 1.5 A are for reference only. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 4 XLamp xp-g2 leds Relative Spectral Power Distribution Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature (IF = 350 mA) Relative Spectral Power 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 Relative Radiant Power (%) Wavelength (nm) 5000K - 8300K CCT 3700K - 5000K CCT 2600K - 3700K CCT Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120% 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Luminous Flux Junction Temperature (ºC) Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 5 XLamp xp-g2 leds Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) Relative Flux vs. Current (TJ = 85 °C) Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 25ºC) 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 25ºC) 0% 50% 100% 150% 200% 250% 300% 350% 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 6 XLamp xp-g2 leds Relative Chromaticity vs Current and Temperature (Warm White*) * Warm White XLamp XP-G2 LEDs have a typical CRI of 80. Delta CCT vs. Current -0.020 -0.015 -0.010 -0.005 0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020 100 300 500 700 900 1100 1300 1500 Current (mA) ΔCCx ΔCCy Delta CCT vs Temp -0.020 -0.015 -0.010 -0.005 0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020 25 50 75 100 125 150 Tsp (°C) ΔCCx ΔCCy Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 7 XLamp xp-g2 leds Typical Spatial Distribution Thermal Design The maximum forward current is determined by the thermal resistance between the LED junction and ambient. It is crucial for the end product to be designed in a manner that minimizes the thermal resistance from the solder point to ambient in order to optimize lamp life and optical characteristics. Typical Spatial Radiation Pattern 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% -100 -80 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (º) Thermal Design Cool White 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 10°C/W Rj-a = 15°C/W Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 8 XLamp xp-g2 leds Reflow Soldering Characteristics In testing, Cree has found XLamp XP-G2 LEDs to be compatible with JEDEC J-STD-020C, using the parameters listed below. As a general guideline, Cree recommends that users follow the recommended soldering profile provided by the manufacturer of solder paste used. Note that this general guideline may not apply to all PCB designs and configurations of reflow soldering equipment. Profile Feature Lead-Based Solder Lead-Free Solder Average Ramp-Up Rate (Tsmax to Tp) 3 °C/second max. 3 °C/second max. Preheat: Temperature Min (Tsmin) 100 °C 150 °C Preheat: Temperature Max (Tsmax) 150 °C 200 °C Preheat: Time (tsmin to tsmax) 60-120 seconds 60-180 seconds Time Maintained Above: Temperature (TL) 183 °C 217 °C Time Maintained Above: Time (tL) 60-150 seconds 60-150 seconds Peak/Classification Temperature (Tp) 215 °C 260 °C Time Within 5 °C of Actual Peak Temperature (tp) 10-30 seconds 20-40 seconds Ramp-Down Rate 6 °C/second max. 6 °C/second max. Time 25 °C to Peak Temperature 6 minutes max. 8 minutes max. Note: All temperatures refer to topside of the package, measured on the package body surface. TP TL Temperature Time t 25˚C to Peak Preheat ts tS tP 25 Ramp-down Ramp-up Critical Zone TL to TP Tsmax Tsmin Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 9 XLamp xp-g2 leds Notes Lumen Maintenance Projections Cree now uses standardized IES LM-80-08 and TM-21-11 methods for collecting long-term data and extrapolating LED lumen maintenance. For information on the specific LM-80 data sets available for this LED, refer to the public LM-80 results document at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/LM80_results. Please read the XLamp Long-Term Lumen Maintenance application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/lumen_ maintenance for more details on Cree’s lumen maintenance testing and forecasting. Please read the XLamp Thermal Management application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/thermal_management for details on how thermal design, ambient temperature, and drive current affect the LED junction temperature. Moisture Sensitivity In testing, Cree has found XLamp XP-G2 LEDs to have unlimited floor life in conditions ≤ 30 ºC/85% relative humidity (RH). Moisture testing included a 168-hour soak at 85 ºC/85% RH followed by 3 reflow cycles, with visual and electrical inspections at each stage. Cree recommends keeping XLamp LEDs in their sealed moisture-barrier packaging until immediately prior to use. Cree also recommends returning any unused LEDs to the resealable moisture-barrier bag and closing the bag immediately after use. RoHS Compliance The levels of RoHS restricted materials in this product are below the maximum concentration values (also referred to as the threshold limits) permitted for such substances, or are used in an exempted application, in accordance with EU Directive 2011/65/EC (RoHS2), as implemented January 2, 2013. RoHS Declarations for this product can be obtained from your Cree representative or from the Product Documentation sections of www.cree.com. REAC h Compliance REACh substances of high concern (SVHCs) information is available for this product. Since the European Chemical Agency (ECHA) has published notice of their intent to frequently revise the SVHC listing for the foreseeable future, please contact a Cree representative to insure you get the most up-to-date REACh Declaration. REACh banned substance information (REACh Article 67) is also available upon request. UL Recognized Component Level 4 enclosure consideration. The LED package or a portion thereof has been investigated as a fire and electrical enclosure per ANSI/UL 8750. Vision Advisory Claim WARNING: Do not look at exposed lamp in operation. Eye injury can result. See LED Eye Safety at www.cree.com/ xlamp_app_notes/led_eye_safety. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 10 XLamp xp-g2 leds Mechanical Dimensions (TA = 25 °C) All measurements are ±.13 mm unless otherwise indicated. .60 1.65 1.60 .65 3.45 2.00 3.45 .40 .60 3.20 1.20 .40 .40 3.20 (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD 3.30 3.30 .50 1.30 .50 .50 .40 2.30 3.30 .50 1.30 .50 .73 2.6 Top View Side View Bottom View All Measurements are .13mm unless otherwise indicated Anode THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A B C D 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE MILLIMETERS AND AFTER TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 .50 .50 .40 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 .83 .65 R1.53 3.30 2.30 .50 1.30 2.36 RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 3 2 1 A B C Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.20 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .65 3.30 1.30 22.000 1 /1 2610-00024 A OUTLINE DRAWING XPG G2 D. CRONIN 05/09/12 RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 .50 .50 .40 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 .83 .65 R1.53 3.30 3.30 2.30 .50 1.30 2.36 D. CRONIN 05/09/12 REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE C DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 6 5 4 3 2 6 5 4 3 2 PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 .50 .50 .40 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 .83 .65 R1.53 3.30 3.30 2.30 .50 1.30 2.36 22.000 OUTLINE D. CRONIN 05/09/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 5 4 3 2 5 4 3 2 WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CREE, INC. THIS PLOT PROPRIETARY AND AND THE INFORMATION X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 1.65 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 .83 .65 R1.53 3.30 3.30 2.30 .50 1.30 2.36 22.000 2610-OUTLINE DRAWING D. CRONIN 05/09/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) Anode Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 11 XLamp xp-g2 leds Tape and Reel All Cree carrier tapes conform to EIA-481D, Automated Component Handling Systems Standard. All dimensions in mm. SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 Trailer 160mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (20 pockets min.) Loaded Pockets (1000 Lamps) Leader 400mm (min.) of empty pockets with at least 100mm sealed by tape (50 empty pockets min.) 12.0 +.3 -.0 1.75 ±.10 4±.1 8±.1 2.5±.1 3.000 1 /1 2402-00014 B XP HEW LOADING SPEC -- -- -- -- -- -- D. CRONIN 11/29/10 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION BY DATE APP'D B ADDED CATHODE AND ANODE NOTE REORIENTED DEVICE DC 2/26/12 END START User Feed Direction CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE User Feed Direction 7" 1.5± .1 13mm Pocket Tape Carrier Tape 13 61 12.40 0 +2.00 MEASURED AT HUB 12.40 MEASURED AT INSIDE EDGE 16.40 2400-00005 SIZE TITLE REV. C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION .X ± 0.3 .XX ± .10 .X ± .25 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .13 X° ± 1° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 361-4770 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 NOTICE CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF CREE, INC. Reel, 7" x 12mm Wide B LIUDEZHI 2012/5/25 +/-0.5 PS 190 ½öÓÃÓÚÆÀ¹À¡£ °æȨËùÓÐ (c) by Foxit Software Company, 2004 ÓÉ Foxit PDF Editor ±à¼- OD 7.5'' 13 61 12.40 0 +2.00 MEASURED AT HUB 12.40 MEASURED AT INSIDE EDGE 16.40 B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 B C D NOTICE CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF CREE, INC. +/-0.5 190 ½öÓÃÓÚÆÀ¹À¡£ °æȨËùÓÐ (c) by Foxit Software Company, 2004 ÓÉ Foxit PDF Editor ±à¼- OD 7.5'' Y X X REF 0.59 F(III) D1 P1 1.5 MIN. Bo Ao R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko (IV) Other material available. (III) (II) (I) hole to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket holes is ± 0.20. Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket hole SECTION Y-Y SECTION X-X REF R 2.24 Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 Y Y X X REF 0.59 W F(III) D1 P1 1.5 MIN. Bo Ao R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko (IV) Other material available. (III) (II) (I) hole to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket holes is ± 0.20. Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket hole SECTION Y-Y SECTION X-X 2.0 ±0.05 (I) P2 1.55 ±0.05 Do 4.0 ±0.1 (II) Po 1.75 ±0.1 E1 T 0.30 ±0.05 REF R 2.24 Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 Y D1 1.5 MIN. Bo R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko SECTION Y-Y REF Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 12 XLamp xp-g2 leds Packaging Patent Label (on bottom of box) Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Unpackaged Reel Packaged Reel Boxed Reel CREE Bin Code & Barcode Label Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Label with Customer P/N, Qty, Lot #, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Patent Label Label with Customer Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # SHARC and the SHARC logo are registered trademarks of Analog Devices, Inc. SHARC Processors ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J Document Feedback Information furnished by Analog Devices is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, no responsibility is assumed by Analog Devices for its use, nor for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from its use. Specifications subject to change without notice. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Analog Devices. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. One Technology Way, P.O. Box 9106, Norwood, MA 02062-9106 U.S.A. Tel: 781.329.4700 ©2013 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Technical Support www.analog.com SUMMARY High performance 32-bit/40-bit floating point processor optimized for high performance audio processing Single-instruction, multiple-data (SIMD) computational architecture On-chip memory—3M bits of on-chip SRAM Code compatible with all other members of the SHARC family The ADSP-2136x processors are available with up to 333 MHz core instruction rate with unique audiocentric peripherals such as the digital applications interface, S/PDIF transceiver, DTCP (digital transmission content protection protocol), serial ports, precision clock generators, and more. For complete ordering information, see Ordering Guide on Page 56. DEDICATED AUDIO COMPONENTS S/PDIF-compatible digital audio receiver/transmitter 8 channels of asynchronous sample rate converters (SRC) 16 PWM outputs configured as four groups of four outputs ROM-based security features include: JTAG access to memory permitted with a 64-bit key Protected memory regions that can be assigned to limit access under program control to sensitive code PLL has a wide variety of software and hardware multiplier/ divider ratios Available in 136-ball CSP_BGA and 144-lead LQFP_EP packages Figure 1. Functional Block Diagram Internal Memory I/F Block 0 RAM/ROM B0D 64-BIT Instruction Cache 5 stage Sequencer PEx PEy PMD 64-BIT Core Bus Cross Bar Block 1 RAM/ROM Block 2 RAM Block 3 RAM DAG1/2 Timer IOD BUS MTM/ DTCP PERIPHERAL BUS 32-BIT Internal Memory DMD 64-BIT PERIPHERAL BUS B1D 64-BIT B2D 64-BIT B3D 64-BIT DAI Peripherals Peripherals SIMD Core S Core SPI Flags PWM 3-0 PP PP Pin MUX PDAP/ IDP7-0 ASRC 3-0 TIMER 2-0 CORE FLAGS S/PDIF Tx/Rx PCG A-B SPI B SPORT 5-0 DAI Routing/Pins IOD 32-BIT FLAGx/IRQx/ TMREXP JTAG PMD 64-BIT DMD 64-BIT Rev. J | Page 2 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 TABLE OF CONTENTS Summary ............................................................... 1 Dedicated Audio Components .................................... 1 General Description ................................................. 3 SHARC Family Core Architecture ............................ 4 Family Peripheral Architecture ................................ 6 I/O Processor Features ........................................... 8 System Design ...................................................... 8 Development Tools ............................................... 9 Additional Information ........................................ 10 Related Signal Chains .......................................... 10 Pin Function Descriptions ....................................... 11 Specifications ........................................................ 14 Operating Conditions .......................................... 14 Electrical Characteristics ....................................... 15 Package Information ........................................... 16 ESD Caution ...................................................... 16 Maximum Power Dissipation ................................. 16 Absolute Maximum Ratings ................................... 16 Timing Specifications ........................................... 16 Output Drive Currents ......................................... 46 Test Conditions .................................................. 46 Capacitive Loading .............................................. 46 Thermal Characteristics ........................................ 47 144-Lead LQFP_EP Pin Configurations ....................... 48 136-Ball BGA Pin Configurations ............................... 50 Package Dimensions ............................................... 53 Surface-Mount Design .......................................... 54 Automotive Products .............................................. 55 Ordering Guide ..................................................... 56 REVISION HISTORY 7/13—Revision I to Revision J Updated Development Tools .......................................9 Added Nominal Value column in Operating Conditions .. 14 Changed Max values in Table 30 in Pulse-Width Modulation Generators ............................................................ 35 Updated Ordering Guide .......................................... 56 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 3 of 60 | July 2013 GENERAL DESCRIPTION The ADSP-2136x SHARC® processor is a member of the SIMD SHARC family of DSPs that feature Analog Devices, Inc., Super Harvard Architecture. The processor is source code-compatible with the ADSP-2126x and ADSP-2116x DSPs, as well as with first generation ADSP-2106x SHARC processors in SISD (single-instruction, single-data) mode. The ADSP-2136x are 32-/40-bit floating-point processors optimized for high performance automotive audio applications. They contain a large on-chip SRAM and ROM, multiple internal buses to eliminate I/O bottlenecks, and an innovative digital audio interface (DAI). As shown in the functional block diagram on Page 1, the ADSP-2136x uses two computational units to deliver a significant performance increase over the previous SHARC processors on a range of signal processing algorithms. With its SIMD computational hardware, the ADSP-2136x can perform two GFLOPS running at 333 MHz. Table 1 shows performance benchmarks for these devices. Table 2 shows the features of the individual product offerings. The diagram on Page 1 shows the two clock domains that make up the ADSP-2136x processors. The core clock domain contains the following features: • Two processing elements, each of which comprises an ALU, multiplier, shifter, and data register file • Data address generators (DAG1, DAG2) • Program sequencer with instruction cache • PM and DM buses capable of supporting four 32-bit data transfers between memory and the core at every core processor cycle • One periodic interval timer with pinout • On-chip SRAM (3M bit) • On-chip mask-programmable ROM (4M bit) • JTAG test access port for emulation and boundary scan. The JTAG provides software debug through user breakpoints, which allow flexible exception handling. The diagram on Page 1 also shows the following architectural features: • I/O processor that handles 32-bit DMA for the peripherals • Six full duplex serial ports • Two SPI-compatible interface ports—primary on dedicated pins, secondary on DAI pins • 8-bit or 16-bit parallel port that supports interfaces to offchip memory peripherals • Digital audio interface that includes two precision clock generators (PCG), an input data port with eight serial interfaces (IDP), an S/PDIF receiver/transmitter, 8-channel asynchronous sample rate converter (ASRC), DTCP cipher, six serial ports, a 20-bit parallel input data port (PDAP), 10 interrupts, six flag outputs, six flag inputs, three timers, and a flexible signal routing unit (SRU) Table 1. Benchmarks (at 333 MHz) Benchmark Algorithm Speed (at 333 MHz) 1024 Point Complex FFT (Radix 4, with reversal) 27.9 μs FIR Filter (per tap)1 1Assumes two files in multichannel SIMD mode. 1.5 ns IIR Filter (per biquad)1 6.0 ns Matrix Multiply (pipelined) [3×3] × [3×1] [4×4] × [4×1] 13.5 ns 23.9 ns Divide (y/x) 10.5 ns Inverse Square Root 16.3 ns Table 2. ADSP-2136x Family Features Feature ADSP-21362 ADSP-21363 ADSP-21364 ADSP-21365 ADSP-21366 RAM ROM 3M bit 4M bit 3M bit 4M bit 3M bit 4M bit 3M bit 4M bit 3M bit 4M bit Audio Decoders in ROM1 No No No Yes Yes Pulse-Width Modulation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes S/PDIF Yes No Yes Yes Yes DTCP2 Yes No No Yes No SRC SNR Performance –128 dB No SRC –140 dB –128 dB –128 dB 1 Audio decoding algorithms include PCM, Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Pro Logic IIx, DTS 96/24, Neo:6, DTS ES, MPEG-2 AAC, MP3, and functions like bass management, delay, speaker equalization, graphic equalization, and more. Decoder/post-processor algorithm combination support varies depending upon the chip version and the system configurations. Please visit www.analog.com for complete information. 2The ADSP-21362 and ADSP-21365 processors provide the Digital Transmission Content Protection protocol, a proprietary security protocol. Contact your Analog Devices sales office for more information. Rev. J | Page 4 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 SHARC FAMILY CORE ARCHITECTURE The ADSP-2136x is code-compatible at the assembly level with the ADSP-2126x, ADSP-21160, and ADSP-21161, and with the first generation ADSP-2106x SHARC processors. The ADSP-2136x shares architectural features with the ADSP-2126x and ADSP-2116x SIMD SHARC processors, as shown in Figure 2 and detailed in the following sections. SIMD Computational Engine The processor contains two computational processing elements that operate as a single-instruction, multiple-data (SIMD) engine. The processing elements are referred to as PEX and PEY and each contains an ALU, multiplier, shifter, and register file. PEX is always active, and PEY can be enabled by setting the PEYEN mode bit in the MODE1 register. When this mode is enabled, the same instruction is executed in both processing elements, but each processing element operates on different data. This architecture is efficient at executing math intensive signal processing algorithms. Entering SIMD mode also has an effect on the way data is transferred between memory and the processing elements. When in SIMD mode, twice the data bandwidth is required to sustain computational operation in the processing elements. Because of this requirement, entering SIMD mode also doubles the bandwidth between memory and the processing elements. When using the DAGs to transfer data in SIMD mode, two data values are transferred with each access of memory or the register file. Independent, Parallel Computation Units Within each processing element is a set of computational units. The computational units consist of an arithmetic/logic unit (ALU), multiplier, and shifter. These units perform all operations in a single cycle. The three units within each processing element are arranged in parallel, maximizing computational throughput. Single multifunction instructions execute parallel ALU and multiplier operations. In SIMD mode, the parallel ALU and multiplier operations occur in both processing elements. These computation units support IEEE 32-bit, single-precision floating-point, 40-bit extended-precision floating-point, and 32-bit fixed-point data formats. Figure 2. SHARC Core Block Diagram S SIMD Core INTERRUPT CACHE 5 STAGE PROGRAM SEQUENCER PM ADDRESS 32 DM ADDRESS 32 DM DATA 64 PM DATA 64 DAG1 16x32 MRF 80-BIT MULTIPLIER SHIFTER ALU RF Rx/Fx PEx 16x40-BIT JTAG DMD/PMD 64 PM DATA 48 ASTATx STYKx ASTATy STYKy TIMER RF Sx/SFx PEy 16x40-BIT MRB 80-BIT MSB 80-BIT MSF 80-BIT FLAG SYSTEM I/F USTAT 4x32-BIT PX 64-BIT DAG2 16x32 ALU SHIFTER MULTIPLIER DATA SWAP PM ADDRESS 24 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 5 of 60 | July 2013 Data Register File Each processing element contains a general-purpose data register file. The register files transfer data between the computation units and the data buses, and store intermediate results. These 10-port, 32-register (16 primary, 16 secondary) files, combined with the ADSP-2136x enhanced Harvard architecture, allow unconstrained data flow between computation units and internal memory. The registers in PEX are referred to as R0–R15 and in PEY as S0–S15. Context Switch Many of the processor’s registers have secondary registers that can be activated during interrupt servicing for a fast context switch. The data registers in the register file, the DAG registers, and the multiplier result register all have secondary registers. The primary registers are active at reset, while the secondary registers are activated by control bits in a mode control register. Universal Registers The universal registers are general purpose registers. The USTAT (4) registers allow easy bit manipulations (Set, Clear, Toggle, Test, XOR) for all system registers (control/status) of the core. The data bus exchange register (PX) permits data to be passed between the 64-bit PM data bus and the 64-bit DM data bus, or between the 40-bit register file and the PM/DM data bus. These registers contain hardware to handle the data width difference. Timer A core timer that can generate periodic software interrupts. The core timer can be configured to use FLAG3 as a timer expired signal. Single-Cycle Fetch of Instruction and Four Operands The processor features an enhanced Harvard architecture in which the data memory (DM) bus transfers data and the program memory (PM) bus transfers both instructions and data (see Figure 2). With the its separate program and data memory buses and on-chip instruction cache, the processor can simultaneously fetch four operands (two over each data bus) and one instruction (from the cache), all in a single cycle. Instruction Cache The processor includes an on-chip instruction cache that enables three-bus operation for fetching an instruction and four data values. The cache is selective—only the instructions whose fetches conflict with PM bus data accesses are cached. This cache allows full-speed execution of core looped operations such as digital filter multiply-accumulates, and FFT butterfly processing. Data Address Generators with Zero-Overhead Hardware Circular Buffer Support The processor’s two data address generators (DAGs) are used for indirect addressing and implementing circular data buffers in hardware. Circular buffers allow efficient programming of delay lines and other data structures required in digital signal processing, and are commonly used in digital filters and Fourier transforms. The two DAGs contain sufficient registers to allow the creation of up to 32 circular buffers (16 primary register sets, 16 secondary). The DAGs automatically handle address pointer wraparound, reduce overhead, increase performance, and simplify implementation. Circular buffers can start and end at any memory location. Flexible Instruction Set The 48-bit instruction word accommodates a variety of parallel operations for concise programming. For example, the processor can conditionally execute a multiply, an add, and a subtract in both processing elements while branching and fetching up to four 32-bit values from memory—all in a single instruction. On-Chip Memory The processor contains 3M bits of internal SRAM and 4M bits of internal ROM. Each block can be configured for different combinations of code and data storage (see Table 3). Each memory block supports single-cycle, independent accesses by the core processor and I/O processor. The processor’s memory architecture, in combination with its separate on-chip buses, allows two data transfers from the core and one from the I/O processor, in a single cycle. The SRAM can be configured as a maximum of 96K words of 32-bit data, 192K words of 16-bit data, 64K words of 48-bit instructions (or 40-bit data), or combinations of different word sizes up to 3M bits. All of the memory can be accessed as 16-bit, 32-bit, 48-bit, or 64-bit words. A 16-bit floating-point storage format is supported that effectively doubles the amount of data that can be stored on-chip. Conversion between the 32-bit floating-point and 16-bit floating-point formats is performed in a single instruction. While each memory block can store combinations of code and data, accesses are most efficient when one block stores data using the DM bus for transfers, and the other block stores instructions and data using the PM bus for transfers. Using the DM bus and PM buses, with one bus dedicated to each memory block, assures single-cycle execution with two data transfers. In this case, the instruction must be available in the cache. On-Chip Memory Bandwidth The internal memory architecture allows three accesses at the same time to any of the four blocks, assuming no block conflicts. The total bandwidth is gained with DMD and PMD buses (2 × 64-bits, core CLK) and the IOD bus (32-bit, PCLK). ROM-Based Security The processor has a ROM security feature that provides hardware support for securing user software code by preventing unauthorized reading from the internal code. When using this feature, the processor does not boot-load any external code, executing exclusively from internal ROM. Additionally, the processor is not freely accessible via the JTAG port. Instead, a unique 64-bit key, which must be scanned in through the JTAG Rev. J | Page 6 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 or test access port, is assigned to each customer. The device ignores a wrong key. Emulation features and external boot modes are only available after the correct key is scanned. FAMILY PERIPHERAL ARCHITECTURE The ADSP-2136x family contains a rich set of peripherals that support a wide variety of applications, including high quality audio, medical imaging, communications, military, test equipment, 3D graphics, speech recognition, monitor control, imaging, and other applications. Parallel Port The parallel port provides interfaces to SRAM and peripheral devices. The multiplexed address and data pins (AD15–0) can access 8-bit devices with up to 24 bits of address, or 16-bit devices with up to 16 bits of address. In either mode, 8-bit or 16-bit, the maximum data transfer rate is fPCLK/4. DMA transfers are used to move data to and from internal memory. Access to the core is also facilitated through the parallel port register read/write functions. The RD, WR, and ALE (address latch enable) pins are the control pins for the parallel port. Serial Peripheral (Compatible) Interface The processors contain two serial peripheral interface ports (SPIs). The SPI is an industry-standard synchronous serial link, enabling the processor’s SPI-compatible port to communicate with other SPI-compatible devices. The SPI consists of two data pins, one device select pin, and one clock pin. It is a full-duplex synchronous serial interface, supporting both master and slave modes and can operate at a maximum baud rate of fPCLK/4. The SPI port can operate in a multimaster environment by interfacing with up to four other SPI-compatible devices, either acting as a master or slave device. The ADSP-2136x SPIcompatible peripheral implementation also features programmable baud rate, clock phase, and polarities. The SPIcompatible port uses open drain drivers to support a multimaster configuration and to avoid data contention. Pulse-Width Modulation The entire PWM module has four groups of four PWM outputs each. Therefore, this module generates 16 PWM outputs in total. Each PWM group produces two pairs of PWM signals on the four PWM outputs. The PWM module is a flexible, programmable, PWM waveform generator that can be programmed to generate the required switching patterns for various applications related to motor and engine control or audio power control. The PWM generator can Table 3. ADSP-2136x Internal Memory Space IOP Registers 0x0000 0000–0003 FFFF Long Word (64 Bits) Extended Precision Normal or Instruction Word (48 Bits) Normal Word (32 Bits) Short Word (16 Bits) Block 0 ROM 0x0004 0000–0x0004 7FFF Block 0 ROM 0x0008 0000–0x0008 AAA9 Block 0 ROM 0x0008 0000–0x0008 FFFF Block 0 ROM 0x0010 0000–0x0011 FFFF Reserved 0x0004 8000–0x0004 BFFF Reserved 0x0009 0000–0x0009 7FFF Reserved 0x0012 0000–0x0012 FFFF Block 0 SRAM 0x0004 C000–0x0004 FFFF Block 0 SRAM 0x0009 0000–0x0009 5554 Block 0 SRAM 0x0009 8000–0x0009 FFFF Block 0 SRAM 0x0013 0000–0x0013 FFFF Block 1 ROM 0x0005 0000–0x0005 7FFF Block 1 ROM 0x000A 0000–0x000A AAA9 Block 1 ROM 0x000A 0000–0x000A FFFF Block 1 ROM 0x0014 0000–0x0015 FFFF Reserved 0x0005 8000–0x0005 BFFF Reserved 0x000B 0000–0x000B 7FFF Reserved 0x0016 0000–0x0016 FFFF Block 1 SRAM 0x0005 C000–0x0005 FFFF Block 1 SRAM 0x000B 0000–0x000B 5554 Block 1 SRAM 0x000B 8000–0x000B FFFF Block 1 SRAM 0x0017 0000–0x0017 FFFF Block 2 SRAM 0x0006 0000–0x0006 1FFF Block 2 SRAM 0x000C 0000–0x000C 2AA9 Block 2 SRAM 0x000C 0000–0x000C 3FFF Block 2 SRAM 0x0018 0000–0x0018 7FFF Reserved 0x0006 2000–0x0006 FFFF Reserved 0x000C 4000–0x000D FFFF Reserved 0x0018 8000–0x001B FFFF Block 3 SRAM 0x0007 0000–0x0007 1FFF Block 3 SRAM 0x000E 0000–0x000E 2AA9 Block 3 SRAM 0x000E 0000–0x000E 3FFF Block 3 SRAM 0x001C 0000–0x001C 7FFF Reserved 0x0007 2000–0x0007 FFFF Reserved 0x000E 4000–0x000F FFFF Reserved 0x001C 8000–0x001F FFFF Reserved 0x0020 0000–0xFFFF FFFF ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 7 of 60 | July 2013 generate either center-aligned or edge-aligned PWM waveforms. In addition, it can generate complementary signals on two outputs in paired mode or independent signals in nonpaired mode (applicable to a single group of four PWM waveforms). The PWM generator is capable of operating in two distinct modes while generating center-aligned PWM waveforms: single update mode or double update mode. In single update mode, the duty cycle values are programmable only once per PWM period. This results in PWM patterns that are symmetrical about the midpoint of the PWM period. In double update mode, a second updating of the PWM registers is implemented at the midpoint of the PWM period. In this mode, it is possible to produce asymmetrical PWM patterns that produce lower harmonic distortion in 3-phase PWM inverters. Digital Audio Interface (DAI) The digital audio interface (DAI) provides the ability to connect various peripherals to any of the DSP’s DAI pins (DAI_P20–1). Programs make these connections using the signal routing unit (SRU, shown in Figure 1). The SRU is a matrix routing unit (or group of multiplexers) that enables the peripherals provided by the DAI to be interconnected under software control. This allows easy use of the DAI-associated peripherals for a wider variety of applications by using a larger set of algorithms than is possible with nonconfigurable signal paths. The DAI includes six serial ports, an S/PDIF receiver/transmitter, a DTCP cipher, a precision clock generator (PCG), eight channels of asynchronous sample rate converters, an input data port (IDP), an SPI port, six flag outputs and six flag inputs, and three timers. The IDP provides an additional input path to the ADSP-2136x core, configurable as either eight channels of I2S serial data or as seven channels plus a single 20-bit wide synchronous parallel data acquisition port. Each data channel has its own DMA channel that is independent from the processor’s serial ports. Serial Ports The processor features six synchronous serial ports that provide an inexpensive interface to a wide variety of digital and mixedsignal peripheral devices such as Analog Devices’ AD183x family of audio codecs, ADCs, and DACs. The serial ports are made up of two data lines, a clock, and a frame sync and they can operate at maximum fPCLK/4. The data lines can be programmed to either transmit or receive and each data line has a dedicated DMA channel. Serial ports are enabled via 12 programmable and simultaneous receive or transmit pins that support up to 24 transmit or 24 receive channels of audio data when all six SPORTs are enabled, or six full duplex TDM streams of 128 channels per frame. Serial port data can be automatically transferred to and from on-chip memory via dedicated DMA channels. Each of the serial ports can work in conjunction with another serial port to provide TDM support. One SPORT provides two transmit signals while the other SPORT provides the two receive signals. The frame sync and clock are shared. Serial ports operate in four modes: • Standard DSP serial mode • Multichannel (TDM) mode • I2S mode • Left-justified sample pair mode S/PDIF-Compatible Digital Audio Receiver/Transmitter The S/PDIF transmitter has no separate DMA channels. It receives audio data in serial format and converts it into a biphase encoded signal. The serial data input to the transmitter can be formatted as left-justified, I2S, or right-justified with word widths of 16, 18, 20, or 24 bits. The serial data, clock, and frame sync inputs to the S/PDIF transmitter are routed through the signal routing unit (SRU). They can come from a variety of sources such as the SPORTs, external pins, the precision clock generators (PCGs), or the sample rate converters (SRC) and are controlled by the SRU control registers. Digital Transmission Content Protection (DTCP) The DTCP specification defines a cryptographic protocol for protecting audio entertainment content from illegal copying, intercepting, and tampering as it traverses high performance digital buses, such as the IEEE 1394 standard. Only legitimate entertainment content delivered to a source device via another approved copy protection system (such as the DVD content scrambling system) is protected by this copy protection system. This feature is available on the ADSP-21362 and ADSP-21365 processors only. Licensing through DTLA is required for these products. Visit www.dtcp.com for more information. Memory-to-Memory (MTM) If the DTCP module is not used, the memory-to-memory DMA module allows internal memory copies for a standard DMA. Synchronous/Asynchronous Sample Rate Converter (SRC) The sample rate converter (SRC) contains four SRC blocks and is the same core as that used in the AD1896 192 kHz stereo asynchronous sample rate converter and provides up to 140 dB SNR. The SRC block is used to perform synchronous or asynchronous sample rate conversion across independent stereo channels, without using internal processor resources. The four SRC blocks can also be configured to operate together to convert multichannel audio data without phase mismatches. Finally, the SRC is used to clean up audio data from jittery clock sources such as the S/PDIF receiver. The S/PDIF and SRC are not available on the ADSP-21363 models. Input Data Port (IDP) The IDP provides up to eight serial input channels—each with its own clock, frame sync, and data inputs. The eight channels are automatically multiplexed into a single 32-bit by eight-deep FIFO. Data is always formatted as a 64-bit frame and divided into two 32-bit words. The serial protocol is designed to receive Rev. J | Page 8 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 audio channels in I2S, left-justified sample pair, or right-justified mode. One frame sync cycle indicates one 64-bit left/right pair, but data is sent to the FIFO as 32-bit words (that is, onehalf of a frame at a time). The processor supports 24- and 32-bit I2S, 24- and 32-bit left-justified, and 24-, 20-, 18- and 16-bit right-justified formats. Precision Clock Generator (PCG) The precision clock generators (PCG) consist of two units, each of which generates a pair of signals (clock and frame sync) derived from a clock input signal. The units, A and B, are identical in functionality and operate independently of each other. The two signals generated by each unit are normally used as a serial bit clock/frame sync pair. Peripheral Timers The following three general-purpose timers can generate periodic interrupts and be independently set to operate in one of three modes: • Pulse waveform generation mode • Pulse width count/capture mode • External event watchdog mode Each general-purpose timer has one bidirectional pin and four registers that implement its mode of operation: a 6-bit configuration register, a 32-bit count register, a 32-bit period register, and a 32-bit pulse width register. A single control and status register enables or disables all three general-purpose timers independently. I/O PROCESSOR FEATURES The processor’s I/O provides many channels of DMA and controls the extensive set of peripherals described in the previous sections. DMA Controller The processor’s on-chip DMA controllers allow data transfers without processor intervention. The DMA controller operates independently and invisibly to the processor core, allowing DMA operations to occur while the core is simultaneously executing its program instructions. DMA transfers can occur between the processor’s internal memory and its serial ports, the SPI-compatible (serial peripheral interface) ports, the IDP (input data port), the parallel data acquisition port (PDAP), or the parallel port (PP). See Table 4. SYSTEM DESIGN The following sections provide an introduction to system design options and power supply issues. Program Booting The internal memory of the processor boots at system power-up from an 8-bit EPROM via the parallel port, an SPI master, an SPI slave, or an internal boot. Booting is determined by the boot configuration (BOOT_CFG1–0) pins in Table 5. Selection of the boot source is controlled via the SPI as either a master or slave device, or it can immediately begin executing from ROM. Phase-Locked Loop The processors use an on-chip phase-locked loop (PLL) to generate the internal clock for the core. On power-up, the CLK_CFG1–0 pins are used to select ratios of 32:1, 16:1, and 6:1. After booting, numerous other ratios can be selected via software control. The ratios are made up of software configurable numerator values from 1 to 64 and software configurable divisor values of 1, 2, 4, and 8. Power Supplies The processor has a separate power supply connection for the internal (VDDINT), external (VDDEXT), and analog (AVDD/AVSS) power supplies. The internal and analog supplies must meet the 1.2 V requirement for K, B, and Y grade models, and the 1.0 V requirement for Y models. (For information on the temperature ranges offered for this product, see Operating Conditions on Page 14, Package Information on Page 16, and Ordering Guide on Page 56.) The external supply must meet the 3.3 V requirement. All external supply pins must be connected to the same power supply. Note that the analog supply pin (AVDD) powers the processor’s internal clock generator PLL. To produce a stable clock, it is recommended that PCB designs use an external filter circuit for the AVDD pin. Place the filter components as close as possible to the AVDD/AVSS pins. For an example circuit, see Figure 3. (A recommended ferrite chip is the muRata BLM18AG102SN1D.) To reduce noise coupling, the PCB should use a parallel pair of power and ground planes for VDDINT and GND. Use wide traces to connect the bypass capacitors to the analog power (AVDD) and ground (AVSS) pins. Note that the AVDD and AVSS pins specified in Figure 3 are inputs to the processor and not the analog ground plane on the board—the AVSS pin should connect directly to digital ground (GND) at the chip. Table 4. DMA Channels Peripheral ADSP-2136x SPORTs 12 IDP/PDAP 8 SPI 2 MTM/DTCP 2 Parallel Port 1 Total DMA Channels 25 Table 5. Boot Mode Selection BOOT_CFG1–0 Booting Mode 00 SPI Slave Boot 01 SPI Master Boot 10 Parallel Port Boot via EPROM 11 No booting occurs. Processor executes from internal ROM after reset. ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 9 of 60 | July 2013 Target Board JTAG Emulator Connector Analog Devices’ DSP Tools product line of JTAG emulators uses the IEEE 1149.1 JTAG test access port of the processor to monitor and control the target board processor during emulation. Analog Devices’ DSP Tools product line of JTAG emulators provides emulation at full processor speed, allowing inspection and modification of memory, registers, and processor stacks. The processor’s JTAG interface ensures that the emulator does not affect target system loading or timing. For complete information on Analog Devices’ SHARC DSP Tools product line of JTAG emulator operation, refer to the appropriate emulator user’s guide. DEVELOPMENT TOOLS Analog Devices supports its processors with a complete line of software and hardware development tools, including integrated development environments (which include CrossCore® Embedded Studio and/or VisualDSP++®), evaluation products, emulators, and a wide variety of software add-ins. Integrated Development Environments (IDEs) For C/C++ software writing and editing, code generation, and debug support, Analog Devices offers two IDEs. The newest IDE, CrossCore Embedded Studio, is based on the EclipseTM framework. Supporting most Analog Devices processor families, it is the IDE of choice for future processors, including multicore devices. CrossCore Embedded Studio seamlessly integrates available software add-ins to support real time operating systems, file systems, TCP/IP stacks, USB stacks, algorithmic software modules, and evaluation hardware board support packages. For more information visit www.analog.com/cces. The other Analog Devices IDE, VisualDSP++, supports processor families introduced prior to the release of CrossCore Embedded Studio. This IDE includes the Analog Devices VDK real time operating system and an open source TCP/IP stack. For more information visit www.analog.com/visualdsp. Note that VisualDSP++ will not support future Analog Devices processors. EZ-KIT Lite Evaluation Board For processor evaluation, Analog Devices provides wide range of EZ-KIT Lite® evaluation boards. Including the processor and key peripherals, the evaluation board also supports on-chip emulation capabilities and other evaluation and development features. Also available are various EZ-Extenders®, which are daughter cards delivering additional specialized functionality, including audio and video processing. For more information visit www.analog.com and search on “ezkit” or “ezextender”. EZ-KIT Lite Evaluation Kits For a cost-effective way to learn more about developing with Analog Devices processors, Analog Devices offer a range of EZKIT Lite evaluation kits. Each evaluation kit includes an EZ-KIT Lite evaluation board, directions for downloading an evaluation version of the available IDE(s), a USB cable, and a power supply. The USB controller on the EZ-KIT Lite board connects to the USB port of the user’s PC, enabling the chosen IDE evaluation suite to emulate the on-board processor in-circuit. This permits the customer to download, execute, and debug programs for the EZ-KIT Lite system. It also supports in-circuit programming of the on-board Flash device to store user-specific boot code, enabling standalone operation. With the full version of Cross- Core Embedded Studio or VisualDSP++ installed (sold separately), engineers can develop software for supported EZKITs or any custom system utilizing supported Analog Devices processors. Software Add-Ins for CrossCore Embedded Studio Analog Devices offers software add-ins which seamlessly integrate with CrossCore Embedded Studio to extend its capabilities and reduce development time. Add-ins include board support packages for evaluation hardware, various middleware packages, and algorithmic modules. Documentation, help, configuration dialogs, and coding examples present in these add-ins are viewable through the CrossCore Embedded Studio IDE once the add-in is installed. Board Support Packages for Evaluation Hardware Software support for the EZ-KIT Lite evaluation boards and EZExtender daughter cards is provided by software add-ins called Board Support Packages (BSPs). The BSPs contain the required drivers, pertinent release notes, and select example code for the given evaluation hardware. A download link for a specific BSP is located on the web page for the associated EZ-KIT or EZExtender product. The link is found in the Product Download area of the product web page. Middleware Packages Analog Devices separately offers middleware add-ins such as real time operating systems, file systems, USB stacks, and TCP/IP stacks. For more information see the following web pages: • www.analog.com/ucos3 • www.analog.com/ucfs • www.analog.com/ucusbd • www.analog.com/lwip Algorithmic Modules To speed development, Analog Devices offers add-ins that perform popular audio and video processing algorithms. These are available for use with both CrossCore Embedded Studio and Figure 3. Analog Power (AVDD) Filter Circuit HIGH-Z FERRITE BEAD CHIP LOCATE ALL COMPONENTS CLOSE TO AVDD AND AVSS PINS AVDD AVSS 100nF 10nF 1nF ADSP-213xx VDDINT Rev. J | Page 10 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 VisualDSP++. For more information visit www.analog.com and search on “Blackfin software modules” or “SHARC software modules”. Designing an Emulator-Compatible DSP Board (Target) For embedded system test and debug, Analog Devices provides a family of emulators. On each JTAG DSP, Analog Devices supplies an IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Test Access Port (TAP). In-circuit emulation is facilitated by use of this JTAG interface. The emulator accesses the processor’s internal features via the processor’s TAP, allowing the developer to load code, set breakpoints, and view variables, memory, and registers. The processor must be halted to send data and commands, but once an operation is completed by the emulator, the DSP system is set to run at full speed with no impact on system timing. The emulators require the target board to include a header that supports connection of the DSP’s JTAG port to the emulator. For details on target board design issues including mechanical layout, single processor connections, signal buffering, signal termination, and emulator pod logic, see the Engineer-to-Engineer Note “Analog Devices JTAG Emulation Technical Reference” (EE-68) on the Analog Devices website (www.analog.com)—use site search on “EE-68.” This document is updated regularly to keep pace with improvements to emulator support. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This data sheet provides a general overview of the processor’s architecture and functionality. For detailed information on the ADSP-2136x family core architecture and instruction set, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference and the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Programming Reference. RELATED SIGNAL CHAINS A signal chain is a series of signal-conditioning electronic components that receive input (data acquired from sampling either real-time phenomena or from stored data) in tandem, with the output of one portion of the chain supplying input to the next. Signal chains are often used in signal processing applications to gather and process data or to apply system controls based on analysis of real-time phenomena. For more information about this term and related topics, see the “signal chain” entry in the Glossary of EE Terms on the Analog Devices website. Analog Devices eases signal processing system development by providing signal processing components that are designed to work together well. A tool for viewing relationships between specific applications and related components is available on the www.analog.com website. The Circuits from the LabTM site (http://www.analog.com/signalchains) provides: • Graphical circuit block diagram presentation of signal chains for a variety of circuit types and applications • Drill down links for components in each chain to selection guides and application information • Reference designs applying best practice design techniques ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 11 of 60 | July 2013 PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTIONS The processor’s pin definitions are listed below. Inputs identified as synchronous (S) must meet timing requirements with respect to CLKIN (or with respect to TCK for TMS and TDI). Inputs identified as asynchronous (A) can be asserted asynchronously to CLKIN (or to TCK for TRST). Tie or pull unused inputs to VDDEXT or GND, except for the following: DAI_Px, SPICLK, MISO, MOSI, EMU, TMS, TRST, TDI, and AD15–0. Note: These pins have pull-up resistors. Table 6. Pin Descriptions Pin Type State During and After Reset Function AD15–0 I/O/T (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled Parallel Port Address/Data. The ADSP-2136x parallel port and its corresponding DMA unit output addresses and data for peripherals on these multiplexed pins. The multiplex state is determined by the ALE pin. The parallel port can operate in either 8-bit or 16-bit mode. Each AD pin has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. For details about the AD pin operation, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference. For 8-bit mode: ALE is automatically asserted whenever a change occurs in the upper 16 external address bits, ADDR23–8; ALE is used in conjunction with an external latch to retain the values of the ADDR23–8. For detailed information on I/O operations and pin multiplexing, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference. RD O (pu) Three-state, driven high1 Parallel Port Read Enable. RD is asserted low whenever the processor reads 8-bit or 16- bit data from an external memory device. When AD15–0 are flags, this pin remains deasserted. RD has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. WR O (pu) Three-state, driven high1 Parallel Port Write Enable. WR is asserted low whenever the processor writes 8-bit or 16-bit data to an external memory device. When AD15–0 are flags, this pin remains deasserted. WR has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. ALE O (pd) Three-state, driven low1 Parallel Port Address Latch Enable. ALE is asserted whenever the processor drives a new address on the parallel port address pins. On reset, ALE is active high. However, it can be reconfigured using software to be active low. When AD15–0 are flags, this pin remains deasserted. ALE has a 20 kΩ internal pull-down resistor. FLAG[0]/IRQ0/SPI FLG[0] I/O FLAG[0] INPUT FLAG0/Interrupt Request0/SPI0 Slave Select. FLAG[1]/IRQ1/SPI FLG[1] I/O FLAG[1] INPUT FLAG1/Interrupt Request1/SPI1 Slave Select. FLAG[2]/IRQ2/SPI FLG[2] I/O FLAG[2] INPUT FLAG2/Interrupt Request 2/SPI2 Slave Select. FLAG[3]/TMREXP/ SPIFLG[3] I/O FLAG[3] INPUT FLAG3/Timer Expired/SPI3 Slave Select. DAI_P20–1 I/O/T (pu) Three-state with programmable pull-up Digital Audio Interface Pins. These pins provide the physical interface to the SRU. The SRU configuration registers define the combination of on-chip peripheral inputs or outputs connected to the pin and to the pin’s output enable. The configuration registers of these peripherals then determine the exact behavior of the pin. Any input or output signal present in the SRU can be routed to any of these pins. The SRU provides the connection from the serial ports, input data port, precision clock generators and timers, sample rate converters and SPI to the DAI_P20–1 pins. These pins have internal 22.5 kΩ pull-up resistors that are enabled on reset. These pull-ups can be disabled using the DAI_PIN_PULLUP register. The following symbols appear in the Type column of Table 6: A = asynchronous, G = ground, I = input, O = output, P = power supply, S = synchronous, (A/D) = active drive, (O/D) = open drain, and T = three-state, (pd) = pull-down resistor, (pu) = pull-up resistor. Rev. J | Page 12 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 SPICLK I/O (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled, driven high in SPImaster boot mode Serial Peripheral Interface Clock Signal. Driven by the master, this signal controls the rate at which data is transferred. The master can transmit data at a variety of baud rates. SPICLK cycles once for each bit transmitted. SPICLK is a gated clock active during data transfers, only for the length of the transferred word. Slave devices ignore the serial clock if the slave select input is driven inactive (high). SPICLK is used to shift out and shift in the data driven on the MISO and MOSI lines. The data is always shifted out on one clock edge and sampled on the opposite edge of the clock. Clock polarity and clock phase relative to data are programmable into the SPICTL control register and define the transfer format. SPICLK has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. SPIDS I Input only Serial Peripheral Interface Slave Device Select. An active low signal used to select the processor as an SPI slave device. This input signal behaves like a chip select, and is provided by the master device for the slave devices. In multimaster mode the processor’s SPIDS signal can be driven by a slave device to signal to the processor (as SPI master) that an error has occurred, as some other device is also trying to be the master device. If asserted low when the device is in master mode, it is considered a multimaster error. For a single-master, multiple-slave configuration where flag pins are used, this pin must be tied or pulled high to VDDEXT on the master device. For processor to processor SPI interaction, any of the master processor’s flag pins can be used to drive the SPIDS signal on the SPI slave device. MOSI I/O (O/D) (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled, driven low in SPImaster boot mode SPI Master Out Slave In. If the ADSP-2136x is configured as a master, the MOSI pin becomes a data transmit (output) pin, transmitting output data. If the processor is configured as a slave, the MOSI pin becomes a data receive (input) pin, receiving input data. In an SPI interconnection, the data is shifted out from the MOSI output pin of the master and shifted into the MOSI input(s) of the slave(s). MOSI has a 22.5 kΩ internal pullup resistor. MISO I/O (O/D) (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled SPI Master In Slave Out. If the ADSP-2136x is configured as a master, the MISO pin becomes a data receive (input) pin, receiving input data. If the processor is configured as a slave, the MISO pin becomes a data transmit (output) pin, transmitting output data. In an SPI interconnection, the data is shifted out from the MISO output pin of the slave and shifted into the MISO input pin of the master. MISO has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. MISO can be configured as O/D by setting the OPD bit in the SPICTL register. Note: Only one slave is allowed to transmit data at any given time. To enable broadcast transmission to multiple SPI slaves, the processor’s MISO pin can be disabled by setting Bit 5 (DMISO) of the SPICTL register equal to 1. CLKIN I Input only Local Clock In. Used in conjunction with XTAL. CLKIN is the ADSP-2136x clock input. It configures the ADSP-2136x to use either its internal clock generator or an external clock source. Connecting the necessary components to CLKIN and XTAL enables the internal clock generator. Connecting the external clock to CLKIN while leaving XTAL unconnected configures the processors to use the external clock source such as an external clock oscillator. The core is clocked either by the PLL output or this clock input depending on the CLK_CFG1–0 pin settings. CLKIN should not be halted, changed, or operated below the specified frequency. XTAL O Output only2 Crystal Oscillator Terminal. Used in conjunction with CLKIN to drive an external crystal. CLK_CFG1–0 I Input only Core to CLKIN Ratio Control. These pins set the start up clock frequency. Note that the operating frequency can be changed by programming the PLL multiplier and divider in the PMCTL register at any time after the core comes out of reset. The allowed values are: 00 = 6:1 01 = 32:1 10 = 16:1 11 = reserved. Table 6. Pin Descriptions (Continued) Pin Type State During and After Reset Function The following symbols appear in the Type column of Table 6: A = asynchronous, G = ground, I = input, O = output, P = power supply, S = synchronous, (A/D) = active drive, (O/D) = open drain, and T = three-state, (pd) = pull-down resistor, (pu) = pull-up resistor. ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 13 of 60 | July 2013 BOOT_CFG1–0 I Input only Boot Configuration Select. This pin is used to select the boot mode for the processor. The BOOT_CFG pins must be valid before reset is asserted. For a description of the boot mode, refer to Table 5, Boot Mode Selection. RESETOUT O Output only Reset Out. Drives out the core reset signal to an external device. RESET I/A Input only Processor Reset. Resets the ADSP-2136x to a known state. Upon deassertion, there is a 4096 CLKIN cycle latency for the PLL to lock. After this time, the core begins program execution from the hardware reset vector address. The RESET input must be asserted (low) at power-up. TCK I Input only3 Test Clock (JTAG). Provides a clock for JTAG boundary scan. TCK must be asserted (pulsed low) after power-up or held low for proper operation of the processors. TMS I/S (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled Test Mode Select (JTAG). Used to control the test state machine. TMS has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. TDI I/S (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled Test Data Input (JTAG). Provides serial data for the boundary scan logic. TDI has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. TDO O Three-state4 Test Data Output (JTAG). Serial scan output of the boundary scan path. TRST I/A (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled Test Reset (JTAG). Resets the test state machine. TRST must be asserted (pulsed low) after power-up or held low for proper operation of the ADSP-2136x. TRST has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. EMU O (O/D) (pu) Three-state with pull-up enabled Emulation Status. Must be connected to the processor’s JTAG emulators target board connector only. EMU has a 22.5 kΩ internal pull-up resistor. VDDINT P Core Power Supply. Supplies the processor’s core. VDDEXT P I/O Power Supply. AVDD P Analog Power Supply. Supplies the processor’s internal PLL (clock generator). This pin has the same specifications as VDDINT, except that added filtering circuitry is required. For more information, see Power Supplies on Page 8. AVSS G Analog Power Supply Return. GND G Power Supply Return. 1RD, WR, and ALE are three-stated (and not driven) only when RESET is active. 2Output only is a three-state driver with its output path always enabled. 3 Input only is a three-state driver with both output path and pull-up disabled. 4Three-state is a three-state driver with pull-up disabled. Table 6. Pin Descriptions (Continued) Pin Type State During and After Reset Function The following symbols appear in the Type column of Table 6: A = asynchronous, G = ground, I = input, O = output, P = power supply, S = synchronous, (A/D) = active drive, (O/D) = open drain, and T = three-state, (pd) = pull-down resistor, (pu) = pull-up resistor. Rev. J | Page 14 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 SPECIFICATIONS Specifications are subject to change without notice. OPERATING CONDITIONS K Grade B Grade Y Grade Parameter Description Min Nom Max Min Nom Max Min Nom Max Unit VDDINT Internal (Core) Supply Voltage 1.14 1.2 1.26 1.14 1.2 1.26 0.95 1.0 1.05 V AVDD Analog (PLL) Supply Voltage 1.14 1.2 1.26 1.14 1.2 1.26 0.95 1.0 1.05 V VDDEXT External (I/O) Supply Voltage 3.13 3.3 3.47 3.13 3.3 3.47 3.13 3.3 3.47 V VIH 1 1 Applies to input and bidirectional pins: AD15–0, FLAG3–0, DAI_Px, SPICLK, MOSI, MISO, SPIDS, BOOT_CFGx, CLK_CFGx, RESET, TCK, TMS, TDI, and TRST. High Level Input Voltage @ VDDEXT = Max 2.0 VDDEXT + 0.5 2.0 VDDEXT + 0.5 2.0 VDDEXT + 0.5 V VIL 1 Low Level Input Voltage @ VDDEXT = Min –0.5 +0.8 –0.5 +0.8 –0.5 +0.8 V VIH_CLKIN 2 2 Applies to input pin CLKIN. High Level Input Voltage @ VDDEXT = Max 1.74 VDDEXT + 0.5 1.74 VDDEXT + 0.5 1.74 VDDEXT + 0.5 V VIL_CLKIN Low Level Input Voltage @ VDDEXT = Min –0.5 +1.19 –0.5 +1.19 –0.5 +1.19 V TJ 3, 4 3 See Thermal Characteristics on Page 47 for information on thermal specifications. 4 See the Engineer-to-Engineer Note “Estimating Power for the ADSP-21362 SHARC Processors” (EE-277) for further information. Junction Temperature 136-Ball CSP_BGA 0 +110 –40 +125 –40 +125 °C TJ 3, 4 Junction Temperature 144-Lead LQFP_EP 0 +110 –40 +125 –40 +125 °C ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 15 of 60 | July 2013 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Parameter Description Test Conditions Min Max Unit VOH 1 High Level Output Voltage @ VDDEXT = Min, IOH = –1.0 mA2 2.4 V VOL 1 Low Level Output Voltage @ VDDEXT = Min, IOL = 1.0 mA2 0.4 V IIH 3, 4 High Level Input Current @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = VDDEXT Max 10 μA IIL 3 Low Level Input Current @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = 0 V 10 μA IILPU 4 Low Level Input Current Pull-Up @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = 0 V 200 μA IOZH 5, 6 Three-State Leakage Current @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = VDDEXT Max 10 μA IOZL 5 Three-State Leakage Current @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = 0 V 10 μA IOZLPU 6 Three-State Leakage Current Pull-Up @ VDDEXT = Max, VIN = 0 V 200 μA IDD-INTYP 7, 8 Supply Current (Internal) tCCLK = Min, VDDINT = Nom 800 mA IAVDD 9 Supply Current (Analog) AVDD = Max 10 mA CIN 10, 11 Input Capacitance fIN = 1 MHz, TCASE = 25°C, VIN = 1.2 V 4.7 pF 1 Applies to output and bidirectional pins: AD15–0, RD, WR, ALE, FLAG3–0, DAI_Px, SPICLK, MOSI, MISO, EMU, TDO, and XTAL. 2 See Output Drive Currents on Page 46 for typical drive current capabilities. 3 Applies to input pins: SPIDS, BOOT_CFGx, CLK_CFGx, TCK, RESET, and CLKIN. 4 Applies to input pins with 22.5 kΩ internal pull-ups: TRST, TMS, TDI. 5 Applies to three-stateable pins: FLAG3–0. 6 Applies to three-stateable pins with 22.5 kΩ pull-ups: AD15–0, DAI_Px, SPICLK, EMU, MISO, and MOSI. 7Typical internal current data reflects nominal operating conditions. 8 See the Engineer-to-Engineer Note “Estimating Power for the ADSP-21362 SHARC Processors” (EE-277) for further information. 9Characterized, but not tested. 10Applies to all signal pins. 11Guaranteed, but not tested. Rev. J | Page 16 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 PACKAGE INFORMATION The information presented in Figure 4 provides details about the package branding for the ADSP-2136x processor. For a complete listing of product availability, see Ordering Guide on Page 56. ESD CAUTION MAXIMUM POWER DISSIPATION See the Engineer-to-Engineer Note “Estimating Power for the ADSP-21362 SHARC Processors” (EE-277) for detailed thermal and power information regarding maximum power dissipation. For information on package thermal specifications, see Thermal Characteristics on Page 47. ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS Stresses greater than those listed in Table 8 may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only; functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions greater than those indicated in the operational sections of this specification is not implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. TIMING SPECIFICATIONS Use the exact timing information given. Do not attempt to derive parameters from the addition or subtraction of others. While addition or subtraction would yield meaningful results for an individual device, the values given in this data sheet reflect statistical variations and worst cases. Consequently, it is not meaningful to add parameters to derive longer times. For voltage reference levels, see Figure 39 on Page 46 under Test Conditions. Switching Characteristics specify how the processor changes its signals. Circuitry external to the processor must be designed for compatibility with these signal characteristics. Switching characteristics describe what the processor will do in a given circumstance. Use switching characteristics to ensure that any timing requirement of a device connected to the processor (such as memory) is satisfied. Timing Requirements apply to signals that are controlled by circuitry external to the processor, such as the data input for a read operation. Timing requirements guarantee that the processor operates correctly with other devices. Core Clock Requirements The processor’s internal clock (a multiple of CLKIN) provides the clock signal for timing internal memory, processor core, and serial ports. During reset, program the ratio between the processor’s internal clock frequency and external (CLKIN) clock frequency with the CLK_CFG1–0 pins. The processor’s internal clock switches at higher frequencies than the system input clock (CLKIN). To generate the internal clock, the processor uses an internal phase-locked loop (PLL, see Figure 5). This PLL-based clocking minimizes the skew between the system clock (CLKIN) signal and the processor’s internal clock. Voltage Controlled Oscillator In application designs, the PLL multiplier value should be selected in such a way that the VCO frequency never exceeds fVCO specified in Table 11. Figure 4. Typical Package Brand Table 7. Package Brand Information Brand Key Field Description t Temperature Range pp Package Type Z RoHS Compliant Designation cc See Ordering Guide vvvvvv.x Assembly Lot Code n.n Silicon Revision # RoHS Compliant Designation yyww Date Code tppZ-cc S ADSP-2136x a #yyww country_of_origin vvvvvv.x n.n ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive device. Charged devices and circuit boards can discharge without detection. Although this product features patented or proprietary protection circuitry, damage may occur on devices subjected to high energy ESD. Therefore, proper ESD precautions should be taken to avoid performance degradation or loss of functionality. Table 8. Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Rating Internal (Core) Supply Voltage (VDDINT) –0.3 V to +1.5 V Analog (PLL) Supply Voltage (AVDD) –0.3 V to +1.5 V External (I/O) Supply Voltage (VDDEXT) –0.3 V to +4.6 V Input Voltage –0.5 V to +3.8 V Output Voltage Swing –0.5 V to VDDEXT + 0.5 V Load Capacitance 200 pF Storage Temperature Range –65°C to +150°C Junction Temperature While Biased 125°C ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 17 of 60 | July 2013 • The product of CLKIN and PLLM must never exceed 1/2 fVCO (max) in Table 11 if the input divider is not enabled (INDIV = 0). • The product of CLKIN and PLLM must never exceed fVCO (max) in Table 11 if the input divider is enabled (INDIV = 1). The VCO frequency is calculated as follows: fVCO = 2 × PLLM × fINPUT fCCLK = (2 × PLLM × fINPUT) ÷ (2 × PLLN) where: fVCO = VCO output PLLM = Multiplier value programmed in the PMCTL register. During reset, the PLLM value is derived from the ratio selected using the CLK_CFG pins in hardware. PLLN = 1, 2, 4, 8 based on the PLLD value programmed on the PMCTL register. During reset this value is 1. fINPUT = Input frequency to the PLL. fINPUT = CLKIN when the input divider is disabled or fINPUT = CLKIN ÷ 2 when the input divider is enabled Note the definitions of the clock periods that are a function of CLKIN and the appropriate ratio control shown in Table 9. All of the timing specifications for the ADSP-2136x peripherals are defined in relation to tPCLK. Refer to the peripheral specific section for each peripheral’s timing information. Figure 5 shows core to CLKIN relationships with external oscillator or crystal. The shaded divider/multiplier blocks denote where clock ratios can be set through hardware or software using the power management control register (PMCTL). For more information, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference. Table 9. Clock Periods Timing Requirements Description tCK CLKIN Clock Period tCCLK Processor Core Clock Period tPCLK Peripheral Clock Period = 2 × tCCLK Figure 5. Core Clock and System Clock Relationship to CLKIN CLKOUT (TEST ONLY)* LOOP FILTER PLL fVCO ÷ (2 × PLLM) VCO PLL DIVIDER PMCTL (2 × PLLN) fVCO fCCLK CLK_CFGx/ PMCTL (2 × PLLM) CLKIN PCLK XTAL CLKIN DIVIDER RESETOUT DELAY OF 4096 CLKIN CYCLES RESET BUF BUF PMCTL (INDIV) PMCTL (PLLBP) BYPASS MUX PIN MUX DIVIDE BY 2 RESETOUT PMCTL (CLKOUTEN) CCLK CORERST *CLKOUT (TEST ONLY) FREQUENCY IS THE SAME AS fINPUT. THIS SIGNAL IS NOT SPECIFIED OR SUPPORTED FOR ANY DESIGN. fINPUT Rev. J | Page 18 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Power-Up Sequencing The timing requirements for processor startup are given in Table 10. Note that during power-up, when the VDDINT power supply comes up after VDDEXT, a leakage current of the order of three-state leakage current pull-up, pull-down, may be observed on any pin, even if that is an input only (for example the RESET pin) until the VDDINT rail has powered up. Table 10. Power-Up Sequencing Timing Requirements (Processor Startup) Parameter Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tRSTVDD RESET Low Before VDDINT/VDDEXT On 0 ns tIVDDEVDD VDDINT On Before VDDEXT –50 +200 ms tCLKVDD 1 CLKIN Valid After VDDINT/VDDEXT Valid 0 200 ms tCLKRST CLKIN Valid Before RESET Deasserted 102 μs tPLLRST PLL Control Setup Before RESET Deasserted 20 μs Switching Characteristic tCORERST Core Reset Deasserted After RESET Deasserted 4096tCK + 2 tCCLK 3, 4 1Valid VDDINT/VDDEXT assumes that the supplies are fully ramped to their 1.2 V rails and 3.3 V rails. Voltage ramp rates can vary from microseconds to hundreds of milliseconds, depending on the design of the power supply subsystem. 2Assumes a stable CLKIN signal, after meeting worst-case start-up timing of crystal oscillators. Refer to your crystal oscillator manufacturer’s data sheet for start-up time. Assume a 25 ms maximum oscillator start-up time if using the XTAL pin and internal oscillator circuit in conjunction with an external crystal. 3 Applies after the power-up sequence is complete. Subsequent resets require a minimum of 4 CLKIN cycles for RESET to be held low to properly initialize and propagate default states at all I/O pins. 4The 4096 cycle count depends on tSRST specification in Table 12. If setup time is not met, 1 additional CLKIN cycle can be added to the core reset time, resulting in 4097 cycles maximum. Figure 6. Power-Up Sequencing tRSTVDD tCLKVDD tCLKRST tPLLRST tCORERST VDDEXT VDDINT CLKIN CLK_CFG1–0 RESET RESETOUT tIVDDEVDD ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 19 of 60 | July 2013 Clock Input Clock Signals The processor can use an external clock or a crystal. Refer to the CLKIN pin description in Table 6 on Page 11. The user application program can configure the processor to use its internal clock generator by connecting the necessary components to the CLKIN and XTAL pins. Figure 8 shows the component connections used for a fundamental frequency crystal operating in parallel mode. Note that the clock rate is achieved using a 16.67 MHz crystal and a PLL multiplier ratio 16:1. (CCLK:CLKIN achieves a clock speed of 266.72 MHz.) To achieve the full core clock rate, programs need to configure the multiplier bits in the PMCTL register. Table 11. Clock Input Parameter 200 MHz1 1 Applies to all 200 MHz models. See Ordering Guide on Page 56. 333 MHz2 2 Applies to all 333 MHz models. See Ordering Guide on Page 56. Min Max Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tCK CLKIN Period 303 3 Applies only for CLK_CFG1–0 = 00 and default values for PLL control bits in the PMCTL register. 100 18 100 ns tCKL CLKIN Width Low 12.5 7.5 ns tCKH CLKIN Width High 12.5 7.5 ns tCKRF CLKIN Rise/Fall (0.4 V to 2.0 V) 3 3 ns tCCLK 4 4 Any changes to PLL control bits in the PMCTL register must meet core clock timing specification tCCLK. CCLK Period 5.0 10 3.0 10 ns tVCO 5 5 See Figure 5 on Page 17 for VCO diagram. VCO Frequency 200 600 200 800 MHz tCKJ 6, 7 6 Actual input jitter should be combined with AC specifications for accurate timing analysis. 7 Jitter specification is maximum peak-to-peak time interval error (TIE) jitter. CLKIN Jitter Tolerance –250 +250 –250 +250 ps Figure 7. Clock Input CLKIN tCK tCKH tCKL tCKJ Figure 8. Recommended Circuit for Fundamental Mode Crystal Operation C1 22pF Y1 R1 1M * CLKIN XTAL C2 22pF 24.576MHz R2 * ADSP-2136x R2 SHOULD BE CHOSEN TO LIMIT CRYSTAL DRIVE POWER. REFER TO CRYSTAL MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS. *TYPICAL VALUES 47Ω Ω Rev. J | Page 20 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Reset Interrupts The following timing specification applies to the FLAG0, FLAG1, and FLAG2 pins when they are configured as IRQ0, IRQ1, and IRQ2 interrupts. Table 12. Reset Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirements tWRST 1 RESET Pulse Width Low 4 × tCK ns tSRST RESET Setup Before CLKIN Low 8 ns 1 Applies after the power-up sequence is complete. At power-up, the processor’s internal phase-locked loop requires no more than 100 μs while RESET is low, assuming stable VDD and CLKIN (not including start-up time of external clock oscillator). Figure 9. Reset CLKIN RESET tWRST tSRST Table 13. Interrupts Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirement tIPW IRQx Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK +2 ns Figure 10. Interrupts INTERRUPT INPUTS tIPW ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 21 of 60 | July 2013 Core Timer The following timing specification applies to FLAG3 when it is configured as the core timer (TMREXP pin). Timer PWM_OUT Cycle Timing The following timing specification applies to Timer0, Timer1, and Timer2 in PWM_OUT (pulse-width modulation) mode. Timer signals are routed to the DAI_P20–1 pins through the SRU. Therefore, the timing specifications provided below are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. Table 14. Core Timer Parameter Min Unit Switching Characteristic tWCTIM TMREXP Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 1 ns Figure 11. Core Timer FLAG3 (TMREXP) tWCTIM Table 15. Timer PWM_OUT Timing Parameter Min Max Unit Switching Characteristic tPWMO Timer Pulse Width Output 2 × tPCLK – 1 2 × (231 – 1) × tPCLK ns Figure 12. Timer PWM_OUT Timing PWM OUTPUTS tPWMO Rev. J | Page 22 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Timer WDTH_CAP Timing The following timing specification applies to Timer0, Timer1, and Timer2 in WDTH_CAP (pulse width count and capture) mode. Timer signals are routed to the DAI_P20–1 pins through the SRU. Therefore, the timing specification provided below are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. DAI Pin to Pin Direct Routing For direct pin connections only (for example, DAI_PB01_I to DAI_PB02_O). Table 16. Timer Width Capture Timing Parameter Min Max Unit Timing Requirement tPWI Timer Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK 2 × (231– 1) × tPCLK ns Figure 13. Timer Width Capture Timing TIMER CAPTURE INPUTS tPWI Table 17. DAI Pin to Pin Routing Parameter Min Max Unit Timing Requirement tDPIO Delay DAI Pin Input Valid to DAI Output Valid 1.5 10 ns Figure 14. DAI Pin to Pin Direct Routing DAI_Pn DAI_Pm tDPIO ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 23 of 60 | July 2013 Precision Clock Generator (Direct Pin Routing) This timing is only valid when the SRU is configured such that the precision clock generator (PCG) takes its inputs directly from the DAI pins (via pin buffers) and sends its outputs directly to the DAI pins. For the other cases, where the PCG’s inputs and outputs are not directly routed to/from DAI pins (via pin buffers) there is no timing data available. All timing parameters and switching characteristics apply to external DAI pins (DAI_P01 through DAI_P20). Table 18. Precision Clock Generator (Direct Pin Routing) K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Timing Requirements tPCGIP Input Clock Period tPCLK × 4 ns tSTRIG PCG Trigger Setup Before Falling Edge of PCG Input Clock 4.5 ns tHTRIG PCG Trigger Hold After Falling Edge of PCG Input Clock 3 ns Switching Characteristics tDPCGIO PCG Output Clock and Frame Sync Active Edge Delay After PCG Input Clock 2.5 10 10 ns tDTRIGCLK PCG Output Clock Delay After PCG Trigger 2.5 + (2.5 × tPCGIP) 10 + (2.5 × tPCGIP) 12 + (2.5 × tPCGIP) ns tDTRIGFS PCG Frame Sync Delay After PCG Trigger 2.5 + ((2.5 + D – PH) × tPCGIP) 10 + ((2.5 + D – PH) × tPCGIP) 12 + ((2.5 + D – PH) × tPCGIP) ns tPCGOP 1 Output Clock Period 2 × tPCGIP – 1 ns D = FSxDIV, PH = FSxPHASE. For more information, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference, “Precision Clock Generators” chapter. 1 In normal mode, tPCGOP (min) = 2 × tPCGIP. Figure 15. Precision Clock Generator (Direct Pin Routing) DAI_Pn PCG_TRIGx_I DAI_Pm PCG_EXTx_I (CLKIN) DAI_Py PCG_CLKx_O DAI_Pz PCG_FSx_O tDTRIGFS tDTRIGCLK tDPCGIO tSTRIG tHTRIG tDPCGIO tPCGOP tPCGIP Rev. J | Page 24 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Flags The timing specifications provided below apply to the FLAG3–0 and DAI_P20–1 pins, the parallel port, and the serial peripheral interface (SPI). See Table 6 on Page 11 for more information on flag use. Table 19. Flags Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirement tFIPW FLAG3–0 IN Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK + 3 ns Switching Characteristic tFOPW FLAG3–0 OUT Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 1 ns Figure 16. Flags FLAG INPUTS FLAG OUTPUTS tFOPW tFIPW ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 25 of 60 | July 2013 Memory Read—Parallel Port Use these specifications for asynchronous interfacing to memories (and memory-mapped peripherals) when the processor is accessing external memory space. Table 20. 8-Bit Memory Read Cycle Parameter K and B Grade Y Grade Min Max Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tDRS AD7–0 Data Setup Before RD High 3.3 4.5 ns tDRH AD7–0 Data Hold After RD High 0 0 ns tDAD AD15–8 Address to AD7–0 Data Valid D + tPCLK – 5.0 D + tPCLK – 5.0 ns Switching Characteristics tALEW ALE Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 ns tADAS 1 AD15–0 Address Setup Before ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.5 tPCLK – 2.5 ns tRRH Delay Between RD Rising Edge to Next Falling Edge H + tPCLK – 1.4 H + tPCLK – 1.4 ns tALERW ALE Deasserted to Read Asserted 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 ns tRWALE Read Deasserted to ALE Asserted F + H + 0.5 F + H + 0.5 ns tADAH 1 AD15–0 Address Hold After ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.3 tPCLK – 2.3 ns tALEHZ 1 ALE Deasserted to AD7–0 Address in High-Z tPCLK tPCLK + 3.0 tPCLK tPCLK + 3.8 ns tRW RD Pulse Width D – 2.0 D – 2.0 ns tRDDRV AD7–0 ALE Address Drive After Read High F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 ns tADRH AD15–8 Address Hold After RD High H H ns tDAWH AD15–8 Address to RD High D + tPCLK – 4.0 D + tPCLK – 4.0 ns D = (The value set by the PPDUR Bits (5–1) in the PPCTL register) × tPCLK H = tPCLK (if a hold cycle is specified, else H = 0) F = 7 × tPCLK (if FLASH_MODE is set, else F = 0) 1 On reset, ALE is an active high cycle. However, it can be configured by software to be active low. Figure 17. Read Cycle for 8-Bit Memory Timing ALE RD WR AD15–8 AD7–0 tALEW tALERW tRWALE tRW tRRH tRDDRV tDAWH tADAS tADAH VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS VALID DATA VALID DATA tADRH tDAD tDRS tDRH tALEHZ NOTE: MEMORY READS ALWAYS OCCUR IN GROUPS OF FOUR BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. THIS FIGURE SHOWS ONLY TWO MEMORY READS TO PROVIDE THE NECESSARY TIMING INFORMATION. Rev. J | Page 26 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Table 21. 16-Bit Memory Read Cycle Parameter K and B Grade Y Grade Min Max Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tDRS AD15–0 Data Setup Before RD High 3.3 4.5 ns tDRH AD15–0 Data Hold After RD High 0 0 ns Switching Characteristics tALEW ALE Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 ns tADAS 1 AD15–0 Address Setup Before ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.5 tPCLK – 2.5 ns tALERW ALE Deasserted to Read Asserted 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 ns tRRH 2 Delay Between RD Rising Edge to Next Falling Edge H + tPCLK – 1.4 H + tPCLK – 1.4 ns tRWALE Read Deasserted to ALE Asserted F + H + 0.5 F + H + 0.5 ns tRDDRV ALE Address Drive After Read High F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 ns tADAH 1 AD15–0 Address Hold After ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.3 tPCLK – 2.3 ns tALEHZ1 ALE Deasserted to Address/Data15–0 in High-Z tPCLK tPCLK + 3.0 tPCLK tPCLK + 3.8 ns tRW RD Pulse Width D – 2.0 D – 2.0 ns D = (The value set by the PPDUR Bits (5–1) in the PPCTL register) × tPCLK H = tPCLK (if a hold cycle is specified, else H = 0) F = 7 × tPCLK (if FLASH_MODE is set, else F = 0) 1 On reset, ALE is an active high cycle. However, it can be configured by software to be active low. 2This parameter is only available when in EMPP = 0 mode. Figure 18. Read Cycle for 16-Bit Memory Timing tRWALE tRDDRV VALID VALID ADDRESS VALID DATA VALID DATA ADDRESS ALE RD WR AD15–0 tADAS tADAH tALEHZ tDRS tDRH tALEW tALERW tRW tRRH NOTE: FOR 16-BIT MEMORY READS, WHEN EMPP  0, ONLY ONE RD PULSE OCCURS BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. WHEN EMPP = 0, MULTIPLE RD PULSES OCCUR BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION, SEE THE ADSP-2136x SHARC PROCESSOR HARDWARE REFERENCE. ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 27 of 60 | July 2013 Memory Write—Parallel Port Use these specifications for asynchronous interfacing to memories (and memory-mapped peripherals) when the processor is accessing external memory space. Table 22. 8-Bit Memory Write Cycle Parameter K and B Grade Y Grade Min Min Unit Switching Characteristics tALEW ALE Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 ns tADAS 1 AD15–0 Address Setup Before ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.8 tPCLK – 2.8 ns tALERW ALE Deasserted to Write Asserted 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 ns tRWALE Write Deasserted to ALE Asserted H + 0.5 H + 0.5 ns tWRH Delay Between WR Rising Edge to Next WR Falling Edge F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 ns tADAH 1 AD15–0 Address Hold After ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 0.5 tPCLK – 0.5 ns tWW WR Pulse Width D – F – 2.0 D – F – 2.0 ns tADWL AD15–8 Address to WR Low tPCLK – 2.8 tPCLK – 3.5 ns tADWH AD15–8 Address Hold After WR High H H ns tDWS AD7–0 Data Setup Before WR High D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 ns tDWH AD7–0 Data Hold After WR High H H ns tDAWH AD15–8 Address to WR High D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 ns D = (The value set by the PPDUR Bits (5–1) in the PPCTL register) × tPCLK. H = tPCLK (if a hold cycle is specified, else H = 0) F = 7 × tPCLK (if FLASH_MODE is set, else F = 0). If FLASH_MODE is set, D must be  9 × tPCLK. 1 On reset, ALE is an active high cycle. However, it can be configured by software to be active low. Figure 19. Write Cycle for 8-Bit Memory Timing AD15-8 VALID ADDRESS VALID ADDRESS tADAS AD7-0 ALE RD WR tADAH tADWH tADWL VALID DATA tDAWH tWRH tRWALE VALID ADDRESS VALID DATA tALEW tALERW tWW tDWS tDWH VALID ADDRESS NOTE: MEMORY WRITES ALWAYS OCCUR IN GROUPS OF FOUR BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. THIS FIGURE SHOWS ONLY TWO MEMORY WRITES TO PROVIDE THE NECESSARY TIMING INFORMATION. Rev. J | Page 28 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Table 23. 16-Bit Memory Write Cycle Parameter K and B Grade Y Grade Min Min Unit Switching Characteristics tALEW ALE Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 2 × tPCLK – 2.0 ns tADAS 1 AD15–0 Address Setup Before ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.5 tPCLK – 2.5 ns tALERW ALE Deasserted to Write Asserted 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 2 × tPCLK – 3.8 ns tRWALE Write Deasserted to ALE Asserted H + 0.5 H + 0.5 ns tWRH 2 Delay Between WR Rising Edge to Next WR Falling Edge F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 F + H + tPCLK – 2.3 ns tADAH 1 AD15–0 Address Hold After ALE Deasserted tPCLK – 2.3 tPCLK – 2.3 ns tWW WR Pulse Width D – F – 2.0 D – F – 2.0 ns tDWS AD15–0 Data Setup Before WR High D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 D – F + tPCLK – 4.0 ns tDWH AD15–0 Data Hold After WR High H H ns D = (the value set by the PPDUR Bits (5–1) in the PPCTL register) × tPCLK. H = tPCLK (if a hold cycle is specified, else H = 0) F = 7 × tPCLK (if FLASH_MODE is set, else F = 0). If FLASH_MODE is set, D must be  9 × tPCLK. tPCLK = (peripheral) clock period = 2 × tCCLK 1 On reset, ALE is an active high cycle. However, it can be configured by software to be active low. 2This parameter is only available when in EMPP = 0 mode. Figure 20. Write Cycle for 16-Bit Memory Timing AD15-0 VALID ADDRESS VALID DATA tADAS ALE RD WR tADAH tWRH tRWALE tALEW tALERW tWW tDWS tDWH VALID DATA VALID ADDRESS NOTE: FOR 16-BIT MEMORY WRITES, WHEN EMPP 􀂏 0, ONLY ONE WR PULSE OCCURS BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. WHEN EMPP = 0, MULTIPLE WR PULSES OCCUR BETWEEN ALE CYCLES. FOR COMPLETE INFORMATION, SEE THE ADSP-2136x SHARC PROCESSOR HARDWARE REFERENCE. ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 29 of 60 | July 2013 Serial Ports To determine whether communication is possible between two devices at clock speed n, the following specifications must be confirmed: 1) frame sync (FS) delay and frame sync setup and hold, 2) data delay and data setup and hold, and 3) serial clock (SCLK) width. Serial port signals are routed to the DAI_P20–1 pins using the SRU. Therefore, the timing specifications provided below are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. Table 24. Serial Ports—External Clock K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Timing Requirements tSFSE 1 Frame Sync Setup Before SCLK (Externally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 2.5 ns tHFSE 1 Frame Sync Hold After SCLK (Externally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 2.5 ns tSDRE 1 Receive Data Setup Before Receive SCLK 2.5 ns tHDRE 1 Receive Data Hold After SCLK 2.5 ns tSCLKW SCLK Width (tPCLK × 4) ÷ 2 – 2 ns tSCLK SCLK Period tPCLK × 4 ns Switching Characteristics tDFSE 2 Frame Sync Delay After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 9.5 11 ns tHOFSE 2 Frame Sync Hold After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 2 ns tDDTE 2 Transmit Data Delay After Transmit SCLK 9.5 11 ns tHDTE 2 Transmit Data Hold After Transmit SCLK 2 ns 1 Referenced to sample edge. 2 Referenced to drive edge. Table 25. Serial Ports—Internal Clock K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Timing Requirements tSFSI 1 Frame Sync Setup Before SCLK (Externally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 7 ns tHFSI 1 Frame Sync Hold After SCLK (Externally Generated Frame Sync in Either Transmit or Receive Mode) 2.5 ns tSDRI 1 Receive Data Setup Before SCLK 7 ns tHDRI 1 Receive Data Hold After SCLK 2.5 ns Switching Characteristics tDFSI 2 Frame Sync Delay After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Transmit Mode) 3 3.5 ns tHOFSI 2 Frame Sync Hold After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Transmit Mode) –1.0 ns tDFSIR 2 Frame Sync Delay After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Receive Mode) 8 9.5 ns tHOFSIR 2 Frame Sync Hold After SCLK (Internally Generated Frame Sync in Receive Mode) –1.0 ns tDDTI 2 Transmit Data Delay After SCLK 3 4.0 ns tHDTI 2 Transmit Data Hold After SCLK –1.0 ns tSCLKIW Transmit or Receive SCLK Width 2 × tPCLK – 2 2 × tPCLK + 2 2 × tPCLK + 2 ns 1 Referenced to the sample edge. 2 Referenced to drive edge. Rev. J | Page 30 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Figure 21. Serial Ports DRIVE EDGE SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) tHOFSI tHFSI tHDRI DATA RECEIVE—INTERNAL CLOCK DRIVE EDGE SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) tHFSI tDDTI DATA TRANSMIT—INTERNAL CLOCK DRIVE EDGE SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) tHOFSI tHOFSE tHDTI tHFSE tHDTE tDDTE DATA TRANSMIT—EXTERNAL CLOCK DRIVE EDGE SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) tHOFSE tHFSE tHDRE DATA RECEIVE—EXTERNAL CLOCK tSCLKIW tDFSI tSFSI tSDRI tSCLKW tDFSE tSFSE tSDRE tDFSE tSFSI tSFSE tDFSI tSCLKIW tSCLKW ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 31 of 60 | July 2013 Table 26. Serial Ports—External Late Frame Sync K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Switching Characteristics tDDTLFSE 1 Data Delay from Late External Transmit Frame Sync or External Receive FS with MCE = 1, MFD = 0 9 10.5 ns tDDTENFS 1 Data Enable for MCE = 1, MFD = 0 0.5 ns 1The tDDTLFSE and tDDTENFS parameters apply to left-justified sample pair as well as serial mode, and MCE = 1, MFD = 0. Figure 22. External Late Frame Sync DRIVE SAMPLE EXTERNAL RECEIVE FS WITH MCE = 1, MFD = 0 2ND BIT DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) 1ST BIT DRIVE tDDTE/I tHDTE/I tDDTLFSE tDDTENFS tSFSE/I DRIVE SAMPLE LATE EXTERNAL TRANSMIT FS 2ND BIT DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) 1ST BIT DRIVE tDDTE/I tHDTE/I tDDTLFSE tDDTENFS tSFSE/I tHFSE/I tHFSE/I Rev. J | Page 32 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Table 27. Serial Ports—Enable and Three-State K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Switching Characteristics tDDTEN 1 Data Enable from External Transmit SCLK 2 ns tDDTTE 1 Data Disable from External Transmit SCLK 7 8.5 ns tDDTIN 1 Data Enable from Internal Transmit SCLK –1 ns 1 Referenced to drive edge. Figure 23. Enable and Three-State DRIVE EDGE DRIVE EDGE DRIVE EDGE tDDTIN tDDTEN tDDTTE DAI_P20–1 (SCLK, INT) DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK, EXT) DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 33 of 60 | July 2013 Input Data Port (IDP) The timing requirements for the IDP are given in Table 28. IDP signals are routed to the DAI_P20–1 pins using the SRU. Therefore, the timing specifications provided below are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. Table 28. IDP Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirements tSISFS 1 Frame Sync Setup Before Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSIHFS 1 Frame Sync Hold After Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSISD 1 Data Setup Before Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSIHD 1 Data Hold After Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tIDPCLKW Clock Width (tPCLK × 4) ÷ 2 – 1 ns tIDPCLK Clock Period tPCLK × 4 ns 1 The data, clock, and frame sync signals can come from any of the DAI pins. Clock and frame sync can also come via the PCGs or SPORTs. The PCG’s input can be either CLKIN or any of the DAI pins. Figure 24. IDP Master Timing DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SDATA) tIDPCLK tIDPCLKW tSISFS tSIHFS tSIHD tSISD Rev. J | Page 34 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Parallel Data Acquisition Port (PDAP) The timing requirements for the PDAP are provided in Table 29. PDAP is the parallel mode operation of Channel 0 of the IDP. For details on the operation of the IDP, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference, “Input Data Port” chapter. Note that the most significant 16 bits of external 20-bit PDAP data can be provided through either the parallel port AD15–0 pins or the DAI_P20–5 pins. The remaining 4 bits can only be sourced through DAI_P4–1. The timing below is valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins or at the AD15–0 pins. Table 29. Parallel Data Acquisition Port (PDAP) Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirements tSPCLKEN 1 PDAP_CLKEN Setup Before PDAP_CLK Sample Edge 2.5 ns tHPCLKEN 1 PDAP_CLKEN Hold After PDAP_CLK Sample Edge 2.5 ns tPDSD 1 PDAP_DAT Setup Before SCLK PDAP_CLK Sample Edge 3.0 ns tPDHD 1 PDAP_DAT Hold After SCLK PDAP_CLK Sample Edge 2.5 ns tPDCLKW Clock Width (tPCLK × 4) ÷ 2 – 3 ns tPDCLK Clock Period tPCLK × 4 ns Switching Characteristics tPDHLDD Delay of PDAP Strobe After Last PDAP_CLK Capture Edge for a Word 2 × tPCLK – 1 ns tPDSTRB PDAP Strobe Pulse Width 2 × tPCLK – 1.5 ns 1Data source pins are AD15–0 and DAI_P4–1, or DAI pins. Source pins for serial clock and frame sync are DAI pins. Figure 25. PDAP Timing DAI_P20–1 (PDAP_CLK) SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (PDAP_HOLD) DAI_P20–1 (PDAP_STROBE) tPDHLDD tPDSTRB tPDSD tPDHD tSPHOLD tHPHOLD tPDCLK tPDCLKW DAI_P20–1/ ADDR23–4 (PDAP_DATA) ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 35 of 60 | July 2013 Pulse-Width Modulation Generators Sample Rate Converter—Serial Input Port The SRC input signals are routed from the DAI_P20–1 pins using the SRU. Therefore, the timing specifications provided in Table 31 are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. This feature is not available on the ADSP-21363 models. Table 30. PWM Timing1 Parameter Min Max Unit Switching Characteristics tPWMW PWM Output Pulse Width tPCLK – 2 (216 – 2) × tPCLK ns tPWMP PWM Output Period 2 × tPCLK – 1.5 (216 – 1) × tPCLK ns 1Note that the PWM output signals are shared on the parallel port bus (AD15-0 pins). Figure 26. PWM Timing PWM OUTPUTS tPWMW tPWMP Table 31. SRC, Serial Input Port Parameter Min Unit Timing Requirements tSRCSFS 1 Frame Sync Setup Before Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSRCHFS 1 Frame Sync Hold After Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSRCSD 1 SDATA Setup Before Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSRCHD 1 SDATA Hold After Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSRCCLKW Clock Width 36 ns tSRCCLK Clock Period 80 ns 1 The data, serial clock, and frame sync signals can come from any of the DAI pins. The serial clock and frame sync signals can also come via the PCGs or SPORTs. The PCG’s input can be either CLKIN or any of the DAI pins. Rev. J | Page 36 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Figure 27. SRC Serial Input Port Timing DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SDATA) tSRCCLK tSRCCLKW tSRCSFS tSRCHFS tSRCSD tSRCHD ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 37 of 60 | July 2013 Sample Rate Converter—Serial Output Port For the serial output port, the frame-sync is an input and should meet setup and hold times with regard to the serial clock on the output port. The serial data output has a hold time and delay specification with regard to serial clock. Note that the serial clock rising edge is the sampling edge and the falling edge is the drive edge. Table 32. SRC, Serial Output Port K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Timing Requirements tSRCSFS 1 Frame Sync Setup Before Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns tSRCHFS 1 Frame Sync Hold After Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 ns Switching Characteristics tSRCTDD 1 Transmit Data Delay After Serial Clock Falling Edge 10.5 12.5 ns tSRCTDH 1 Transmit Data Hold After Serial Clock Falling Edge 2 ns 1 The data, serial clock, and frame sync signals can come from any of the DAI pins. The serial clock and frame sync can also come via PCG or SPORTs. PCG’s input can be either CLKIN or any of the DAI pins. Figure 28. SRC Serial Output Port Timing DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SDATA) tSRCCLK tSRCCLKW tSRCSFS tSRCHFS tSRCTDD tSRCTDH Rev. J | Page 38 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 S/PDIF Transmitter Serial data input to the S/PDIF transmitter can be formatted as left justified, I2S, or right justified with word widths of 16-, 18-, 20-, or 24-bits. The following sections provide timing for the transmitter. S/PDIF Transmitter-Serial Input Waveforms Figure 29 shows the right-justified mode. Frame sync is high for the left channel and low for the right channel. Data is valid on the rising edge of serial clock. The MSB is delayed the minimum in 24-bit output mode or the maximum in 16-bit output mode from a frame sync transition, so that when there are 64 serial clock periods per frame sync period, the LSB of the data is rightjustified to the next frame sync transition. Table 33. S/PDIF Transmitter Right-Justified Mode Parameter Nominal Unit Timing Requirement tRJD FS to MSB Delay in Right-Justified Mode 16-Bit Word Mode 18-Bit Word Mode 20-Bit Word Mode 24-Bit Word Mode 16 14 12 8 SCLK SCLK SCLK SCLK Figure 29. Right-Justified Mode MSB LEFT/RIGHT CHANNEL LSB MSB–1 MSB–2 LSB+2 LSB+1 LSB DAI_P20–1 FS DAI_P20–1 SCLK DAI_P20–1 SDATA tRJD ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 39 of 60 | July 2013 Figure 30 shows the default I2S-justified mode. The frame sync is low for the left channel and high for the right channel. Data is valid on the rising edge of serial clock. The MSB is left-justified to the frame sync transition but with a delay. Figure 31 shows the left-justified mode. The frame sync is high for the left channel and low for the right channel. Data is valid on the rising edge of serial clock. The MSB is left-justified to the frame sync transition with no delay. Table 34. S/PDIF Transmitter I2S Mode Parameter Nominal Unit Timing Requirement tI2SD FS to MSB Delay in I2S Mode 1 SCLK Figure 30. I2S-Justified Mode MSB LEFT/RIGHT CHANNEL MSB–1 MSB–2 LSB+2 LSB+1 LSB DAI_P20–1 FS DAI_P20–1 SCLK DAI_P20–1 SDATA tI2SD Table 35. S/PDIF Transmitter Left-Justified Mode Parameter Nominal Unit Timing Requirement tLJD FS to MSB Delay in Left-Justified Mode 0 SCLK Figure 31. Left-Justified Mode MSB LEFT/RIGHT CHANNEL MSB–1 MSB–2 LSB+2 LSB+1 LSB DAI_P20–1 FS DAI_P20–1 SCLK DAI_P20–1 SDATA tLJD Rev. J | Page 40 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 S/PDIF Transmitter Input Data Timing The timing requirements for the S/PDIF transmitter are given in Table 36. Input signals are routed to the DAI_P20–1 pins using the SRU. Therefore, the timing specifications provided below are valid at the DAI_P20–1 pins. Oversampling Clock (TxCLK) Switching Characteristics The S/PDIF transmitter requires an oversampling clock input. This high frequency clock (TxCLK) input is divided down to generate the internal biphase clock. Table 36. S/PDIF Transmitter Input Data Timing K Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tSISFS 1 Frame Sync Setup Before Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 3 ns tSIHFS 1 Frame Sync Hold After Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 3 ns tSISD 1 Data Setup Before Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 3 ns tSIHD 1 Data Hold After Serial Clock Rising Edge 3 3 ns tSITXCLKW Transmit Clock Width 9 9.5 ns tSITXCLK Transmit Clock Period 20 20 ns tSISCLKW Clock Width 36 36 ns tSISCLK Clock Period 80 80 ns 1 The serial clock, data and frame sync signals can come from any of the DAI pins.The serial clock and frame sync signals can also come via PCG or SPORTs. PCG’s input can be either CLKIN or any of the DAI pins. Figure 32. S/PDIF Transmitter Input Timing SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (TxCLK) DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (SDATA) tSITXCLKW tSITXCLK tSISCLKW tSISCLK tSISFS tSIHFS tSISD tSIHD Table 37. Oversampling Clock (TxCLK) Switching Characteristics Parameter Max Unit Frequency for TxCLK = 384 × Frame Sync Oversampling Ratio × Frame Sync <= 1/tSITXCLK MHz Frequency for TxCLK = 256 × Frame Sync 49.2 MHz Frame Rate (FS) 192.0 kHz ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 41 of 60 | July 2013 S/PDIF Receiver The following section describes timing as it relates to the S/PDIF receiver. This feature is not available on the ADSP-21363 processors. Internal Digital PLL Mode In the internal digital phase-locked loop mode the internal PLL (digital PLL) generates the 512 × FS clock. Table 38. S/PDIF Receiver Output Timing (Internal Digital PLL Mode) Parameter Min Max Unit Switching Characteristics tDFSI Frame Sync Delay After Serial Clock 5 ns tHOFSI Frame Sync Hold After Serial Clock –2 ns tDDTI Transmit Data Delay After Serial Clock 5 ns tHDTI Transmit Data Hold After Serial Clock –2 ns tSCLKIW 1 Transmit Serial Clock Width 38 ns 1 Serial clock frequency is 64 ×FS where FS = the frequency of frame sync. Figure 33. S/PDIF Receiver Internal Digital PLL Mode Timing DAI_P20–1 (SCLK) SAMPLE EDGE DAI_P20–1 (FS) DAI_P20–1 (DATA CHANNEL A/B) DRIVE EDGE tSCLKIW tDFSI tHOFSI tDDTI tHDTI Rev. J | Page 42 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 SPI Interface—Master The processor contains two SPI ports. The primary has dedicated pins and the secondary is available through the DAI. The timing provided in Table 39 and Table 40 applies to both ports. Table 39. SPI Interface Protocol—Master Switching and Timing Specifications Parameter K and B Grade Y Grade Min Max Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tSSPIDM Data Input Valid to SPICLK Edge (Data Input Setup Time) 5.2 6.2 ns tSSPIDM Data Input Valid to SPICLK Edge (Data Input Setup Time) (SPI2) 8.2 9.5 ns tHSPIDM SPICLK Last Sampling Edge to Data Input Not Valid 2 2 ns Switching Characteristics tSPICLKM Serial Clock Cycle 8 × tPCLK – 2 8 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSPICHM Serial Clock High Period 4 × tPCLK – 2 4 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSPICLM Serial Clock Low Period 4 × tPCLK – 2 4 × tPCLK – 2 ns tDDSPIDM SPICLK Edge to Data Out Valid (Data Out Delay Time) 3.0 3.0 ns tDDSPIDM SPICLK Edge to Data Out Valid (Data Out Delay Time) (SPI2) 8.0 9.5 ns tHDSPIDM SPICLK Edge to Data Out Not Valid (Data Out Hold Time) 4 × tPCLK – 2 4 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSDSCIM FLAG3–0IN (SPI Device Select) Low to First SPICLK Edge 4 × tPCLK – 2.5 4 × tPCLK – 3.0 ns tSDSCIM FLAG3–0IN (SPI Device Select) Low to First SPICLK Edge (SPI2) 4 × tPCLK – 2.5 4 × tPCLK – 3.0 ns tHDSM Last SPICLK Edge to FLAG3–0IN High 4 × tPCLK – 2 4 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSPITDM Sequential Transfer Delay 4 × tPCLK – 1 4 × tPCLK – 1 ns Figure 34. SPI Master Timing tSDSCIM tSPICHM tSPICLM tSPICLKM tHDSM tSPITDM tDDSPIDM tSSPIDM tHSPIDM DPI (OUTPUT) MOSI (OUTPUT) MISO (INPUT) MOSI (OUTPUT) MISO (INPUT) CPHASE = 1 CPHASE = 0 tHDSPIDM tHSPIDM tHSPIDM tSSPIDM tSSPIDM tDDSPIDM tHDSPIDM SPICLK (CP = 0, CP = 1) (OUTPUT) ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 43 of 60 | July 2013 SPI Interface—Slave Table 40. SPI Interface Protocol—Slave Switching and Timing Specifications K and B Grade Y Grade Parameter Min Max Max Unit Timing Requirements tSPICLKS Serial Clock Cycle 4 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSPICHS Serial Clock High Period 2 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSPICLS Serial Clock Low Period 2 × tPCLK – 2 ns tSDSCO SPIDS Assertion to First SPICLK Edge CPHASE = 0 CPHASE = 1 2 × tPCLK 2 × tPCLK ns ns tHDS Last SPICLK Edge to SPIDS Not Asserted, CPHASE = 0 2 × tPCLK ns tSSPIDS Data Input Valid to SPICLK Edge (Data Input Setup Time) 2 ns tHSPIDS SPICLK Last Sampling Edge to Data Input Not Valid 2 ns tSDPPW SPIDS Deassertion Pulse Width (CPHASE = 0) 2 × tPCLK ns Switching Characteristics tDSOE SPIDS Assertion to Data Out Active 0 5 5 ns tDSOE 1 SPIDS Assertion to Data Out Active (SPI2) 0 8 9 ns tDSDHI SPIDS Deassertion to Data High Impedance 0 5 5.5 ns tDSDHI 1 SPIDS Deassertion to Data High Impedance (SPI2) 0 8.6 10 ns tDDSPIDS SPICLK Edge to Data Out Valid (Data Out Delay Time) 9.5 11.0 ns tHDSPIDS SPICLK Edge to Data Out Not Valid (Data Out Hold Time) 2 × tPCLK ns tDSOV SPIDS Assertion to Data Out Valid (CPHASE = 0) 5 × tPCLK 5 × tPCLK ns 1The timing for these parameters applies when the SPI is routed through the signal routing unit. For more information, refer to the ADSP-2136x SHARC Processor Hardware Reference, “Serial Peripheral Interface Port” chapter. Rev. J | Page 44 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Figure 35. SPI Slave Timing tSPICHS tSPICLS tSPICLKS tHDS tSDPPW tSDSCO tDSOE tDDSPIDS tDDSPIDS tDSDHI tHDSPIDS tSSPIDS tHSPIDS tDSDHI tDSOV tHSPIDS tHDSPIDS SPIDS (INPUT) MISO (OUTPUT) MOSI (INPUT) MISO (OUTPUT) MOSI (INPUT) CPHASE = 1 CPHASE = 0 SPICLK (CP = 0, CP = 1) (INPUT) tSSPIDS ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 45 of 60 | July 2013 JTAG Test Access Port and Emulation Table 41. JTAG Test Access Port and Emulation Parameter Min Max Unit Timing Requirements tTCK TCK Period tCK ns tSTAP TDI, TMS Setup Before TCK High 5 ns tHTAP TDI, TMS Hold After TCK High 6 ns tSSYS 1 System Inputs Setup Before TCK High 7 ns tHSYS 1 System Inputs Hold After TCK High 18 ns tTRSTW TRST Pulse Width 4 × tCK ns Switching Characteristics tDTDO TDO Delay from TCK Low 7 ns tDSYS 2 System Outputs Delay After TCK Low tCK ÷ 2 + 7 ns 1 System Inputs = ADDR15–0, SPIDS, CLK_CFG1–0, RESET, BOOT_CFG1–0, MISO, MOSI, SPICLK, DAI_Px, and FLAG3–0. 2 System Outputs = MISO, MOSI, SPICLK, DAI_Px, ADDR15–0, RD, WR, FLAG3–0, EMU, and ALE. Figure 36. IEEE 1149.1 JTAG Test Access Port TCK TMS TDI TDO SYSTEM INPUTS SYSTEM OUTPUTS tTCK tSTAP tHTAP tDTDO tSSYS tHSYS tDSYS Rev. J | Page 46 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 OUTPUT DRIVE CURRENTS Figure 37 shows typical I-V characteristics for the output drivers of the processor. The curves represent the current drive capability of the output drivers as a function of output voltage. TEST CONDITIONS The ac signal specifications (timing parameters) appear in Table 12 on Page 20 through Table 41 on Page 45. These include output disable time, output enable time, and capacitive loading. The timing specifications for the SHARC apply for the voltage reference levels in Figure 38. Timing is measured on signals when they cross the 1.5 V level as described in Figure 39. All delays (in nanoseconds) are measured between the point that the first signal reaches 1.5 V and the point that the second signal reaches 1.5 V. CAPACITIVE LOADING Output delays and holds are based on standard capacitive loads: 30 pF on all pins (see Figure 38). Figure 42 shows graphically how output delays and holds vary with load capacitance. The graphs of Figure 40, Figure 41, and Figure 42 may not be linear outside the ranges shown for Typical Output Delay versus Load Capacitance and Typical Output Rise Time (20% to 80%, V = Min) versus Load Capacitance. Figure 37. ADSP-2136x Typical Drive Figure 38. Equivalent Device Loading for AC Measurements (Includes All Fixtures) Figure 39. Voltage Reference Levels for AC Measurements SWEEP (VDDEXT) VOLTAGE (V) -20 0 0.5 1.5 2.5 3.5 0 -40 -30 20 40 -10 SOURCE (VDDEXT) CURRENT (mA) VOL 3.11V, +125°C 3.3V, +25°C 3.47V, -45°C 30 VOH 10 3.11V, +125°C 3.3V, +25°C 3.47V, -45°C 1.0 2.0 3.0 TO OUTPUT PIN 􀀘􀀓􀈍 VLOAD 30pF INPUT 1.5V OR OUTPUT 1.5V Figure 40. Typical Output Rise/Fall Time (20% to 80%, VDDEXT = Max) Figure 41. Typical Output Rise/Fall Time (20% to 80%, VDDEXT = Min) LOAD CAPACITANCE (pF) 8 0 0 100 250 12 4 2 10 6 RISE AND FALL TIMES (ns) 50 150 200 FALL y = 0.0467x + 1.6323 y = 0.045x + 1.524 RISE LOAD CAPACITANCE (pF) 12 0 50 100 150 200 250 10 8 6 4 RISE AND FALL TIMES (ns) 2 0 RISE y = 0.049x + 1.5105 FALL y = 0.0482x + 1.4604 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 47 of 60 | July 2013 THERMAL CHARACTERISTICS The processor is rated for performance over the temperature range specified in Operating Conditions on Page 14. Table 42 through Table 44 airflow measurements comply with JEDEC standards JESD51-2 and JESD51-6 and the junction-toboard measurement complies with JESD51-8. Test board and thermal via design comply with JEDEC standards JESD51-9 (BGA) and JESD51-5 (LQFP_EP). The junction-to-case measurement complies with MIL-STD-883. All measurements use a 2S2P JEDEC test board. Industrial applications using the BGA package require thermal vias, to an embedded ground plane, in the PCB. Refer to JEDEC standard JESD51-9 for printed circuit board thermal ball land and thermal via design information. Industrial applications using the LQFP_EP package require thermal trace squares and thermal vias, to an embedded ground plane, in the PCB. Refer to JEDEC standard JESD51-5 for more information. To determine the junction temperature of the device while on the application PCB, use: where: TJ = junction temperature (°C) TT = case temperature (°C) measured at the top center of the package ΨJT = junction-to-top (of package) characterization parameter is the typical value from Table 42 through Table 44. PD = power dissipation. See the Engineer-to-Engineer Note “Estimating Power for the ADSP-21362 SHARC Processors” (EE-277) for more information. Values of θJA are provided for package comparison and PCB design considerations. Values of θJC are provided for package comparison and PCB design considerations when an exposed pad is required. Note that the thermal characteristics values provided in Table 42 through Table 44 are modeled values. Figure 42. Typical Output Delay or Hold versus Load Capacitance (at Ambient Temperature) LOAD CAPACITANCE (pF) 0 50 100 150 200 10 8 OUTPUT DELAY OR HOLD (ns) 6 0 4 2 -2 y = 0.0488x - 1.5923 -4 TJ TT JT PD = +    Table 42. Thermal Characteristics for BGA (No Thermal vias in PCB) Parameter Condition Typical Unit θJA Airflow = 0 m/s 25.40 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 1 m/s 21.90 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 2 m/s 20.90 °C/W θJC 5.07 °C/W ΨJT Airflow = 0 m/s 0.140 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 1 m/s 0.330 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 2 m/s 0.410 °C/W Table 43. Thermal Characteristics for BGA (Thermal vias in PCB) Parameter Condition Typical Unit θJA Airflow = 0 m/s 23.40 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 1 m/s 20.00 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 2 m/s 19.20 °C/W θJC 5.00 °C/W ΨJT Airflow = 0 m/s 0.130 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 1 m/s 0.300 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 2 m/s 0.360 °C/W Table 44. Thermal Characteristics for LQFP_EP (with Exposed Pad Soldered to PCB) Parameter Condition Typical Unit θJA Airflow = 0 m/s 16.80 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 1 m/s 14.20 °C/W θJMA Airflow = 2 m/s 13.50 °C/W θJC 7.25 °C/W ΨJT Airflow = 0 m/s 0.51 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 1 m/s 0.72 °C/W ΨJMT Airflow = 2 m/s 0.80 °C/W Rev. J | Page 48 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 144-LEAD LQFP_EP PIN CONFIGURATIONS The following table shows the processor’s pin names and, when applicable, their default function after reset in parentheses. Table 45. LQFP_EP Pin Assignments Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No. VDDINT 1 VDDINT 37 VDDEXT 73 GND 109 CLK_CFG0 2 GND 38 GND 74 VDDINT 110 CLK_CFG1 3 RD 39 VDDINT 75 GND 111 BOOT_CFG0 4 ALE 40 GND 76 VDDINT 112 BOOT_CFG1 5 AD15 41 DAI_P10 (SD2B) 77 GND 113 GND 6 AD14 42 DAI_P11 (SD3A) 78 VDDINT 114 VDDEXT 7 AD13 43 DAI_P12 (SD3B) 79 GND 115 GND 8 GND 44 DAI_P13 (SCLK3) 80 VDDEXT 116 VDDINT 9 VDDEXT 45 DAI_P14 (SFS3) 81 GND 117 GND 10 AD12 46 DAI_P15 (SD4A) 82 VDDINT 118 VDDINT 11 VDDINT 47 VDDINT 83 GND 119 GND 12 GND 48 GND 84 VDDINT 120 VDDINT 13 AD11 49 GND 85 RESET 121 GND 14 AD10 50 DAI_P16 (SD4B) 86 SPIDS 122 FLAG0 15 AD9 51 DAI_P17 (SD5A) 87 GND 123 FLAG1 16 AD8 52 DAI_P18 (SD5B) 88 VDDINT 124 AD7 17 DAI_P1 (SD0A) 53 DAI_P19 (SCLK5) 89 SPICLK 125 GND 18 VDDINT 54 VDDINT 90 MISO 126 VDDINT 19 GND 55 GND 91 MOSI 127 GND 20 DAI_P2 (SD0B) 56 GND 92 GND 128 VDDEXT 21 DAI_P3 (SCLK0) 57 VDDEXT 93 VDDINT 129 GND 22 GND 58 DAI_P20 (SFS5) 94 VDDEXT 130 VDDINT 23 VDDEXT 59 GND 95 Avdd 131 AD6 24 VDDINT 60 VDDINT 96 Avss 132 AD5 25 GND 61 FLAG2 97 GND 133 AD4 26 DAI_P4 (SFS0) 62 FLAG3 98 RESETOUT 134 VDDINT 27 DAI_P5 (SD1A) 63 VDDINT 99 EMU 135 GND 28 DAI_P6 (SD1B) 64 GND 100 TDO 136 AD3 29 DAI_P7 (SCLK1) 65 VDDINT 101 TDI 137 AD2 30 VDDINT 66 GND 102 TRST 138 VDDEXT 31 GND 67 VDDINT 103 TCK 139 GND 32 VDDINT 68 GND 104 TMS 140 AD1 33 GND 69 VDDINT 105 GND 141 AD0 34 DAI_P8 (SFS1) 70 GND 106 CLKIN 142 WR 35 DAI_P9 (SD2A) 71 VDDINT 107 XTAL 143 VDDINT 36 VDDINT 72 VDDINT 108 VDDEXT 144 GND 145* *The ePAD is electrically connected to GND inside the chip (see Figure 43 and Figure 44), therefore connecting the pad to GND is optional. For better thermal performance the ePAD should be soldered to the board and thermally connected to the GND plane with vias. ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 49 of 60 | July 2013 Figure 43 shows the top view of the 144-lead LQFP_EP pin configuration. Figure 44 shows the bottom view of the 144-lead LQFP_EP lead configuration. Figure 43. 144-Lead LQFP_EP Lead Configuration (Top View) Figure 44. 144-Lead LQFP_EP Lead Configuration (Bottom View) LEAD 1 LEAD 36 LEAD 108 LEAD 73 LEAD 144 LEAD 109 LEAD 37 LEAD 72 LEAD 1 INDICATOR ADSP-2136x 144-LEAD LQFP_EP TOP VIEW LEAD 108 LEAD 73 LEAD 1 LEAD 36 LEAD 109 LEAD 144 LEAD 72 LEAD 37 LEAD 1 INDICATOR GND PAD (LEAD 145) ADSP-2136x 144-LEAD LQFP_EP BOTTOM VIEW Rev. J | Page 50 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 136-BALL BGA PIN CONFIGURATIONS The following table shows the processor’s ball names and, when applicable, their default function after reset in parentheses. Table 46. BGA Pin Assignments Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. CLK_CFG0 A01 CLK_CFG1 B01 BOOT_CFG1 C01 VDDINT D01 XTAL A02 GND B02 BOOT_CFG0 C02 GND D02 TMS A03 VDDEXT B03 GND C03 GND D04 TCK A04 CLKIN B04 GND C12 GND D05 TDI A05 TRST B05 GND C13 GND D06 RESETOUT A06 AVSS B06 VDDINT C14 GND D09 TDO A07 AVDD B07 GND D10 EMU A08 VDDEXT B08 GND D11 MOSI A09 SPICLK B09 GND D13 MISO A10 RESET B10 VDDINT D14 SPIDS A11 VDDINT B11 VDDINT A12 GND B12 GND A13 GND B13 GND A14 GND B14 VDDINT E01 FLAG1 F01 AD7 G01 AD6 H01 GND E02 FLAG0 F02 VDDINT G02 VDDEXT H02 GND E04 GND F04 VDDEXT G13 DAI_P18 (SD5B) H13 GND E05 GND F05 DAI_P19 (SCLK5) G14 DAI_P17 (SD5A) H14 GND E06 GND F06 GND E09 GND F09 GND E10 GND F10 GND E11 GND F11 GND E13 FLAG2 F13 FLAG3 E14 DAI_P20 (SFS5) F14 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 51 of 60 | July 2013 Figure 45 and Figure 46 show BGA pin assignments from the bottom and top, respectively. Note: Use the center block of ground pins to provide thermal pathways to your printed circuit board’s ground plane. AD5 J01 AD3 K01 AD2 L01 AD0 M01 AD4 J02 VDDINT K02 AD1 L02 WR M02 GND J04 GND K04 GND L04 GND M03 GND J05 GND K05 GND L05 GND M12 GND J06 GND K06 GND L06 DAI_P12 (SD3B) M13 GND J09 GND K09 GND L09 DAI_P13 (SCLK3) M14 GND J10 GND K10 GND L10 GND J11 GND K11 GND L11 VDDINT J13 GND K13 GND L13 DAI_P16 (SD4B) J14 DAI_P15 (SD4A) K14 DAI_P14 (SFS3) L14 AD15 N01 AD14 P01 ALE N02 AD13 P02 RD N03 AD12 P03 VDDINT N04 AD11 P04 VDDEXT N05 AD10 P05 AD8 N06 AD9 P06 VDDINT N07 DAI_P1 (SD0A) P07 DAI_P2 (SD0B) N08 DAI_P3 (SCLK0) P08 VDDEXT N09 DAI_P5 (SD1A) P09 DAI_P4 (SFS0) N10 DAI_P6 (SD1B) P10 VDDINT N11 DAI_P7 (SCLK1) P11 VDDINT N12 DAI_P8 (SFS1) P12 GND N13 DAI_P9 (SD2A) P13 DAI_P10 (SD2B) N14 DAI_P11 (SD3A) P14 Table 46. BGA Pin Assignments (Continued) Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. Ball Name Ball No. Rev. J | Page 52 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Figure 45. BGA Pin Assignments (Bottom View, Summary) AVSS VDDINT VDDEXT I/O SIGNALS GND AVDD KEY 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 P N M L K J H G F E D C B A Figure 46. BGA Pin Assignments (Top View, Summary) AVSS VDDINT VDDEXT I/O SIGNALS GND AVDD KEY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 P N M L K J H G F E D C B A ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 53 of 60 | July 2013 PACKAGE DIMENSIONS The processor is available in 136-ball BGA and 144-lead exposed pad (LQFP_EP) packages. Figure 47. 144-Lead Low Profile Quad Flat Package, Exposed Pad [LQFP_EP1] (SW-144-1) Dimensions shown in millimeters 1For information relating to the exposed pad on the SW-144-1 package, see the table endnote on Page 48. COMPLIANT TO JEDEC STANDARDS MS-026-BFB-HD 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.75 0.60 0.45 0.50 BSC LEAD PITCH 20.20 20.00 SQ 19.80 22.20 22.00 SQ 21.80 EXPOSED* PAD 1 36 1 36 37 73 72 72 37 108 73 108 144 109 109 144 PIN 1 1.60 MAX SEATING PLANE *EXPOSED PAD IS COINCIDENT WITH BOTTOM SURFACE AND DOES NOT PROTRUDE BEYOND IT. EXPOSED PAD IS CENTERED. 8.80 SQ 0.15 0.10 0.05 0.08 COPLANARITY 0.20 0.15 0.09 1.45 1.40 1.35 7° 3.5° 0° VIEW A ROTATED 90° CCW TOP VIEW (PINS DOWN) BOTTOM VIEW (PINS UP) VIEW A Rev. J | Page 54 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 SURFACE-MOUNT DESIGN Table 47 is provided as an aid to PCB design. For industry standard design recommendations, refer to IPC-7351, Generic Requirements for Surface-Mount Design and Land Pattern Standard. Figure 48. 136-Ball Chip Scale Package Ball Grid Array [CSP_BGA] (BC-136-1) Dimensions shown in millimeters 0.25 MIN *0.50 0.45 0.40 1.31 1.21 1.70 MAX 1.10 A B C D EF G J H KL M 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 NP 12.10 12.00 SQ 11.90 10.40 BSC SQ *COMPLIANT WITH JEDEC STANDARDS MO-275-GGAA-1 WITH EXCEPTION TO BALL DIAMETER. COPLANARITY 0.12 BALL DIAMETER 0.80 BSC DETAIL A A1 BALL A1 BALL CORNER CORNER DETAIL A TOP VIEW BOTTOM VIEW SEATING PLANE Table 47. BGA Data for Use with Surface-Mount Design Package Package Ball Attach Type Package Solder Mask Opening Package Ball Pad Size 136-Ball CSP_BGA (BC-136-1) Solder Mask Defined 0.40 mm diameter 0.53 mm diameter ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 55 of 60 | July 2013 AUTOMOTIVE PRODUCTS Some ADSP-2136x models are available for automotive applications with controlled manufacturing. Note that these special models may have specifications that differ from the general release models. The automotive grade products shown in Table 48 are available for use in automotive applications. Contact your local ADI account representative or authorized ADI product distributor for specific product ordering information. Note that all automotive products are RoHS compliant. Table 48. Automotive Products Model Notes Temperature Range1 Instruction Rate On-Chip SRAM ROM Package Description Package Option AD21362WBBCZ1xx 2 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 AD21362WBSWZ1xx 2 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21362WYSWZ2xx 2 –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21363WBBCZ1xx –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 AD21363WBSWZ1xx –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21363WYSWZ2xx –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21364WBBCZ1xx –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 AD21364WBSWZ1xx –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21364WYSWZ2xx –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21365WBSWZ1xxA 2, 3, 4 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21365WBSWZ1xxF 2, 3, 4 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21365WYSWZ2xxA 2, 3, 4 –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21366WBBCZ1xxA 3, 4 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 AD21366WBSWZ1xxA 3, 4 –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 AD21366WYSWZ2xxA 3, 4 –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 1 Referenced temperature is ambient temperature. The ambient temperature is not a specification. Please see Operating Conditions on Page 14 for junction temperature (TJ) specification which is the only temperature specification. 2 License from DTLA required for these products. 3Available with a wide variety of audio algorithm combinations sold as part of a chipset and bundled with necessary software. For a complete list, visit our website at www.analog.com/sharc. 4 License from Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) required for these products. Rev. J | Page 56 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 ORDERING GUIDE Model1 1 Z = RoHS compliant part. Notes Temperature Range2 2 Referenced temperature is ambient temperature. The ambient temperature is not a specification. Please see Operating Conditions on Page 14 for junction temperature (TJ) specification which is the only temperature specification. Instruction Rate On-Chip SRAM ROM Package Description Package Option ADSP-21363KBC-1AA 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21363KBCZ-1AA 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21363KSWZ-1AA 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21363BBC-1AA –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21363BBCZ-1AA –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21363BSWZ-1AA –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21363YSWZ-2AA 3 3 License from Dolby Laboratories, Inc., and Digital Theater Systems (DTS) required for these products. –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21364KBCZ-1AA 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21364KSWZ-1AA 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21364BBCZ-1AA –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21364BSWZ-1AA –40°C to +85°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21364YSWZ-2AA –40°C to +105°C 200 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21366KBCZ-1AR 3, 4, 5 4Available with a wide variety of audio algorithm combinations sold as part of a chipset and bundled with necessary software. For a complete list, visit our website at www.analog.com/sharc. 5 R = Tape and reel. 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21366KBCZ-1AA 3, 4 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 136-Ball CSP_BGA BC-136-1 ADSP-21366KSWZ-1AA 3, 4 0°C to +70°C 333 MHz 3M Bit 4M Bit 144-Lead LQFP_EP SW-144-1 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 57 of 60 | July 2013 Rev. J | Page 58 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 Rev. J | Page 59 of 60 | July 2013 Rev. J | Page 60 of 60 | July 2013 ADSP-21362/ADSP-21363/ADSP-21364/ADSP-21365/ADSP-21366 ©2013 Analog Devices, Inc. All rights reserved. Trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners. D06359-0-7/13(J) Product family data sheet Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. CLD-DS56 Rev 4 Cree® XLamp® XP-E2 LEDs Product Description The XLamp XP-E2 LED builds on the unprecedented performance of the original XP-E by increasing lumen output up to 20% while providing a single die LED point source for precise optical control. The XP‑E2 LED shares the same footprint as the original XP‑E, providing a seamless upgrade path to more lumens and/or greater efficiency while shortening the design cycle for existing XP customers. XLamp XP-E2 LEDs are the ideal choice for lighting applications where high light output and maximum efficacy are required, such as LED retrofit lamps, outdoor, portable, indoor directional, emergency vehicle or architectural. FEATURES • Available in white, outdoor white, 80-CRI, 85-CRI, 90-CRI white, royal blue, blue, green, amber, red-orange & red • ANSI-compatible chromaticity bins • White binned at 85 °C • Maximum drive current: 1 A • Low thermal resistance: as low as 5 °C/W • Wide viewing angle: 110°-135° • Unlimited floor life at ≤ 30 °C/85% RH • Reflow solderable - JEDEC J-STD-020C compatible • Electrically neutral thermal path • UL-recognized component (E349212) www.cree.com/Xlamp Cree, Inc. 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, NC 27703 USA Tel: +1.919.313.5300 Table of Contents Characteristics........................... 2 Flux Characteristics - White......... 3 Flux Characteristics - Color.......... 4 Relative Spectral Power Distribution............................... 6 Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature.............................. 7 Electrical Characteristics.............. 8 Relative Flux vs. Current............. 9 Relative Chromaticity vs. Current and Temperature.......................10 Typical Spatial Distribution..........11 Thermal Design.........................12 Reflow Soldering Characteristics..13 Notes.......................................14 Mechanical Dimensions..............15 Tape and Reel...........................16 Packaging.................................17 Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 2 xlamp xp-e2 leds Characteristics Characteristics Unit Minimum Typical Maximum Thermal resistance, junction to solder point - white, royal blue, blue °C/W 9 Thermal resistance, junction to solder point - green °C/W 15 Thermal resistance, junction to solder point - amber °C/W 7 Thermal resistance, junction to solder point - red-orange, red °C/W 5 Viewing angle (FWHM) - white degrees 110 Viewing angle (FWHM) - royal blue, blue, green degrees 135 Viewing angle (FWHM) - amber, red-orange, red degrees 130 Temperature coefficient of voltage - white mV/°C -2.3 Temperature coefficient of voltage - royal blue, blue mV/°C -3.3 Temperature coefficient of voltage - green mV/°C -3.8 Temperature coefficient of voltage - amber, red-orange, red mV/°C -1.8 ESD withstand voltage (HBM per Mil-Std-883D)- white, royal blue, blue, green V 8000 ESD classification (HBM per Mil-Std-883D) - amber, red-orange, red Class 2 DC forward current mA 1000 Reverse voltage V 5 Forward voltage (@ 350 mA, 85 °C) - white V 2.9 3.25 Forward voltage (@ 700 mA, 85 °C) - white 3.05 Forward voltage (@ 1000 mA, 85 °C) - white 3.15 Forward voltage (@ 350 mA, 25 °C) - royal blue, blue V 3.1 3.5 Forward voltage (@ 350 mA, 25 °C) - green V 3.2 3.6 Forward voltage (@ 350 mA, 25 °C) - amber, red-orange, red V 2.2 2.6 Forward voltage (@ 1000 mA, 25 °C) - royal blue, blue V 3.4 Forward voltage (@ 1000 mA, 25 °C) - green V 3.7 Forward voltage (@ 1000 mA, 25 °C) - amber, red-orange, red V 2.65 LED junction temperature °C 150 Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 3 xlamp xp-e2 leds Flux Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) - White The following table provides several base order codes for XLamp XP-E2 LEDs. It is important to note that the base order codes listed here are a subset of the total available order codes for the product family. For more order codes, as well as a complete description of the order-code nomenclature, please consult the XLamp XP Family Binning and Labeling document. Color CCT Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux (lm) @ 350 mA Calculated Minimum Luminous Flux (lm)** @ 85 °C Order Code Min. Max. Group Flux (lm) @ 85 °C Flux (lm) @ 25 °C* 700 mA 1.0 A Cool White 5000 K 10,000 K Q4 100 116 171 218 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00C51 Q5 107 124 183 233 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00D51 R2 114 132 195 249 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00E51 R3 122 142 209 266 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00F51 Outdoor White 4000 K 5300 K Q4 100 116 171 218 XPEBWT-01-0000-00CC2 Q5 107 124 183 233 XPEBWT-01-0000-00DC2 R2 114 132 195 249 XPEBWT-01-0000-00EC2 R3 122 142 209 266 XPEBWT-01-0000-00FC2 Neutral White 3700 K 5300 K Q4 100 116 171 218 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00CE4 Q5 107 124 183 233 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00DE4 R2 114 132 195 249 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00EE4 80-CRI White 2200 K 4300 K Q2 87.4 101 150 191 XPEBWT-H1-0000-00AE7 Q3 93.9 109 161 205 XPEBWT-H1-0000-00BE7 Warm White 2200 K 3700 K Q2 87.4 101 150 191 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00AE7 Q3 93.9 109 161 205 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00BE7 Q4 100 116 171 218 XPEBWT-L1-0000-00CE7 85-CRI White 2600 K 3200 K P2 67.2 78.0 115 147 XPEBWT-P1-0000-007E7 P3 73.9 85.7 127 161 XPEBWT-P1-0000-008E7 P4 80.6 93.5 138 176 XPEBWT-P1-0000-009E7 Q2 87.4 101 150 191 XPEBWT-P1-0000-00AE7 90-CRI White 2600 K 3200 K P2 67.2 78.0 115 147 XPEBWT-U1-0000-007E7 P3 73.9 85.7 127 161 XPEBWT-U1-0000-008E7 P4 80.6 93.5 138 176 XPEBWT-U1-0000-009E7 Notes: • Cree maintains a tolerance of ± 7% on flux and power measurements, ±0.005 on chromaticity (CCx, CCy) measurements and ±2 on CRI measurements. • Typical CRI for Cool White (5000 K – 10,000 K CCT) is 70. • Typical CRI for Neutral White (3700 K – 5300 K CCT) is 75. • Typical CRI for Outdoor White (4000 K - 5300 K CCT) is 70. • Typical CRI for Warm White (2200 K – 3700 K CCT) is 80. • Minimum CRI for 80-CRI White is 80. • Minimum CRI for 85-CRI White is 85. • Minimum CRI for 90-CRI White is 90. * Flux values @ 25 °C are calculated and for reference only. ** Calculated flux values at 700 mA and 1 A are for reference only. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 4 xlamp xp-e2 leds Flux Characteristics (TJ = 25 °C) - Color The following table provides several base order codes for XLamp XP-E2 color LEDs. It is important to note that the base order codes listed here are a subset of the total available order codes for the product family. For more order codes, as well as a complete description of the order-code nomenclature, please consult the XLamp XP Family Binning and Labeling document. Color Minimum Radiant Flux @ 350 mA Dominant Wavelength Range Order Codes, Group Flux (mW) Min. Max. Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Royal Blue 30 450 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00J01 31 475 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00K01 32 500 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00L01 33 525 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00M01 34 550 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00N01 35 575 D3 450 D5 465 XPEBRY-L1-0000-00P01 Color Dominant Wavelength Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux Min. Max. (lm) @ 350 mA Order Code Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Group Flux (lm) Blue B3 465 B6 485 K2 30.6 XPEBBL-L1-0000-00Y01 K3 35.2 XPEBBL-L1-0000-00Z01 M2 39.8 XPEBBL-L1-0000-00201 M3 45.7 XPEBBL-L1-0000-00301 Color Dominant Wavelength Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux Min. Max. (lm) @ 350 mA Order Code Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Group Flux (lm) Green G2 520 G4 535 Q2 87.4 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00A01 Q3 93.9 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00B01 Q4 100 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00C01 Q5 107 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00D01 R2 114 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00E01 R3 122 XPEBGR-L1-0000-00F01 Note: Cree maintains a tolerance of ± 7% on flux and power measurements and ± 1 nm on dominant wavelength measurements. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 5 xlamp xp-e2 leds Color Dominant Wavelength Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux Min. Max. (lm) @ 350 mA Order Code Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Group Flux (lm) Amber A2 585 A3 595 N4 62.0 XPEBAM-L1-0000-00601 P2 67.2 XPEBAM-L1-0000-00701 P3 73.9 XPEBAM-L1-0000-00801 P4 80.6 XPEBAM-L1-0000-00901 Color Dominant Wavelength Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux Min. Max. (lm) @ 350 mA Order Code Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Group Flux (lm) Red- Orange O3 610 O4 620 P2 67.2 XPEBRO-L1-0000-00701 P3 73.9 XPEBRO-L1-0000-00801 P4 80.6 XPEBRO-L1-0000-00901 Q2 87.4 XPEBRO-L1-0000-00A01 Q3 93.9 XPEBRO-L1-0000-00B01 Color Dominant Wavelength Range Base Order Codes Min. Luminous Flux Min. Max. (lm) @ 350 mA Order Code Group DWL (nm) Group DWL (nm) Group Flux (lm) Red R2 620 R3 630 N3 56.8 XPEBRD-L1-0000-00501 N4 62.0 XPEBRD-L1-0000-00601 P2 67.2 XPEBRD-L1-0000-00701 P3 73.9 XPEBRD-L1-0000-00801 Note: Cree maintains a tolerance of ± 7% on flux and power measurements and ± 1 nm on dominant wavelength measurements. Flux Characteristics (TJ = 25 °C) - Color (Continued) Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 6 xlamp xp-e2 leds Relative Spectral Power Distribution Relative Spectral Power 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 Relative Radiant Power (%) Wavelength (nm) Cool White Warm White Relative Spectral Power 0 20 40 60 80 100 380 430 480 530 580 630 680 730 780 Relative Radiant Power (%) Wavelength (nm) Royal Blue Blue Green Amber Red-Orange Red Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 7 xlamp xp-e2 leds Relative Flux vs. Junction Temperature (IF = 350 mA) Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Junction Temperature (ºC) White Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Radiant Flux (%) Junction Temperature (ºC) Royal Blue Relative Flux Output vs. Junction Temperature 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 25 50 75 100 125 150 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Junction Temperature (ºC) Blue Green Amber Red-Orange, Red Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 8 xlamp xp-e2 leds Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 85 °C) Electrical Characteristics (TJ = 25 °C) Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 25ºC) 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) White Electrical Characteristics (Tj = 85ºC) 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 2.00 2.25 2.50 2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.00 Forward Current (mA) Forward Voltage (V) Royal Blue, Blue Green Amber, Red-Orange, Red Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 9 xlamp xp-e2 leds Relative Flux vs. Current (TJ = 85 °C) Relative Flux vs. Current (TJ = 25 °C) Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 85ºC) 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) White Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 85ºC) 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Relative Radiant Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) Royal Blue Relative Intensity vs. Current (Tj = 85ºC) 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Relative Luminous Flux (%) Forward Current (mA) Blue Green Amber Red-Orange, Red Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 10 xlamp xp-e2 leds Relative Chromaticity vs. Current and Temperature - Warm White* * Warm White XLamp XP-E2 LEDs have a typical CRI of 80. Relative Chromaticity Vs. Current, WW -0.020 -0.015 -0.010 -0.005 0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Current (mA) ΔCCx ΔCCy T J = 85 °C Relative Chromaticity Vs. Temperature WW -0.020 -0.015 -0.010 -0.005 0.000 0.005 0.010 0.015 0.020 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 Tsp (°C) ΔCCx ΔCCy I F = 350 mA Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 11 xlamp xp-e2 leds Typical Spatial Distribution Typical Spatial Radiation Pattern 0 20 40 60 80 100 -90 -70 -50 -30 -10 10 30 50 70 90 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (°) White Typical Spatial Radiation Pattern 0 20 40 60 80 100 -90 -70 -50 -30 -10 10 30 50 70 90 Relative Luminous Intensity (%) Angle (º) Royal Blue, Blue, Green Amber, Red-Orange, Red Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 12 xlamp xp-e2 leds Thermal Design The maximum forward current is determined by the thermal resistance between the LED junction and ambient. It is crucial for the end product to be designed in a manner that minimizes the thermal resistance from the solder point to ambient in order to optimize lamp life and optical characteristics. White R oyal Blue, Blue Green A mber, Red-Orange, Red 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 10°C/W Rj-a = 15°C/W Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Thermal Design - royal blue - same as blue 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 10°C/W Rj-a = 15°C/W Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Thermal Design - amber, red-orange, red 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 10°C/W Rj-a = 15°C/W Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Thermal Design - green 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Maximum Current (mA) Ambient Temperature (ºC) Rj-a = 20°C/W Rj-a = 25°C/W Rj-a = 30°C/W Rj-a = 35°C/W Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 13 xlamp xp-e2 leds Reflow Soldering Characteristics In testing, Cree has found XLamp XP-E2 LEDs to be compatible with JEDEC J-STD-020C, using the parameters listed below. As a general guideline, Cree recommends that users follow the recommended soldering profile provided by the manufacturer of solder paste used. Note that this general guideline may not apply to all PCB designs and configurations of reflow soldering equipment. Profile Feature Lead-Based Solder Lead-Free Solder Average Ramp-Up Rate (Tsmax to Tp) 3 °C/second max. 3 °C/second max. Preheat: Temperature Min (Tsmin) 100 °C 150 °C Preheat: Temperature Max (Tsmax) 150 °C 200 °C Preheat: Time (tsmin to tsmax) 60-120 seconds 60-180 seconds Time Maintained Above: Temperature (TL) 183 °C 217 °C Time Maintained Above: Time (tL) 60-150 seconds 60-150 seconds Peak/Classification Temperature (Tp) 215 °C 260 °C Time Within 5 °C of Actual Peak Temperature (tp) 10-30 seconds 20-40 seconds Ramp-Down Rate 6 °C/second max. 6 °C/second max. Time 25 °C to Peak Temperature 6 minutes max. 8 minutes max. Note: All temperatures refer to topside of the package, measured on the package body surface. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 14 xlamp xp-e2 leds Notes Lumen Maintenance Projections Cree now uses standardized IES LM-80-08 and TM-21-11 methods for collecting long-term data and extrapolating LED lumen maintenance. For information on the specific LM-80 data sets available for this LED, refer to the public LM-80 results document at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/LM80_results. Please read the XLamp Long-Term Lumen Maintenance application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/lumen_ maintenance for more details on Cree’s lumen maintenance testing and forecasting. Please read the XLamp Thermal Management application note at www.cree.com/xlamp_app_notes/thermal_management for details on how thermal design, ambient temperature, and drive current affect the LED junction temperature. Moisture Sensitivity In testing, Cree has found XLamp XP-E2 LEDs to have unlimited floor life in conditions ≤ 30 ºC/85% relative humidity (RH). Moisture testing included a 168-hour soak at 85 ºC/85% RH followed by 3 reflow cycles, with visual and electrical inspections at each stage. Cree recommends keeping XLamp LEDs in their sealed moisture-barrier packaging until immediately prior to use. Cree also recommends returning any unused LEDS to the resealable moisture-barrier bag and closing the bag immediately after use. UL Recognized Component Level 4 enclosure consideration. The LED package or a portion thereof has been investigated as a fire and electrical enclosure per ANSI/UL 8750. Vision Advisory Claim WARNING: Do not look at exposed lamp in operation. Eye injury can result. See LED Eye Safety at www.cree.com/ xlamp_app_notes/led_eye_safety. Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 15 xlamp xp-e2 leds Mechanical Dimensions All measurements are ±.13 mm unless otherwise indicated. Anode Anode THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION A B C D 6 5 4 3 6 5 4 3 UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION OF CREE INC. NOTICE X° ± .5 .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 .50 .50 .40 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 R1.53 .65 .83 2.36 RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE C DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 6 5 4 3 2 PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: .50 .50 .40 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 R1.53 .65 .83 3.30 .50 2.30 3.30 1.30 2.36 OUTLINE D. CRONIN 07/19/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE C DRAWING DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 6 5 4 3 2 PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION NOTICE X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: .50 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 .50 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 R1.53 .65 .83 3.30 .50 2.30 3.30 1.30 2.36 OUTLINE D. CRONIN 07/19/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION 5 4 3 2 WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT PROPRIETARY AND PLOT AND THE INFORMATION X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: .50 1.30 3.30 3.30 1.15 .65 1.65 1.20 .60 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .40 .40 3.45 3.45 R1.53 .65 .83 3.30 .50 2.30 3.30 1.30 2.36 2610-OUTLINE DRAWING D. CRONIN 07/19/12 REVISONS REV DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED PCB SOLDER PAD RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN (HATCHED AREA IS OPENING) SIZE TITLE OF REV. SHEET C DRAWING NO. DATE DATE DATE CHECK FINAL PROTECTIVE FINISH MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION SCALE 3 2 1 A B C Phone (919) 313-5300 Fax (919) 313-5558 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 X° ± .5 ° .XXX ± .25 .XX ± .75 .X ± 1.5 FOR SHEET METAL PARTS ONLY .XX ± .25 .XXX ± .125 X° ± .5 ° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS AND AFTER FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: SURFACE FINISH: 1.6 1.20 .60 3.20 1.60 3.20 .40 .65 1.30 22.000 1 /1 2610-00029 A OUTLINE DRAWING XPE G2 D. CRONIN 07/19/12 RECOMMENDED STENCIL PATTERN AREA IS OPENING) Top View Side View Bottom View Recommended PCB Solder Pad Recommended Stencil Pattern Hatched Area is Opening Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 16 xlamp xp-e2 leds Tape and Reel All Cree carrier tapes conform to EIA-481D, Automated Component Handling Systems Standard. All dimensions in mm. Loaded Pockets (1,000 Lamps) Leader 400mm (min) of empty pockets with at least 100mm sealed by tape (50 empty pockets min.) Trailer 160mm (min) of empty pockets sealed with tape (20 pockets min.) END START Cathode Side Anode Side (denoted by + and circle) 2.5±.1 1.5±.1 8.0±.1 4.0±.1 1.75±.10 12.0 .0 +.3 DETAIL B SCALE 2 : 1 13mm 7" Cover Tape Pocket Tape User Feed Direction User Feed Direction 13 61 12.40 0 +2.00 MEASURED AT HUB 12.40 MEASURED AT INSIDE EDGE 16.40 TITLE DATE DATE DATE CHECK MATERIAL APPROVED DRAWN BY THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION .X ± 0.3 .XX ± .13 X° ± 1° UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS & BEFORE FINISH. TOLERANCE UNLESS SPECIFIED: A B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 A B C D Phone (919) 361-4770 4600 Silicon Drive Durham, N.C 27703 NOTICE CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF CREE, INC. Reel, 7" x 12mm Wide LIUDEZHI 2012/5/25 +/-0.5 190 ½öÓÃÓÚÆÀ¹À¡£ °æȨËùÓÐ (c) by Foxit Software Company, 2004 ÓÉ Foxit PDF Editor ±à¼- OD 7.5'' 13 61 12.40 0 +2.00 MEASURED AT HUB 12.40 16.40 B C D 6 5 4 3 2 1 B C D NOTICE CREE CONFIDENTIAL. THIS PLOT AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED WITHIN ARE THE PROPRIETARY AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION OF CREE, INC. THIS PLOT MAY NOT BE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR DISCLOSED TO ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON WITHOUT THE WRITTEN CONSENT OF CREE, INC. +/-0.5 190 ½öÓÃÓÚÆÀ¹À¡£ °æȨËùÓÐ (c) by Foxit Software Company, 2004 ÓÉ Foxit PDF Editor ±à¼- OD 7.5'' Y Y X X REF 0.59 F(III) D1 P1 1.5 MIN. Bo Ao R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko (IV) Other material available. (III) (II) (I) hole to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket holes is ± 0.20. Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket hole SECTION Y-Y SECTION X-X ±0.05 Do 1.75 E1 REF R 2.24 Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 Y Y X X REF 0.59 W F(III) D1 P1 1.5 MIN. Bo Ao R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko (IV) Other material available. (III) (II) (I) hole to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket holes is ± 0.20. Cumulative tolerance of 10 sprocket to centerline of pocket. Measured from centerline of sprocket hole SECTION Y-Y SECTION X-X 2.0 ±0.05 (I) P2 1.55 ±0.05 Do 4.0 ±0.1 (II) Po 1.75 ±0.1 E1 T 0.30 ±0.05 REF R 2.24 Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 Y Y D1 1.5 MIN. Bo R0.2 TYPICAL REF 4.375 Ko SECTION Y-Y 0.05 REF Ko 2.40 +0.0/-0.1 3.70 1 W F P +/- 0.05 +/- 0.1 +0.3/-0.1 5.50 8.00 12.00 Ao 3.70 +/- 0.1 Bo +/- 0.1 CATHODE SIDE ANODE SIDE Copyright © 2012-2013 Cree, Inc. All rights reserved. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Cree®, the Cree logo and XLamp® are registered trademarks of Cree, Inc. 17 xlamp xp-e2 leds Packaging Patent Label (on bottom of box) Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Reel ID Unpackaged Reel Packaged Reel Boxed Reel CREE Bin Code & Barcode Label Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Label with Customer P/N, Qty, Lot #, PO # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Label with Cree Bin Code, Qty, Lot # Vacuum-Sealed Moisture Barrier Bag Patent Label Label with Customer Order Code, Qty, Reel ID, PO # Ideal for power supply 1a/1c/2a/2c/5A/10A power relays JW RELAYS VDE RoHS compliant FEATURES • Miniature package with universal terminal footprint • High dielectric withstanding for transient protection: 10,000 V surge in μs between coil and contact • Sealed construction • Class B coil insulation types available • TV rated (TV-5) types available (only for 1 Form A type) • VDE, TÜV, SEMKO, SEV, FIMKO, TV-5 also approved • Sockets are available. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 1. Home appliances TV sets, VCR, Microwave ovens 2. Office machines Photocopiers, Vending machines 3. Industrial equipment NC machines, Robots, Temperature controllers Contact arrangement 1: 1a: 2: 2a: 1 Form C 1 Form A 2 Form C 2 Form A Contact capacity Nil: F: Standard (5 A) High capacity (10 A)* JW N Protective construction S: H: Sealed type Flux-resistant type Coil insulation class Nil: B: Class E insulation Class B insulation Pick-up voltage N: 70% of nominal voltage Nominal coil voltage DC5V, DC6V, DC9V, DC12V, DC24V, DC48V Contact material F: AgSnO2 type (1a) Nil: AgNi type (1c, 2a, 2c) *Only for 1 Form A and 1 Form C type Certified by UL, CSA, VDE, SEMKO, FIMKO and SEV Note: When ordering TV rated (TV-5) types, add suffix-TV (available only for 1 Form A type). Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW ASCTB190E 201210-T TYPES * For sockets, see page 140. RATING 1. Coil data Nominal coil voltage Pick-up voltage (at 20°C 68°F) Drop-out voltage (at 20°C 68°F) Nominal operating current [±10%] (at 20°C 68°F) Coil resistance [±10%] (at 20°C 68°F) Nominal operating power Max. applied voltage (at 20°C 68°F) 5V DC 70%V or less of nominal voltage (Initial) 10%V or more of nominal voltage (Initial) 106mA 47Ω 530mW 130%V of nominal voltage (at 60°C 140°F) 120%V of nominal voltage (at 85°C 185°F)*4 6V DC 88mA 68Ω 9V DC 58mA 155Ω 12V DC 44mA 270Ω 24V DC 22mA 1,100Ω 48V DC 11mA 4,400Ω 1) 1 Form A Standard (5A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. 2) 1 Form A High capacity (10 A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW1aSN-DC5V-F JW1aHN-DC5V-F 6V DC JW1aSN-DC6V-F JW1aHN-DC6V-F 9V DC JW1aSN-DC9V-F JW1aHN-DC9V-F 12V DC JW1aSN-DC12V-F JW1aHN-DC12V-F 24V DC JW1aSN-DC24V-F JW1aHN-DC24V-F 48V DC JW1aSN-DC48V-F JW1aHN-DC48V-F Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW1aFSN-DC5V-F JW1aFHN-DC5V-F 6V DC JW1aFSN-DC6V-F JW1aFHN-DC6V-F 9V DC JW1aFSN-DC9V-F JW1aFHN-DC9V-F 12V DC JW1aFSN-DC12V-F JW1aFHN-DC12V-F 24V DC JW1aFSN-DC24V-F JW1aFHN-DC24V-F 48V DC JW1aFSN-DC48V-F JW1aFHN-DC48V-F 3) 1 Form C Standard (5A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. 4) 1 Form C High capacity (10 A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW1SN-DC5V JW1HN-DC5V 6V DC JW1SN-DC6V JW1HN-DC6V 9V DC JW1SN-DC9V JW1HN-DC9V 12V DC JW1SN-DC12V JW1HN-DC12V 24V DC JW1SN-DC24V JW1HN-DC24V 48V DC JW1SN-DC48V JW1HN-DC48V Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW1FSN-DC5V JW1FHN-DC5V 6V DC JW1FSN-DC6V JW1FHN-DC6V 9V DC JW1FSN-DC9V JW1FHN-DC9V 12V DC JW1FSN-DC12V JW1FHN-DC12V 24V DC JW1FSN-DC24V JW1FHN-DC24V 48V DC JW1FSN-DC48V JW1FHN-DC48V 5) 2 Form A Standard (5A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. 6) 2 Form C Standard (5A) type Standard packing: Carton 100 pcs. Case 500 pcs. Note: Class B coil insulation type is available. Ex) JW1aSN-B-DC12V-F Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW2aSN-DC5V JW2aHN-DC5V 6V DC JW2aSN-DC6V JW2aHN-DC6V 9V DC JW2aSN-DC9V JW2aHN-DC9V 12V DC JW2aSN-DC12V JW2aHN-DC12V 24V DC JW2aSN-DC24V JW2aHN-DC24V 48V DC JW2aSN-DC48V JW2aHN-DC48V Nominal coil voltage Sealed type Flux-resistant type Part No. Part No. 5V DC JW2SN-DC5V JW2HN-DC5V 6V DC JW2SN-DC6V JW2HN-DC6V 9V DC JW2SN-DC9V JW2HN-DC9V 12V DC JW2SN-DC12V JW2HN-DC12V 24V DC JW2SN-DC24V JW2HN-DC24V 48V DC JW2SN-DC48V JW2HN-DC48V Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW ASCTB190E 201210-T 2. Specifications * Specifications will vary with foreign standards certification ratings. Notes: *1. This value can change due to the switching frequency, environmental conditions, and desired reliability level, therefore it is recommended to check this with the actual load. *2. Wave is standard shock voltage of ±1.2×50μs according to JEC-212-1981 *3. The upper limit of the ambient temperature is the maximum temperature that can satisfy the coil temperature rise value. Refer to Usage, transport and storage conditions in NOTES. *4. The pick-up and drop out voltages rise approximately 0.4% for every 1°C 33.8°F given a standard ambient temperature of 20°C 68°F. Therefore, when using relays where the ambient temperature is high, please take into consideration the rise in pick-up and drop out voltages and keep the coil applied voltage within the maximum applied voltage. REFERENCE DATA Characteristics Item Specifications Standard type High capacity type Contact Contact material 1 Form A: AgSnO2 type 1 Form C, 2 Form A and 2 Form C: AgNi type Arrangement 1 Form A, 1 Form C, 2 Form A and 2 Form C 1 Form A and 1 Form C Contact resistance (Initial) Max. 100 mΩ (By voltage drop 6 V DC 1A) Rating Nominal switching capacity (resistive load) 5A 250V AC, 5A 30V DC 10A 250V AC, 10A 30V DC Max. switching power (resistive load) 1,250VA, 150W 2,500VA, 300W Max. switching voltage 250V AC, 30V DC Max. switching current 5A 10A Min. switching capacity (reference value)*1 100mA, 5V DC Electrical characteristics Insulation resistance (Initial) Min. 1,000MΩ (at 500V DC) Measurement at same location as “Breakdown voltage” section. Breakdown voltage (Initial) Between open contacts 1,000 Vrms for 1 min. (Detection current: 10 mA) Between contact and coil 5,000 Vrms for 1 min. (Detection current: 10 mA) Between contact sets 3,000 Vrms for 1 min. (2 Form A, 2 Form C) (Detection current: 10 mA) Temperature rise (coil) 1 Form A: Max. 45°C 113°F, 1 Form C, 2 Form A and 2 Form C: Max. 55°C 131°F (resistive method, with nominal coil voltage and at nominal switching capacity, at 20°C 68°F) 1 Form A: Max. 45°C 113°F, 1 Form C: Max. 55°C 131°F (resistive method, with nominal coil voltage and at nominal switching capacity, at 20°C 68°F) Surge breakdown voltage*2 (Between contact and coil) (Initial) 10,000 V Operate time (at nominal voltage) (at 20°C 68°F) Max. 15 ms (excluding contact bounce time.) Release time (at nominal voltage) (at 20°C 68°F) Max. 5 ms (excluding contact bounce time) (Without diode) Mechanical characteristics Shock resistance Functional 98 m/s2 (Half-wave pulse of sine wave: 11 ms; detection time: 10μs.) Destructive 980 m/s2 (Half-wave pulse of sine wave: 6 ms.) Vibration resistance Functional 10 to 55 Hz at double amplitude of 1.6 mm (Detection time: 10μs.) Destructive 10 to 55 Hz at double amplitude of 2.0 mm Expected life Mechanical (at 180 times/min.) Min. 5×106 Electrical (at 6 times/min.) Min. 105 (at resistive load) Conditions Conditions for operation, transport and storage*3 Ambient temperature*4: –40°C to +60°C –40°F to 140°F (Class E), (Class B: –40°C to +85°C –40°F to 185°F) Humidity: 5 to 85% R.H. (Not freezing and condensing at low temperature) Max. operating speed (at nominal switching capacity) Flux-resistant type: 20 times/min., Sealed type: 6 times/min. Unit weight Approx. 13 g .46 oz JW 1 Form A Standard (5A) type 1. Maximum operating power 2. Operate/release time Sample: JW1aSN-DC12V-F, 10 pcs. Ambient temperature: 20°C 68°F 3. Life curve 1 Form A Standard (5 A) type 10 100 10 100 1,000 1 Contact voltage, V AC resistive load DC resistive load Contact current, A 80 90 100 110 120 5 0 10 Min. Max. Min. x - x - Max. Coil applied voltage, %V Operate/release time, ms Operate time Release time 100 10 5 10 15 Contact current, A Life, ×104 250 V AC resistive load 30 V DC resistive load Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW ASCTB190E 201210-T JW 1 Form A High Capacity (10 A) type 1. Maximum operating power 2. Operate/release time Sample: JW1aFSN-DC12V, 10 pcs. Ambient temperature: 20°C 68°F 3. Life curve 10 100 10 100 1,000 1 Contact voltage, V AC resistive load DC resistive load Contact current, A 80 90 100 110 120 5 0 10 Min. Max. Min. x - x - Max. Coil applied voltage, %V Operate/release time, ms Operate time Release time 100 10 1 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 Contact current, A Life, ×104 250 V AC resistive load 30 V DC resistive load 4-(1). Coil temperature rise (Contact carrying current: 5A) Sample JW1aFSN-DC12V-F, 6 pcs. Point measured: Inside the coil 4-(2). Coil temperature rise (Contact carrying current: 10 A) Sample: JW1aFSN-DC12V-F, 6 pcs. Point measured: Inside the coil 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 Coil applied voltage, %V Temperature rise, °C 85°C 60°C 25°C 100 120 140 160 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 0 Coil applied voltage, %V Temperature rise, °C 85°C 60°C 25°C JW 1 Form C Standard (5 A) type 1-(3). Maximum operating power 2. Operate/release time Sample: JW1SN-DC12V-F, 6 pcs. Ambient temperature: 20°C 68°F JW 1 Form C High Capacity (10 A) type 1. Maximum operating power 10 10 100 1,000 1 0 Contact voltage, V AC resistive load (cosϕ = 1.0) Contact current, A Max. Min. 13 12 11 10 9 6 4 100 8 7 3 2 1 5 80 90 110 120 130 Max. Min. x - x - Coil applied voltage, %V Operate/release time, ms 10 10 100 1,000 1 0 Contact voltage, V AC resistive load (cosϕ = 1.0) Contact current, A JW 2 Form A Standard (5 A) type 1. Maximum operating power 2. Operate/release time Sample: JW2aSN-DC24V-F, 6 pcs. Ambient temperature: 20°C 68°F 10 10 100 1,000 1 0 Contact voltage, V AC resistive load (cosϕ = 1.0) Contact current, A 14 13 12 10 8 6 4 2 80 90 100 110 120 Min. x - x - Coil applied voltage, %V Operate/release time, ms Operate time Release time Max. Max. Min. Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW ASCTB190E 201210-T DIMENSIONS (mm inch) JW 2 Form C Standard (5 A) type 1. Maximum operating power 2. Operate/release time Sample: JW2SN-DC12V-F, 6 pcs. Ambient temperature: 20°C 68°F 10 10 100 1,000 1 0 Contact voltage, V Contact current, A AC resistive load (cosϕ = 1.0) 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 80 90 100 110 120 130 Max. Coil applied voltage, %V Operate/release time, ms Operate time Release time Min. Min. Max. x - x - The CAD data of the products with a CAD Data mark can be downloaded from: http://industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW 1 Form A External dimensions 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.4 12.8 7.6 1.1 2.4 3.5 0.9 28.6 20 20 3.6 .012 .012 .020 .016 .504 .299 .043 .094 .138 .035 1.126 .787 .787 .142 Wiring diagram (Bottom view) Note: Terminal numbers are not indicated on the relay. PC board pattern (Bottom view) Tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004 COM N.O. Coil 4 6 1 8 Relay outline 12.8 .504 7.6 .299 20.0 .787 2.4 .094 4-1.5 dia. 4-.059 dia. 3.5 .138 CAD Data Dimension: Less than 1mm .039inch: Min. 1mm .039inch less than 3mm .118 inch: Min. 3mm .118 inch: General tolerance ±0.1 ±.004 ±0.2 ±.008 ±0.3 ±.012 JW 1 Form C External dimensions 20 .787 0.4 .016 3.6 .142 0.5 .020 0.3 0.5 .012 .020 0.3 .012 1.1 .043 2.4 .094 3.5 .138 3.5 .138 16.5 .650 28.6 1.128 0.8 .031 7.6 .299 12.8 .504 Wiring diagram (Bottom view) Note: Terminal numbers are not indicated on the relay. PC board pattern (Bottom view) Tolerance: ±0.1 ±.004 COM N.C. N.O. Coil 4 2 6 1 8 Relay outline 5-1.5 dia. 5-.059 dia. 16.5 .650 3.5 .138 3.5 .138 2.4 .094 7.6 .299 CAD Data Dimension: Less than 1mm .039inch: Min. 1mm .039inch less than 3mm .118 inch: Min. 3mm .118 inch: General tolerance ±0.1 ±.004 ±0.2 ±.008 ±0.3 ±.012 Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ JW ASCTB190E 201210-T SAFETY STANDARDS Item UL/C-UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified) VDE (Certified) TV rating (UL/CSA) TÜV (Certified) SEMKO (Certified) FIMKO SEV File No. Contact rating File No. Contact rating File No. Contact rating File No. Rating File No. Rating File No. Contact rating File No. Contact rating File No. Contact rating Standard type 1 Form A E43028 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC LR26550 etc. 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC B300 40013854 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) Standard type 5A 30V DC (0ms) UL E43028 CSA LR26550 etc. 1a➝TV-5 B 11 05 13461 305 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 817817 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 24965 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 11. 0262 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) Standard type 1 Form C E43028 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC LR26550 etc. 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC B300 40013854 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) Standard type 5A 30V DC (0ms) — — B 11 05 13461 305 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 817817 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 24965 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 5A 30V DC (0ms) 11. 0262 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) Standard type 2 Form A E43028 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC B300 LR26550 etc. 5A 277V AC 5A 30V DC 1/8HP 125V AC 1/8HP 250V AC B300 40013854 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) Standard type 5A 30V DC (0ms) — — B 11 05 13461 305 5A 250V AC (cosφ =1.0) 3A 250V AC (cosφ =0.4) 5A 30V DC (0ms) Tantalum-Polymer Solid Capacitors New Capacitors Panasonic New Product Introduction Stable Capacitance at High Frequency and Temperature, with Low ESR/ESL Panasonic, a worldwide leader in Capacitor Products, introduces POSCAP Tantalum-Polymer Solid Capacitors to their Capacitor product line. The POSCAP product line spans several series of Solid Electrolyte Chip Capacitors which include the TPE, TQC, TPF, TPSF, TPB, TPC, TPG, and TPU Series. These capacitors utilize a sintered tantalum anode and a proprietary high conductivity polymer for a cathode. Panasonic’s innovative construction and processing yields the lowest ESR level in polymer tantalum technology, and exhibits excellent performance in high frequency applications. Offering a high volumetric efficiency for capacitance, POSCAP Capacitors is available in various, compact package sizes for a small PCB footprint. Additionally, POSCAP parts demonstrate a high reliability and high heat resistance, making them the ideal Chip Capacitor for digital, high-frequency devices and more. • Low Profile Package Size: 0.9mm Height (TPU) • Very Low ESR (Down to 5mΩ) • Large Capacitance (Up to 1500μF) • High Temp Reflow Solder Capable (up to 260°C) • RoHS Compliant • High Volumetric Efficiency for Capacitance • Safe Alternative to Generic Tantalum Capacitors • Variety of Low Profile Packages Opens up PCB Space • Wide Application Coverage • Consumer Electronics • Industrial Electronics • Telecommunications • Appliances • PC/Server • Set Top Box • Audio/Video Equipment • FPGA Power Delivery • Router/Switch/Base Station • Test and Measurement Website: www.panasonic.com/industrial industrial@us.panasonic.com 1-800-344-2112 Copyright © 2013 Panasonic Corporation of North America. All Rights Reserved. Specifications are subject to change without notice. POSCAP NPI, FY13-038-XXX Features Benefits Industries Applications Part Number Information Additional Information For detailed specification information on the POSCAP Line of Tantalum Solid Capacitors, visit our website at: www.panasonic.com/industrial/electronic-components/capacitive-products/ RoHS COMPLIANT Series Information TPE, TQC, TPF, TPSF, TPB, TPC, TPG, TPU Series 2 R 5 Rated Voltage Series Rated Capacitance Cap. Tol. T P E 3 3 0 M Special Code A Z B Series Voltage Capacitance ESR TPE 2-10 VDC 47-1500 μF 7-35 mΩ TQC 16-35 VDC 3.9-150 μF 40-400 mΩ TPF 2-10 VDC 150-1000 μF 5-15 mΩ TPSF 2 VDC 270 μF 6-9 mΩ TPB 4-10 VDC 33-470 μF 35-70 mΩ TPC 6.3-12.5 VDC 10-330 μF 40-80 mΩ TPG 2.5-12.5 VDC 33-220 μF 30-70 mΩ TPU 2.5-10 VDC 4.7-150 μF 100-300 mΩ Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-63 – 0d±0.05 010􀀝 Sleeve L􀀽 14 min. 3 min. (􀀽08􀁌15, 016􀁌15, 018􀁌15 : L±1.5) Pressure relief 06.3􀀝 But exclude 7 mm height 􀀽􀀀L􀀝16 : L±1.0 L􀀟20 : L±2.0 + – 04 to 08 0D±0.5 F±0.5 0D±0.5 ■ Features ● Endurance : 105 °C 1000 h to 5000 h ● Low impedance ● RoHS directive compliant Radial Lead Type Series: FC Type: A ■ Specifi cations Category Temp. Range –55 °C to +105 °C Rated W.V. Range 6.3 V.DC to 100 V.DC Nominal Cap. Range 2.2 μF to 15000 μF Capacitance Tolerance ±20 % (120 Hz/+20 °C) DC Leakage Cur rent I < 0.01 CV or 3 (μA) After 2 minutes (Whichever is greater) tan d W.V. (V) 6.3 10 16 25 35 50 63 100 (120 Hz/+20 °C) tan d 0.22 0.19 0.16 0.14 0.12 0.10 0.08 0.07 For capacitance value > 1000 μF, add 0.02 per every 1000 μF. Endurance After following life test with DC voltage and +105 °C±2 °C ripple current value applied (The sum of DC and ripple peak voltage shall not exceed the rated working voltage) when the capacitors are restored to 20 °C, the capacitors shall meet the limits specifi ed bellow. Duration : 04 to 06.3: 1000 hours, 08: 2000 hours , 010: 3000 hours , 012.5 to 018: 5000 hours Capacitance change ±20 % of initial measured value tan d < 200 % of initial specifi ed value DC leakage current < initial specifi ed value Shelf Life After storage for 1000 hours at +105 °C±2 °C with no voltage applied and then being stabilized at +20 °C, capacitors shall meet the limits specifi ed in Endurance. (With voltage treatment) W.V.(V.DC) Cap (μF) Frequency (Hz) 60 120 1 k 10 k 100 k 6.3 to 100 2.2 to 330 0.55 0.65 0.85 0.90 1.00 390 to 1000 0.70 0.75 0.90 0.95 1.00 1200 to 2200 0.75 0.80 0.90 0.95 1.00 2700 to 15000 0.80 0.85 0.95 1.00 1.00 ■ Frequency correction factor for ripple current L>11 L=7 Body Dia. 0D 4 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 18 4 5 6.3 Body Length L 15 to 25 30 to 40 Lead Dia. 0d 0.45 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.45 0.45 0.45 Lead space F 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 7.5 7.5 1.5 2.0 2.5 ■ Di men sions in mm (not to scale) (Unit : mm) 02 Dec. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-64 – ■ Case size/ Impedance/ Ripple Current W.V(V.DC) 6.3 V to 35 V 50 V 63 V 100 V Case size (0D×L) Imped ance (Ω)/(100 kHz) Ripple Current (mA r.m.s) /(100 kHz) Imped ance (Ω)/(100 kHz) Ripple Current (mA r.m.s) /(100 kHz) Imped ance (Ω)/(100 kHz) Ripple Current (mA r.m.s) /(100 kHz) Imped ance (Ω)/(100 kHz) Ripple Current (mA r.m.s) 20 °C –10 °C 20 °C –10 °C 20 °C –10 °C 20 °C –10 °C /(100 kHz) 4 × 7 2.00 5.00 65 5 × 7 0.950 2.40 120 6.3 × 7 0.450 1.20 200 4 × 11 1.30 2.60 120 2.50 5.00 90 3.50 7.00 80 5 × 11 0.800 1.60 175 ✽ ✽ ✽ 2.00 4.00 145 4.10 8.20 80 5 × 15 0.500 1.00 235 0.900 1.80 215 1.30 2.60 200 2.80 5.60 90 6.3 × 11.2 0.350 0.700 290 0.600 1.20 260 1.00 2.00 240 1.80 3.60 114 6.3 × 15 0.250 0.500 400 0.400 0.800 360 0.700 1.40 330 1.10 2.20 155 8 × 11.5 0.117 0.234 555 0.234 0.468 485 0.342 0.684 405 0.680 1.36 260 8 × 15 0.085 0.170 730 0.155 0.310 635 0.230 0.460 535 0.450 0.900 340 8 × 20 0.065 0.130 995 0.120 0.240 860 0.178 0.356 690 0.330 0.660 455 10 × 12.5 0.090 0.180 755 0.162 0.324 615 0.256 0.512 535 0.530 1.06 306 10 × 16 0.068 0.136 1050 0.119 0.238 850 0.194 0.388 600 0.360 0.720 400 10 × 20 0.052 0.104 1220 0.090 0.180 1030 0.147 0.294 885 0.240 0.480 463 10 × 25 0.045 0.090 1440 0.082 0.164 1200 0.130 0.260 1050 0.210 0.420 599 10 × 30 0.035 0.070 1815 0.060 0.120 1610 0.090 0.180 1300 0.150 0.300 698 12.5 × 15 0.065 0.130 1205 0.110 0.220 1150 0.150 0.300 1020 0.230 0.460 511 12.5 × 20 0.038 0.076 1655 0.063 0.126 1480 0.085 0.170 1285 0.180 0.360 671 12.5 × 25 0.030 0.060 1945 0.050 0.100 1832 0.070 0.140 1720 0.110 0.220 807 12.5 × 30 0.025 0.050 2310 0.040 0.080 2215 0.055 0.110 2090 0.098 0.196 937 12.5 × 35 0.022 0.044 2510 0.034 0.068 2285 0.047 0.094 2265 0.087 0.174 1040 12.5 × 40 0.018 0.036 2655 0.030 0.060 2590 0.042 0.084 2560 0.072 0.144 1130 16 × 15 0.043 0.086 1690 0.080 0.160 1610 0.090 0.180 1410 0.140 0.280 793 16 × 20 0.029 0.058 2205 0.048 0.096 1835 0.059 0.118 1765 0.110 0.220 995 16 × 25 0.022 0.044 2555 0.034 0.068 2235 0.050 0.100 2160 0.089 0.178 1170 16 × 31.5 0.018 0.036 3010 0.028 0.056 2700 0.043 0.086 2670 0.062 0.124 1520 16 × 35.5 0.016 0.032 3150 0.025 0.050 2790 0.036 0.072 2770 0.053 0.106 1730 16 × 40 0.015 0.030 3360 0.023 0.046 2845 0.030 0.060 2825 0.047 0.094 1920 18 × 15 0.038 0.076 2000 0.068 0.136 1900 0.086 0.172 1690 0.120 0.240 917 18 × 20 0.028 0.056 2490 0.042 0.084 2420 0.055 0.110 2290 0.080 0.160 1230 18 × 25 0.020 0.040 2740 0.029 0.058 2610 0.043 0.086 2585 0.070 0.140 1420 18 × 31.5 0.016 0.032 3635 0.025 0.050 3000 0.032 0.064 2950 0.062 0.124 1600 18 × 35.5 0.015 0.030 3680 0.023 0.046 3100 0.030 0.060 3095 0.041 0.082 1770 18 × 40 0.014 0.028 3735 – – – 0.025 0.050 3205 0.036 0.072 2300 ✽ Case size (0D×L) Capacitance (μF) Imped ance (Ω)/(100 kHz) Ripple Current 20 °C –10 °C (mA r.m.s)(100 kHz) 5 × 11 1.0 2.40 4.80 20 2.2 1.80 3.60 45 3.3 1.30 2.60 65 4.7 1.30 2.60 95 10 1.30 2.60 125 12 1.30 2.60 135 15 1.30 2.60 145 18 1.30 2.60 155 22 1.30 2.60 155 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-65 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) () (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 6.3 27 4 7 65 2.000 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC0J270( ) 200 2000 56 5 7 120 0.950 1000 0.45 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEAFC0J560( ) 200 2000 68 4 11 120 1.300 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J680( ) 200 2000 100 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J101( ) 200 2000 120 6.3 7 200 0.450 1000 0.45 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC0J121( ) 200 2000 150 5 15 235 0.500 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J151( ) 200 2000 220 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J221( ) 200 2000 270 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J271( ) 200 2000 330 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J331S( ) 200 2000 6.3 15 400 0.250 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC0J331( ) 200 2000 390 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC0J391( ) 200 1000 470 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC0J471( ) 200 1000 560 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC0J561( ) 200 1000 820 8 15 730 0.085 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC0J821L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J821( ) 200 500 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J102( ) 200 500 1200 8 20 995 0.065 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC0J122L( ) 200 1000 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J122( ) 200 500 1500 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J152( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1205 0.065 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J152S( ) 200 500 1800 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J182( ) 200 500 2200 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J222( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J222S( ) 100 250 2700 10 30 1815 0.035 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC0J272L 100 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J272( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J272S( ) 100 250 3300 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J332( ) 200 500 18 15 2000 0.038 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J332S( ) 100 250 3900 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC0J392( ) 200 500 4700 12.5 30 2310 0.025 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC0J472 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J472S( ) 100 250 5600 12.5 35 2510 0.022 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC0J562L 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J562( ) 100 250 6800 12.5 40 2655 0.018 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC0J682L 100 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J682( ) 100 250 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J682S( ) 100 250 8200 16 31.5 3010 0.018 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC0J822 100 10000 16 35.5 3150 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC0J103 100 18 25 2740 0.020 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC0J103S( ) 100 250 12000 16 40 3360 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC0J123L 100 18 31.5 3635 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC0J123 50 15000 18 35.5 3680 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC0J153 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C φ4 to φ6.3=1000 h, φ8=2000 h, φ10=3000 h, φ12.5 to φ18=5000 h 00 Nov. 2012 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-66 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) () (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 10 22 4 7 65 2.000 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1A220( ) 200 2000 39 5 7 120 0.950 1000 0.45 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1A390( ) 200 2000 47 4 11 120 1.300 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A470( ) 200 2000 82 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A820( ) 200 2000 6.3 7 200 0.450 1000 0.45 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1A820( ) 200 2000 100 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A101S( ) 200 2000 5 15 235 0.500 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A101( ) 200 2000 150 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A151( ) 200 2000 180 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A181( ) 200 2000 220 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A221S( ) 200 2000 6.3 15 400 0.250 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1A221( ) 200 2000 330 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1A331( ) 200 1000 390 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1A391( ) 200 1000 470 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1A471( ) 200 1000 560 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A561( ) 200 500 680 8 15 730 0.085 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1A681L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A681( ) 200 500 820 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A821( ) 200 500 1000 8 20 995 0.065 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1A102L( ) 200 1000 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A102( ) 200 500 1200 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A122( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1205 0.065 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A122S( ) 200 500 1500 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A152( ) 200 500 1800 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A182( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A182S( ) 100 250 2200 10 30 1815 0.035 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1A222L 100 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A222( ) 200 500 2700 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1A272( ) 200 500 18 15 2000 0.038 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A272S( ) 100 250 3300 12.5 30 2310 0.025 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1A332 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A332S( ) 100 250 3900 12.5 35 2510 0.022 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1A392L 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A392( ) 100 250 4700 12.5 40 2655 0.018 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1A472L 100 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A472( ) 100 250 5600 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A562( ) 100 250 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A562S( ) 100 250 6800 16 31.5 3010 0.018 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1A682 100 18 25 2740 0.020 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1A682S( ) 100 250 8200 16 35.5 3150 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1A822L 100 18 31.5 3635 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1A822 50 10000 18 35.5 3680 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1A103 50 12000 18 40 3735 0.014 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1A123 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C φ4 to φ6.3=1000 h, φ8=2000 h, φ10=3000 h, φ12.5 to φ18=5000 h 00 Nov. 2012 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-67 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) () (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 16 15 4 7 65 2.000 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1C150( ) 200 2000 27 5 7 120 0.950 1000 0.45 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1C270( ) 200 2000 39 4 11 120 1.30 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C390( ) 200 2000 47 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C470( ) 200 2000 56 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C560( ) 200 2000 6.3 7 200 0.450 1000 0.45 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1C560( ) 200 2000 68 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C680( ) 200 2000 82 5 15 235 0.500 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C820( ) 200 2000 100 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C101( ) 200 2000 120 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C121( ) 200 2000 180 6.3 15 400 0.250 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1C181( ) 200 2000 220 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1C221( ) 200 1000 270 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1C271( ) 200 1000 330 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1C331( ) 200 1000 390 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C391( ) 200 500 470 8 15 730 0.085 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1C471L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C471( ) 200 500 560 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C561( ) 200 500 680 8 20 995 0.065 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1C681L( ) 200 1000 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C681( ) 200 500 820 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C821( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1205 0.065 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C821S( ) 200 500 1000 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C102S( ) 200 500 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C102( ) 200 500 1200 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C122( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C122S( ) 100 250 1500 10 30 1815 0.035 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1C152L 100 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C152( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C152S( ) 100 250 1800 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C182( ) 200 500 18 15 2000 0.038 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C182S( ) 100 250 2200 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1C222( ) 200 500 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C222S( ) 100 250 2700 12.5 30 2310 0.025 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1C272L 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C272( ) 100 250 3300 12.5 35 2510 0.022 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1C332 100 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C332S( ) 100 250 3900 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C392( ) 100 250 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C392S( ) 100 250 4700 16 31.5 3010 0.018 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1C472 100 18 25 2740 0.020 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1C472S( ) 100 250 5600 16 35.5 3150 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1C562L 100 18 31.5 3635 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1C562 50 6800 16 40 3360 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1C682 100 8200 18 35.5 3680 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1C822 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C φ4 to φ6.3=1000 h, φ8=2000 h, φ10=3000 h, φ12.5 to φ18=5000 h 00 Nov. 2012 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-68 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) () (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 25 10 4 7 65 2.000 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1E100( ) 200 2000 22 5 7 120 0.950 1000 0.45 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1E220( ) 200 2000 27 4 11 120 1.30 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E270( ) 200 2000 39 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E390( ) 200 2000 6.3 7 200 0.450 1000 0.45 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1E390( ) 200 2000 47 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E470( ) 200 2000 56 5 15 235 0.500 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E560( ) 200 2000 82 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E820( ) 200 2000 100 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E101S( ) 200 2000 120 6.3 15 400 0.250 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1E121( ) 200 2000 180 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1E181( ) 200 1000 220 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1E221( ) 200 1000 270 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E271( ) 200 500 330 8 15 730 0.085 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1E331L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E331( ) 200 500 390 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E391( ) 200 500 470 8 20 995 0.065 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1E471L( ) 200 1000 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E471( ) 200 500 560 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E561( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1205 0.065 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E561S( ) 200 500 680 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E681( ) 200 500 820 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E821( ) 200 500 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E821S( ) 200 500 1000 10 30 1815 0.035 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1E102L 100 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E102( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E102S( ) 100 250 1200 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E122( ) 200 500 18 15 2000 0.038 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E122S( ) 100 250 1500 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1E152( ) 200 500 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E152S( ) 100 250 1800 12.5 30 2310 0.025 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1E182L 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E182( ) 100 250 2200 12.5 35 2510 0.022 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1E222 100 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E222S( ) 100 250 2700 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E272( ) 100 250 3300 16 31.5 3010 0.018 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1E332 100 18 25 2740 0.020 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1E332S( ) 100 250 3900 16 35.5 3150 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1E392L 100 18 31.5 3635 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1E392 50 4700 18 35.5 3680 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1E472 50 5600 18 40 3735 0.014 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1E562 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C φ4 to φ6.3=1000 h, φ8=2000 h, φ10=3000 h, φ12.5 to φ18=5000 h 00 Nov. 2012 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-69 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) () (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 35 6.8 4 7 65 2.000 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1V6R8( ) 200 2000 12 5 7 120 0.950 1000 0.45 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1V120( ) 200 2000 18 4 11 120 1.300 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V180( ) 200 2000 22 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V220( ) 200 2000 27 5 11 175 0.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V270( ) 200 2000 6.3 7 200 0.450 1000 0.45 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEAFC1V270( ) 200 2000 33 5 11 175 0.080 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V330( ) 200 2000 39 5 15 235 0.500 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V390( ) 200 2000 47 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V470( ) 200 2000 56 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V560( ) 200 2000 68 6.3 11.2 290 0.350 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V680( ) 200 2000 82 6.3 15 400 0.250 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1V820( ) 200 2000 100 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1V101( ) 200 1000 120 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1V121( ) 200 1000 150 8 11.5 555 0.117 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1V151( ) 200 1000 180 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V181( ) 200 500 220 8 15 730 0.085 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1V221L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 755 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V221( ) 200 500 270 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V271( ) 200 500 330 8 20 995 0.065 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1V331L( ) 200 1000 10 16 1050 0.068 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V331( ) 200 500 390 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V391( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1205 0.065 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V391S( ) 200 500 470 10 20 1220 0.052 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V471( ) 200 500 560 10 25 1440 0.045 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V561( ) 200 500 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V561S( ) 200 500 680 10 30 1815 0.035 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1V681L 100 12.5 20 1655 0.038 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V681( ) 200 500 16 15 1690 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V681S( ) 100 250 820 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V821L( ) 200 500 18 15 2000 0.038 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V821( ) 100 250 1000 12.5 25 1945 0.030 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1V102( ) 200 500 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V102S( ) 100 250 1200 12.5 30 2310 0.025 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1V122L 100 16 20 2205 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V122( ) 100 250 1500 12.5 35 2510 0.022 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1V152L 100 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V152( ) 100 250 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V152S( ) 100 250 1800 12.5 40 2655 0.018 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1V182L 100 16 25 2555 0.022 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V182( ) 100 250 18 20 2490 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V182S( ) 100 250 2200 16 31.5 3010 0.018 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1V222 100 18 25 2740 0.020 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1V222S( ) 100 250 2700 16 35.5 3150 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1V272L 100 18 31.5 3635 0.016 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1V272 50 3300 18 35.5 3680 0.015 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1V332 50 3900 18 40 3735 0.014 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1V392 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C φ4 to φ6.3=1000 h, φ8=2000 h, φ10=3000 h, φ12.5 to φ18=5000 h 00 Nov. 2012 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-70 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (Ω) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 50 1.0 5 11 20 2.400 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H1R0( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 2.2 5 11 45 1.800 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 5 11 65 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H3R3( ) 200 2000 4.7 5 11 95 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H4R7( ) 200 2000 10 4 11 90 2.500 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H100( ) 200 2000 5 11 125 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H100L( ) 200 2000 12 5 11 135 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H120( ) 200 2000 15 5 11 145 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H150( ) 200 2000 18 5 11 155 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H180( ) 200 2000 22 5 11 155 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H220( ) 200 2000 27 5 15 215 0.900 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H270( ) 200 2000 33 6.3 11.2 260 0.600 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H330( ) 200 2000 39 6.3 11.2 260 0.600 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H390( ) 200 2000 47 6.3 11.2 260 0.600 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H470( ) 200 2000 56 6.3 15 360 0.400 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1H560( ) 200 2000 68 8 11.5 485 0.234 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1H680( ) 200 1000 82 8 11.5 485 0.234 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1H820( ) 200 1000 100 10 12.5 615 0.162 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H101( ) 200 500 120 8 15 635 0.155 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1H121L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 615 0.162 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H121( ) 200 500 150 10 16 850 0.119 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H151( ) 200 500 180 8 20 860 0.120 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1H181L( ) 200 1000 10 16 850 0.119 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H181( ) 200 500 220 10 20 1030 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H221( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1150 0.110 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H221S( ) 200 500 270 10 25 1200 0.082 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H271( ) 200 500 330 10 30 1610 0.060 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1H331L 100 12.5 20 1480 0.063 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H331( ) 200 500 390 12.5 20 1480 0.063 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H391( ) 200 500 16 15 1610 0.080 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H391S( ) 100 250 470 10 30 1610 0.060 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1H471L 100 12.5 25 1832 0.050 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H471( ) 200 500 560 12.5 25 1832 0.050 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1H561( ) 200 500 18 15 1900 0.068 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H561S( ) 100 250 680 12.5 30 2215 0.040 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1H681L 100 16 20 1835 0.048 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H681( ) 100 250 820 12.5 35 2285 0.034 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1H821L 100 18 20 2420 0.042 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H821( ) 100 250 1000 12.5 40 2590 0.030 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1H102L 100 16 25 2235 0.034 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H102( ) 100 250 1200 16 31.5 2700 0.028 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1H122 100 18 25 2610 0.029 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1H122S( ) 100 250 1500 16 35.5 2790 0.025 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1H152L 100 1800 16 40 2845 0.023 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1H182L 100 18 31.5 3000 0.025 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1H182 50 2200 18 35.5 3100 0.023 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1H222 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. ✽✽✽ Please kindly accept last shipment : 31/Mar/2015 Endurance : 105 °C 04 to 06.3=1000 h, 08=2000 h, 010=3000 h, 012.5 to 018=5000 h 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-71 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (Ω) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 63 6.8 4 11 80 3.500 1000 0.45 1.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J6R8( ) 200 2000 12 5 11 145 2.000 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J120( ) 200 2000 18 5 15 200 1.300 1000 0.50 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J180( ) 200 2000 22 6.3 11.2 240 1.000 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J220( ) 200 2000 33 6.3 11.2 240 1.000 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J330( ) 200 2000 39 6.3 15 330 0.700 1000 0.50 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC1J390( ) 200 2000 47 8 11.5 405 0.342 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1J470( ) 200 1000 56 8 11.5 405 0.342 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1J560( ) 200 1000 68 8 11.5 405 0.342 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1J680( ) 200 1000 82 10 12.5 535 0.256 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J820( ) 200 500 100 8 15 535 0.230 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1J101L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 535 0.256 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J101( ) 200 500 120 10 16 600 0.194 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J121( ) 200 500 150 8 20 690 0.178 2000 0.60 3.5 5.0 EEUFC1J151( ) 200 1000 180 10 20 885 0.147 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J181( ) 200 500 12.5 15 1020 0.150 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J181S( ) 200 500 220 10 20 885 0.147 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J221X( ) 200 500 10 25 1050 0.130 3000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J221( ) 200 500 12.5 20 1285 0.085 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J221S( ) 200 500 270 16 15 1410 0.090 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J271( ) 100 250 330 10 30 1300 0.090 3000 0.60 5.0 EEUFC1J331L 100 12.5 20 1285 0.085 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J331( ) 200 500 390 12.5 25 1720 0.070 5000 0.60 5.0 5.0 EEUFC1J391( ) 200 500 18 15 1690 0.086 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J391S( ) 100 250 470 12.5 30 2090 0.055 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1J471L 100 16 20 1765 0.059 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J471( ) 100 250 560 16 25 2160 0.050 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J561( ) 100 250 680 12.5 35 2265 0.047 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1J681L 100 16 25 2160 0.050 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J681( ) 100 250 18 20 2290 0.055 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J681S( ) 100 250 820 12.5 40 2560 0.042 5000 0.80 5.0 EEUFC1J821L 100 16 31.5 2670 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J821 100 18 25 2585 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 7.5 EEUFC1J821S( ) 100 250 1000 16 31.5 2670 0.043 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J102U 100 16 35.5 2770 0.036 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J102 100 1200 16 40 2825 0.030 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J122L 100 18 31.5 2950 0.032 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J122 50 1500 18 35.5 3095 0.030 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J152 50 1800 18 40 3205 0.025 5000 0.80 7.5 EEUFC1J182 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C 04 to 06.3=1000 h, 08=2000 h, 010=3000 h, 012.5 to 018=5000 h 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ FC – EEE-72 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (100 kHz) (+105 °C) Impedance (100 kHz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽H (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (Ω) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 100 5.6 5 11 80 4.10 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC2A5R6( ) 200 2000 8.2 5 15 90 2.80 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 EEUFC2A8R2( ) 200 2000 12 6.3 11.2 114 1.80 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC2A120( ) 200 2000 18 6.3 15 155 1.10 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 EEUFC2A180( ) 200 2000 22 8 11.5 260 0.680 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 EEUFC2A220( ) 200 1000 33 8 15 340 0.450 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 EEUFC2A330L( ) 200 1000 10 12.5 306 0.530 3000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A330( ) 200 500 39 8 20 455 0.330 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A390L( ) 200 1000 10 16 400 0.360 3000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A390( ) 200 500 56 10 20 463 0.240 3000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A560( ) 200 500 68 10 25 599 0.210 3000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A680L( ) 200 500 12.5 15 511 0.230 5000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A680( ) 200 500 100 10 30 698 0.150 3000 0.6 5.0 EEUFC2A101L 100 12.5 20 671 0.180 5000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A101( ) 200 500 120 16 15 793 0.140 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A121S( ) 100 250 150 12.5 25 807 0.110 5000 0.6 5.0 5.0 EEUFC2A151( ) 200 500 18 15 917 0.120 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A151S( ) 100 250 180 12.5 30 937 0.098 5000 0.8 5.0 EEUFC2A181L 100 16 20 995 0.110 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A181( ) 100 250 220 12.5 35 1040 0.087 5000 0.8 5.0 EEUFC2A221L 100 16 25 1170 0.089 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A221( ) 100 250 270 12.5 40 1130 0.072 5000 0.8 5.0 EEUFC2A271L 100 18 20 1230 0.080 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A271S( ) 100 250 330 16 31.5 1520 0.062 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A331 100 18 25 1420 0.070 5000 0.8 7.5 7.5 EEUFC2A331S( ) 100 250 390 16 35.5 1730 0.053 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A391L 100 18 31.5 1600 0.062 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A391 50 470 16 40 1920 0.047 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A471 100 560 18 35.5 1770 0.041 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A561 50 680 18 40 2300 0.036 5000 0.8 7.5 EEUFC2A681 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "H" be tween the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, H=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. Endurance : 105 °C 04 to 06.3=1000 h, 08=2000 h, 010=3000 h, 012.5 to 018=5000 h 01 Oct. 2013 Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. 􀊵 􀀧􀀤􀀘􀀔 􀊵 Plastic Film Capacitors Metallized Polypropylene Film Capacitors Type: EZPE Series ■Features •High safety, Self-healing and Self-protecting function built-in •Long product life, High reliability •Low loss, Low ESR •Flame retardant (Case and sealing resin) •RoHS directive compliant ■Recommended Applications For DC filtering, DC link circuit •Solar inverters •Wind power generation •Industrial power supplies •Inverter circuit in appliances (Air Conditioners etc.) ■Construction •Dielectric : Polypropylene film •Electrodes : Metallized dielectric with segmented pattern •Plastic case : UL94 V-0 •Sealing : UL94 V-0 •Terminals : Tinned wires,2-pin and 4-pin versions ■Explanation of Part Numbers 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 E Z P E Product code Dielectric & construction Rated voltage Capacitance T Pin type Suffix A Suffix 50 500 VDC 80 800 VDC 1B 1100 VDC 1D 1300 VDC L 2-pin type M 4-pin type ■Specifications Category temperature range (TC) (*1) Rated voltage(VR) (*2) Rated capacitance (CR) Capacitance tolerance Withstanding DC voltage Insulation resistance (CR) –40 °C to +85 °C 500 VDC, 800 VDC, 1100 VDC, 1300 VDC (Derating of rated voltage by more than 70 °C (*3)) 500 VDC 800 VDC 1100 VDC 1300 VDC 10 μF to 110 μF 10 μF to 60 μF 10 μF to 40 μF 10 μF to 25 μF ±10 % Between terminals:Rated voltage. (VDC)✕150 % 10 s Terminal to case:2110 VAC 10 s CR>=10000 Ω · F (20 °C, 500 VDC, 60 s) *1:The temperature of capacitor surface (case) *2:Use for DC voltage only *3:Refer to the page of “ DC voltage derating ” Metallized Film Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. 􀊵 􀀧􀀤􀀘􀀕 􀊵 Plastic Film Capacitors ■Dimensions in mm (not to scale) 􀀮􀁂􀁓􀁌􀁊􀁏􀁈􀀁 􀀱􀀒􀊶􀀒􀀁 􀀭􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀀱􀀓􀊶􀀒􀀁 􀐟􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀓􀀁 􀀕􀀏􀀑􀊶􀀓􀀏􀀑􀀁 􀀸􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀀩􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀀮􀁂􀁓􀁌􀁊􀁏􀁈􀀁 􀀱􀀒􀊶􀀒􀀁 􀀕􀀏􀀑􀊶􀀓􀀏􀀑􀀁 􀀩􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀐟􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀓􀀁 􀀭􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀀸􀊶􀀑􀀏􀀖􀀁 􀀥􀀤􀀁 􀀉􀁂􀀊􀀁 􀀷􀀁 􀐖􀀧􀀁 􀀉􀁂􀀊􀉹􀀳􀁂􀁕􀁆􀁅􀀁􀁗􀁐􀁍􀁕􀁂􀁈􀁆 􀀉􀁃􀀊􀉹􀀤􀁂􀁑􀁂􀁄􀁊􀁕􀁂􀁏􀁄􀁆 􀀉􀁄􀀊􀀁 􀀉􀁄􀀊􀉹􀀭􀁐􀁕􀀁􀀯􀁐􀀏􀀁 􀀉􀁃􀀊􀀁 􀀱􀁂􀁏􀁂􀁔􀁐􀁏􀁊􀁄􀀁 􀀮􀁂􀁓􀁌􀁊􀁏􀁈􀀉􀁆􀁙􀀏􀀊􀀁 ■Rating, Dimensions & Quantity / Ammo Box ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 500 VDC at 70 􀋆 ( 450VDC at 85 􀋆 ) EZPE50106LTA 10 20 42 41.5 37.5 - 1.2 21 210 5.0 22.0 0.28 45 EZPE50156LTA 15 20 42 41.5 37.5 - 1.2 21 315 7.5 14.8 0.28 45 EZPE50206LTA 20 20 42 41.5 37.5 - 1.2 21 420 9.5 11.0 0.28 44 EZPE50256LTA 25 20 42 41.5 37.5 - 1.2 21 525 11.0 8.8 0.28 43 EZPE50306MTA 30 20 42 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 21 630 12.5 7.0 0.28 43 EZPE50356MTA 35 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 21 735 13.5 6.2 0.28 83 EZPE50406MTA 40 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 21 840 14.5 5.4 0.28 82 EZPE50456MTA 45 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 21 945 15.2 4.9 0.28 81 EZPE50506MTA 50 30 51 41.5 37.5 20.3 1.2 21 1050 16.0 4.4 0.28 80 EZPE50556MTA 55 30 51 41.5 37.5 20.3 1.2 21 1155 16.3 4.1 0.28 79 EZPE50606MTA 60 30 51 41.5 37.5 20.3 1.2 21 1260 16.5 3.9 0.28 77 EZPE50656MTA 65 30 51 57.5 52.5 10.2 1.2 14 910 15.0 6.8 0.44 111 EZPE50706MTA 70 30 51 57.5 52.5 10.2 1.2 14 980 15.5 6.5 0.44 109 EZPE50756MTA 75 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1050 16.0 6.0 0.44 108 EZPE50806MTA 80 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1120 16.5 5.7 0.44 106 EZPE50856MTA 85 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1190 16.7 5.4 0.44 142 EZPE50906MTA 90 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1260 17.0 5.1 0.44 141 EZPE50956MTA 95 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1330 17.5 4.9 0.44 140 EZPE50107MTA 100 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1400 18.0 4.7 0.44 139 EZPE50117MTA 110 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 14 1540 18.5 4.4 0.44 138 Part No. Dimensions (mm) Permissible current W H L P1 P2 􀐟 600 400 200 ESRtyp [m􀐊] (*3) tan􀐎 [%] (*4) Mass [􀌶] MOQ [pcs] (*5) dv/dt [V/μs] Peak Current [Ao-p] (*1) RMS Current [Arms] (*2) CR. (μF) *1:When rising temperature of capacitor surface by continuous peak current (included pulse current), use within limit specified for temperature of capacitor surface and self heating temperature rise. *2:Maximum RMS current @ 70 􀋆, 10 kHz Use within limit for self heating temperature rise at capacitor surface. *3:Typical values @ 20􀋆, 10 kHz ESR : less than 2.5 􀊷 ESRtyp *4:Maximum dissipation factor @20􀋆, 1 kHz *5:Minimum order quantity consists of 4 packing units. Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. 􀊵 􀀧􀀤􀀘􀀖 􀊵 Plastic Film Capacitors ■Rating, Dimensions & Quantity / Ammo Box ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 800 VDC at 70 􀋆 ( 700VDC at 85 􀋆 ) EZPE80106LTA 10 20 42 41.5 37.5 - 1.2 22 220 7.0 15.8 0.22 44 EZPE80156MTA 15 20 42 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 22 330 9.0 10.5 0.22 43 EZPE80206MTA 20 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 22 440 11.0 7.7 0.22 82 EZPE80256MTA 25 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 22 550 13.0 6.4 0.22 80 EZPE80306MTA 30 30 51 41.5 37.5 20.3 1.2 22 660 15.0 5.3 0.22 78 EZPE80356MTA 35 30 51 57.5 52.5 10.2 1.2 15 525 12.0 9.7 0.33 110 EZPE80406MTA 40 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 15 600 13.0 8.3 0.33 107 EZPE80456MTA 45 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 15 675 14.0 7.0 0.33 104 EZPE80506MTA 50 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 15 750 15.0 6.3 0.33 140 EZPE80556MTA 55 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 15 825 16.0 5.9 0.33 138 EZPE80606MTA 60 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 15 900 17.0 5.6 0.33 136 Part No. Dimensions (mm) Permissible current W H L P1 P2 􀐟 600 400 200 ESRtyp [m􀐊] (*3) tan􀐎 [%] (*4) Mass [􀌶] MOQ [pcs] (*5) dv/dt [V/μs] Peak Current [Ao-p] (*1) RMS Current [Arms] (*2) CR. (μF) ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 1100 VDC at 70 􀋆 ( 920VDC at 85 􀋆 ) EZPE1B106MTA 10 20 42 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 54 540 7.0 12.3 0.20 43 EZPE1B156MTA 15 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 54 810 8.5 8.2 0.20 80 EZPE1B206MTA 20 30 51 41.5 37.5 20.3 1.2 54 1080 10.0 6.3 0.20 76 EZPE1B256MTA 25 30 51 57.5 52.5 10.2 1.2 35 875 8.0 10.7 0.28 107 EZPE1B306MTA 30 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 35 1050 9.0 8.5 0.28 103 EZPE1B356MTA 35 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 35 1225 10.0 7.2 0.28 137 EZPE1B406MTA 40 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 35 1400 11.0 6.5 0.28 134 Part No. Dimensions (mm) Permissible current W H L P1 P2 􀐟 600 400 200 ESRtyp [m􀐊] (*3) tan􀐎 [%] (*4) Mass [􀌶] MOQ [pcs] (*5) dv/dt [V/μs] Peak Current [Ao-p] (*1) RMS Current [Arms] (*2) CR. (μF) ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 1300 VDC at 70 􀋆 ( 1100VDC at 85 􀋆 ) EZPE1D106MTA 10 30 51 41.5 37.5 10.2 1.2 73 730 12.0 10.0 0.17 80 EZPE1D156MTA 15 30 51 57.5 52.5 10.2 1.2 50 750 10.0 14.5 0.22 109 EZPE1D206MTA 20 30 51 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 50 1000 14.0 11.1 0.22 103 EZPE1D256MTA 25 35 56 57.5 52.5 20.3 1.2 50 1250 17.0 8.5 0.22 136 Part No. Dimensions (mm) Permissible current W H L P1 P2 􀐟 400 200 ESRtyp [m􀐊] (*3) tan􀐎 [%] (*4) Mass [􀌶] MOQ [pcs] (*5) dv/dt [V/μs] Peak Current [Ao-p] (*1) RMS Current [Arms] (*2) CR. (μF) *1:When rising temperature of capacitor surface by continuous peak current (included pulse current), use within limit specified for temperature of capacitor surface and self heating temperature rise. *2:Maximum RMS current @ 70 􀋆, 10 kHz Use within limit for self heating temperature rise at capacitor surface. *3:Typical values @ 20􀋆, 10 kHz ESR : less than 2.5 􀊷 ESRtyp *4:Maximum dissipation factor @20􀋆, 1 kHz *5:Minimum order quantity consists of 4 packing units. Metallized Film Plastic Film Capacitors Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. ■Permissible Conditions ●Permissible Voltage ・These capacitors are designed only for DC voltage, so should not be used for AC line. ・Use the peak voltage (Vo-p) within the rated voltage. ・Use the peak to peak voltage (Vp-p) within 0.2 x VR . ●DC Voltage, Peak current and RMS current derating Derating of voltage (Vo-p), RMS current (Arms), and peak current (Ao-p) according to the following diagram when the temperature of the capacitor surface exceeds 70 ℃. ●Permissible self heating temperature rise ●Total cycles applied peak current 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Voltage ① Voltage ② Permissible voltage (Vo-p) Temperature of capacitor surface TC (℃) DC Voltage derating Percentage to the permissible current (%) Current derating Temperature of capacitor surface TC (℃) Total cycles applied peak current (Ao-p) (including pulse current) are within following diagram. Permissible self heating temperature rise is within following diagram when the temperature of the capacitor surface exceeds 70 ℃. Please consult Panasonic if your condition exceeds the above spec. Vp-p = 0.2 × VR VR ≧ Vo-p Vo 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120% 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 Part Number Voltage ① Voltage ② EZPE50 □□□□ TA DC500V DC450V EZPE80 □□□□ TA DC800V DC700V EZPE1B □□□□ TA DC1100V DC920V EZPE1D □□□□ TA DC1300V DC1100V Total cycles Percentage to the permissible peak current (%) Permissible self temp. rise(℃) Temperature of capacitor surface TC (℃) 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 120% 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100% 10 100 1000 10000 100000 Part Number 100% at70℃ 36% at85℃ EZPE50 □□□□ TA 12 ℃ 4.3 ℃ EZPE80 □□□□ TA 10 ℃ 3.6 ℃ EZPE1B □□□□ TA 5 ℃ 1.8 ℃ EZPE1D □□□□ TA 9 ℃ 3.2 ℃ Plastic Film Capacitors Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. ■Characteristics <Reference> ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 500 VDC at 70 ℃ ( 450VDC at 85 ℃ ) ●Temperature Characteristics ●Frequency Characteristics ●Lifetime expectancy -10 -5 0 5 10 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 ⊿C/C (%) Temperature (℃) Capacitance (typical curve) at 1kHz 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 60uF 20uF 110uF 100uF Dissipation factor (typical curve) tanδ (%) Temperature (℃) at 1kHz 1.E+00 1.E+01 1.E+02 1.E+03 1.E+04 1.E+05 1.E+06 1.E+07 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 C・R (Ω・F) Temperature (℃) at 500VDC Insulation resistance (typical curve) Impedance vs. Frequency (typical curve) Impedance (Ω) Frequency (kHz) Permissible voltage (Vo-p) Lifetime expectancy (h) Lifetime expectancy (Reference) * Life time : Reach ⊿C/C = - 10 % , Judgement of Panasonic * 105℃ : Not guarantee voltage 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1 10 100 1000 10000 20uF 60uF 110uF 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Tc=85℃ Tc=105℃ (I=0Arms) Tc=70℃ Unpredictable life time area Plastic Film Capacitors Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. ■Characteristics <Reference> ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 800 VDC at 70 ℃ ( 700VDC at 85 ℃ ) ●Temperature Characteristics ●Frequency Characteristics ●Lifetime expectancy -10 -5 0 5 10 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 ⊿C/C (%) Temperature (℃) Capacitance (typical curve) at 1kHz 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 30uF 10uF 60uF 45uF Dissipation factor (typical curve) tanδ (%) Temperature (℃) at 1kHz 1.E+00 1.E+01 1.E+02 1.E+03 1.E+04 1.E+05 1.E+06 1.E+07 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 C・R (Ω・F) Temperature (℃) at 500VDC Insulation resistance (typical curve) 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1 10 100 1000 10000 30uF 10uF 45uF 60uF Impedance vs. Frequency (typical curve) Impedance (Ω) Frequency (kHz) 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Tc=85℃ Tc=105℃ (I=0Arms) Tc=70℃ Unpredictable life time area Permissible voltage (Vo-p) Lifetime expectancy (h) Lifetime expectancy (Reference) * Life time : Reach ⊿C/C = - 10 % , Judgement of Panasonic * 105℃ : Not guarantee voltage Plastic Film Capacitors Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. ■Characteristics <Reference> ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 1100 VDC at 70 ℃ ( 920VDC at 85 ℃ ) ●Temperature Characteristics ●Frequency Characteristics ●Lifetime expectancy at 1kHz 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 20uF 10uF 40uF Dissipation factor (typical curve) tanδ (%) Temperature (℃) -10 -5 0 5 10 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 ⊿C/C (%) Temperature (℃) Capacitance (typical curve) at 1kHz 1.E+00 1.E+01 1.E+02 1.E+03 1.E+04 1.E+05 1.E+06 1.E+07 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 C・R (Ω・F) Temperature (℃) at 500VDC Insulation resistance (typical curve) 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1 10 100 1000 10000 20uF 10uF 40uF Impedance vs. Frequency (typical curve) Impedance (Ω) Frequency (kHz) 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Unpredictable life time area Tc=85℃ Tc=105℃ ( I = 0Arms) Tc=70℃ Permissible voltage (Vo-p) Lifetime expectancy (h) Lifetime expectancy (Reference) * Life time : Reach ⊿C/C = - 10 % , Judgement of Panasonic * 105℃ : Not guarantee voltage Plastic Film Capacitors Design, Specifications are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifications before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please inform us immediately for technical consultation without fail. ■Characteristics <Reference> ●Type EZPE Rated voltage : 1300 VDC at 70 ℃ ( 1100VDC at 85 ℃ ) ●Temperature Characteristics ●Frequency Characteristics ●Lifetime expectancy -10 -5 0 5 10 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 ⊿C/C (%) Temperature (℃) Capacitance (typical curve) at 1kHz Dissipation factor (typical curve) tanδ (%) Temperature (℃) at 1kHz 1.E+00 1.E+01 1.E+02 1.E+03 1.E+04 1.E+05 1.E+06 1.E+07 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 C・R (Ω・F) Temperature (℃) at 500VDC Insulation resistance (typical curve) Impedance vs. Frequency (typical curve) Impedance (Ω) Frequency (kHz) Permissible voltage (Vo-p) Lifetime expectancy (h) 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1000 10000 100000 1000000 Unpredictable life time area Tc=85℃ Tc=105℃ (I=0Arms) Tc=70℃ 0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 25uF 15uF 10uF 0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100 1 10 100 1000 10000 10uF 15uF 25uF Lifetime expectancy (Reference) * Life time : Reach ⊿C/C = - 10 % , Judgement of Panasonic * 105℃ : Not guarantee voltage Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Division industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ AYF33 ACCTB47E 201303-T ORDERING INFORMATION For FPC Y3B/Y3BW Series FPC connectors (0.3mm pitch) Back lock Y3BW is added. FEATURES 1. Slim and low profile design (Pitch: 0.3 mm) Back lock type and the slim body with a 3.15 mm depth (with the lever). 2. Mechanical design freedom is achieved with double top and bottom contacts Top and bottom double contacts eliminate the need of using different connectors (with either top or bottom contacts) depending on the FPC wiring conditions. 3. Easy-to-handle back lock structure 4. Man-hours of assembly time can be reduced by delivering the connectors with their levers opened. 5. Wiring patterns can be placed underneath the connector. 6. Ni barrier with high resistance to solder creepage 7. Y3BW features advanced functionality, including a structure to temporarily hold the FPC and a higher holding force. The FPC holding contacts located on both ends of the connector facilitate positioning of FPC and further enhance the FPC holding force. (1) The inserted FPC can be temporarily held until the lever is closed. (2) When the lever is closed, the holding contacts lock the FPC by its notches, enhancing the FPC holding force. APPLICATIONS Mobile devices, such as cellular phones, smartphones, digital still cameras and digital video cameras. Y3B Y3BW RoHS compliant Unit: mm 0.9 3.15 Structure to lock notches on both ends of the FPC with holding contacts Applicable FPC shapes New 33: FPC Connector 0.3 mm pitch (Back lock) AYF 3 3 5 Number of pins (2 digits) Contact direction 3: Top and bottom double contacts (Y3B) 6: Top and bottom double contacts, lock holding type (Y3BW) Surface treatment (Contact portion / Terminal portion) 5: Au plating/Au plating (Ni barrier) Panasonic Corporation Automation Controls Business Unit industrial.panasonic.com/ac/e/ GN (AGN) ASCTB13E 201209-T ORDERING INFORMATION High Sensitivity, with 100mW nominal operating power, in a compact and space saving case GN RELAYS (AGN) RoHS compliant FEATURES 1. Compact slim body saves space Thanks to the small surface area of 5.7 mm × 10.6 mm .224 inch × .417 inch and low height of 9.0 mm .354 inch, the packaging density can be increased to allow for much smaller designs. 2. High sensitivity single side stable type (Nominal operating power: 100mW) is available 3. Outstanding surge resistance. Surge breakdown voltage between contacts and coil: 2,500 V 2×10 μs (Telcordia) Surge breakdown voltage between open contacts: 1,500 V 10×160 μs (FCC part 68) 4. The use of twin crossbar contacts ensures high contact reliability. AgPd contact is used because of its good sulfide resistance. Adopting lowgas molding material. Coil assembly molding technology which avoids generating volatile gas from coil. 5. Increased packaging density Due to highly efficient magnetic circuit design, leakage flux is reduced and changes in electrical characteristics from components being mounted close-together are minimized. This all means a packaging density higher than ever before. 6. Nominal operating power: 140 mW 7. Outstanding vibration and shock resistance. Functional shock resistance: 750 m/s2 Destructive shock resistance: 1,000 m/s2 Functional vibration resistance: 10 to 55 Hz (at double amplitude of 3.3 mm .130 inch) Destructive vibration resistance: 10 to 55 Hz (at double amplitude of 5 mm .197 inch) 8. Sealed construction allows automatic washing. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS 1. Telephonic equipment 2. Telecommunications equipment 3. Security equipment 4. Test and Measurement equipment 5. Electronic Consumer and Audio Visual equipment Nominal coil voltage (DC) 1H: 1.5V 03: 3V 4H: 4.5V 06: 6V 09: 9V 12: 12V 24: 24V Contact arrangement 2: 2 Form C Type of operation 0: Standard type (B.B.M.) AGN 2 0 Operating function 0: Single side stable 1: 1 coil latching 6: High sensitivity single side stable type Terminal shape Nil: A: S: Standard PC board terminal Surface-mount terminal A type Surface-mount terminal S type Packing style Nil: X: Z: Tube packing Tape and reel packing (picked from 1/2/3/4 pin side) Tape and reel packing (picked from 5/6/7/8 pin side) Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ NHG – EEE-99 – 05 to 08 0D±0.5 0d±0.05 F±0.5 Sleeve L􀀽 14 min. 3 min. 􀀽􀀀L􀀝16 : L±1.0 L􀀟20 : L±2.0 Pressure relief 06.3􀀝 + – 010􀀝 0D±0.5 ■ Features ● Endurance : 105 °C 1000 h to 2000 h ● RoHS directive compliant Radial Lead Type Series: NHG Type: A ■ Specifi cations Category Temp. Range –55 °C to +105 °C –25 °C to +105 °C Rated W.V. Range 6.3 V.DC to 100 V.DC 160 V.DC to 450 V.DC Nominal Cap. Range 2.2 μF to 22000 μF 1 μF to 330 μF Capacitance Tolerance ±20 % (120 Hz/+20 °C) DC Leakage Cur rent I < 0.01 CV or 3 (μA) After 2 minutes (Which is greater) I < 0.06 CV +10 (μA) After 2 minutes tan d Please see the attached standard products list Endurance After following life test with DC voltage and +105 °C±2 °C ripple current value applied (The sum of DC and ripple peak voltage shall not exceed the rated working voltage), When the capacitors are restored to 20 °C, the capacitors shall meet the limits specifi ed below. Duration : 6.3 V.DC to 100 V.DC : (05 to 08)=1000 hours, (010 to 018)=2000 hours 160 V.DC to 450 V.DC : 2000 hours Capacitance change ±20 % of initial measured value tan d < 200 % of initial specifi ed value DC leakage current < initial specifi ed value Shelf Life After storage for 1000 hours at +105 °C±2 °C with no voltage applied and then being stabilized at +20 °C, capacitors shall meet the limits specifi ed in Endurance. (With voltage treatment) ■ Di men sions in mm (not to scale) W.V.(V.DC) Cap. (μF) Frequency (Hz) 60 120 1 k 10 k 100 k 6.3 to 100 2.2 to 33 0.75 1.00 1.55 1.80 2.00 47 to 470 0.80 1.00 1.35 1.50 1.50 1000 to 22000 0.85 1.00 1.10 1.15 1.15 160 to 450 1 to 330 0.80 1.00 1.35 1.50 1.50 ■ Frequency correction factor for ripple current Body Dia. 0D 5 6.3 8 10 12.5 16 18 Lead Dia. 0d 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.8 0.8 Lead space F 2.0 2.5 3.5 5.0 5.0 7.5 7.5 (Unit : mm) 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ NHG – EEE-100 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (120 Hz) (+105 °C) tan d (120 Hz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽i (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 6.3 220 5 11 140 0.28 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA0JHG221( ) 200 2000 470 6.3 11.2 230 0.28 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA0JHG471( ) 200 2000 1000 8 11.5 380 0.28 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA0JHG102( ) 200 1000 2200 10 16 710 0.30 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA0JHG222( ) 200 500 3300 10 20 840 0.32 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA0JHG332( ) 200 500 4700 12.5 20 1090 0.34 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA0JHG472( ) 200 500 6800 12.5 25 1350 0.38 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA0JHG682( ) 200 500 10000 16 25 1650 0.46 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA0JHG103( ) 100 250 15000 16 31.5 2010 0.56 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA0JHG153 100 22000 18 35.5 2350 0.70 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA0JHG223 50 10 330 6.3 11.2 200 0.24 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1AHG331( ) 200 2000 470 8 11.5 250 0.24 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1AHG471( ) 200 1000 1000 10 12.5 460 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1AHG102( ) 200 500 2200 10 20 760 0.26 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1AHG222( ) 200 500 3300 12.5 20 1000 0.28 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1AHG332( ) 200 500 4700 12.5 25 1260 0.30 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1AHG472( ) 200 500 6800 16 25 1570 0.34 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA1AHG682( ) 100 250 10000 16 31.5 1890 0.42 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1AHG103 100 15000 18 35.5 2180 0.52 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1AHG153 50 16 100 5 11 110 0.20 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1CHG101( ) 200 2000 220 6.3 11.2 180 0.20 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1CHG221( ) 200 2000 330 8 11.5 260 0.20 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1CHG331( ) 200 1000 470 8 11.5 310 0.20 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1CHG471( ) 200 1000 1000 10 16 560 0.20 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1CHG102( ) 200 500 2200 12.5 20 920 0.22 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1CHG222( ) 200 500 3300 12.5 25 1170 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1CHG332( ) 200 500 4700 16 25 1480 0.26 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA1CHG472( ) 100 250 6800 16 31.5 1780 0.30 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1CHG682 100 10000 18 35.5 2060 0.38 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1CHG103 50 25 47 5 11 91 0.16 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1EHG470( ) 200 2000 100 6.3 11.2 130 0.16 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1EHG101( ) 200 2000 220 8 11.5 230 0.16 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1EHG221( ) 200 1000 330 8 11.5 310 0.16 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1EHG331( ) 200 1000 470 10 12.5 380 0.16 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1EHG471( ) 200 500 1000 10 20 680 0.16 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1EHG102( ) 200 500 2200 12.5 25 1090 0.18 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1EHG222( ) 200 500 3300 16 25 1400 0.20 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA1EHG332( ) 100 250 4700 16 31.5 1750 0.22 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1EHG472 100 6800 18 35.5 2040 0.26 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1EHG682 50 35 47 5 11 90 0.14 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1VHG470( ) 200 2000 100 6.3 11.2 150 0.14 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1VHG101( ) 200 2000 220 8 11.5 270 0.14 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1VHG221( ) 200 1000 330 10 12.5 350 0.14 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1VHG331( ) 200 500 470 10 16 460 0.14 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1VHG471( ) 200 500 1000 12.5 20 810 0.14 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1VHG102( ) 200 500 2200 16 25 1260 0.16 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA1VHG222( ) 100 250 3300 16 31.5 1610 0.18 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1VHG332 100 4700 18 35.5 1910 0.20 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1VHG472 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "i" between the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, i=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ NHG – EEE-101 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (120 Hz) (+105 °C) tan d (120 Hz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽i (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 50 0.1 5 11 1.1 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG0R1( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 0.22 5 11 2.3 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHGR22( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 0.33 5 11 3.5 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHGR33( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 0.47 5 11 5 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHGR47( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 1 5 11 10 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG010( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 2.2 5 11 18 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 5 11 22 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG3R3( ) 200 2000 4.7 5 11 26 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG4R7( ) 200 2000 10 5 11 39 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG100( ) 200 2000 22 5 11 65 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG220( ) 200 2000 33 5 11 90 0.12 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG330( ) 200 2000 47 6.3 11.2 110 0.12 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1HHG470( ) 200 2000 100 8 11.5 180 0.12 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA1HHG101( ) 200 1000 220 10 12.5 300 0.12 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1HHG221( ) 200 500 330 10 16 410 0.12 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1HHG331( ) 200 500 470 10 20 530 0.12 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1HHG471( ) 200 500 1000 12.5 25 950 0.12 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1HHG102( ) 200 500 2200 16 31.5 1470 0.14 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1HHG222 100 3300 18 35.5 1770 0.16 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1HHG332 50 63 10 5 11 46 0.10 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1JHG100( ) 200 2000 22 5 11 71 0.10 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA1JHG220( ) 200 2000 33 6.3 11.2 100 0.10 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1JHG330( ) 200 2000 47 6.3 11.2 120 0.10 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA1JHG470( ) 200 2000 100 10 12.5 215 0.10 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1JHG101( ) 200 500 220 10 16 335 0.10 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1JHG221( ) 200 500 330 10 20 510 0.10 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1JHG331( ) 200 500 470 12.5 20 640 0.10 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA1JHG471( ) 200 500 1000 16 25 930 0.10 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA1JHG102( ) 100 250 2200 18 35.5 1610 0.12 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA1JHG222 50 100 0.47 5 11 9 0.08 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHGR47( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 1 5 11 14 0.08 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG010( )✽✽✽ 200 2000 2.2 5 11 21 0.08 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 5 11 31 0.08 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG3R3( ) 200 2000 4.7 5 11 38 0.08 1000 0.5 2.0 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG4R7( ) 200 2000 10 6.3 11.2 54 0.08 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG100( ) 200 2000 22 6.3 11.2 93 0.08 1000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2AHG220( ) 200 2000 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "i" between the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, i=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. ✽✽✽ Please kindly accept last shipment : 31/Mar/2015 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ NHG – EEE-102 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (120 Hz) (+105 °C) tan d (120 Hz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽i (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 100 33 8 11.5 130 0.08 1000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2AHG330( ) 200 1000 47 10 12.5 165 0.08 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2AHG470( ) 200 500 100 10 20 265 0.08 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2AHG101( ) 200 500 220 12.5 25 440 0.08 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2AHG221( ) 200 500 330 16 25 540 0.08 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2AHG331( ) 100 250 470 16 25 715 0.08 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2AHG471( ) 100 250 1000 18 35.5 985 0.08 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2AHG102 50 160 1 6.3 11.2 17 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2CHG010( ) 200 2000 2.2 6.3 11.2 25 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2CHG2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 6.3 11.2 36 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2CHG3R3( ) 200 2000 4.7 6.3 11.2 43 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2CHG4R7( ) 200 2000 10 10 12.5 70 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2CHG100( ) 200 500 22 10 20 130 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2CHG220( ) 200 500 33 10 20 180 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2CHG330( ) 200 500 47 12.5 20 220 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2CHG470( ) 200 500 100 16 25 335 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2CHG101( ) 100 250 220 16 31.5 540 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2CHG221 100 330 18 31.5 705 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2CHG331 50 200 1 6.3 11.2 17 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2DHG010( ) 200 2000 2.2 6.3 11.2 25 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2DHG2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 6.3 11.2 36 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2DHG3R3( ) 200 2000 4.7 8 11.5 50 0.15 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2DHG4R7( ) 200 1000 10 10 16 80 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2DHG100( ) 200 500 22 10 20 140 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2DHG220( ) 200 500 33 12.5 20 190 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2DHG330( ) 200 500 47 12.5 20 220 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2DHG470( ) 200 500 100 16 25 335 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 2.5 ECA2DHG101( ) 100 250 220 18 31.5 575 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2DHG221 50 250 1 6.3 11.2 17 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2EHG010( ) 200 2000 2.2 6.3 11.2 29 0.15 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2EHG2R2( ) 200 2000 3.3 8 11.5 42 0.15 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2EHG3R3 200 1000 4.7 8 11.5 50 0.15 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2EHG4R7( ) 200 1000 10 10 16 88 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2EHG100( ) 200 500 22 12.5 20 155 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2EHG220( ) 200 500 33 12.5 20 190 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2EHG330( ) 200 500 47 12.5 25 230 0.15 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2EHG470( ) 200 500 100 16 31.5 365 0.15 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2EHG101 100 350 1 6.3 11.2 18 0.20 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2VHG010( ) 200 2000 2.2 8 11.5 31 0.20 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2VHG2R2( ) 200 1000 3.3 10 12.5 38 0.20 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2VHG3R3( ) 200 500 4.7 10 16 50 0.20 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2VHG4R7( ) 200 500 10 10 20 82 0.20 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2VHG100( ) 200 500 22 12.5 20 130 0.20 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2VHG220( ) 200 500 33 16 25 195 0.20 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2VHG330( ) 100 250 47 16 25 230 0.20 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2VHG470( ) 100 250 100 18 31.5 375 0.20 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2VHG101 50 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "i" between the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, i=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. 01 Oct. 2013 Design and specifi cations are each subject to change without notice. Ask factory for the current technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Should a safety concern arise regarding this product, please be sure to contact us immediately. Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors/ NHG – EEE-103 – ■ Standard Prod ucts W.V. Cap. (±20 %) Case size Specifi cation Lead Length Part No. Min. Packaging Q'ty Dia. Length Ripple Current (120 Hz) (+105 °C) tan d (120 Hz) (+20 °C) Endurance Lead Dia. Lead Space Straight Leads Taping Straight Taping ✽B Taping ✽i (V) (μF) (mm) (mm) (mA r.m.s.) (hours) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (pcs) (pcs) 400 1 6.3 11.2 18 0.24 2000 0.5 2.5 5.0 2.5 ECA2GHG010( ) 200 2000 2.2 8 11.5 30 0.24 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2GHG2R2( ) 200 1000 3.3 10 12.5 40 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2GHG3R3( ) 200 500 4.7 10 16 50 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2GHG4R7( ) 200 500 10 10 20 80 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2GHG100( ) 200 500 22 12.5 25 145 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2GHG220( ) 200 500 33 16 25 195 0.24 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2GHG330( ) 100 250 47 16 31.5 250 0.24 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2GHG470 100 450 1 8 11.5 18 0.24 2000 0.6 3.5 5.0 ECA2WHG010( ) 200 1000 2.2 10 12.5 29 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2WHG2R2( ) 200 500 3.3 10 16 41 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2WHG3R3( ) 200 500 4.7 10 20 49 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2WHG4R7( ) 200 500 10 12.5 20 75 0.24 2000 0.6 5.0 5.0 ECA2WHG100( ) 200 500 22 16 25 115 0.24 2000 0.8 7.5 7.5 ECA2WHG220( ) 100 250 33 16 31.5 155 0.24 2000 0.8 7.5 ECA2WHG330 100 · When requesting taped product, please put the letter "B" or "i" between the "( )". Lead wire pitch ✽B=5 mm, 7.5 mm, i=2.5 mm. · Please refer to the page of “Taping Dimensions”. 01 Oct. 2013  Highest ripple current capability for demanding inverter applications  2 and 3 pin versions available  3000 hour life at 105ºC Part Number System Voltage Capacitance Code Code 2 3 4.0mm 4.0mm H P J Q K R L S TS-ED Standard Ratings (part numbers shown with 6.3mm length terminal and top vinyl plate) Cap. Panasonic Cap. Panasonic (μF) 120Hz 10kHz~ 120Hz 20kHz Part Number (μF) 120Hz 10kHz~ 120Hz 20kHz Part Number 270 22 x 25 1.42 2.03 0.553 0.249 EETED2D271BA 390 22 x 40 1.72 2.45 0.383 0.172 EETED2E391BA 330 22 x 30 1.56 2.23 0.452 0.203 EETED2D331BA 25 x 30 1.71 2.44 0.383 0.172 EETED2E391CA 390 22 x 30 1.71 2.44 0.383 0.172 EETED2D391BA 30 x 25 1.71 2.44 0.383 0.172 EETED2E391DA 25 x 25 1.71 2.44 0.383 0.172 EETED2D391CA 470 22 x 45 1.85 2.64 0.317 0.143 EETED2E471BA 470 22 x 35 1.85 2.64 0.317 0.143 EETED2D471BA 25 x 35 1.85 2.64 0.317 0.143 EETED2E471CA 25 x 30 1.85 2.64 0.317 0.143 EETED2D471CA 30 x 30 1.85 2.64 0.317 0.143 EETED2E471DA 560 22 x 40 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.120 EETED2D561BA 560 25 x 40 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.120 EETED2E561CA 25 x 30 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.120 EETED2D561CA 30 x 30 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.120 EETED2E561DA 30 x 25 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.120 EETED2D561DA 35 x 25 2.14 3.05 0.266 0.133 EETED2E561EA 680 22 x 45 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.099 EETED2D681BA 680 25 x 45 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.099 EETED2E681CA 25 x 35 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.099 EETED2D681CA 30 x 35 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.099 EETED2E681DA 30 x 30 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.099 EETED2D681DA 35 x 30 2.42 3.45 0.219 0.110 EETED2E681EA 820 22 x 50 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.082 EETED2D821BA 820 30 x 40 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.082 EETED2E821DA 25 x 40 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.082 EETED2D821CA 35 x 35 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.091 EETED2E821EA 30 x 30 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.082 EETED2D821DA 1000 30 x 50 2.84 4.06 0.149 0.067 EETED2E102DA 35 x 25 2.63 3.76 0.182 0.091 EETED2D821EA 35 x 40 2.84 4.06 0.149 0.067 EETED2E102EA 1000 25 x 45 2.84 4.06 0.149 0.067 EETED2D102CA 1200 35 x 45 3.13 4.47 0.124 0.062 EETED2E122EA 30 x 35 2.84 4.06 0.149 0.067 EETED2D102DA 1500 35 x 50 3.56 5.08 0.099 0.050 EETED2E152EA 35 x 30 2.84 4.06 0.149 0.067 EETED2D102EA 1200 30 x 40 3.13 4.47 0.124 0.062 EETED2D122DA 82 22 x 25 0.80 1.14 1.617 0.728 EETED2G820BA 35 x 35 3.13 4.47 0.124 0.062 EETED2D122EA 100 22 x 30 0.91 1.30 1.326 0.597 EETED2G101BA 1500 30 x 50 3.56 5.08 0.099 0.050 EETED2D152DA 25 x 25 0.91 1.30 1.326 0.597 EETED2G101CA 35 x 40 3.56 5.08 0.099 0.050 EETED2D152EA 120 22 x 35 1.02 1.46 1.105 0.497 EETED2G121BA 1800 35 x 45 3.84 5.48 0.083 0.041 EETED2D182EA 25 x 30 1.02 1.46 1.105 0.497 EETED2G121CA 2200 35 x 50 4.12 5.89 0.068 0.033 EETED2D222EA 150 22 x 40 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2G151BA 25 x 30 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2G151CA 220 22 x 30 1.28 1.83 0.678 0.305 EETED2E221BA 30 x 25 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2G151DA 270 22 x 30 1.42 2.03 0.553 0.249 EETED2E271BA 180 22 x 45 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2G181BA 25 x 25 1.42 2.03 0.553 0.249 EETED2E271CA 25 x 35 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2G181CA 330 22 x 35 1.64 2.34 0.452 0.203 EETED2E331BA 30 x 30 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2G181DA 25 x 30 1.56 2.23 0.452 0.203 EETED2E331CA 220 22 x 50 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2G221BA 56 ~ 560μF Common Code Endurance: 3000 hours at +105°C with maximum specified ripple current (see page 6) Capacitance Tolerance: Dissipation Factor (120Hz, 20°C): 15% maximum (120Hz, +20°C) 220~2200 μF *Use of temperature ripple current multipliers may limit life to the hours specified for the maximum operating temperature. Rated Working Voltage: Leakage Current: Ripple Current Multipliers: 2 3√CV (μA) max. after 5 minutes; C = Capacitance in μF, V = WV PVC without top plate Operating Temperature: -40 ~ +105°C -25 ~ +105°C Max 105°C R.C. (Arms) 20°C ESR (Ω, max.) D x L Max 105°C R.C. (Arms) 20°C ESR (Ω, max.) Size (mm) 250 VDC Working, 300 VDC Surge (continued) (no suffix) 250 VDC Working, 300 VDC Surge D E B 400 VDC Working, 450 VDC Surge D x L (Please see page 10 for details) Diameter J PET sleeve without plate Size (mm) TS-ED Series 105°C, 3000 hours 200 VDC Working, 250 VDC Surge Nominal Capacitance: Series Insulation Options 6.3mm 200 ~ 250 VDC 400 ~ 450 VDC Code ± 20% 35mm 30mm 25mm 22mm C Diameter / Terminal Code A PVC with top plate # of pins: pin length: E E T E D Ripple Current Frequency Factors Frequency(Hz): Multiplier: 50 0.71 60 0.78 100~120 1.0 1.2 1k 1.25 10k~ 1.4 Ripple Current Ambient Temperature Factors* ≤45°C 2.35 Ambient Temperature: 85°C 70°C 60°C Multiplier: 1.0 2.0 2.2 500 105°C 1.7 Design and specifi cations are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please contact us immediately for technical consultation. Large Can Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors TS-ED Standard Ratings (continued) Cap. Panasonic (μF) 120Hz 10kHz~ 120Hz 20kHz Part Number 220 25 x 40 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2G221CA 30 x 30 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2G221DA 35 x 25 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2G221EA 270 25 x 45 1.56 2.23 0.491 0.221 EETED2G271CA 30 x 35 1.56 2.23 0.491 0.221 EETED2G271DA 35 x 30 1.56 2.23 0.491 0.221 EETED2G271EA 330 30 x 40 1.71 2.44 0.402 0.181 EETED2G331DA 35 x 30 1.71 2.44 0.402 0.181 EETED2G331EA 390 30 x 45 1.85 2.64 0.340 0.153 EETED2G391DA 35 x 35 1.85 2.64 0.340 0.153 EETED2G391EA 470 35 x 40 2.01 2.87 0.282 0.127 EETED2G471EA 560 35 x 45 2.35 3.36 0.237 0.107 EETED2G561EA 68 22 x 25 1.08 0.95 1.950 0.878 EETED2S680BA 82 22 x 30 1.14 1.08 1.617 0.728 EETED2S820BA 25 x 25 1.14 1.08 1.617 0.728 EETED2S820CA 100 22 x 30 1.30 1.14 1.326 0.597 EETED2S101BA 25 x 25 1.30 1.14 1.326 0.597 EETED2S101CA 120 22 x 35 1.46 1.30 1.105 0.497 EETED2S121BA 25 x 30 1.46 1.30 1.105 0.497 EETED2S121CA 150 22 x 40 1.53 1.46 0.884 0.398 EETED2S151BA 25 x 35 1.53 1.46 0.884 0.398 EETED2S151CA 30 x 25 1.53 1.46 0.884 0.398 EETED2S151DA 180 22 x 45 1.60 1.53 0.737 0.332 EETED2S181BA 25 x 40 1.60 1.53 0.737 0.332 EETED2S181CA 30 x 30 1.60 1.53 0.737 0.332 EETED2S181DA 35 x 25 1.60 1.53 0.737 0.332 EETED2S181EA 220 25 x 45 2.03 1.60 0.603 0.271 EETED2S221CA 30 x 35 2.03 1.60 0.603 0.271 EETED2S221DA 35 x 30 2.03 1.60 0.603 0.271 EETED2S221EA 270 25 x 50 2.40 2.03 0.491 0.221 EETED2S271CA 30 x 40 2.40 2.03 0.491 0.221 EETED2S271DA 35 x 30 2.40 2.03 0.491 0.221 EETED2S271EA 330 30 x 45 2.54 2.45 0.402 0.181 EETED2S331DA 35 x 35 2.54 2.45 0.402 0.181 EETED2S331EA 390 30 x 50 2.73 2.64 0.340 0.153 EETED2S391DA 35 x 40 2.73 2.64 0.340 0.153 EETED2S391EA 470 35 x 45 3.18 2.82 0.282 0.127 EETED2S471EA 56 22 x 25 0.67 0.95 2.368 1.066 EETED2W560BA 68 22 x 30 0.76 1.08 1.950 0.878 EETED2W680BA 25 x 25 0.76 1.08 1.950 0.878 EETED2W680CA 82 22 x 30 0.80 1.14 1.617 0.728 EETED2W820BA 25 x 25 0.80 1.14 1.617 0.728 EETED2W820CA 100 22 x 35 0.91 1.30 1.326 0.597 EETED2W101BA 25 x 30 0.91 1.30 1.326 0.597 EETED2W101CA 120 22 x 40 1.02 1.46 1.105 0.497 EETED2W121BA 25 x 35 1.02 1.46 1.105 0.497 EETED2W121CA 30 x 25 1.02 1.46 1.105 0.497 EETED2W121DA 150 22 x 45 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2W151BA 25 x 40 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2W151CA 30 x 30 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2W151DA 35 x 25 1.07 1.53 0.884 0.398 EETED2W151EA 180 22 x 50 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2W181BA 25 x 40 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2W181CA 30 x 30 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2W181DA 35 x 25 1.12 1.60 0.737 0.332 EETED2W181EA 220 25 x 45 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2W221CA 30 x 35 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2W221DA 35 x 30 1.42 2.03 0.603 0.271 EETED2W221EA 270 30 x 40 1.72 2.45 0.491 0.221 EETED2W271DA 35 x 35 1.72 2.45 0.491 0.221 EETED2W271EA 330 30 x 50 1.85 2.64 0.402 0.181 EETED2W331DA 35 x 40 1.85 2.64 0.402 0.181 EETED2W331EA 390 35 x 40 1.97 2.82 0.340 0.153 EETED2W391EA 470 35 x 50 2.47 3.53 0.282 0.127 EETED2W471EA D x L Size (mm) Max 105°C R.C. (Arms) 20°C ESR (Ω, max.) 400 VDC Working, 450 VDC Surge (continued) 420 VDC Working, 470 VDC Surge 450 VDC Working, 500 VDC Surge Design and specifi cations are subject to change without notice. Ask factory for technical specifi cations before purchase and/or use. Whenever a doubt about safety arises from this product, please contact us immediately for technical consultation. Large Can Aluminum Electrolytic Capacitors 1. Product profile 1.1 General description PNP Resistor-Equipped Transistor (RET) family in Surface-Mounted Device (SMD) plastic packages. 1.2 Features and benefits 1.3 Applications 1.4 Quick reference data PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 Product data sheet Table 1. Product overview Type number Package NPN complement Package NXP JEITA JEDEC configuration PDTA143XE SOT416 SC-75 - PDTC143XE ultra small PDTA143XM SOT883 SC-101 - PDTC143XM leadless ultra small PDTA143XT SOT23 - TO-236AB PDTC143XT small PDTA143XU SOT323 SC-70 - PDTC143XU very small  100 mA output current capability  Reduces component count  Built-in bias resistors  Reduces pick and place costs  Simplifies circuit design  AEC-Q101 qualified  Digital applications in automotive and industrial segments  Cost-saving alternative for BC847/857 series in digital applications  Control of IC inputs  Switching loads Table 2. Quick reference data Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit VCEO collector-emitter voltage open base - - 50 V IO output current - - 100 mA R1 bias resistor 1 (input) 3.3 4.7 6.1 k R2/R1 bias resistor ratio 1.7 2.1 2.6 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 2 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 2. Pinning information 3. Ordering information 4. Marking [1] * = placeholder for manufacturing site code Table 3. Pinning Pin Description Simplified outline Graphic symbol SOT23; SOT323; SOT416 1 input (base) 2 GND (emitter) 3 output (collector) SOT883 1 input (base) 2 GND (emitter) 3 output (collector) 006aaa144 1 2 3 sym003 3 2 1 R1 R2 3 1 2 Transparent top view sym003 3 2 1 R1 R2 Table 4. Ordering information Type number Package Name Description Version PDTA143XE SC-75 plastic surface-mounted package; 3 leads SOT416 PDTA143XM SC-101 leadless ultra small plastic package; 3 solder lands; body 1.0  0.6  0.5 mm SOT883 PDTA143XT - plastic surface-mounted package; 3 leads SOT23 PDTA143XU SC-70 plastic surface-mounted package; 3 leads SOT323 Table 5. Marking codes Type number Marking code[1] PDTA143XE 35 PDTA143XM DN PDTA143XT *31 PDTA143XU *46 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 3 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 5. Limiting values [1] Device mounted on an FR4 Printed-Circuit Board (PCB), single-sided copper, tin-plated and standard footprint. [2] Reflow soldering is the only recommended soldering method. [3] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB with 70 m copper strip line, standard footprint. Table 6. Limiting values In accordance with the Absolute Maximum Rating System (IEC 60134). Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Max Unit VCBO collector-base voltage open emitter - 50 V VCEO collector-emitter voltage open base - 50 V VEBO emitter-base voltage open collector - 7 V VI input voltage positive - +7 V negative - 20 V IO output current - 100 mA ICM peak collector current single pulse; tp  1 ms - 100 mA Ptot total power dissipation Tamb  25 C PDTA143XE (SOT416) [1][2]- 150 mW PDTA143XM (SOT883) [2][3]- 250 mW PDTA143XT (SOT23) [1]- 250 mW PDTA143XU (SOT323) [1]- 200 mW Tj junction temperature - 150 C Tamb ambient temperature 65 +150 C Tstg storage temperature 65 +150 C PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 4 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 6. Thermal characteristics [1] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB, single-sided copper, tin-plated and standard footprint. [2] Reflow soldering is the only recommended soldering method. [3] Device mounted on an FR4 PCB with 70 m copper strip line, standard footprint. (1) SOT23; FR4 PCB, standard footprint SOT883; FR4 PCB with 70 m copper strip line, standard footprint (2) SOT323; FR4 PCB, standard footprint (3) SOT416; FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 1. Power derating curves Tamb (°C) -75 -25 25 75 125 175 006aac778 100 200 300 Ptot (mW) 0 (1) (2) (3) Table 7. Thermal characteristics Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit Rth(j-a) thermal resistance from junction to ambient in free air PDTA143XE (SOT416) [1][2]- - 830 K/W PDTA143XM (SOT883) [2][3]- - 500 K/W PDTA143XT (SOT23) [1]- - 500 K/W PDTA143XU (SOT323) [1]- - 625 K/W PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 5 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 2. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration for PDTA143XE (SOT416); typical values FR4 PCB, 70 m copper strip line Fig 3. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration for PDTA143XM (SOT883); typical values 006aac781 10-5 10-4 10-2 10-1 10 102 tp (s) 10-3 1 103 102 10 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 1 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 006aac782 10-5 10-4 10-2 10-1 10 102 tp (s) 10-3 1 103 102 10 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 1 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 6 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 4. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration for PDTA143XT (SOT23); typical values FR4 PCB, standard footprint Fig 5. Transient thermal impedance from junction to ambient as a function of pulse duration for PDTA143XU (SOT323); typical values 006aac779 10-5 10-4 10-2 10-1 10 102 tp (s) 10-3 1 103 102 10 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 1 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 006aac780 10-5 10-4 10-2 10-1 10 102 tp (s) 10-3 1 103 102 10 103 Zth(j-a) (K/W) 1 duty cycle = 1 0.75 0.5 0.33 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 7 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 7. Characteristics [1] Characteristics of built-in transistor Table 8. Characteristics Tamb = 25 C unless otherwise specified. Symbol Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Unit ICBO collector-base cut-off current VCB = 50 V; IE = 0 A - - 100 nA ICEO collector-emitter cut-off current VCE = 30 V; IB = 0 A - - 1 A VCE = 30 V; IB = 0 A; Tj = 150 C - - 5 A IEBO emitter-base cut-off current VEB = 5 V; IC = 0 A - - 600 A hFE DC current gain VCE = 5 V; IC = 10 mA 50 - - VCEsat collector-emitter saturation voltage IC = 10 mA; IB = 0.5 mA - - 100 mV VI(off) off-state input voltage VCE = 5 V; IC = 100 A - 0.9 0.3 V VI(on) on-state input voltage VCE = 0.3 V; IC = 20 mA 2.5 1.5 - V R1 bias resistor 1 (input) 3.3 4.7 6.1 k R2/R1 bias resistor ratio 1.7 2.1 2.6 Cc collector capacitance VCB = 10 V; IE = ie = 0 A; f = 1 MHz - - 3 pF fT transition frequency VCE = 5 V; IC = 10 mA; f = 100 MHz [1]- 180 - MHz PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 8 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k VCE = 5 V (1) Tamb = 100 C (2) Tamb = 25 C (3) Tamb = 40 C IC/IB = 20 (1) Tamb = 100 C (2) Tamb = 25 C (3) Tamb = 40 C Fig 6. DC current gain as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 7. Collector-emitter saturation voltage as a function of collector current; typical values VCE = 0.3 V (1) Tamb = 40 C (2) Tamb = 25 C (3) Tamb = 100 C VCE = 5 V (1) Tamb = 40 C (2) Tamb = 25 C (3) Tamb = 100 C Fig 8. On-state input voltage as a function of collector current; typical values Fig 9. Off-state input voltage as a function of collector current; typical values IC (mA) -10-1 -1 -10 -102 006aac846 102 10 103 hFE 1 (1) (2) (3) IC (mA) -1 -10 -102 006aac847 -10-1 -1 VCEsat (V) -10-2 (1) (2) (3) 006aac848 IC (mA) -10-1 -1 -10 -102 -1 -10 VI(on) (V) -10-1 (1) (2) (3) IC (mA) -10-1 -1 -10 006aac849 -1 -10 VI(off) (V) -10-1 (1) (2) (3) PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 9 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 8. Test information 8.1 Quality information This product has been qualified in accordance with the Automotive Electronics Council (AEC) standard Q101 - Stress test qualification for discrete semiconductors, and is suitable for use in automotive applications. f = 1 MHz; Tamb = 25 C VCE = 5 V; Tamb = 25 C Fig 10. Collector capacitance as a function of collector-base voltage; typical values Fig 11. Transition frequency as a function of collector current; typical values of built-in transistor VCB (V) 0 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 006aac850 4 2 6 8 Cc (pF) 0 006aac763 IC (mA) -10-1 -1 -10 -102 102 103 fT (MHz) 10 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 10 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 9. Package outline 10. Packing information [1] For further information and the availability of packing methods, see Section 14. Fig 12. Package outline PDTA143XE (SOT416/SC-75) Fig 13. Package outline PDTA143XM (SOT883/SC-101) Fig 14. Package outline PDTA143XT (SOT23) Fig 15. Package outline PDTA143XU (SOT323/SC-70) Dimensions in mm 04-11-04 0.95 0.60 1.8 1.4 1.75 1.45 0.9 0.7 0.25 0.10 1 0.30 0.15 1 2 3 0.45 0.15 Dimensions in mm 03-04-03 0.62 0.55 0.55 0.47 0.50 0.46 0.65 0.20 0.12 3 2 1 0.30 0.22 0.30 0.22 1.02 0.95 0.35 Dimensions in mm 04-11-04 0.45 0.15 1.9 1.1 0.9 3.0 2.8 2.5 2.1 1.4 1.2 0.48 0.38 0.15 0.09 1 2 3 Dimensions in mm 04-11-04 0.45 0.15 1.1 0.8 2.2 1.8 2.2 2.0 1.35 1.15 1.3 0.4 0.3 0.25 0.10 1 2 3 Table 9. Packing methods The indicated -xxx are the last three digits of the 12NC ordering code.[1] Type number Package Description Packing quantity 3000 5000 10000 PDTA143XE SOT416 4 mm pitch, 8 mm tape and reel -115 - -135 PDTA143XM SOT883 2 mm pitch, 8 mm tape and reel - - -315 PDTA143XT SOT23 4 mm pitch, 8 mm tape and reel -215 - -235 PDTA143XU SOT323 4 mm pitch, 8 mm tape and reel -115 - -135 PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 11 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 11. Soldering Reflow soldering is the only recommended soldering method. Fig 16. Reflow soldering footprint PDTA143XE (SOT416/SC-75) Reflow soldering is the only recommended soldering method. Fig 17. Reflow soldering footprint PDTA143XM (SOT883/SC-101) solder lands solder resist occupied area solder paste sot416_fr 0.85 1.7 2.2 2 0.5 (3×) 0.6 (3×) 1 1.3 Dimensions in mm solder lands solder resist occupied area solder paste sot883_fr 1.3 0.3 0.6 0.7 0.4 0.9 0.3 (2×) 0.4 (2×) 0.25 (2×) 0.7 R0.05 (12×) Dimensions in mm PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 12 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k Fig 18. Reflow soldering footprint PDTA143XT (SOT23) Fig 19. Wave soldering footprint PDTA143XT (SOT23) solder lands solder resist occupied area solder paste sot023_fr 0.5 (3×) 0.6 (3×) 0.6 (3×) 0.7 (3×) 3 1 3.3 2.9 1.7 1.9 2 Dimensions in mm solder lands solder resist occupied area preferred transport direction during soldering sot023_fw 2.8 4.5 1.4 4.6 1.4 (2×) 1.2 (2×) 2.2 2.6 Dimensions in mm PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 13 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k Fig 20. Reflow soldering footprint PDTA143XU (SOT323/SC-70) Fig 21. Wave soldering footprint PDTA143XU (SOT323/SC-70) solder lands solder resist occupied area solder paste sot323_fr 2.65 2.35 0.6 (3×) 0.5 (3×) 0.55 (3×) 1.325 1.85 1.3 3 2 1 Dimensions in mm sot323_fw 3.65 2.1 1.425 (3×) 4.6 09 (2×) 2.575 1.8 solder lands solder resist occupied area preferred transport direction during soldering Dimensions in mm PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 14 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 12. Revision history Table 10. Revision history Document ID Release date Data sheet status Change notice Supersedes PDTA143X_SER v.5 20111209 Product data sheet - PDTA143X_SERIES v.4 Modifications: • Type numbers PDTA143XK and PDTA143XS removed. • Section 1 “Product profile”: updated • Section 4 “Marking”: updated • Figure 1 to 5, 10 and 11: added • Section 6 “Thermal characteristics”: updated • Figure 6 to 9: updated • Table 8 “Characteristics”: ICEO updated, fT added • Section 8 “Test information”: added • Section 11 “Soldering”: added • Section 13 “Legal information”: updated PDTA143X_SERIES v.4 20070416 Product data sheet - PDTA143X_SERIES v.3 PDTA143X_SERIES v.3 20040804 Product specification - PDTA143X_SERIES v.2 PDTA143X_SERIES v.2 20030410 Product specification - - PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 15 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k 13. Legal information 13.1 Data sheet status [1] Please consult the most recently issued document before initiating or completing a design. [2] The term ‘short data sheet’ is explained in section “Definitions”. [3] The product status of device(s) described in this document may have changed since this document was published and may differ in case of multiple devices. The latest product status information is available on the Internet at URL http://www.nxp.com. 13.2 Definitions Draft — The document is a draft version only. The content is still under internal review and subject to formal approval, which may result in modifications or additions. NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of information included herein and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. Short data sheet — A short data sheet is an extract from a full data sheet with the same product type number(s) and title. A short data sheet is intended for quick reference only and should not be relied upon to contain detailed and full information. For detailed and full information see the relevant full data sheet, which is available on request via the local NXP Semiconductors sales office. In case of any inconsistency or conflict with the short data sheet, the full data sheet shall prevail. Product specification — The information and data provided in a Product data sheet shall define the specification of the product as agreed between NXP Semiconductors and its customer, unless NXP Semiconductors and customer have explicitly agreed otherwise in writing. In no event however, shall an agreement be valid in which the NXP Semiconductors product is deemed to offer functions and qualities beyond those described in the Product data sheet. 13.3 Disclaimers Limited warranty and liability — Information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable. However, NXP Semiconductors does not give any representations or warranties, expressed or implied, as to the accuracy or completeness of such information and shall have no liability for the consequences of use of such information. NXP Semiconductors takes no responsibility for the content in this document if provided by an information source outside of NXP Semiconductors. In no event shall NXP Semiconductors be liable for any indirect, incidental, punitive, special or consequential damages (including - without limitation - lost profits, lost savings, business interruption, costs related to the removal or replacement of any products or rework charges) whether or not such damages are based on tort (including negligence), warranty, breach of contract or any other legal theory. Notwithstanding any damages that customer might incur for any reason whatsoever, NXP Semiconductors’ aggregate and cumulative liability towards customer for the products described herein shall be limited in accordance with the Terms and conditions of commercial sale of NXP Semiconductors. Right to make changes — NXP Semiconductors reserves the right to make changes to information published in this document, including without limitation specifications and product descriptions, at any time and without notice. This document supersedes and replaces all information supplied prior to the publication hereof. Suitability for use — NXP Semiconductors products are not designed, authorized or warranted to be suitable for use in life support, life-critical or safety-critical systems or equipment, nor in applications where failure or malfunction of an NXP Semiconductors product can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury, death or severe property or environmental damage. NXP Semiconductors and its suppliers accept no liability for inclusion and/or use of NXP Semiconductors products in such equipment or applications and therefore such inclusion and/or use is at the customer’s own risk. Applications — Applications that are described herein for any of these products are for illustrative purposes only. NXP Semiconductors makes no representation or warranty that such applications will be suitable for the specified use without further testing or modification. Customers are responsible for the design and operation of their applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products, and NXP Semiconductors accepts no liability for any assistance with applications or customer product design. It is customer’s sole responsibility to determine whether the NXP Semiconductors product is suitable and fit for the customer’s applications and products planned, as well as for the planned application and use of customer’s third party customer(s). Customers should provide appropriate design and operating safeguards to minimize the risks associated with their applications and products. NXP Semiconductors does not accept any liability related to any default, damage, costs or problem which is based on any weakness or default in the customer’s applications or products, or the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). Customer is responsible for doing all necessary testing for the customer’s applications and products using NXP Semiconductors products in order to avoid a default of the applications and the products or of the application or use by customer’s third party customer(s). NXP does not accept any liability in this respect. Limiting values — Stress above one or more limiting values (as defined in the Absolute Maximum Ratings System of IEC 60134) will cause permanent damage to the device. Limiting values are stress ratings only and (proper) operation of the device at these or any other conditions above those given in the Recommended operating conditions section (if present) or the Characteristics sections of this document is not warranted. Constant or repeated exposure to limiting values will permanently and irreversibly affect the quality and reliability of the device. Terms and conditions of commercial sale — NXP Semiconductors products are sold subject to the general terms and conditions of commercial sale, as published at http://www.nxp.com/profile/terms, unless otherwise agreed in a valid written individual agreement. In case an individual agreement is concluded only the terms and conditions of the respective agreement shall apply. NXP Semiconductors hereby expressly objects to applying the customer’s general terms and conditions with regard to the purchase of NXP Semiconductors products by customer. No offer to sell or license — Nothing in this document may be interpreted or construed as an offer to sell products that is open for acceptance or the grant, conveyance or implication of any license under any copyrights, patents or other industrial or intellectual property rights. Document status[1][2] Product status[3] Definition Objective [short] data sheet Development This document contains data from the objective specification for product development. Preliminary [short] data sheet Qualification This document contains data from the preliminary specification. Product [short] data sheet Production This document contains the product specification. PDTA143X_SER All information provided in this document is subject to legal disclaimers. © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. Product data sheet Rev. 5 — 9 December 2011 16 of 17 NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k Export control — This document as well as the item(s) described herein may be subject to export control regulations. Export might require a prior authorization from competent authorities. Quick reference data — The Quick reference data is an extract of the product data given in the Limiting values and Characteristics sections of this document, and as such is not complete, exhaustive or legally binding. 13.4 Trademarks Notice: All referenced brands, product names, service names and trademarks are the property of their respective owners. 14. Contact information For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com NXP Semiconductors PDTA143X series PNP resistor-equipped transistors; R1 = 4.7 k, R2 = 10 k © NXP B.V. 2011. All rights reserved. For more information, please visit: http://www.nxp.com For sales office addresses, please send an email to: salesaddresses@nxp.com Date of release: 9 December 2011 Document identifier: PDTA143X_SER Please be aware that important notices concerning this document and the product(s) described herein, have been included in section ‘Legal information’. 15. Contents 1 Product profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.1 General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.2 Features and benefits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.3 Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1.4 Quick reference data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Pinning information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 3 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 4 Marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 5 Limiting values. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 6 Thermal characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 7 Characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 8 Test information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 8.1 Quality information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 9 Package outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 10 Packing information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 11 Soldering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 12 Revision history. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 13 Legal information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 13.1 Data sheet status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 13.2 Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 13.3 Disclaimers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 13.4 Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 14 Contact information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 15 Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Circuit Imprimé Français - Tools ECO Series TECHNO LABORATORY DRILLS TECHNO 003 MR TECHNO 003 R Model TECHNO 003 MR TECHNO 003 R TECHNO 003 MRE Adjustable rotation speed 11000 à 37000 rpm 11000 à 37000 rpm 11000 à 37000 rpm Capacity Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm 0,2 à 3,2 mm Swan neck 120 mm 170 mm 120 mm Work table 250 x 150 mm 380 x 295 mm 250 x 150 mm Spindle travel 6 mm 6 mm 6 mm Low voltage lighting Yes Yes No Dust removal connection Yes Yes No External dimensions 250 x 150 x 260 mm 380 x 295 x 260 mm 250 x 150 x 260 mm Weight 4 kg 5 kg 3,8 kg Spindle output 115 W 115 W 115 W Electrical connection 220 /240 V - 50/60 Hz 220/240 - 50/60 Hz 220/240 V - 50/60 Hz Code DP 593 EP 503 DP 595 TECHNO 001 TECHNO 002 http://www.cif.fr/uk/ukp40.shtml (1 of 2) [04/08/03 11:08:09] Circuit Imprimé Français - Tools Model TECHNO 001 TECHNO 002 Adjustable rotation speed 8000 à 20000 rpm 20000 rpm Capacity Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm Swan neck 175 mm 150 mm Work table 285 x 245 mm 300 x 245 mm Spindle travel 25 mm 15 mm Automatic clamping chuck Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm Ø 0.2 à 3.2 mm Low voltage lighting Yes Yes Dust removal connection Yes Yes External dimensions 395 x 245 x 230 mm 395 x 245 x 250 mm Weight 8,5 kg 5 kg Spindle output 130 W 24 V/30 W Electrical connection 220/240 V - 50/60 Hz 220/240 V - 50/60 Hz Code EP 501 EP 502 © Circuit Imprimé Français - Technical conception : France Cybermedia - http://www.cif.fr/uk/ukp40.shtml (2 of 2) [04/08/03 11:08:09] DEUTSCH – ENGLISH - FRANCAIS D Bedienungsanleitung ANSMANN Starlight-Serie Starlight 200 (UK) und Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – nicht mehr lieferbar) Seite 1 HINWEIS Dieses Gerät muss vor dem Erstgebrauch unbedingt 24 Stunden geladen werden. Der Akku- Handscheinwerfer ist für Dauerladung ausgelegt, d.h. der Steckertrafo verbleibt in der Steckdose und der Arbeitsscheinwerfer im Wandhalter (9). BEFESTIGIGUNG DER WANDHALTERUNG (9) Bohren Sie 2 Löcher im waagrechten Abstand von 87 mm in die Wand. Achten Sie darauf, dass die Wandhalterung in der Nähe einer Steckdose montiert wird, wobei das Netzversorgungskabel in der Mauer nicht beschädigt werden darf. Fixieren Sie die Wandhalterung nun mittels zweier Schrauben in der Wand. AUFLADUNG DES AKKU-ARBEITSSCHEINWERFERS Laden Sie den Akku-Arbeitscheinwerfer vor dem ersten Gebrauch mindestens 24 Stunden auf. Die Aufladung erfolgt in der Wandhalterung (9). Das Ladenetzteil kann dauernd in der Steckdose verbleiben. Der Arbeitsscheinwerfer wird also, sofern Sie Ihn nicht benutzen, in der Wandhalterung dauernd aufgeladen (Dauerladung). Die Aufladung wird durch das Leuchten der Ladekontroll-Leuchte (7) angezeigt. LEUCHTDAUER Die Leuchtdauer des Arbeitsscheinwerfers entnehmen Sie bitte der Tabelle (H – Seite 3). ANWENDUNG Bei Bedarf nehmen Sie bitte den Arbeitsscheinwerfer aus der Wandhalterung (9). Der Handgriff ist um 180 Grad schwenkbar und kann in vier Raststufen hochgeklappt werden. Während des Hoch- oder Zurückklappens muss der Klappmechanismus durch Drücken der Entriegelungstaste entriegelt werden. Mit dem Schiebeschalter (1) schalten Sie den Scheinwerfer ein. Starlight 300 und 400 haben zwei Schaltstufen. 1. Stufe Krypton-Lampe; 2. Stufe Halogen-Lampe. D Bedienungsanleitung ANSMANN Starlight-Serie Starlight 200 (UK) und Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – nicht mehr lieferbar) Seite 2 FOKUSSIERUNG Den Brennpunkt des Lichtstrahls können Sie durch Drehen der Fokussierung (4) einstellen. Durch Drehen bis zum rechten Anschlag wird bei Starlight 400 die Blinkelektronik eingeschaltet. Es blinkt die Glühlampe, welche mit dem Schiebeschalter (1) geschaltet ist. AUSWECHSELN DER GLÜHBIRNE Drücken Sie den Gummiring des Reflektors an den beiden Druckpunkten (10) zusammen. Der Reflektor lässt sich nun aus dem Scheinwerfergehäuse herausnehmen und die Glühlampen können gewechselt werden. ZUBEHÖR Starlight 300 und Starlight 400 sind mit Trageriemen (T) ausgestattet. Dieser wird an den beiden Ösen seitlich am Gehäuse befestigt. Starlight 400 ist mit 2 Filterscheiben (F) (rot u. grün) ausgestattet (im Gehäuse des Akkupacks ist Platz für zwei Filterscheiben vorgesehen). NETZAUSFALL-ELEKTRONIK Starlight 400 ist mit einer Netzausfall-Elektronik (N) ausgestattet. Der Handscheinwerfer wird im eingeschalteten Zustand in die Ladestation eingesteckt. Bei Stromausfall schaltet sich der Handscheinwerfer automatisch ein und dient somit als Notbeleuchtung. Nach Ende der Netzunterbrechung schaltet sich der Scheinwerfer wieder automatisch aus und der Akkupack wird wieder geladen. AUSWECHSELN DES AKKUS Nach gleichzeitigem Drücken der beiden Entriegelungspunkte (6) lässt sich der Akkupack herausziehen. D Bedienungsanleitung ANSMANN Starlight-Serie Starlight 200 (UK) und Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – nicht mehr lieferbar) Seite 3 UMWELTHINWEIS Akkus gehören nicht in den Hausmüll. Geben Sie verbrauchte Akkus bei Ihrem Händler bzw. der Batteriesammelstelle ab. HINWEIS Das Gerät bitte nicht Nässe und extremen Temperaturen aussetzen. Wartungs- und Reinigungsarbeiten nur bei gezogenem Netzteil durchführen. Den Handscheinwerfer nur mit einem feuchten Tuch reinigen. TABELLE H Technische Daten Typ Nummer Leuchtmittel* Zubehör** Akkupack Leuchtweite Leuchtdauer Starlight 200 UK 5502046 4 W H 4,8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 UK 5502056 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min Starlight 200 5102062 4 W H 4,8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 5102082 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min Zubehör Leuchtmittel ** T = Tragegurt * H = Halogen ** N = Netzausfall-Elektronik * KR = Krypton ** F = Filterscheibe rot und grün ** B = Blink-Elektronik Weitere aktuelle Informationen ANSMANN ENERGY GMBH Industriestraße 10, 97959 Assamstadt Tel.: 06294-4204-0 Fax: 06294-4204-43 info@ansmann.de www.ansmann.de GB Operating Instructions ANSMANN Starlight Series Starlight 200 (UK) and Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – no longer available) Page 1 CAUTION ! This appliance has to be charged for 24 hours before using it for the first time. The lamp can be charged continuously, i.e. the charging adaptor can remain permanently in the mains socket and the appliance in the wall bracket (9). MOUNTING OF THE WALL BRACKET (9) Drill two holes 110 mm apart vertically where you wish to fix the wall holder. We recommend that you fit the wall holder to the wall near a mains socket checking that the holes to be drilled are well away from the mains supply cable to the electrical socket. Fit the wall plugs into the holes, position the wall holder against the wall, insert screws and screw up tightly. CHARGING THE LAMP Before using the appliance for the first time charge it for at least 24 hours in the wall bracket (9). The charging unit can remain in the mains socket. This means that the lamp is constantly charged in the wall bracket. The LED (7) indicates that the appliance is being charged. When fully charged the lamp provide its full power. OPERATING TIME For appropriate operating time of your STARLIGHT model please refer to the table H (page 3). USING THE LAMP Before using the lamp take it out of the wall bracket (9). All Starlight lamps have a handle that can be moved by 180 degrees and be folded back in four different positions. The angle can be adjusted by moving the handle forward or backwards whilst pressing the release key (5). With the slide switch (1) you can switch on the lamp. The Starlight 300 and 400 have two switch positions. First step: Krypton; second step: Halogen GB Operating Instructions ANSMANN Starlight Series Starlight 200 (UK) and Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – no longer available) Page 2 FOCUS You can adjust the focus by turning the zoom grip (4). Turning the zoom grip fully clockwise will cause the bulb selected by (1) to flash on and off. REPLACING THE BULB Press the rubber ring of the reflector at the two tabs (10). The reflector/lens can now be taken out of the lamp case and the bulbs can be replaced. ACCESSORIES Starlight 300 and 400 are supplied with a shoulder strap. It can be fastened to the two fixings on the upper sides of the case. Starlight 400 is supplied with two coloured filter slides (red and green). The power pack case provides storage for the two slides. MAINS-FAILURE DETECTION Starlight 400 has a mains-failure detection option. This means that the lamp will automatically switch on if it detects that there is a mains failure, to provide a safety light. When the lamp is placed into the wall bracket for charging with the light on, the bulb extinguishes. If it detects a mains failure, the bulb will light until the mains power is restored and the power pack is being charged again. REMOVAL OF THE RECHARGEABLE BATTERY PACK (8) Depress the two release positions (6) at the same time to remove the power pack. Operating Instructions ANSMANN Starlight Series Starlight 200 (UK) and Starlight 400 (UK) (Starlight 300 – no longer available) Page 3 ENVIRONMENTAL REFERENCE Rechargeable batteries must not be disposed of in domestic waste. Return used batteries to your dealer or to an authorised battery collecting point. TIP Keep the appliance in a dry place. Do not carry out any cleaning or maintenance work if the charger is plugged in. Only use a moist cloth to clean the lamp or the wall bracket. TABLE H Technical Data Type Number Bulb* Accessories**Battery Pack Beam Operating Time Starlight 200 UK 5502046 4 W H 4.8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 UK 5502056 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min Starlight 200 5102062 4 W H 4.8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 5102082 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min Accessories BULB ** T= Belt * H= Halogen ** N= Mains-failure electronics *KR= Krypton ** F= Colour-filter red and green ** B= Electronic Indicator For further information please contact ANSMANN ENERGY GMBH Industriestraße 10; D-97959 Assamstadt Fon.: +49 (0) 6294-4204-0 Fax: +49 (0) 6294- 4204-43 info@ansmann.de www.ansmann.de Instructions d’utilisation ANSMANN de la série Starlight F Starlight 200 et Starlight 400 (Starlight 300 – plus disponible) Page 1 REMARQUE Le projecteur doit absolument être chargé 24 heures avant la première utilisation. Le projecteur manuel à accu est conçu pour une charge longue, c’est à dire que la fiche du transformateur reste dans la prise de courant, et le projecteur dans le support mural (9). FIXATION DU SUPPORT MURAL Percer 2 trous écartés de 87 mm à l’horizontale. Vérifier que le support soit à côté d’une prise de courant, en faisant attention à ne pas endommager le câble d’alimentation électrique dans le mur. Fixer le support mural à l’aide de deux vis. CHARGE DU PROJECTEUR Charger le projecteur au moins 24 heures avant la première utilisation. La charge s’effectue dans le support mural (9). Le chargeur peut rester branché longtemps. Le projecteur peut également rester sur son support s’il n’est pas utilisé. La période de charge est signalée par LED (7) DURÉE D’ÉCLAIRAGE Pour la durée d’éclairage, voir le tableau (H – page 3). Instructions d’utilisation ANSMANN de la série Starlight F Starlight 200 et Starlight 400 (Starlight 300 – plus disponible) Page 2 UTILISATION Prendre le projecteur sur le support mural (9). La poignée peut pivoter de 180° et peut être repliée avec 4 crans intermédiaires. Pour abaisser ou remonter la poignée, appuyer sur le bouton de déverrouillage (5). Allumer le projecteur avec l’interrupteur (1). Les projecteurs Starlight 300 & 400 ont deux positions : 1. Position: lampe Krypton ; 2. Position: lampe Halogène. FOCUS Modifier l’intensité du rayon lumineux en tournant le focus (4). En tournant à fond vers la droite pour le Starlight 400, l’ampoule sélectionnée clignote (1). REMPLACEMENT DE L’AMPOULE Appuyer sur le joint caoutchouc du réflecteur aux deux points de serrage (10). Le réflecteur se détache du projecteur et l’ampoule peut être remplacée. ACCESSOIRES Les Starlight 300 & Starlight 400 sont livrés avec une bandoulière (T) fixée de chaque côté de la lampe. Le Starlight 400 est livré avec 2 filtres (F) (rouge & vert). Un espace est prévu pour les deux filtres dans le boîtier de l’accu. COUPURE DU RÉSEAU Le Starlight 400 gère les coupures d’électricité du réseau (N). Lorsque le projecteur est remis sur son support en position allumé, il s’allume s’il y a une coupure de courant, et sert ainsi d’éclairage de sécurité. Le projecteur s’éteint automatiquement au retour du courant et l’accu se recharge. Instructions d’utilisation ANSMANN de la série Starlight F Starlight 200 et Starlight 400 (Starlight 300 – plus disponible) Page 3 REMPLACEMENT DE L’ACCU Appuyer sur les deux points de déverrouillage en même temps (6) pour que l’accu se détache. PROTECTION DE L’ENVIRONNEMENT Les accus ne doivent pas être jetés dans les poubelles domestiques. Renvoyer les au distributeur ou à un centre de collecte autorisé. PRÉCAUTIONS Ne pas laisser le projecteur à l’humidité et ne pas exposer à des températures extrèmes. Les travaux de nettoyage et de maintenance doivent être effectués uniquement par les distributeurs autorisés. Le projecteur doit être nettoyé uniquement avec un chiffon humide. TABLEAU H Données Techniques Type L'article Ampoule * Accessoires** Battery Pack Largeur d'éclat Durée d'éclat Starlight 200 UK*** 5502046 4 W H 4,8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 UK*** 5502056 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min Starlight 200 5102062 4 W H 4,8V 800m 120 min Starlight 400 5102082 10W H/4W KR T/N/F/B 6V 1200m 60(200)min *** Série pour GB Accessories** Ampoule* ** T = Courroie de civière * H = Halogène ** N = Panne de courant électronique * KR = Krypton ** F = Glace de filtre rouge et vert ** B = Se enflammer électronique Pour de plus amples renseignements, contactez ANSMANN ENERGY GMBH Industriestrasse 10, D-97959 Assamstadt Tél.: +49 (0) 6294-4204-0 Fax: +49 (0) 6294-4204-43 info@ansmann.de www.ansmann.de OSCILLOSCOPES USB HAUTE précisio n www.picotech.com Série PicoScope® 4000 Fourni avec un kit de développement logiciel (SDK) complet, y compris des exemples de programmes • Logiciel compatible avec Windows XP, Windows Vista et Windows 7• Assistance technique gratuite Mémoire tampon 32 MS Résolution 12 bits Taux d'échantillonnage 80-250 MS/s Bande passante 20-100 MHz Jusqu'à 4 voies Mode 2 voies IEPE Alimentation USB YE AR Vitesse, précision et capture détaillée IEPE 32 MS TAMPON 12-bit MODÈLE PicoScope 4424 PicoScope 4224 PicoScope 4224 IEPE Entrées Mode sonde passive Mode d'interface IEPE Nombre de voies 4 entrées BNC 2 entrées BNC 2 entrées BNC 2 entrées BNC Bande passante analogique 20 MHz (10 MHz sur une plage de ± 50 mV) CC à 20 MHz 1,6 Hz à 20 MHz (10 MHz sur une plage de ± 50 mV) Plages de tensions De ± 50 mV à ± 100 V De ± 50 mV à ± 20 V Sensibilité 10 mV/div à 20 V/div 10 mV/div à 4 V/div Résolution verticale 12 bits (jusqu’à 16 bits avec l’amélioration de la résolution) 12 bits (jusqu’à 16 bits avec l’amélioration de la résolution) Couplage d'entrée CA ou CC, sous contrôle logiciel CA ou CC, sous contrôle logiciel Impédance d'entrée 1 MΩ || 22 pF 1 MΩ || 22 pF 1 MΩ || 1 nF Protection contre les surtensions ± 200 V ± 100 V Échan till onna ge Bases de temps 100 ns/div à 200 s/div 100 ns/div à 200 s/div Taux d'échantillonnage maximum (temps réel) 1/2 voies : 80 MS/s 3/4 voies : 20 MS/s 80 MS/s 80 MS/s Taille de la mémoire tampon 32 M échantillons partagés entre les voies actives 32 M échantillons partagés entre les voies actives Décl enc hement Sources Toute voie d'entrée Type de déclencheurs voie A, voie B Front avec hystérésis, largeur d'impulsion, impulsion transitoire, perte de niveau, fenêtre Types de déclencheurs EXT Front montant, front descendant Performanc e Précision de la base de temps 50 ppm Précision CC 1 % de déviation maximale Résolution de déclenchement 1 LSB (voie A, voie B) Temps de réarmement du déclenchement 2,5 μs (base de temps la plus rapide) Env ironn ement Plage de températures Fonctionnement : 0 °C à 45 °C Pour la précision mentionnée : 20 °C à 30 °C Entreposage : –20 °C à 60 °C Plage d'humidité Fonctionnement : HR de 5 à 80 %, sans condensation Entreposage : HR de 5 à 95 %, sans condensation Connexion PC USB 2.0. Compatible avec USB 1.1 Système d'exploitation du PC Windows XP, Windows Vista ou Windows 7 Alimentation 5 V à 500 mA max. provenant du port USB Dimensions 200 mm x 140 mm x 38 mm (connecteurs inclus) Poids < 500 g Conformité Normes européennes CEM et LVD RoHS et DEEE , règles FCC Partie 15 Classe A MODÈLE PicoScope 4226 PicoScope 4227 Entrées Nombre de voies 2 entrées BNC Bande passante analogique 50 MHz 100 MHz Plages de tensions De ± 50 mV à ± 20 V Sensibilité 10 mV/div à 4 V/div Résolution verticale 12 bits Couplage d'entrée CA ou CC, sélection logicielle Impédance d'entrée 1 MΩ || 16 pF Protection contre les surtensions ± 100 V Échan till onna ge Bases de temps 100 ns/div à 200 s/div 50 ns/div à 200 s/div Taux d'échantillonnage maximum (temps réel) 1 voie en cours d'utilisation 125 MS/s 1 voie en cours d'utilisation 250 MS/s 2 voies en cours d'utilisation 125 MS/s 2 voies en cours d'utilisation 125 MS/s Fréquence d'échantillonnage maximale (ET S) 10 G S/s Taille de la mémoire tampon 32 MS partagées entre les voies actives Décl enc hement Sources Voie A, voie B, Ext Type de déclencheurs voie A, voie B Front, fenêtre, impulsion, intervalle, perte, transitoire, retardé Types de déclencheurs EXT Front montant/descendant En trée de décl enc hement EXT Connecteur BNC Bande passante 100 MHz Impédance 1 MΩ || 20 pF Plage de tension ± 20 V Plage de seuil De ± 150 mV à ± 20 V Couplage CC Protection contre les surtensions ± 100 V Géné rateur de fonc tions /géné rateur de formes d'ond es arbitraires Connecteur BNC Plage de fréquences du générateur de fonction CC à 100 kHz Formes d'onde du générateur de fonctions Sinusoïdale, carrée, triangulaire, rampante, (sin x)/x gaussienne, demi-sinusoïdale, bruit blanc, niveau CC Taille de la mémoire tampon 8 192 échantillons Fréquence de mise à jour DAC 20 MS/s Résolution du convertisseur numérique-analogique 12 bits Bande passante 100 kHz Précision CC 1 % Plage de sortie De ± 250 mV à ± 2 V Plage de décalage de sortie ± 1 V Max. sortie combinée ± 2.5 V Résistance de sortie 600 Ω Protection contre les surtensions ± 10 V Performanc e Précision de la base de temps 50 ppm Précision CC 1 % de déviation maximale Résolution de déclenchement 1 LSB (voie A, voie B) Temps de réarmement du déclenchement 1 μs (base de temps la plus rapide, déclenchement rapide) Env ironn ement Plage de températures Fonctionnement : 0 °C à 45 °C Pour la précision mentionnée : 20 °C à 30 °C Entreposage : –20 °C à 60 °C Plage d'humidité Fonctionnement : HR de 5 à 80 %, sans condensation Entreposage : HR de 5 à 95 %, sans condensation Connexion PC USB 2.0. Compatible avec USB 1.1 Système d'exploitation du PC Windows XP, Windows Vista ou Windows 7 Alimentation 5 V à 500 mA max. provenant du port USB Dimensions 200 mm x 140 mm x 38 mm (connecteurs inclus) Poids < 500 g Conformité Normes européennes CEM et LVD RoHS et DEEE , règles FCC Partie 15 Classe A Caractéristiques supplémentaires • Tests de limite de masque avec alarmes • Décodage de données série (CAN, I2C etc....) • Filtre passe-bas pour chaque voie • Voies mathématiques • Formes d'ondes de référence • Tampon de formes d'ondes avec 10 000 segments max. et navigateur visuel • Modes de persistance Couleur numérique et Intensité analogique • Mode XY Entrée déclenchement Entrée B Entrée A Générateur de fonctions et de formes d'ondes arbitraires Pico Technology, James House, Colmworth Business Park, St. Neots, Cambridgeshire, PE19 8YP, Royaume-Uni T : +44 (0) 1480 396 395 F : +44 (0) 1480 396 296 E : sales@picotech.com *Prix en vigueur au moment de la publication. Avant de passer commande, veuillez contacter Pico Technology pour connaître les tout derniers tarifs. Sauf erreur ou omission. Copyright © 2011 Pico Technology Ltd. Tous droits réservés. MM002.fr-5 CODE DE COMMANDE DESCRIPTION DE L'ARTICLE Livre sterling USD* EUR* PP493 PicoScope 4424 799 1319 967 PP492 PicoScope 4224 499 824 604 PP695 PicoScope 4224 IEPE 599 989 725 PP671 Kit PicoScope 4226 699 1154 846 PP672 Kit PicoScope 4227 899 1484 1088 Informations concernant la commande www.picotech.com Instruments tout-en-un Les oscilloscopes PC PicoScope série 4000 sont extrêmement polyvalents, et chaque modèle est équipé d'un oscilloscope et d'un analyseur de spectre. PicoScope 4224 IEPE La version IE PE à 2 voies est compatible avec les accéléromètres et microphones IE PE standard, ce qui la rend idéale pour tout type d'applications de mesure, y compris l'analyse du bruit et des vibrations. Confort et rapidité Les oscilloscopes PicoScope série 4000 sont alimentés par l'interface USB 2.0 ; nul besoin de source d'alimentation externe. Le port USB offre également un transfert de données haute vitesse vers votre PC, permettant d'obtenir un affichage haute résolution et réactif. Grâce à des plages d'échantillonnage allant de 80 à 250 MS/s, les oscilloscopes de la série 4000 sont les plus rapides de leur catégorie (avec alimentation par USB et résolution 12 bits). Grande mémoire La mémoire tampon de 32 Méchantillons est "toujours active". Comme le PicoScope série 4000 optimise simultanément la taille de la mémoire tampon et la fréquence de mise à jour de la forme d'onde, il n'y a pas de compromis à faire. Il est désormais possible de capturer chaque forme d'onde en détail sans avoir à s'en soucier. Logiciel avancé Les oscilloscopes sont fournis avec la dernière version de PicoScope pour Windows. PicoScope est simple d'utilisation et permet d'exporter des données sous divers formats graphiques, texte et binaires. Sont également inclus les pilotes Windows et des programmes d'exemple. Générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires Les PicoScope 4226 et 4227 sont fournis avec un générateur de fonctions/formes d'ondes arbitraires. Grâce à une plage de fréquences de 100 kHz, une résolution de 12 bits et un tampon de 8 192 échantillons, ces deux oscilloscopes complètent notre gamme de la série 4000. Oscilloscope Analyseur de spectre Zoom sur la vue d'oscilloscope Générateur de formes d'ondes arbitraires Datasheets en Français FARNELL Ed.081002 DATASHEETS EN FRANCAIS BB2PROD Kit produits pour machine à graver modèle, GRAV’CI2 • 1 perchlorure de fer pour machine à mousse, jerrycan 5 litres • 1 kit de neutralisation perchlorure de fer • 1 détachant perchlorure de fer, pot 100 g • 2 cuvettes en plastique, 220 x 330 x 50 mm • 1 pince plastique pour films et circuits imprimés • 1 sachet de 100 gants jetables en polyéthylène • 1 stylo CIF pour gravure directe, noir BB4PROD Kit produits pour machine à graver modèles BB48 • 1 perchlorure de fer surractivé, jerrycan 5 litres • 1 kit de neutralisation perchlorure de fer • 1 détachant perchlorure de fer, pot de 100 g • 2 cuvettes en plastique, 220 x 330 x 50 mm • 1 pince plastique pour films et circuits imprimés • 1 sachet de 100 gants jetables en polyéthylène • 1 CIF pen for direct etching, black • 1 stylo CIF pour gravure directe, noir U800005 Kit produits pour châssis d’insolation CIP1840 & MI 10-16 • 10 films auto-positifs Posireflex 210 x 297 mm • 1 révélateur-fixateur, dose pour 1 litre • 20 epoxy présensibilisé positif 16/10e, 35 μ, 1F, 200 x 300 mm • révélateur pour plaque, dose pour 1 litre • 2 cuvettes en plastique 230 x 330 x 50 mm • 1 stylo CIF pour gravure directe, noir U800006 Kit produits pour châssis d’insolation modèles DFE 2340 & DFT 3040 • 10 films auto-positifs Posireflex 210 x 297 mm • 1 révélateur-fixateur, dose pour 1 litre • 20 epoxy présensibilisé positif 16/10e, 35 μ, 2F, 200 x 300 mm • 1 stylo CIF pour gravure directe, noir • révélateur pour plaque, dose pour 1 litre • 2 cuvettes en plastique 230 x 330 x 50 mm • 1 cutter avec 1 lame Datasheets en Français FARNELL Ed.081002 V700043 / CIF852 Température air chaud : 100 to 480°C Capteur de température : automatique Elément chauffant : oui Affichage digital de la température : oui Affichage du débit d’air : oui Masse nette du fer : 0.12 kg Débit pompe : 1 à 23 L/mn Puissance totale : 500 W Dimensions (L x l x H) : 188 x 244 x 127 mm Raccordement électrique: 230 V – 50/60Hz EP116 Contre-plaque de perçage Configuration basique Process Référence Qty Contre-plaque de perçage, par 10 perçage EP116 1 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D PIC12F683 Data Sheet 8-Pin Flash-Based, 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers with nanoWatt Technology DS41211D-page ii © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron, dsPIC, KEELOQ, KEELOQ logo, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART, PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC, and SmartShunt are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. AmpLab, FilterLab, Linear Active Thermistor, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB, PS logo, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, CodeGuard, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR, FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Mindi, MiWi, MPASM, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, PICkit, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo, PowerMate, PowerTool, REAL ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O, WiperLock and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2007, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. Printed on recycled paper. Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. • Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. • There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. • Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona, Gresham, Oregon and Mountain View, California. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC® MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs, KEELOQ® code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 1 PIC12F683 8-Pin Flash-Based, 8-Bit CMOS Microcontrollers with nanoWatt Technology High-Performance RISC CPU: • Only 35 instructions to learn: - All single-cycle instructions except branches • Operating speed: - DC – 20 MHz oscillator/clock input - DC – 200 ns instruction cycle • Interrupt capability • 8-level deep hardware stack • Direct, Indirect and Relative Addressing modes Special Microcontroller Features: • Precision Internal Oscillator: - Factory calibrated to ±1%, typical - Software selectable frequency range of 8 MHz to 125 kHz - Software tunable - Two-Speed Start-up mode - Crystal fail detect for critical applications - Clock mode switching during operation for power savings • Power-Saving Sleep mode • Wide operating voltage range (2.0V-5.5V) • Industrial and Extended temperature range • Power-on Reset (POR) • Power-up Timer (PWRT) and Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) • Brown-out Reset (BOR) with software control option • Enhanced Low-Current Watchdog Timer (WDT) with on-chip oscillator (software selectable nominal 268 seconds with full prescaler) with software enable • Multiplexed Master Clear with pull-up/input pin • Programmable code protection • High Endurance Flash/EEPROM cell: - 100,000 write Flash endurance - 1,000,000 write EEPROM endurance - Flash/Data EEPROM Retention: > 40 years Low-Power Features: • Standby Current: - 50 nA @ 2.0V, typical • Operating Current: - 11μA @ 32 kHz, 2.0V, typical - 220μA @ 4 MHz, 2.0V, typical • Watchdog Timer Current: - 1μA @ 2.0V, typical Peripheral Features: • 6 I/O pins with individual direction control: - High current source/sink for direct LED drive - Interrupt-on-pin change - Individually programmable weak pull-ups - Ultra Low-Power Wake-up on GP0 • Analog Comparator module with: - One analog comparator - Programmable on-chip voltage reference (CVREF) module (% of VDD) - Comparator inputs and output externally accessible • A/D Converter: - 10-bit resolution and 4 channels • Timer0: 8-bit timer/counter with 8-bit programmable prescaler • Enhanced Timer1: - 16-bit timer/counter with prescaler - External Timer1 Gate (count enable) - Option to use OSC1 and OSC2 in LP mode as Timer1 oscillator if INTOSC mode selected • Timer2: 8-bit timer/counter with 8-bit period register, prescaler and postscaler • Capture, Compare, PWM module: - 16-bit Capture, max resolution 12.5 ns - Compare, max resolution 200 ns - 10-bit PWM, max frequency 20 kHz • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via two pins Device Program Memory Data Memory I/O 10-bit A/D (ch) Comparators Timers Flash (words) SRAM (bytes) EEPROM (bytes) 8/16-bit PIC12F683 2048 128 256 6 4 1 2/1 PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 2 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 8-Pin Diagram (PDIP, SOIC) 8-Pin Diagram (DFN) 8-Pin Diagram (DFN-S) TABLE 1: 8-PIN SUMMARY I/O Pin Analog Comparators Timer CCP Interrupts Pull-ups Basic GP0 7 AN0 CIN+ — — IOC Y ICSPDAT/ULPWU GP1 6 AN1/VREF CIN- — — IOC Y ICSPCLK GP2 5 AN2 COUT T0CKI CCP1 INT/IOC Y — GP3(1) 4 — — — — IOC Y(2) MCLR/VPP GP4 3 AN3 — T1G — IOC Y OSC2/CLKOUT GP5 2 — — T1CKI — IOC Y OSC1/CLKIN — 1 — — — — — — VDD — 8 — — — — — — VSS Note 1: Input only. 2: Only when pin is configured for external MCLR. VDD GP5/T1CKI/OSC1/CLKIN GP4/AN3/T1G/OSC2/CLKOUT GP3/MCLR/VPP VSS GP0/AN0/CIN+/ICSPDAT/ULPWU GP1/AN1/CIN-/VREF/ICSPCLK GP2/AN2/T0CKI/INT/COUT/CCP1 PIC12F683 1 2 3 4 8 7 6 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PIC12F683 VSS GP0/AN0/CIN+/ICSPDAT/ULPWU GP1/AN1/CIN-/VREF/ICSPCLK GP2/AN2/T0CKI/INT/COUT/CCP1 VDD GP5/TICKI/OSC1/CLKIN GP4/AN3/TIG/OSC2/CLKOUT GP3/MCLR/VPP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PIC12F683 VSS GP0/AN0/CIN+/ICSPDAT/ULPWU GP1/AN1/CIN-/VREF/ICSPCLK GP2/AN2/T0CKI/INT/COUT/CCP1 VDD GP5/TICKI/OSC1/CLKIN GP4/AN3/TIG/OSC2/CLKOUT GP3/MCLR/VPP © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 3 PIC12F683 Table of Contents 1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 5 2.0 Memory Organization................................................................................................................................................................... 7 3.0 Oscillator Module (With Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)....................................................................................................................... 19 4.0 GPIO Port................................................................................................................................................................................... 31 5.0 Timer0 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 41 6.0 Timer1 Module with Gate Control............................................................................................................................................... 44 7.0 Timer2 Module ........................................................................................................................................................................... 49 8.0 Comparator Module.................................................................................................................................................................... 51 9.0 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module ................................................................................................................................ 61 10.0 Data EEPROM Memory ............................................................................................................................................................. 71 11.0 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Module ..................................................................................................................................... 75 12.0 Special Features of the CPU...................................................................................................................................................... 83 13.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 101 14.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 111 15.0 Electrical Specifications............................................................................................................................................................ 115 16.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables....................................................................................................................... 137 17.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 159 Appendix A: Data Sheet Revision History.......................................................................................................................................... 165 Appendix B: Migrating From Other PIC® Devices ............................................................................................................................. 165 The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 171 Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 171 Customer Support.............................................................................................................................................................................. 171 Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 172 Product Identification System ............................................................................................................................................................ 173 TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced. If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via E-mail at docerrors@microchip.com or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We welcome your feedback. Most Current Data Sheet To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at: http://www.microchip.com You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page. The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000). Errata An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision of silicon and revision of document to which it applies. To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following: • Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com • Your local Microchip sales office (see last page) When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are using. Customer Notification System Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 4 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES: © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 5 PIC12F683 1.0 DEVICE OVERVIEW The PIC12F683 is covered by this data sheet. It is available in 8-pin PDIP, SOIC and DFN-S packages. Figure 1-1 shows a block diagram of the PIC12F683 device. Table 1-1 shows the pinout description. FIGURE 1-1: PIC12F683 BLOCK DIAGRAM Flash Program Memory 13 Data Bus 8 Program 14 Bus Instruction Reg Program Counter RAM File Registers Direct Addr 7 RAM Addr 9 Addr MUX Indirect Addr FSR Reg STATUS Reg MUX ALU W Reg Instruction Decode & Control Timing OSC1/CLKIN Generation OSC2/CLKOUT 8 8 8 3 8-Level Stack 128 bytes 2k x 14 (13-bit) Power-up Timer Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset Watchdog Timer MCLR VSS Brown-out Reset 1 Analog Comparator Timer0 Timer1 Data EEPROM 256 bytes EEDATA EEADDR GP0 GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 AN0 AN1 AN2 AN3 CIN- CIN+ COUT T0CKI INT T1CKI Configuration Internal Oscillator VREF T1G VDD 8 Timer2 CCP Block CCP1 CVREF Analog-to-Digital Converter PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 6 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 1-1: PIC12F683 PINOUT DESCRIPTION Name Function Input Type Output Type Description VDD VDD Power — Positive supply GP5/T1CKI/OSC1/CLKIN GP5 TTL CMOS GPIO I/O with prog. pull-up and interrupt-on-change T1CKI ST — Timer1 clock OSC1 XTAL — Crystal/Resonator CLKIN ST — External clock input/RC oscillator connection GP4/AN3/T1G/OSC2/CLKOUT GP4 TTL CMOS GPIO I/O with prog. pull-up and interrupt-on-change AN3 AN — A/D Channel 3 input T1G ST — Timer1 gate OSC2 — XTAL Crystal/Resonator CLKOUT — CMOS FOSC/4 output GP3/MCLR/VPP GP3 TTL — GPIO input with interrupt-on-change MCLR ST — Master Clear with internal pull-up VPP HV — Programming voltage GP2/AN2/T0CKI/INT/COUT/CCP1 GP2 ST CMOS GPIO I/O with prog. pull-up and interrupt-on-change AN2 AN — A/D Channel 2 input T0CKI ST — Timer0 clock input INT ST — External Interrupt COUT — CMOS Comparator 1 output CCP1 ST CMOS Capture input/Compare output/PWM output GP1/AN1/CIN-/VREF/ICSPCLK GP1 TTL CMOS GPIO I/O with prog. pull-up and interrupt-on-change AN1 AN — A/D Channel 1 input CIN- AN — Comparator 1 input VREF AN — External Voltage Reference for A/D ICSPCLK ST — Serial Programming Clock GP0/AN0/CIN+/ICSPDAT/ULPWU GP0 TTL CMOS GPIO I/O with prog. pull-up and interrupt-on-change AN0 AN — A/D Channel 0 input CIN+ AN — Comparator 1 input ICSPDAT ST CMOS Serial Programming Data I/O ULPWU AN — Ultra Low-Power Wake-up input VSS VSS Power — Ground reference Legend: AN = Analog input or output CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output TTL = TTL compatible input ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels HV = High Voltage XTAL = Crystal © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 7 PIC12F683 2.0 MEMORY ORGANIZATION 2.1 Program Memory Organization The PIC12F683 has a 13-bit program counter capable of addressing an 8k x 14 program memory space. Only the first 2k x 14 (0000h-07FFh) for the PIC12F683 is physically implemented. Accessing a location above these boundaries will cause a wraparound within the first 2K x 14 space. The Reset vector is at 0000h and the interrupt vector is at 0004h (see Figure 2-1). FIGURE 2-1: PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR THE PIC12F683 2.2 Data Memory Organization The data memory (see Figure 2-2) is partitioned into two banks, which contain the General Purpose Registers (GPR) and the Special Function Registers (SFR). The Special Function Registers are located in the first 32 locations of each bank. Register locations 20h-7Fh in Bank 0 and A0h-BFh in Bank 1 are General Purpose Registers, implemented as static RAM. Register locations F0h-FFh in Bank 1 point to addresses 70h-7Fh in Bank 0. All other RAM is unimplemented and returns ‘0’ when read. RP0 of the STATUS register is the bank select bit. RP0 0 → Bank 0 is selected PC<12:0> 1 → Bank 1 is selected 13 0000h 0004h 0005h 07FFh 0800h 1FFFh Stack Level 1 Stack Level 8 Reset Vector Interrupt Vector On-chip Program Memory CALL, RETURN RETFIE, RETLW Stack Level 2 Wraps to 0000h-07FFh Note: The IRP and RP1 bits of the STATUS register are reserved and should always be maintained as ‘0’s. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 8 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.2.1 GENERAL PURPOSE REGISTER FILE The register file is organized as 128 x 8 in the PIC12F683. Each register is accessed, either directly or indirectly, through the File Select Register FSR (see Section 2.4 “Indirect Addressing, INDF and FSR Registers”). 2.2.2 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS The Special Function Registers are registers used by the CPU and peripheral functions for controlling the desired operation of the device (see Table 2-1). These registers are static RAM. The special registers can be classified into two sets: core and peripheral. The Special Function Registers associated with the “core” are described in this section. Those related to the operation of the peripheral features are described in the section of that peripheral feature. FIGURE 2-2: DATA MEMORY MAP OF THE PIC12F683 Indirect addr.(1) TMR0 PCL STATUS FSR GPIO PCLATH INTCON PIR1 TMR1L TMR1H T1CON 00h 01h 02h 03h 04h 05h 06h 07h 08h 09h 0Ah 0Bh 0Ch 0Dh 0Eh 0Fh 10h 11h 12h 13h 14h 15h 16h 17h 18h 19h 1Ah 1Bh 1Ch 1Dh 1Eh 1Fh 20h 7Fh BANK 0 Unimplemented data memory locations, read as ‘0’. Note 1: Not a physical register. CMCON0 VRCON General Purpose Registers 96 Bytes EEDAT EEADR EECON2(1) File Address File Address WPU IOC Indirect addr.(1) OPTION_REG PCL STATUS FSR TRISIO PCLATH INTCON PIE1 PCON 80h 81h 82h 83h 84h 85h 86h 87h 88h 89h 8Ah 8Bh 8Ch 8Dh 8Eh 8Fh 90h 91h 92h 93h 94h 95h 96h 97h 98h 99h 9Ah 9Bh 9Ch 9Dh 9Eh 9Fh A0h FFh BANK 1 ADRESH ADCON0 EECON1 ADRESL ANSEL BFh General Purpose Registers 32 Bytes Accesses 70h-7Fh F0h TMR2 T2CON CCPR1L CCPR1H CCP1CON WDTCON CMCON1 OSCCON OSCTUNE PR2 C0h EFh © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 9 PIC12F683 TABLE 2-1: PIC12F683 SPECIAL REGISTERS SUMMARY BANK 0 Addr Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Page Bank 0 00h INDF Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) xxxx xxxx 17, 90 01h TMR0 Timer0 Module Register xxxx xxxx 41, 90 02h PCL Program Counter’s (PC) Least Significant Byte 0000 0000 17, 90 03h STATUS IRP(1) RP1(1) RP0 TO PD Z DC C 0001 1xxx 11, 90 04h FSR Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer xxxx xxxx 17, 90 05h GPIO — — GP5 GP4 GP3 GP2 GP1 GP0 --xx xxxx 31, 90 06h — Unimplemented — — 07h — Unimplemented — — 08h — Unimplemented — — 09h — Unimplemented — — 0Ah PCLATH — — — Write Buffer for upper 5 bits of Program Counter ---0 0000 17, 90 0Bh INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF 0000 0000 13, 90 0Ch PIR1 EEIF ADIF CCP1IF — CMIF OSFIF TMR2IF TMR1IF 000- 0000 15, 90 0Dh — Unimplemented — — 0Eh TMR1L Holding Register for the Least Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 xxxx xxxx 44, 90 0Fh TMR1H Holding Register for the Most Significant Byte of the 16-bit TMR1 xxxx xxxx 44, 90 10h T1CON T1GINV TMR1GE T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 47, 90 11h TMR2 Timer2 Module Register 0000 0000 49, 90 12h T2CON — TOUTPS3 TOUTPS2 TOUTPS1 TOUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0 -000 0000 50, 90 13h CCPR1L Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte xxxx xxxx 76, 90 14h CCPR1H Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte xxxx xxxx 76, 90 15h CCP1CON — — DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 --00 0000 75, 90 16h — Unimplemented — — 17h — Unimplemented — — 18h WDTCON — — — WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0 SWDTEN ---0 1000 97, 90 19h CMCON0 — COUT — CINV CIS CM2 CM1 CM0 -0-0 0000 56, 90 1Ah CMCON1 — — — — — — T1GSS CMSYNC ---- --10 57, 90 1Bh — Unimplemented — — 1Ch — Unimplemented — — 1Dh — Unimplemented — — 1Eh ADRESH Most Significant 8 bits of the left shifted A/D result or 2 bits of right shifted result xxxx xxxx 61,90 1Fh ADCON0 ADFM VCFG — — CHS1 CHS0 GO/DONE ADON 00-- 0000 65,90 Legend: – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’, u = unchanged, x = unknown, q = value depends on condition, shaded = unimplemented Note 1: IRP and RP1 bits are reserved, always maintain these bits clear. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 10 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. TABLE 2-2: PIC12F683 SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS SUMMARY BANK 1 Addr Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Page Bank 1 80h INDF Addressing this location uses contents of FSR to address data memory (not a physical register) xxxx xxxx 17, 90 81h OPTION_REG GPPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 1111 1111 12, 90 82h PCL Program Counter’s (PC) Least Significant Byte 0000 0000 17, 90 83h STATUS IRP(1) RP1(1) RP0 TO PD Z DC C 0001 1xxx 11, 90 84h FSR Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer xxxx xxxx 17, 90 85h TRISIO — — TRISIO5 TRISIO4 TRISIO3 TRISIO2 TRISIO1 TRISIO0 --11 1111 32, 90 86h — Unimplemented — — 87h — Unimplemented — — 88h — Unimplemented — — 89h — Unimplemented — — 8Ah PCLATH — — — Write Buffer for upper 5 bits of Program Counter ---0 0000 17, 90 8Bh INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF 0000 0000 13, 90 8Ch PIE1 EEIE ADIE CCP1IE — CMIE OSFIE TMR2IE TMR1IE 000- 0000 14, 90 8Dh — Unimplemented — — 8Eh PCON — — ULPWUE SBOREN — — POR BOR --01 --qq 16, 90 8Fh OSCCON — IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS(2) HTS LTS SCS -110 x000 20, 90 90h OSCTUNE — — — TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 ---0 0000 24, 90 91h — Unimplemented — — 92h PR2 Timer2 Module Period Register 1111 1111 49, 90 93h — Unimplemented — — 94h — Unimplemented — — 95h WPU(3) — — WPU5 WPU4 — WPU2 WPU1 WPU0 --11 -111 34, 90 96h IOC — — IOC5 IOC4 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 --00 0000 34, 90 97h — Unimplemented — — 98h — Unimplemented — — 99h VRCON VREN — VRR — VR3 VR2 VR1 VR0 0-0- 0000 58, 90 9Ah EEDAT EEDAT7 EEDAT6 EEDAT5 EEDAT4 EEDAT3 EEDAT2 EEDAT1 EEDAT0 0000 0000 71, 90 9Bh EEADR EEADR7 EEADR6 EEADR5 EEADR4 EEADR3 EEADR2 EEADR1 EEADR0 0000 0000 71, 90 9Ch EECON1 — — — — WRERR WREN WR RD ---- x000 72, 91 9Dh EECON2 EEPROM Control Register 2 (not a physical register) ---- ---- 72, 91 9Eh ADRESL Least Significant 2 bits of the left shifted result or 8 bits of the right shifted result xxxx xxxx 66, 91 9Fh ANSEL — ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 -000 1111 33, 91 Legend: – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’, u = unchanged, x = unknown, q = value depends on condition, shaded = unimplemented Note 1: IRP and RP1 bits are reserved, always maintain these bits clear. 2: OSTS bit of the OSCCON register reset to ‘0’ with Dual Speed Start-up and LP, HS or XT selected as the oscillator. 3: GP3 pull-up is enabled when MCLRE is ‘1’ in the Configuration Word register. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 11 PIC12F683 2.2.2.1 STATUS Register The STATUS register, shown in Register 2-1, contains: • Arithmetic status of the ALU • Reset status • Bank select bits for data memory (SRAM) The STATUS register can be the destination for any instruction, like any other register. If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction that affects the Z, DC or C bits, then the write to these three bits is disabled. These bits are set or cleared according to the device logic. Furthermore, the TO and PD bits are not writable. Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS register as destination may be different than intended. For example, CLRF STATUS, will clear the upper three bits and set the Z bit. This leaves the STATUS register as 000u u1uu (where u = unchanged). It is recommended, therefore, that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS register, because these instructions do not affect any Status bits. For other instructions not affecting any Status bits, see the “Instruction Set Summary”. Note 1: Bits IRP and RP1 of the STATUS register are not used by the PIC12F683 and should be maintained as clear. Use of these bits is not recommended, since this may affect upward compatibility with future products. 2: The C and DC bits operate as a Borrow and Digit Borrow out bit, respectively, in subtraction. REGISTER 2-1: STATUS: STATUS REGISTER Reserved Reserved R/W-0 R-1 R-1 R/W-x R/W-x R/W-x IRP RP1 RP0 TO PD Z DC C bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 IRP: This bit is reserved and should be maintained as ‘0’ bit 6 RP1: This bit is reserved and should be maintained as ‘0’ bit 5 RP0: Register Bank Select bit (used for direct addressing) 1 = Bank 1 (80h – FFh) 0 = Bank 0 (00h – 7Fh) bit 4 TO: Time-out bit 1 = After power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction 0 = A WDT time-out occurred bit 3 PD: Power-down bit 1 = After power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction 0 = By execution of the SLEEP instruction bit 2 Z: Zero bit 1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero 0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero bit 1 DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit (ADDWF, ADDLW,SUBLW,SUBWF instructions), For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. 1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result bit 0 C: Carry/Borrow bit(1) (ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW, SUBWF instructions) 1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred 0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred Note 1: For Borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the two’s complement of the second operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high-order or low-order bit of the source register. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 12 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.2.2.2 OPTION Register The OPTION register is a readable and writable register, which contains various control bits to configure: • TMR0/WDT prescaler • External GP2/INT interrupt • TMR0 • Weak pull-ups on GPIO Note: To achieve a 1:1 prescaler assignment for Timer0, assign the prescaler to the WDT by setting PSA bit of the OPTION register to ‘1’ See Section 5.1.3 “Software Programmable Prescaler”. REGISTER 2-2: OPTION_REG: OPTION REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 GPPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GPPU: GPIO Pull-up Enable bit 1 = GPIO pull-ups are disabled 0 = GPIO pull-ups are enabled by individual PORT latch values in WPU register bit 6 INTEDG: Interrupt Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge of INT pin 0 = Interrupt on falling edge of INT pin bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (FOSC/4) bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = Prescaler is assigned to the WDT 0 = Prescaler is assigned to the Timer0 module bit 2-0 PS<2:0>: Prescaler Rate Select bits Note 1: A dedicated 16-bit WDT postscaler is available. See Section 12.6 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)” for more information. 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1 : 2 1 : 4 1 : 8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 1 : 256 1 : 1 1 : 2 1 : 4 1 : 8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 BIT VALUE TIMER0 RATE WDT RATE © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 13 PIC12F683 2.2.2.3 INTCON Register The INTCON register is a readable and writable register, which contains the various enable and flag bits for TMR0 register overflow, GPIO change and external GP2/INT pin interrupts. Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit, GIE of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. REGISTER 2-3: INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GIE: Global Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts 0 = Disables all interrupts bit 6 PEIE: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts 0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts bit 5 T0IE: Timer0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer0 interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer0 interrupt bit 4 INTE: GP2/INT External Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the GP2/INT external interrupt 0 = Disables the GP2/INT external interrupt bit 3 GPIE: GPIO Change Interrupt Enable bit(1) 1 = Enables the GPIO change interrupt 0 = Disables the GPIO change interrupt bit 2 T0IF: Timer0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit(2) 1 = Timer0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Timer0 register did not overflow bit 1 INTF: GP2/INT External Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The GP2/INT external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = The GP2/INT external interrupt did not occur bit 0 GPIF: GPIO Change Interrupt Flag bit 1 = When at least one of the GPIO <5:0> pins changed state (must be cleared in software) 0 = None of the GPIO <5:0> pins have changed state Note 1: IOC register must also be enabled. 2: T0IF bit is set when TMR0 rolls over. TMR0 is unchanged on Reset and should be initialized before clearing T0IF bit. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 14 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.2.2.4 PIE1 Register The PIE1 register contains the interrupt enable bits, as shown in Register 2-4. Note: Bit PEIE of the INTCON register must be set to enable any peripheral interrupt. REGISTER 2-4: PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 EEIE ADIE CCP1IE — CMIE OSFIE TMR2IE TMR1IE bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 EEIE: EE Write Complete Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the EE write complete interrupt 0 = Disables the EE write complete interrupt bit 6 ADIE: A/D Converter (ADC) Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the ADC interrupt 0 = Disables the ADC interrupt bit 5 CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt 0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 CMIE: Comparator Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Comparator 1 interrupt 0 = Disables the Comparator 1 interrupt bit 2 OSFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the oscillator fail interrupt 0 = Disables the oscillator fail interrupt bit 1 TMR2IE: Timer2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer2 to PR2 match interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer2 to PR2 match interrupt bit 0 TMR1IE: Timer1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit 1 = Enables the Timer1 overflow interrupt 0 = Disables the Timer1 overflow interrupt © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 15 PIC12F683 2.2.2.5 PIR1 Register The PIR1 register contains the interrupt flag bits, as shown in Register 2-5. Note: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit, GIE of the INTCON register. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. REGISTER 2-5: PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST REGISTER 1 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 EEIF ADIF CCP1IF — CMIF OSFIF TMR2IF TMR1IF bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 EEIF: EEPROM Write Operation Interrupt Flag bit 1 = The write operation completed (must be cleared in software) 0 = The write operation has not completed or has not been started bit 6 ADIF: A/D Interrupt Flag bit 1 = A/D conversion complete 0 = A/D conversion has not completed or has not been started bit 5 CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Capture mode: 1 = A TMR1 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1 register capture occurred Compare mode: 1 = A TMR1 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = No TMR1 register compare match occurred PWM mode: Unused in this mode bit 4 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 3 CMIF: Comparator Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Comparator 1 output has changed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Comparator 1 output has not changed bit 2 OSFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit 1 = System oscillator failed, clock input has changed to INTOSC (must be cleared in software) 0 = System clock operating bit 1 TMR2IF: Timer2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Timer2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software) 0 = Timer2 to PR2 match has not occurred bit 0 TMR1IF: Timer1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit 1 = Timer1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) 0 = Timer1 has not overflowed PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 16 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.2.2.6 PCON Register The Power Control (PCON) register contains flag bits (see Table 12-2) to differentiate between a: • Power-on Reset (POR) • Brown-out Reset (BOR) • Watchdog Timer Reset (WDT) • External MCLR Reset The PCON register also controls the Ultra Low-Power Wake-up and software enable of the BOR. The PCON register bits are shown in Register 2-6. REGISTER 2-6: PCON: POWER CONTROL REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-x — — ULPWUE SBOREN — — POR BOR bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5 ULPWUE: Ultra Low-Power Wake-Up Enable bit 1 = Ultra Low-Power Wake-up enabled 0 = Ultra Low-Power Wake-up disabled bit 4 SBOREN: Software BOR Enable bit(1) 1 = BOR enabled 0 = BOR disabled bit 3-2 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 1 POR: Power-on Reset Status bit 1 = No Power-on Reset occurred 0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs) bit 0 BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit 1 = No Brown-out Reset occurred 0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset or Brown-out Reset occurs) Note 1: Set BOREN<1:0> = 01 in the Configuration Word register for this bit to control the BOR. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 17 PIC12F683 2.3 PCL and PCLATH The Program Counter (PC) is 13 bits wide. The low byte comes from the PCL register, which is a readable and writable register. The high byte (PC<12:8>) is not directly readable or writable and comes from PCLATH. On any Reset, the PC is cleared. Figure 2-3 shows the two situations for the loading of the PC. The upper example in Figure 2-3 shows how the PC is loaded on a write to PCL (PCLATH<4:0> → PCH). The lower example in Figure 2-3 shows how the PC is loaded during a CALL or GOTO instruction (PCLATH<4:3> → PCH). FIGURE 2-3: LOADING OF PC IN DIFFERENT SITUATIONS 2.3.1 COMPUTED GOTO A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset to the program counter (ADDWF PCL). When performing a table read using a computed GOTO method, care should be exercised if the table location crosses a PCL memory boundary (each 256-byte block). Refer to the Application Note AN556, “Implementing a Table Read” (DS00556). 2.3.2 STACK The PIC12F683 family has an 8-level x 13-bit wide hardware stack (see Figure 2-1). The stack space is not part of either program or data space and the Stack Pointer is not readable or writable. The PC is PUSHed onto the stack when a CALL instruction is executed or an interrupt causes a branch. The stack is POPed in the event of a RETURN, RETLW or a RETFIE instruction execution. PCLATH is not affected by a PUSH or POP operation. The stack operates as a circular buffer. This means that after the stack has been PUSHed eight times, the ninth push overwrites the value that was stored from the first push. The tenth push overwrites the second push (and so on). 2.4 Indirect Addressing, INDF and FSR Registers The INDF register is not a physical register. Addressing the INDF register will cause indirect addressing. Indirect addressing is possible by using the INDF register. Any instruction using the INDF register actually accesses data pointed to by the File Select Register (FSR). Reading INDF itself indirectly will produce 00h. Writing to the INDF register indirectly results in a no operation (although Status bits may be affected). An effective 9-bit address is obtained by concatenating the 8-bit FSR register and the IRP bit of the STATUS register, as shown in Figure 2-4. A simple program to clear RAM location 20h-2Fh using indirect addressing is shown in Example 2-1. EXAMPLE 2-1: INDIRECT ADDRESSING PC 12 8 7 0 5 PCLATH<4:0> PCLATH Instruction with ALU Result GOTO, CALL OPCODE<10:0> 8 PC 12 11 10 0 PCLATH<4:3> 11 PCH PCL 8 7 2 PCLATH PCH PCL PCL as Destination Note 1: There are no Status bits to indicate stack overflow or stack underflow conditions. 2: There are no instructions/mnemonics called PUSH or POP. These are actions that occur from the execution of the CALL, RETURN, RETLW and RETFIE instructions or the vectoring to an interrupt address. MOVLW 0x20 ;initialize pointer MOVWF FSR ;to RAM NEXT CLRF INDF ;clear INDF register INCF FSR ;inc pointer BTFSS FSR,4 ;all done? GOTO NEXT ;no clear next CONTINUE ;yes continue PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 18 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 2-4: DIRECT/INDIRECT ADDRESSING PIC12F683 For memory map detail, see Figure 2-2. Note 1: The RP1 and IRP bits are reserved; always maintain these bits clear. Data Memory Direct Addressing Indirect Addressing Bank Select Location Select RP1(1) RP0 6 From Opcode 0 IRP(1) 7 File Select Register 0 Bank Select Location Select 00 01 10 11 180h 1FFh 00h 7Fh Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 Not Used © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 19 PIC12F683 3.0 OSCILLATOR MODULE (WITH FAIL-SAFE CLOCK MONITOR) 3.1 Overview The Oscillator module has a wide variety of clock sources and selection features that allow it to be used in a wide range of applications while maximizing performance and minimizing power consumption. Figure 3-1 illustrates a block diagram of the Oscillator module. Clock sources can be configured from external oscillators, quartz crystal resonators, ceramic resonators and Resistor-Capacitor (RC) circuits. In addition, the system clock source can be configured from one of two internal oscillators, with a choice of speeds selectable via software. Additional clock features include: • Selectable system clock source between external or internal via software. • Two-Speed Start-up mode, which minimizes latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution. • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) designed to detect a failure of the external clock source (LP, XT, HS, EC or RC modes) and switch automatically to the internal oscillator. The Oscillator module can be configured in one of eight clock modes. 1. EC – External clock with I/O on OSC2/CLKOUT. 2. LP – 32 kHz Low-Power Crystal mode. 3. XT – Medium Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator Oscillator mode. 4. HS – High Gain Crystal or Ceramic Resonator mode. 5. RC – External Resistor-Capacitor (RC) with FOSC/4 output on OSC2/CLKOUT. 6. RCIO – External Resistor-Capacitor (RC) with I/O on OSC2/CLKOUT. 7. INTOSC – Internal oscillator with FOSC/4 output on OSC2 and I/O on OSC1/CLKIN. 8. INTOSCIO – Internal oscillator with I/O on OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT. Clock Source modes are configured by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG). The internal clock can be generated from two internal oscillators. The HFINTOSC is a calibrated high-frequency oscillator. The LFINTOSC is an uncalibrated low-frequency oscillator. FIGURE 3-1: PIC® MCU CLOCK SOURCE BLOCK DIAGRAM (CPU and Peripherals) OSC1 OSC2 Sleep External Oscillator LP, XT, HS, RC, RCIO, EC System Clock Postscaler MUX MUX 8 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 1 MHz 500 kHz 125 kHz 250 kHz IRCF<2:0> 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 31 kHz Power-up Timer (PWRT) FOSC<2:0> (Configuration Word Register) SCS<0> (OSCCON Register) Internal Oscillator (OSCCON Register) Watchdog Timer (WDT) Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) HFINTOSC 8 MHz LFINTOSC 31 kHz INTOSC PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 20 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.2 Oscillator Control The Oscillator Control (OSCCON) register (Figure 3-1) controls the system clock and frequency selection options. The OSCCON register contains the following bits: • Frequency selection bits (IRCF) • Frequency Status bits (HTS, LTS) • System clock control bits (OSTS, SCS) REGISTER 3-1: OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-0 R-1 R-0 R-0 R/W-0 — IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS(1) HTS LTS SCS bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 IRCF<2:0>: Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits 111 = 8MHz 110 = 4 MHz (default) 101 = 2MHz 100 = 1MHz 011 = 500kHz 010 = 250kHz 001 = 125kHz 000 = 31 kHz (LFINTOSC) bit 3 OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1) 1 = Device is running from the external clock defined by FOSC<2:0> of the Configuration Word register 0 = Device is running from the internal oscillator (HFINTOSC or LFINTOSC) bit 2 HTS: HFINTOSC Status bit (High Frequency – 8 MHz to 125 kHz) 1 = HFINTOSC is stable 0 = HFINTOSC is not stable bit 1 LTS: LFINTOSC Stable bit (Low Frequency – 31 kHz) 1 = LFINTOSC is stable 0 = LFINTOSC is not stable bit 0 SCS: System Clock Select bit 1 = Internal oscillator is used for system clock 0 = Clock source defined by FOSC<2:0> of the Configuration Word register Note 1: Bit resets to ‘0’ with Two-Speed Start-up and LP, XT or HS selected as the Oscillator mode or Fail-Safe mode is enabled. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 21 PIC12F683 3.3 Clock Source Modes Clock Source modes can be classified as external or internal. • External Clock modes rely on external circuitry for the clock source. Examples are: Oscillator modules (EC mode), quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators (LP, XT and HS modes) and Resistor-Capacitor (RC) mode circuits. • Internal clock sources are contained internally within the Oscillator module. The Oscillator module has two internal oscillators: the 8 MHz High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) and the 31 kHz Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC). The system clock can be selected between external or internal clock sources via the System Clock Select (SCS) bit of the OSCCON register. See Section 3.6 “Clock Switching” for additional information. 3.4 External Clock Modes 3.4.1 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER (OST) If the Oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or HS modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts 1024 oscillations from OSC1. This occurs following a Power-on Reset (POR) and when the Power-up Timer (PWRT) has expired (if configured), or a wake-up from Sleep. During this time, the program counter does not increment and program execution is suspended. The OST ensures that the oscillator circuit, using a quartz crystal resonator or ceramic resonator, has started and is providing a stable system clock to the Oscillator module. When switching between clock sources, a delay is required to allow the new clock to stabilize. These oscillator delays are shown in Table 3-1. In order to minimize latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution, the Two-Speed Clock Start-up mode can be selected (see Section 3.7 “Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode”). TABLE 3-1: OSCILLATOR DELAY EXAMPLES 3.4.2 EC MODE The External Clock (EC) mode allows an externally generated logic level as the system clock source. When operating in this mode, an external clock source is connected to the OSC1 input and the OSC2 is available for general purpose I/O. Figure 3-2 shows the pin connections for EC mode. The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is disabled when EC mode is selected. Therefore, there is no delay in operation after a Power-on Reset (POR) or wake-up from Sleep. Because the PIC® MCU design is fully static, stopping the external clock input will have the effect of halting the device while leaving all data intact. Upon restarting the external clock, the device will resume operation as if no time had elapsed. FIGURE 3-2: EXTERNAL CLOCK (EC) MODE OPERATION Switch From Switch To Frequency Oscillator Delay Sleep/POR LFINTOSC HFINTOSC 31 kHz 125 kHz to 8 MHz Oscillator Warm-Up Delay (TWARM) Sleep/POR EC, RC DC – 20 MHz 2 instruction cycles LFINTOSC (31 kHz) EC, RC DC – 20 MHz 1 cycle of each Sleep/POR LP, XT, HS 32 kHz to 20 MHz 1024 Clock Cycles (OST) LFINTOSC (31 kHz) HFINTOSC 125 kHz to 8 MHz 1 μs (approx.) OSC1/CLKIN I/O OSC2/CLKOUT(1) Clock from Ext. System PIC® MCU Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in the Device Overview. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 22 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.4.3 LP, XT, HS MODES The LP, XT and HS modes support the use of quartz crystal resonators or ceramic resonators connected to OSC1 and OSC2 (Figure 3-3). The mode selects a low, medium or high gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier to support various resonator types and speed. LP Oscillator mode selects the lowest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. LP mode current consumption is the least of the three modes. This mode is designed to drive only 32.768 kHz tuning-fork type crystals (watch crystals). XT Oscillator mode selects the intermediate gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. XT mode current consumption is the medium of the three modes. This mode is best suited to drive resonators with a medium drive level specification. HS Oscillator mode selects the highest gain setting of the internal inverter-amplifier. HS mode current consumption is the highest of the three modes. This mode is best suited for resonators that require a high drive setting. Figure 3-3 and Figure 3-4 show typical circuits for quartz crystal and ceramic resonators, respectively. FIGURE 3-3: QUARTZ CRYSTAL OPERATION (LP, XT OR HS MODE) FIGURE 3-4: CERAMIC RESONATOR OPERATION (XT OR HS MODE) Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for quartz crystals with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 MΩ to 10 MΩ). C1 C2 Quartz RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU Crystal OSC2/CLKOUT Note 1: Quartz crystal characteristics vary according to type, package and manufacturer. The user should consult the manufacturer data sheets for specifications and recommended application. 2: Always verify oscillator performance over the VDD and temperature range that is expected for the application. 3: For oscillator design assistance, reference the following Microchip Applications Notes: • AN826, “Crystal Oscillator Basics and Crystal Selection for rfPIC® and PIC® Devices” (DS00826) • AN849, “Basic PIC® Oscillator Design” (DS00849) • AN943, “Practical PIC® Oscillator Analysis and Design” (DS00943) • AN949, “Making Your Oscillator Work” (DS00949) Note 1: A series resistor (RS) may be required for ceramic resonators with low drive level. 2: The value of RF varies with the Oscillator mode selected (typically between 2 MΩ to 10 MΩ). 3: An additional parallel feedback resistor (RP) may be required for proper ceramic resonator operation. C1 C2 Ceramic RS(1) OSC1/CLKIN RF(2) Sleep To Internal Logic PIC® MCU RP(3) Resonator OSC2/CLKOUT © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 23 PIC12F683 3.4.4 EXTERNAL RC MODES The external Resistor-Capacitor (RC) modes support the use of an external RC circuit. This allows the designer maximum flexibility in frequency choice while keeping costs to a minimum when clock accuracy is not required. There are two modes: RC and RCIO. In RC mode, the RC circuit connects to OSC1. OSC2/CLKOUT outputs the RC oscillator frequency divided by 4. This signal may be used to provide a clock for external circuitry, synchronization, calibration, test or other application requirements. Figure 3-5 shows the external RC mode connections. FIGURE 3-5: EXTERNAL RC MODES In RCIO mode, the RC circuit is connected to OSC1. OSC2 becomes an additional general purpose I/O pin. The RC oscillator frequency is a function of the supply voltage, the resistor (REXT) and capacitor (CEXT) values and the operating temperature. Other factors affecting the oscillator frequency are: • threshold voltage variation • component tolerances • packaging variations in capacitance The user also needs to take into account variation due to tolerance of external RC components used. 3.5 Internal Clock Modes The Oscillator module has two independent, internal oscillators that can be configured or selected as the system clock source. 1. The HFINTOSC (High-Frequency Internal Oscillator) is factory calibrated and operates at 8 MHz. The frequency of the HFINTOSC can be user-adjusted via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 3-2). 2. The LFINTOSC (Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator) is uncalibrated and operates at 31 kHz. The system clock speed can be selected via software using the Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits IRCF<2:0> of the OSCCON register. The system clock can be selected between external or internal clock sources via the System Clock Selection (SCS) bit of the OSCCON register. See Section 3.6 “Clock Switching” for more information. 3.5.1 INTOSC AND INTOSCIO MODES The INTOSC and INTOSCIO modes configure the internal oscillators as the system clock source when the device is programmed using the oscillator selection or the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG). See Section 12.0 “Special Features of the CPU” for more information. In INTOSC mode, OSC1/CLKIN is available for general purpose I/O. OSC2/CLKOUT outputs the selected internal oscillator frequency divided by 4. The CLKOUT signal may be used to provide a clock for external circuitry, synchronization, calibration, test or other application requirements. In INTOSCIO mode, OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are available for general purpose I/O. 3.5.2 HFINTOSC The High-Frequency Internal Oscillator (HFINTOSC) is a factory calibrated 8 MHz internal clock source. The frequency of the HFINTOSC can be altered via software using the OSCTUNE register (Register 3-2). The output of the HFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 3-1). One of seven frequencies can be selected via software using the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. See Section 3.5.4 “Frequency Select Bits (IRCF)” for more information. The HFINTOSC is enabled by selecting any frequency between 8 MHz and 125 kHz by setting the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register ≠ 000. Then, set the System Clock Source (SCS) bit of the OSCCON register to ‘1’ or enable Two-Speed Start-up by setting the IESO bit in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG) to ‘1’. The HF Internal Oscillator (HTS) bit of the OSCCON register indicates whether the HFINTOSC is stable or not. OSC2/CLKOUT(1) CEXT REXT PIC® MCU OSC1/CLKIN FOSC/4 or Internal Clock VDD VSS Recommended values: 10 kΩ ≤ REXT ≤ 100 kΩ, <3V 3 kΩ ≤ REXT ≤ 100 kΩ, 3-5V CEXT > 20 pF, 2-5V Note 1: Alternate pin functions are listed in the Device Overview. 2: Output depends upon RC or RCIO clock mode. I/O(2) PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 24 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.5.2.1 OSCTUNE Register The HFINTOSC is factory calibrated but can be adjusted in software by writing to the OSCTUNE register (Register 3-2). The default value of the OSCTUNE register is ‘0’. The value is a 5-bit two’s complement number. When the OSCTUNE register is modified, the HFINTOSC frequency will begin shifting to the new frequency. Code execution continues during this shift. There is no indication that the shift has occurred. OSCTUNE does not affect the LFINTOSC frequency. Operation of features that depend on the LFINTOSC clock source frequency, such as the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT), Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) and peripherals, are not affected by the change in frequency. REGISTER 3-2: OSCTUNE: OSCILLATOR TUNING REGISTER U-0 U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — — TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-5 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 4-0 TUN<4:0>: Frequency Tuning bits 01111 = Maximum frequency 01110 = • • • 00001 = 00000 = Oscillator module is running at the calibrated frequency. 11111 = • • • 10000 = Minimum frequency © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 25 PIC12F683 3.5.3 LFINTOSC The Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) is an uncalibrated 31 kHz internal clock source. The output of the LFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 3-1). Select 31 kHz, via software, using the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. See Section 3.5.4 “Frequency Select Bits (IRCF)” for more information. The LFINTOSC is also the frequency for the Power-up Timer (PWRT), Watchdog Timer (WDT) and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM). The LFINTOSC is enabled by selecting 31 kHz (IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register = 000) as the system clock source (SCS bit of the OSCCON register = 1), or when any of the following are enabled: • Two-Speed Start-up IESO bit of the Configuration Word register = 1 and IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register = 000 • Power-up Timer (PWRT) • Watchdog Timer (WDT) • Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) The LF Internal Oscillator (LTS) bit of the OSCCON register indicates whether the LFINTOSC is stable or not. 3.5.4 FREQUENCY SELECT BITS (IRCF) The output of the 8 MHz HFINTOSC and 31 kHz LFINTOSC connects to a postscaler and multiplexer (see Figure 3-1). The Internal Oscillator Frequency Select bits IRCF<2:0> of the OSCCON register select the frequency output of the internal oscillators. One of eight frequencies can be selected via software: • 8 MHz • 4 MHz (Default after Reset) • 2 MHz • 1 MHz • 500 kHz • 250 kHz • 125 kHz • 31 kHz (LFINTOSC) 3.5.5 HF AND LF INTOSC CLOCK SWITCH TIMING When switching between the LFINTOSC and the HFINTOSC, the new oscillator may already be shut down to save power (see Figure 3-6). If this is the case, there is a delay after the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified before the frequency selection takes place. The LTS and HTS bits of the OSCCON register will reflect the current active status of the LFINTOSC and HFINTOSC oscillators. The timing of a frequency selection is as follows: 1. IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register are modified. 2. If the new clock is shut down, a clock start-up delay is started. 3. Clock switch circuitry waits for a falling edge of the current clock. 4. CLKOUT is held low and the clock switch circuitry waits for a rising edge in the new clock. 5. CLKOUT is now connected with the new clock. LTS and HTS bits of the OSCCON register are updated as required. 6. Clock switch is complete. See Figure 3-1 for more details. If the internal oscillator speed selected is between 8 MHz and 125 kHz, there is no start-up delay before the new frequency is selected. This is because the old and new frequencies are derived from the HFINTOSC via the postscaler and multiplexer. Start-up delay specifications are located in the Electrical Specifications Chapter of this data sheet, under AC Specifications (Oscillator Module). Note: Following any Reset, the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register are set to ‘110’ and the frequency selection is set to 4 MHz. The user can modify the IRCF bits to select a different frequency. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 26 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-6: INTERNAL OSCILLATOR SWITCH TIMING HFINTOSC LFINTOSC IRCF <2:0> System Clock HFINTOSC LFINTOSC IRCF <2:0> System Clock HF LF(1) ≠ 0 = 0 ≠ 0 = 0 Start-up Time 2-cycle Sync Running 2-cycle Sync Running HFINTOSC LFINTOSC (FSCM and WDT disabled) Note 1: When going from LF to HF. HFINTOSC LFINTOSC (Either FSCM or WDT enabled) LFINTOSC HFINTOSC IRCF <2:0> System Clock = 0 ≠ 0 Start-up Time 2-cycle Sync Running LFINTOSC HFINTOSC LFINTOSC turns off unless WDT or FSCM is enabled © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 27 PIC12F683 3.6 Clock Switching The system clock source can be switched between external and internal clock sources via software using the System Clock Select (SCS) bit of the OSCCON register. 3.6.1 SYSTEM CLOCK SELECT (SCS) BIT The System Clock Select (SCS) bit of the OSCCON register selects the system clock source that is used for the CPU and peripherals. • When the SCS bit of the OSCCON register = 0, the system clock source is determined by configuration of the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG). • When the SCS bit of the OSCCON register = 1, the system clock source is chosen by the internal oscillator frequency selected by the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. After a Reset, the SCS bit of the OSCCON register is always cleared. 3.6.2 OSCILLATOR START-UP TIME-OUT STATUS (OSTS) BIT The Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status (OSTS) bit of the OSCCON register indicates whether the system clock is running from the external clock source, as defined by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG), or from the internal clock source. In particular, OSTS indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has timed out for LP, XT or HS modes. 3.7 Two-Speed Clock Start-up Mode Two-Speed Start-up mode provides additional power savings by minimizing the latency between external oscillator start-up and code execution. In applications that make heavy use of the Sleep mode, Two-Speed Start-up will remove the external oscillator start-up time from the time spent awake and can reduce the overall power consumption of the device. This mode allows the application to wake-up from Sleep, perform a few instructions using the INTOSC as the clock source and go back to Sleep without waiting for the primary oscillator to become stable. When the Oscillator module is configured for LP, XT or HS modes, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) is enabled (see Section 3.4.1 “Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)”). The OST will suspend program execution until 1024 oscillations are counted. Two-Speed Start-up mode minimizes the delay in code execution by operating from the internal oscillator as the OST is counting. When the OST count reaches 1024 and the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register is set, program execution switches to the external oscillator. 3.7.1 TWO-SPEED START-UP MODE CONFIGURATION Two-Speed Start-up mode is configured by the following settings: • IESO (of the Configuration Word register) = 1; Internal/External Switchover bit (Two-Speed Start-up mode enabled). • SCS (of the OSCCON register) = 0. • FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG) configured for LP, XT or HS mode. Two-Speed Start-up mode is entered after: • Power-on Reset (POR) and, if enabled, after Power-up Timer (PWRT) has expired, or • Wake-up from Sleep. If the external clock oscillator is configured to be anything other than LP, XT or HS mode, then Two-Speed Start-up is disabled. This is because the external clock oscillator does not require any stabilization time after POR or an exit from Sleep. 3.7.2 TWO-SPEED START-UP SEQUENCE 1. Wake-up from Power-on Reset or Sleep. 2. Instructions begin execution by the internal oscillator at the frequency set in the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. 3. OST enabled to count 1024 clock cycles. 4. OST timed out, wait for falling edge of the internal oscillator. 5. OSTS is set. 6. System clock held low until the next falling edge of new clock (LP, XT or HS mode). 7. System clock is switched to external clock source. Note: Any automatic clock switch, which may occur from Two-Speed Start-up or Fail-Safe Clock Monitor, does not update the SCS bit of the OSCCON register. The user can monitor the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to determine the current system clock source. Note: Executing a SLEEP instruction will abort the oscillator start-up time and will cause the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to remain clear. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 28 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.7.3 CHECKING TWO-SPEED CLOCK STATUS Checking the state of the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register will confirm if the microcontroller is running from the external clock source, as defined by the FOSC<2:0> bits in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG), or the internal oscillator. FIGURE 3-7: TWO-SPEED START-UP 0 1 1022 1023 PC + 1 TOST HFINTOSC OSC1 OSC2 Program Counter System Clock PC - N PC © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 29 PIC12F683 3.8 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the device to continue operating should the external oscillator fail. The FSCM can detect oscillator failure any time after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The FSCM is enabled by setting the FCMEN bit in the Configuration Word register (CONFIG). The FSCM is applicable to all external oscillator modes (LP, XT, HS, EC, RC and RCIO). FIGURE 3-8: FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM 3.8.1 FAIL-SAFE DETECTION The FSCM module detects a failed oscillator by comparing the external oscillator to the FSCM sample clock. The sample clock is generated by dividing the LFINTOSC by 64. See Figure 3-8. Inside the fail detector block is a latch. The external clock sets the latch on each falling edge of the external clock. The sample clock clears the latch on each rising edge of the sample clock. A failure is detected when an entire half-cycle of the sample clock elapses before the primary clock goes low. 3.8.2 FAIL-SAFE OPERATION When the external clock fails, the FSCM switches the device clock to an internal clock source and sets the bit flag OSFIF of the PIR1 register. Setting this flag will generate an interrupt if the OSFIE bit of the PIE1 register is also set. The device firmware can then take steps to mitigate the problems that may arise from a failed clock. The system clock will continue to be sourced from the internal clock source until the device firmware successfully restarts the external oscillator and switches back to external operation. The internal clock source chosen by the FSCM is determined by the IRCF<2:0> bits of the OSCCON register. This allows the internal oscillator to be configured before a failure occurs. 3.8.3 FAIL-SAFE CONDITION CLEARING The Fail-Safe condition is cleared after a Reset, executing a SLEEP instruction or toggling the SCS bit of the OSCCON register. When the SCS bit is toggled, the OST is restarted. While the OST is running, the device continues to operate from the INTOSC selected in OSCCON. When the OST times out, the Fail-Safe condition is cleared and the device will be operating from the external clock source. The Fail-Safe condition must be cleared before the OSFIF flag can be cleared. 3.8.4 RESET OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP The FSCM is designed to detect an oscillator failure after the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) has expired. The OST is used after waking up from Sleep and after any type of Reset. The OST is not used with the EC or RC Clock modes so that the FSCM will be active as soon as the Reset or wake-up has completed. When the FSCM is enabled, the Two-Speed Start-up is also enabled. Therefore, the device will always be executing code while the OST is operating. External LFINTOSC ÷ 64 S R Q 31 kHz (~32 μs) 488 Hz (~2 ms) Clock Monitor Latch Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Clock Q Sample Clock Note: Due to the wide range of oscillator start-up times, the Fail-Safe circuit is not active during oscillator start-up (i.e., after exiting Reset or Sleep). After an appropriate amount of time, the user should check the OSTS bit of the OSCCON register to verify the oscillator start-up and that the system clock switchover has successfully completed. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 30 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. FIGURE 3-9: FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM TABLE 3-2: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CLOCK SOURCES Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Value on all other Resets(1) CONFIG(2) CPD CP MCLRE PWRTE WDTE FOSC2 FOSC1 FOSC0 — — INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF 0000 0000 0000 000x OSCCON — IRCF2 IRCF1 IRCF0 OSTS HTS LTS SCS -110 x000 -110 x000 OSCTUNE — — — TUN4 TUN3 TUN2 TUN1 TUN0 ---0 0000 ---u uuuu PIE1 EEIE ADIE CCP1IE — CMIE OSFIE TMR2IE TMR1IE 000- 0000 000- 0000 PIR1 EEIF ADIF CCP1IF — CMIF OSFIF TMR2IF TMR1IF 000- 0000 000- 0000 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by oscillators. Note 1: Other (non Power-up) Resets include MCLR Reset and Watchdog Timer Reset during normal operation. 2: See Configuration Word register (Register 12-1) for operation of all register bits. OSCFIF System Clock Output Sample Clock Failure Detected Oscillator Failure Note: The system clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this example have been chosen for clarity. (Q) Test Test Test Clock Monitor Output © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 31 PIC12F683 4.0 GPIO PORT There are as many as six general purpose I/O pins available. Depending on which peripherals are enabled, some or all of the pins may not be available as general purpose I/O. In general, when a peripheral is enabled, the associated pin may not be used as a general purpose I/O pin. 4.1 GPIO and the TRISIO Registers GPIO is a 6-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISIO. Setting a TRISIO bit (= 1) will make the corresponding GPIO pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in a High-Impedance mode). Clearing a TRISIO bit (= 0) will make the corresponding GPIO pin an output (i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). An exception is GP3, which is input only and its TRISIO bit will always read as ‘1’. Example 4-1 shows how to initialize GPIO. Reading the GPIO register reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch. GP3 reads ‘0’ when MCLRE = 1. The TRISIO register controls the direction of the GPIO pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user must ensure the bits in the TRISIO register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog input always read ‘0’. EXAMPLE 4-1: INITIALIZING GPIO Note: The ANSEL and CMCON0 registers must be initialized to configure an analog channel as a digital input. Pins configured as analog inputs will read ‘0’. BANKSEL GPIO ; CLRF GPIO ;Init GPIO MOVLW 07h ;Set GP<2:0> to MOVWF CMCON0 ;digital I/O BANKSEL ANSEL ; CLRF ANSEL ;digital I/O MOVLW 0Ch ;Set GP<3:2> as inputs MOVWF TRISIO ;and set GP<5:4,1:0> ;as outputs REGISTER 4-1: GPIO: GENERAL PURPOSE I/O REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-x R/W-0 R-x R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — GP5 GP4 GP3 GP2 GP1 GP0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-0 GP<5:0>: GPIO I/O Pin bit 1 = Port pin is > VIH 0 = Port pin is < VIL PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 32 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.2 Additional Pin Functions Every GPIO pin on the PIC12F683 has an interrupt-on-change option and a weak pull-up option. GP0 has an Ultra Low-Power Wake-up option. The next three sections describe these functions. 4.2.1 ANSEL REGISTER The ANSEL register is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSEL bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as ‘0’ and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSEL bits has no affect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. 4.2.2 WEAK PULL-UPS Each of the GPIO pins, except GP3, has an individually configurable internal weak pull-up. Control bits WPUx enable or disable each pull-up. Refer to Register 4-4. Each weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are disabled on a Power-on Reset by the GPPU bit of the OPTION register). A weak pull-up is automatically enabled for GP3 when configured as MCLR and disabled when GP3 is an I/O. There is no software control of the MCLR pull-up. 4.2.3 INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE Each of the GPIO pins is individually configurable as an interrupt-on-change pin. Control bits IOCx enable or disable the interrupt function for each pin. Refer to Register 4-5. The interrupt-on-change is disabled on a Power-on Reset. For enabled interrupt-on-change pins, the values are compared with the old value latched on the last read of GPIO. The ‘mismatch’ outputs of the last read are OR’d together to set the GPIO Change Interrupt Flag bit (GPIF) in the INTCON register (Register 2-3). This interrupt can wake the device from Sleep. The user, in the Interrupt Service Routine, clears the interrupt by: a) Any read or write of GPIO. This will end the mismatch condition, then, b) Clear the flag bit GPIF. A mismatch condition will continue to set flag bit GPIF. Reading GPIO will end the mismatch condition and allow flag bit GPIF to be cleared. The latch holding the last read value is not affected by a MCLR nor Brown-out Reset. After these resets, the GPIF flag will continue to be set if a mismatch is present. REGISTER 4-2: TRISIO GPIO TRI-STATE REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — TRISIO5(2,3) TRISIO4(2) TRISIO3(1) TRISIO2 TRISIO1 TRISIO0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5:4 TRISIO<5:4>: GPIO Tri-State Control bit 1 = GPIO pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = GPIO pin configured as an output bit 3 TRISIO<3>: GPIO Tri-State Control bit Input only bit 2:0 TRISIO<2:0>: GPIO Tri-State Control bit 1 = GPIO pin configured as an input (tri-stated) 0 = GPIO pin configured as an output Note 1: TRISIO<3> always reads ‘1’. 2: TRISIO<5:4> always reads ‘1’ in XT, HS and LP OSC modes. 3: TRISIO<5> always reads ‘1’ in RC and RCIO and EC modes. Note: If a change on the I/O pin should occur when any GPIO operation is being executed, then the GPIF interrupt flag may not get set. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 33 PIC12F683 REGISTER 4-3: ANSEL: ANALOG SELECT REGISTER U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 6-4 ADCS<2:0>: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits 000 = FOSC/2 001 = FOSC/8 010 = FOSC/32 x11 = FRC (clock derived from a dedicated internal oscillator = 500 kHz max) 100 = FOSC/4 101 = FOSC/16 110 = FOSC/64 bit 3-0 ANS<3:0>: Analog Select bits Analog select between analog or digital function on pins AN<3:0>, respectively. 1 = Analog input. Pin is assigned as analog input(1). 0 = Digital I/O. Pin is assigned to port or special function. Note 1: Setting a pin to an analog input automatically disables the digital input circuitry, weak pull-ups and interrupt-on-change, if available. The corresponding TRIS bit must be set to Input mode in order to allow external control of the voltage on the pin. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 34 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. REGISTER 4-4: WPU: WEAK PULL-UP REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 U-0 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 — — WPU5 WPU4 — WPU2 WPU1 WPU0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-4 WPU<5:4>: Weak Pull-up Control bits 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled bit 3 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 2-0 WPU<2:0>: Weak Pull-up Control bits 1 = Pull-up enabled 0 = Pull-up disabled Note 1: Global GPPU must be enabled for individual pull-ups to be enabled. 2: The weak pull-up device is automatically disabled if the pin is in Output mode (TRISIO = 0). 3: The GP3 pull-up is enabled when configured as MCLR and disabled as an I/O in the Configuration Word. 4: WPU<5:4> always reads ‘1’ in XT, HS and LP OSC modes. REGISTER 4-5: IOC: INTERRUPT-ON-CHANGE GPIO REGISTER U-0 U-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 R/W-0 — — IOC5 IOC4 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7-6 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ bit 5-0 IOC<5:0>: Interrupt-on-change GPIO Control bits 1 = Interrupt-on-change enabled 0 = Interrupt-on-change disabled Note 1: Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) must be enabled for individual interrupts to be recognized. 2: IOC<5:4> always reads ‘0’ in XT, HS and LP OSC modes. © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 35 PIC12F683 4.2.4 ULTRA LOW-POWER WAKE-UP The Ultra Low-Power Wake-up (ULPWU) on GP0 allows a slow falling voltage to generate an interrupt- on-change on GP0 without excess current consumption. The mode is selected by setting the ULPWUE bit of the PCON register. This enables a small current sink which can be used to discharge a capacitor on GP0. To use this feature, the GP0 pin is configured to output ‘1’ to charge the capacitor, interrupt-on-change for GP0 is enabled and GP0 is configured as an input. The ULPWUE bit is set to begin the discharge and a SLEEP instruction is performed. When the voltage on GP0 drops below VIL, an interrupt will be generated which will cause the device to wake-up. Depending on the state of the GIE bit of the INTCON register, the device will either jump to the interrupt vector (0004h) or execute the next instruction when the interrupt event occurs. See Section 4.2.3 “Interrupt-on-Change” and Section 12.4.3 “GPIO Interrupt” for more information. This feature provides a low-power technique for periodically waking up the device from Sleep. The time-out is dependent on the discharge time of the RC circuit on GP0. See Example 4-2 for initializing the Ultra Low-Power Wake-up module. The series resistor provides overcurrent protection for the GP0 pin and can allow for software calibration of the time-out (see Figure 4-1). A timer can be used to measure the charge time and discharge time of the capacitor. The charge time can then be adjusted to provide the desired interrupt delay. This technique will compensate for the affects of temperature, voltage and component accuracy. The Ultra Low-Power Wake-up peripheral can also be configured as a simple Programmable Low-Voltage Detect or temperature sensor. EXAMPLE 4-2: ULTRA LOW-POWER WAKE-UP INITIALIZATION Note: For more information, refer to the Application Note AN879, “Using the Microchip Ultra Low-Power Wake-up Module” (DS00879). BANKSEL CMCON0 ; MOVLW H’7’ ;Turn off MOVWF CMCON0 ;comparators BANKSEL ANSEL ; BCF ANSEL,0 ;RA0 to digital I/O BCF TRISA,0 ;Output high to BANKSEL PORTA ; BSF PORTA,0 ;charge capacitor CALL CapDelay ; BANKSEL PCON ; BSF PCON,ULPWUE ;Enable ULP Wake-up BSF IOCA,0 ;Select RA0 IOC BSF TRISA,0 ;RA0 to input MOVLW B’10001000’ ;Enable interrupt MOVWF INTCON ; and clear flag SLEEP ;Wait for IOC NOP ; PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 36 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.2.5 PIN DESCRIPTIONS AND DIAGRAMS Each GPIO pin is multiplexed with other functions. The pins and their combined functions are briefly described here. For specific information about individual functions such as the comparator or the ADC, refer to the appropriate section in this data sheet. 4.2.5.1 GP0/AN0/CIN+/ICSPDAT/ULPWU Figure 4-1 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP0 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose I/O • an analog input for the ADC • an analog input to the comparator • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ data • an analog input to the Ultra Low-Power Wake-up FIGURE 4-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP0 I/O pin VDD VSS D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q VDD D EN Q D EN Q Weak RD GPIO RD WR WR RD WR IOC RD IOC Interrupt-on- To Comparator Analog Input Mode(1) GPPU Analog Input Mode(1) Change Q3 WR RD 0 1 IULP WPU Data Bus WPU GPIO TRISIO TRISIO GPIO Note 1: Comparator mode and ANSEL determines Analog Input mode. VT ULPWUE -+ VSS To A/D Converter © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 37 PIC12F683 4.2.5.2 GP1/AN1/CIN-/VREF/ICSPCLK Figure 4-2 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP1 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose I/O • an analog input for the ADC • a analog input to the comparator • a voltage reference input for the ADC • In-Circuit Serial Programming clock FIGURE 4-2: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP1 4.2.5.3 GP2/AN2/T0CKI/INT/COUT/CCP1 Figure 4-3 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP2 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose I/O • an analog input for the ADC • the clock input for Timer0 • an external edge triggered interrupt • a digital output from the Comparator • a digital input/output for the CCP (refer to Section 11.0 “Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Module”). FIGURE 4-3: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP2 I/O pin VDD VSS D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q VDD D EN Q D EN Q Weak Data WR WPU RD WPU RD GPIO RD GPIO WR GPIO WR TRISIO RD TRISIO WR IOC RD IOC Interrupt-on- To Comparator Analog Input Mode(1) GPPU Analog Input Mode(1) change Bus Note 1: Comparator mode and ANSEL determines Analog Input mode. Q3 To A/D Converter I/O pin VDD VSS D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q VDD D EN Q D EN Q Weak Analog Input Mode Data WR WPU RD WPU RD GPIO WR GPIO WR TRISIO RD TRISIO WR IOC RD IOC To A/D Converter 0 COUT 1 COUT Enable To INT To Timer0 Analog Input Mode GPPU RD GPIO Analog Input Mode Interrupt-onchange Bus Q3 Note 1: Comparator mode and ANSEL determines Analog Input mode. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 38 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.2.5.4 GP3/MCLR/VPP Figure 4-4 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP3 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose input • as Master Clear Reset with weak pull-up FIGURE 4-4: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP3 4.2.5.5 GP4/AN3/T1G/OSC2/CLKOUT Figure 4-5 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP4 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose I/O • an analog input for the ADC • a Timer1 gate input • a crystal/resonator connection • a clock output FIGURE 4-5: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP4 Input VSS D CK Q Q D EN Q Data RD GPIO RD WR IOC RD Reset MCLRE RD VSS D EN Q MCLRE VDD MCLRE Weak Interrupt-onchange pin GPIO IOC Bus TRISIO Q3 I/O pin VDD VSS D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q VDD D EN Q D EN Q Weak Analog Input Mode Data WR WPU RD WPU RD GPIO WR GPIO WR TRISIO RD TRISIO WR IOC RD IOC FOSC/4 To A/D Converter Oscillator Circuit OSC1 CLKOUT 0 1 CLKOUT Enable Enable Analog Input Mode GPPU RD GPIO To T1G INTOSC/ RC/EC(2) CLK(1) Modes CLKOUT Enable Note 1: CLK modes are XT, HS, LP, optional LP oscillator and CLKOUT Enable. 2: With CLKOUT option. Interrupt-onchange Bus Q3 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 39 PIC12F683 4.2.5.6 GP5/T1CKI/OSC1/CLKIN Figure 4-6 shows the diagram for this pin. The GP5 pin is configurable to function as one of the following: • a general purpose I/O • a Timer1 clock input • a crystal/resonator connection • a clock input FIGURE 4-6: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF GP5 TABLE 4-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH GPIO I/O pin VDD VSS D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q D CK Q Q VDD D EN Q D EN Q Weak Data WR WPU RD WPU RD GPIO WR GPIO WR TRISIO RD TRISIO WR IOC RD IOC To Timer1 or CLKGEN INTOSC Mode RD GPIO INTOSC Mode GPPU OSC2 (1) Note 1: Timer1 LP oscillator enabled. 2: When using Timer1 with LP oscillator, the Schmitt Trigger is bypassed. TMR1LPEN(1) Interrupt-onchange Oscillator Circuit Bus Q3 Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Value on all other Resets ANSEL — ADCS2 ADCS1 ADCS0 ANS3 ANS2 ANS1 ANS0 -000 1111 -000 1111 CCP1CON — — DC1B1 DC1B0 CCP1M3 CCP1M2 CCP1M1 CCP1M0 --00 0000 --00 0000 CMCON0 — COUT — CINV CIS CM2 CM1 CM0 -0-0 0000 -0-0 0000 PCON — — ULPWUE SBOREN — — POR BOR --01 --qq --0u --uu INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF 0000 0000 0000 000x IOC — — IOC5 IOC4 IOC3 IOC2 IOC1 IOC0 --00 0000 --00 0000 OPTION_REG GPPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 1111 1111 1111 1111 GPIO — — GP5 GP4 GP3 GP2 GP1 GP0 --xx xxxx --x0 x000 T1CON T1GINV TMR1GE T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC TMR1CS TMR1ON 0000 0000 0000 0000 TRISIO — — TRISIO5 TRISIO4 TRISIO3 TRISIO2 TRISIO1 TRISIO0 --11 1111 --11 1111 WPU — — WPU5 WPU4 — WPU2 WPU1 WPU0 --11 -111 --11 -111 Legend: x = unknown, u = unchanged, – = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by GPIO. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 40 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. NOTES: © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 41 PIC12F683 5.0 TIMER0 MODULE The Timer0 module is an 8-bit timer/counter with the following features: • 8-bit timer/counter register (TMR0) • 8-bit prescaler (shared with Watchdog Timer) • Programmable internal or external clock source • Programmable external clock edge selection • Interrupt on overflow Figure 5-1 is a block diagram of the Timer0 module. 5.1 Timer0 Operation When used as a timer, the Timer0 module can be used as either an 8-bit timer or an 8-bit counter. 5.1.1 8-BIT TIMER MODE When used as a timer, the Timer0 module will increment every instruction cycle (without prescaler). Timer mode is selected by clearing the T0CS bit of the OPTION register to ‘0’. When TMR0 is written, the increment is inhibited for two instruction cycles immediately following the write. 5.1.2 8-BIT COUNTER MODE When used as a counter, the Timer0 module will increment on every rising or falling edge of the T0CKI pin. The incrementing edge is determined by the T0SE bit of the OPTION register. Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit of the OPTION register to ‘1’. FIGURE 5-1: BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE TIMER0/WDT PRESCALER Note: The value written to the TMR0 register can be adjusted, in order to account for the two instruction cycle delay when TMR0 is written. T0CKI T0SE pin TMR0 Watchdog Timer WDT Time-out PS<2:0> WDTE Data Bus Set Flag bit T0IF on Overflow T0CS Note 1: T0SE, T0CS, PSA, PS<2:0> are bits in the OPTION register. 2: SWDTEN and WDTPS<3:0> are bits in the WDTCON register. 3: WDTE bit is in the Configuration Word register. 0 1 0 1 0 1 8 8 8-bit Prescaler 0 1 FOSC/4 PSA PSA PSA 16-bit Prescaler 16 WDTPS<3:0> 31 kHz INTOSC SWDTEN Sync 2 Tcy PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 42 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 5.1.3 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMABLE PRESCALER A single software programmable prescaler is available for use with either Timer0 or the Watchdog Timer (WDT), but not both simultaneously. The prescaler assignment is controlled by the PSA bit of the OPTION register. To assign the prescaler to Timer0, the PSA bit must be cleared to a ‘0’. There are 8 prescaler options for the Timer0 module ranging from 1:2 to 1:256. The prescale values are selectable via the PS<2:0> bits of the OPTION register. In order to have a 1:1 prescaler value for the Timer0 module, the prescaler must be assigned to the WDT module. The prescaler is not readable or writable. When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions writing to the TMR0 register will clear the prescaler. When the prescaler is assigned to WDT, a CLRWDT instruction will clear the prescaler along with the WDT. 5.1.3.1 Switching Prescaler Between Timer0 and WDT Modules As a result of having the prescaler assigned to either Timer0 or the WDT, it is possible to generate an unintended device Reset when switching prescaler values. When changing the prescaler assignment from Timer0 to the WDT module, the instruction sequence shown in Example 5-1, must be executed. EXAMPLE 5-1: CHANGING PRESCALER (TIMER0 → WDT) When changing the prescaler assignment from the WDT to the Timer0 module, the following instruction sequence must be executed (see Example 5-2). EXAMPLE 5-2: CHANGING PRESCALER (WDT → TIMER0) 5.1.4 TIMER0 INTERRUPT Timer0 will generate an interrupt when the TMR0 register overflows from FFh to 00h. The T0IF interrupt flag bit of the INTCON register is set every time the TMR0 register overflows, regardless of whether or not the Timer0 interrupt is enabled. The T0IF bit must be cleared in software. The Timer0 interrupt enable is the T0IE bit of the INTCON register. 5.1.5 USING TIMER0 WITH AN EXTERNAL CLOCK When Timer0 is in Counter mode, the synchronization of the T0CKI input and the Timer0 register is accomplished by sampling the prescaler output on the Q2 and Q4 cycles of the internal phase clocks. Therefore, the high and low periods of the external clock source must meet the timing requirements as shown in the Section 15.0 “Electrical Specifications”. BANKSEL TMR0 ; CLRWDT ;Clear WDT CLRF TMR0 ;Clear TMR0 and ;prescaler BANKSEL OPTION_REG ; BSF OPTION_REG,PSA ;Select WDT CLRWDT ; ; MOVLW b’11111000’ ;Mask prescaler ANDWF OPTION_REG,W ;bits IORLW b’00000101’ ;Set WDT prescaler MOVWF OPTION_REG ;to 1:32 Note: The Timer0 interrupt cannot wake the processor from Sleep since the timer is frozen during Sleep. CLRWDT ;Clear WDT and ;prescaler BANKSEL OPTION_REG ; MOVLW b’11110000’ ;Mask TMR0 select and ANDWF OPTION_REG,W ;prescaler bits IORLW b’00000011’ ;Set prescale to 1:16 MOVWF OPTION_REG ; © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 43 PIC12F683 TABLE 5-1: SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0 REGISTER 5-1: OPTION_REG: OPTION REGISTER R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 R/W-1 GPPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 bit 7 bit 0 Legend: R = Readable bit W = Writable bit U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’ -n = Value at POR ‘1’ = Bit is set ‘0’ = Bit is cleared x = Bit is unknown bit 7 GPPU: GPIO Pull-up Enable bit 1 = GPIO pull-ups are disabled 0 = GPIO pull-ups are enabled by individual PORT latch values in WPU register bit 6 INTEDG: Interrupt Edge Select bit 1 = Interrupt on rising edge of INT pin 0 = Interrupt on falling edge of INT pin bit 5 T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit 1 = Transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (FOSC/4) bit 4 T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit 1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin 0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin bit 3 PSA: Prescaler Assignment bit 1 = Prescaler is assigned to the WDT 0 = Prescaler is assigned to the Timer0 module bit 2-0 PS<2:0>: Prescaler Rate Select bits Note 1: A dedicated 16-bit WDT postscaler is available. See Section 12.6 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)” for more information. Name Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Value on POR, BOR Value on all other Resets TMR0 Timer0 Module Register xxxx xxxx uuuu uuuu INTCON GIE PEIE T0IE INTE GPIE T0IF INTF GPIF 0000 0000 0000 000x OPTION_REG GPPU INTEDG T0CS T0SE PSA PS2 PS1 PS0 1111 1111 1111 1111 TRISIO — — TRISIO5 TRISIO4 TRISIO3 TRISIO2 TRISIO1 TRISIO0 --11 1111 --11 1111 Legend: – = Unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’, u = unchanged, x = unknown. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer0 module. 000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111 1 : 2 1 : 4 1 : 8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 1 : 256 1 : 1 1 : 2 1 : 4 1 : 8 1 : 16 1 : 32 1 : 64 1 : 128 BIT VALUE TIMER0 RATE WDT RATE PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 44 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 6.0 TIMER1 MODULE WITH GATE CONTROL The Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer/counter with the following features: • 16-bit timer/counter register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) • Programmable internal or external clock source • 3-bit prescaler • Optional LP oscillator • Synchronous or asynchronous operation • Timer1 gate (count enable) via comparator or T1G pin • Interrupt on overflow • Wake-up on overflow (external clock, Asynchronous mode only) • Special Event Trigger (with CCP) • Comparator output synchronization to Timer1 clock Figure 6-1 is a block diagram of the Timer1 module. 6.1 Timer1 Operation The Timer1 module is a 16-bit incrementing counter which is accessed through the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair. Writes to TMR1H or TMR1L directly update the counter. When used with an internal clock source, the module is a timer. When used with an external clock source, the module can be used as either a timer or counter. 6.2 Clock Source Selection The TMR1CS bit of the T1CON register is used to select the clock source. When TMR1CS = 0, the clock source is FOSC/4. When TMR1CS = 1, the clock source is supplied externally. FIGURE 6-1: TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM Clock Source TMR1CS FOSC/4 0 T1CKI pin 1 TMR1H TMR1L Oscillator T1SYNC T1CKPS<1:0> Prescaler 1, 2, 4, 8 Synchronize(3) det 1 0 0 1 Synchronized clock input 2 Set flag bit TMR1IF on Overflow TMR1(2) TMR1GE TMR1ON T1OSCEN 1 COUT 0 T1GSS T1GINV To Comparator Module Timer1 Clock TMR1CS OSC2/T1G OSC1/T1CKI Note 1: ST Buffer is low power type when using LP oscillator, or high speed type when using T1CKI. 2: Timer1 register increments on rising edge. 3: Synchronize does not operate while in Sleep. (1) EN INTOSC Without CLKOUT FOSC/4 Internal Clock © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS41211D-page 45 PIC12F683 6.2.1 INTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE When the internal clock source is selected the TMR1H:TMR1L register pair will increment on multiples of TCY as determined by the Timer1 prescaler. 6.2.2 EXTERNAL CLOCK SOURCE When the external clock source is selected, the Timer1 module may work as a timer or a counter. When counting, Timer1 is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock input T1CKI. In addition, the Counter mode clock can be synchronized to the microcontroller system clock or run asynchronously. If an external clock oscillator is needed (and the microcontroller is using the INTOSC without CLKOUT), Timer1 can use the LP oscillator as a clock source. 6.3 Timer1 Prescaler Timer1 has four prescaler options allowing 1, 2, 4 or 8 divisions of the clock input. The T1CKPS bits of the T1CON register control the prescale counter. The prescale counter is not directly readable or writable; however, the prescaler counter is cleared upon a write to TMR1H or TMR1L. 6.4 Timer1 Oscillator A low-power 32.768 kHz crystal oscillator is built-in between pins OSC1 (input) and OSC2 (amplifier output). The oscillator is enabled by setting the T1OSCEN control bit of the T1CON register. The oscillator will continue to run during Sleep. The Timer1 oscillator is shared with the system LP oscillator. Thus, Timer1 can use this mode only when the primary system clock is derived from the internal oscillator or when in LP oscillator mode. The user must provide a software time delay to ensure proper oscillator start-up. TRISIO<5:4> bits are set when the Timer1 oscillator is enabled. GP5 and GP4 bits read as ‘0’ and TRISIO5 and TRISIO4 bits read as ‘1’. 6.5 Timer1 Operation in Asynchronous Counter Mode If control bit T1SYNC of the T1CON register is set, the external clock input is not synchronized. The timer continues to increment asynchronous to the internal phase clocks. The timer will continue to run during Sleep and can generate an interrupt on overflow, which will wake-up the processor. However, special precautions in software are needed to read/write the timer (see Section 6.5.1 “Reading and Writing Timer1 in Asynchronous Counter Mode”). 6.5.1 READING AND WRITING TIMER1 IN ASYNCHRONOUS COUNTER MODE Reading TMR1H or TMR1L while the timer is running from an external asynchronous clock will ensure a valid read (taken care of in hardware). However, the user should keep in mind that reading the 16-bit timer in two 8-bit values itself, poses certain problems, since the timer may overflow between the reads. For writes, it is recommended that the user simply stop the timer and write the desired values. A write contention may occur by writing to the timer registers, while the register is incrementing. This may produce an unpredictable value in the TMR1H:TTMR1L register pair. 6.6 Timer1 Gate Timer1 gate source is software configurable to be the T1G pin or the output of the Comparator. This allows the device to directly time external events using T1G or analog events using Comparator 2. See the CMCON1 register (Register 8-2) for selecting the Timer1 gate source. This feature can simplify the software for a Delta-Sigma A/D converter and many other applications. For more information on Delta-Sigma A/D converters, see the Microchip web site (www.microchip.com). Timer1 gate can be inverted using the T1GINV bit of the T1CON register, whether it originates from the T1G pin or Comparator 2 output. This configures Timer1 to measure either the active-high or active-low time between events. Note: In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge. Note: The oscillator requires a start-up and stabilization time before use. Thus, T1OSCEN should be set and a suitable delay observed prior to enabling Timer1. Note: When switching from synchronous to asynchronous operation, it is possible to skip an increment. When switching from asynchronous to synchronous operation, it is possible to produce a single spurious increment. Note: TMR1GE bit of the T1CON register must be set to use either T1G or COUT as the Timer1 gate source. See Register 8-2 for more information on selecting the Timer1 gate source. PIC12F683 DS41211D-page 46 © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. 6.7 Timer1 Interrupt The Timer1 register pair (